MARINE   ALG/E   OF   BEAUFORT,   N.   C.,  AND 
ADJACENT   REGIONS     :     :     :     :     :     By  W.  D.  Hoyt 

From   BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES,  Vol.  XXXVI,  1917-18 
Document  No.  886     :     :     :     :     :     :     :     :     :     :     :     :     :     :  Issued  December  30,  1920 


PRICE,  75  CENTS 
Sold  only  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  Government  Printing  Office,  Washington,  D.  C. 


WASHINGTON 


GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 


FOREWORD. 

J* 

The  accompanying  report  by  Prof.  W.  D.  Hoyt  is  one  of  a  series  relating  to  the 
aquatic  resources  of  the  region  adjacent  to  the  biological  station  of  the  Bureau  of  Fish- 
eries at  Beaufort,  N.  C.  This  work  comprises  a  scientific  account  of  the  marine  algae, 
commonly  known  as  seaweeds,  and  is  based  on  prolonged  studies  at  the  Beaufort  station. 
The  report  is  necessarily  technical,  but  the  author  has  endeavored  to  make  it  generally 
useful  and  has  made  the  identification  of  the  species  clear  by  means  of  illustrations  and 
simple  keys.  The  result  is  a  serviceable  handbook  for  those  who,  for  one  reason  or 
another,  have  occasion  to  identify  the  seaweeds. 

The  question  may  be  asked,  Why  should  the  Bureau  of  Fisheries  be  interested  in 
marine  algae?  Excluding  purely  scientific  considerations,  there  may  be  recalled  the 
well-known  fact  that  all  animals  depend  on  plants  for  food,  and  this  is  as  true  of  water 
animals  as  of  land  animals.  It  matters  not  if  a  particular  fish  confines  its  diet  to  smaller 
fish  or  other  animals  rather  than  to  plants.  These  smaller  forms  must  feed  upon  some- 
thing. At  the  end  of  the  chain  in  every  case  there  are  plants  of  one  kind  or  another,  all 
engaged  as  busy  little  factories  for  the  manufacture  of  food  for  fishes  out  of  the  inorganic 
materials  which  are  otherwise  useless  or  unavailable  to  fish.  If  we  value  fish  and 
shellfish,  we  must  be  interested  in  the  sources  of  their  food ;  that  is  to  say,  in  the  seaweeds 
as  well  as  in  the  innumerable  minute  plants  of  the  sea  and  its  bottom  which  do  not  come 
within  the  scope  of  this  report. 

It  should  not  be  overlooked  that  seaweeds  have  a  direct  economic  importance.  On 
other  parts  of  the  United  States  coasts,  and  more  particularly  in  other  countries,  algae 
are  used  in  the  natural  state  as  food  or  as  the  basis  for  the  preparation  of  food  articles, 
such  as  gelatins.  They  constitute  the  raw  materials  from  which  are  derived  valuable 
commercial  products,  such  as  agar-agar,  essential  in  bacteriological  work;  iodine,  one 
of  the  most  useful  of  all  medical  bases;  and  potash,  a  highly  prized  fertilizer. 

The  present  report  could  not  enter  into  a  discussion  of  these  economic  relations,  but 
it  contributes  the  foundation  of  knowledge  as  to  what  the  waters  of  the  South  Atlantic 
coast  have  in  the  way  of  algae.  It  has  been  the  labor  of  years,  and,  while  the  cost  to  the 
Government  has  been  nominal,  the  results  are  of  permanent  value,  especially  in  view 
of  the  fact  that  the  algae  of  the  region  have  remained  almost  unknown. 

It  has  not  been  possible  for  the  author  to  consult  every  publication  cited,  and  he 
has  not  had  access  to  the  type  specimens  of  many  of  the  species.  Additional  species  will 
undoubtedly  be  found  from  time  to  time.  These  considerations,  however,  do  not 
detract  from  the  importance  of  the  work. 

H.  M.  SMITH, 
Commissioner  of  Fisheries. 
368 


CONTENTS. 


Page 

Foreword 368 

Introduction 371 

Part  I.  General  account  of  the  region 375 

Location  and  description  of  Beaufort  Harbor 37,5 

General  account  of  the  algae 379 

Flora  of  Beaufort  Harbor 382 

Flora  of  coral  reefs 383 

Flora  of  Bogue  Beach 384 

Conditions  at  Beaufort,  N.  C 384 

Harbor 384 

Temperature 384 

Light 385 

Salt  content  of  water 388 

Turbidity 389 

Movements  of  water 389 

Habitats 390 

Coral  reef '. 390 

Distribution  of  algae  at  Beaufort 391 

Regional 391 

Seasonal 391 

Vertical 396 

Horizontal 399 

Other  localities 402 

Methods  for  collecting  and  preserving  algae. . . .., 403 

Economic  uses  of  algae 405 

Part  II.  Systematic  account  of  the  algae 406 

Identification  of  algae 406 

Classification  and  description  of  species 407 

Tables 529 

Artificial  key  to  genera 533 

Bibliography 539 

Glossary 548 

Explanation  of  plates 554 

Index I 

369 


MARINE  ALG/E  OF  BEAUFORT,  N.  C.(  AND  ADJACENT  REGIONS. 


By  W.  D.  HOYT, 
Professor  of  Biology,  Washington  and  Lee  University,  Lexington,  Va. 


Contribution  from  the  United  States  Fisheries  Biological  Station,  Beaufort,  N.  C. 


INTRODUCTION. 

It  has  generally  been  believed  that  the  greater  part  of  our  Atlantic'  coast  is  barren 
in  respect  to  an  algal  flora.  Although  a  number  of  species  have  been  recorded  from 
Norfolk,  Va.,  and  Charleston,  S.  C.,  and  a  few  isolated  collections  have  been  made  at 
points  in  North  Carolina  and  elsewhere,  Johnson  (1900)  recording  between  25  and  30 
species  for  Beaufort,  it  has  generally  been  held  that  from  Long  Island  Sound  to  Florida 
few  individuals  or  species  of  algae  are  to  be  found.  The  reason  usually  assigned  for 
this  sterility  has  been  the  supposed  lack  of  places  suitable  for  attachment  afforded  by 
the  sandy  coast  of  this  region.  While  this  belief  is  justified  for  the  greater  part  of  the 
area,  the  present  studies  have  shown  that  it  is  not  warranted  for  the  entire  region. 
One  hundred  and  forty-two  species  and  varieties  have  been  observed  here  by  the 
author,  all  but  10  of  these  being  found  at  Beaufort.  While  this  number  is  not  large 
compared  with  525  recorded  for  New  England  and  744  reported  for  Great  Britain,  a 
single  locality  yielding  132  species  and  varieties  can  not  be  called  barren. 

The  area  included  in  these  studies  extends  from  Ocracoke,  N.  C.,  to  Tybee,  Ga. 
(lat.  from  35  to  32°  N.,  map  i),  but  by  far  the  greatest  part  of  the  work  was  done  at 
Beaufort,  N.  C.  (lat.  34°  43'  N.),  only  occasional  visits  being  made  to  other  localities. 
Studies  in  the  region  of  Beaufort  were  made  at  the  United  States  Fisheries  Biological 
Station  at  that  place  from  June  or  July  to  September  or  October  during  the  years 
1903-1909.  Trips  of  a  few  days'  duration  were  made  to  Beaufort  by  the  author  in 
May,  1907,  and  April,  1908,  and  monthly  collections  of  all  species  observed  were  made 
by  the  laboratory  staff  from  November,  1908,  to  June,  1909.  Visits  to  regions  other 
than  Beaufort  were  made,  as  follows:  Ocracoke,  N.  C.,  August,  1907;  Wrightsville 
Beach,  N.  C.,  July,  August,  and  September,  1909;  Southport,  N.  C.,  Georgetown, 
S.  C.,  and  Pawley's  Island  (near  Georgetown),  August,  1909;  Charleston,  S.  C.,  July 
and  August,  1909;  Port  Royal,  S.  C.,  and  Tybee,  Ga.,  August,  1909.  In  addition  to 
these  algae,  the  author  has  studied  two  small  but  interesting  collections  made  by  Lewis 
Radcliffe  on  the  coral  reefs  offshore  from  Beaufort  in  August,  1914,  and  several  collec- 
tions made  offshore  in  this  region,  principally  in  the  vicinity  of  the  coral  reef,  by  the 
Fish  Hawk,  in  July  and  August,  1915. 


372 


BULLETIN   OP  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 


MARINE   ALGM   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  373 

In  the  preparation  of  the  present  report  three  objects  have  been  kept  in  view: 
(i)  Only  occasional  collections  have  previously  been  made  on  the  coast  of  our  southern 
States.  While  the  algal  flora  of  New  England  and  Long  Island  has  been  studied  with 
some  thoroughness  and  the  Florida  coast  has  received  considerable  attention,  the  area 
between  these  regions  has  been  almost  untouched  in  recent  years.  Although  the  present 
work  makes  no  pretense  of  being  a  taxonomic  contribution,  the  effort  has  been  made 
to  present  as  complete  an  account  as  possible  of  the  algal  flora  of  the  region,  with 
remarks  on  species  affording  interesting  comparisons  with  the  same  species  found  in 
other  regions.  (2)  Little  is  known  of  the  conditions  of  algal  growth  and  of  the  factors 
limiting  their  distribution  in  space  and  in  time.  Notes  have  been  made  on  the  con- 
ditions observed  at  Beaufort,  and  some  interesting  effects  of  these  conditions  have 
been  recorded.  It  would  be  desirable  to  have  a  detailed  and  thorough  study  of  the  con- 
ditions made  here. .  (3)  No  work  suitable  for  American  collectors  who  are  not  trained 
students  of  algae  has  appeared  in  recent  years,  and  no  such  work  has  ever  been  written  for 
the  algse  of  our  southern  coast.  Although  this  lack  has  been  partly  filled  by  Collins's  ex- 
cellent treatment  of  the  Chlorophyceae  (1909,  1912,  1918)  and  key  (igiSa)  and  Miss  Til- 
den's  work  on  the  Myxophycese  of  North  America  (1910) ,  the  need  still  exists  for  a  special 
account  of  the  algae  of  this  region.  With  this  object  in  mind,  the  present  report  has 
been  written  as  simply  as  possible.  Technical  terms  have  been  avoided  whenever  the 
meaning  could  be  expressed  otherwise  without  too. great  circumlocution  and  without 
sacrifice  of  accuracy.  Nearly  every  species  has  been  illustrated  by  a  photograph  or 
drawing,  since  an  illustration  will  often  give,  to  one  not  a  special  student  of  the  algae 
and  even  to  the  trained  algologist,  a  better  idea  of  the  species  than  pages  of  description. 
Two  keys  have  been  prepared,  one  (an  artificial  key  to  genera)  based  as  far  as  possible 
on  superficial,  easily  observed  characters,  the  other  (a  natural  key  to  divisions,  orders, 
etc.)  showing  the  diagnostic  characters  which  warrant  the  placing  of  the  different  forms 
in  their  respective  groups. 

All  photographs  and,  except  where  otherwise  stated,  all  drawings  are  original, 
nearly  all  the  photographs  being  made  from  living  plants  arid  all  the  drawings  being 
made  with  a  camera  lucida.  In  the  descriptions  of  the  various  groups  and  in  the 
natural  key  free  use  has  been  made  of  current  works,  especially  those  of  Engler  and 
Prantl  (1897-1911),  De  Toni  (1889-1907),  and  Collins  (1909,  1912).  The  descriptions 
of  the  species,  however,  are  based  in  part  on  specimens  observed  by  the  author,  includ- 
ing those  found  at  Beaufort  and  those  in  American  herbaria  which  were  accessible  to 
him.  In  using  the  artificial  key  to  genera  and  the  keys  to  species,  it  should  be  borne 
in  mind  that  these  have  been  prepared  for  the  particular  genera  and  species  mentioned 
in  this  work,  and  if  used  for  algae  of  other  regions  may  lead  the  student  astray.  Even 
in  this  region  these  keys  may  cause  confusion  if  genera  and  species  other  than  those 
mentioned  should  be  found.  A  collector  should,  therefore,  always  carefully  compare 
his  specimens  with  the  descriptions  before  venturing  to  assign  them  names.  The  gross 
measurements  of  the  size  of  species  should  not  be  taken  too  strictly,  the  figures  given 
being  the  limits  of  specimens  observed  by  the  author  or  for  which  a  record  has  been  seen. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  descriptions  of  many  of  the  species  are  incomplete  in 
that  no  mention  is  made  of  male  plants  or  organs.  This  "is  due  to  our  imperfect 
knowledge  of  these  plants,  since,  partly  because  of  their  inconspicuousness  and  partly 
because  of  their  greater  scarcity,  male  plants  and  organs  have  been  studied  much  less 


374  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

than  have  the  other  forms  of  plants  and  organs  of  reproduction.  Svedelius  (1908,  1912) 
has  shown  that,  in  Martensia  and  Delesseria  sanguined,  the  male  plants  have  an  exceed- 
ingly short  duration,  in  the  latter  species  not  more  than  one  month.  Miss  Dunn  (1917) 
has  called  attention  to  the  fact  that,  in  Dumontia  filiformis  on  the  coast  of  Maine,  the 
male  plants  are  found  only  during  a  few  weeks  in  the  spring.  A  similar  scarcity  of 
male  plants  has  been  observed  by  the  author  for  many  species  at  Beaufort.  In  spite 
of  extensive  searches  for  them,  no  male  plant  of  Gracilaria  confervoides  has  been 
observed,  and  none  of  Gracilaria  multipartita  has  been  found  in  the  harbor;  only  one 
male  plant  of  Hypnea  has  been  found  among  the  hundreds  examined ;  and  male  plants 
of  Chondria  are  rare.  Many  other  instances  of  the  same  kind  might  be  given.  While 
further  search  might  show  these  to  be  more  abundant  than  is  indicated  here,  it  seems 
to  be  true  that,  with  the  exception  of  a  few  species,  male  plants  and  organs  are  much 
scarcer  than  are  the  other  forms  of  plants  and  organs.  Because  of  this  fact,  anyone 
finding  male  plants  or  organs  of  a  species  in  which  they  are  not  described  in  this  work, 
should  save  these  for  study,  or  should  send  them  to  some  other  student  of  the  algae. 

Among  the  Phaeophyceae  and  Rhodophyceae  all  determinations  have,  as  far  as 
possible,  been  verified  by  comparison  with  type  or  authentic  material.  Among  the 
Myxophyceae  the  determinations  have  been  made  entirely  and  among  the  Chlorophyceae 
they  have  been  made  largely  by  Mr.  Frank  S.  Collins.  Under  each  species  references  are 
given  to  the  original  place  of  publication;  to  the  most  recent  general  account  of  the 
algae,  the  Sylloge  Algarum  of  De  Toni  (1889-1907);  and  to  the  works  of  Harvey  (1852- 
1858),  Farlow  (1882),  Collins  (1909,  1912,  1918),  and  Miss  Tilden  (1910),  these  being  the 
publications  of  a  more  or  less  general  nature  dealing  with  North  American  algae.  In  a 
few  cases  other  references  of  special  interest  are  given.  Citations  are  given,  also,  to  the 
two  principal  sets  of  American  algae,  the  Algae  Americanae  Boreales  Exsiccatae  (A.  A.  B. 
Ex.)  of  Farlow,  Anderson,  and  Eaton,  and  the  Phycotheca  Boreali-Americana  (P.  B.-A.) 
of  Collins,  Holden,  and  Setchell.  With  some  exceptions,  where  the  works  cited  were  not 
available,  all  references  have  been  verified.  The  arrangement  used  follows,  in  most 
respects,  that  of  Engler  and  Prantl  (1897-1911),°  except  in  the  Chlorophyceae,  where 
Collins  (1909,  1912,  1918)  has  been  followed.  The  system  of  nomenclature  follows  the 
Vienna  and  Brussels  rules  except  in  the  naming  of  the  divisions,  where  Chlorophyceae, 
etc.,  have  been  used.  The  retention  of  these  names  seems  justified  by  usage,  conven- 
ience, and  uniformity,  and,  although  not  yet  acted  upon  by  any  congress,  seems  to 
come  under  the  principles  of  nomina  conservanda. 

Those  wishing  to  know  more  than  is  given  here  about  the  structure  of  the  algae 
mentioned  should  consult  Oltmanns  (1904-5)  and  Engler  and  Prantl  (1897-1911),  where 
are  summed  up  the  main  facts  about  the  structure  of  algae  known  at  the  time  of  their 
publication. 

A  work  of  the  present  nature  necessarily  has  a  limited  usefulness  and  should  be 
replaced  by  an  account  of  the  algae  of  our  entire  coast.  If  the  present  report  contributes 
toward  the  preparation  of  the  larger  work  and  serves  in  the  meantime  to  forward  the 
study  of  the  algae  of  our  Atlantic  coast,  it  will  have  served  its  purpose. 

o  While  this  arrangement  is  inconsistent  and  apparently  wrong  in  many  respects,  we  have  not  yet  sufficient  knowledge  to  war- 
rant a  complete  revision,  and  must,  accordingly,  use  it  until  we  obtain  more  information  about  the  life  histories  and  structures  of 
the  various  groups  of  algae. 


MARINE   ALGsE   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  375 

The  author  takes  pleasure  in  acknowledging  his  indebtedness  to  those  who  have 
helped  him  in  the  present  study.  To  Frank  S.  Collins,  North  Eastham,  Mass.,  and  to 
Dr.  Marshall  A.  Howe,  the  New  York  Botanical  Garden,  he  is  especially  indebted  for 
assistance  in  the  determination  of  species  given  throughout  the  progress  of  this  work 
and  for  much  helpful  advice  and  information  about  the  distribution  of  species  and  about 
doubtful  points.  He  is  indebted  to  Dr.  N.  L.  Britton  for  facilities  for  studying  the  algae 
in  the  New  York  Botanical  Garden  and  for  the  use  of  Plates  CXV-CXIX,  and  to  other 
members  of  the  staff  of  this  institution  for  assistance  during  his  work  in  the  library  there. 
To  Prof.  W.  G.  Farlow,  Harvard  University,  he  is  indebted  for  assistance  in  the  determi- 
nation of  species  and  for  the  privilege  of  studying  the  algae  in  his  herbarium;  to  Prof. 
D.  S.  Johnson,  the  Johns  Hopkins  University,  for  facilities  of  laboratory  and  library 
furnished  for  the  study  of  the  Beaufort  algae;  to  Mrs.  Margaret  H.  Y.  Hoyt,  for  assistance 
with  the  drawings  used  in  this  work  and  with  the  preparation  of  the  manuscript.  To 
all  of  these  and  to  others  who  have  helped  him  in  various  ways  the  author  wishes  to 
express  his  grateful  appreciation  of  their  assistance. 

PART  I.     GENERAL  ACCOUNT  OF  THE  REGION. 
LOCATION  AND  DESCRIPTION  OF  BEAUFORT  HARBOR. 

The  town  of  Beaufort  lies  at  latitude  34°  43'  N.,  longitude  76°  40'  W.,  about  19  km. 
(12  miles)  northwest  from  Cape  Lookout  and  120  km.  (75  miles)  southwest  of  Cape 
Hatteras.  (See  map  2.)  South  and  west  of  the  town  stretches  the  harbor,  a  large  body 
of  water  communicating  with  the  ocean  by  a  wide  inlet  between  Shackleford  Banks  and 
Bogue  Banks.  From  the  harbor  near  this  inlet  extend  Bogue  Sound  to  the  west  and 
Back  Sound  to  the  east,  separating  the  mainland  from  Bogue  Banks  and  Shackleford 
Banks,  respectively.  Extending  northwest  from  Beaufort  Harbor  lies  the  body  of  water 
known  as  Newport  River,  with  several  creeks,  receiving  frequent  inflows  of  fresh  water. 
A  somewhat  similar  body  of  water  extends  northward  from  Back  Sound.  The  bottom 
throughout  this  region  is  composed  of  sand,  mud,  or  shells,  and  offers  no  conditions 
favorable  for  the  growth  of  algae. 

The  beaches  of  Bogue  and  Shackleford  Banks  are  flat,  sandy  stretches.  Shackle- 
ford  Beach  and  the  greater  part  of  Bogue  Beach  are  destitute  of  algae.  Algae  are,  how- 
ever, frequently  found  on  Bogue  Beach  for  a  distance  of  about  1.6  km.  (i  mile)  west  from 
the  inlet.  Here,  after  storms,  are  found  great  masses  of  algae  washed  on  the  beach  or 
lying  in  the  water  along  the  shore.  Many  of  the  plants  found  here,  in  all  likelihood,  have 
been  carried  out  from  the  harbor  by  the  receding  tide ;  others  have  almost  certainly  been 
washed  in  from  the  coral  reefs  lying  offshore,  since  several  species  found  elsewhere  only 
on  the  beach  were  dredged  from  these  coral  reefs;  while  a  few  species,  represented  only 
by  specimens  from  Bogue  Beach,  may  have  come  from  points  farther  south,  some  of 
these  being  unknown  elsewhere  north  of  Florida  or  the  West  Indies,  and  possibly  being 
brought  here  by  the  Gulf  Stream  from  that  region  or  from  some  of  the  intermediate 
submerged  coral  reefs.0 

a  While  species  found  only  on  the  beach  can  not  strictly  be  included  in  the  flora  of  Beaufort,  they  are  treated  as  a  part  of  the 
algae  of  this  region.  This  has  seemed  proper,  since  it  is  very  probable  that  some  of  these  have  come  from  the  coral  reefs  offshore, 
and  it  is  impossible  to  distinguish  between  the  species  that  come  from  these  reefs  and  those  that  are  brought  from  other  regions. 
Moreover,  in  view  of  the  algae  found  on  these  reefs,  it  is  unsafe  to  assume  that  any  species  observed  in  this  region  has  come  from  a 
more  distant  point.  Such  species  may  be  found  at  any  time  by  collectors  here  or  at  other  places,  and  it  is  entirely  possible  that 
some  of  these,  even  if  they  do  not  now  occur  at  Beaufort,  may  establish  themselves  here,  either  in  the  harbor  or  on  the  coral  reefs 
offshore.  These  species  are  included  in  the  total  number  given  for  the  region,  but  are  enumerated  in  a  separate  list. 


376 


BULLETIN   OP  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 


MARINE   AL,GM   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  377 

Hourly  observations  of  the  current  were  made  by  the  U.  S.  Coast  and  Geodetic 
Survey  on  Cape  Lookout  Shoals  Light  Vessel  from  June  7  to  September  i ,  1912.  These 
showed  that,  at  this  place,  the  mean  current,  freed  from  tidal  influence,  flowed  S.  87°  E. 
with  a  velocity  of  723  m.  per  hour  (0.39  knot)  from  June  7  to  July  5,  and  N.  85°  E.  with 
a  velocity  of  i  .372  km.  per  hour  (0.74  knot)  from  July  6  to  September  i .  From  this  it 
appears  that  the  Gulf  Stream,  following  the  general  direction  of  the  coast,  has  its  western 
edge,  on  an  average,  during  the  summer  season,  somewhat  westward  from  Cape  Look- 
out Shoals  Light  Vessel  (see  map  3),  and  about  55  km.  (30  nautical  miles)  offshore 
from  Beaufort  Inlet.  No  observations  have  been  made  for  this  region  at  other  times 
of  the  year,  but  the  exact  location  of  the  Gulf  Stream  will,  of  course,  vary  consider- 
ably at  different  seasons  and  even  on  different  days  of  the  same  season,  depending  on 
the  direction  and  strength  of  the  wind. 

Lying  offshore  are  a  number  of  submerged  coral  reefs  (see  map  3)  which  offer  some 
of  the  most  interesting  conditions  found  in  this  region.  These  have  been  described 
by  Radcliffe  (1914).  The  outer  reefs  lie  from  about  29  to  39  km.  (16  to  21  nautical 
miles)  offshore  at  a  depth  of  24  to  28.8  m.  (13.25  to  16  fathoms),  while  the  two  inner 
ones  lie,  respectively,  about  3.3  and  6.5  km.  (1.8  and  3.5  nautical  miles)  offshore  at  a 
depth  of  8  to  13.5  m.  (4.5  to  7.5  fathoms).  The  largest  of  these,  the  "Fishing  Grounds," 
was  visited  by  the  author  on  board  the  Fish  Hawk  in  May,  1907,  two  days  being  spent 
there  and  22  hauls  being  made  with  the  dredge  over  the  entire  observed  reef.  This 
lies  about  39  km.  (21  nautical  miles)  offshore,  about  22  km.  (12  nautical  miles)  inshore 
from  the  average  summer  location  of  the  western  edge  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  at  a  depth 
of  24  to  25.5  m.  (13.25  to  14  fathoms).  At  the  time  of  this  visit  the  observed  length 
was  about  1.85  km.  (i  nautical  mile)  and  the  observed  width  was  about  900  m.  (0.5 
nautical  mile).  Observations  made  by  Radcliffe  in  the  summer  of  1914  indicate, 
however,  that  this  reef  is  many  times  larger  than  was  previously  known.  It  is  now 
believed  to  include  Station  No.  .1  (see  map  3)  extending  many  kilometers  in  the 
direction  of  New  River  Inlet  and  being  several  kilometers  wide.  The  lower  part  is 
composed  of  old,  dead  coral  masses,  hard  and  densely  packed,  with  the  surface  fairly 
smooth,  forming  a  sort  of  coral  rock,  penetrated  and  honeycombed  by  numerous 
worms  and  molluscs.  On  and  in  this  substratum  were  found  many  hydro  ids,  corals, 
sponges,  Gorgonias,  Echinoderms,  Lamellibranch  molluscs,  Crustacea,  worms  and 
Ascidians,  together  with  numerous  algae.  Over  the  reef  swam  abundant  fish,  mainly 
sea  bass  (Centropristes  striatus),  the  sailors  catching  these  as  fast  as  they  could  pull 
them  in.  The  bottom  around  the  reef  was  composed  of  sand  and  broken  coral,  and, 
except  for  one  large,  apparently  unattached  mass  of  Zonaria  ftava,  all  signs  of  life 
(including  the  fish)  ceased  as  soon  as  its  border  was  passed.  Although  living  coral 
was  abundant  on  top  of  the  reef,  there  was  no  evidence  that  this  is  growing  toward  the 
surface,  the  depths  recorded  on  the  four  visits  made  by  the  Fish  Hawk  to  this  place  in 
1902,  1907,  1913,  and  1914  being  almost  identical. 

Some  observations  made  by  Radcliffe  on  board  the  Fish  Hawk  in  the  summers  of 
1913  and  1914  disclose  interesting  conditions  in  the  vicinity  of  this  reef.  Other  reefs 
seem  to  be  present  at  various  points  along  the  shore,  and  coral  and  algae  were  found 
abundantly.  Over  considerable  areas  at  many  points  offshore  the  bottom  seemed 
smooth  and  hard — apparently  consisting  of  rock  as  smooth  as  a  floor — and  bore 
scattered  specimens  of  algae.  Offshore  from  New  River  Inlet  there  was  found  an 


378 


BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 


abundance  of  Dictyopteris  polypodioides  growing  in  scattered  patches  separated  by 
sand.  This  growth  was  observed  partially  covering  the  bottom  over  an  area  extending 
at  least  22  km.  (12  nautical  miles)  alongshore  eastward  from  the  inlet,  and  from  near 
the  shore  to  at  least  13  km.  (7  nautical  miles)  offshore,  at  a  depth  of  5.8  to  n.6  m. 
(3  to  6  fathoms).  The  actual  area  occupied  by  this  growth  was  certainly  larger  than 
this,  since  the  inner  limit  was  nearer  the  shore  than  the  vessel  could  approach,  and  the 
outer  limit  was  in  water  too  deep  for  observation.  Moreover,  it  was  found  in  abundance 


MAP.  3.— Location  of  known  "fishing  grounds,"  mostly  submerged  coral  reefs,  offshore  from  the  region  of  Beaufort,  N.  C. 
(From  Raddiffe,  1914.)  The  largest  of  these,  the  "  Fishing  Grounds,"  is  larger  than  shown  here,  extending  from  New  River 
Inlet  and  probably  including  Station  No.  i .  Algae  referred  to  as  coming  from  coral  reef  offshore  were  gathered  from  this  reef. 

in  July,  1915,  offshore  from  Browns  Inlet,  about  25  km.  (16  miles)  northeast  of  New 
River  Inlet  (toward  Beaufort),  and  it  may  extend  westward  also  from  New  River 
Inlet.  Its  presence  here  is  in  striking  contrast  to  the  barren  bottom  observed  at  other 
inlets  and  along  most  of  the  shore  and  raises  an  interesting  question  as  to  the  sub- 
stratum to  which  it  is  attached.  This  must  be  something  other  than  sand,  but  its 
nature  was  not  determined.  That  rock  of  some  sort  is  present  over  considerable  portions 
of  the  bottom  is  indicated,  however,  by  the  observations  of  Radcliffe  mentioned  above 
and  by  the  further  fact  that  there  was  evidence  of  corals  and  algae  on  the  bottom  in 
the  Gulf  Stream  about  70  km.  (38  nautical  miles)  offshore  at  a  depth  of  about  115  m. 
(60  fathoms). 


MARINE   ALG^B  OP  BEAUFORT,  N.  C. 


379 


Similar  "fishing  grounds"  occur  off  other  portions  of  our  coast.  To  the  south  of 
this  region  there  are  listed  by  Goode  and  associates  (1887,  pp.  53-55,  chart  15)  13 
fishing  grounds  off  the  coast  of  South  Carolina,  3  off  the  coast  of  Georgia,  and  i  off  the 
northern  coast  of  Florida.  These  lie  at  various  distances  from  the  shore  at  depths  of 
13-5  to  35.7  m.  (7  to  18  fathoms)  and  have  sizes  varying  from  a  reef  about  800  m. 
(0.5  mile)  square  to  a  circular  one  having  a  diameter  of  u  to  16  km.  (7  to  10  miles). 
The  bottoms  are  variously  described  as  consisting  of  rock,  limerock,  coral  rock,  coral, 
shells,  or  sand,  and  all  are  said  to  bear  gorgonian  corals  and  sponges.  Under  these 
conditions  we  can  be  sure  that  algae  also  occur  there. 

To  the  north  of  Beaufort,  rocks  are  said  to  occur  off  the  coast  of  Virginia,  and 
fishing  grounds  with  rocky  or  sandy  bottoms  are  listed  by  Goode  and  associates  (1887, 
pp.  46-51,  charts  12-13)  off  the  coasts  of  Delaware,  New  Jersey,  and  the  south  shore 
of  Long  Island,  connecting  with  those  off  the  coast  of  New  England. 

These  conditions — the  existence  of  a  fairly  continuous  line  of  submerged  rocky 
reefs  extending  from  subtropical  to  cold  northern  waters,  the  subtropical  nature  of 
the  flora  found  on  the  reefs  offshore  from  Beaufort,  the  apparent  existence  of  algae 
and  corals  on  the  bottom  in  the  Gulf  Stream,  together  with  the  northern  course  of  this 
stream — seem  to  furnish  excellent  means  for  subtropical  species  of  plants  and  animals 
to  travel  up  our  coast.  Such  species  can  live  offshore  in  water  warmed  by  the  Gulf 
Stream,  and,  if  the  local  conditions  permit,  may  establish  themselves  temporarily  or 
permanently  on  the  mainland.  These  facts  probably  explain  the  occurrence  of  several 
of  the  species  found  in  Beaufort  Harbor  and  probably  account  for  all  the  species  found 
on  the  beach. 

It  would  be  interesting  to  discover  how  far  north  of  Beaufort  subtropical  species 
may  occur.  A  thorough  survey  of  these  reefs,  including  their  geology,  oceanographical 
conditions,  flora  and  fauna,  would  undoubtedly  yield  facts  of  great  interest  and 
importance. 

GENERAL  ACCOUNT  OF  THE  ALG^E. 

The  intermediate  location  of  this  region  gives  a  flora  of  considerable  interest, 
containing  both  northern  and  southern  elements,  with  southern  species  predominating. 
Considering  the  flora  as  a  whole,  of  the  142  recognizable  species  and  varieties  recorded, 
133  have  been  obtained  in  proper  condition  and  amount  for  determination.  Of  this 
number,  62  (46.6  per  cent)  are  found  in  New  England,  and  91  (68.4  per  cent)  are  known 
to  occur  in  the  Florida-West  Indies  region.  In  the  different  divisions  the  relative 
numbers  are  as  follows : 


Division. 

Species  and  varieties  of  algae  identified  in  Beaufort  region. 

Total. 

Recorded  for— 

New  Englafld. 

Florida-  West  Indies. 

Number. 

10 

25 

27 

Percent." 

7-5 
18.8 
20.3 
53-4 

Number. 
7 

12 
12 

31 

Per  cent.  & 
70.0 
48.0 

44-4 
43-7 

Number. 
8 
11 
13 

49 

Percent.* 
80.0 
84.0 

1; 

Rhodophyceae  

Per  cent  of  total  number  identified  in  Beaufort  region. 

Per  cent  of  total  number  in  the  division  identified  in  Beaufort  region. 


380  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 

Of  the  84  genera  found  in  the  Beaufort  region,  24  genera  and  46  species  reach  here 
their  northern  known  limit  on  our  coast  (Tables  5,7),  while  4  genera  and  9  species  reach 
their  southern  known  limit  in  this  region  (Tables  6,  7).  Furthermore,  20  species  not 
previously  recorded  for  North  America  have  been  found,  1 1  of  these  being  new.  Of  the 
133  identified  species  and  varieties,  78  (58.6  per  cent)  are*  recorded  for  Europe,  and  41 
(30.8  per  cent)  for  the  Pacific  coast  of  North  America. 

The  46  species  reaching  their  northern  limit  here  (Table  5)  have  been  found  as 
follows : 

Growing  in  Beaufort  Harbor 16 

Growing  only  on  coral  reef 16 

Found  only  on  Bogue  Beach n 

Known  only  from  other  localities 3 

The  9  species  reaching  their  southern  limit  here  (Table  6)  have  been  found  as 
follows : 

Growing  in  Beaufort  Harbor 7 

Growing  only  on  coral  reef i 

Known  only  from  other  localities fc i 

The  20  species  which  are  new  to  North  America  (Table  7)  have  been  found  as 
follows : 

Growing  in  Beaufort  Harbor ". 6 

Growing  only  on  coral  reefs 12 

Found  only  on  Bogue  Beach i 

Known  only  from  other  localities i 

The  most  striking  characteristic  of  the  flora  is  the  preponderance  of  red  and  the 
paucity  of  blue-green  algae.  The  large  number  of  red  algae  indicates  the  southern 
relationship  of  the  flora;  but  here  also  is  found  a  large  northern  element,  as  was  shown 
above.  The  small  number  of  blue-green  algae  is  not  easily  explained.  At  other  places 
the  number  is  probably  greater  than  is  indicated  here;  indeed,  the  author  saw  large 
masses  of  undetermined  Myxophyceae  covering  the  rocks  of  a  jetty  near  Georgetown,  S.  C. 
At  Ocracoke,  N.  C.,  also  there  were  observed  masses  of  blue-green  algae  densely  covering 
the  ocean  beach  just  beyond  the  high-tide  line  for  many  square  meters  and  covering  the 
wharf  piles  between  tide  lines.  The  number  of  species  found  in  these  places  was  not 
large,  but  other  species  may  have  been  present.  At  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  however,  although 
one  species  (Lyngbya  confervoides)  is  very  abundant,  covering  walls  and  jetties  for 
considerable  areas  between  tide  lines,  repeated  careful  searches  have  failed  to  discover 
any  other  species  in  abundance  and  have  yielded  a  total  of  only  five  species  growing  in 
the  harbor. 

The  relative  richness,  in  other  respects,  of  the  Beaufort  flora  as  compared  with  the 
flora  of  other  localities  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  of  the  142  species  and  varieties  recorded 
for  the  region  132  were  found  at  this  place.  While  a  part  of  this  numerical  preponder- 
ance is  undoubtedly  due  to  the  fact  that  Beaufort  has  been  studied  more  thoroughly 
than  other  localities,  a  large  part  is  due  to  an  actually  greater  richness  of  the  flora  of 
this  region.  At  no  other  locality  has  the  author  found  anything  to  approach  the  number 
of  individuals  or  of  species  that  may  be  observed  at  Beaufort  on  a  single  collecting  trip 
at  any  time  during  the  summer. 


MARINE   ALG^B   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  381 

The  124  identified  species  and  varieties  recorded  for  Beaufort  have  been  found  as 
follows : 


Number. 

Per  cent. 

Growing  in  the  harbor  (Table  i)  

62.1 

20 

Occurring  only  on  Bogue  Beach  (Table  3)  

18 

As  with  other  plants,  two  factors  determine  the  algal  flora  of  any  region.  First,  the 
conditions  prevailing  at  any  place  naturally  exclude  all  species  which  are  not  able  to 
grow  under  those  conditions;  second,  of  the  species  which  are  able  to  grow  in  any 
locality,  only  a  part  find  access  to  the  region  and  arrive  there  under  conditions  favorable 
for  obtaining  lodgment.  We  may  be  certain  that  there  are  hundreds  of  other  species 
that  could  grow  at  Beaufort  if  they  should  be  carried  there.  Since,  with  marine  algae, 
artificial  means  of  transport  are  usually  excluded,  the  flora  which  we  find  in  any  locality 
favorable  for  the  growth  of  algae  is  determined  to  a  considerable  extent  by  the  direction 
of  the  currents  bringing  fruiting  plants,  fragments,  or  spores  of  algae  from  other  regions. 
Occasionally,  however,  an  alga  may  be  introduced  into  a  region  by  artificial  means.  On 
one  occasion  there  was  found  in  Beaufort  Harbor  a  fragment  of  Halimeda  sp.  This 
seemed  a  very  interesting  discovery  until  it  was  noticed  that  there  was  in  the  harbor  at 
that  time  a  boat  from  the  West  Indies  bearing  tropical  shells  and  other  marine  objects 
for  sale.  To  Jihis  boat  we  may  confidently  ascribe  the  presence  of  the  Halimeda. 
Although  this  species  of  alga  did  not  establish  itself  at  Beaufort,  its  presence  there 
showed  the  possibility  of  the  distribution  of  algae  by  artificial  means  of  transport. 

There  is  evidence  that  at  least  one  species  has  established  itself  at  Beaufort  during 
the  progress  of  these  studies.  Rosenvingea  orientalis,  known  elsewhere  in  North  America 
only  from  Guadaloupe  and  from  Wrightsville  Beach,  N.  C.,  was  first 'found  on  Bogue 
Beach  in  September,  1905,  and  was  not  observed  in  the  harbor  during  that  year.  The 
following  summer,  however,  this  species  was  found  growing  between  Fort  Macon  jetties 
and  on  the  sea  buoy,  and  in  the  summer  of  1907  it  was  found  on  Shackleford  jetty  as 
well  as  on  Fort  Macon  jetties.  The  records  indicate  similar  facts  for  a  few  other  species, 
but  are  not  sufficiently  complete  to  warrant  conclusions  about  them.  Miss  Dunn  (1917) 
has  presented  convincing  evidence  showing  that  one  species  of  algae,  Dumontia 
filiformis,  appeared  on  the  coast  of  Maine  and  established  itself  there  between  the  years 
1909  and  1913.  This  species  seems  now  to  have  spread  in  considerable  abundance 
along  a  large  part  of  the  New  England  coast. 

Several  species  have  been  found  growing  in  Beaufort  Harbor  on  only  one  occasion. 
Such  species,  while  obtaining  a  foothold,  seemed  unable  to  maintain  themselves,  perhaps 
because  of  changing  conditions.  These  may  be  expected  to  reappear  at  any  time  and 
may  establish  themselves.  Other  species  have  been  found  only  occasionally,  being 
represented  by  scattered  individuals.  Such  species  seem  to  be  living  near  the  limit  of 
their  endurance  and  may  appear  and  disappear  as  conditions  become  more  or  less  favor- 
able. Still  other  species,  not  yet  observed  here,  may  be  expected  to  appear  whenever 
chance  currents  bring  them  to  this  region  under  conditions  favorable  for  their  obtaining 
a  foothold. 


382 


BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 
FLORA  OF  BEAUFORT  HARBOR. 


Considering,  first,  the  77  species  and  varieties  found  in  Beaufort  Harbor,  the  number 
of  these  in  the  different  divisions  is : 


Number. 

Per  cent. 

Myxophycese 

6.5 

Chlorophyces  

17 

22.1 

Rhodophyceae  

Si-9 

These  are  distributed  throughout  the  year  as  follows : 


Number. 

Per  cent. 

28.6 

Spring  and  summer  floras  ;  
Perennial....... 

4 

5-a 

The  strictly  summer  flora  is  distinctly  southern  in  its  character,  but  even  this  has 
a  decided  northern  element.  Of  the  40  species  and  varieties  included  here,  30  (75 
per  cent)  occur  in  the  Florida-West  Indies  region,  while  17  (42.5  per  cent)  are  found 
in  New  England.  Of  these  17  forms  recorded  for  New  England,  however,  all  except 
four  are  of  general  distribution,  occurring  in  the  Florida- West  Indies  region  also.  The 
distribution  of  this  summer  flora  in  the  different  divisions  is  as  follows : 


Number. 

Per  cent. 

Myxophyceae.. 

Phaeophyceae  

' 

7  5 

Rhodophyceae  

22 

cc  o 

. 

The  strictly  spring  flora,  on  the  contrary,  is  distinctly  northern,  of  the  22  species 
and  varieties  recorded,  20  (90.9  per  cent)  being  found  in  New  England  and  only  eight 
(36.4  per  cent)  being  known  from  the  Florida-West  Indies  region.  Its  northern 
character  is  further  shown  by  the  fact  that  red  algae  do  not  predominate  here,  the 
number  in  the  different  divisions  being : 


Number. 

Per  cent. 

Myxophycese 

Chlorophyceae  

g 

Phaeophyceae  

Rhodophyceae. 

8 

36.4 

The  four  species  common  to  the  spring  and  summer  flora  are  red  algae.  All  of 
these  are  found  in  the  Florida- West  Indies  region,  while  three  occur  in  New  England 
also. 

Of  the  1 1  perennial  species,  all  are  found  in  New  England  while  nine  occur  in  the 
Florida- West  Indies  region  also.  The  numbers  in  the  different  divisions  are : 


Number. 

Per  cent. 

Myxophyceae  

Chlorophycese  

Phaeophyceae  

18  18 

Rhodophyceae  

6 

54-  S4 

It  is  probable  that  further  search  would  increase  the  number  of  species  in  this  list. 


MARINE   ALGJ&   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C. 
FLORA  OF  CORAL  REEFS. 


383 


The  flora  of  the  coral  reefs  is  predominantly  southern,  of  the  47  identified  species 
and  varieties  found  there  (Table  2),  32  (68.1  per  cent)  being  recorded  for  the  Florida- 
West  Indies  region  and  14  (29.8  per  cent)  being  known  from  New  England. 

Comparing  the  three  collections  made  on  the  principal  reef,  we  find  the  species 
occurring  as  follows : 


Date  collected. 

Species  of  algae  identified  for  coral  reefs. 

Total. 

Recorded  for  — 

New  England. 

Florida-  West  Indies. 

May,  1907  

Number. 

21 
25 
33 

Number. 
9 
6 

10 

Per  cent. 
42.8 

45-4 

Number. 
18 
IS 
ao 

Percent. 

%.l 
90.9 

July-August,  1915  

This  southern  relationship  is  more  striking  when  it  is"  remembered  that  the  visit 
to  the  reef  in  May  was  made  at  a  time  when  Beaufort  Harbor  bore  the  spring  flora, 
having  90.5  per  cent  of  the  species  common  to  New  England  and  only  33.3  per  cent  of 
the  species  common  to  the  Florida- West  Indies  region.  At  this  time  several  northern 
species  which  occur  in  this  locality  only  in  the  spring  were  found  on  the  reef.  The 
small  proportion  of  the  species  collected  in  August,  1914,  which  are  common  to  other 
regions  is  due  to  the  fact  that  four  of  these  are  new,  while  six  are  new  to  North  America. 
If  these  species  are  excluded,  the  figures  are  New  England  40  per  cent,  Florida- West 
Indies  100  per  cent.  Similarly,  if  two  species  new  to  North  America  collected  in  July 
and  August,  1915,  are  excluded,  the  figures  for  this  period  are  New  England  50  per 
cent,  Florida- West  Indies  100  per  cent.  It  could  not  be  illustrated  more  forcibly  that 
this  flora  is  southern  in  its  nature  and  that  the  species  which  are  common  to  New 
England  are  those  which  are  generally  distributed  and  occur  along  the  entire  coast. 

On  all  trips  there  were  obtained  from  this  reef  species  which  were  not  found 
growing  elsewhere  in  this  region.  In  May,  1907,  ten  such  species  were  observed,  eight 
being  distinctly  southern,  one  being  distinctly  northern,  and  one  being  generally 
distributed.  In  August,  1914,  there  were  observed,  besides  the  ten  species  that  are 
new  or  new  to  North  America,  eight  species  not  found  elsewhere  in  this  region,  seven 
being  distinctly  southern  and  one  being  generally  distributed.  In  July  and  August, 
1915,  there  were  collected,  besides  the  two  species  that  are  new  to  North  America, 
nine  species  not  found  elsewhere  in  this  region,  seven  being  distinctly  southern  and 
two  being  generally  distributed.  It  is  thus  seen  that  the  flora  that  in  this  region  is 
confined  to  the  reefs  is  overwhelmingly  southern  in  its  relationship.  Only  four  identi- 
fied species  were  found  in  all  three  collections  from  the  reef,  while  14  were  obtained  in 
two  collections,  and  29  were  found  only  once.  This  is  probably  an  indication  not  so 
much  of  a  seasonal  distribution  as  of  the  abundance  of  the  species  occurring  there  and 
our  ignorance  of  them.  It  is  highly  desirable  that  a  thorough  study  of  these  reefs  be 
made. 

159321°— 20 2 


384 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 


The  southern  character  of  the  species  occurring  on  this  reef  is  further  shown  by 
the  predominance  of  red  algae.     The  total  numbers  found  in  the  different  divisions  are : 


Number. 

Per  cent. 

3 

3-8 

Chlorophyceae  •  
Phseophyceae  '- 

4 
II 
3d 

li 

67.9 

FLORA  OF  BOGUE  BEACH. 

The  flora  which,  in  this  locality,  is  found  only  on  Bogue  Beach  (Table  3)  is  as 
pronouncedly  southern  as  is  that  of  the  coral  reef.  Of  the  18  identified  species  and 
varieties  composing  this  list,  16  (88.8  per  cent)  are  known  from  the  Florida- West 
Indies  region,  while  only  four  (22.2  per  cent)  are  recorded  for  New  England.  This 
relationship  is  again  shown  by  the  predominance  of  red  algae.  The  total  numbers 
found  in  the  different  divisions  are: 


Number. 

Per  cent. 

Chlorophyceae  '  

3 

7 

4.6 
13.6 
31-8 

50.0 

These  facts  support  the  suggestion  previously  made  that  most  of  these  specimens 
have  been  washed  in  from  the  coral  reefs  offshore  or  from  the  reefs  lying  to  the  south 
of  this  locality,  while  some  may  have  been  brought  by  the  Gulf  Stream  from  the  Florida- 
West  Indies  region. 

CONDITIONS  AT  BEAUFORT,  N.  C. 

HARBOR. 

The  principal  factors  affecting  the  growth  and  distribution  of  algae  are  temperature, 
light,  composition  of  the  water,  turbidity,  movement  of  the  water  (including  tidal 
range),  and  the  nature  of  the  habitat. 

TEMPERATURE. 

The  temperature  of  the  surface  water  at  the  laboratory  wharf  (on  Fivers  Island)  has 
been  taken  at  5  p.  m.  almost  daily  during  three  periods,  totaling  almost  four  years.  A 
full  statement  of  these  figures  is  given  in  Table  9.  A  summary  of  the  records,  stated  in 
degrees  centigrade,  is  as  follows : 


Change  of 

Change  of 

Maxi- 

Mini- 

Aver- 

average 
since 

Maxi- 

Mini- 

Aver- 

average 
since 

mUm. 

muni. 

m  u  ni. 

previous 

month. 

month. 

°c. 

°C. 

•c. 

"C. 

°C. 

°c. 

"C. 

"C. 

January  
February  
March 

IS-  5 
16.7 

S- 
3- 

« 

—  1-3 

—    .2 

July  
August  

31- 
30. 

25.0 

T3/? 

27.9 
»7-S 

+3.7 

—  -4 

April  
May  

J3-  o 
26.7 

12. 

18. 

I-I-S 
22.4 

G° 

October  
November  

»s- 

20. 

14-0 

7-8 

19.  2 
13-9 

-5-6 
—S-3 

June  

30.0 

17- 

25.2 

+  2.8 

December  

17- 

6.0 

II.  I 

-».8 

MARINE    ALG^E   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C. 


385 


It  will  be  seen  that  the  extreme  range  of  temperature  recorded  is  28°,  from  3  to  31°. 
The  lowest  temperature  and  the  lowest  average  occur  in  February,  while  the  highest 
temperature  and  the  highest  average  occur  in  July.  In  the  fourth  column  there  is 
given  the  change  of  the  average  since  the  previous  month.  It  will  be  observed  that  the 
greatest  increase  of  the  average  occurs  from  March  to  April  (5°),  while  that  from  April 
to  May  is  only  0.1°  less  (4.9°).  The  greatest  decrease  of  the  average  occurs  from  Sep- 
tember to  October  (5.6°),  while  that  from  October  to  November  is  nearly  as  great  (5.3°). 
During  the  other  eight  months  the  average  change  is  relatively  small. 

It  is  interesting  to  compare  with  these  figures  the  surface  temperatures  (expressed 
in  degrees  centigrade)  recorded  for  Woods  Hole,  Mass.,  by  Sumner,  Osburn,  Cole,  and 
Davis  (1913)  and  those  given  for  Naples  by  Berthold  (1882),  since  the  former  locality 
has  a  temperate  algal  flora,  while  the  latter  locality  has  a  subtropical  one. 


Woods  Hole,  Mass. 

Woods  Hole,  Mass. 

Maxi- 

Mini- 

Aver- 

Italy. 

Maxi- 

Mini- 

Aver- 

Italy. 

mum. 

mum. 

age. 

mum. 

mum. 

age. 

°C 

•c. 

•C. 

"C 

•C. 

°C 

•c. 

"C. 

January  
February  
March  

4.16 
2.78 
6.67 

—  -95 

~  -95 
-   -38 

0.18 
-  -56 
2.04 

8-io 

August  
October  

23-6 
21.67 
18-33 

17.22 
17.22 
10.83 

20.97 
19-55 
15-26 

25-27 

[           I8-M 

April 

n.  ii 

.5 

6.61 

November  

12.78 

3-6 

9.03 

May 

16.39 

$.05 

12.75 

December  

8.6 

-  .28 

3-01 

June  

20.56 

I  .16 

16.94 

July  

23-33 

I    .22 

20.43 

At  both  of  these  places  the  highest  temperature  occurs  in  August  and  the  lowest 
temperature  in  February.  Woods  Hole  has  a  range  of  25.55°,  from  —1.95  to  23.6°, 
while  Naples  has  a  range  of  19°,  from  8  to  27°.  These  figures  indicate  that  Beaufort 
has  a  higher  maximum  and  a  lower  minimum  than  Naples;  but  the  record  of  Naples  is 
less  complete  than  that  of  Beaufort. 

LIGHT. 

While  we  have  as  yet  no  satisfactory  measure  of  light,  we  can  measure,  in  an  approxi- 
mate way,  the  relative  effect  under  different  conditions  of  the  rays  of  light  which  affect 
photographic  paper.  This  has  been  done  in  the  present  instance  by  means  of  the 
Clements  photometer.  This  instrument  uses  a  strip  of  solio  paper,  successive  portions 
of  which  are  exposed  at  will  through  a  small  slot,  the  slot  being  opened  or  closed  as 
desired  by  means  of  a  sliding  cover.  Standards  for  comparison  are  obtained  by  exposing 
portions  of  the  paper  to  direct  sunlight  for  different  measured  intervals  of  time.  Another 
portion  of  the  paper  is  exposed  for  a  definite  time  in  the  situation  whose  light  is  to 
be  tested.  By  comparison  it  is  then  determined  which  of  the  standards  is  darkened  to 
the  same  extent  as  the  paper  exposed  in  the  test  situation.  From  the  relative  time  of 
exposure  of  the  test  paper  and  this  standard  it  is  thus  possible  to  estimate  the  relative 
amount  of  light  in  the  test  situation  compared  with  full  sunlight.  For  example,  if  paper 
exposed  in  a  certain  situation  for  10  seconds  is  darkened  to  the  same  extent  as  a  standard 
exposed  to  full  sunlight  for  5  seconds,  we  estimate  that  the  light  in  this  situation  is  50 
per  cent  as  strong  as  full  sunlight.  It  is,  of  course,  necessary  to  make  new  standards 
for  every  series  of  tests,  since  the  intensity  of  full  sunlight  will  itself  vary  at  different 
times  and  on  different  days. 


386  BULLETIN   OF  THE  BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

Since  the  only  photometer  available  to  the  author  at  that  time  was  one  intended 
for  use  in  the  air,  this  form  was  employed,  being  adapted  as  follows :  All  exposures  were 
made  with  the  photometer  placed  in  a  glass  preserve  jar  of  sufficient  diameter  to  permit 
the  photometer  to  lie  flat  on  the  bottom.  The  photometer  was  held  in  place  by  paper 
packed  into  the  jar,  care  being  taken  that  the  slot  for  exposing  the  solio  paper  was  not 
shaded  by  the  packing.  In  a  dim  room  the  slot  was  opened,  the  photometer  was  placed 
in  the  jar  and  securely  packed,  and  the  jar  was  tightly  wrapped  in  black  cloth.  This 
was  then  taken  to  the  desired  situation,  the  jar  being  held  horizontally  with  the  slot 
directly  on  top,  the  cloth  was  quickly  removed  for  the  desired  number  of  seconds  and 
then  quickly  replaced,  and  the  jar  was  then  brought  back  into  the  laboratory.  All 
changes  in  the  apparatus  were  made  in  a  dim  room  at  a  considerable  distance  from  any 
window.  The  standards  were  obtained  in  this  way  by  exposing  the  photometer  within 
the  glass  jar  to  direct  sunlight  on  an  upper,  unshaded,  southern  porch. 

For  exposing  the  photometer  below  the  surface  of  the  water  a  shallow  box,  open  at 
the  top  and  of  the  proper  size  to  hold  the  jar  horizontally,  was  built,  the  sides  of  the  box 
being  just  high  enough  to  hold  the  jar  in  place  and  not  shading  the  upper  part  of  it. 
This  box  was  then  fastened  to  a  handle  marked  with  the  desired  distances.  In  a  dim 
room  the  jar  containing  the  opened  photometer  was  placed  horizontally  in  this  box  with 
the  slot  directly  on  top,  and  the  box  wras  tightly  wrapped  with  black  cloth.  This  was 
carried  in  a  boat  to  the  desired  locality  and  held  at  arm's  length  below  the  wrater,  the  black 
cloth  was  then  removed,  and  the  jar  immediately  sunk  to  the  desired  depth  and  held  at 
that  level  for  a  definite  time.  The  jar  was  then  quickly  brought  within  reach  and  imme- 
diately covered  with  the  black  cloth,  not  more  than  a  second  being  required  for  this 
manipulation.  The  apparatus  was  then  carried  to  the  laboratory,  where  all  changes 
of  the  photometer  were  made  in  a  dim  room. 

While  the  jar  undoubtedly  diminished  the  light  reaching  the  photometer,  this 
decrease  would  be  the  same  in  the  standards  and  the  tests.  The  effects  of  the  light  in 
these  two  cases  may,  therefore,  be  directly  compared. 

Two  records,  one  at  high  and  one  at  low  tide,  were  obtained  in  this  way  in  the 
channel  in  front  of  the  laboratory  wharf  in  July,  1907.  In  the  first  of  these  the 
standards  were  made  from  i  :  15  p.  m.  to  2  p.  m.,  July  17,  and  the  measurements 
below  the  water  were  made  from  i  :  15  p.  m.  to4p.  m.,  July  18,  high  tide  on  this  day 
occurring  at  2  p.  m.  In  some  cases,  where  the  color  of  the  test  did  not  exactly  match 
that  of  any  standard,  the  time  of  the  standard  having  an  effect  equivalent  to  that  of 
the  test  was  obtained  by  interpolating  between  the  two  standards  showing  the  colors 
nearest  to  that  of  the  test.  Standards  were  made  by  exposing  to  direct  sunlight  as 
described  above  for  60,  30,  25,  22,  20,  15,  10,  5,  3,  2,  and  i  second.  The  results  were 
as  follows,  the  first  column  giving  the  depth  below  the  surface  at  which  the  test  was 
exposed,  the  second  column  giving  the  time  of  the  exposure  of  the  test,  the  third 
column  giving  the  time  of  exposure  of  the  standard  having  a  color  equivalent  to  that 


MARINE 


OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C. 


387 


of  the  test,  and  the  fourth  column  giving  the  calculated  percentage  intensity. of  the 
light  at  the  respective  depths  compared  with  full  sunlight : 


Depth. 

Length  of 
exposure. 

Equivalent 
standard. 

Relative 
intensity. 

i  cm  

Seconds. 
60 
60 

Seconds. 
28. 

Per  cent. 
46.6 
38.3 

60 

90  cm  

•S  m  '.  .  '.  !  
8  m 

60 
60 

1  80 

IS- 
8. 
5- 

.1  m  

240 
300 

.8 

.0 

£ 

The  second  record  was  made  from  i  :  15  p.  m.  to  2  :  30  p.  m.,  July  24,  low  tide 
on  this  day  occurring  at  2  :  15  p.  m.  The  standards  were  made  at  2  : 30  p.  m.  of  the 
same  day  and  were  exposed  for  60,  45,  30,  25,  20,  15,  10,  5,  and  3  seconds.  The  results 
were  as  follows : 


Depth. 

Length  of 
exposure. 

Equivalent 
standard. 

Relative 
intensity. 

i  cm  

Seconds. 
60 
60 

Seconds. 
40.0 

Per  cent. 
66.6 

60 

2.8 

4.6 

90  cm  

120 

3-° 

'•S 

While  these  two  records  differ  considerably,  they  agree  in  their  main  points  and 
indicate  several  interesting  conclusions:  (i)  A  considerable  portion  of  the  light 
(nearly  one-half)  did  not  penetrate  below  the  surface,  probably  because  of  the  reflec- 
tion from  the  water  and  the  suspended  matter;  (2)  of  the  light  which  entered  the  water 
nearly  one-half  did  not  penetrate  to  a  depth  of  30  cm.;  (3)  at  a  slightly  greater  depth 
(1.2  m.  at  high  tide,  60  cm.  at  low  tide)  the  light  was  so  reduced  as  to  be  almost  lacking. 
These  results  are  of  great  interest  when  considered  in  connection  with  the  vertical 
distribution  of  the  algae.  While  some  of  the  difference  in  the  records  may  be  due  to 
errors  in  the  determinations,  a  considerable  part  is  probably  due  to  the  fact  that  one 
was  taken  at  high  and  the  other  at  low  tide.  The  water  at  high  tide  is  notably  clearer 
than  that  at  low  tide,  and  the  record  taken  at  high  tide  shows  a  correspondingly  greater 
light  intensity. 

These  records,  of  course,  show  the  effect  of  only  the  rays  affecting  solio  paper, 
but  it  is  these  rays  (toward  the  violet  end  of  the  spectrum)  that  are  least  absorbed 
by  water.  It  is  not  known  what  proportion  of  the  different  rays  penetrate  water  as 
turbid  as  that  occurring  here,  or  what  is  the  intensity  of  the  rays  at  the  red  end  of  the 
spectrum  that  reach  the  slight  depths  at  which  these  measurements  were  made.  There 
are  evident  errors  in  the  methods  used,  but  since  the  figures  obtained  could  be,  at  best, 
only  approximations,  it  did  not  seem  worth  while  to  give  the  time  necessary  to  improv- 
ing the  records.  The  figures  given  refer  only  to  the  water  in  the  channel  in  front  of 
the  laboratory  wharf.  Efforts  to  obtain  records  from  other  localities  far  removed 


388 


BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 


from  the  laboratory  were  not  successful,  since  the  necessary  changes  of  the  photometer 
could  not  be  made  out  of  doors.  These  figures  probably  represent  about  an  average 
of  the  conditions  occurring  through  the  greater  part  of  the  harbor.  At  certain  places, 
especially  near  the  inlet  where  the  algae  are  more  abundant,  the  water  is  somewhat 
clearer. 

SALT  CONTENT   OF  WATER. 

Determinations  of  the  salt  content  of  the  water  from  five  places  in  Beaufort 
Harbor  were  made  by  Wheeler  (1910)  in  the  summer  of  1909  during  the  progress  of 
the  present  study  of  the  algae.  The  water  was  obtained  from  (A)  Beaufort  Inlet; 
(B)  the  laboratory  wharf;  (C)  Bogue  Sound  opposite  Moorehead  City;  (D)  between 
the  eastern  end  of  Beaufort  and  Bird  Island  Shoal;  (E)  Green  Rock  in  Newport  River 
near  the  entrance  to  Core  Creek.  The  results,  stated  in  parts  per  i  ,000  grms.  of  water, 
were  as  follows: 


A. 

B. 

C. 

D. 

E. 

NaCI  
1CC1 

MgSO/ 

28.043 

.842 
3-379 

27-836 
.742 
3-245 
2.328 

27-977 
•  751 
3-300 

28.006 
•751 
3-335 

24.796 
.702 
2.97* 

CaSO«  

1.  171 

1.168 

1.202 

1.188 

1.039 

CaCOi  

.214 

.214 

•215 

•  215 

Total  

36-072 

35-533 

35-  764 

35-867 

31-786 

Specific  gravity  at  28.7°  C  

L0227 

X.0222 

1.0226 

X.0227 

1-0193 

As  is  shown,  both  the  total  salt  content  and  the  relative  amounts  of  the  different 
salts  vary  in  different  places  and  at  different  times,  the  total  ranging,  in  these  analyses, 
from  3.1786  per  cent  to  3.6072  per  cent. 

The  density,  of  course,  varies  at  different  times,  being  largely  determined  by  the 
amount  of  rain  and  the  state  of  the  tide.  At  times,  after  continued  hard  rains,  the 
water  in  the  harbor  has,  for  days,  the  color  of  weak,  muddy  coffee,  due  to  water  coming 
from  the  inland  juniper  swamps.  Daily  salinometer  readings  have  been  made  at  5 
p.  m.  at  the  laboratory  wharf  (on  Fivers  Island)  since  June,  1913.  A  summary  of  these 
is  as  follows  • 


Maximum. 

Minimum. 

Average. 

Maximum. 

Minimum. 

Average. 

1913- 

1914. 

June  

.0228 

.0184 

.0209 

January  

.0248 

.0186 

.0212 

July  
August  
September  

.0238 
.0226 
.0204 

.020 

•0132 

.0228 

.021 
.0168 

February  
March  
April  

.022 
.0204 
•  02l8 

.0112 

.015 

•0179 
•0173 
•  0183 

October  
November  

•  0236 
'•0256 

.017 

.0102 
.0192 

.0199 
.0209 
.0226 

May  
June  ^  
July  

.0258 
.0246 

.  022 

•023 

It  will  be  observed  that  the  recorded  density  ranged  from  i.oio  to  1.0258.  The 
general  average,  obtained  by  averaging  the  monthly  averages,  is  1.0205.  I*1  these 
figures  no  account  is  taken  of  the  temperature,  since  in  such  salinometer  records  the 
errors  of  reading  are  almost  certainly  greater  than  the  temperature  corrections.  For 
the  same  reason  the  maxima  and  minima  are  not  accurate,  but  probably  cover  the 


MARINE   A^GJB,  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  389 

range  of  variation.  The  averages,  however,  are  probably  fairly  accurate,  since  they 
are  obtained  from  a  large  number  of  readings  where  the  errors  probably  balance  each 
other.  The  general  average,  1.0205,  may,  therefore,  be  taken  as  closely  approximating 
the  mean  density  of  the  water  at  the  laboratory  wharf.  At  other  places  in  the  harbor 
the  density  will,  of  course,  be  different  from  this.  Since  algae  grow  throughout  the 
harbor,  some  of  them  will  be  exposed  to  greater  densities  and  some  to  lesser  densities 
than  those  recorded  here. 

Several  salinometer  readings  have  been  made  by  the  author  at  other  places  in  this 
region.  While  these  have  not  the  value  of  the  daily  records  made  at  the  laboratory 
wharf,  they  indicate  the  comparative  density  at  other  places.  They  are  as  follows: 

Newport  River  near  "  Green  Rock, "  low  tide i.  016 

North  River  near  Lenoxville,  low  tide i.  0188 

Pamlico  Sound,  Ocracoke,  low  tide i.  01 1 

Coral  reef  off  Beaufort i.  0242 

TURBIDITY. 

The  water  from  the  open  ocean  outside  of  the  inlet  contains  a  considerable  amount 
of  suspended  matter,  as  is  evident  when  this  water  is  filtered,  while  the  water  within 
the  harbor  has  still  more  fine,  suspended  matter  and  is,  at  times,  very  turbid.  All 
rocks,  shells,  and  posts  under  water  are  soon  covered  with  a  thick  deposit,  and  at  many 
places  in  the  harbor  the  bottom  is  covered  with  mud  up  to  a  meter  or  more  in  depth. 
In  the  harbor  and  in  Bogue  Sound  the  amount  of  suspended  matter  seems  to  increase 
as  we  go  farther  from  the  inlet,  while  in  the  sound  back  of  Shackleford  Banks  the  water 
is  decidedly  clearer,  owing  to  the  strong  current  running  in  from  the  ocean  at  this  place. 
Farther  back  in  this  sound  the  water  is  as  turbid  as  in  the  harbor. 

This  turbidity  not  only  reduces  the  light  penetrating  the  water  but  itself  affects 
the  vertical  distribution  of  algae,  since  much  of  the  suspended  matter  is  deposited  on 
all  objects  in  the  water.  The  older  portions  of  the  broader  algae  (as  Dictyota,  Padina, 
the  leaves  of  Sargassum)  are  more  or  less  thickly  covered  by  this  mud  settling  from  the 
water. 

MOVEMENTS  OF  WATER. 

The  usual  maximum  range  of  tide  (at  the  spring  tides)  is  0.97  m.  (3.2  feet),  the 
usual  minimum  range  (at  the  neap  tides)  is  0.7  m.  (2.3  feet),  and  the  usual  mean  range 
is  0.82  m.  (2.7  feet).  The  tides  may,  however,  vary  considerably  from  these  figures, 
the  actual  height  and  range  attained  depending  in  part  on  the  direction  and  strength 
of  the  wind.  The  greatest  range  observed  by  the  author  at  the  laboratory  wharf  is 
1.31  m.  (4.3  feet).  The  smallest  range  observed  is  0.48  m.  (1.6  feet).  Under  excep- 
tional conditions  the  low  tides  are  higher  than  the  high  tides  recorded  on  other  days 
in  the  same  month,  while  at  other  times  the  tides  are  unusually  low.  Although  there 
is  not  a  very  great  difference  in  the  height  of  water  at  high  and  low  tides,  there  is  a 
great  difference  in  the  amount  of  light  reaching  the  algae  at  these  times.  Except  on 
Shackleford  jetties,  where  the  water  is  clearer,  no  algae  were  found  in  the  harbor  below 
1.4  m.  below  low  water,  and  the  majority  were  found  within  75  cm.  below  low  water. 
Most  of  the  algae  have,  therefore,  about  twice  as  much  water  over  them  at  high  tide 
as  at  low  tide.  Furthermore,  during  summer  and  autumn  the  greater  number  of  algae 
grow  almost  up  to  the  surface  of  the  water  at  low  tide.  For  these  parts  of  the  plants 


390  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 

the  difference  in  the  amount  of  water  covering  them  at  high  and  low  tides  is  much 
greater  than  is  indicated  by  the  figures  given  above.  For  the  species  growing  above 
low  water  the  difference  is,  of  course,  still  greater.  Since  light  penetrates  to  such  a 
slight  depth  in  this  water,  the  difference  in  the  amount  of  light  received  by  the  plants 
at  different  stages  of  the  tide  must  be  very  great.  The  difference  is,  however,  partly 
neutralized  for  the  algae  growing  near  the  inlet  and  even  as  far  back  as  the  laboratory, 
since  the  water  of  the  ocean  is  clearer  than  that  of  the  harbor.  This  ocean  water, 
entering  the  harbor  at  flood  tide,  pushes  the  more  turbid  water  before  it  and  mixes 
with  it,  so  that,  as  was  shown  above,  the  water  of  the  harbor  is  clearer  at  high  than  at 
ow  tide. 

Since  the  harbor  is  a  comparatively  small  body  of  water  and  is  well  sheltered  by 
land,  the  water  is  usually  smooth  throughout  the  greater  part  of  its  area.  Near  the 
inlet,  however,  there  is  considerable  movement,  although  even  here  there  are  usually 
no  waves.  Even  the  slight  movement  that  does  occur  here,  however,  probably  affects 
the  algae  growing  on  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford  jetties  by  washing  off  the  sediment 
that  settles  on  them. 

HABITATS. 

The  bottom  throughout  the  harbor  consists  principally  of  sand,  with  some  areas 
covered  by  mud  or  shells.  (See  map  2.)  The  mud  and  sand  furnish  no  place  of 
attachment  for  algae.  The  shells  furnish  excellent  places  for  attachment,  but  do  not 
bear  algae,  probably  because  of  the  turbidity  of  the  water  above  them.  Algae  are, 
however,  found  attached  to  single  shells  and  other  supports  below  low  water  along  the 
shore  and,  sparingly,  on  the  shoals. 

The  numerous  wharf  piles  occurring  here  would  seem  to  offer  excellent  habitats, 
but  during  the  summer  and  autumn  no  algae  were  ever  found  on  them,  while,  on  the 
contrary,  during  the  spring  they  bore  an  abundant  growth  of  algae.  The  reason  for 
this  difference  is  not  apparent. 

There  remain,  as  possible  algal  habitats,  the  jetties  at  Fort  Macon,  at  Shackleford 
and  on  the  laboratory  island,  and  the  brick  walls  occurring  along  the  town  shore. 
These  jetties  bear  the  greater  number,  both  of  species  and  of  individuals,  of  the  algae 
growing  in  the  harbor,  while  the. walls  bear  a  limited  number  of  species.  Small  species 
of  algae  are  found,  too,  in  some  abundance  on  the  buoys  that  mark  the  channel  into 
the  harbor. 

CORAL  REEF. 

The  physical  conditions  existing  on  the  coral  reef  offshore  have  already  been 
described.  Here  it  need  be  said  only  that  the  surface  temperature  at  noon  on  May  15, 
1907,  was  21.11°  C.,  the  temperature  at  a  depth  of  25.5  m.  was  19.44°  C.,  and  the  density 
of  the  surface  water  (measured  by  a  salinometer)  was  1.0242.  At  this  time  the  tempera- 
ture of  the  surface  water  in  the  harbor  varied,  in  different  places  and  on  different  days, 
from  20.5°  C.  to  23°  C.,  and  the  density  varied  from  1.0165  to  1.0212. 


MARINE   AIXJ^B   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  39! 

DISTRIBUTION  OF  ALG^E  AT  BEAUFORT. 

REGIONAL. 

The  regional  distribution  of  algae,  their  occurrence  throughout  the  world,  is,  like 
that  of  other  plants,  determined  largely  by  temperature.  Whether  a  given  algal  species 
is  able  to  exist  in  a  given  locality  will  depend  absolutely  on  its  ability  to  endure  the 
maximum  and  minimum  water  temperatures  occurring  in  that  locality.  It  need  not, 
however,  be  obliged  to  endure  these  extreme  temperatures  in  its  vegetative  condition, 
but  may  exist  for  long  periods  by  means  of  spores  or  fragments,  resuming  its  vegetative 
state  with  the  return  of  more  favorable  temperatures.  Setchell  (1915)  has  shown  that 
the  majority  of  the  species  of  algae  occur  in  regions  having  a  range  of  not  more  than  10°  C., 
and  that  those  occurring  in  regions  having  a  greater  range  than  this  accommodate  them- 
selves to  the  general  law  by  their  seasonal  distribution,  etc. 

Of  the  species  which  are  able  to  exist  in  any  given  locality,  some  will  thrive  and  will 
predominate,  others  will  barely  maintain  a  foothold,  while  others  will  appear  and 
disappear  at  different  times.  The  relative  abundance  of  the  different  species  occurring 
in  any  locality  will  be  determined  by  the  ability  of  these  species  to  thrive  under  the 
conditions  found  there  and  to  compete  under  these  conditions  with  the  other  species 
growing  in  the  region.  To  become  abundant,  a  species  must  be  able  not  only  to  endure 
the  extreme  conditions,  but  also  to  grow  luxuriantly  under  the  usual  conditions.  The 
factors  most  affecting  the  relative  abundance  of  the  species  of  marine  algae  seem  to  be 
the  temperature,  density,  and  turbidity  of  the  water,  and  the  intensity  of  the  light 
occurring,  not  on  single  days,  but  throughout  the  growing  season. 

As  has  been  mentioned,  the  intermediate  position  of  Beaufort  makes  its  flora 
particularly  interesting.  Here  Codium  tomentosum,  Dictyota  dichotoma,  Padina  -vickersiaz, 
and  other  strictly  southern  forms  grow  along  with  the  more  northern  Fucus  vesiculosus 
and  Polysiphonia  harveyi.  As  a  rule,  however,  the  northern  and  southern  species  do 
not  grow  together,  the  former  occurring  in  the  spring  and  the  latter  in  summer. 

Setchell  (1915),  in  considering  the  effect  of  temperature  on  the  distribution  of  algae, 
distinguishes  the  following  regions,  based  on  the  average  temperature  of  the  water 
during  the  summer  expressed  in  degrees  centigrade : 


'C. 


'C. 


South  subtropical 20  to  25 

South  temperate 15  to  20 

Lower  austral 10  to  15 

Upper  austral o  to  10 


Upper  boreal o  to  10 

Lower  boreal 10  to  15 

North  temperate 15  to  20 

North  subtropical 20  to  25 

Tropical 25  N.  to  25  S. 

Since  the  average  water  temperature  at  Beaufort  during  the  months  from  June  to 
September  is  26.35  °C.,  this  classification  would  place  the  Beaufort  area  at  the  northern 
limit  of  the  tropical  region.  It  would  seem,  however,  that  the  Beaufort  flora  should 
more  properly  be  included  in  the  subtropical  region,  and  the  limits  given  by  Setchell 
should  be  modified. 

SEASONAL. 

As  is  shown  in  Table  i ,  the  flora  of  spring  and  summer  are  very  different.  Of  the  77 
species  and  varieties  growing  in  the  harbor,  only  15  (19.5  per  cent)  are  found  at  both 
seasons,  1 1  of  these  being  perennial  and  4  having  been  found  from  April  to  October. 


392 


BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 


During  the  winter  of  1908-9  monthly  collections  of  all  species  observed  were  made 
for  the  author  from  the  time  of  his  departure  from  the  laboratory,  October  20,  1908, 
until  his  return,  June  30,  1909.  While  more  careful  studies  would  probably  alter  the 
present  data  in  some  details,  these  collections  and  those  made  by  the  author  in  May,* 
1907,  and  April,  1908,  give  a  fair  picture  of  the  seasonal  distribution  of  the  algae  in  the 
harbor. 

The  species  occurring  there  in  the  summer  may  be  grouped  as  follows: 


DOMINANT  SPECIES. 


Lyngbya  confervoides. 
Codium  decorticatum. 
Codium  tomentosum. 
Sargassum  ftlipendula. 
Dictyota  dichotoma. 
Padina  vickersise. 
Gracilaria  confervoides. 
Gracilaria  multipartita. 
Hypnea  musciformis. 
Chondria  dasyphylla. 
Dermatolithon  pustulatum. 


OCCURRENCE   MORE   LIMITED. 


Ulva  lactuca. 
Ulva  fasciata. 
Ectocarpus  mitchellse. 
Rosen  vingea  orientalis. 
Fucus  vesiculosus. 


Erythrocladia  recondita. 
Erythrotrichia  carnea. 
Goniotrichum  alsidii. 
Acrochaetitim  dufourii. 
Acrochaetitim  hoytii . 
Acrochaetium  virgatulum. 
Gelidium  coerulescens. 
Gelidium  crinale. 
Gymnogongrus  griffithsiae. 
Actinococcus  aggregatus. 
Agardhiella  tenera. 
Eucheuma  gelidium. 
Champia  parvula. 
Lomentaria  uncinata. 
Chondria  sedifolia. 
Herposiphonia  tenella. 
Polysiphonia  harveyi. 
Polysiphonia  denudata. 
Ceramium  tenuissimum. 


The  other  species  of  the  summer  flora  mentioned  in  Table  i  have  been  found  only 
occasionally. 

By  the  middle  of  October  changes  in  the  flora  have  become  evident.  Dictyota  has 
become  relatively  scarce,  and  Padina  is  less  abundant  than  formerly,  the  plants  of  both 
species  being  small  and  showing  signs  of  degeneration;  Chondria  dasyphylla  has  almost 
disappeared;  Hypnea  is  still  abundant  and  shows  little  change  except  that  there  seems 
to  be  a  greater  preponderance  of  tetrasporic  plants  than  formerly;  Codium  and  Gra- 
cilaria confervoides  are  still  present;  Ectocarpus  is  abundant  and  conspicuous;  large 
plants  of  Fucus  are  abundant  and  the  fruits  are  well  developed. 

During  November  this  change  continues.  Dictyota  becomes  still  scarcer  and 
finally  disappears;  Hypnea  is  reduced  to  small  sterile  plants,  the  condition  in  which  it 
passes  the  winter  (PL  CI,  fig.  2) ;  and  the  first  of  the  spring  flora,  Petalonia  fascia,  makes 
its  appearance. 

In  December  we  find  the  last  plants  of  Padina  and  the  species  growing  on  this, 
Erythrotrichia  and  Goniotrichum;  Gracilaria  confervoides  has  disappeared;  Codium 
tomentosum,  Champia,  and  Chondria  sedifolia  are  still  present;  Enter omorpha  prolifera, 
Agardhiella,  and  Gracilaria  multipartita  are  more  conspicuous;  Petalonia  grows  to  a 
large  size;  while  occasional  plants  of  Grinnellia  and  Dasya  are  found. 

By  January  Champia  and  Chondria  sedifolia  have  disappeared;  Ectocarpus  confer- 
voides has  replaced  the  summer  species,  E.  mitchellae;  Grinnellia  has  become  conspicuous, 
and  small  plants  of  Porphyra  have  appeared. 


MARINE   ALGJE  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C. 


393 


In  February  we  find  the  last  reduced  plants  of  Codium  tomentosum  (C.  decorticatum 
having  disappeared  earlier)  and  of  Chondria  dasyphylla.  From  this  time  the  flora 
consists  entirely  of  perennial  and  spring  species.  Porphyra  has  attained  a  large  size; 
Enter omorpha  linza  has  appeared;  and  Enteromorpha  prolifera,  Ectocarpus  confervoides, 
Petalonia,  Porphyra,  Agardhiella,  Gracilaria  multipartite,  and  Grinnellia  are  the  principal 
species  composing  the  flora. 

In  March,  the  algae  are  scarcer  than  at  any  other  time  during  the  year,  but  the 
perennial  and  spring  species  already  mentioned  are  present  without  change,  except  that 
small  plants  of  Leathesia  have  made  their  appearance. 

During  April  the  spring  flora  attains  its  greatest  development.  The  dominant  form 
throughout  the  harbor  and  along  all  the  shores  is  Ulva  lactuca,  which  occurs  on  all  rocks 
and  forms  large  masses  lying  free  on  the  bottom.  Closely  rivalling  this  are  Entero- 
morpha prolifera  and  Porphyra  growing  on  all  rocks  and  posts  throughout  the  harbor. 
These  three  species  are  extremely  abundant  everywhere,  but  in  limited  areas  they  are 
surpassed  by  Polysiphonia  nigrescens  and  Ceramium  strictum.  The  species  occurring 
here  at  this  time  may  be  grouped  as  follows : 


ABUNDANT. 

Lyngbya  confervoides. 

Enteromorpha  linza. 

Enteromorpha  prolifera. 

Ulva  lactuca. 

Ectocarpus  confervoides. 

Petalonia  fascia. 

Myrionema  strangulans. 

Leathesia  difformis. 

Fucus  vesiculosus. 

Porphyra  leucosticta. 

Acrochaetium  virgatulum. 

Gelidium  crerulescens. 

Agardhiella  tenera. 

Gracilaria  multipartita. 

Champia  parvula. 

Lomentaria  uncinata. 

Grinnellia  americana. 

Chondria  tenuissima  var.  baileyana. 


Polysiphonia  nigrescens. 
Dasya  pedicellata. 
Ceramium  strictum. 

OCCURRENCE  LIMITED. 

Enteromorpha  flexuosa. 
Enteromorpha  intestinalis. 
Chsetomorpha  melagonium  f .  rupincola. 
Rhizoclonium  riparium. 
Cladophora  flexuosa. 
Bryopsis  plumosa. 
Ectocarpus  siliculosus. 
Stilophora  rhizodes. 
Sargassum  filipendula. 
Bangia  fusco-purpurea. 
Acrochaetium  corymbiferum. 
Gelidium  crinale. 
Gymnogongrus  griffithsise. 
Hypnea  musciformis. 


Young  plants  of  several  species  were  observed  at  this  time.  Several  specimens  of 
Codium  3  to  12  mm.  tall  were  found  on  shells  in  the  clearer,  deeper  water  north  of  the 
laboratory.  Fucus  showed,  in  addition  to  the  large  plants,  many  germlings  2  to  3  mm. 
tall.  Small  plants  of  Chondria  dasyphylla  also  were  observed. 

Besides  the  germlings  of  Fucus,  many  large  plants  up  to  14  cm.  tall  were  present. 
These  were  entirely  without  fruit.  Ulva,  Enteromorpha  prolifera,  Lomentaria,  and 
Champia  grew  more  abundantly  and  to  a  larger  size  than  in  summer.  Fruiting  plants 
of  Hypnea  i  to  6  cm.  tall  were  observed,  all  of  these  being  tetrasporic. 

During  May  the  spring  species  begin  to  disappear,  some  of  the  plants  showing  signs 
of  disintegration.  Enteromorpha  linza,  E.  prolifera,  Chcetomorpha  melagonium  f.  rupin- 
cola, Stilophora,  Bangia,  Porphyra,  Dasya,  Polysiphonia  nigrescens,  Grinnellia,  and 
Ceramium  are,  however,  still  present.  Hypnea  has  now  attained  its  summer  condition, 


394 


BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 


the  plants  reaching  a  size  of  22  cm. ;  Chondria  sedifolia  has  appeared,  and  one  small  mass 
of  Rhodymenia  palmetto,  was  found  on  Fort  Macon  jetty. 

By  June  the  spring  flora  has  disappeared  and  the  summer  flora  is  established.  The 
growth  of  the  summer  species  at  this  time  is  very  rapid.  On  May  14,  1909,  the  jetties 
at  Fort  Macon  were  carefully  searched  for  Dictyota  without  revealing  a  trace  of  this 
species.  On  June  9,  when  the  next  collection  was  made,  there  were  found  numerous 
plants  20  to  29  cm.  tall  which  had  matured  and  liberated  their  sexual  cells.  The  species 
present  now  include  well-developed  fruiting  plants  of  Codium,  Dictyota,  Padina,  Hypnea, 
Chondria  dasyphylla,  C.  sedifolia,  and  Herposiphonia,  and  plants  of  Rhodymenia  6  cm. 
tall.  None  of  the  spring  species  was  collected  at  this  time. 

All  of  the  summer  species  are  present  before  the  first  of  July  and  maintain  them- 
selves until  the  following  October  or  November. 

From  these  facts  we  can  picture  the  seasonal  succession  as  follows :  With  the  advent 
of  colder  temperature,  the  summer  flora  begins  to  disappear  by  the  middle  of  October, 
the  larger  number  of  the  species  disappearing  by  November  or  December,  others  dropping 
out  with  each  successive  month,  but  some  remaining  until  February.  The  first  of  the 
spring  flora  makes  its  appearance  in  November,  other  species  appearing  with  each 
successive  month,  the  flora,  however,  remaining  relatively  sparse  during  the  winter,  the 
smallest  number  of  species  being  found  in  March.  With  the  coming  of  warmer  tempera- 
ture, this  flora  becomes  more  abundant  and  reaches  its  greatest  profusion  in  April,  after 
which  time  it  begins  to  dwindle  and  disappears  by  June.  The  first  of  the  summer  flora 
appears  in  April,  others  appear  in  May,  and  all  are  present  before  the  last  of  June. 

If  the  seasonal  behavior  of  the  algae  is  compared  with  the  recorded  water  tempera- 
ture, it  is  observed  that  the  disappearance  of  the  summer  flora  in  October  and  November 
is  coincident  with  the  greatest  decrease  in  temperature;  the  appearance  of  the  spring 
flora  in  November  and  the  succeeding  months  follows  this  diminution;  the  time  of 
greatest  scarcity  of  algae,  in  March,  follows  the  lowest  minimum  temperature  reached; 
the  rapid  increase  of  the  spring  flora  to  its  maximum  in  April  is  coincident  with  the 
greatest  increase  in  temperature,  while  its  disappearance  during  May  is  coincident  with 
the  continued  increase;  and  the  appearance  of  the  summer  flora  in  April  is  coincident 
with  this  greatest  increase  and  its  profusion  in  June  follows  this  great  increase  of  tempera- 
ture. It  would  scarcely  be  possible  to  find  a  more  direct  relation  between  temperature 
and  the  seasonal  distribution  of  plants  than  is  shown  here.  From  this  it  seems  evident 
that,  while  light  probably  has  its  effect,  the  seasonal  distribution  of  algae  is  determined  to 
a  very  great  extent  by  the  temperature.  More  exact  studies  would  probably  show 
interesting  relations  between  the  temperature  and  the  individual  species  occurring  here. 

The  manner  in  which  the  summer  species  exist  during  the  winter  and  the  spring 
species  exist  during  the  summer  at  this  place  has  not  been  determined.  During  the 
seven  summers  spent  at  the  Beaufort  laboratory,  two  small  plants  of  Grinnellia  and  a  few 
small  plants  of  Dasya  have  been  observed,  but  no  other  of  the  spring  species  has  been 
found  here  after  May,  and  none  of  the  summer  species  has  been,  found  after  February. 
Lewis  (1914)  has  shown  that,  at  Woods  Hole,  Mass.,  many  of  the  summer  species  of  red 
algae  occurring  there  (Dasya,  Polysiphonia,  and  others)  persist  during  the  winter  by 
means  of  the  minute  holdfasts  of  sporelings,  the  other  portions  of  these  sporelings  and  all 
of  the  older  plants  dying  at  the  approach  of  cold  weather.  The  plants  arising  from  these 
holdfasts  the  following  summer  were  mainly  tetrasporic.  Probably  some  such  method 


MARINE   AU>;E   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  395 

carried  the  species  over  the  unfavorable  seasons  at  Beaufort.  The  rocks  on  which 
Dictyota  and  Padina  grew  the  preceding  summer  and  on  which  they  occurred  abund- 
antly the  following  summer  were  carefully  searched  by  the  author  under  favorable 
conditions  in  April,  1908,  without  revealing  a  trace  of  these  species.  It  is  probable, 
however,  that  a  microscopic  examination  would  show  these  and  other  algae  present  on 
the  rocks  below  low  water. 

It  is  interesting  to  note  that,  although  cystocarpic  and  tetrasporic  plants  of  Hypnea 
are  present  in  the  summer  in  about  equal  numbers,  a  collection  of  55  plants  of  this  species 
taken  at  random  in  October  showed  45  tetrasporic  plants  and  10  sexual  ones,  and  all 
the  fruiting  plants  observed  in  April  were  tetrasporic.  Lewis  (1914)  has  shown  that  the 
preponderance  of  tetrasporic  plants  in  the  early  summer  exhibited  by  the  annual  red 
algae  at  Woods  Hole  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the  two  generations  are  produced  alternately, 
the  last  crop  of  the  summer  being  prevailingly  sexual,  and  the  carpospores  borne  by  this 
crop  producing  the  sporelings  whose  holdfasts  persist  through  the  winter.  The  peren- 
nial algae  at  Woods  Hole  show  no  such  discrepancy  in  the  numbers  of  sexual  and  tetra- 
sporic plants.  In  the  present  instance  it  seems  that  the  tetrasporic  plants  of  Hypnea, 
a  perennial  species,  are  themselves  more  resistant  to  cold  than  the  sexual  plants.  Fur- 
ther studies  are  needed  x>n  this  subject  both  here  and  in  other  regions. 

The  seasonal  life  cycle  of  Fucus  may  be  summed  up  here  for  comparison  with  other 
regions.  Young  plants  were  observed  in  April  along  with  large,  old,  sterile  plants.  The 
swollen  receptacles  become  evident  about  June,  but  remain  small  and  inconspicuous 
during  July,  becoming  gradually  larger  and  morp  conspicuous  during  August  and  Sep- 
tember, and  reaching  full  size  about  the  latter  part  of  October,  the  plants  showing  large, 
well-developed  fruits  from  November  to  January  or  February.  After  this  time  all 
plants  observed  were  sterile. 

It  is  of  interest  to  note  that  in  May,  1907,  when  Beaufort  Harbor  bore  almost 
entirely  a  spring  flora,  the  coral  reef  offshore  bore  such  strictly  southern  forms  as  Udotea, 
Dictyota,  Zonaria,  Nitophyllum,  Chrysymenia,  and  others,  along  with  the  spring  species 
of  Dasya  and  Grinnellia,  although  at  this  time  the  water  at  the  depth  of  this  reef  was  at 
a  lower  temperature  than  that  in  the  harbor.  The  explanation  of  this  can  not  be  given 
surely  without  further  study,  but  certain  differences  between  the  harbor  and  the  reef 
are  evident.  The  greater  clearness  and  higher  salinity  of  the  water  over  the  reef  probably 
play  a  part,  but  the  chief  factor  probably  is  that  the  water  at  the  depth  of  the  reef,  as 
may  confidently  be  believed,  does  not  fall  to  the  low  temperature  found  in  the  harbor  in 
winter.  This  suggestion  is  supported  by  the  species  found  on  Bogue  Beach  during  the 
winter  from  December,  1908,  to  March,  1909.  Besides  the  species  growing  in  the  harbor, 
there  were  found  during  this  time  Zonaria  flava,  Z.  variegata,  Nitophyllum  medium, 
Polysiphonia  havanensis,  and  Spermothamnion  investiens.  The  Zonaria  variegata  and 
Polysiphonia  havanensis  were  found  only  once  and  may  have  been  brought  here  by  the 
Gulf  Stream,  but  the  other  three  species  were  not  uncommon  and  may  confidently  be 
believed  to  have  come  from  the  coral  reef  offshore.  Codium  tomentosum  was  collected 
in  December  and  April  but  not  in  the  intervening  months,  while  Dictyota  was  not 
found  there  until  after  its  occurrence  in  the  harbor  in  June.  Data  concerning  the  condi- 
tions and  algae  occurring  on  the  reef  in  winter  would  be  of  considerable  interest,  since  it 
seems  very  probable  that  several  species  persist  there  throughout  the  year. 


396 


BULLETIN   OF  THE    BUREAU    OF   FISHERIES. 


A  comparison  of  the  seasonal  distribution  of  the  Beaufort  species  which  are  found  at 
Woods  Hole  and  at  Naples  is  given  below,  the  numbers  referring  to  the  number  of  species 
and  varieties  common  to  Beaufort  found  in  the  other  localities  at  the  respective  seasons : 


Locality. 

Beaufort  summer  flora. 

Beaufort  spring  flora. 

Beaufort  perennial  flora. 

Winter. 

Sum- 
mer. 

Peren- 
nial. 

Winter. 

Spring. 

Sum- 
mer. 

Peren- 
nial. 

Winter. 

Sum- 
mer. 

Peren- 
nial. 

Woods  Hole  
Naples  

9 

13 

3 

\ 

1 

i 

16 

4 

4 

7 

4 
5 

In  this  case  many  of  the  species  recorded  above  for  winter  at  Naples  are  found  there 
from  autumn  through  spring,  and  some  of  the  species  recorded  for  summer  at  Woods 
Hole  are  found  there  in  spring  and  summer.  In  general,  though,  it  will  be  seen  that  the 
relationships  of  the  Beaufort  flora  are  greater  with  that  occurring  at  Woods  Hole  in 
summer  and  at  Naples  in  winter. 

The  relations  between  the  occurrence  of  any  single  species  and  the  temperature  are, 
however,  frequently  different  in  different  localities.  This  is  shown  below  where  there  is 
given  the  seasonal  distribution  of  five  species  at  Beaufort,  Naples,  and  Woods  Hole, 
with  the  range  of  the  average  temperature,  in  degrees  centigrade,  recorded  in  each 
locality  during  the  time  of  occurrence  of  each  species: 


Beaufort. 

Naples. 

Woods  Hole. 

Cbampia  parvula  
Chondria  dasyphylla  
Chondria  tenuisshna  
Dasya  pedicellata  
Polysiphonia  denudata  

April  to  December,  17.5  to 
27-9  to  ii.i". 
April  to  February,   17.5  to 
27.9  to  9.6°. 
April  to  June,  17.5  to  25.2°.  .  . 

December  to  June,  n.i  to 
9.  6  to  23.2°. 
July  to  October,  27.91019.2°. 

Autumn  to  spring,  25  to  8 
to  19°. 
Autumn  to  spring,  25  to  8 
to  19". 
Summer  to  autumn,  20  to  27 
to  18°. 
Spring  to  summer,  8  to  27°.  . 

Perennial,  8  to  27°  

>July  to  October,  20.43  to  20.97 
to  15.26°. 

It  will  be  observed  that,  while  all  of  these  species  have  the  same  seasonal  distri- 
bution at  Woods  Hole,  they  occur  at  different  seasons  at  Beaufort  and  at  Naples,  and, 
what  is  more  important,  they  appear  and  disappear  at  different  temperatures  in  each 
of  the  three  localities.  Further  studies  are  needed  to  explain  these  facts. 

Howe  (1914)  lists  the  following  species  found  at  and  near  Orient,  N.  Y.,  as  having 
been  gathered  in  Long  Island  Sound  during  the  month  February  7  to  March  7 :  Ulva 
lact-uca,  Chatomorpha  linum,  Sargassum  filipendula,  Agardhiella  tenera,  Champia  par-vula, 
Polysiphonia  nigrescens,  Ceramium  ruhrum,  Dertnatolithon  pustulatum.  While  further 
search  would  probably -increase  the  number  of  perennial  species  listed  for  Beaufort, 
there  is  no  evidence  that  Champia  or  Polysiphonia  persists  there  during  the  winter. 

VERTICAL. 

The  vertical  distribution  of  the  algae  at  Beaufort  is  exceedingly  limited,  the  total 
range  of  all  species  growing  in  the  harbor  being  only  about  2.2  m.,  from  the  usual  high- 
tide  line  to  about  1.4  m.  below  the  usual  lowest  low  tides.  In  fact,  except  at  Shackle- 
ford  jetties  and  the  outermost  jetty  at  Fort  Macon,  where  the  water  is  clearer  and  the 
algae  extend  deeper,  the  great  majority  of  algae  occur  within  a  zone  of  90  cm.,  from  the 
level  of  the  usual  lowest  low  tide  to  90  cm.  below  this.  A  careful  search  was  made  on 


MARINE   Al&JE   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  397 

the  inner  jetties  at  Fort  Macon  by  means  of  oyster  tongs  and  diving,  a  day  being  chosen 
when  the  water  was  about  15  cm.  below  the  usual  low  tides.  This  showed  algse  occur- 
ring abundantly  to  a  depth  of  about  75  cm.  below  the  usual  level,  then  becoming  scarcer 
and  ceasing  about  i  .4  m.  below  this  level,  none  being  found  as  low  as  i  .7  m.  In  October, 
1906,  one  of  the  jetties  at  Fort  Macon,  being  undermined  by  the  current,  sank  to  a  depth 
of  about  6  m.  When  the  rocks  of  this  jetty  were  dredged  up  the  following  July  they 
were  entirely  bare  of  algae,  although  in  the  previous  autumn  they  had  borne  numerous 
plants  of  Fucus,  Sargassum,  Dictyota,  Hypnea,  and  other  species  occurring  in  this 
locality. 

The  lower  limit  of  the  algae  in  this  region  is  undoubtedly  determined  by  the  turbidity 
of  the  water  and  the  consequent  great  diminution  of  the  light  penetrating  to  even 
moderate  depths.  It  has  been  shown  that  the  light  reaching  a  depth  of  90  cm.  has  an 
intensity  of  not  more  than  15  per  cent  of  that  of  full  sunlight,  and  that  from  60  cm.  to 
1.2  m.  there  is  a  great  decrease  in  the  strength  of  the  light.  It  will  be  observed  that  it 
is  just  at  these  depths  that  the  algae  become  scarcer  and  finally  cease. 

This  turbidity,  however,  besides  affecting  the  amount  of  light,  probably  itself  plays 
a  part  in  limiting  the  depth  to  which  the  algae  may  grow,  since  these  will  receive  sedi- 
ment from  all  the  water  above  them,  and  so  will  receive  more  deposits  the  greater  the 
depth  of  the  water  covering  them. 

It  is  worthy  of  note  that,  while  the  algae  in  the  harbor  grow  to  a  depth  of  only  1.4  m., 
those  on  the  coral  reef  grow  to  a  depth  of  25.5  m.  This  is  undoubtedly  due  to  the 
greater  clearness  of  the  water  over  this  reef.  All  of  the  plants  of  Brongniartella,  Dasya, 
Grinnellia,  and  Nitophyllum  gathered  from  this  reef  were  exceedingly  pale  in  color, 
being  much  paler  than  plants  of  Dasya  and  Grinnellia  growing  in  the  harbor  at  the  same 
time  or  than  plants  of  Brongniartella  and  Nitophyllum  observed  in  summer.  This  pale 
color  may  have  been  due  to  the  weak  light  occurring  at  that  depth  or  to  a  combination 
of  this  and  other  factors,  but  we  do  not  yet  know  enough  about  the  color  of  algae  to 
venture  an  explanation. 

Except  in  the  spring,  the  upper  limit  of  the  great  majority  of  algae  in  this  region  is 
determined  by  the  height  of  the  usual  lowest  low  tides.  Lyngbya  confervoides,  Hydro- 
coleum,  several  undeterminable  species  of  Myxophyceae,  mats  composed  of  minute  plants 
of  Enteromorpha,  Ulva,  Chaetomorpha,  and  Cladophora,  and  plants  of  Fucus,  Gelidium, 
Gymnogongrus,  and  Actinococcus  occur  between  tide  lines;  but,  except  for  these 
species  and  occasional  plants  growing  in  shaded  or  otherwise  especially  favorable  loca- 
tions, all  algae  occurring  here  in  summer  are  strictly  limited  to  the  zone  below  low  tide. 
This  is  undoubtedly  due  to  the  intense  insolation  and  heat  to  which  the  exposed  plants 
are  subjected,  the  air  temperature  sometimes  rising  to  36°  C.  At  the  time  of  the  spring 
tides,  when  the  range  of  tide  is  greatest,  low  tide  occurs  here  about  noon,  so  that  all  the 
algae  above  low  water  are  exposed  to  the  sun  during  the  hottest  part  of  the  day.  Plants 
of  Gracilaria,  Hypnea,  Chondria,  Herposiphonia,  and  Nitophyllum  have  frequently  been 
observed  with  a  part  or  all  of  their  thallus  exposed  by  successive  very  low  tides,  and  in 
every  case  they  had  been  killed  to  the  level  of  the  water.  Dictyota,  Padina,  and  Rosen- 
vingea  seemed  slightly  more  resistant,  since  plants  that  had  been  similarly  exposed 
appeared  uninjured  in  some  cases,  but  at  other  times  they  too  were  killed  to  the  water 
level.  While  a  single  very  low  tide,  caused  by  the  wind,  may  kill  the  exposed  parts  of 
the  most  tender  species,  it  has  little  effect  on  the  range  of  the  algae,  but  the  successive 


BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 


very  low  tides,  occurring  at  the  time  of  the  new  and  full  moons,  kill  every  plant  growing 
above  their  level,  with  the  exception  of  the  species  noted  above,  and  therefore  strictly 
determine  the  upper  limit  of  all  other  species  in  this  region. 

The  limits  of  the  species  growing  between  tide  lines  should  be  noted.  Entero- 
morpha,  Ulva,  Chaetomorpha,  and  Cladophora  may  be  neglected  in  this  connection,  since 
these  species  occur  here  as  mere  fragments  a  few  millimeters  tall  (in  some  being  scarcely 
more  than  resistant  holdfasts)  and  seem  to  merely  endure  the  exposure  between  tide 
lines.  Hydrocoleum  has  been  collected  only  one  time,  intertwined  with  Gelidium. 
Lyngbya  confervoides  forms  large  mats  covering  all  the  walls  and  many  of  the  jetties 
throughout  the  harbor  from  the  usual  low  tide  to  the  usual  high-tide  line.  Fucus  has 
about  the  same  vertical  range.  Gelidium  occurs  in  a  zone  about  60  cm.  wide,  from  about 
10  cm.  above  the  usual  low  tide  to  about  12  cm.  below  the  usual  high-tide  line.  Gym- 
nogongrus,  with  its  parasitic  Actinococcus,  occurs  from  about  10  cm.  below  to  about 
30  cm.  above  the  usual  low  tides.  All  of  these  species  are  enabled,  by  their  structure, 
to  endure  prolonged  exposure,  and  all  of  them  except  Gymnogongrus  seem  to  require 
emersion,  having  their  lower  limits  determined  by  the  height  of  the  usual  low  tides. 

As  the  great  majority  of  the  species  occurring  here  in  summer  are  restricted  by  the 
heat  to  the  zone  below  low  tides,  so  those  growing  here  in  winter  have  their  upper  limit 
determined  by  the  low-tide  line  on  account  of  the  cold,  the  air  temperature  sometimes 
falling  as  low  as  —9.5°  C.  No  living  algae  were  reported  above  low  water  during  the 
winter  of  1908-9,  all  plants  observed  above  this  line  appearing  dead.  While  it  is  prob- 
able that  more  careful  observation  would  show  the  presence  of  Lyngbya,  Fucus,  and 
possibly  Gelidium  and  Gymnogongrus  between  the  tide  lines,  nearly  all  the  species 
undoubtedly  have  their  upper  limit  determined,  as  in  summer,  by  the  height  of  the  low 
tides. 

In  April  and  May  many  species  occur  above  low  water,  but  even  at  this  time  the 
majority  are  restricted  to  the  zone  below  low  tides.  The  vertical  distribution  of  the 
species  observed  here  at  this  time  is  as  follows: 


OCCURRING   ONLY   ABOVE   LOW   TIDE. 

Lyngbya  confervoides. 
Leathesia  difformis. 
Porphyra  leucosticta. 
Gelidium  coerulescens. 
Gelidium  crinale. 

OCCURRING   ONLY   BELOW  LOW  TIDE. 

Enteromorpha  flexuosa. 

Chaetomorpha  melagonium  f .  rupincola. 

Cladophora  flexuosa. 

Bryopsis  plumosa. 

Ectocarpus  confervoides. 

Ectocarpus  siliculosus. 

Stilophora  rhizodes. 

Sargassum  filipendula. 

Agardhiella  tenera. 

Gracilaria  multipartita. 


Champia  parvula. 
Lomentaria  uncinata. 
Grinnellia  americana. 
Chondria  dasyphylla. 
Dasya  pedicellata. 
Polysiphonia  nigrescens. 
Ceramium  strictum. 

OCCURRING    BOTH    ABOVE    AND    BELOW   LOW    TIDE. 

Enteromorpha  linza. 
Enteromorpha  prolifera. 
Ulva  lactuca. 
Petalonia  fascia. 
Fucus  vesiculosus. 
Bangia  fusco-purpurea. 
Gymnogongrus  griffithsiae. 
Hypnea  musciformis. 
Chondria  tenuissima. 


MARINE   ALGJE  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  399 

It  is  worthy  of  note  that  Petalonia  and  Hypnea,  which  at  other  seasons  are  restricted 
to  the  zone  below  low  water,  now  extend  into  the  zone  between  the  tide  lines. 

With  the  vertical  distribution  so  limited,  there  is  naturally  little  opportunity  for 
the  formation  of  distinct  zones  other  than  those  occasioned  by  the  growth  of  species 
above  or  below  low  water.  While  some  species  occur  at  slightly  greater  depths  than 
others,  the  difference  is  so  slight  that  it  is  scarcely  capable  of  description. 

HORIZONTAL. 

The  horizontal  distribution  is  marked  by  a  decrease  in  the  number  of  both  species 
and  individuals  as  we  go  from  the  inlet  in  afiy  direction,  whether  into  the  harbor,  into 
Bogue  Sound,  or  into  Back  Sound.  The  summer  flora  is  the  only  one  that  has  been 
studied  in  this  connection.  At  this  time  the  Fort  Macon  jetties  bear  a  dense 
growth,  Padina,  Hypnea,  and  Chondria  dasyphylla  being  the  dominant  forms,  closely 
followed  by  Dictyota  and  Sargassum,  bearing  an  abundance  of  Acrochaetium  and  Herpo- 
siphonia,  with  Gymnogongrus,  Codium,  and  Gracilaria  multipartita  occurring  in  consider- 
able numbers  and  other  species  occasionally  present.  Between  the  jetties  are  numerous 
plants  of  Rosenvingea,  Chondria  sedifolia,  and  Dermatolithon  pustulatum  on  eel  grass 
(Zostera  marina),  while  the  innermost  jetties  bear  an  abundance  of  Fucus.  Lyngbya 
confervoides  and  Gelidium  ccerulescens  cover  the  rocks  and  shells  between  tide  lines  on  the 
jetties  and  along  the  shore. 

On  Shackleford  jetties  the  same  species  are  found  except  that  Chondria  dasyphylla 
is  lacking,  probably  because  this  brittle  species  is  unable  to  endure  the  strong  tidal 
currents  found  there.  •  Padina  is  the  dominant  species  at  this  place,  occurring  with 
Sargassum  in  great  fields  on  the  rocks  in  this  clear  water  to  a  depth  of  1.4  m.  Gracilaria 
multipartita  is  more  abundant  than  on  Fort  Macon  jetties  and  G.  confervoides  is  present 
in  large  numbers.  Rosenvingea,  Fucus,  and  Chondria  sedifolia  were  not  observed  here. 
Many  plants  of  Padina  growing  in  the  most  brightly  lighted  situations  were  slightly  but 
decidedly  calcified,  while  the  majority  of  the  plants  here  and  all  of  this  species  observed 
elsewhere  lacked  this  deposit. 

Along  the  shore  from  Fort  Macon  jetties  to  Bogue  Sound  no  algae  were  found,  prob- 
ably because  of  the  lack  of  places  suitable  for  attachment,  since  the  conditions 'here 
appear  especially  favorable  for  algal  growth. 

Of  the  77  species  and  varieties  recorded  for  the  harbor,  65  have  been  found  growing 
on  the  jetties  and  buoys  near  the  inlet;  the  12  species  not  found  here  being  as  follows: 


Chroococcus  turgidus? 
Hydrocoleutn  lyngbyaceum. 
Lyngbya  lutea. 
Oscillatoria  nigro-viridis. 
Ulva  fasciata. 
Ulva  lactuca  var.  latissima. 

159321°— 20 3 


Chaetomorpha  linum. 

Chsetomorpha  brachygona. 

Bryopsis  plumosa. 

Ectocarpus  duchassaingianus. 

Stilophora  rhizodes. 

Laurencia  tuberculosa  var.  gemmifera. 


400 


BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 


The  following  21  species  have  been  found  growing  only  in  the  vicinity  of  the  inlet: 

Eucheuma  gelidium. 
Rhodymenia  palmetta. 
Nitophyllum  medium. 
Herposiphonia  tenella. 
Polysiphonia  harveyi. 
Polysiphonia  denudata.0 
Callithamnion  polyspermum. 
Ceramium  tenuissimum  ? 
Grateloupia  filicina. 
Amphiroa  fragilissima. 


Enteromorpha  flexuosa. 
Enteromorpha  intestinalis. 
Chaetomorpha  melagonium  f.  rupincola. 
Cladophora  crystallina.0 
Rhizoclonium  riparium. 
Leathesia  difformis. 
Rosenvingea  orientalis. 
Dictyopteris  polypodioides. 
Spatoglossum  schroederi. 
Acrochaetium  dufourii. 
Acrochzetium  parvulum.0 

In  the  vicinity  of  the  laboratory  (on  Fivers  Island)  a  fairly  large  flora  occurs  along 
the  shores,  especially  around  this  island  and  along  the  town  front,  43  species  and  varieties 
having  been  found  growing  here,  as  follows : 


Chroococcus  turgidus? 
Hydrocoleum  lyngbyaceum. 
Lyngbya  confervoides. 
Lyngbya  lutea. 
Enteromorpha  linza. 
Enteromorpha  prolif  era. 
Ulva  fasciata. 

Ulva  lactuca  var.  latissima. 
Ulva  lactuca  var.  rigida. 
Chaetomorpha  linum. 
Bryopsis  plumosa. 
Codium  decorticatum. 
Codium  tomentosum. 
Ectocarpus  confervoides. 
Ectocarpus  siliculosus. 
Ectocarpus  mitchellae. 
Petalonia  fascia. 
Myrionema  strangulans. 
Stilophora  rhizodes. 
Fucus  vesiculosus. 
Sargassum  filipendula. 
Dictyota  dichotoma. 

These  algae  have  been  found  especially  north  and  southwest  of  Fivers  Island,  on  the 
laboratory  jetties  and  along  the  town  front,  apparently  because  these  localities  had  more 
places  suitable  for  attachment. 

Records  for  other  localities  in  this  region  have  been  obtained  only  for  the  summer. 
During  this  season  algae  are  scarce  in  the  harbor  beyond  the  vicinity  of  the  laboratory. 
Along  the  shores  of  the  marshes  north  of  Fivers  Island  and  north  of  Morehead  City  there 
have  been  found  only  four  species,  as  follows: 


Padina  vickersiae. 
Erythrotrichia  carnea. 
Porphyra  leucosticta. 
Acrochastium  hoytii. 
Acrochaetium  virgatulum. 
Acrochaetium  corymbiferum. 
Gelidium  coerulescens. 
Gymnogongrus  griffithsiae. 
Agardhiella  tenera. 
Gracilaria  confervoides. 
Gracilaria  multipartite. 
Hypnea  musciformis. 
Champia  parvula. 
Lomentaria  uncinata. 
Grinnellia  americana. 
Chondria  dasyphylla. 
Chondria  tenuissima. 
Dasya  pedicellata. 
Polysiphonia  nigrescens. 
Ceramium  strictum. 
Dermatolithon  pustulatum. 


Ulva  lactuca  var.  latissima. 
Fucus  vesiculosus. 


Gracilaria  confervoides. 
Hypnea  musciformis. 


No  algae  were  found  in  the  water  extending  into  the  marshes.     This  water  is  very 
muddy,  is  scarcely  affected  by  ordinary  tides,  and  frequently  is  very  hot. 


Found  growing  only  on  buoys. 


MARINE   Al&M  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C. 


401 


In  Newport  River  at  "Green  Rock,"  near  the  entrance  to  Core  Creek,  eight  species 
were  found  as  follows : 


Ulva  lactuca  var.  latissima. 
Ectocarpus  duchassaingianus. 
Dictyota  dichotoma. 
Gelidium  crinale. 


Gracilaria  multipartita. 

Hypnea  musciformis. 

Laurencia  tuberculosa  var.  gemmifera. 

Polysiphonia  sp. 


In  Bogue  Sound,  in  the  vicinity  of  Morehead  City  and  on  the  north  shore  of  Bogue 
Banks,  the  same  conditions  were  found  as  were  noted  on  the  marshes  north  of  Fivers 
Island,  and  a  similar  scarcity  of  algae  was  observed.  Owing  to  the  difficulty  of  navigating 
here  at  low  tide  and  the  fact  that  conditions  were  so  unfavorable  for  the  growth  of  algae, 
this  sound  was  not  explored  further. 

In  North  River  near  Lenoxville  there  were  found  six  species,  as  follows : 


Ulva  lactuca  var.  latissima. 
Ectocarpus  mitchellae. 
Dictyota  dichotoma. 


Gracilaria  confervoides. 
Gracilaria  multipartita. 
Hypnea  musciformis. 


In  Core  Sound  near  Marshallberg,  Lecklys  Island,  and  Davis  Island,  there  were 
found  the  following  10  species: 


Ulva  lactuca. 
Dictyota  dichotoma. 
Erythrotrichia  carnea. 
Gelidium  crinale. 
Agardhiella  tenera. 


Hypnea  musciformis. 
Gracilaria  confervoides. 
Gracilaria  multipartita. 
Chondria  sedifolia. 
Dermatolithon  pustulatum. 


In  Pamlico  Sound  at  Ocracoke  there  were  found  the  following  16  species: 


Chroococcus  turgidus? 
Lyngbya  semiplena. 
Spirulina  sp. 
Enteromorpha  prolifera. 
Ulva  lactuca. 
Ulvella  lens. 
Gomontia  polyrhiza. 
Ectocarpus  mitchellse. 


Acrochaetium  virgatulum. 
Gelidium  crinale. 
Eucheuma  gelidium. 
Gracilaria  multipartita. 
Hypnea  musciformis. 
Chondria  dasyphylla. 
Spyridia  filamentosa. 
Dermatolithon  pustujatum. 


Although  the  records  at  places  far  from  the  laboratory  were  made  from  only  one  or 
two  expeditions  to  these  localities,  they  are  believed  to  be  fairly  complete,  since  a 
thorough  search  was  made  at  each  place,  and  a  second  trip  always  verified  the  results 
obtained  on  a  previous  visit.  The  number  of  individuals  at  these  places  showed  the 
same  scarcity  as  the  number  of  species. 

It  will  be  observed  that  Ulva  lactuca,  Gracilaria  confervoides,  G.  multipartita,  and 
Hypnea  musciformis  were  most  often  present.  No  locality  permitting  the  growth  of 
any  alga  was  found  which  did  not  bear  at  least  three  of  these  species. 

The  decrease  in  the  algae  as  we  leave  the  inlet  may,  with  considerable  assurance,  be 
ascribed  to  two  factors,  decreased  density  and  increased  turbidity.  The  former  probably 
plays  a  part  and  may  determine  the  limits  of  some  of  the  species  found  only  near  the 
inlet,  but  the  main  factor  limiting  most  of  the  species  is  undoubtedly  the  greatly  increased 
turbidity.  Even  the  parts  of  this  region  that  have  sandy  and  shelly  bottoms  have  a 
thick  covering  of  mud,  and  the  water  throughout  the  harbor  and  sounds  is  very  turbid. 


4O2  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

Many  of  the  algae  growing  in  the  localities  noted  above  are  covered  with  mud  and  have  a 
pale,  sickly  appearance.  Under  such  conditions  it  is  not  surprising  that  the  number  of 
species  and  individuals  is  small. 

It  is  surprising,  however,  that  the  algae  were  not  more  abundant  in  Pamlico  Sound 
at  Ocracoke.  Here  are  several  jetties  and  piles  of  shells  that  would  seem  to  furnish 
excellent  habitats  for  algae.  Ocracoke  Inlet  (leading  directly  to  the  open  ocean)  is  only 
2  km.  away,  and  the  water  is  not  more  turbid  than  around  the  laboratory  in  Beaufort 
Harbor;  yet  only  14  species  were  found  there,  the  majority  of  the  species  that  are 
dominant  in  Beaufort  Harbor  being  entirely  lacking.  This  scarcity  may  be  due  in  part 
to  th*e  low  density  observed  there,  but  further  studies  are  needed  to  explain  these  facts. 

The  algae  collected  in  Newport  River  near  "Green  Rock"  were,  with  the  exception 
of  Gelidium,  mostly  unattached.  These  seem  to  be  plants  that  have  been  brought  here 
by  the  tide  and  are  continuing  their  existence  floating  near  the  bottom. 

It  is  worthy  of  note  that,  with  the  exception  of  fragments  of  Enteromorpha,  etc.,  on 
the  sand  breaks  at  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford,  no  algae  were  ever  observed  during  the 
Summer  growing  on  wood  in  Beaufort  Harbor.  Although  there  are  numerous  wharf, 
beacon,  and  railroad  piles  and  two  plank  walls  here  with  algae  attached  to  shells  and 
stones  near  their  bases,  not  a  single  specimen  of  algae,  not  even  Lyngbya,  was  ever  found 
on  these.  In  North  River,  Core  Sound,  and  Pamlico  Sound,  on  the  contrary,  there  were 
found  abundant  Lyngbya  and  several  plants  of  Enteromorpha,  Ectocarpus,  Dictyota, 
and  Hypnea  on  the  piles  of  wharves  and  beacons,  and  in  the  spring  Enteromorpha, 
Porphyra,  and  other  algae  grow  abundantly  on  the  wharf  piles  in  Beaufort  Harbor.  The 
reason  for  this  is  not  apparent,  but  it  seems  probable  that  it  is  caused  by  the  crowding 
out  of  the  algae  by  sponges,  barnacles,  ascidians,  and  other  animals  which  grow  abun- 
dantly on  these  piles. 

In  no  case  have  there  been  observed  large  numbers  of  animals  and  algae  growing 
together,  the  parts  of  both  rocks  and  buoys  which  bear  a  conspicuous  growth  of  algae 
being  comparatively  free  of  animals  and  vice  versa.  Studies  on  this  point  would  probably 
yield  some  interesting  data. 

OTHER  LOCALITIES. 

i 

No  extended  studies  have  been  made  at  any  place  other  than  Beaufort,  but  the 
observations  made  indicate  that  other  localities,  while  differing  considerably  in  detail,  are 
affected  by  the  same  general  factors  as  at  Beaufort.  With  some  exceptions  the  algae  are 
confined  to  the  zone  below  low-tide  line,  they  extend  scarcely  more  than  90  cm.  below  low 
water,  and  they  have  to  endure  great  turbidity.  At  no  place,  however,  was  there  found 
anything  approaching  the  number  of  species  or  of  individuals  observed  at  Beaufort. 
This  seemed  especially  surprising  in  the  case  of  Charleston,  S.  C.,  since  a  considerable 
number  of  species  has  been  reported  from  this  place  by  earlier  collectors.  Three  days  at 
different  times  during  July  and  August  were,  however,  spent  in  a  careful  search  of  this 
harbor,  including  James  Island,  Morris  Island,  Isle  of  Hope,  and  Isle  of  Palms,  without 
revealing  a  large  number  of  species  or  of  individuals.  While  the  records  below  were 
obtained  from  observations  made  on  short  visits  to  each  place,  they  represent  from  one 


MARINE   ALG.E   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C. 


403 


to  three  days'  work  in  each  locality  and  are  believed  to  give  a  fair  representation  of  the 
algae  present  at  these  times.     The  species  and  varieties  found  are  as  follows: 

BANKS  CHANNEL,  MASONBORO   SOUND,  WRIGHTSVILLE   BEACH,  N.  C. 


Ulva  lactuca. 
Codium  decorticatum. 
Codium  tomentosum. 
Ectocarpus  sp. 
Rosenvingea  orientalis. 
Dictyota  dichotoma. 


Lyngbya  sp. 
Enteromorpha  prolifera. 
Ulva  lactuca. 


Undetermined  Myxophyceae. 
Enteromorpha  prolifera. 


Gracilaria  confervoides. 
Gracilaria  multipartita. 
Hypnea  musciformis. 
Champia  parvula. 
Herposiphonia  tenella. 
Melobesia  sp. 


SOUTHPORT,  N.  C. 


Cladophora  fascicularis. 
Gracilaria  multipartita. 
Bostrychia  rivularis. 


GEORGETOWN,  S.  C. 

I  Ulva  lactuca. 


PAWLEYS  ISLAND,  NEAR  GEORGETOWN,  S.  C. 


Enteromorpha  prolifera. 
Codium  decorticatum. 
Codium  tomentosum. 
Gelidium  crinale. 
Hypnea  musciformis  (2  cm.  long). 


Chaetomorpha  linum. 
Gelidium  coerulescens. 
Agardhiella  tenera  ? 


Grinnellia  americana  (i  cm.  long). 
Dasya  pedicellata  (i  cm.  long). 
Herposiphonia  tenella. 
Polysiphonia  denudata?  (2  cm.  long). 


CHARLESTON,  S.  C. 


Gracilaria  confervoides. 
Gracilaria  multipartita. 
Grateloupia  gibbesii. 


PORT   ROYAL,  S.  C. 


Enteromorpha  linza. 

Enteromorpha  prolifera. 

Gracilaria  multipartita  var.  angustissima. 

Gracilaria  confervoides. 


Lomentaria  uncinata. 
Polysiphonia  harveyi. 
Polysiphonia  denudata. 


TYBEE,  GA. 

No  algae  except  undetermined  Myxophyceae  on  oyster  shells. 

METHODS  FOR  COLLECTING  AND  PRESERVING  ALG^E. 

Many  excellent  specimens  of  algae  may  be  gathered  from  the  beach,  where  they  are 
thrown  by  the  tides  and  waves,  but  satisfactory  collections  can  be  obtained  only  from 
the  places  where  they  are  growing.  Except  in  deep  water,  where  the  tide  makes  no 
appreciable  difference,  all  collections  should,  of  course,  be  made  at  low  tide.  The  algae 
are  procured  in  three  ways:  Those  growing  between  tide  lines  or  near  the  surface  are 
collected  by  hand;  at  a  greater  depth  they  may  be  gathered  by  long  hooks,  rakes,  or 
tongs;  while  those  growing  at  great  depths  are  obtained  by  dredging.  These  three 
methods  differ  greatly  in  their  relative  values.  Those  stations  which  may  be  reached 


404  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 

by  hand  can  be  thoroughly  searched  in  a  relatively  short  time,  while  those  which  are  at 
greater  depths  require  repeated  collections  extending  through  several  years  before  we 
can  be  reasonably  sure  of  having  a  fair  representation  of  the  species  growing  there. 
Collins  has  aptly  compared  the  collections  of  algae  obtained  by  dredging  with  those  of 
other  plants  which  might  be  gathered  from  a  large  field  on  a  dark  night  by  means  of  an 
aeroplane  and  a  long  rake.  In  clear,  still  water  the  use  of  a  glass-bottom  boat  or  bucket, 
enabling  one  to  see  the  algae  which  are  growing  at  considerable  depths,  may  be  used  to 
advantage,  but  in  this  region  one  can  not  see  farther  below  the  surface  with  a  glass- 
bottom  boat  than  without  it. 

The  large,  coarse  algae,  which  are  more  abundant  farther  north  and  are  represented 
here  only  by  Fucus,  need  no  special  care  after  being  collected,  but  most  other  algse  are 
easily  injured.  These  may  be  carried  for  a  short  time  in  an  ordinary  collecting  can  or 
other  vessel  that  will  protect  them  from  the  sun  and  keep  them  moist,  but  they  should 
be  placed  in  sea  water  as  soon  as  possible,  preferably  as  soon  as  they  are  collected.  In 
any  case,  a  large-mouthed  bottle  should  be  carried  to  hold  the  smaller,  more  delicate 
species  that  may  be  found. 

Farther  north,  where  the  air  temperature  is  much  higher  than  that  of  the  water, 
most  algae  die  soon  after  being  gathered,  since  they  can  not  endure  the  change  of  tempera- 
ture to  which  they  are  exposed;  but  in  this  region  algae  may  be  kept  for  days  in  jars  of 
sea  water,  provided  that  they  are  clean  and  that  very  few  specimens  are  placed  in  each  jar. 

For  preservation,  the  algae  should  be  dried.  Large,  coarse  species,  as  Fucus,  may 
be  dried  between  blotters  under  pressure  or  may  even  be  spread  out  and  allowed  to  dry 
in  the  air.  In  the  latter  case,  however,  it  is  difficult  to  make  them  lie  flat  when  it  is 
desired  to  mount  them  on  paper.  All  other  forms  should  be  mounted  on  paper  as  soon 
as  possible,  any  thick,  unglazed  paper  being  suitable  for  this.  With  the  larger,  more 
rigid,  specimens,  one  may  simply  shake  off  the  water  and  spread  these  out  on  the  paper. 
The  more  delicate  specimens  should  be  floated  in  sea  water,  the  paper  slipped  under  them, 
and  the  algae  arranged  on  the  paper,  needles  being  used  if  necessary.  The  hand  is  then 
placed  under  the  center  of  the  paper,  and  this,  bearing  the  specimen,  is  carefully  removed 
from  the  water.  The  alga  is  then  arranged  on  the  paper  in  the  position  that  shows  it  to 
greatest  advantage,  needles  and  water  dropped  carefully  upon  it  from  a  pipette  being 
most  useful  for  this  operation. 

Having  mounted  the  specimens,  one  should  then  dry  them  under  moderate  pressure 
between  plant  driers  or  blotters,  first  laying  some  thin,  white  cloth  over  the  algse  to  keep 
them  from  sticking  to  the  driers.  A  very  good  plant  press  may  be  made  from  boards 
weighted  with  stones.  The  driers  should  be  changed  at  least  twice  a  day  and  should 
be  thoroughly  dry  when  used.  Specimens  should  be  kept  in  the  press  until  all  moisture 
is  removed  from  them. 

Microscopic  forms  should  be  mounted  in  such  a  way  that  they  may  be  examined 
with  the  microscope,  thin  sheets  of  mica  being  good  for  this  purpose.  The  brittle  coral- 
lines are  always  difficult  objects  to  handle.  Some  of  them  may  be  pressed  flat  while 
living  and  may  then  be  fastened  to  paper  by  gummed  tape.  They  should  be  kept  in 
folders  to  preserve  any  fragments  that  may  be  broken  off.  Some  minute  algae  adhering 
closely  to  rocks  can  best  be  preserved  by  breaking  off  pieces  of  the  rock  on  which  they 
are  growing.  Any  specimens  that  do  not  adhere  to  paper  may  be  fastened  on  with 
gummed  tape. 


MARINE    ALG^E   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  405 

The  above  directions  will  serve  as  suggestions  for  beginners  and  will  hold  for  the 
majority  of  species,  while  the  experience  and  ingenuity  of  the  collector  will  enable  him 
to  devise  ways  to  handle  the  more  difficult  forms  that  may  be  found. 

ECONOMIC  USES  OF  ALXLE. 

From  a  utilitarian  standpoint  algae  are  of  value  in  four  ways:  (i)  As  food;  (2)  as  a 
source  of  glue,  gelatin,  and  agar-agar  for  jellies,  culture  media,  and  other  purposes; 
(3)  as  a  source  of  iodine,  potassium,  and  other  chemical  substances;  (4)  as  a  fertilizer 
which  may  be  applied  directly  to  the  soil. 

Since  the  substances  contained  in  algae  have  little  food  value,  their  use  as  food  must 
correspond  to  the  use  of  green  vegetables,  such  as  spinach  or  lettuce,  or  of  condiments. 
In  this  way  they  are  used  in  large  quantities  and  with  great  relish  in  other  countries. 
Of  the  genera  in  this  region,  Enteromorpha,  Ulva,  Codium,  Dictyota,  Porphyra,  Gracil- 
aria,  Hypnea,  Chondria,  and  probably  many  others  might  be  thus  employed.  Consid- 
erable information  regarding  the  use  of  algae  for  food  and  in  other  ways  is  given  by 
Smith  (1905),  by  Miss  Reed  (1907),  and  by  Howe  (1917). 

It  is  well  known  that  the  "Irish  moss,"  Chondrus  crispus,  of  more  northern  shores 
may  be  used  for  the  preparation  of  jelly  and  blancmange.  Only  one  species,  Gracilaria 
confervoides,  has  been  tested  here  for  this  purpose,  but  from  that  species  a  very  good 
jelly  was  obtained.  The  procedure  is  as  follows:  The  plants  of  Gracilaria  are  cleaned, 
washed,  bleached,  and  dried  in  the  sun  for  several  days,  being  repeatedly  washed  during 
this  time  with  fresh  water.  The  algae  is  then  heated  in  water  for  one  or  two  hours  to 
extract  the  gelatinizing  substances  and  is  strained.  The  resulting  strained  jelly  is 
sweetened  and  flavored  to  taste,  set  in  a  cool  place  to  harden,  and  is  served  with  cream. 
Blancmange  may  be  made  in  the  same  way,  using  milk  instead  of  water.  Other  gela- 
tinous algae,  as  Gelidium,  Agardhiella,  and  Gracilaria  rmiltipartita,  probably  could  be 
used  for  this  purpose  in  the  place  of  G.  confervoides. 

No  species  of  algae  occurs  in  this  region  in  sufficient  quantity  to  be  of  commercial 
value  for  the  manufacture  of  gelatin  or  agar-agar,  but  on  other  portions  of  our  coast 
gelatinous  algae  occur  in  large  numbers  and  probably  could  be  utilized  in  this  way.  In 
the  past  agar-agar  has  been  made  principally  in  Germany  from  algae  obtained  from 
Japan.  It  is  probable  that  experiments  would  show  that  this  could  be  made  from  algae 
growing  on  our  coasts,  provided  the  proper  algae  could  be  found  in  sufficient  quantities. 

The  algae  used  as  sources  of  iodine  and  potassium  are  the  rockweeds  and  kelps.  Of 
these  only  Fucus  occurs  in  this  region,  and  this  is  not  in  sufficient  quantities  to  be  of 
value. 

In  the  north  the  rockweeds  and  kelps  furnish  a  valuable  source  of  fertilizer,  which, 
after  rotting,  may  be  applied  directly  to  the  soil.  These  algae,  with  the  exception  of 
Fucus,  are  not  found  here,  and  no  other  species  grows  in  the  harbor  in  sufficient  quantity 
to  warrant  its  being  gathered  for  this  purpose.  After  hard  storms,  however,  algae  are 
found  on  Bogue  Beach  in  enormous  masses,  composed  principally  of  Zonaria  and  Sar- 
gassum.  If  these  were  gathered  and  allowed  to  rot  in  the  open,  where  they  would  be 
washed  free  of  salt  water,  they  would  probably  be  found  an  excellent  fertilizer  and 
would  supply  the  organic  matter  needed  by  a  very  sandy  soil. 


406  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

PART  II.     SYSTEMATIC  ACCOUNT  OF  THE  ALGiE. 
IDENTIFICATION  OF  ALG/E. 

The  main  groups  of  algae  are  usually  easily  distinguished,  since  they  differ  markedly 
in  their  structure  and  usually  in  their  color. 

The  Myxophyceae,  or  "blue-green  algae,"  consist  of  cells  of  relatively  simple  struc- 
ture living  singly  or  joined  into  loose  colonies  or  united  into  filaments;  they  are  usually 
gelatinous  and,  as  their  common  name  implies,  usually  have  a  dark,  blue-green  color. 
By  these  characters  they  are  easily  distinguished  from  all  others. 

The  Chlorophyceae,  or  "green  algae,"  consist  of  single  cells,  filaments,  sheets,  or 
more  complex  structures.  If  the  structures  are  complex,  they  are  not  composed  of 
closely  packed  cells,  but  of  interwoven  filaments  which  are  easily  seen  when  teased  apart 
and  examined  with  slight  magnification.  They  are  light  or  dark  yellow  green,  the  color 
of  grass  and  leaves,  and  are  not  likely  to  be  mistaken  for  any  other  group.  Some  of  them 
are  encrusted  with  lime. 

The  Phaepphyceae,  or  "brown  algae,"  are  easily  distinguished  by  their  brown  color, 
which  may,  however,  have  the  shade  of  walnut  or  mahogany,  or  may  tend  toward  olive 
green.  They  consist  of  filaments  or  of  more  or  less  complex  cellular  structures. 

The  Rhodophyceae,  or  "red  algae,"  consist  of  filaments,  sheets,  irregular  aggre- 
gations, or  complex  cellular  structures  of  various  forms.  They  sometimes  furnish  diffi- 
culties to  beginners,  since  their  color  and  form  are  extremely  various,  the  former  ranging 
from  red  or  pink  to  dark  purple  on  the  one  side  and  to  a  decided  green  on  the  other.  If 
green,  they  may  be  distinguished  by  the  fact  that  their  structure,  at  least  in  part,  shows 
a  close  cellular  arrangement  and  does  not  consist  entirely  of  interwoven  filaments.  A 
still  surer  character  for  fertile  specimens,  once  it  has  been  recognized,  is  the  fruit  borne 
by  all  but  the  simplest  members  of  this  group.  This  is  the  cystocarp,  which  consists 
essentially  of  a  mass  of  spores  radiating  from  a  common  center  and  surrounded  by  a 
sterile  jacket  of  some  sort.  This  may  be  immersed  and  relatively  inconspicuous  but 
frequently  forms  more  or  less  conspicuous  conical  projections  above  the  surface.  Even 
when  immersed  it  is  usually  plainly  seen  as  it  is  borne  in  a  swollen  part  of  the  frond. 

While,  however,  the  main  divisions  are  easily  distinguished,  the  smaller  groups 
often  furnish  considerable  difficulty.  Once  they  have  been  seen,  the  genera  of  the  blue- 
green,  green,  and  brown  algae  may  usually  be  easily  recognized,  or  may  even  be  identified 
with  certainty  from  illustrations,  but  it  is  often  difficult  to  place  a  given  specimen  of  red 
algae  in  its  proper  genus  or  even  in  its  proper  family  or  order.  In  many  cases  species 
of  all  the  divisions  are  distinguished  with  great  difficulty  and  only  after  careful  study 
and  comparison  of  many  specimens.  It  can  not  be  hoped,  therefore,  that  the  following 
descriptions  will  enable  a  determination  to  be  made  in  every  case.  It  should  be  borne 
in  mind  by  a  beginner  that,  while  many  forms  may  be  recognized  at  a  glance,  others 
require  much  study  and  can  be  determined  only  when  all  the  distinguishing  characters 
are  present.  Frequently  forms  must  be  left  undetermined  because  the  material  is  not 
sufficient.  One  should,  therefore,  collect  an  abundance  of  every  unknown  species.  In 
all  cases  it  is  desirable  to  compare  the  specimens  with  some  that  have  been  correctly 
determined,  since  one  good  specimen  will  convey  a  better  idea  of  the  species  than  it  is 
possible  to  get  from  pages  of  description.  Those  using  the  keys  given  here  should 
remember  that  these  are  made  only  for  the  species  that  have  been  found  in  this  region, 
and  if  used  in  other  regions  or  if  other  species  should  be  found  here,  they  may 
lead  the  beginner  astray. 


MARINE  ALG^E  OF  BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  407 

CLASSIFICATION  AND  DESCRIPTION  OF  SPECIES. 

KEY   TO   DIVISIONS. 

a.  Thallus  composed  of  single  cells  or  of  rather  short  filaments;  multiplication  purely  vege- 
tative, either  by  simple  cell  division  or  by  means  of  hormogonia  or  gonidia;  color 
usually  blue-green.../ , . . . .  I.  MYXOPHYCE^E  (p.  407). 

aa.  Thallus  composed  of  single  cells,  or  filamentous,  or  forming  tubes  or  sheets  or  complex 
structures  of  various  shapes  composed  of  closely  interwoven  filaments;  multiplica- 
tion asexual  or  sexual — asexual  by  fragmentation  or  by  motile  zopspores  or  by  aki- 
netes,  sexual  by  similar  or  dissimilar  motile  or  nonmotile  gametes;  color  usually 
grass-green II.  CHLOROPHYCE^  (p.  417). 

aaa.  Thallus  filamentous  or  forming  complex  structures  of  various  shapes;  multiplication 
asexual  or  sexual — asexual  by  motile  biciliate  zoospores  or  by  aplanospores  or  by 
certain  portions  of  the  thallus,  sexual  by  similar  or  dissimilar  motile  or  nonmotile 
gametes,  in  some  genera  by  distinct  eggs  and  sperms;  color  usually  brown,  some- 
times shading  to  yellowish  or  to  olivaceous  green III.  PILEOPHYCE.3J  (p.  435). 

aaaa.  Thallus  filamentous  or  forming  sheets  or  complex  structures  of  various  shapes;  multi- 
plication asexual  or  sexual — asexual  usually  by  nonmotile  spores  usually  produced 
four  in  a  sporangium,  sexual  by  nonmotile  male  gametes  (spermatia)  and  nonmotile 
female  gametes  remaining  inclosed  within  special  organs  (carpogonia),  usually  with 
the  association  of  special  cells  (auxiliary  cells),  a  fruit  of  a  special  kind  (cystocarp) 
usually  being  formed  as  the  result  of  fertilization ;  color  usually  some  shade  of  red, 
purple,  or  pink,  sometimes  green  or  blackish IV.  RHODOPHYCE^  (p.  462). 

Division  I.  MYXOPHYCEAE  (Wallroth)  Stizenberge/.0 

Myxophykea  Wallroth,  1833,  p.  4. 
Chlorospermeae,  in  part.  Harvey,  1858,  p.  i. 
Myxophyceae,  Stizenberger,  in  Rabenhorst,  1860,  p.  18. 
Cryptophyceae,  Thuret,  in  Le  Jolis,  1863,  p.  13. 
Cyanophycese,  Sachs,  1874,  p.  248. 
Schizophyceae,  Cohn,  1879,  p.  279. 
Cryptophyceae,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  26. 
Myxophyceae,  Forti,  in  De  Toni,  1907,  p.  i. 
Myxophyceae,  Tilden,  1910,  p.  i. 

BLUE-GREEN  ALG^B,  FISSION  ALG^. 

Algae  typically  blue-green,  possessing  within  their  cells  endochrome  composed  of 
chlorophyll  and  a  characteristic  blue  pigment;  pigments  of  other  colors  sometimes 
present;  endochrome  diffuse,  rarely  gathered  in  large,  sharply  defined  bodies.  Thallus 
variable  in  form  and  size,  unicellular  or  multicellular,  sometimes  having  a  peculiar 
motion;  plants  usually  in  gelatinous  masses,  sometimes  solitary  among  other  algae. 
Multiplication  purely  vegetative;  either  by  simple  cell  division  in  one,  two,  or  three 
planes;  or  by  means  of  hormogonia  (multicellular  fragments  of  the  thallus,  at  first 
motile,  afterwards  coming  to  rest);  or  by  means  of  nonmotile  gonidia  formed  within 
gonidangia;  or  by  means  of  resting  gonidia  (formed  from  ordinary  cells).  Algse  living 
for  the  most  part  in  fresh  or  salt  water,  sometimes  aerial,  more  rarely  endophytic;  the 
individual  cells  and  filaments  microscopic  in  size;  sometimes  brown,  violet,  gold,  or 
reddish. 

About  1,500  species  described,  representatives  occurring  in  all  parts  of  the  world, 
at  extreme  variations  of  temperature. 

a  This  group  is  often  treated  as  a  class  under  the  division  Schizophyta.  which  then  includes  the  Myxophyceae.  or  as  they  are 
sometimes  called,  the  Schizophyceae  (the  blue-green  algae),  and  the  Schizomycetes  (the  bacteria). 


408  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

This  division,  well  represented  in  most  regions,  here  forms  a  very  small  part  of  the 
marine  flora,  only  10  genera  and  10  species  having  been  obtained  in  quantities  sufficient 
for  determination. 

KEY  TO  ORDERS. 

Plants  unicellular,  single,  or  associated  in  families,  which  are  usually  surrounded  by  a  gela- 
tinous integument,  not  filamentous i.  COCCOGONE/E  (p.  408). 

Plants  multicellular  (except  Spirulina),  filamentous 2 .  HORMOGONE^  (p.  409). 

OrUer  1.     Coccogonese  (Thuret)  Kirchner. 

Plants  unicellular,  single,  or  associated  in  families  or  colonies,  which  are'  usually 
surrounded  by  a  copious  gelatinous  integument,  rarely  forming  filaments;  multiplica- 
tion occurs  commonly  by  the  vegetative  division  of  cells,  rarely  by  the  formation  of  foHr 
or  more  nonmotile  gonidia  arising  from  the  division  of  the  contents  of  a  cell 
(gonidangium). 

Family  1.  CHROOCOCCACE^E  Naegeli. 

Cells  solitary  or  associated  in  families,  showing  no  difference  between  basal  and 
apical  regions;  multiplication  usually  by  simple  division  of  the  cells. 

Unicellular  algae,  entirely  uniform,  occurring  singly  or  more  often  in  clusters  which 
are  conspicuous  even  to  the  naked  eye,  the  cells  grouped  without  order  in  a  common 
sheath.  Cells  spherical,  oval  or  elongate,  sometimes  fusiform,  cuneate,  or  squarish. 
Extremely  minate  bodies  containing  diffuse  blue,  aeruginous,  or  even  purple,  olive, 
brown,  or  yellow  coloring  matter  occur  in  the  cells.  The  cell  wall  is  sometimes 
thin  and  delicate,  sometimes  thick,  often  surrounded  by  a  structureless,  gelatinous 
sheath  which  holds  the  cells  together  for  many  generations  and  forms  families  variable 
in  number  and  appearance  of  the  cells.  Divisions  usually  in  three  planes  forming 
families  irregularly  grouped,  but  also  in  two  planes  forming  layers  of  sheetlike  families, 
or  even  in  one  plane,  forming  families  at  first  linear,  then  by  mechanical  action  irregularly 
grouped  and  contorted.  Propagation  in  the  Chroococcaceae  living  singly  does  not  occur 
except  by  the  vegetative  division  of  the  cells,  in  those  species  living  gregariously  it  occurs 
either  by  the  separation  of  a  single  cell  or  by  the  splitting  up  of  an  old  family  into  several 
families.  Spores  provided  with  a  thickened  resistant  wall  have  been  observed  occa- 
sionally in  species  of  Gloeocapsa;  these  arise  from  the  vegetative  cells  and  are  formed 
by  the  repeated  division  of  the  contents  or  by  the  dissolution  of  the  membrane. 

About  300  species,  mostly  in  fresh  water,  less  often  in  salt  water  or  in  damp  places 
or  aerial,  throughout  the  world. 

Genus  Chroococcus  Naegeli. 
Chroococcus  Naegeli,  1849.  P-  45- 

Cells  globose,  or  by  mutual  pressure  more  or  less  angular,  each  surrounded  by  a 
more  or  less  definite  sheath ;  solitary  or  associated  in  families  composed  of  two  or  four, 
rarely  more,  individuals,  but  not  held  together  in  definite  colonies  by  a  common  gelat- 
inous sheath;  cell  wall  thin  or  wide,  homogeneous  or  lamellose,  colorless  or  colored; 
cell  contents  homogeneous  or  granular,  aeruginous  or  blue-green,  sometimes  yellowish  or 
orange  or  violet;  multiplication  by  successive  division  of  the  cells  alternately  in  three 
planes;  free  floating  or  forming  a  gelatinous  or  crustlike  mass  in  damp  places. 


MARINE   ALG^E  OF  BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  409 

Forty-eight  species,  mostly  in  fresh  water  or  in  damp  places,  some  in  salt  water, 
some  in  the  tissues  of  other  plants;  throughout  the  world. 
Chroococcus  turgidus  (Kuetzing)  Naegeli. 

Protococcus  turgidus,  Kuetzing.  1845,  torn,  i,  pi.  6,  f.  i. 

Chroococcus  turgidus,  Naegeli,  1849,  p.  46. 

Chroococcus  turgidus,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  27. 

Chroococcus  turgidus,  Wolle,  1887,  p.  334.  pi.  210,  f.  40-41. 

Chroococcus  turgidus,  Forti,  in  De  Toni,  1907,  p.  n. 

Chroococcus  turgidus,  Tilden,  1910,  p.  5,  pi.  i,  f.  3. 

P.  B.  -A.  Nos.  751,  2202. 

Cells  spherical,  oblong-elliptical,  or  more  or  less  angular  from  mutual  pressure,  single  or  associated 
in  families  of  two,  four,  rarely  eight,  13  to  25,  rarely  40  mic.  in  diameter;  sheaths  thick,  usually  lamellose, 
hyaline,  cell  wall  thin,  cell  contents  pale  blue-green,  homogeneous,  later  becoming  brownish  and 
granular. 

On  moist  rocks  and  occasionally  in  salt  marshes  throughout  the  world. 

Very  abundant,  with  Microcoleus  chthonoplastes  and  Plectonema  battersiion  ocean  beach  at  Ocracoke, 
N.  C.  (?);  covering  many  square  meters  just  beyond  high-tide  line,  August,  1907,  on  shells  in  Pamlico 
Sound;  fairly  abundant  on  rocks  and  shells  and  on  Gelidium  coerulescens,  Fort  Macon  and  Duncan 
breakwater,  Beaufort,  N.  C.  (?),  forming  small  masses  not  visible  to  the  naked  eye. 

The  material  from  Core  Sound  and  from  Beaufort  seemed  to  belong  to  this  species  but  occurred  so 
scatteringly  that  it  could  not  be  obtained  in  sufficient  quantity  for  a  positive  determination. 

Order  2.     Hormogoneae  (Thuret)  Kirchner. 

Nostochineae,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  29. 

Plants  multicellular,  rarely  unicellular  (Spirulina),  filamentous,  attached  to  a  sub- 
stratum or  free  floating;  filaments  simple  or  branched,  usually  consisting  of  one  or  more 
rows  of  cells  within  a  sheath ;  multiplication  occurs  by  means  of  hormogonia  or  resting 
gonidia. 

KEY  TO  FAMILIES. 

a.  Filaments  attenuated  at  apex,  usually  tapering  to  a  hair;  attached  at  base.  .4.  RIVULARIACE^  (p.  416). 

aa.  Filaments  never  'tapering  to  a  hairlike  apex b. 

b.  Filaments  simple  or  branched,  if  branched  having  several  or  many  trichomes  within 

each  sheath,  heterocysts  lacking i.  OSCILLATORIACE/E  (p.  409). 

bb.  Filaments  simple,  heterocysts  present 2.  NosTOCACE^E  (p.  414). 

bbb.  Filaments  (or  trichomes)  regularly  branched,  having  only  one  trichome  within  the 

sheath,  heterocysts  present 3.  SCYTONEMACE/E  (p.  415). 

Family  1.     OSCILLATORIACEJE  (Gray)  Kirchner. 

Trichomes  simple,  composed  of  similar  vegative  cells,  rarely  unicellular,  usually 
surrounded  by  a  sheath;  filaments  simple  or  rather  sparsely  branched,  containing  one  or 
more  trichomes;  filaments  and  trichomes  rarely  occurring  scattered,  -usually  forming 
scum,  membranes,  mats,  etc.;  propagation  by  hormogonia;  no  heterocysts. 

Usually  blue-green,  less  often  violet  or  brownish,  rarely  red.  Cells  usually  short- 
cylindrical  or  disk-shaped;  less  often  barrel-shaped,  in  Spirulina  long  cylindrical  and 
spirally  twisted.  Apical  cell  rounded  or  wedge-shaped,  sometimes  calyptrate,  some- 
times tapering  slightly.  Filaments  usually  straight,  often  curved  or  spirally  twisted  at 
the  apices,  in  certain  genera  spirally  twisted  throughout  the  entire  length.  Often 
several  trichomes  occur  within  a  single  more  or  less  coarse  sheath,  forming  a  single  fila- 
ment. Sheaths  sometimes  delicate  and  inconspicuous,  sometimes  coarse,  even  exceeding 
the  diameter  of  the  trichome;  walls  of  sheaths  sometimes  very  firm,  sometimes  gelat- 


410  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

inous,  so  that  they  adhere  together  very  easily.  Propagation  occurs  by  hormogonia— 
longer  or  shorter  fragments  of  trichomes,  breaking  out  the  sheaths  and  moving  of  them- 
selves by  circumnutation  in  the  water,  then,  the  movement  ceasing,  sheaths  are  formed 
and  cell  division  commences.  In  the  genera  without  sheaths— e.  g.,  Oscillatoria,  Spiru- 
lina — the  movements  persist  throughout  their  life. 

The  Oscillatoriacese  inhabit  principally  moist,  aerated  places;  many  live  in  water 
containing  decaying  organic  matter;  some  are  incrusted  with  calcium  carbonate;  some 
thrive  in  temperatures  as  high  as  85°  C. 

About  550  species  throughout  the  world. 

The  members  of  this  family  are  usually  easily  distinguished  in  that  they  do  not  taper 
to  long  hairs  at  the  apices,  they  lack  heterocysts,  and  in  the  majority  of  cases  are  un- 
branched.  The  only  species  found  in  this  region  that  is  likely  to  be  wrongly  identified  as 
belonging  to  this  family  is  Plectonema  battersii,  one  of  the  Scytonemaceae.  This  species 
lacks  hairlike  apices  and  heterocysts  and  might  easily  be  taken  for  one  of  the  branching 
Oscillatoriaceae.  From  these  it  can  be  easily  distinguished  by  the  fact  that  it  has  only 
one  trichome  within  a  sheath,  while  both  Hydrocoleum  and  Microcoleus  have  several  or 
many  trichomes  within  each  sheath. 

KEY  TO   GENERA. 

a.  Sheaths  absent 6. 

6.  Trichomes  straight  or  nearly  so,  multicellular i.  Oscillatoria  (p.  410). 

bb.  Trichomes  forming  a  regular  spiral,  unicellular 2.  Spirulina  (p.  411). 

aa.  Sheaths  present c. 

c.  Filaments  consisting  of  one  trichome  within  each  sheath,  simple d. 

d.  Sheaths  swollen,  gelatinous,  filaments  more  or  less  .agglutinated 3.  Phormidium  (p.  411). 

dd.  Sheaths  not  swollen,  firm,  filaments  free  or  forming  a  tangled  mat,  not  agglutinated 

4-  Lyngbya  (p.  411). 

cc.  Filaments  consisting  of  several  trichomes  within  a  single  sheath,  simple  or  branched . e. 

e.  Filaments  consisting  of  few  trichome  swi  thin  a  single  sheath,  trichomes  of  ten  loosely 

aggregated .5.  Hydrocoleum  (p.  413). 

ee.  Filaments  consisting  of  numerous  trichomes  within  a  single  sheath,   trichomes 

densely  aggregated,  often  twisted  into  ropelike  bundles 6.  Microcoleus  (p.  413). 

Genus  i.  Oscillatoria  Vaucher,  ex  Gomont. 

Oscillatoria,  Vaucher,  1803,  p.  165. 
Oscillaria,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  32. 
Oscillatoria,  Gomont,  1892,  tome  16,  p.  198. 

Trichomes  cylindrical,  free,  usually  motile,  without  a  sheath  or  rarely  inclosed  in  a 
very  thin,  fragile,  mucous  sheath,  sometimes  constricted  at  the  joints,  not  moniliform, 
often  attenuated  at  the  apices,  straight  or  curved  or  more  or  less  regularly  corkscrew- 
shaped  in  some  species,  but  not  constantly  spiral ;  outer  wall  of  apical  cejl  thickened  in 
some  species,  forming  a  calyptra. 

About  100  species  in  fresh  or  salt  water,  sometimes  in  hot  springs  or  on  moist  earth, 
throughout  the  world. 

Oscillatoria  nigro-viridis  Thwaites,  ex  Gomont. 

Oscillatoria  nigro-viridis,  Thwaites,  in  Harvey,  1851,  pi.  2sia. 

Oscillaria  limosa  var.  chalybea,  Farlow,  1882   p.  33. 

Oscillatoria  nigro-viridis,  Gomont,  1892,  tome  16,  p.  217,  pi.  6,  f.  20. 

Oscillatoria  nigro-viridis ,  Forti,  in  De  Toni,  1907,  p.  161. 

Oscillatoria  nigro-viridis,  Tilden,  1910,  p.  69. 

P.  B.-A.  No.  1056. 


MARINE   ALG;E   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  411 

Plant  mass  very  dark  olive  green;  trichomes  moderately  long,  rather  straight,  fragile,  constricted  at 
joints,  arcuate  toward  the  extremities,  tapering  and  obtuse  at  the  apices,  7  to  n  mic.  in  diameter,  cells 
3  to  5  mic.  long;  apical  cell  somewhat  capitate  with  convex  and  slightly  thickened  outer  wall;  trans- 
verse walls  granulated,  cell  contents  pale  green  or  olive. 

Maine  to  West  Indies;  Washington;  Europe;  Australia. 

Several  large  masses  floating  in  harbor,  August,  1909,  in  sparse  tufts  on  marine  grasses,  shoals  west 
of  laboratory,  and  near  "Green  Rock,"  Beaufort,  N.  C. 

A  few  other  specimens  belonging  to  this  genus  have  been  found  at  Beaufort  in  small 
quantities  on  shells  or  marine  plants,  or  growing  directly  on  sandy  shoals  between  tide 
lines,  but  none  has  been  obtained  in  sufficient  quantity  for  a  specific  determination. 

Genus  2.  Spirulina  Turpin,  ex  Gomont. 

Spirulina,  Turpin,  1827.  tome  50,  p.  309. 
Spirulina,  Gomont,  1892,  tome  16,  p.  249. 

Trichomes  unicellular,  thin,  cylindrical,  without  a  sheath,  forming  a  regular,  rather 
loose  or  close  spiral,  having  a  characteristic  spiral  movement;  apex  not  tapering,  cell 
contents  homogeneous  or  slightly  granular. 

Twenty-one  species  in  fresh  or  salt  water,  gathered  into  a  continuous  layer  or 
scattered  among  other  algae,  in  America,  Europe,  Africa,  and  Australia. 

A  few  filaments  of  an  undetermined  species  of  Spirulina  were  found  on  shells  in 
Pamlico  Sound  at  Ocracoke,  N.  C. 

Genus  3.  Phormidium  Kuetzing,  ex  Gomont. 

Phormidium,  Kuetzing,  1843,  p.  190. 
Phormidium,  Gomont,  1892,  tome  16,  p.  156. 

Filaments  showing  evident  sheaths,  unbranched,  agglutinate,  usually  forming  a  felt- 
like  mat  with  free  ends  torn  and  ragged,  attached  at  the  base  or  rarely  floating;  sheaths 
thin,  transparent,  mucous,  adhering  to  each  other,  partly  or  entirely  diffluent;  trichomes 
constricted  at  the  joints  in  some  species,  sometimes  even  becoming  moniliform,  straight 
or  curved  but  never  regularly  spiral,  often  tapering  toward  the  apices,  outer  wall  of 
apical  cell  thickened,  in  some  species,  to  form  a  calyptra. 

About  70  species,  usually  terrestrial  or  in  fresh  water,  some  species  marine. 

Many  filaments  of  an  alga  apparently  belonging  to  this  genus,  but  insufficient  for 
specific  determination,  were  found  on  the  hydroids  inhabited  by  Acrochcetium  infestans 
growing  on  Dictyota  dichotoma  dredged  from  the  coral  reef  offshore,  August,  1914. 
These  filaments  had  trichomes  0.75  to  1.5  mic.  in  diameter  with  cells  0.75  to  3.0  (mostly 
i  to  2)  diameters  long,  and  were  closely  adherent  to  the  stalks  and  rhizomes  of  the 
hydroids. 

Genus  4.  Lyngbya  Agardh,  ex  Gomont. 

Lyngbya,  Agardh.  1824.  p.  XXV. 
Lyngbya,  Gomont,  1892,  tome  16,  p.  116. 

Filaments  possessing  evident  sheaths,  free,  unbranched,  free  floating,  or  forming 
a  densely  intricate  floccose  or  expanded  mass;  sheaths  firm,  of  variable  thickness,  some- 
times lamellose,  colorless  or  rarely  yellow  brown;  trichomes  sometimes  constricted  at 
the  joints,  obtuse  or  slightly  tapering  at  the  apices,  outer  wall  of  apical  cell  sometimes 
thickened,  forming  a  calyptra. 

Seventy-five  species  in  fresh  or  salt  water  throughout  the  world. 


412  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

Trichomes  9  to  25  mic.  in  diameter,  cells  2  to  4  mic.  long;  sheaths  up  to  5  mic.  thick,  color- 
less, later  becoming  lamellose;  apex  not  tapering,  no  calyptra,  transverse  walls  usually 
granulated i  •  L.  confervoides  (p.  412). 

Trichomes  5  to  12  mic.  in  diameter,  cells  2  to  3  mic.  long;  sheaths  up  to  3  mic.  thick,  colorless, 
lamellose  with  age;  apex  slightly  tapering,  furnished  with  calyptra,  transverse  walls  fre- 
quently granulated 2.  L.  semiplena  (p.  412). 

Trichomes  2.5  to  6  mic.  in  diameter,  cells  1.5  to  5.5  mic.  long;  sheaths  thin,  colorless,  later 
becoming  thick  and  lamellose ;  apex  not  tapering,  furnished  with  calyptra,  transverse  walls 
usually  not  distinct 3.  L.  lutea  (p.  413). 

1.  Lyngbya  confervoides  Agardh,  ex  Gomont. 

Lyngbya  confervoides,  Agardh,  1824,  p.  73. 

Lyngbya  confervoides,  Harvey,  1858,  p.  103,  pi.  470. 

Lyngbya  nigrescens,  Harvey.  1858,  p.  102,  pi.  4?d. 

Lyngbya  luteo-fusca,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  35  (excluding  synonyms). 

Lyngbya  confervoides,  Gomont,  1892,  tome  16,  p.  136,  pi.  3,f  .j-5. 

Lyngbya  confervoides,  Forti.  in  De  Toni,  1907,  p.  271. 

Lyngbya  confervoides,  Tilden,  1910,  p.  119.  pi.  5,  f.  39. 

A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  48  (L.  luteo-fusca). 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  255,  1106. 

Plant  mass  abqut  5  cm.  in  height,  forming  extensive  mats  or  an  intricate  ragged  mass,  fasciculate, 
mucous;  dull  yellowish  or  dark  green,  sometimes  violet  when  dry;  filaments  tangled,  long,  straight, 
somewhat  rigid,  ascending  from  a  decumbent  base;  sheaths  up  to  5  mic.  thick,  colorless,  later  becoming 
lamellose  and  roughened  on  the  surface;  trichomes  not  attenuated  at  the  apices,  not  constricted  at  the 
joints,  9  to  25  mic.  in  diameter,  cells  2  to  4  mic.  long,  apical  cell  rotund,  no  calyptra;  transverse  walls 
usually  granulated;  cell  contents  olive  or  bjue-green. 

Maine  to  Florida;  Nebraska;  West  Indies;  warm  and  temperate  waters  everywhere. 

Very  abundant  on  rocks  and  shells  along  town  front,  especially  on  Duncan  breakwater,  very  abun- 
dant on  rocks  of  Fort  Macon  jetties,  and  less  abundant  on  rocks  of  Shackleford  jetty,  Beaufort,  N.  C. 
Forms  the  uppermost  zone  of  algae  occurring  up  to  the  median  high-tide  line,  sometimes  mixed  with 
minute  specimens  of  Cladophora,  Chaetomorpha,  and  Enteromorpha,  sometimes  forming  pure  growths 
over  large  areas.  April  to  October,  probably  throughout  the  year.  This  is  the  only  species  belong- 
ing to  the  Myxophycese  that  has  been  found  at  Beaufort  in  sufficient  quantity  to  be  conspicuous. 

2.  Lyngbya  semiplena  (Agardh)  J.  Agardh,  ex  Gomont. 

Calothriz  semiplena,  Agardh,  1827,  p.  634. 

Lyngbya  semiplena,  ].  Agardh,  1842,  p.  n. 

Lyngbya  semiplena,  Gomont,  1892,  tome  16,  p.  138,  pi.  3,  f.  7-11. 

Lyngbya  semiplena,  Forti,  in  De  Toni,  1907,  p.  273. 

Lyngbya  semiplena,  Tilden,  1910,  p.  118,  pi.  5,  f.  38. 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  5,  1059,  1452. 

Plant  mass  rarely  beyond  3  cm.  in  height,  forming  extensive  mats,  mucous;  usually  dull  yellowish 
or  dark  green,  becoming  dark  violet  when  dry;  filaments  ascending  from  a  decumbent  tangled  base, 
soft,  flexuous;  sheaths  up  to  3  mic.  thick,  colorless,  somewhat  mucous,  lamellose  with  age;  trichomes 
slightly  attenuated  at  the  apices,  not  constricted  at  the  joints,  5  to  12  mic.  in  diameter,  cells  2  to  3  mic. 
long,  apical  cell  bearing  a  depressed  conical  or  rotund  calyptra,  transverse  walls  frequently  granulated. 

Maine  to  North  Carolina,  probably  farther;  Nebraska;  Washington;  California;  Mexico;  West 
Indies;  Hawaii;  Atlantic  and  Mediterranean  shores  of  Europe. 

Very  abundant,  forming  extensive  mats  almost  covering  posts  of  wharf  and  beacon  between  tide 
lines,  mixed  with  other  Myxophyceas,  Ocracoke,  N.  C. 


MARINE   ALGM   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  413 

3.  Lyngbya  lutea  (Agardh)  Gomont,  ex  Gomont. 

Oscittatoria  lutea,  Agardh,  1824,  p.  68. 

Lyngbya  tenerrima,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  35. 

Lyngbya  jvliana,  Wolle,  1887,  p.  301,  pi.  202,  f.  20-31. 

Lyngbya  lutea,  Gomont,  1890,  p.  354. 

Lyngbya  lutea,  Gomont,  1892,  tome  16,  p.  141,  pi.  3,  f.  12-13. 

Lyngbya  lutea,  Forti,  in  De  Toni,  1907,  p.  275. 

Lyngbya  lutea,  Tilden,  1910,  p.  114,  pi.  5,  f.  30-31. 

P.  B.-A.  No.  854. 

Plant  mass  somewhat  gelatinous,  leathery,  yellowish  brown,  or  olive,  often  becoming  dark  violet 
when  dry;  filaments  coiled,  flexible,  densely  entangled;  sheaths  colorless,  smooth,  at  first  thin,  later 
becoming  thick  (up  to  3  mic.)  and  lamellose ;  trichomes  not  constricted  at  the  joints,  not  tapering  at  the 
apices,  2.5  to  6  mic.  in  diameter,  cells  1.5  to  5.5  mic.  long,  apical  cell  showing  a  rotund  calyptra,  trans- 
verse walls  usually  not  distinct,  cell  contents  granular,  olive  green. 

Maine  to  Florida  and  Alabama;  West  Indies;  Europe;  Dalmatia;  northern  Africa. 

In  sparse  tufts  on  marine  grasses,  shoals  west  of  laboratory,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1907. 

Genus  5.  Hydrocoleum  Kuetzing,  ex  Gomont. 

Hydrocoleum,  Kuetzing,  1843,  p.  196. 
Hydrocoleum,  Gomont,  1892,  tome  15,  p.  332. 
Hydrocoleus,  Forti,  in  De  Toni,  1907,  p.  315. 
Hydrocoleus,  Tilden,  1910,  p.  134. 

Filaments  possessing  evident  sheaths,  forming  heaped  or  indefinite  masses,  or  layers 
not  massed,  giving  a  tangled  mat,  very  rarely  hardened  with  lime;  sheaths  always  color- 
less, cylindrical,  somewhat  lamellose,  more  or  less  mucous  or  somewhat  formless  and 
entirely  dissolving  on  the  older  filaments;  trichomes  few  within  the  sheath,  often  loosely 
aggregated,  more  or  less  false  branching,  apex  of  trichome  straight,  more  or  less  attenu- 
ated, outer  membrane  of  apical  cell  thickened  into  a  calyptra,  cells  shorter  than  the 
diameter  of  the  trichome,  in  some  species  very  short. 

Twenty  species  in  fresh  and  salt  water  throughout  the  world,  mostly  marine. 
Hydrocoleum  lyngbyaceum  Kuetzing,  ex  Gomont. 

Hydrocoleum  lyngbyaceum,  Kuetzing,  1849,  p.  259. 

Lyngbya  arenarium,  Wolle,  1887,  p.  299,  pi.  201,  f.  27-29.  t 

Hydrocoleum  lyngbyaceum,  Gomont,  1892,  tome  15,  p.  337,  pi.  12,  f.  8-10. 

Hydrocoleus  lyngbyaceus,  Forti,  in  De  Toni,  1907,  p.  31?- 

Hydrocoleus  lyngbyaceus,  Tilden,  1910,  p.  135,  pi.  5,  f .  58. 

P.  B.-A.-  Nos.  204,  205. 

Dark  green  mats  or  a  broadly  expanded  gelatinous  layer;  filaments  adnate,  unbranched  at  base, 
branched  in  upper  portions,  false  branches  numerous,  somewhat  appressed;  sheaths  wide,  mucous, 
containing  one  or  more  trichomes,  roughened  in  outline,  acuminate  or  often  open  at  apex,  sometimes 
entirely  dissolved  and  agglutinated;  trichomes  8  to  16  mic.  in  diameter,  not  constricted  at  the  joints, 
numerous  at  the  base  of  the  filaments,  spirally  twisted  and  entangled,  solitary  in  the  branches,  cells 
2.5  to  4.5  mic.  long,  apex  of  trichome  attenuated,  truncate,  transverse  walls  granulated. 

Massachusetts  to  Florida;  Bermuda;  West  Indies;  warm  and  temperate  waters  generally. 

Fairly  abundant  on  Gelidium  caerulescens ,  Duncan  breakwater,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  forming  small 
tufts  i  to  2  cm.  long  tangled  in  the  upper  branches  of  the  host. 

Genus  6.  Microcoleus  Desmazieres,  ex  Gomont. 

Microcoleus,  Desmazieres,  1823,  p.  7. 
Microcoleus,  Gomont,  1892,  tome  15,  p.  350. 

Filaments  possessing  evident  sheaths,  simple  or  vaguely  branched;  sheaths  colorless, 
more  or  less  regularly  cylindrical,  not  lamellose,  in  some  species  finally  dissolving; 
trichomes  many  within  a  sheath,  closely  crowded,  often  twisted  into  ropelike  bundles  in 
well- developed  filaments,  apex  of  trichome  straight,  attenuated,  apical  cell  acute, 
rarely  obtusely  conical,  capitate  in  one  species. 


4!4  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 

•  Thirteen  species  in  fresh  or  salt  water  or  on  the  ground,  sometimes  growing  among 
other  algae,  throughout  the  world. 
Microcoleus  chthonoplastes  (Mertens)  Thuret,  ex  Gomont. 

Conferva  chthonoplastes,  Mertens,  in  Flora  Danica,  1818,  Fasc.  27,  p.  8,  pi.  1485- 

Microcoleus  chthonoplastes,  Thuret,  1875.  P-  3?8. 

Microcoleus  chthonoplastes,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  33,  pi-  2.  i-  3- 

Microcoleus  gracilis,  Wolle,  1887,  p.  306,  pi.  203,  f.  10-11. 

Microcoleus  anguiformis,  Wolle,  1887,  p.  306. 

Microcoleus  chthonoplastes,  Gomont,  1892,  tome  15,  p.  353,  pi-  14,  f.  S~8- 

Microcoleus  chthonoplastes,  Forti,  in  De  Toni,  1907,  p.  371- 

Microcoleus  chthonoplastes,  Tilden,  1910,  p.  155,  pi.  6,  f.  28. 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  153,  906,  i8s4- 

Filaments  forming  a. dull  or  dark  green,  ragged,  spreading,  compact,  stratified  mass,  made  up  of 
layers  of  different  colors,  or  growing  sparsely  among  other  algae;  tortuous,  not  often  branched;  sheaths 
cylindrical,  unequally  roughened  on  the  surface,  with  apex  usually  open,  sometimes  entirely  dissolving; 
trichomes  blue-green,  short,  nearly  straight,  many  within  the  sheath,  usually  densely  aggregated  into 
bundles,  rarely  twisted  into  cords,  constricted  at  the  joints,  2.5  to  6  mic.  in  diameter,  cells  3.6  to  10 
mic.  long,  apex  of  trichome  attenuated,  apical  cell  not  capitate,  acutely  conical,  transverse  walls  not 
granulated. 

Canada  to  North  Carolina;  Texas;  Ohio;  Illinois;  Dakota;  Washington;  West  Indies;  warm  and 
temperate  waters  generally. 

Very  abundant  with  Chroococcus  turgidus  and  Plectonema  battersii  on  ocean  beach  at  Ocracoke, 
N.  C.,  covering  many  square  meters  just  beyond  high-tide  line,  August,  1907. 

Family  2.  NOSTOCACE^C  (Agardh)  Kirchner. 

Nostochaceae,  Forti,  in  De  Toni,  1907,  p.  383. 

Trichomes  simple,  consisting  of  similar  vegetative  cells,  not  differentiated  into  basal 
and  apical  regions,  not  tapering  to  hairs  at  the  apices,  usually  provided  with  heterocysts, 
naked  or  inclosed  in  a  mucous,  gelatinous,  or  membranaceous  sheath ;  multiplication  by 
gonidia  and  hormogonia. 

Usually  aeruginous — green.  Trichomes  straight  or  twisted  or  curved,  of  equal 
diameter  throughout  or  tapering  very  slightly  toward  the  apices,  heterocysts  terminal 
or  intercalary.  Sheaths  usually  gelatinous,  often  dissolving  into  an  inclosing  jelly, 
often  adhering  to  each  other,  more  rarely  membranaceous  and  cylindrical,  colorless  or 
yellowish  or  olivaceous,  containing  one  or  more  trichomes. 

The  Nostocaceae  live  on  moist  earth,  among  mosses,  etc.,  often  in  quiet  fresh  water, 
sometimes  in  rapid  streams,  sometimes  in  salt  or  brackish  water,  a  few  being  endophytic. 

About  220  species  throughout  the  world. 

Genus  Microchaete  Thuret,  ex  Bornet  and  Flahault. 

Microchaete,  Thuret,  1875,  P-  3?8  (7). 
Microchaete,  Bornet  and  Flahault,  1887,  p.  83. 

Filaments  possessing  evident  sheaths,  unbranched,  erect,  attached  at  the  base, 
solitary  or  forming  small  cushionlike  tufts;  trichomes  single  within  the  sheath,  hetoro- 
cysts  basal  or  intercalary,  gonidia  formed  near  the  base. 

Eleven  species,  all  minute,  in  fresh  or  salt  water,  widely  distributed. 
Microchaete  nana  Howe  and  Hoyt.     PI.  CXVII,  figs.  12-17. 

Microchtete  nana,  Howe  and  Hoyt,  1916,  p.  105,  pi.  12,  figs.  12-17. 

Plants  inconspicuous,  almost  microscopic,  forming  loose,  scattered  clusters  over  the  surface  of 
the  host;  filaments  mostly  o.i  to  0.2  mm.  long,  curved  near  base  or  near  middle,  usually  more  or  less 
horizontal  toward  the  base  and  erect  toward  the  apex,  sometimes  almost  prostrate  throughout  or  almost 


MARINE   ALG^E   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  415 

erect  throughout,  tapering  very  slightly  toward  the  apices;  sheath  very  thin,  delicate,  scarely  visible; 
trichomes  light  olivaceous  (?),  5.0  to  8.3  mic.  in  diameter,  slightly  constricted  at  the  septa  toward  apex, 
scarcely  so  below,  cells  i  to  3  (mostly  1.5-2)  times  as  broad  as  long,  the  apical  ones  broadly  dome-shaped 
or  almost  hemispheric;  heterocysts  basal,  usually  single,  rarely  double,  subspherical  or  ovoid,  5.0  to 
6.6  mic.  in  diameter,  or  sometimes  8.3  mic.  long,  gonidia  unknown. 

Endemic. 

Few  patches  of  scattered  filaments  on  Dictyota  dichotoma  dredged  from  the  coral  reef  offshore  from 
Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1914. 

This  species  will  not  be  mistaken  for  any  other  occurring  in  this  region.  It  has  been  found  only 
the  one  time  noted. 

Family  3.  SCYTONEMACE^E  (Kuetzing)  Rabenhorst. 
Scytonematacez.  Kirchner.  in  Engler  and  Prantl,  1900.  p.  76. 

Trichomes  composed  of  a  single  row  of  cells,  one  or  more  included  within  a  sheath, 
not  ending  in  a  hair  at  the  apex;  filaments  branched,  false  branches  formed  by  the 
perforation  of  the  sheath  by  the  trichome  which  thereupon  issues  as  one  or  two  long, 
flexuous  branches,  each  developing  a  sheath  of  its  own;  sheaths  homogeneous  and 
colorless,  or  lamellose  and  yellowish  or  brownish,  firm,  tubular,  sometimes  incrusted 
with  lime;  heterocysts  and  gonidia  variously  distributed,  sometimes  lacking;  multipli- 
cation by  means  of  vegetative  division,  hormogonia,  and  gonidia. 

Filaments  usually  forming  tufted  masses,  sometimes  matted  or  ragged  layers. 
Vegetative  cells  cylindrical  or  barrel -shaped,  rarely  spherical,  apex  hemispherical  or  semi- 
ellipsoid,  cell  contents  blue-green  or  sometimes  violet  or  rose-red.  Filaments  nearly 
uniformly  thick  at  all  points,  and  always  with  false  branching;  false  branches  always 
occur  in  connection  with  the  heterocysts,  when  these  are  present,  going  out  either  imme- 
diately below  a  heterocyst  or  midway  between  two  of  these,  the  latter  method  giving  a 
pair  of  branches.  Heterocysts  present  except  in  Plectonema,  subspherical,  oval,  or 
cylindrical,  at  the  bases  of  the  branches  or  intercalary  in  the  filaments,  single  or  several 
adjoining,  always  attached  to  the  inner  wall  of  the  sheath. 

About  150  species,  mostly  aerial  or  on  moist  earth  or  in  fresh  water,  throughout  the 

world. 

Genus  Plectonema  Thuret,  ex  Gomont.  " 

Plectonema,  Thuret,  1875,  p.  375. 
Plectonema.  Gomont,  1893,  tome  16,  p.  96. 

Filaments  free  or  forming  feltlike  masses,  branched,  false  branches  solitary  or  in 
pairs;  sheaths  firm,  colorless  or  rarely  yellowish  orange;  trichomes  frequently  con- 
stricted at  the  joints,  apex  of  trichomes  straight,  very  rarely  attenuated,  calyptra  none, 
heterocysts  and  gonidia  none. 

Twenty-one  species,  mostly  in  fresh  water,  rarely  on  soil,  few  in  salt  water,  America, 
Europe,  Asia. 
Plectonema  battersii  Gomont. 

Plectonema  baitersii,  Gomont,  1899,  P-  36. 
Plectonema  battersii.  Forti.  in  De  Toni.  1907,  p.  495. 
Plectonema  battersii,  Tilden,  1910,  p.  an. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  1060. 

Plant  mass  blackish  or  brownish  green;  filaments  elongate,  flexuous,  abundantly  and  repeatedly 
branched,  false  branches  usually  in  pairs,  more  slender  than  the  main  filaments;  sheaths  colorless, 
somewhat  thick  in  the  main  filaments;  trichomes  2  to  3.5  mic.  in  diameter,  constricted  at  joints,  with 
159321°— 20 4 


4! 6  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

somewhat  attenuated  apices,  apical  cell  rotund,  cells  up  to  four  times  shorter  than  diameter,  cell  con- 
tents homogeneous,  pale  blue-green. 

Maine;  Massachusetts;  England;  Norway. 

Very  abundant  with  Chroococcus  turgidus  and  Microcoleus  chthonop tastes  on  ocean  beach  at  Ocracoke, 
N.  C.,  covering  many  square  meters  just  beyond  high-tide  line,  August,  1907. 

This  is  the  most  southern  station  reported  for  this  species. 

Family  4.  RIVULARIACEyE  (Meneghini)  Kirchner. 

Filaments  tapering  from  base  to  apex,  terminating  above  in  a  colorless  hair,  simple 
or  branched,  associated  in  brushlike  or  gelatinous  layers,  rarely  solitary;  false  branches 
due  to  development  of  a  new  trichome  from  a  cell  of  the  main  trichome,  usually  occurring 
immediately  under  an  intercalary  heterocyst,  rarely  by  the  perforation  of  the  sheath 
between  two  heterocysts  by  the  trichome,  either  separating  immediately  and  forming  a 
new  sheath,  or  remaining  for  some  time  within  the  original  sheath;  heterocysts  usually 
present,  usually  basal,  occasionally  intercalary;  multiplication  by  vegetative  division 
and  hormogonia,  sometimes  by  gonidia. 

The  apical  cells  always  seem  nearly  empty  and  are  usually  colorless;  the  basal  cells 
show  blue-green,  violet,  red,  or  brownish  cell  contents.  Sheaths  cylindrical,  gelatinous 
or  membranaceous,  homogeneous  or  stratose,  colorless,  yellowish  or  brownish.  The 
sheaths  are  often  split  by  apical  elongation  into  superposed  lamina;  often  the  inner 
sheaths,  becoming  dissolved,  pass  out  from  the  apex;  often  incrusted  with  lime.  Hormo- 
gonia are  situated  at  the  apices  of  the  filaments  and  branches  and,  the  apical  hairs  being 
shed,  pass  out  from  the  apices.  To  this  is  due  the  fact  that  the  older  filaments  sometimes 
lack  the  apical  hairs.  In  some  genera  Chroococcus-like  masses  are  formed  at  the  base 
from  the  vegetative  cells  and  later  grow  into  filaments. 

About  170  species,  in  fresh  and  salt  water,  throughout  the  world. 

Genus  Dichothrix  Zanardini,  ex  Bornet  pnd  Flahault. 
Dichothrix,  Zanardini,  1858,  p.  297. 
Dichothrix.  Bornet  and  Blahault,  1886,  p.  373. 

Plant  mass  caespitose,  penicillate,  or  pulvinate,  filaments  more  or  less  dichoto- 
mously  branched;  sheaths  cylindrical,  trichomes  often  several  (2  to  6)  inclosed  in  a  com- 
mon sheath,  heterocysts  sometimes  basal,  sometimes  intercalary,  in  one  species  not 
present,  no  gonidia. 

Thirteen  species  in  fresh  or  salt  water,  America,  Europe,  Africa. 
Dichothrix  penicillata  Zanardini,  ex  Bornet  and  Flahault. 

Dichothrix  penicillata,  Zanardini,  1858,  p.  297,  pi.  14,  f .  3. 
Dichothrix  penicillata,  Bornet  and  Flahault,  1886,  p.  379. 
Dichothrix  penicillata,  Ford,  in  De  Toni,  1907,  p.  644. 
Dichothrix  penicillata,  Tilden,  1910,  p.  280. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  62.  iii2. 

Plant  mass  caespitose,  fastigiate-penicillate,  scattered  or  clustered,  dark  green;  filaments  short, 
flexuous,  2  mm.  long,  25  to  35  mic.  diameter  (in  ultimate  branches);  sheaths  thick,  gelatinous,  soft, 
uniform,  colorless;  trichomes  15  mic.  broad;  cells  shorter  than  diameter,  cell  contents  olive,  hetero- 
cysts oblong,  solitary. 

Florida;  Mexico;  West  Indies;  Guadeloupe;  Red  Sea. 

Covering  a  considerable  portion  of  one  piece  of  Sargassum  natans,  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C., 
June  29,  1907;  one  small  tuft  (8  to  10  filaments)  on  one  piece  of  Chondria  litioralis,  Bogue  Beach,  Sep- 
tember 19,  1906.  (?) 

The  last-mentioned  tuft  seemed  to  belong  to  this  species,  but  contained  too  few  filaments  for  a  posi- 
tive determination.  This  is  the  most  northern  station  reported  for  this  species. 


MARINE   ALGJE   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  417 

In  addition  to  the  species  described  above,  members  of  the  Myxophyceae  were 
observed  in  more  or  less  abundance  at  Marshallburg,  N.  C. ;  Southport,  N.  C. ;  George- 
town, S.  C. ;  and  Tybee,  Ga. ;  but  the  material  from  these  places  proved  indeterminable 
or,  for  various  reasons,  has  not  been  determined. 

Division  II.  CHLOROPHYCE>£  (Kuetzing,  in  part)  Wittrock. 

Chlorospermeae,  in  part,  Harvey,  1858. 
Zoosporeae,  in  part,  Farlow,  1882. 
Oosporese,  in  part,  Farlow,  1882. 

GREEN  A.LGJB. 

Algae  chlorophyll  green  (rarely  red,  yellowish,  or  brownish,  sometimes  grayish  from 
deposits  of  lime),  containing  pure  chlorophyll  in  their  cells  (rarely  mixed  with  other 
pigments) ;  chlorophyll  confined  to  definitely  limited  bodies,  the  chloroplasts.  Thallus 
consisting  of  one  or  more  cells,  simple  or  branched,  filiform  or  of  various  shapes,  fila- 
mentous, membranaceous,  or  tubular.  Multiplication  asexual  or  sexual:  asexual 
(propagation)  by  the  fragmentation  of  the  entire  plant  or  of  some  part,  or  by  noncopu- 
lating  motile  cells  (zoogonidia,  zoospores,  swarm  spores),  or  by  resting  cells  (akinetes, 
aplanospores) ;  sexual  (reproduction)  by  at  least  eventually  nonmotile  zygotes  (zygospores, 
oospores)  formed  by  the  copulation  or  conjugation  of  gametes  free  of  membranes; 
gametes  similar  (isogametes) ,  or  different  in  form,  size,  etc.,  that  is,  male  and  female 
(heterogametes) ,  motile  or  nonmotile. 

The  members  of  this  group  live  mostly  in  water,  either  salt  or  fresh,  while  some 
occur  on  moist  soil  and  some  are  endophytic.  The  akinetes  and  aplanospores  are  formed 
from  vegetative  cells.  Zoospores  are  formed  either  from  ordinary  vegetative  cells  or 
from  special  cells,  zoosporangia;  they  are  pear-shaped,  bear  two  or  four,  less  often  one 
or  many,  cilia  on  their  anterior,  pointed,  colorless  end,  and  often  have  a  red  eyespot  and 
contractile  vacuole;  they  come  to  rest  after  a  longer  or  shorter  time,  develop  a  mem- 
brane, and  usually  develop  immediately  into  new  plants.  Zygotes  are  formed  in  one  of 
three  ways:  (i)  By  the  copulation  of  two  motile  gametes,  exactly  alike  or  differing 
slightly  in  size;  (2)  by  the  fertilization  of  a  large  nonmotile  female  gamete  (egg)  by  a 
small  motile  male  gamete  (sperm);  (3)  by  the  copulation  or  conjugation  of  two  non- 
motile  gametes  similar  in  .appearance.  The  similar  gametes  are  formed  from  ordinary 
cells;  eggs  and  sperms  are  developed  in  special  organs,  oogonia  and  antheridia.  The 
zygote,  in  some  cases,  develops  immediately  into  a  new  plant,  but  in  the  majority  of 
forms,  after  a  period  of  rest,  develops  swarm  spores,  which,  after  swimming  about,  come 
to  rest  and  grow  into  new  plants. 

There  is  no  other  group  of  algae  about  which  there  is  so  much  difference  of  opinion 
concerning  the  classification.  The  name  Chlorophyceae  is  here  used  in  a  broad  sense, 
including  the  Heterokontae,  Stephanokontae,  Conjugatae,  etc.,  of  other  authors.  There 
seems  to  be  need  for  a  name  covering  this  assemblage  of  forms  which  stem  to  show  more 
or  less  close  relationship  to  each  other.  For  these  it  has  seemed  desirable  to  retain  the 
old,  inclusive  name,  at  least  until  some  uniformity  of  opinion  can  be  reached  regarding 
their  division.  In  this  scheme  the  divisions  of  other  authors  (Conjugatae,  Heterokontae, 
etc.)  would  be  subdivisions  under  Chlorophyceae. 

Nearly  3,000  species;  throughout  the  world. 


4! 8  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 

KEY  TO   ORDERS 

o.  Frond  usually  of  relatively  large  size,  multinucleate,  without  division  into  cells 

/. 3.  SlPHONALES  (p.  430). 

oo.  Frond  divided  into  cells b. 

b.  Cells  uninucleate,  chromatophore  usually  single,  disk  or  net-shaped i.  ULOTRICHALES  (p.  418). 

66.  Cells  multinucleate,  chromatophore  net-shaped,  or  of  numerous  small  disks  in  a  cell 

2.   SlPHONOCLADIALES   (p.   423). 

Order  1.  Ulotrichales. 

Confervoidese.  in  part,  De  Toni,  1889. 

Confervoideae,  in  part.  Wille.  in  Engler  and  Prantl,  1897. 

Simple  or  branched  filaments,  sometimes  membranes,  rarely  in  few-celled  families; 
cells  uninucleate,  rarely  multinucleate;  chromatophore  usually  single,  band,  disk,  net," 
or  star  shaped,  generally  with  one  or  more  pyrenoids.  Marine  and  fresh  water. 

KEY  TO  FAMILIES. 

Frond  membranaceous,  either  flat  or  forming  a  tube ; i.  ULVACE/E  (p.  418). 

Frond  filamentous,  branching,  or  a  few-celled  family ;  usually  with  hairs . .  .2.  CH^TOPHORACE^  (p.  422). 

Family  1.  ULVACE&  (Lamouroux)  Rabenhorst. 

Membranaceous,  plane,  or  tubular  fronds;  cells  uninucleate,  with  disk-shaped 
chromatophores  and  one  pyrenoid;  asexual  propagation  by  four-ciliate  zoospores  (some- 
times bicUiate  ?) ;  sexual  reproduction  by  similar  biciliate  gametes. 

Near  the  base  of  the  frond  the  cells  may  send  down  rhizoidal  prolongations  to  the 
substratum,  often  uniting  to  form  a  thickened  stipe;  otherwise  than  this  there  is  no 
specialization  of  cells.  Zoospores  or  gametes  may  be  formed  in  any  cell  of  the  frond 
except  the  lowest  cells.  The  zygospore  formed  by  the  fusion  of  two  gametes,  after  a 
short  period  of  motility  with  four  cilia,  settles  down,  loses  its  cilia,  surrounds  itself  by  a 
membrane,  and  develops  immediately  into  a  new  plant,  forming  a  filament  or  small  sack 
which  soon  changes  into  the  characteristic  form  of  the  frond. 

About  loo  species,  mostly  marine,  rarely  in  fresh  water,  mostly  in  the  littoral  zone 
throughout  the  world  from  Arctic  to  Antarctic  regions. 

KEY  TO  GENERA. 

Frond  tubular  or  flattened;  simple  or  branched i.  Enteromorpha  (p.  418). 

Frond  flat,  often  forming  extensive  sheets 2.  Ulva  (p.  420). 

Genus  i.  Enteromorpha  Link. 

Enteromorpha,  Link,  1810,  p.  5. 

Ulva  enteromorpha,  Farlow,  1882.  p.  43. 

Frond  originating  in  a  single  series  of  cells,  which  by  repeated  division  form  a 
tubular  frond  (sometimes  flattened) ,  the  membrane  of  which  consists  of  a  single  layer  of 
cells;  in  some  of  the  simpler  species  the  tubular  stage  is  not  reached,  and  the  frond  in  the 
adult  state  consists  of  two  or  a  few  series  of  cells,  united  without  any  interior  space; 
simple  or  branched ;  cells  often  arranged  in  longitudinal  series.  All  the  cells  of  the  frond, 
except  the  lowest,  capable  of  producing  zoospores  or  gametes,  which  are  discharged 
through  an  opening  in  the  cell  wall. 

Frond  always  attached  at  first,  later  often  free  floating.  The  genus  is  connected 
with  Ulva  by  E.  lima,  in  which  the  tube  is  compressed  and  the  membranes  united  in  the 
middle  part. 


MARINE   ALGJE  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  419 

Thirty  species,  usually  in  salt  or  brackish  water,  occasionally  in  fresh  water,  through- 
out the  world. 

The  specific  distinctions  are  founded  chiefly  on  the  manner  of  branching  and  on  the 
size  and  arrangement  of  the  cells  and  are  often  difficult  of  determination. 

KEY' TO  SPECIES. 

a.  Frond  flat,  the  membranes  free  at  the  margins,  but  united  between 4.  E.  lima  (p.  420). 

oa.  Frond  tubular b. 

b.  Cells  not  arranged  in  longitudinal  series  except  in  the  very  youngest  parts 

.'. 3.  E.  intestinalis  (p.  420). 

bb.  Cells  more  or  less  in  longitudinal  series,  usually  in  the  greater  part  of  the  frond c. 

c.  Fronds  simple,  inflated,  and  flexuous 2.  E.  flexuosa  (p.  419). 

cc.  Fronds  regularly  branched i.  E.  prolifera  (p.  419). 

i.  Enteromorpha  prolifera  (Flora  Danica)  J.  Agardh. 

Viva  prolifera.  Flora  Danica,  vol.  5,  fasc.  14,  p.  7,  pi.  763,  fig.  i,  1833. 
Enteromorpha  prolifera,  ].  Agardh,  1882,  p.  129,  pi.  4,  figs.  103-104. 
Enteromorpha  prolifera,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  122. 
Enteromorpha  prolifera,  Collins,  1909,  p.  202. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  470,  610,  913. 

Frond  up  to  several  meters  long  and  2  cm.  in  diameter,  tubular  or  compressed,  with  more  or  less 
abundant  branches  which  are  usually  simple,  but  sometimes  also  proliferous;  branches  varying  much  in 
length  and  diameter;  cells  10  to  12  mic.,  in  the  younger  parts  always  arranged  in  longitudinal  series, 
which  become  less  distinct  in  the  older  parts;  membrane  15  to  18  mic.  thick,  not  much  exceeding  the 
dimensions  of  the  cells  in  cross  section. 

Greenland  to  West  Indies;  Alaska  to  California;  Europe. 

Beaufort,  N.  C.:  Abundant  throughout  winter  1908-1909;  very  abundant  May,  1907,  and  April, 
1908,  on  rocks,  shells,  and  piers  throughout  harbor  and  at  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford,  extending  from 
about  10  cm.  below  low  water  to  high- water  line;  very  abundant  at  water  line  on  sea  buoy  and  channel 
buoy  at  entrance  to  Beaufort  Harbor,  July,  1909;  abundant  on  rocks  and  sand  breaks  at  Shackleford  and 
Fort  Macon  between  tide  lines  throughout  summer  (?).  Cape  Lookout  beach,  very  abundant  on  old 
wreck  about  20  m.  from  water  at  low  tide,  August,  1906.  Pamlico  Sound,  Ocracoke,  N.  C.,  fairly 
abundant  on  posts  of  beacon  between  tide  lines  (?).  Southport,  N.  C.,  very  abundant  on  wall  and 
shore,  August,  1909.  Georgetown,  S.  C.,  very  abundant  on  jetty  and  shells  on  beach.  Pawleys  Island, 
near  Georgetown,  S.  C.,  abundant  on  shells  in  bay  near  inlet.  Port  Royal,  S.  C.,  fairly  abundant  on 
buoy  at  water  line. 

This  seems  to  be  the  only  species  of  Enteromorpha  occurring  in  this  region  throughout  the  year. 
Specimens  collected  in  December  are  3  to  4  cm.  long,  densely  matted  with  many  upright,  filiform  or 
club-shaped  branches;  in  April  and  May  this  species  is,  next  to  Ulva  lactuca,  the  most  abundant  in  the 
harbor;  the  specimens  at  this  time  are  3  to  45  cm.  long;  in  summer,  material  apparently  belonging  to  this 
species  is  found  as  small,  stunted  tufts,  i  to  2  cm.  long,  on  rocks  and  sand  breaks  near  the  inlet,  this  condi- 
tion.continuing  as  late  as  October  or  November.  With  the  exception  of  these  stunted  representatives 
and  of  specimens  occasionally  growing  on  buoys,  etc.,  this  species  has  not  been  found  here  during  the 
summer  or  autumn. 

In  habit  this  species  is  very  variable,  from  slender,  slightly  branched  forms,  only  a  few  centimeters 
long,  to  rich  and  repeatedly  branched  fronds;  delicate  or  coarse;  branches  sometimes  long  and  slender, 
sometimes  short  and  very  densely  set,  sometimes  long  and  short  intermingled  quite  without  order.  It 
also  occurs  in  fresh  water  and  about  salt  springs. 

a.  Enteromorpha  flexuosa  (Wulfen)  J.  Agardh. 

Conferva  flexuosa,  Wulfen.  in  Roth,  1800,  p.  188. 

Enteromorpha  flexuosa,  J.  Agardh,  1882,  p.  126. 

Enteromorpha  flexuosa,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  121. 

Enteromorpha  flexuosa,  Collins,  1909,  p.  203. 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  462,  2004. 

Frond  cylindrical,  tubular,  simple,  tapering  to  a  filiform  stipe  below,  above  inflated,  flexuous,  and 
intestinelike;  cells  6  to  8  by  8  to  12  mic.,  roundish  polygonal,  in  longitudinal  series;  membrane  somewhat 
thickened  on  the  inside;  chromatophore  filling  the  thick- walled  cell. 


420  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU  OP  FISHERIES. 

Florida;  southern  California;  warmer  waters  generally. 

Two  or  three  small  clumps,  on  rocks  of  Shackleford  jetty,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  April,  1908.  Fronds  6  to 
23  cm.  long. 

This,  being  a  southern  species,  might  be  expected  to  occur  at  Beaufort  throughout  the  summer,  but 
has  been  found  only  once,  in  April.  Even  then  it  was  by  no  means  a  conspicuous  part  of  the  spring 
flora.  It  is  distinguished  from  E.  intestinalis,  which  it  resembles,  by  having  smaller  cells  arranged  in 
regular  series,  a  somewhat  more  delicate  membrane,  and  a  thicker  wall  between  the  cells. 

3.  Enteromorpha  intestinalis  (Linnaeus)  Link. 

Uha  intestinalis,  Linnaeus,  1755,  p.  433. 
Enteromorpha  intestinalis.  Link,  1820,  p.  5. 
Enteromorpha  intestinalis,  Harvey,  1858,  p.  57  (in  part). 
Ulva  enteromorpha  var.  intestinalis,  Farlow,  1883,  p.  43. 
Enteromorpha  intestinalis,  Wolle,  1887,  p.  107,  pi.  135,  f.  9-10. 
Enteromorpha  intestinalis,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  133. 
Enteromorpha  intestinalis,  Collins,  1909,  p.  904. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  464. 

Frond  simple  or  having  at  the  base  a  few  branches  similar  to  the  main  frond,  or  occasionally  a  few 
proliferations  above;  length  varying  from  a  few  centimeters  to  several  meters;  diameter  i  to  5  cm.;  at 
first  attached  by  a  short,  cylindrical  stipe,  but  soon  detached  and  floating;  cylindrical  or  expanding 
above,  more  or  less  inflated,  often  much  crisped  and  contorted,  and  irregularly  and  strongly  constricted; 
cells  10  to  16  mic.  in  diameter,  in  no  regular  order;  thickness  of  membrane  varying  from  50  mic.  below 
to  20  mic.  above;  cells  in  cross  section  12  to  30  mic.  * 

Along  the  shores  of  North  America,  except,  possibly,  the  south  Atlantic  coast;  salt  water  lakes  of 
western  United  States;  Brazil;  Europe;  Japan. 

Fairly  abundant  on  rocks  of  Fort  Macon  jetties,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  December,  1908. 

A  very  variable  species,  of  which  many  forms  have  been  described ;  some  of  these  in  fresh  water. 

4.  Enteromorpha  linza  (Linnaeus)  J.  Agardh. 

Ulva  linza,  Linnaeus,  1753,  vol.  2,  p.  1163. 

Uha  linza,  Harvey,  1858,  p.  59. 

Enteromorpha  linza,  J.  Agardh,  1882,  p.  134,  pi.  4,  f.  110-113. 

Uha  enteromorpha  var.  lanceolata,  Farlow,  1883,  p.  43. 

Enteromorpha  linza,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  124. 

Enteromorpha  linza,  Collins,  1909,  p.  206. 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  16,  967. 

Frond  lanceolate  or  linear  lanceolate,  simple,  i  to  5  dm.  long,  i  to  20  cm.  broad;  stipe  short, 
hollow;  upper  part  of  the  frond  flat,  the  membranes  grown  together  as  in  Ulva,  except  at  the  edges, 
where  they  remain  free. 

Maine  to  West  Indies;  Alaska  to  California;  South  America;  Europe;  Tasmania. 

Abundant  on  rocks  and  shells  in  harbor  and  on  jetties  at  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford,  Beaufort,  N.  C. , 
March  to  May,  1907-1909,  at  about  low- water  line;  fairly  abundant  at  about  water  level  on  buoy,  Port 
Royal,  S.  C.,  August,  1909. 

The  forms  of  this  species  have  been  divided  under  forma  crispata,  with  edges  much  crisped  and 
folded,  and  forma  lanceolata,  edges  even  or  folded,  not  crisped.  Only  the  latter  of  these  occurs  at  Beau- 
fort. The  smaller  specimens  look  like  forms  of  E.  intestinalis,  but  in  the  latter  the  frond,  though  often 
collapsed,  is  tubular  throughout;  in  E.  linza  the  two  membranes  adhere  except  at  the  edges,  where  there 
is  a  narrow,  open  space,  around  which  the  cells  are  arranged  in  cross  section  nearly  in  a  circle.  Different 
plants  vary  greatly  in  their  appearance,  but  the  species  is  easily  recognized  by  .the  above  characters. 

Genus  2.  Ulva  Linnaeus. 

Ulva,  Linnaeus,  1753,  vol.  2,  p.  1163. 

Frond  membranaceous,  flat,  consisting  of  two  layers  of  cells,  in  any  of  which,  except 
those  in  the  thickened  base,  zoospores  or  gametes  may  be  formed,  issuing  through  an 
opening  in  the  surface  of  the  fronds,  attached  or  free  floating ;  surface  entire  or  perforate. 

Marine. 


MARINE   ALGJB,   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  421 

Seven  species,  some  of  them  grading  into  each  other,  throughout  the  world. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

Frond  entire  or  irregularly  lobed  or  laciniate i.  U.  lactuca  (p.  421). 

Frond  divided  into  distinct  segments 2.  U.fasciata  (p.  422). 

i.  Ulva  lactuca  Linnaeus. 

Ulva  lactuca,  Linnaeus,  1753,  vol.  2,  p.  1163. 

Ulva  latissima,  Harvey,  1858,  p.  59. 

Ulva  lactuca  var.  lactuca,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  43. 

Ulva  lactuca,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  in. 

Ulva  lactuca,  Collins,  1909,  p.  214,  pi.  7,  f.  75. 

SEA  LETTUCE.       / 

Frond  very  variable  in  shape,  at  first  attached  and  generally  of  a  lanceolate  or  ovate-lanceolate  form ; 
later  of  irregular  shape  and  often  detached  and  floating;  the  cells  usually  vertically  elongate  in  cross 
section,  seen  from  the  surface,  irregularly  angular,  closely  set;  thickness  of  the  frond  very  variable. 

In  all  seas. 

Beaufort,  N.  C. :  Abundant  on  rocks  and  on  other  algae,  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford  jetties,  through- 
out the  year,  usually  not  more  than  2  to  4  cm.  tall;  abundant  on  Bogue  Beach  after  winds;  large  pieces 
occasionally  floating  in  the  harbor,  at  times  becoming  fairly  abundant;  extremely  abundant  throughout 
harbor  and  on  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford  jetties,  April  and  May,  attached  and  floating,  often  up  to 
i  m.  long;  abundant  in  Newport  River  near  Green  Rock,  August,  1906,  forming  large  sheets  resting  on 
the  bottom;  and  extremely  abundant  North  River  off  Lennoxville,  July,  1906,  floating  in  large  masses 
along  shore.  Pamlico  Sound,  Ocracoke,  N.  C. :  Very  abundant  on  shells,  August,  1907.  Core  Sound, 
on  jetty  at  Davis  Island:  Abundant,  about  2  to  3  cm.  tall.  Wrightsville  Beach,  N.  C. :  Fairly  abundant 
on  shells  in  sound,  July,  1909.  Southport,  N.  C.:  Very  abundant,  August,  1909.  Georgetown,  S.  C.: 
Fairly  abundant,  August,  1909. 

A  very  common  plant  throughout  the  world  and  extremely  variable  in  form,  thickness,  and  color. 
Two  fairly  marked  types  can  be  distinguished  in  the  species  as  found  with  us  on  both  Atlantic  and 
Pacific  coasts,  connected  by  innumerable  forms. 

Var.  rigida  (Agardh)  Le  Jolis. 

Ulva  rigida,  Agardh,  1820,  p.  410  (in  part). 
Ulva  lactuca,  a  rigida,  Le  Jolis,  1863,  p.  38. 
Ulva  lactuca  var.  rigida,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  42. 
Ulva  lactuca  forma  rigida,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  in. 
Ulva  lactuca  var.  rigida,  Collins,  1909,  p.  215. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  407,  2064. 

Frond  at  first  lanceolate  or  ovate;  lanceolate,  firm  and  stiff,  with  a  distinct  stipe;  later  somewhat 
irregularly  divided,  and  often  with  numerous  perforations  of  various  sizes;  cells  vertically  elongate  in 
cross  section. 

Var.  latissima  (Linnaeus)  De-Candolle. 

Ulva  latissima,  Linnaeus,  1753,  vol.  2,  p.  1163. 

Ulva  lactuca  var.  latissima,  De-Candolle,  in  Lamarck  and  De-Candolle,  1805,  tome  2,  p.  9.     % 

Ulva  lactuca  var.  latissima,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  43. 

Ulva  lactuca  forma  genuina,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  in. 

Ulva  lactuca  var.  latissima,  Collins,  1909,  p.  215. 

P.  B.-A.  Fasc.  D,  No.  LXXVI. 

Frond  irregular  in  outline,  soon  becoming  detached  and  passing  most  of  its  life  in  a  floating  condi- 
tion; thinner  than  var.  rigida,  lighter  colored,  and  with  cells  nearer  square  in  cross  section. 

Both  of  these  forms  seem  to  occur  at  Beaufort ,  but  are  not  sharply  distinguishable .  In  the  immediate 
vicinity  of  Beaufort  this  species,  like  the  species  of  Enteromorpha,  reaches  its  greatest  development 
in  the  spring  months.  At  other  times  of  the  year  it  is  present  mostly  in  the  form  of  specimens  2  to  4 
cm.  long  attached  to  rocks.  Large  masses  are,  however,  found  in  summer  in  adjoining  waters  and 
occasionally  occur  in  Beaufort  Harbor. 


422  BULLETIN  OF  THE   B.UREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

Many  forms  of  the  species  approach  closely  in  appearance  to  U.  fasciata  and  slightly  to  Entero- 
morpha  lima. 
3.  Ulva  fasciata  Delile. 

Ulna  fasciata.  Delile,  1813,  p.  153.  Pi-  58,  f.  5- 
Ulva  fasciata,  Harvey,  1858,  p.  58. 
Uha  fasciata,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  114. 
Uha  fasciata,  Collins,  1909,  p.  216. 
P.  B.— A.  No.  221. 

Frond  divided  into  more  or  less  linear  segments,  margin  smooth  or  undulate ;  in  cross  section  the 
two  layers  of  cells  separate  somewhat  at  the  margin,  which  is  rounded,  with  a  small  open  space  between 
the  rows. 

Florida;  West  Indies;  California;  warm  waters  all  over  the  world. 

Abundant  in  warm  water  of  tide  pool,  northwest  corner  of  "  Town  Marsh, "  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  resting 
on  the  bottom,  summer. 

A  variable  species  varying  from  forms  with  a  central  axis  and  lateral  lobes  (as  in  a  pinnately  com- 
pound leaf)  to  forms  having  almost  a  continuous  sheet  with  lobes  few  and  inconspicuous,  sometimes 
dichotomous;  frond  more  or  less  perforate;  lobes  5  mm.  to  5  cm.  in  width;  margin  smooth  and  even  or 
much  crisped  and  undulate.  (In  this  last  form  it  corresponds  to  forms  of  Enteromorpha  lima.)  The 
structure  of  the  frond  is  similar  to  that  of  U.  lactuca,  except  the  margin,  which  resembles  E.  lima.  On 
the  California  coast  it  is  hard  to  draw  the  line  between  this  species  and  U.  lactuca,  either  from  the  shape 
of  the  frond  or  from  its  structure.  Four  forms  have  been  distinguished  there,  passing  into  each  other 
more  or  less. 

At  Beaufort  the  species  is  easily  distinguished  by  the  much-crisped,  lobed  thallus  with  decidedly 
undulate  margins,  and  by  the  structure  of  the  frond  at  the  margins.  It  forms  sheets  of  considerable 
extent,  with  lobes  long  or  short,  broad  or  narrow,  much  crisped  and  much  perforate.  No  specimens  have 
been  found  with  decidedly  pinnate  lobes  like  some  of  those  occurring  on  the  California  coast.  Some 
specimens  approach  forma  lobata  (P.  B.-A.  No.  863),  but  are  more  crisped  and  ruffled.  Many  lobes  are 
long  and  narrow  and  much  ruffled,  resembling  forma  tcsniata  (P.  B.-A.  No.  862).  The  species  has  been 
observed  at  Beaufort  only  in  summer;  its  condition  at  other  times  of  the  year  is  unknown.  This  is  the 
most  northern  station  reported  for  the  species  on  our  Atlantic  coast,  and  is  probably  its  northern  limit. 

Family  2.  CFUETOPHORACELC  Wille. 

Ulotrichiacese,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  151  (in  part). 

Fronds  filamentous,  except  in  a  few  doubtful  forms,  usually  much  branched,  some- 
times united  in  disklike  expansions;  cells  uninucleate,  with  band-shaped  or  disk-shaped 
chromatophore,  often  somewhat  divided  or  wijh  projections;  with  one,  rarely  more 
pyrenoids;  hairs  almost  always  present,  but  vaiying  in  character;  asexual  propagation 
by  four  ciliate,  in  some  cases  biciliate,  zoospores,  by  aplanospores,  akinetes,  and  with 
special  Palmella  and  Schizomeris  stages  in  many  genera;  sexual  reproduction  in  many 
genera  by  gametes,  similar  to  the  zoospores. 

About  150  species,  mostly  fresh  water,  some  marine,  few  aerial,  etc.,  throughout  the 
world. 

A  family  of  doubtful  limits,  being  differently  defined  by  nearly  every  author.  The 
present  treatment  follows  that  of  Collins  (1909).  The  methods  of  reproduction  seem  to 
vary  in  different  members,  but  are  imperfectly  known  in  the  majority  of  cases. 

KEY  TO  GENERA. 

Thallus  in  cell  wall  of  algae x.  Endoderma  (p.  423). 

Thallus  on  shells,  stones,  etc 2.  Ulvella  (p.  423). 


MARINE   ALGM   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  423 

Genus  i.  Endodenna  L/agerheim. 

Endoderma,  Lagerheim,  1883,  p.  75. 

Entodenna,  Wille,  in  Engler  and  Prantl,  1897,  p.  94. 

Frond  microscopic,  creeping  on  or  within  other  algae  or  aquatic  plants;  filaments 
irregularly  branched,  with  or  without  hairs;  cell  division  mostly  terminal ;  chromato- 
phore  a  parietal  layer  with  one  or  more  pyrenoids;  zoospores  2  to  4  ciliate,  with  stigma, 
formed  four  or  more  in  a  cell,  escaping  by  a  hole  and  soon  germinating;  sexual  repro- 
duction by  biciliate  motile  gametes  without  stigma  is  probable,  but  not  certain. 

About  10  species,  marine  and  fresh  water. 
Endodenna  viride  (Reinke)  Lagerheim. 

Entocladia  viridis,  Reinke,  1879,  p.  476,  pi.  6,  f.  6-9. 
Endoderma  viride,  Lagerheim,  1883,  p.  75. 
Endoderma  viride,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  109. 
Endoderma  viride,  Collins,  1909,  p.  279. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  1626,  2006,  2236. 

Filaments  usually  much  branched,  3  to  8  mic.,  usually  6  mic.  diameter,  cells  i  to  6  diameters 
long,  sometimes  cylindrical,  more  often  irregularly  swollen  and  contorted,  with  oYie  pyrenoid ;  terminal 
cell  blunt  or  tapering;  growing  in  cell  walls  of  various  algae. 

Massachusetts;  Europe. 

Fairly  abundant  on  each  of  four  specimens  of  Cladophora  catenate.  ( ?),  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C., 
August,  1907.  . 

This  species  seems  to  have  been  recorded  in  North  America  only  from  Massachusetts.  Its  small 
size  makes  it  easily  overlooked,  and  it  will  probably  be  found  widely  distributed  on  the  Atlantic  coast. 

Genus  2.  Ulvella  Crouan. 

Ulvella,  Crouan,  1859,  p.  288. 

Fronds  forming  small  disks  on  larger  plants  or  other  objects,  firmly  attached  by 
the  under  surface,  originally  monostromatic,  of  radiating,  laterally  united,  dichotomous 
filaments;  later  polystromatic  except  at  the  margin;  cells  with  parietal  chromatophore 
and,  in  most  species,  one  pyrenoid,  arranged  in  more  or  less  definite  vertical  series; 
biciliate  zoospores  formed  in  the  central  cells,  4  to  8  to  1 6  in  a  cell,  escaping  by  an 
opening  at  the  top.  Marine. 

Few  (4  or  more)  species  in  North  America  and  Europe. 
Ulvella  lens  Crouan.    Fig.  i. 

Uhella  lens,  Crouan,  1859,  p.  288,  pi.  22,  f.  25-28. 

Uhella  lens,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  148. 

Ulvella  lens,  Collins,  1909,  p.  286,  pi.  u,  f.  102. 

Fronds  orbicular,  i  to  3  mm.  diameter,  cells  15  to  20  mic.  in  diameter  in  center  of  frond;  near  the 
margin  10  to  15  by  20  to  30  mic.,  without  pyrenoid;  frond  usually  not  over  three  layers  thick  in  the 
center. 

West  Indies;  Europe.  • 

Occasionally  forming  a  green  coating  on  shells,  Pamlico  Sound,  Ocracoke,  N.  C.,  August,  1907. 

Except  for  a  recent  find  by  Borgesen  in  the  Danish  West  Indies,  this  species  is  not  recorded  from 
any  other  locality  in  North  America. 

Order  2.     Siphonocladiales.  s 

Fronds  multicellular,  usually  more  or  less  branched ;  cells  multinucleate,  very  rarely 
uninucleate,  chromatophore  net  shaped,  or  of  numerous  small  disks. 

KEY  TO  FAMILIES. 

Frond  erect,  zoospores  and  gametes  produced  in  little  changed  vegetative  cells 

I.  CXADOPHORACE^3   (p.  424). 

Frond  creeping,  boring  in  shells,  zoospores  produced  in  distinct,  ultimately  detached  spor- 
angia   ' 2.  GOMONTIACE^S  (p.  429): 


424  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 

Family  1.  CLADOPHORACE^E  (Hassall)  De  Toni. 

Frond  of  simple  or  branching,  monosiphonous  filaments,  free  or  more  or  less  united 
laterally;  cells  multinucleate,  rarely  uninucleate,  with  chromatophore  net  form,  or 
broken  into  many  small  portions,  with  many  pyrenoids;  asexual  propagation  by  four 
ciliate  zoospores  (sometimes  by  biciliate?)  and  by  akinetes;  sexual  reproduction  by 
biciliate,  usually  similar  gametes.  Zoospores  and  gametes  formed  in  little  changed 
vegetative  cells. 

About  350  species,  marine  and  fresh  water,  throughout  the  world. 

KEY   TO    GENERA. 

a.  Filaments  simple,  firm b. 

b.  Filaments  regularly  cylindrical  or  clavate , i.  Chaetomorpha  (p.  424). 

bb.  Filaments  usually  more  or  less  irregular 2.  Rhizoclonium  (p.  427). 

00.  Filaments  branched c. 

c.  Branches  usually  short,  rhizoidal 2.  Rhizoclonium  (p.  427). 

cc.  Branches  of  successive  orders,  but  of  the  same  character 3.  Cladophora  (p.  427). 

Genus  i.  Chaetomorpha  Kuetzing. 
Chaetomorpha,  Kuetzing,  18453,  p.  203. 

Frond />f  a  single  unbranched  series  of  multinucleate  cells,  all  but  the  usually  longer 
basal  cell  capable  of  division;  basal  cell  producing  either  a  disk  or  more  or  less  branched 
rhizoidal  prolongations  serving  for  attachment;  frond  always  attached,  or  becoming 
loose  and  continuing  in  a  free  state;  membrane  thick,  firm,  usually  distinctly  lamellate; 
asexual  propagation  by  four-ciliate  zoospores,  produced  in  little  changed  cells;  sexual 
reproduction  by  similar  biciliate  gametes;  akinetes  sometimes  formed  (?). 

About  50  species,  mostly  marine,  rarely  in  fresh  water,  throughout  the  world  from 
Arctic  to  Antarctic  regions. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

Filaments  usually  400  to  500  mic.  diameter,  sometimes  less,  Beaufort  material  120  to  240 
mic. ;  coarse,  wiry. .'. i.  C.  melagonium  (p.  424). 

Filaments  125  to  400  mic.  diameter,  sometimes  less,  usually  200  to  250  mic. ,  Beaufort  material 
80 to  no  mic.;  yellowish  green,  soft,  flaccid._. 2.  C.  linum  (p.  425). 

Filaments  125  to  175  mic.  diameter,  Beaufort  material  100  to  175  mic. ;  dark  green,  soft,  flaccid 

3.  C.  brachygona  (p.  426). 

1.  Chaetomorpha  melagonium  (Weber  and  Mohr)  Kuetzing.     Fig.  2C. 

*  Conferva  melagonium,  Weber  and  Mohr,  1804,  p.  194,  pi.  3,  f.  a. 
Chcetomorpha  melagonium,  Kuetzing,  18453,  p.  204. 
Chatomorpha  melagonium,  Harvey,  1838,  p.  85. 
Cfuetomorpha  melagonium,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  46. 
Chtzlomorpha  melagonium,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  273. 
Chtetomorplui  melagonium,,  Collins,  1909,  p.  323. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  412  (forma  typica).  No.  413  (forma  rupincola). 

Filaments  erect,  coarse  and  wiry,  dark  glaucous  greenf  usually  400  to  500  mic.  diameter;  sometimes 
300  mic.  or  less;  cells  i  to  2  diameters  long. 

Common  from  New  Jersey  to  Greenland;  Alaska;  northern  Europe. 

Abundant  on  rocks  Shackleford  jetty,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  forming  dense  masses  with  Ufaa  lactuca, 
Enteromorpha  prolifera,  and  E.  lima,  about  low-water  level,  May,  1907. 

Two  forms  of  the  species  are  recognized:  f.  rupincola  (Areschoug)  Kjellman,  growing  attached  and 
erect,  usually  quite  straight;  and  f.  typica  Kjellman,  unattached,  lying  loose  in  crisped,  tangled  masses. 
The  latter  form  is  apparently  only  a  later  stage  of  the  plant.  There  is  considerable  variation  in  the  size 
of  the  filaments,  and  the  slender  forms,  sometimes  as  low  as  300  mic.  diameter  or  less,  are  not  always  easy 
to  distinguish  from  C.  linum;  but  the  greater  rigidity  and  the  dark,  glaucous,  green  color  are  usually 
sufficient  marks. 


MARINE   ALG^E   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  425 

The  material  from  Beaufort  is  finer  and  less  rigid  than  most  specimens  of  this  species  from  other 
localities,  approaching  in  this  respect  C.  linum,  but  is  coarser  and  more  rigid  than  most  specimens  of  the 
latter  species.  The  comparative  width  of  the  filaments  is  as  follows:  C.  melagonium,  180  to  440  mic.; 
C.  linum,  142  to  434  mic.;  C.  melagonium  (Beaufort  specimens),  120  to  240  mic.  Both  of  the  former 
have  length  of  cells  from  slightly  less  than  i  to  more  than  2  diameters,  the  Beaufort  specimens  have 
length  of  cells  from  two-thirds  to  2  diameters,  the  majority  of  cells  being  i  diameter  or  less.  In  spite 
of  these  variations,  there  seems  little  doubt  that  the  material  from  Beaufort  belongs  to  this  species, 
forma  rupincola.  It  is  easily  distinguished  from  C.  linum  at  Beaufort  by  its  coarse,  rigid,  dark-green 
filaments. 

It  has  been  found  at  this  place  only  in  May,  1907,  not  being  observed  in  April,  1908.  This  is  a 
northern  species,  and  the  present  locality  is  the  most  southern  station  reported  for  it.  It  is  not  improb- 
able that  this  is  its  southern  limit,  although  it  may  be  found  farther  south  in  the  winter  or  spring. 

I 
2.  Chaetomorpha  linum  (Mueller)  Kuetzing. 

Conferva  linum,  Mueller,  in  Flora  Danica,  torn.  5,  p.  4,  pi.  771,  f.  2,  1788. 

Chaetomorpha  linum,  Kuetzing,  18433,  p.  204. 

Chaetomorpha  sutoria,  Harvey,  1838,  p.  87. 

Chaetomorpha  longiarticulata,  Harvey,  1858,  p.  86,  pi.  46,  E- 

Chaetomorpha  olneyi,  Harvey,  1838,  p.  86,  pi.  46,  D. 

Chaetomorpha  linum,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  47. 

Chaetomorpha  linum,  De  Toni,  1889.  p.  269. 

Chaetomorpha  aerea  1.  linum,  Collins,  1909,  p.  325. 

Chaetomorpha  linum,  Collins,  1918,  p.  79. 

A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  175. 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  22,  1863  (C.  aerea  f.  linum). 

Filaments  unattached,  prostrate,  light  green,  rather  stiff,  diameter  200  to  250  mic.,  cells  about  as 
long  as  broad. 

Nova  Scotia  to  West  Indies;  warm  and  temperate  waters  generally. 

Rather  rare,  shoal  south  of  laboratory,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1903  (?);  marsh  west  of  laboratory, 
August,  1907  (?). 

This  species  apparently  bears  the  same  relation  to  C.  linum  f .  aerea  as  the  loose  form  of  C.  melagonium 
does  to  the  attached  form.  It  occurs  in  great  masses  of  curled  and  crisped  filaments  in  warm,  shallow 
bays. 

The  Beaufort  material  probably  belongs  to  this  species,  but  was  not  found  in  sufficient  quantity  for 
a  positive  determination. 

Forma  aerea  (Dillwyn)  Collins.     Fig.  2A. 

Conferva  aerea,  Dillwyn,  1809,  pi.  80. 
Chaetomorpha  aerea,  Kuetzing,  18493,  p.  379. 
Chaetomorpha  aerea,  Harvey,  1858,  p.  86. 
Chaetomorpha  aerea,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  46. 
Chaetomorpha  aerea,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  272. 
Chaetomorpha  aerea,  Collins,  1909,  p.  324,  pi.  12,  f.  115. 
Chaetomorpha  linum  f .  aerea,  Collins,  1918,  p.  79. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  76,  1526  (C.  aerea). 

Filaments  attached,  erect,  yellowish  green,  125  to  400  mic.  or  less  in  diameter,  cells  about  as  long  as 
broad,  base  of  filament  usually  more  slender  than  the  upper  part;  when  producing  zoospores  the  fertile 
cells  are  much  inflated  and  nearly  globular. 

Maine  to  West  Indies;  California;  warm  and  temperate  waters  generally. 

Sometimes  abundant  on  rocks  between  jetties  at  Fort  Macon,  summer  and  autumn,  forming  flaccid, 
tangled  masses  of  filaments  about  6  dm.  above  low  water,  and  fairly  abundant  on  sea  buoy,  September, 
1905,  Beaufort,  N.  C.  Abundant  on  rocks  in  tide  pool,  Morris  Island,  10  cm.  above  to  10  cm.  below 
water  level,  water  warm  to  touch,  Charleston,  S.  C. 

In  habit  like  C.  melagonium,  but  of  somewhat  smaller  diameter,  lighter  color  and  softer  texture; 
not  firm  enough  to  stand  erect  when  taken  from  the  water. 

Of  varying  degrees  of  coarseness.  The  Beaufort  material  is  finer  than  specimens  from  other  locali- 
ties, being  80  to  no  mic.  wide,  with  cells  90  to  225  mic.  long.  In  characters  other  than  the  size  of  the 
filaments,  this  material  seems  to  agree  with  "C.  aerea,"  as  observed  in  herbaria,  and  is  certainly  more 


426 


BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 


like  that  species  than  like  any  of  the  others  recorded  from  North  America.     This  is  the  finest  of  the 
three  representatives  of  this  genus  occurring  at  Beaufort. 

It  seems  somewhat  irrational  to  consider  a  floating  plant  as  the  species  and  to  refer  the  more  natural, 
attached  plant  to  a  form.  As  was  pointed  out  by  Howe  ( 1914,  p.  99)  this  procedure  is,  however,  required 
by  the  rules  of  botanical  nomenclature,  since  C.  linum  was  described  before  C.  aerea  and  must,  conse- 
quently, take  precedence  over  the  latter  form. 


Pig.  i.—Ulvella  lens,  after  Crouan  (1859).  A,  Section  of  Fig.  n.—Gomontia  polyrhiza,  after  Lagerheim  (1883).  A 
thallus;  B,  Surface  view.  Vegetative  cell;  B,  Aplanosporangium. 

Pig.  >. — A,  Chatomorpha  linum  f.  aerea;  B,  Ctuetomorpha  Fig.  s- — Udotea  cyathiformis,  X78,  after  Howe  (1909).  Apices 
brachygona;  C,  Chatomorpha  melagonium  I.  rupincola.  X47.  of  cortical  filaments  of  stipe. 

Fig.  3. — Rkizoclonium  riparium.  A,  X47;  B,  Xa8i.  Fig.  6. — Udoiea  conglutinata,  X 78,  after  Howe  (1909).  Apices 

of  cortical  filaments  of  stipe. 

3.  Chaetomorpha  brachygona  Harvey.     Fig.  zB. 

Chcetomorpha  brachygona,  Harvey,  1858,  p.  87.  pi.  463. 
Ctuetomorpha  brachygona,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  267. 
Ch&tomorpha  brachygona,  Collins,  1909,  p.  325. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  622. 

Filaments  free,  rigid,  curved,  and  twisted,  forming  strata  of  some  extent  on  rocks  or  among  other 
algae;  cells  125  to  175  mic.  diameter,  quite  uniformly  as  long  as  broad,  except  just  after  dividing. 

Florida;  West  Indies;  Mexico. 

Rather  abundant,  mixed  with  other  algae  floating  in  harbor,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  September  and  Octo- 
ber, 1905;  large,  tangled  mass  Bogue  Beach,  September,  1906. 

The  material  from  Beaufort  Harbor  has  the  diameter  of  filaments  100  to  175  mic.  This  species,  as  it 
occurs  there,  is  intermediate  in  appearance  between  C.  melagonium  and  C.  linum  f .  aerea,  being  finer, 
less  rigid,  and  lighter  green  than  the  former,  and  coarser,  more  rigid,  and  darker  green  than  the  latter. 

This  is  the  most  northern  station  reported  for  the  species,  and  is  probably  its  northern  limit. 


MARINE   ALGM   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  427 

Genus  2.  Rhizoclonium  Kuetzing. 

Rhizoclonium,  Kuetzing,  1843,  p.  261. 

Filaments  usually  prostrate,  consisting  of  a  single  series  of  multinucleate  cells,  with 
net-shaped  chromatophore  and  several  pyrenoids,  unbranched  or,  in  some  species,  with  a 
few  irregular  branches  similar  to  the  axis,  and  with  more  or  less  numerous  rhizoidal 
branches,  which  are  mostly  unicellular,  but  sometimes  consist  of  several  cells.  Asexual 
propagation  by  biciliate  zoospores,  with  stigma,  escaping  through  an  opening  in  the  cell 
wall;  also  by  akinetes;  but  in  only  a  few  species  has  either  form  of  fructification  been 
found. 

About  25  species,  in  fresh  or  salt  water  or  on  moist  earth,  throughout  the  world. 

The  filaments  resemble  those  of  Chaetomorpha,  but  are  less  uniformly  cylindrical, 
there  being  almost  always  more  or  less  irregularity  in  the  fotm  of  the  cells.  The  short 
rhizoidal  branches,  when  present,  clearly  characterize  the  genus,  but  they  are  not  always 
developed,  and  when  they  are  absent,  the  resemblance  to  Chaetomorpha  is  deceptive. 

Rhizoclonium  riparium  (Roth)  Harvey.     Fig.  3. 

Conferva  riparia.  Roth,  1806,  p.  216. 

iparium,  Harvey,  1849,  pi.  238. 
iparium,  Harvey,  1858,  p.  92. 


Rhizoclonium 
Rhizoclonium 
Rhizoclonium 


iparium,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  49,  pi.  3,  f. 
iparium,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  278. 
iparium,  Collins,  1909,  p.  327. 


A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  213. 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  24,  1734  (266,976,  var.  implexum;  1688.  var.  validum). 

Filaments  usually  pale  green,  forming  expansions  on  ground  or  rocks  in  the  littoral  zone;  cells 
usually  20  to  25  mic.  in  diameter,  rarely  a  little  more  or  less,  length  i  to  2  diameters;  branches  none  or 
few  or  many. 

Greenland  to  Florida;  Alaska  to  Washington ;  California;  South  America;  Europe;  Borneo. 

Fairly  abundant  on  rocks  of  Shackleford  jetty,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  April,  1908. 

Three  varieties  are  recognized,  depending  on  the  amount  and  nature  of  the  branching;  there  is  no 
typical  form  distinct  from  these. 

It  was  not  observed  here  in  May,  1907,  and  has  not  been  found  in  winter  or  summer. 

Genus  3.  Cladophora  Kuetzing. 

Cladophora,  Kuetzing,  1843,  p.  262. 

Frond  composed  of  filaments  of  a  single  series  of  cells,  the  filaments  branching, 
usually  abundantly;  branching  lateral,  but  often  coming  to  appear  dichotomous  in 
consequence  of  the  pushing  aside  of  the  original  filament  by  the  branch;  attached  at 
first,  later  attached  or  free  floating;  growth  chiefly  by  division  of  the  apical  cell,  subse- 
quent division  of  cells  being  exceptional;  branches  all  of  the  same  type;  cells  multi- 
nucleate,  the  chromatophore  either  covering  the  cell  wall  or  forming  a  network  on  it  or 
broken  into  numerous  small  disks;  pyrenoids  several  in  a  cell;  asexual  propagation  by 
four-ciliate  zoospores;  sexual  reproduction  by  similar  biciliate  gametes,  uniting  and 
germinating  immediately,  or  sometimes  germinating  without  copulation;  portions  of 
filaments  sometimes  capable  of  passing  into  resting  condition,  forming  structures  per- 
haps to  be  considered  as  akinetes. 

Three  hundred  to  400  species  described,  many  of  them  on  insufficient  characters, 
occurring  in  fresh  and  salt  water  throughout  the  world. 


428  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 

One  of  the  largest  genera  of  algae  and  one  of  the  most  difficult.  There  are  few 
sharply  marked  characters  for  distinguishing  the  species,  it  being  mostly  a  question  of 
more  or  less  in  one  respect  or  another.  It  is  impossible  for  one  not  familiar  with  the 
genus  to  determine  the  species  without  abundant  authentic  specimens  for  comparison. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

0.  Main  filaments  seldom  reaching  150  mic.  in  diameter 6. 

b.  Main  filaments  distinctly  angled  or  flexuous i.  C.  flexuosa  (p.  428). 

bb.  Main  filaments  straight  or  nearly  so 2.  C.  crystallina  (p.  428). 

aa.  Main  filaments  150  mic.  or  more  in  diameter c. 

c.  Lower  cells  less  than  10  diameters  long 3.  C '.  fascicularis  (p.  428). 

cc.  Lower  cells  10  diameters  long  or  more 4.  C.  prolifera  (p.  429). 

1.  Cladophora  flexuosa  (Mueller)  Harvey. 

Conferva  flexuosa,  Mueller,  in  Flora  Danica,  torn.  5,  pi.  882,^1782. 

Cladophora  flexuosa,  Harvey,  18493,  p.  202. 

Cladophora  flexuosa,  Harvey,  1858,  p.  78. 

Cladophora  flexuosa,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  54. 

Cladophora  flexuosa,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  311. 

Cladophora  flexuosa,  Collins,  1909,  p.  339. 

A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  206.      '  f 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  1076,  1527,  2239. 

Fronds  10  to  20  cm.  high,  light  green;  main  filaments  80  to  120  mic.  diameter,  regularly  flexuous 
with  flexuous  alternate  branches,  40  to  80  mic.  in  diameter,  with  alternate  or  secund,  curved,  and  some- 
times refracted  ramuli;  cells  from  6  diameters  long  below  to  2  diameters  in  the  ramuli. 

Newfoundland  to  Bermuda  and  Florida;  Alaska;  Europe. 

Abundant,  attached  and  floating  masses,  Mullet  Pond,  Shackleford  Banks,  and  fairly  abundant 
on  rocks  of  Fort  Macon  jetties,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  about  low-water  line,  April,  1908. 

This  species  closely  approaches  several  others  of  the  genus,  but  as  none  of  these  similar  species  has 
been  found  at  Beaufort,  this  fact  need  not  give  trouble  there.  Of  the  Beaufort  species,  it  most  nearly 
resembles  C.  crystallina,  from  which  it  is  distinguished  by  its  flexuous,  alternate  branches.  It  has  been 
observed  at  Beaufort  only  in  April,  1908,  not  being  found  there  in  May,  1907,  and  not  being  present  in 
Mullet  Pond  in  August,  1907. 

2.  Cladophora  crystallina  (Roth)  Kuetzing.     PI.  LXXXIV,  fig.  i. 

Conferva  crystallina.  Roth,  1797,  p.  196. 
Cladophora  crystallina,  Kuetzing,  18453,  p.  213. 
Cladophora  crystallina,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  318. 
Cladophora  crystallina,  Collins,  1909,  p.  342. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  1581, 1865. 

Fronds  yellowish  or  whitish  green,  soft,  glossy,  10  to  30  cm.  high;  filaments  slightly  matted,  dis- 
tantly dichotomously  or  trichotomously  branched;  main  branches  80  to  140  mic.  in  diameter,  tapering  to 
25  to  40  mic.  in  the  ramuli;  branching  erect  or  patent;  upper  ramuli  sometimes  whorled  or  alternately 
secund;  cells  cylindrical,  4  to  12  diameters  long. 

Massachusetts;  West  Indies;  Bermuda;  Europe. 

Abundant  on  sea  buoy,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  July,  1907. 

A  variable  species,  but  usually  marked  by  its  light  color  and  silky  gloss.  It  is  distinguished  from 
C.  flexuosa,  the  Beaufort  species  which  it  most  nearly  resembles,  by  its  dichotomous  or  trichotomous 
branching  and  its  straight  branches. 

3.  Cladophora  fascicularis  (Mertens)  Kuetzing. 

Conferva  fascicularis,  Mertens,  in  Agardh,  1824,  p.  114. 
Cladophora  fascicularis,  Kuetzing,  1843,  p.  268. 
Cladophora  fascicularis,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  316. 
Cladophora  fascicularis,  Collins,  1909,  p.  345. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  122,  1228,  1472. 


MARINE   ALG^E   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  429 

Fronds  elongate,  up  to  50  cm.  long;  main  filaments  and  principal  branches  flexuous,  sparingly 
alternately  branched,  the  ends  beset  with  rather  long,  pectinate,  more  or  less  densely  fasciculate  ramuli; 
main  filaments  200  to  250  mic.  in  diameter,  cells  2  to  4  diameters  long;  ramuli  80  to  120  mic.  diameter, 
cells  usually  i  to  2  diameters  long. 

Florida;  West  Indies;  South  America;  Red  Sea. 

Abundant  in  bay  at  New  Inlet,  Southport,  N.  C.,  August,  1909,  floating  and  attached  to  shells  and 
grass,  7  cm.  above  to  7  cm.  below  low  water. 

This  is  the  most  northern  station  reported  for  this  species. 

4.  Cladophora  prolifera  (Roth)  Kuetzing. 

Conferva  prolifera.  Roth,  1797,  pi.  3,  f.  2. 
-  Cladophora  prolifera,  Kuetzing,  18453,  p.  207. 
Cladophora  prolifera,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  306. 
Cladophora  prolifera,  Collins,  1909,  p.  348. 

Fronds  dense,  dark  green  when  growing,  blackish  when  dried,  up  to  20  cm.  high,  rarely  more; 
filaments  coarsely  membranaceous  or  cartilaginous,  300  to  400  mic.  in  diameter,  dichotomous  or  tri- 
chotomous,  divisions  mostly  erect,  more  frequent  toward  the  somewhat  fastigiate  tips;  ramuli  130  to 
200  mic.  diameter,  blunt;  cells  up  to  20  diameters  long  in  the  main  filaments,  much  shorter  in  the 
branches,  4  to  6  diameters  long  in  the  ramuli. 

Porto  Rico;  Barbados;  Mediterranean;  Red  Sea. 

Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  two  fragments,  August  and  September,  1904,  four  small  fragments, 
August,  i907(?). 

A  coarse,  dark  species,  distinguished  with  comparative  ease. 

Besides  the  above-mentioned  species,  material  of  Cladophora,  insufficient  for 
specific  determination,  has  been  found  at  Fort  Macon,  on  the  buoys,  on  Bogue  Beach, 
floating  in  Beaufort  Harbor,  and  at  Ocracoke.  A  few  specimens  gathered  on  Bogue 
Beach,  August,  1907,  resemble  C.  catenate  (Ag.)  Ardis.,  but  are  not  included  among  the 
descriptions,  since  they  are  insufficient  for  a  satisfactory  determination.  A  small 
amount  of  Cladophora  was  collected  in  the  harbor  in  January,  1909,  but  at  no  other 
time  during  the  winter.  Except  for  such  scanty  material,  which  is  fairly  constant  on 
the  sand  breaks  and  rocks  at  Fort  Macon  during  the  summer  and  autumn,  all  the  species 
of  Cladophora  at  Beaufort  seem  to  be  transient  visitors.  None  has  been  found  there  in 
any  two  successive  years. 

Family  2.  GOMONTI ACE/E  Bornet  and  Flahault. 

Fronds  consisting  of  creeping,  branched  filaments,  penetrating  various  shells,  in 
one  species  penetrating  wood;  cells  multinucleate ;  asexual  propagation  by  biciliate 
zoospores  or  possibly  by  aplanospores,  both  produced  in  sporangia  formed  usually  on 
the  upper  surface  of  the  horizontal  layer;  sexual  reproduction  by  biciliate  gametes  (?). 

Genus  Gomontia  Bornet  and  Flahault. 

Gomontia,  Bomet  and  Flahault,  i888a,  p.  164. 

Filaments  usually  radiating,  irregularly  branched;  aplanospores  develop  directly 
into  vegetative  filaments,  or  first  form  new  aplanosporangia  (?). 

Six  species,  mostly  marine,  two  in  fresh  water,  North  America  and  Europe. 

The  observations,  of  Moore  (1918)  tend  to  alter  the  previous  conception  of  this 
genus,  indicating  that  the  structures  previously  regarded  as  aplanospores  are  formed 
from  zoospores  which  pass  into  a  resting  condition  and  delay  their  germination  for  an 
indefinite  time.  No  evidence  for  the  existence  of  gametes  was  obtained  by  this  author. 


430 


BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 


Gomontia  polyrhiza  (Lagerheim)  Bornet  and  Flahault.     Fig.  4. 
CodMum  polyrhizum,  Lagerheim,  1885,  p.  21,  pi.  28. 
Gomontia  polyrhiza,  Bornet  and  Flahault.  i888a.  p.  163. 
Gomontia  polyrhiza,  Bornet  and  Flahault,  1889.  p.  CLII.  pis.  6-8. 
Gomontia  polyrhiza,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  389. 
Gomontia  polyrhiza,  Collins.  1909,  p.  37O.  pi.  15.  f-  I3S- 
P.  B.-A.  No.  315- 

Filaments  4  to  8  mic.  in  diameter;  sporangia  30  to  40  mic.  in  diameter;  zoospores  of  two  sorts,  one 
loto  12  by  5  to  6  mic.,  the  other  about  5  by  3.5  mic.;  development  not  known;  the  smaller  ones  possibly 
gametes(?);  aplanospores  4  mic.  in  diameter. 

Abundant  on  both  coasts  of  North  America;  Europe. 

In  shells,  Pamlico  Sound,  Ocracoke,  N.  C.,  August,  1907. 

Order  3.     Siphonales. 

Fronds  filiform,  usually  much  branched  or  interwoven  into  various  forms,  usually 
continuous  without  dissepiments  in  the  vegetative  condition,  multinucleate,  with  many 
lens  or  disk  shaped  chromatophores. 

The  members  of  this  order  are,  with  few  exceptions,  marine  and  are  mostly  confined 
to  tropical  and  warm  temperate  regions. 

KEY  TO  FAMILIES. 

a.  Frond  differentiated  into  root,  stem,  and  branches  of  varied  form .4.  CAULERPACE^S  (p.  434). 

oo.  Frond  not  differentiated  into  root,  stem,  and  branches 7 b. 

b.  Filaments  interwoven  to  form  fronds  of  definite  form 3.  CODIACE^B  (p.  431). 

66.  Filaments  branching,  plumosely,  not  interwoven 2.  BRYOPSIDACE^  (p.  431). 

666.  Filaments    branching    dichotomously    or    irregularly,     forming     indefinite     mats 

i.  DERBESIACE^E  (p.  430). 

Family  1.  DERBESIACE/E  Thuret. 

Vegetative  frond  mostly  unicellular,  irregularly  or  dichotomously  branched,  forming 
indefinite  mats,  or  consisting  of  upright  branches  arising  from  creeping  filaments  attached 
to  the  substratum  by  short,  irregular  branches;  chromatophores  large  or  small  disks, 
each  containing  i  to  3  pyrenoids,  or  lacking  these;  asexual  propagation  by  means  of 
almost  spherical  zoospores,  formed  (8  to  20)  in  sporangia  arising  as  lateral  branches  of 
definite  shape  and  cut  off  from  the  main  filaments  by  cross  walls,  each  zoospore  possessing 
a  circle  of  cilia  and  germinating  immediately;  sexual  reproduction  unknown. 

About  nine  species,  all  marine,  in  North  America,  Europe,  and  Asia. 

Genus  Derbesia  Solier. 
Derbesia,  Solier,  1847,  p.  157. 

Characters  of  the  family. 
About  nine  species. 
Derbesia  turbinata  Howe  and  Hoyt.    PI.  CXV,  figs.  10-16. 

Derbesia  turbinata,  Howe  and  Hoyt,  1916,  p.  106,  pi.  «.  figs.  10-16. 
Derbesia  turbinata,  Collins,  1918,  p.  92. 

Frond  more  or  less  creeping,  forming  straggling  mats  8  to  9  cm.  broad  (or  high?)  the  basal  parts  some- 
times here  and  there  resolved  into  cysts;  filaments  16  to  100  mic.  (mostly  40  to  55  mic.)  in  diameter, 
sparingly  branched,  the  branching  subdichotomous  or  more  often  lateral,  the  lateral  branches  usually 
without  a  basal  septum,  the  others  with  or  without  one  or  two  septa  above  the  dichotomy;  chloroplasts 
at  first  orbicular  elliptic  or  ovate,  5  to  7  mic.  in  diameter,  later  irregularly  confluent  and  spindle 
shaped;  zoosporangia  turbinate,  broadly  obconi-obovoid,  broadly  pyriform,  or  pestle  shaped,  137  to 


MARINE   Al<GM   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  431 

192  mic.  long  (excluding  stalk),  124  to  164  mic.  broad,  mostly  about  as  broad  as  long,  the  apex 
subtruncate,  the  outline  commonly  somewhat  obdeltoid;  pedicel  mostly  15  to  33  mic.  (rarely  75  mic.) 
long,  1 6  to  22  mic.  broad,  the  pedicel  cell  usually  about  19  to  22  mic.  long  and  broad  or  sometimes 
broader  than  long  (n  by  22  mic.);  zoospores  unknown;  color  dark  green  or  olive  green. 

-Several  small  mats  mixed  with  Cladophora  sp.  dredged  from  coral  reef  offshore,  Beaufort,  N.  C., 
August  ii,  1914. 
Endemic. 

Family  2.  BRYOPSIDACELE  (Bory)  De  Toni. 

Vegetative  frond  unicellular,  much  branched;  chromatophores  numerous  small 
disks,  each  with  one  pyrenoid;  the  axis  producing  below  rhizoids,  and  above  branches 
both  of  unlimited  and  limited  growth ;  in  the  latter  large  biciliate,  green,  female  gametes, 
and  usually  (?)  on  separate  individuals,  smaller,  brown,  biciliate  male  gametes  are 
developed ;  by  the  union  of  the  two  a  zygote  is  formed,  germinating  immediately. 

About  30  species,  all  marine,  especially  in  warmer  seas. 

Genus  Bryopsis  Lamouroux. 
Bryopsis,  Lamouroux,  iSoga,  p.  133. 

Characters  of  the  family;  cavity  continuous,  without  dissepiments,  in  the  vegetative 
condition. 

Twenty  to  30  species. 
Bryopsis  plumosa  (Hudson)  Agardh.     PL  LXXXIV,  fig.  4. 

Uha  f>lumosa,  Hudson,  1762,  p.  571. 
Bryopsis  plumosa,  Agardh,  1822,  p.  448. 
Bryopsis  plumosa,  Harvey,  1858,  p.  31.  pi.  45,  A. 
Bryopsis  plumosa,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  59,  pi.  4,  f.  i. 
Bryopsis  plumosa,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  431. 
Bryopsis  plumosa,  Collins,  1909,  p.  403,  pi.  17,  f.  155. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  227. 

Frond  seldom  over  10  cm.  high,  rich,  glossy  green;  amount  of  branching  variable;  typical  forms 
with  numerous  lateral  branches  and  often  a  second  series;  all  branches  with  abundant  distichous  ramuli, 
shorter  above,  giving  the  branches  triangular  outlines. 

Maine  to  Florida;  Europe. 

Two  or  three  large  masses  in  harbor,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  growing  under  a  wharf,  7  to  10  cm.  below  low 
water,  April,  1908. 

The  most  widely  distributed  species  of  the  genus;  it  is  nowhere  very  abundant,  but  occurs  in  various 
stations.  In  its  northern  range  it  seems  to  be  more  specially  a  summer  plant,  but  is  sometimes  found  at 
any  season.  Variable  in  appearance. 

At  Beaufort  this  species  has  not  been  found  in  summer,  autumn,  or  winter,  and  was  not  observed 
in  May,  1907. 

Family  3.  CODIACEJE  Zanardini. 

Spongodiaceae,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  488. 
Udoteacese,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  499- 

Frond  of  definite  shape,  except  in  the  lowest  forms,  composed  of  interwoven,  con- 
tinuous, branching  filaments,  sometimes  apparently  pluricellular  by  constrictions, 
calcified  or  not;  asexual  propagation  by  zoospores  and  aplanospores,  formed  in  spor- 
angia; sexual  reproduction  by  motile  gametes,  either  similar  or  differing  in  size. 

About  80  species,  all  marine,  in  tropical  and  subtropical  regions,  especially  in  warm 
seas. 

KEY  TO  GENERA. 

Not  calcified  nor  stipitate,  soft  and  spongy;  cortical  layer  formed  of  the  swollen  ends  of  the 
longitudinal  filaments;  filiform  or  somewhat  flattened i.  Codium  (p.  432). 

Calcified  and  stipitate;  cortical  layer  formed  of  lateral  branches,  usually  smaller  than  the 

longitudinal  filaments;  lamina  fan  shaped  .  „ 2.  Udotea  (p.  433). 

159321°— 20 5 


432  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 

Genus  i.  Codium  Stackhouse. 
Codhim,  Stackhouse,  1797.  P-  XVI. 

Frond  of  spongy  texture,  of  very  varying  form,  consisting  of  branching,  continuous 
filaments,  their  swollen  ends — "utricles" — closely  packed  to  form  a  cortical  layer^no 
asexual  propagation  known;  sexual  reproduction  by  motile  biciliate  gametes,  produced 
in  subovoid  gametangia,  borne  laterally  on  the  utricles  and  separated  from  these  by  cross 
walls;  female  gametes  large,  dark  green;  male  gametes  small,  yellowish;  the  zygote, 
formed  by  the  union  of  a  male  and  a  female  gamete,  germinates  immediately;  female 
gametes  sometimes  germinate  parthenogenetically(P);  male  and  female  gametes  usually 
produced  on  different  individuals,  but  sometimes  on  the  same  individual. 

About  30  species  described,  many  on  insufficient  characters;  in  tropical  and  tem- 
perate seas,  mostly  in  warmer  regions.  This  is  the  most  northern  station  reported  for 
the  genus  in  North  America,  and  is  probably  its  northern  limit. 

The  elongated  forms  of  this  genus  are  very  variable.  The  characters  on  which 
many  species  have  been  described — the  length  of  frond,  amount  of  flattening,  and 
comparative  length  and  breadth  of  utricles — vary  greatly  and  are  often  connected  by 
intermediate  stages. 

At  Beaufort  the  plants  can  be  grouped  around  two  types  and  are  accordingly 
described  as  two  species,  although  it  is  by  no  means  certain  that  these  should  be  kept 
distinct. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

Frond  more  or  less  cylindrical  except  in  the  axils  of  the  branches,  abundantly  branched 

i.C.  tomentosum  (p.  432). 

Frond  more  or  less  flattened,  sparingly  branched ? 2.  C.  decorticalum  (p.  433.) 

i.  Codium  tomentosum  (Hudson)  Stackhouse.     PI.  LXXXV,  fig.  i. 

Fucus  totnentosus,  Hudson,  1732,  p.  584. 
Codium  tomentosum,  Stackhouse,  1797,  p.  XXIV. 
Codium  tomentosum,  Harvey,  1858,  p.  29  (in  part). 
Codium  tomentosum,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  491. 
Codium  tomentosum,  Collins,  1909,  p.  388. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  168,  1869. 

Frond  erect,  cylindrical,  dichotomously  branched,  more  or  less  fastigiate;  surface  smooth  and  soft; 
utricles  obovate-clavate,  100  to  150  mic.,  rarely  200  mic.  in  diameter(?),  3  to  6  diameters  long,  apex 
obtuse,  unarmed. 

North  Carolina  to  Florida;  West  Indies;  Europe;  Asia;  Africa;  Oceanica. 

Beaufort,  N.  C.:  Very  abundant,  attached  to  rocks,  shells,  etc.,  throughout  harbor  and  on  Fort 
Macon  jetties;  less  abundant  on  Shackleford  jetties;  very  abundant  on  Bogue  Beach  after  hard  winds. 
Wrightsville  Beach,  N.  C.:  Abundant  in  sound,  July,  1909.  Pawleys  Island,  near  Georgetown,  S.  C.i 
Fairly  abundant  in  bay  near  inlet,  August,  1909. 

This  is  the  northern  limit  of  this  species  reported  for  North  America.  It  is  common  at  Beaufort  from 
June  to  September,  becoming  less  abundant  during  the  autumn,  and  found  only  occasionally  during  the 
winter  and  spring.  The  only  trace  of  these  plants  observed  in  April,  1908,  was  a  group  of  minute  speci- 
mens, 3  to  12  mm.  long,  on  shells  15  cm.  below  low  water,  apparently  just  commencing  their  growth.  In 
May,  1907,  no  specimens  were  found  in  the  harbor,  but  three  pieces,  2  to  3  cm.  long,  were  dredged  on  the 
coral  reef  offshore,  and  a  few  small  fragments  were  collected  on  Bogue  Beach.  Small  specimens  were 
collected  in  Beaufort  Harbor  and  on  Fort  Macon  jetties  in  January  and  February,  1909,  but  none  was 
found  at  any  other  time  during  the  winter.  This  may  grow  to  a  considerable  size.  The  plant  figured  on 
Plate  LXXXV,  figure  i,  found  on  Bogue  Beach  in  October,  had  a  radius  of  30  cm.  and,  after  the  surface 
water  was  removed  with  a  towel,  weighed  1.942  kg.  (4  pounds  4.5  ounces). 


MARINE   ALGM  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  433 

The  species  is  distinguished  from  C.  decorticatum  by  its  more  rounded,  more  densely  branched 
thallus,  and  sometimes  by  its  smaller  utricles.  The  extremes  of  these  species  are  very  different  in 
appearance,  but  they  are  connected  by  numerous  intermediate  forms  so  that  it  is  often  very  difficult  to 
decide  to  which  species  a  given  specimen  should  be  referred,  especially  since  the  utricles  may  vary 
greatly  in  size,  and  the  thallus  is  always  more  or  less  flattened  belowthe  dichotomies. 

2.  Codium  decorticatum  (Woodward)  M.  A.  Howe.     PI.  LXXXV,  fig.  2. 

Ulva  decorticala.  Woodward,  1797,  p.  55. 
Codium  elongatum,  Agardh,  1822,  p.  454. 
Codium  elongatum,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  496. 
Codium  elongatum,  Collins,  1909,  p.  388. 
Codium  decorticatum,  Howe,  1911,  p.  494. 
Codium  decorticatum,  Collins,  1912,  p.  99. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  627  (C.  elongatum),  2017. 

Frond  dichotomo'usly  branched,  often  much  elongate,  younger  divisions  terete,  older  ones  flattened, 
especially  below  the  dichotomies,  being  there  distinctly  cuneate;  utricles  obovate-clavate,  300  to  400 
mic.  in  diameter(?),  five  to  six  times  as  long  as  the  greatest  diameter. 

North  Carolina  to  Florida;  West  Indies;  Lower  California,  Mexico;  South  America;  Europe;  Africa. 

Beaufort,  N.  C.:  Abundant  on  Bogue  Beach  after  winds;  occasional  in  Beaufort  Harbor  in  earlier 
years,  becoming  more  abundant  in  later  years;  abundant  on  rocks  of  Fort  Macon  jetties,  July,  1909;  and 
very  abundant  in  harbor  off  Duncan  breakwater  and  north  of  laboratory,  September,  1909.  Pawleys 
Island,  near  Georgetown,  S.  C.:  Abundant  in  bay  near  inlet,  August,  1909. 

This  is  the  northern  limit  of  the  species  reported  for  North  America. 

The  species  is  distinguished  from  C.  tomentosum  by  the  greater  flattening,  the  more  elongate,  less 
densely  branched  frond,  and  sometimes  by  the  larger  utricles.  The  younger  plants  resemble  C.  tomen- 
tosum,  but  the  flattening  is  marked  in  older  plants;  in  some  cases  all  parts  except  the  younger  tips  are 
quite  broadly  cuneate.  As,  however,  all  plants  of  both  species  are  more  or  less  flattened  below  the 
dichotomies,  and  numerous  intermediate  forms  are  found,  it  is  often  difficult  to  determine  on  this  basis 
to  which  species  a  given  specimen  should  be  referred.  One  specimen  found  at  Beaufort  had  three  main 
divisions,  two  of  which  were  flattened  like  C.  decorticatum,  while  the  third  resembled  C.  tomentosum. 
Dried  specimens  are  particularly  unreliable  in  this  respect,  since  in  these  the  amount  of  flattening  may 
be  largely  due  to  the  amount  of  pressure  to  which  the  plants  were  subjected  during  drying. 

The  size  of  the  utricles  furnished  no  criterion  for  distinguishing  the  plants  of  this  region.  While 
those  on  the  coarsest,  widest  specimens  are  wider,  those  on  other  individuals  having  the  form  of  C,  decor- 
ticatum are  narrower  than  many  of  those  on  individuals  having  the  typical  form  of  C.  tomentosum. 

If  the  two  extreme  forms  found  at  Beaufort  grade  into  each  other  in  other  localities  as  much  as  they 
do  at  this  place,  it  may  be  questioned  whether  the  present  species  is  not  merely  a  large  form  of  C.  tomen- 
tosum. On  the  other  hand,  however,  the  fact  that  it  was  first  found  at  Beaufort  on  Bogue  Beach  and 
only  in  later  years  made  its  appearance  in  the  harbor,  indicates  that  it  is  a  distinct  species  and  that  it 
established  itself  in  this  region  during  the  period  of  this  study.  It  seems,  too,  to  appear  here  later  in 
the  spring  and  to  disappear  earlier  in  the  fall  than  C.  tomentosum.  On  this  basis  the  intermediate  forms 
may  possibly  be  ascribed  to  hybridization. 

This  species  may  grow  to  a  large  size.  One  specimen  collected  on  a  jetty  at  Fort  Macon  had  a  length 
of  i  meter  and  a  width  of  5  cm.  below  its  widest  dichotomy. 

Genus  2.  Udotea  Lamouroux. 
Udotea,  Lamouroux,  1812,  p.  186. 

Frond  arising  from  a  mass  of  rhizoids,  differentiated  into  stipe  and  flabellum ;  stipe 
erect,  with  distinct  cortex,  terminating  in  a  fan-shaped,  more  or  less  distinctly  zonate 
flabellum,  consisting  of  continuous,  branching  filaments,  with  more  or  less  numerous 
short  branches  attached  to  each  other  by  short  processes  and  sometimes  developing 
laterally  into  a  more  or  less  definite  cortex;  calcification  more  or  less  complete;  repro- 
duction unknown. 


434  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

About-  1 2  species,  in  tropical  and  warm  temperate  seas ;  seven  of  the  species  occur 
in  North  America. 

This  is  the  northern  limit  of  the  genus  on  this  continent. 
Udotea  cyathiformis  Decaisne.     Fig.  5;  PI.  LXXXIV,  figs.  2  and  3. 

Udotea  cyathiformis,  Decaisne,  18428,  p.  106. 

Udotea  conglulinata,  Harvey,  1858,  pi.  40  C  (probaBly). 

Udotea  cyathiformis,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  512. 

Udotea  cyathiformis,  Collins,  1909,  p.  395- 

Fronds  3  to  17  cm.  high,  greenish  or  whitish,  more  or  less  calcified;  stipe  mostly  subterete,  sometimes 
slightly  flattened  above,  0.2  to  5  cm.  long,  i  to  6  mm.  wide,  corticated;  transition  from  stipe  to  flabellum 
abrupt,  flabellum  uncorticated,  cyathiform,  now  and  then  i  to  5  cleft  nearly  or  quite  to  the  base,  or  more 
often  early  divided  to  base  on  one  side  and  becoming  almost  flat,  but  usually  remaining  more  or  less 
concavo-convex  at  extreme  base,  then  obovate,  semiorbicular,  or  variously  shaped,  i  to  n  cm.  long, 
i  to  9  cm.  wide,  mostly  entire,  often  irregularly  laciniate,  rather  faintly  or  not  at  all  zonate;  filaments 
of  flabellum  40  to  135  mic.  (mostly  60  to  100  mic.)  in  diameter,  in  several  or  many  layers,  nearly  straight, 
parallel  and  rigid,  somewhat  flexuous  and  interwoven,  distinct,  each  filament  surrounded  by  a  calcare- 
ous sheath  which  is  perforated  by  numerous  pores;  branches  of  the  stipe  cortex  in  compact  cymose- 
fastigiate  clusters,  the  ultimate  divisions  scarcely  longer  than  broad,  truncate,  truncate-obtuse,  or 
very  commonly  with  expanded  truncate-capitate  apices. 

Florida;  West  Indies. 

Dredged  on  coral  reef  offshore,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  about  15  specimens,  i  to  3  cm.  long,  May,  1907; 
a  specimens,  4.5  cm.  long,  August,  1914. 

This  is  the  only  species  of  Udotea  that  has  been  found  in  this  region,  but  others  are  liable  to  occur. 
Most  of  them  may  be  distinguished  from  the  present  species  with  comparative  ease  by  means  of  the 
description  given  above;  but  one,  U.  conglutinata,  closely  resembles  the  present  form  and  is  liable  to  be 
confused  with  it.  These  species  are,  according  to  Howe  (1909),  distinguished  as  follows:  U.  cyathiformis 
has  a  goblet-shaped  frond  (sometimes  split  and  more  or  less  flattened),  with  abrupt  transition  in  structure 
from  stipe  to  flabellum;  the  corticating  filaments  of  the  stipe  are  compactly  cymose-fastigiate,  the  ulti- 
mate divisions  being  scarcely  longer  than  broad,  obtuse,  and  often  expanded  at  the  apices  (fig.  5). 
U.  conglutinata  has  a  flattened  frond,  with  gradual  transition  in  structure  from  stipe  to  flabellum;  the 
corticating  filaments  of  the  stipe  are  somewhat  loosely  and  irregularly  fastigiate,  the  ultimate  divisions 
being  finger  shaped,  rather  acute  at  apices  (fig.  6).  In  difficult  specimens  these  characters  of  the  stipe 
cortex  are  especially  useful  in  determining  the  species.  Howe  (1909)  has  given  excellent  descriptions 
and  figures  of  these  two  species. 

Family  4.  CAULERPACE/E  (Reichenbach)  De  Toni. 

Frond  tubular,  multinucleate,  unicellular,  traversed  by  cross  strands  of  cellulose; 
multiplication  apparently  only  by  fragmentation  of  the  frond;  no  asexual  propagation 
or  sexual  reproduction  known. 

Only  one  genus. 

Genus  Caulerpa  Lamouroux. 

Caulerpa,  Lamouroux,  iSogb,  p.  141. 

Frond  composed  of  a  creeping  stolon  (wanting  in  one  species),  giving  out  rhizoids 
below  and  branches  above,  the  latter  of  various  form,  usually  erect,  but  sometimes 
prostrate,  simple  or  branched. 

About  80  species,  in  tropical  and  subtropical  seas. 
Caulerpa  prolifera  (Forskaal)  Lamouroux. 

Fucus  prolifer,  Forskaal,  1775,  p.  193. 

Caulerpa  prolifera,  Lamouroux,  iSogb,  p.  142. 

Caulerpa  Prolifera,  Harvey,  1858,  p.  16,  pi.  38  B. 

Caulerpa  prolifera,  De  Toni,  1889,  p.  450. 

Caulerpa  prolifera,  Collins,  1909,  p.  413,  pi.  18,  f .  160. 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  269,  1872. 


MARINE   ALG&   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  435 

Stolon  usually  stout,  naked,  erect  branches  flat,  linear,  obtuse,  up  to  30  cm.  long  and  3  cm.  wide, 
rarely  divided,  margin  entire,  sometimes  slightly  undulate,  similar  branches  often  arising  proliferously 
from  any  point  on  the  original  branches;  color  blackish  or  olive  green. 

Florida;  West  Indies;  Yucatan;  Atlantic  coast  of  northern  Africa;  Mediterranean. 

One  fragment  of  an  upright  branch,  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  April,  1908. 

It  seems  improbable  that  the  fragment  found  here  grew  in  this  region  at  this  season  of  the  year;  it 
seems  much  more  probable  that  it  was  brought  here  by  the  Gulf  Stream  from  Florida  or  the  West  Indies. 

This  is  the  most  northern  point  reported  for  the  species  or  the  genus. 

Division  III.  PHyEOPHYCEjE  (Thuret)  Kjellman. 

Zoosporeae,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  40  (in  part). 
Oosporeae,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  98  (in  part). 
Fucoideae,  De  Toni,  1895,  p.  i. 

BROWN  ALG^. 

Algae  olivaceous  brown,  containing  in  their  cells  endochrome  composed  of  chlo- 
rophyll and  a  characteristic  brown  pigment,  fucoxanthin;  endochrome  contained  in 
definite  chromatophores ;  thallus  varying  extremely  in  size  and  form;  cells  containing 
mostly  only  one  nucleus.  Multiplication  asexual  or  sexual:  asexual  (propagation)  by 
motile  noncopulating  biciliate  zoospores,  or  by  aplanospores,  or  by  specialized  or  non- 
specialized  portions  of  the  thallus;  sexual  (reproduction)  by  zygotes  formed  by  the 
copulation  of  gametes;  gametes  similar  (isogametes),  or  different  in  form,  size,  etc.- — 
that  is,  male  and  female  (heterogametes) — usually  motile,  in  some  families  differentiated 
into  large  nonmotile  eggs  and  small  motile  sperms;  all  motile  cells,  zoospores  or  gametes, 
have  two  laterally  inserted  cilia  except  among  the  Dictyotaceae  where  the  sperms  are 
monociliate;  zoospores,  aplanospores,  and  gametes  produced  in  special  organs  (sporangia 
or  gametangia)  which  are  borne  on  ordinary  portions  of  the  thallus  or  on  more  or  less 
specialized  portions;  asexual  and  sexual  organs  occurring  on  different  individuals  or, 
less  often,  on  the  same  individual;  in  some  forms,  sexual  and  asexual  generations  alter- 
nating with  each  other  in  the  life  cycle;  male  and  female  gametes,  when  present,  pro- 
duced on  the  same  or  on  different  individuals;  almost  exclusively  marine,  some  endo- 
phytic,  a  very  few  in  fresh  water. 

About  1,000  species  throughout  the  world,  but  reaching  their  greatest  development 
in  cold  seas. 

KEY  TO   ORDERS. 

Asexual  propagation  by  biciliate  zoospores,  rarely  by  nonmotile  aplanospores;  sexual  repro- 
duction usually  by  motile  similar  or  dissimilar  gametes,  in  one  family  by  nonmotile  eggs 
and  motile  biciliate  sperms;  sporangia  and  gametangia  occurring  on  superficial  portions  of 
the  thallus  or  arising  from  the  transformation  of  surface  cells i.  PH^EOSPORE^E  (p.  436). 

Asexual  propagation  lacking;  sexual  reproduction  by  nonmotile  eggs  and  biciliate  motile 
sperms;  gametangia  arising  in  sunken  conceptacles  usually  on  more  or  less  specialized 
portions  of  the  thallus 2.  CYCLOSPORE^  (p.  449). 

Asexual  propagation  by  nonmotile  aplanospores;  sexual  reproduction  by  nonmotile  eggs 
and  motile  monociliate  sperms;  sporangia  and  gametangia  arising  from  the  transforma- 
tion of  surface  cells,  occurring  singly  or  in  groups,  usually  on  ordinary  portions  of  the 

thallus 3-    DlCTYOTAIvES    (p.  453). 


436  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 

Order  i.  Phaeosporeae  Thuret. 


De  Toni.  1895,  P-  »93- 

Thallus  multicellular  (in  a  few  forms  one  to  few  celled),  varying  greatly  in  size  and 
form;  asexual  propagation  by  fragments  of  the  thallus  or  special  "brood  buds"  (pro- 
pagula)  or  by  laterally  biciliate  zoospores,  or  by  nonmotile  aplanospores ;  sexual  repro- 
duction by  motile,  laterally  biciliate  gametes,  similar  or  differing  in  form  and  size,  or 
by  nonmotile  eggs  and  laterally  biciliate  motile  sperms ;  spores  and  gametes  produced 
in  organs  (sporangia,  gametangia)  formed  from  ordinary  vegetative  cells  or  from  special 
cells ;  sporangia  and  gametangia  occurring  on  superficial  portions  of  the  thallus  or  arising 
from  the  transformation  of  surface  cells. 

KEY  TO   FAMILIES. 

o.  Sporangia  and  gametangia  occupying  the  place  of  branches  of  the  frond  or  formed  by  the    • 
transformation  of  segments  or  portions  of  these  segments;  longitudinal  growth  inter- 
calary  i.  ECTOCARPACE^  (p.  436). 

oo.  Sporangia  and  gametangia  formed  by  the  transformation  or  division  of  a  superficial  cell, 
less  often  arising  from  the  evolution  of  single  segments  of  a  segmented  portion  of  the 
frond;  longitudinal  growth  by  intercalary  division  equally  distributed  through  the 

whole  frond  or  persisting  a  longer  time  at  the  base;  frond  simple 2.  ENCCELIACE^E  (p.  442). 

aaa.  Sporangia  and  gametangia  occupying  the  place  of  assimilating  filaments  or  formed  by 

the  partial  transformation  of  assimilating  filaments 6. 

b.  Longitudinal  growth  basal  or  lasting  longest  at  the  base 3.  ELACHISTEACE^  (p.  444). 

bb.  Longitudinal  growth  terminal  or  subterminal: . .  • 4.  CHORDARIACE/E  (p.  445). 

0000.  Sporangia  and  gametangia  lateral  on  special  segmented  filaments  arising  from  the  frond c. 

c.  Longitudinal  growth  subterminal 5.  STILOPHORACE^E  (p.  447). 

cc.  Longitudinal  growth  trichothallic ;  brushes  of  confervoid  filaments  at  the  ends  of 

the  short  branches 6.  SPOROCHNACE^  (p.  448). 

Family  1.  ECTOCARPACEL/E  (Agardh)  Hauck. 

Frond  consisting  of  a  creeping  filament,  usually  with  more  or  less  conspicuous 
upright  filaments  arising  from  this,  or  of  a  one  or  two  layered  disk;  usually  monosiphon- 
ous,  occasionally  divided  once  or  twice  here  and  there  in  a  longitudinal  direction;  more 
or  less  branched  or  subsimple ;  growth  in  length  by  intercalary  division ;  sporangia  and 
gametangia  occupying  the  place  of  branches  of  the  frond,  or  formed  by  the  transfor- 
mation of  articulations  or  segments  of  these  articulations;  organs  of  fructification 
consisting  of  "unilocular  sporangia,"  formed  by  the  growth  of  a  cell  without  formation 
of  cross  walls,  or  of  "plurilocular  sporangia,"  formed  by  the  growth  and  repeated  divi- 
sion of  one  or  more  cells;  these  usually  occurring  on  different  individuals,  sometimes 
apparently  on  the  same  individual;  male  and  female  gametes  produced  on  the  same  or 
different  individuals. 

About  130  species  described,  many  of  them  doubtful,  in  all  seas,  but  most  abundant 
in  the  North  Atlantic,  mostly  epiphytic. 

The  method  of  reproduction  is  exceedingly  various,  even  within  a  single  genus. 
The  family  seems  to  show  the  beginning  of  differentiation  into  asexual  and  sexual  cells. 
The  products  of  the  "unilocular  sporangia"  are  asexual,  either  motile  zoospores  or 
nonmotile  aplanospores.  The  products  of  the  "plurilocular  sporangia"  are  asexual  or 
sexual,  being  all  alike,  giving  either  zoospores  or  isogametes,  or  of  two  sizes,  giving  either 
zoospores  of  two  sizes  or  heterogametes,  or  of  three  sizes,  giving  zoospores  of  two  sizes 


MARINE   ALGJE  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  437 

and  possibly  small  gametes(P).  Occasionally  gametes,  either  male  or  female,  may 
germinate  without  fusion.  In  addition  to  these,  aplanospores  may  be  formed  in  the 
"plurilocular  sporangia."  Both  "unilocular"  and  " plurilocular "  sporangia  are  formed 
in  special  branches  or  in  portions  of  ordinary  branches. 

KEY  TO   GENERA. 

Basal  portion  of  the  frond  a  filament  expanded  on  the  surface  of  the  substratum ;  sporangia 
formed  from  special  branches i.  Ectocarpus  (p.  437). 

Basal  portion  of  the  frond  a  filament  penetrating  within  other  algae 2.  Streblonema  (p.  440). 

Frond  consisting  of  horizontal,  more  or  less  crowded,  filaments,  forming  irregular  or  some- 
what disklike  patches  on  the  surface  of  the  host 3.  Phaeostroma  (p.  442). 

Genus  i.  Ectocarpus  Lyngbye. 

Ectocarpus.  Lyngbye,  1819.  p.  130. 

Thallus  consisting  of  few  or  many  simple  or  branched  upright  filaments  arising  from 
a  horizontal  filament;  attached  to  substratum  by  the  horizontal  filament,  often  assisted 
by  rhizoidlike  processes  from  the  bases  of  the  upright  filaments;  longitudinal  growth  in 
the  upright  filaments  intercalary,  in  the  horizontal  filaments  apical;  filaments  usually 
monosiphonous,  very  rarely  polysiphonous  by  longitudinal  walls  here  and  there;  asexual 
propagation  by  laterally  biciliate  zoospores  and  nonmotile  aplanospores  produced  in 
"unilocular  sporangia;"  sexual  reproduction  by  laterally  biciliate  motile  gametes, 
similar  or  differing  in  size,  etc.,  produced  in  "plurilocular  sporangia;"  both  organs  of 
fructification  occurring  in  the  place  of  branches,  always  singly,  usually  on  different 
individuals,  sometimes  apparently  on  the  same  individual;  "unilocular  sporangia" 
usually  globose,  ellipsoid,  or  short  pyriform,  sessile  or  shortly  pedicillate,  opening  by  an 
apical  pore;  "plurilocular  sporangia"  various  in  form,  usually  ovoid  or  silique  form,  or 
narrowly  subuliform,  sessile,  or  pedicillate,  usually  opening  by  an  apical  pore,  sometimes 
tapering  at  the  apex  to  a  segmented  hair. 

Numerous  species  described,  but  many  on  insufficient  characters,  about  40  to  70 
recognized;  in  all  seas,  especially  the  North  Atlantic. 

An  extremely  difficult  genus  which  has  not  yet  received  sufficient  study  to  establish 
order  among  the  innumerable  forms  occurring  in  it.  One  not  familiar  with  the  genus  can 
scarcely  hope  to  determine  the  species.  Fruiting  specimens  are  always  necessary.  The 
fruits  are  microscopic. 

KEY  TO   SPECIES. 

a.   Frond  2  to  5  cm.  tall,  rarely  more;    "plurilocular  sporangia"  clavate,  broad,  obtuse  or 

truncated  at  the  apex,  sessile i.  E.  duchassaingianus,  (p.  437). 

aa.  Frond  usually  5  to  30  cm .  and  more  tall b. 

b.  "Plurilocular  sporangia"  conical -subulate,  rarely  short  ovate,  often  tapering  to  a  hair 

2 .  E.  siliculosus  (p.  438). 

bb.  "Plurilocular    sporangia"     short     subulate    or     fusoid,     not    tapering    to    a    hair 

3.  E.  confervoides  (p.  439). 

bbb.  "  Plurilocular  sporangia"  elliptical  oblong,  obtuse 4.  E.  mitchella  (p.  439). 

i.  Ectocarpus  duchassaingianus  Grunow.    Fig.  7. 

Ectocarftus  duchassaingianus,  Grunow,  1867,  p.  45,  pi.  4,  f.  I. 
Ectacarfnts  duchassaingianus,  De  Toni,  1895,  p.  545. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  985,  2077- 


BULLETIN  OF  THE  BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 


Frond  1.5  to  4  cm.  tall,  forming  muddy,  dirty-looking  tufts;  branches  spreading,  usually  short; 
diameter  of  filaments  15  to  34  mic.,  lower  cells  2  to  3  diameters  long,  median  ones  i  to  1.5  diameters, 
apical  ones  3  to  4  diameters;  sporangia  of  both  kinds  occurring  on  -^e  same  individual;  "unilocular 
sporangia"  ovate,  sessile;  " plurilocular  sporangia"  elavate,  broad,  ootuse  or  truncated  at  the  apex, 
sessile,  divided  into  numerous  cells  zonately  arranged. 

West  Indies;  Guadeloupe. 

Fairly  abundant, on  marine  grasses,  Newport  River,  near  Green  Rock,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1906. 


tchella;,    "plurilocular    sporangia," 
4,  "plurilocular 


Fig.    7. — Ectocarpus    duchassaingianus,    "plurilocular    spo-         Fig.    10. — Ectocarp, 

"SK-^Z,*,  sUiculosus.  "plurilocular  sporangium."     ^Eium^T  "'  '"**  ^  "* 
X279- 

Fig.  9.— Ectocarpus  confervoides,  "plurilocular  sporangia," 
X  279.    A,  Sessile;  B,  Shortly  pedicellate. 

This  species  can  be  distinguished  from  the  others  occurring  at  Beaufort  by  its  small  size,  muddy 
appearance,  tufted  branches,  and  the  shape  of  "plurilocular  sporangia." 
This  is  the  northern  limit  reported  for  the  species. 

3.  Ectocarpus  siliculosus  (Dillwyn)  Lyngbye.     Fig.  8. 

Conferva  siliculosa,  Dillwyn,  1809,  Supplement,  p.  69,  pi.  R. 

Ectocarpus  siliculosus,  Lyngbye,  1819,  p.  131,  pi.  43  C  (excluding  var.  0  and  synonyms). 

Ectocarpus  viridis,  Harvey,  1852,  p.  140,  pi.  12  B,  C. 

Ectocarpus  confervoides  var.  siliculosus,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  71. 

Ectocarpus  siliculosus,  De  Toni,  1895,  p.  549. 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  319,  1386,  2294. 

Fronds  3  to  30  cm.  long,  yellowish  or  from  brownish  to  olivaceous,  forming  flaccid  tufts,  attached 
or  floating  free;  branching  distinctly  lateral  or  pseudodichotomous  below;  branches  alternate  or  uni- 


MARINE   ALG^E   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  439 

lateral,  not  opposite,  often  arcuately  ascending;  filaments  40  to  60  mic.  in  diameter;  cells  about  i  diameter 
long  in  the  upper  portion  of  the  frond,  often  4  to  5  diameters  long  below,  somewhat  constricted  at  the 
septa;  sporangia  of  both  kinds  usually  on  the  same  individual;  "unilocular  sporangia"  30  to  65 
(usually  50)  mic.  by  20  to  27  mic.,  ovoid  or  ellipsoid,  sessile,  or  pedicillate;  " plurilocular  sporangia" 
50  to  600  (usually  200)  mic.  by  12  to  25  mic.,  conical-subulate,  rarely  short  ovate,  sometimes  slightly 
arcuate,  often  tapering  to  a  hair;  the  products  of  the  "plurilocular  sporangia"  are  morphologically 
similar  gametes;  according  to  present  views,  the  female  gamete  finally  ceases  its  locomotion  and 
usually  fuses  with  an  actively  motile  male  gamete;  the  gametes  of  either  sex  may  germinate  without 
copulation. 

Cold  and  temperate  North  Atlantic;  Alaska;  Mediterranean. 

Beaufort,  N.  C. — Abundant  throughout  harbor,  5  to  15  cm.  below  low  water,  and  on  Bogue  Beach, 
April,  1908;  very  abundant  throughout  harbor  and  on  Fort  Macon  jetties,  May,  1907. 

This  species  is  distinguished  with  difficulty  from  E.  confervoides,  with  T"hich  it  is  often  confused. 
It  differs  from  the  latter  in  the  greater  diameter  of  its  branches  and  its  usually  more  tapering  "pluri- 
locular sporangia. "  The  sporangia  of  these  two  species  seem,  however,  to  intergrade.  The  illustration 
(fig.  8)  shows  about  the  average  shape  of  the  sporangia  observed  in  E.  siliculosus  by  the  author.  Some 
of  these  are  very  long  and  extended  into  a  long,  slender,  pointed  hair,  while  some  are  shorter,  approaching 
closely  to  the  more  slender  sporangia  of  E.  confervoides. 

3.  Ectocarpus  confervoides  (Roth)  Le  Jolis.     Fig.  9. 

Ceramium  confervoides.  Roth,  1797,  p.  151. 
Ectocarpus  confervoides,  Le  Jolis,  1863,  p.  75. 
Ectocarpus  confervoides,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  71. 
Ectocarpus  confervoides,  De  Toni,  1895,  p.  551. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  871. 

Fronds  2  to  50  cm.  long,  attached,  deep  brown;  branches  scattered,  secund  or  alternate,  not  opposite; 
lower  cells  of  the  branches  18  to  40  mic.  in  diameter;  "  unilocular  sporangia"  oval  or  ellipsoidal,  23  to  30 
mic.  broad,  35  to  50  mic.  long,  sessile;  "plurilocular  sporangia"  short  subulate  or  fusoid,  sessile  or 
shortly  pedicellate,  20  to  40  mic.  broad,  60  to  400  mic.  long,  not  tapering  to  a  hair. 

Cold  and  temperate  North  Atlantic  and  Pacific;  Mediterranean. 

Common  in  harbor  and  on  rocks  of  Fort  Macon  jetties,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  January  to  April,  1909. 

This  species  is  distinguished  with  difficulty  from  E.  siliclulosus ,  with  which  it  is  often  confused. 
From  this  it  differs  in  the  smaller  diameter  of  its  branches  and  its  less  tapering  "plurilocular  sporangia. " 
Authors  have  distinguished  several  varieties  or  forms,  some  perhaps  agreeing  in  all  respects  with  forms 
of  E.  siliculosus. 

4.  Ectocarpus  mitchellas  Harvey.     Fig.  10. 

Ectocarpus  mitchettce,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  143,  pi.  la  G. 
Ectocarpus  mitckeUce,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  72. 
Ectocarpus  mitchelUe,  De  Toni,  1895,  P-  SS&- 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  331,  671,  1921. 

Fronds  1.5  to  17  cm.  long,  yellow-greenish  to  dark  brown,  forming  lax,  feathery  tufts;  filaments 
slender,  profusely  branched;  branches  and  branchlets  alternate,  ultimate  ones  approximate,  all  patent; 
cells  of  the  branches  2  to  3  diameters  long ,  those  of  the  branchlets  i .  5  diameters ; ' '  plurilocular  sporangia ' ' 
elliptical  oblong  or  linear,  very  obtuse,  sessile,  divided  into  numerous  cells,  several  together. 

Warm  and  temperate  North  Atlantic  and  Pacific. 

Abundant  on  other  algae,  marine  grasses,  shells,  etc.,  on  shoals  throughout  harbor,  on  buoys,  and 
on  rocks  of  Fort  Macon  jetties,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  summer  and  autumn;  Bogue  Beach,  March,  1909. 
Very  abundant  on  marine  grasses  and  rocks  on  shoals  and  jetties,  Pamlico  Sound,  Ocracoke,  N.  C., 
August,  1907.  Fruits  throughout  summer  and  autumn. 

With  the  exception  of  E.  duchassaingianus ,  collected  in  a  single  locality,  this  is  the  only  deter- 
minable  species  of  Ectocarpus  that  has  been  found  at  Beaufort  in  the  summer  and  autumn. 

A  small  amount  of  Ectocarpus  evidently  belonging  to  another  species  than  those 
described  here  (fig.  n),but  insufficient  for  specific  determination,  was  dredged  from  the 
coral  reef  offshore  from  Beaufort  in  August,  1914. 


440 


BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 


Genus  2.  Streblonema  Derbes  and  Solier. 
Streblonema.  Derbes  and  Solier,  in  Castagne,  1851,  P-  100. 

Frond  filamentous,  monosiphonous,  composed  of  decumbent  primary  filaments 
living  within  the  tissue  of  other  algae,  and  erect  secondary  filaments  arising  from  these; 
secondary  filaments  sometimes  lacking,  the  upright  portion  consisting  of  only  sporangia 


Fig.  17. — Streblonema  im-isibile  in  Meristotheca  duchassainyii, 
internal  filament  bearing  " plurilocular  sporangia"  of  various 
ages,  X  206. 

Fig.  18. — Streblonema  im-isibile  in  Meristotheca  duchassaingii, 
internal  filament  bearing  "plurilocular  sporangium"  and  hair. 
X  206. 

Fig.  19. — Streblonema  invisibile,  "plurilocular  sporangia," 
X2o6. 


Fig.  12. — Streblonema  solitarium,  internal  filaments  branched 
and  anastomosed,  X  277. 

Fig.  13. — Streblonema  solitarium,  internal  filament  bearing 
hair  and  "plurilocular  sporangium,"  X  277. 

Fig.  14. — Streblonema  solitarium,  terminal  "plurilocular 
sporangium,"  X  277. 

Fig.  15. — Streblonema  solitarium,  long  external  filaments  and 
lateral  "  plurilocular  sporangium, "  X  277. 

Fig.  16.— Streblonema  mwfibile  in  Meristotheca  duchassainffir , 
internal  filaments  bearing  "plurilocular  sporangia"  of  various 
ages  and  one  hair,  X  ao6. 

and  hairs;  branches  of  the  decumbent  filaments  usually  free,  not  anastomosing;  sporangia 
usually  occurring  singly,  subsessile  on  the  decumbent  filaments  or  terminal  or  lateral  on 
short  or  long  upright  filaments;  "unilocular  sporangia"  subglobose,  rather  large; 
"plurilocular  sporangia^'  various  in  form,  sometimes  conspicuously  branched,  consisting 
of  one  or,  for  the  greater  part,  many  rows  of  cells  in  the  longitudinal  direction;  products 
of  "plurilocular  sporangia"  not  known. 

About  20  species,  in  other  algae,  North  Atlantic  and  Mediterranean. 


MARINE   ALG^B   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  441 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

Internal  filaments  10  to  15  mic.  wide,  external  filaments  often  long,  plurilocular  sporangia 

ovoid  or  ovoid-globose,  18  to  35  mic.  wide i.    S.  solitarium  (p.  441). 

Internal  filaments  5  to  8  mic.  wide,  external  filaments  short,  plurilocular  sporangia  lanceolate , 

obtuse,  ii  to  17  mic.  wide 2.    5.  invisibile  (p.  441). 

i.  Streblonema  solitarium  (Sauvageau)  De  Toni.     Figs.  12-15. 

Ectocarpus  solitarius,  Sauvageau,  1893,  p.  97,  pi.  3,  f .  14-27. 
Streblonema  solitarium,  De  Toni,  1895,  P-  S76. 

Thallus  mainly  endophytic,  filaments  intercellular,  10  to  15  mic.  wide,  laterally  and  fairly  pro- 
fusely branched,  occasionally  anastomosing,  giving  off  upright  branches  forming  usually  simple  solitary 
hairs  projecting  about  o.i  to  i  mm.  above  the  surface,  cells  9  to  15  mic.  wide,  ?  'o  4  diameters  long; 
"plurilocular  sporangia"  terminal  on  short,  upright  filaments  or  lateral  on  the  longer  ones,  ovoid  or 
ovoid-globose,  25  to  105  by  14  to  45  mic.;  "unilocular  sporangia"  unknown. 

On  Dictyota  dichotoma  on  the  Atlantic  coast  of  France. 

Fairly  abundant  on  Dictyota  dichotoma  from  the  coral  reef  offshore  from  Beaufort,  N.  C. ,  August,  1914. 

The  external  filaments  of  this  species  are  plainly  evident  under  the  microscope,  and  the  internal 
filaments  can  be  traced  for  long  distances  in  the  host.  The  upright  branches  reach  the  exterior  through 
evident  pores  formed  in  the  cell  walls  of  the  host.  These  pores  are  conspicuous  on  the  surface  of  the 
Dictyota  after  the  decay  of  the  Streblonema  filaments.  At  Beaufort  the  sporangia  are  usually  borne  on 
the  ends  of  short  filaments  (fig.  14),  but  are  sometimes  lateral  on  long  filaments  (fig.  15),  or  borne  on  short 
stalks  on  the  internal  filaments  (fig.  13);  the  internal  filaments  are  branched  fairly  abundantly  and 
seem  to  anastomose  occasionally  (figs.  12  and  13);  the  external  filaments  are  usually  simple,  but 
sometimes  branch.  Although  differing  slightly  from  the  published  descriptions,  there  seems  no  doubt 
of  the  identity  of  this  species. 

This  species  is  easily  distinguished  from  the  following  by  its  larger  size,  its  more  luxuriant  growth, 
the  usually  solitary  paraphyses  and  sporangia,  and  the  shape  of  the  sporangia.  It  has  not  previously 
been  recorded  for  North  America. 

a.  Streblonema  invisibile  sp.  nov.    Figs.  16-19. 

Thallus  endophytic,  filaments  intercellular,  usually  5  to  8  mic.  wide,  irregularly  swollen  here  and 
there  (in  intercellular  spaces?),  variously  and  sparsely  branched,  traversing  the  host  in  all  directions, 
giving  off  upright  branches  forming  sporangia  and  short,  simple  hairs  above  the  surface;  "plurilocular 
sporangia"  numerous,  occurring  in  irregular  patches,  accompanied  by  a  few  hairs,  lanceolate,  obtuse, 
25  to  55  by  ii  to  17  mic.,  usually  40  to  45  by  14  to  17  mic. ;  "unilocular  sporangia"  unknown. 

Thallo  endophytico,  filis  intercellularibus,  plerumque  5-8  mic.  latis,  hie  illic  inaequaliter  tumidis  (in 
spatiis  intercellularibus  ?)  varie  et  rare  ramosis,  passim  hostem  percurrentibus,  ramos  erectos  sporangia 
et  pilos  breves  et  simplices  externe  formantes  emittentibus;  sporangiis  plurilocularibus  numerosis  cum 
pilis  paucis  in  locis  inaequalibus,  lanceolatis,  obtusis,  25-55  x  "-17  mic.,  plerumque  40-45  x  14-17 
mic.;  sporangiis  unilocularibus  ignotis. 

Abundant  throughout  the  greater  part  of  one  tetrosporic  specimen  of  Meristotheca  duchassaingii  J.  Ag. 
collected  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August  2,  1906. 

A  minute  species,  invisible  to  the  naked  eye,  and  even  with  the  microscope  scarcely  visible  except 
in  section.  Of  the  described  species  it  seems  to  resemble  most  closely  Streblonema  investiens  Thuret. 
From  this  it  differs  In  having  coarser,  more  irregular  filaments  with  large,  irregular  swellings,  confined 
below  the  surface  of  the  host,  the  hairs  projecting  beyond  the  surface  being  very  different  from  the 
projecting  filaments  of  that  species.  Frequently  a  sporangium  and  a  hair  occur  together  as  branches 
from  a  common  filament. 

This  species  is  easily  distinguished  from  the  preceding  by  its  smaller  size,  its  less  luxuriant  growth, 
the  occurrence  of  paraphyses  and  sporangia  in  clusters,  and  the  shape  of  the  sporangia. 

The  type  and  the  slides  from  which  the  drawings  were  made  have  been  deposited  in  the  U.  S. 
National  Herbarium. 

An  undetermined  species,  apparently  belonging  to  this  genus,  was  abundant  on  several  pieces  of 
Nitophyllum  medium  collected  on  Bogue  Beach  in  July  and  August,  1907,  giving  a  brownish  color  to  the 
host.  The  horizontal  filaments  branched  irregularly,  pursuing  an  irregular  course  among  the  cells  of 
the  Nitophyllum,  from  these  short,  vertical  filaments,  one  to  few  celled,  not  visible  to  the  naked  eye, 
emerged  to  the  surface.  No  fruit  was  observed,  the  specimens  apparently  being  immature. 


442  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 

Genus  3.  Phaeostroma  Kuckuck. 
Phaeostroma.  Kuckuck,  in  Reinbold.  1893.  P-  43- 

Thallus  composed  of  a  small  disk,  usually  monostromatic,  consisting  of  radiating, 
branched,  coalescent  filaments,  furnished  with  hairs  arising  by  basal  growth;  both 
"unilocular"  and  "  plurilocular "  sporangia  arising  from  the  transformation  of  vege- 
tative cells,  rather  prominent;  "unilocular  sporangia"  globose  or  pear-shaped,  opening 
by  an  apical  cleft,  "plurilocular  sporangia"  irregularly  rounded  or  nodule-shaped. 

Five  species  described,  four  of  these  from  the  northern  shores  of  Europe.  The 
genus  has  not  previously  been  recorded  from  North  America,  except  Greenland. 

This  genus,  usually  placed  among  the  Encoeliaceae,  has  seemed  to  the  author,  from 
the  vegetative  structure  and  from  the  mode  of  formation  of  the  reproductive  organs, 
more  nearly  related  to  the  Ectocarpaceae,  and  has  accordingly  been  placed  there. 
Phseostroma  pusillum  Howe  and  Hoyt.     PI.  CXV,  figs.  1-9. 

Phteostroma  pusittum,  Howe  and  Hoyt,  1916,  p.  109,  pi.  n,  figs.  1-9. 

Thallus  composed  of  horizontal  branching  filaments,  forming  irregular  or  somewhat  disk-shaped 
patches,  0.3  to  0.8  mm.  in  diameter,  closely  attached  to  the  surface  of  the  host,  usually  consisting  of  a 
single,  moderately  compact  layer  with  irregular  margins;  vegetative  cells  somewhat  cylindrical  or  more 
often  curved  or  of  irregular  diameter,  mostly  10  to  16  mic.  by  5  to  10  mic.,  usually  1.5  to  2  times  as  long 
as  broad;  hairs  occasional,  8  to  10  mic.  in  diameter,  showing  at  the  base  4  to  6  short  cells  (5  to  10  mic. 
long);  "unilocular"  and  "plurilocular  sporangia"  borne  on  separate  individuals;  "unilocular  spo- 
rangia" either  (i)  scattered  or  aggregated,  obovoid  or  somewhat  globose,  8  to  16  mic.  in  diameter,  sessile, 
or,  (2)  by  subdivision  and  branching  of  the  fundamental  cell  and  by  coalescence,  forming  elevated, 
submoriform  sori  16  to  48  mic.  in  diameter,  the  ultimate  sporangia  then  smaller,  mostly  5  to  8  mic.  in 
diameter,  and  often  more  angular;  "plurilocular  sporangia"  scattered  and  solitary  or  forming  loose 
clusters,  ovoid,  ellipsoid,  or  subconic,  sessile,  rather  erect,  22  to  27  mic.  by  15  to  18  mic. 

Endemic. 

Fairly  abundant  on  Dictyota  dichotoma  and  the  creeping  stolons  of  Campanularian  hydroids  on 
this,  and  occasionally  on  Spyridia  sp.,  from  the  coral  reef  offshore,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1914. 

This  species  occurs  on  the  Dictyota  mixed  with  other  filamentous  species,  but  is  easily  distinguished 
from  them  by  the  descriptions  and  figures.  It  is  not  likely  to  be  mistaken  for  any  other  species  occurring 
in  this  region.  It  is  not  known  elsewhere. 

Family  2.  ENCCELIACE^E  (Kuetzing)  Kjellman. 

Frond  extremely  various  in  size  and  form,  usually  narrowed  to  a  stipe  below, 
attached  by  a  rootlike  disk  or  by  rhizoids,  usually  simple,  occasionally  sparsely  branched; 
structure  parenchymatous;  longitudinal  growth  intercalary,  usually  continuing  longest 
in  the  lower  part;  both  "unilocular"  and  "plurilocular"  sporangia  formed  by  the 
transformation  of  superficial  cells  or  segments  of  these  cells,  external  or  immersed, 
occurring  singly  or  grouped  in  sori,  often  accompanied  by  paraphyses;  products  of 
sporangia  imperfectly  known;  in  some  cases  isogametes,  formed  in  "plurilocular  spo- 
rangia," fuse  to  form  a  zygote ;  in  other  cases  fusion  of  gametes  apparently  is  not  necessary 
for  their  development. 

About  35  species,  in  all  seas. 

KEY  TO   GENERA. 

Paraphyses  lacking ;  sporangia,  at  least  in  the  beginning,  bound  together  into  a  tissuelike  mass; 

frond  band  or  leaf  shaped i.   Petalonia  (p.  443). 

Paraphyses  present  or  lacking ;  frond  filiform,  band  shaped  or  intestine  shaped .  2 .  Rosenvingea  (p.  443). 


MARINE   ALGJB   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  443 

Genus  i .  Petalonia  Derbes  and  Solier. 

Petalonia,  Derbes  and  Solier,  1850,  p.  265. 
Phyllitis,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  62. 
Phyllitis,  De  Toni,  1895,  P-  487. 

Frond  leaflike,  without  veins,  usually  band  shaped,  less  often  linear  or  filiform, 
tapering  toward  the  base  to  a  short,  filiform  stipe,  occasionally  fistulose;  interior 
structure  composed  of  larger  cells  intermixed  with  slender,  segmented  filaments,  outer 
layer  composed  of  smaller  cells;  sometimes  hollow;  paraph yses  lacking;  fertile  regions 
at  first  as  sori,  then  occupying  nearly  the  entire  surface  of  the  frond ;  sporangia  external, 
bound  together,  at  least  at  first,  into  a  tissuelike  mass;  " plurilocular  sporangia"  subcy- 
lindrical;  "unilocular  sporangia"  insufficiently  known. 

Three  species,  in  cold  and  temperate  seas. 

Petalonia  fascia  (Mueller)  Kuntze.     PI.  LXXXVI,  fig.  i. 

Fucus  fascia,  Mueller,  in  Flora  Danica,  pi.  768. 

Laminaria  fascia,  Harvey,  1852,  p.  91. 

PhyUitis fascia,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  62. 

Phyllitis  fascia,  De  Toni,  1895,  p.  487. 

Petalonia  fascia,  Kuntze,  1898,  p.  419. 

A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  199  (PhyUitis  fascia). 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  276.  736,  1131  (PhyUitis  fascia).  No.  1082  (Petalonia  zosttri folia). 

Frond  extremely  various  in  size  and  form,  up  to  30  cm.  tall,  i  to  55  mm.  broad,  tapering  cuneately 
below  into  a  stipe  springing  from  a  shieldlike  attachment,  simple  or  branched. 

Cold  and  temperate  seas  generally. 

Abundant  on  rocks  of  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford  jetties,  less  abundant  in  harbor,  Beaufort,  N.  C.f 
December  to  April,  1908  and  1909. 

This  species  was  not  collected  in  November  and  seems  to  disappear  entirely  by  May. 

Genus  2.  Rosen vingea  Borgesen. 

Rosenvingea,  Borgesen,  1914,  p.  178  (22). 

Frond  tubular,  cylindrical,  or  slightly  compressed,  attached  by  a  rootlike  disk, 
branched,  branches  scattered  or  pseudodichotomous;  growth  intercalary  by  division  of 
the  cells  of  the  entire  frond ;  wall  composed  of  3  to  4  layers  of  cells,  external  ones  small, 
becoming  larger  toward  the  cavity,  peripheral  cells  containing  single,  disk -shaped 
chromatophores ;  hairs  single  or  many  aggregated,  scattered  over  the  entire  frond, 
occurring  either  in  the  sori  or  on  sterile  portions  of  the  frond;  "plurilocular  sporangia" 
subcylindrical  or  club-shaped,  arising  from  the  division  of  the  cortical  cells,  occurring 
in  sori  forming  very  irregular  spots  scattered  over  the  entire  surface  of  the  frond. 

Four  species  in  warm  and  temperate  seas. 

Rosenvingea  orientalis  (J.  Agardh)  Borgesen.     PI.  LXXXVI,  fig.  2. 

Asperococcus  orientalis,  J.  Agardh,  1848,  p.  78. 
Asperococcus  orientalis,  De  Toni,  1895,  p.  495. 
Rosemiingea  orientalis,  Borgesen,  1914,  p.  182  (26). 
P.  B.-A.  No.  1640  (Asperococcus  orientalis). 

Frond  tubular,  light  yellow-brown;  10  to  40  cm.  long,  i  to  2  mm.  diameter,  dichotomous or  vaguely 
branched,  here  and  there  constricted  and  twisted;  branches  usually  tapering  at  base  and  apex, 
repeatedly  dichotomous. 

Warm  waters  of  Atlantic,  Pacific,  and  Indian  Oceans. 


444  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

Beaufort,  N.  C.:  Abundant  September  and  October,  1905,  Bogue  Beach;  occasional  in  later  years; 
fairly  abundant  attached  to  shells  and  marine  grasses  between  jetties  at  Fort  Macon,  occasional  on 
jetties,  August  and  September,  1906  and  1907;  occasional  on  sea  buoy  and  Shackleford  jetty,  1906  and 
1907.  Wrightsville  Beach,  N.  C.;  Fairly  abundant  in  sound  near  inlet,  August  arid  September,  1909; 
abundant  in  almost  pure  masses  on  beach,  August,  1909. 

This  species  was  first  observed  at  Beaufort  on  the  beach  in  1905,  it  appeared  in  the  harbor  in  1906, 
was  fairly  abundant  there  for  two  summers,  and  then  seemed  to  disappear,  not  being  recorded  for  the 
region  in  1908  or  1909. 

It  reaches  its  northern  known  limit  at  Beaufort. 

Family  3.  ELACHISTEACEjC  Kjellman. 
Elachistaceae.  De  Toni,  1895,  P-  436. 

Frond  minute,  sometimes  almost  microscopic,  epiphytic,  forming  a  pad  or  tuft 
consisting  of  a  horizontal  and  an  erect  portion;  horizontal  portion  consisting  of  loose  or 
more  or  less  closely  adherent,  branched  filaments,  upright  portion  consisting  of  filaments, 
usually  branched  below,  simple  above,  loosely  grouped,  or  more  or  less  densely  com- 
pacted, sometimes  forming  an  almost  parenchymatous  structure  below ;  filaments  mono- 
siphonous  or  polysiphonous,  with  longitudinal  growth  basal  or  lasting  longest  at  the 
base;  "unilocular"  and  "plurilocular"  sporangia  formed  in  the  place  of  assimilating 
filaments,  or  by  the  transformation  of  single  assimilating  cells,  or  of  offshoots  from 
these  cells. 

About  20  species,  in  all  seas,  especially  in  the  North  Atlantic  Ocean. 

Genus  Elachistea  Duby. 

Elachistea,  Duby,  1832,  p.  339  (19). 
Elachista,  De  Toni,  1895,  p.  439. 

Frond  forming  small  pads  or  tufts  showing  horizontal  and  erect  portions;  horizontal 
portion  composed  of  monosiphonous  branched  filaments  loosely  or  closely  aggregated; 
from  this  arises  the  erect  portion,  usually  consisting  of  a  basal  layer  and  erect  filaments, 
the  basal  layer  composed  of  branched,  mostly  colorless,  monosiphonous  filaments  more 
or  less  densely  compacted,  sometimes  forming  an  almost  parenchymatous  structure, 
erect  filaments  monosiphonous,  simple  or  sparingly  branched  below,  moderately  or 
greatly  elongated,  richly  colored;  "unilocular  sporangia"  pear  shaped,  "plurilocular 
sporangia"  filiform,  usually  consisting  of  a  single  row  of  cells,  occasionally  divided  to 
form  two  rows  of  cells,  both  kinds  of  sporangia  arising  from  the  basal  layer. 

About  15  species,  widely  distributed,  but  most  abundant  in  the  North  Atlantic 
Ocean. 
Elachistea  stellulata  (Harvey)  Griffiths.     Figs.  20  and  21. 

Conferva  stettvlata,  Harvey.  1841,  p.  132. 

Elachista  stellulaia,  Griffiths,  in  Areschoug,  1843,  p.  261. 

Elachista  sieUrdata,  De  Toni,  1895,  P-  439- 

Thallus  consisting  of  extensive  endophytic  filaments  from  which  arise,  here  and  there,  external, 
hemispherical  tufts  of  erect  filaments  and  sporangia;  internal  filaments  irregularly  and  profusely 
branched,  frequently  anastomosing,  segmented,  irregular  in  form  and  size,  erect  filaments  and  sporangia 
arising  from  a  poorly  developed  basal  layer,  erect  filaments  0.3  to  0.8  mm.  long,  5  to  10  mic.  wide, 
"unilocular  sporangia"  obovate  or  pear  shaped,  about  25  by  10  mic.,  "plurilocular  sporangia"  usually 
long,  cylindrical,  sometimes  club  shaped,  obtuse,  30  to  50  by  5  to  10  mic. 

On  Dictyota  dichotoma,  England. 

Fairly  abundanton  Dictyota  dichotoma  dredged  from  the  coral  reef  offshore,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August, 
1914. 


MARINE   ALGM  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  445 

This  species  is  visible  as  minute  dots  under  a  strong  lens  and  is  easily  recognized  under  the  micro- 
scope by  the  external  hemispherical  tufts  of  paraphyses  and  sporangia  arising  from  widely  scattered 
internal  filaments.  The  internal  filaments  may  be  traced  for  long  distances  through  the  host.  In 
European  specimens  the  "unilocular  sporangia"  are  the  more  abundant,  but  in  the  Beaufort  plants 
these  are  very  rare,  and  the  " plurilocular  sporangia"  are  abundant. 

This  species  has  not  previously  been  recorded  for  North  America. 

Family  4.  CHORDARIACE^  (Agardh)  Zanardini. 

Frond  convex-discoid  or  pulvinate,  hemispherical  or  globose  and  finally  hollow,  or 
filiform  and  regularly  branched,  more  or  less  slippery,  sometimes  almost  gelatinous; 
segmented  hairs  always  present;  longitudinal  growth  terminal  or  subterminal;  surface 
covered  by  short  assimilating  filaments;  "plurilocular  sporangia"  formed  either  by  the 
transformation  of  some  segments  of  these  filaments,  or  (like  the  "unilocular  sporangia") 
in  the  place  of  filaments,  or  arising  laterally  on  the  filaments. 

About  65  species,  in  all  seas,  especially  in  North  Atlantic. 

KEY  TO   GENERA. 

a.  Frond  forming  a  horizontally  expanded,  parenchymatous,  monostromatic  disk  with  upright 

assimilating  filaments i.  Myrionema  (p.  445). 

a'a.  Frond  forming  a  more  or  less  large,  upright  body b. 

b.  Longitudinal  growth  by  transverse  division  of  subterminal  cells  of  the  axial  fila- 
ment, assimilating  filaments  secondary;  axial  body  of  the  frond  composed  of  series 

of  cells  solidly  joined  together;  filiform,  branched 2.  Castagnea  (p.  446). 

bb.  Longitudinal  growth  by  transverse  division  of  the  upper  segments  of  free  apical 
filaments,  the  upper  divisions  finally  changed  into  assimilating  filaments;  axial 
body  of  the  fertile  frond  composed  of  rows  of  cellular  filaments  many  times 
furcate,  more  or  less  loosely  connected,  anastomosing;  hemispherical  to  sub- 
globose  3.  Leathesia  (p.  447). 

Genus  i.  Myrionema  Greville. 

Myrionema,  Greville,  1827,  vol.  5,  pi.  300. 

Thallus  consisting  of  a  very  minute,  horizontally  expanded,  round,  or  oblong  disk 
composed  of  a  single  layer  of  rather  closely  packed  cells,  from  which  arise  numerous 
erect,  monosiphonous,  assimilating  filaments;  sporangia  arising  from  the  basal  disk  on 
more  or  less  elongated  stalks;  "unilocular  sporangia"  ellipsoidal  or  pear  shaped,  "pluri- 
locular sporangia"  silique  shaped,  at  least  in  the  lower  part,  consisting  of  several  series 
of  cells,  usually  borne  on  different  plants,  sometimes  on  the  same  plant. 

Two  to  four  species,  on  other  plants,  mostly  in  the  North  Atlantic  Ocean  and  the 
Mediterranean  Sea. 
Myrionema  strangulans  Greville. 

Myrionema  strangulans,  Greville,  1827,  vol.  5,  pL  300. 

Myrionema  stranyulans,  Harvey,  1852,  p.  133. 

Myrionema  vulgare,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  79. 

Myrionema  stranyulans,  De  Toni,  1895,  p.  399. 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  i79s,  280  (M .  Leclanckerii),  32.  924.  1689  (M.  vulgare). 

Thallus  forming  minute  spots  more  or  less  expanded  over  other  plants,  basal  layer  composed  of 
elongated,  segmented  filaments  almost  joined  into  a  membrane,  with  cells  about  1.5  diameters  long, 
vertical  filaments  numerous,  densely  crowded,  club  shaped,  with  short  cells,  intermixed  with  hyaline, 
confervoid  filaments  with  elongated  cells;  "unilocular  sporangia"  obovoid,  about  30  to  40  mic.  long, 
19  to  27  mic.  wide,  arising  from  the  basal  layer,  borne  on  short  stalks  or  almost  sessile;  "plurilocular 
sporangia' '  unknown. 

North  Atlantic  and  Mediterranean. 


446  BULLETIN  OF  THE  BUREAU  OF   FISHERIES. 

Fairly  abundant  on  Petalonia  fascia,  from  Fort  Macon  jetty,  April,  1908  and  1909,  and  fairly 
abundant  on  Nitophyllum  medium,  Bogue  Beach,  summer  and  autumn,  Beaufort,  N.  C. 

This  species  was  not  found  on  Petalonia  in  December,  1908,  nor  January,  1909,  was  barely  evident 
in  February  and  March,  and  reached  full  development  in  April. 

The  specimens  on  Nitophyllum  have  not  been  observed  in  a  mature  condition,  but  seem  to  agree 
closely  with  this  species. 

This  is  the  only  species  forming  a  disk  on  the  surface  of  other  plants  which  has  been  observed  here. 
As,  however,  several  members  of  the  Ectocarpaceae  have  this  form  and  may  be  found  in  this  region, 
determinations  should  not  be  based  on  this  character  alone . 

Genus  2.  Castagnea  Derbes  and  Solier. 
Castagnea,  Derbes  and  Solier,  1856,  p.  56. 

Frond  cylindrical,  composed  of  an  axis  and  peripheral  radiating  filaments  with  a 
stiffening,  inconspicuous  jelly;  axis  solid  or  tubular,  composed  of  cylindrical,  oblong 
cells  joined  into  filaments  tightly  bound  together  by  mucilage,  forming  almost  a  paren- 
chymatous  structure;  the  peripheral  filaments  of  rotund  cells,  going  out  from  the  axis, 
approximate  and  fasciculate,  the  sterile  branches  rather  simple,  enfolding  the  sporangia, 
the  fertile  branches  thrusting  out  externally  shorter  subsecund  branches  below  their 
apices;  " plurilocular  sporangia"  formed  from  the  transformation  of  the  upper  (outer) 
segments  of  the  assimilating  filaments;  "unilocular  sporangia"  produced  as  lateral 
offshoots  from  the  base  of  assimilating  filaments. 

About  six  species,  North  Atlantic  Ocean,  Mediterranean. 

The  proper  name  for  this  genus  is  a  matter  of  considerable  doubt.     But,  as  the 
author  has  had  no  opportunity  for  obtaining  facts  bearing  on  the  question,  it  has  seemed 
proper  to  follow  the  usage  that  is  most  current,  even  though  further  study  should  show 
that  this  name  must  be  replaced  by  an  earlier  one. 
Castagnea  zosterae  (Mohr)  Thuret.     PI.  LXXXVII,  fig.  i. 

Rnularia  zosterce,  Mohr,  1810,  p.  367. 

Ctstoonea  zosterae,  Thuret,  in  Le  Job's,  1863,  p.  85. 

Castagnea  zosterae,  Borgesen,  1914,  p.  184  (28),  f.  144-145. 

(Not  Castagnea  zosterce.  Farlow,  1882,  p.  86,  pi.  7,  f .  a.) 

(Not  A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  i6a.) 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  481,  1879  (Castagnea  mediterranea). 

Frond  filiform,  cylindrical,  somewhat  inflated,  attached  by  a  small  basal  disk,  7  to  20  cm.  tall; 
branching  sparse  or  fairly  abundant,  alternate  and  irregular,  branches  arising  almost  horizontally,  short 
or  elongated  and  ascending,  sometimes  irregularly  divided  at  apices,  tapering  toward  the  base  and  apex; 
structure  tubular,  the  central  cavity  being  bordered  by  longitudinal  filaments  tightly  bound  together 
with  mucilage,  nearly  all  the  cells  of  the  outer  filaments  of  this  central  tube  giving  off  several  short, 
lateral,  assimilating  filaments  and  an  occasional  hair,  growth  of  the  longitudinal  filaments  intercalary; 
"unilocular  sporangia"  oblong-ovate,  arising  from  near  the  base  of  the  assimilating  filaments,  "pluri- 
locular sporangia"  conical  or  irregular  in  shape,  sometimes  branched,  arising  from  the  apices  of  the 
assimilating  filaments,  "unilocular  "and  "  plurilocular  "  sporangia  occurring  on  the  same  plants;  texture 
soft  and  rather  gelatinous,  the  surface  rough  like  the  pile  of  velvet;  color  dark  brown. 

Atlantic  coast  of  North"  America  and  Europe. 

Fairly  abundant  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  April  20,  1908;  not  found  any  other  day. 

The  identity  of  this  species  has  been,  and  still  is,  the  source  of  much  confusion.  Harvey  (1852)  gives 
a  species  under  the  name  Mesogloia  zosterae  ArescJi;  Farlow  (1882)  uses  the  name  Castagnea  zosterce 
(Mohr)  Thur.,  giving  as  synonyms,  among  others,  Myriocladia  zosterae  Ag.  and  Mesogloia  zosterce  Aresch.; 
De  Toni  (1895)  does  not  give  Castagnea  zosterce,  but  recognizes  two  species  (i)  Myriocladia  zosterce  J.  Ag., 
giving  as  a  synonym,  among  others,  Mesogloia  zosterce  Aresch.,  Exs.  No.  67,  Tab.  VIII,  f .  i,  a  and  b,  and 
(a)  Eudesme  virescens  (Carm.)  J.  Ag.,  giving  as  synonyms  Mesogloia  zosterae  Aresch.,  Alg.  Scand.  exs. 
No.  67,  Linckia  zosterae  Lyngb.  and  Aegira  zosterce  Fries.  Further  study  is  needed  to  determine  how 
many  species  are  included  here  and  to  what  genera  these  should  be  referred. 


MARINE   ALGJB   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  447 

The  species  considered  here  seems  to  be  the  same  as  that  discussed  by  B6rgesen  (1914),  but  it  may, 
perhaps,  be  questioned  whether  it  is  the  same  as  Ri-vularia  zostera  Mohr  or  Castagnea  zosterce  Thuret. 
Both  the  Beaufort  and  the  Bermuda  plants  are  more  branched  than  the  more  northern  ones  called  by  this 
name,  and  seem  to  belong  to  a  different  species. 

The  single  occurrence  of  this  species  on  the  beach  makes  it  probable  that  these  plants  did  not  grow 
in  this  locality,  but  were  brought  here  from  some  other  region.  Since,  however,  it  probably  occurs  both 
north  and  south  of  this  place,  it  may  be  expected  to  establish  itself  here  at  any  time. 

Genus  3.  Leathesia  Gray. 
Leathesia,  Gray,  1821,  p.  301. 

Frond  small,  at  first  globose  and  solid,  at  length  irregularly  lobate  and  hollow, 
gelatinous-fleshy;  axis  short,  composed  of  oblong  cells  joined  into  decompound-forked 
filaments  radiating  from  a  central  point;  peripheral  assimilating  filaments  short,  going 
out  from  the  outermost  smaller  cells,  enwrapped  in  mucous,  simple,  clavate,  short, 
moniliform-segmented;  longitudinal  growth  by  transverse  division  of  the  upper  segments 
of  free  apical  filaments,  the  upper  divisions  finally  changed  into  assimilating  filaments; 
"unilocular  sporangia"  ellipsoid  or  pear  shaped;  " plurilocular  sporangia"  linear, 
composed  of  a  single  longitudinal  series  of  cells;  both  kinds  occurring  at  the  base  of 
peripheral  filaments. 

Five  to  six  species,  in  cold  and  temperate  seas. 
Leathesia  difformis  (Linnaeus)  Areschoug.     PI.  LXXXVIII,  figs,  i  and  2. 

Tremella  difformis,  Lrinnaeus,  1755,  P-  429. 
Leathesia.  difformis,  Areschoug,  1847,  p.  376,  pi.  9  B. 
Leathesia  tuberiformis,  Harvey,  1852,  p.  129. 
Leathesia  difformis,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  82,  pi.  5,  f-  i. 
Leathesia  difformis,  De  Toni,  1893,  p.  422. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  130,  829. 

Frond  subglobose,  variously  lobate,  variable  in  size,  about  i  to  5  cm.  in  diameter,  olivaceous  brown; 
at  first  solid,  soon  becoming  hollow  by  the  disintegration  of  the  cells  of  the  central  axis;  peripheral 
filaments  clavate,  the  terminal  cell  enlarged;  sporangia  about  35  by  17  mic. 

Cold  and  temperate  North  Atlantic  and  Pacific. 

Abundant  on  other  algae  and  on  rocks  of  Fort  Macon  jetties,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  April,  1908,  March  and 
April,  1909. 

This  is  the  most  southern  station  reported  for  the  species,  although  it  may  be  found  slightly  farther 
south  in  the  winter  or  spring.  The  species  seems  to  make  a  short  stay  at  Beaufort,  not  being  found  there 
in  May,  1907,  and  being  collected  in  only  the  two  months  noted  during  the  winter  and  spring  of  1908-9. 
The  Beaufort  specimens  were  small,  having  a  diameter  of  i  to  2  cm. 

Family  5.  STILOPHORACE^E  (Nwgeli)  De  Toni  and  Levi. 

Frond  attached  by  a  rootlike  disk,  filiform,  more  or  less  branched,  composed  of  an 
axial  bundle  of  segmented  filaments  increasing  in  length  by  the  division  of  subterminal 
cells,  and  a  parenchymatous,  few-layered,  cortical  tissue  clothing  the  axis;  this  cortical 
tissue  arising  from  the  lower  cells  of  the  segmented,  subclaviform  filaments  springing 
from  the  axial  bundle  below  its  apex;  frond  solid  when  young,  often  becoming  hollow^ 
with  age,  and  traversed  by  branches  of  the  axial  filaments;  assimilating  filaments  present; 
sporangia  of  both  kinds  formed  as  lateral  branches  from  the  base  of  short,  simple,  or 
branched  filaments  arising  from  superficial  cells;  '"unilocular  sporangia"  obovate  or 
club  shaped;  "plurilocular  sporangia"  linear,  consisting  of  a  single  longitudinal  row 
of  cells. 

Five  to  six  species  in  North  Atlantic  and  Mediterranean. 
159321°— 20 6 


448  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

Genus  Stilophora  J.  Agardh. 
Stilophora,  J.  Agardh,  1836,  p.  16. 

Frond  filiform,  branched,  firm,  cartilaginous,  finally  hollow  in  the  lower  portions; 
growth  in  length  apical;  central  axis  composed  of  a  few  (usually  four  to  five)  series  of 
cells;  apex  surrounded  by  tufts  of  filaments,  arising  laterally;  peripheral  assimilating 
filaments  segmented,  differing  among  themselves  in  form,  either  covering  the  surface 
of  the  frond  or  occurring  in  groups  here  and  there;  "plurilocular  sporangia"  uniformly 
distributed  or  grouped  in  more  or  less  definite  sorir 

Four  to  five  species  in  North  Atlantic  and  Mediterranean. 
Stilophora  rhizodes  (Ehrhart  MS.)  J.  Agardh.     PI.  LXXXVII,  fig.  2. 

Conferva  rhizodes,  Ehrhart  MS.,  in  Turner,  1819,  vol.  4,  p.  91. 
Fttcus  rhizodes.  Turner,  1819,  vol.  4,  p.  91. 
Stilophora  rhizodes,  J.  Agardh,  1841,  p.  6. 
Stilophora  rhizodes,  Harvey,  1852,  p.  112,  pi.  9  B. 
Stilophora  rhizodes,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  90,  pi.  5, f-  4.  pi-  6,  f .  a 
Stilophora  rhizodes,  De  Toni,  1805.  P-  39°- 
P.  B.-A.  No.  83. 

Frond  much  branched,  usually  regularly  dichotomous  with  more  or  less  abundant  minute  lateral 
branches,  8  to  30  cm.  long,  about  i  mm.  diameter  below,  yellowish  when  living,  brownish  when  dry; 
branches  elongated,  plainly  tapering  toward  the  apices;  sori  separate,  scattered  among  the  more  or 
less  extensive  sterile  portions  of  the  cortex , '  'unilocular ' '  and ' '  plurilocular ' '  sporangia  formed  on  different 
individuals. 

Temperate  North  Atlantic;  Mediterranean. 

Beaufort,  N.  C.:  Very  abundant  in  Mullet  Pond,  on  Shackleford  Banks,  May,  1907,  April,  1908, 
loose  or  attached,  lying  in  loose  masses  on  the  bottom;  few  specimens  in  tide  pool  in  northwest  corner 
of  Town  Marsh,  May,  1907;  one  specimen  in  harbor  north  of  laboratory,  April,  1908. 

Specimens  from  different  localities  vary  greatly  in  more  or  less  conspicuous  tufts  of  peripheral 
filaments  and  in  abundance  of  minute  branches  on  various  portions  of  the  thallus.  The  Beaufort 
specimens  have  tufts  of  peripheral  filaments  large  and  conspicuous  and  few  minute  branches.  In 
habit  it  is  between  the  typical  form  and  forma  contorta  Holden,  occurring  in  masses  with  branches 
slightly  contorted  and  intertwined.  At  Beaufort  it  occurred,  with  the  exception  of  one  specimen,  in 
tide  pools  that  were  considerably  warmer  than  the  water  in  the  harbor,  but  were  very  muddy.  This 
is  the  most  southern  station  reported  for  the  species  on  our  shores,  but  it  may  be  found  farther  south  in 
the  winter  or  spring. 

Family  6.  SPOROCHNACE^E  (Reichenbach)  Hauck. 

Thallus  usually  filiform,  sometimes  narrow-band  shaped,  parenchymatous  except  at 
apices,  where  it  is  composed  of  tufts  of  free  filaments^  branching  lateral,  profuse,  the 
branches  in  some  cases  differentiated  into  long  and  short  ones;  longitudinal  growth 
trichothallic  by  a  group  of  subterminal  cells;  only  "unilocular  sporangia"  known,  these 
are  obovate,  ellipsoid,  or  ellipsoid-cylindrical,  produced  as  lateral  outgrowths  of  special 
short,  simple,  or  branched  filaments  arising  from  superficial  cells ;  sporangif erous  filaments 
occurring  in  sori  scattered  over  the  frond  or  confined  to  special  regions. 

About  20  species  in  warm  and  temperate  seas,  especially  in  the  Australian  region. 

Genus  Sporochnus  Agardh. 
Sporochnus,  Agardh,  1820,  p.  147. 

Frond  filiform,  solid,  regularly  branched  on  all  sides,  usually  having  sharply  distinct 
long  and  short  branches,  apices  crowned  with  a  tuft  of  free  filaments;  sporangia  pro- 
duced as  lateral  outgrowths  uniformly  distributed  on  short,  more  or  less  branched 
filaments  with  club-shaped  branches  and  round  pear-shaped  end  cells;  sporangiferous 


MARINE  AUi^E  OF  BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  449 

filaments  occurring  in  sori  surrounding  the  short  branches  immediately  below  the 
apices;  fertile  portions  of  these  branches  cylindrical,  club  shaped,  ellipsoidal,  or  almost 
globose. 

About  14  species,  mostly  in  Australian  region;  3  in  Europe. 

Sporochnus  pedunculatus  (Hudson)  Agardh.     PI.  LXXXVIII,  fig.  3. 

Fucus  Pedunculatus,  Hudson,  1762,  p.  587. 
Sporochnus  pedunculatus,  Agardh,  1820,  p.  149. 
Sporochnus  pedunculatus,  De  Toni.  1895,  p.  380. 

.Frond  filiform,  arising  from  a  very  minute,  discoid,  rootlike  callus,  greenish  to  olive  brown,  up  to 
40  cm.  tall;  densely  pinnate,  long  branches  rather  simple,  alternate,  i  to  20  cm.  long;  short  branches 
numerous  on  the  long  branches,  occasional  on  the  main  axis,  usually  i  to  2  mm,  long  or  less,  sometimes 
up  to  5  mm.  long,  fertile  portions  at  first  subsessile  and  subglobose,  then  pedicillate  and  more  or  less 
elongated,  obovate-ellipsoid;  sporangia  about  30  to  40  by  10  to  15  mic. 

Atlantic 'from  Scandinavia  and  England  to  northern  Africa;  Mediterranean. 

Beaufort,  N.  C.:  One  specimen,  Bogue  Beach,  August,  1907;  few  fragments  dredged  from  the  coral 
reef  offshore,  August,  1914. 

The  large  specimen  mentioned  differs  from  most  English  specimens  of  the  species  in  that  it  is  coarser, 
has  the  short  branches  more  scattered  with  longer  peduncles,  and  the  fertile  portions  of  these  branches 
ending  more  abruptly  than  in  the  English  specimens,  but  the  English  specimens  are  themselves  variable 
in  these  respects  and  some  of  them  closely  approach  the  Beaufort  plant.  This  species  has  not  pre- 
viously been  recorded  from  America,  the  specimens  from  Bermuda  referred  in  the  Challenger  report 
to  5.  pedunculatus  probably  being  another  species.  S.  bolleanus  Mont.,  which  occurs  in  Bermuda, 
differs  from  the  Beaufort  specimen  in  being  coarser  and  having  longer  peduncles,  those  of  S.  bolleanus 
being  2  to  6  times  those  of  the  Beaufort  specimen,  0.5  to  1.5  times  the  length  of  the  fertile  portion  of 
the  branch. 

The  large  specimen  collected  at  Beaufort  is  16.5  cm.  long  and  seems  complete,  except  that  it  lacks 
its  attaching  base,  its  long  branches  are  i  to  4  cm.  long,  it  is  in  good  condition,  is  fruiting  abundantly,  and 
when  found  seemed  fresh  and  vigorous.  It  is  probable  that  this  grew  on  the  coral  reef  offshore  from 
Beaufort. 

Order  2.  Cyclosporese  Areschoug. 

Cydosporinae,  De  Toni,  1895,  p.  3. 

Frond  often  of  striking  size,  various  in  form,  branching,  and  structure,  usually  on 
rocks,  less  often  epiphytic,  with  or  without  vesicles  (floats,  air  bladders) ;  usually  bearing 
on  the  surface  tufts  of  hairs  arising  from  the  interior  of  sunken,  flask-sha/ped  cavities 
(cryptostomata) ;  no  asexual  propagation;  sexual  reproduction  by  nonmotile  eggs  and 
biciliate  motile  sperms;  sexual  organs  (oogonia  and  antheridia)  accompanied  by  para- 
physes,  formed  within  sunken,  subspherical,  hermaphroditic  or  unisexual  conceptacles, 
communicating  with  the  exterior  by  a  narrow  canal,  usually  on  more  or  less  specialized 
portions  of  the  thallus;  oogonia  spherical  or  ellipsoidal,  occurring  singly  on  a  short  stalk, 
producing  i,  2,  4,  or  8  relatively  large,  nonmotile  eggs;  antheridia  numerous,  occurring 
as  branches  on  more  or  less  branched  filaments,  producing  numerous  small,  biciliate, 
motile  sperms;  eggs  and  sperms  discharged  through  the  neck  of  the  conceptacle  into  the 
water  where  fertilization  occurs.  ,.*  ..-.." 

Family  FUCACFJE  De  Toni. 

Characters  of  the  order. 

About  300  species,  mostly  in  salt  water,  some  in  brackish  water,  throughout  the 
world,  especially  in  Australian  region. 


450 


BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 


KEY  TO  GENERA. 


Frond  flat,  band  shaped,  dichotomously  branched  in  one  plane,  furnished  with  a  midrib 

i.  Fucus  (p.  450). 

Frond  distinctly  differentiated  into  stem  and  leaflike  portions,  laterally  branched,  floats 

developed  as  special  organs 2.  Sargassum  (p.  451). 

Genus  i.  Fucus  (Tournefort)  Linnaeus. 
Fucus,  Linnaeus,  1737,  p.  326  (in  part). 

Frond  flat,  band  shaped,  repeatedly  dichotomously  branched  in  one  plane,  fur- 
nished with  a  more  or  less  conspicuous  midrib,  attached  by  a  basal  disk;  vesicles  present 
or  absent,  formed  from  swollen  portions  of  the  frond,  often  in  pairs  on  each  side  of  the 
midrib;  cryptostomata  more  or  less  conspicuous  here  and  there  over  the  frond,  bearing 
tufts  of  paraphyses;  apical  cell  three-sided  in  young  stages,  soon  becoming  four-sided; 
receptacles  formed  from  the  more  or  less  swollen  apices;  unisexual  or  hermaphroditic; 
oogonia  producing  eight  eggs,  accompanied  by  numerous  paraphyses;  antheridia  ellip- 
soidal, numerous,  occurring  as  lateral  branches  of  richly  branched  filaments,  producing 
numerous  sperms,  accompanied  by  paraphyses;  eggs  spherical,  relatively  large,  non- 
motile;  sperms  small,  pear  shaped,  biciliate,  actively  motile. 

About  1 6  species,  in  cold  and  temperate  seas. 
Fucus  vesiculosus  Linnaeus.     PI.  LXXXIX. 

Fucus  vesiculosus,  Linnaeus,  1753,  p.  1158. 
Fucus  vesiculosus,  Harvey,  1852,  p.  71. 
Fucus  vesiculosus,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  too,  pi.  9. 
Fucus  vesiculosus,  De  Toni,  1893,  p.  ao6. 
A.  A.B.  Ex.  No.  109. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  577. 

Frond  dark  brown  or  black,  coriaceous,  band  shaped,  variable  in  form  and  size,  2.5  cm.  to  i  m.  long, 
i  to  25  mm.  wide;  repeatedly  and  regularly  dichotomous;  tapering  below  to  a  distinct  stipe;  furnished 
with  an  evident  midrib;  cryptostomata  more  or  less  conspicuous;  vesicles  usually  present,  sometimes 
lacking,  variable  in  form,  size,  and  arrangement,  usually  occurring  in  pairs,  one  on  each  side  of  the 
midrib;  receptacles  forming  swollen  portions  at  the  tips  of  the  branches,  more  or  less  conspicuous,  vari- 
able in  size  and  form,  somewhat  flattened,  turgid;  antheridia  and  oogonia  produced  on  different  plants. 

North  Atlantic  and  Pacific  Oceans. 

Beaufort,  N.  C. :  Abundant  on  innermost  jetty,  and  occasional  elsewhere  at  Fort  Macon  from  low 
water  up  to  60  cm.  above  low-tide  line,  fairly  abundant  in  harbor  along  shores,  occasionally  fairly 
abundant  on  Bogue  Beach. 

Thjis  is  the  southern  known  Limit  of  the  species  and  of  the  genus  on  our  coast. 

The  species  is  variable  in  size  and  form,  in  the  presence  or  absence  of  vesicles  and  the  abundance 
and  shape  of  these  when  they  are  present,  in  the  conspicuousness  of  the  cryptostomata,  and  in  the  size, 
shape,  and  conspicuousness  of  the  receptacles.  The  vesicles  may  vary  from  numerous  short,  round  ones, 
crowded  together  in  places  so  that  they  resemble  a  double  chain  of  beads,  to  few  long,  scattered  ones,  or 
they  may  be  confluent,  forming  large,  bladderlike  structures,  or  may  be  lacking.  The  receptacles  may 
be  lacking  (in  sterile  specimens),  or  may  be  small,  or  may  form  large,  swollen  portions  at  the  apices,  or 
may  extend  some  distance  from  apices,  they  may  be  long  and  narrow  or  short  and  broad,  their  apices 
may  be  acute  or  obtuse.  The  Beaufort  specimens  are  4  to  5  mm.  wide  (at  the  vesicles  up  to  9  mm.  wide) 
and  10  to  30  cm.  long;  the  cryptostomata  are  inconspicuous,  the  receptacles  are  only  slightly  swollen 
and  extend  when  young  3  to  6  mm.,  when  mature  i  to  2.5  cm.  from  the  apices,  they  are  scarcely  wider 
than  sterile  portions  of  the  frond;  their  apices  are  acute.  At  Beaufort  the  plants  are  sterile  during  the 
spring  and  summer,  commencing  to  form  their  receptacles  in  August  and  maturing  these  by  November. 
Plants  collected  from  November  to  January  have  mature  fruits,  those  collected  from  April  to  August  are 
entirely  sterile.  The  species  was  not  collected  in  February  or  March,  1909,  but  was  probably  present. 
In  May,  1907,  numerous  small  plants  2  to  3  cm.  long  were  found,  in  addition  to  large  ones  up  to  30  cm. 
long;  all  were  sterile. 


MARINE  ALG^E  OF  BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  451 

Genus  2.  Sargassum  Agardh. 
Sargassum,  Agardh,  1820,  p.  i. 

Frond  attached  by  a  basal  disk  or  free  floating,  consisting  of  evident  stem  and  leaf • 
like  portions,  bearing,  in  addition  to  these,  vesicles  and  receptacles  as  separate  organs; 
main  axis  short;  branching  lateral,  alternate,  decompound;  stem  terete,  flattened,  or 
angular;  leaves  variously  shaped,  sometimes  branched,  consisting  of  a  flattened  lamina 
usually  on  a  short  petiole,  provided  with  a  more  or  less  conspicuous  midrib  traversing 
the  entire  leaf  or  extending  through  only  the  lower  half,  lamina  sometimes  reduced  so 
that  the  leaf  consists  of  little  more  than  the  midrib,  margins  smooth,  serrate,  or  dentate; 
vesicles  spherical,  ellipsoidal,  or  obovate,  sometimes  flattened,  occurring  singly,  formed 
from  transformed  leaves  or  parts  of  leaves  (the  transformation  taking  place  at  a  young 
stage),  borne  on  short  stalks,  often  with  flat,  unaltered  portions  of  the  leaf  remaining 
along  the  stalk  and  at  the  apex  of  the  vesicle,  the  remnant  at  the  apex  often  reduced  to 
a  spinelike  tip;  cryptostomata  present  only  on  the  leaves,  sometimes  lacking;  recep- 
tacles simple  or  branched,  terete,  flattened,  or  angular,  often  axillary;  conceptacles 
usually  spherical,  communicating  with  the  exterior  by  a  narrow  canal,  hermaphroditic; 
oogonia  accompanied  by  a  few  simple  or  branched  paraph yses,  producing  only  one  egg ; 
antheridia  rotund  on  racemosely  branched  filaments. 

About  1 60  species,  grouped  in  five  subgenera  containing  numerous  sections,  in  warm 
and  temperate  seas  throughout  the  world,  especially  in  Australian  region. 

Some  of  the  species  are  easily  distinguishable,  but  most  of  them  are  separated  by 
slight,  inconspicuous  characters.  With  the  large  number  of  species  separated  by  slight 
differences,  it  is  difficult  to  give  an  idea  of  these  differences  by  descriptions.  Determi- 
nations here,  more  than  in  most  genera,  can  be  made  only  by  comparison  with  authentic 
specimens. 

Seventeen  species  are  reported  for  North  America",  15  being  found  on  the  eastern 
coast.  Most  of  these  are  southern,  only  one,  S.  filipendula,  extending  to  the  north,  with 
one  other,  5.  natans,  often  washed  ashore.  In  the  region  studied,  attached  forms  are 
apt  to  be  5.  filipendula,  and  floating  ones  are  apt  to  be  5.  filipendula  var.  montagnei 
if  fertile,  or  S.  natans  if  sterile,  although  an  occasional  representative  of  other  species  may 
be  found  washed  ashore. 

While  the  extreme  forms  of  these  two  species  are  easily  distinguished,  intermediate 
forms  approach  each  other.  Some  specimens  referred  to  S.  natans  by  various  workers 
bear  a  closer  resemblance  to  S.  fiUpendida  var.  montagnei.  Such  specimens  will  give 
much  trouble  to  those  who  may  try  to  name  them. 

Observations  of  Tahara  and  others  show  that  in  some  species  of  this  genus  eggs  are 
produced  periodically  at  intervals  of  five  to  eleven  days,  apparently  bearing  no  definite 
relation  to  the  tides. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

Cryptostomata  usually  lacking,  leaf  margins  conspicuously  serrate,  branching  rather  irregu- 
lar, usually  sterile i-  5.  natans  (p.  452). 

Cryptostomata  present,  usually  conspicuous,  leaf  margins  often  not  conspicuously  serrate, 

branching  fairly  regular,  usually  fruiting 2.  5.  filipendula  (p.  452). 


452  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES, 

i.  Sargassum  natans  (Linnaeus)  Meyen.     PI.  XC,  fig.  i. 

Fucus  natans,  Linnaeus,  1753,  Tom.  2,  p.  1160. 
Fucus  bacciferus.  Turner,  1802,  vol.  i,  p.  55. 
Sargassum  bacciferum,  Agardh,  1820,  p.  6. 
Sargassum  natans,  Meyen,  183?,  p.  185. 
Sargassum  bacciferum,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  59. 
Sargassum  bacciferum,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  103. 
Sargassum  bacciferum,  De  Toni,  1895,  p.  82. 
Sargassum  natans,  Borgesen,  19143,  p.  7. 
A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  105  (in  part). 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  381,  2180. 

Fronds  15  to  45  cm.  long,  coriaceous,  shining  chestnut  brown;  stems  terete,  many  times  decom- 
pound; leaves  lanceolate-linear,  on  a  rather  long  petiole,  occasionally  forked,  4  to  10  cm.  long,  i  to  7  mm. 
broad,  acutely  serrate,  midrib  distinct,  cryptostomata  usually  lacking;  vesicles  spherical,  on  terete 
petioles  whose  length  about  equals  that  of  the  vesicles,  usually  provided  with  a  spinelike  tip;  recep- 
tacles axillary,  forked,  cymose,  cylindrical,  verrucose;  usually  sterile. 

Floating  in  North  Atlantic,  especially  near  the  Gulf  Stream.  No  specimen  surely  referable  to  this 
species  is  known  attached. 

Occasionally  abundant  in  summer  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  not  observed  at  other  seasons. 
Fairly  abundant  on  beaches  at  Southport,  N.  C.,  Georgetown,  S.  C.,  and  Isle  of  Palms  in  the  harbor  of 
Charleston,  S.  C.,  July  and  August,  1909. 

Forma  angustum  (Collins)  comb.  nov. 

Sargassum.  bacciferum  I.  angustum,  Collins,  in  Collins,  Holden  and  Setchell,  Phycotheca  Boreali- Americana,  No.  833, 1901. 
A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  105  (in  part). 
P.  B.-A.  No.  833. 

Leaves  long,  narrow,  2  to  6  cm.  long,  i  mm.  or  less  wide,  in  extreme  cases  consisting  of  little  more 
than  the  midrib,  conspicuously  serrate,  cryptostomata  lacking;  vesicles  spherical,  sometimes  tapering 
very  slightly  at  base,  sometimes  provided  with  a  spinelike  tip,  petiole  i  to  3  times  length  of  vesicle; 
sterile. 

Floating  in  North  Atlantic,  with  the  species. 

Occasionally  abundant  in  summer,  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  not  observed  at  other  seasons; 
probably  in  other  localities  also. 
a.  Sargassum  filipendula  Agardh.    PI.  XC,  fig.  2. 

Sargassum  filipendula,  Agardh,  1824,  p.  300. 

Sargassum  filipendula,  Harvey,  1852,  p.  61. 

Sargassum  vulgare,  Farlow.  i88«,  p.  103. 

Sargassum  filipendula,  De  Toni,  1893,  P-  i°6- 

A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  101  (S.  vulgare). 

P.  B.-A.  Fasc.  D.  No.  XCVH,  Fasc.  E.  No.  CXIX  (S.  vulgare). 

Fronds  30  to  150  cm.  long,  yellowish-brown;  stems  terete  or  slightly  flattened  decompound,  smooth; 
leaves  linear-lanceolate  or  narrow  linear,  on  a  short  petiole,  sometimes  forked,  i  to  5  cm.  long,  1.5  to  12 
mm.  broad,  larger  and  broader  below,  smaller  and  narrower  above,  acutely  serrate  or  the  upper  narrower 
ones  subentire,  midrib  distinct,  cryptostomata  more  or  less  conspicuous,  usually  occurring  singly, 
serially  arranged  on  both  sides  of  the  midrib;  vesicles  spherical,  on  flattened  petioles  usually  longer  than 
the  vesicles,  usually  provided  with  a  spinelike  tip;  receptacles  cylindrical,  verrucose,  paniculate  on  an 
elongated  axillary  branch,  the  lower  ones  pedicillate,  rather  simple,  the  upper  ones  confluent. 

Warm  and  temperate  North  Atlantic. 

Beaufort,  N.  C.:  Abundant  in  harbor  and  on  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford  jetties  throughout  the 
year,  from  low-water  line  to  i  m.  below  low  water;  abundant  on  coral  reef  offshore  at  depth  of  24  to  25.5 
m.,  May,  1907,  August,  1914,  and  August,  1915. 

Most  of  the  specimens  from  our  coast  which  have  been  referred  to  S.  vulgare  Ag.  belong  to  this 
species  or  to  one  of  its  forms,  but  specimens  of  the  true  S.  vulgare  are  known  from  the  extreme  south, 
Key  West,  Fla.,  Mexico,  and  West  Indies.  The  species  differs  from  S.  vulgare  in  having  narrower 
leaves,  longer  petioles  of  vesicles,  and  more  racemose  branching  of  receptacles;  many  specimens  have 
also  less  conspicuously  serrate  leaf  margins,  and  the  leaves  less  rigid  and  leathery.  With  its  various 
forms  the  species  shows  much  variation  in  the  shape  and  size  of  leaves,  the  amount  of  serration,  and  the 
abundance  of  cryptostomata. 


MARINE  AUJ^B  OF  BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  453 

The  Beaufort  specimens  fit  the  description  of  the  species  and  resemble  specimens  from  other  locali- 
ties referred  to  this  species  except  that  in  the  Beaufort  plants  the  cryptostomata  are  inconspicuous  and 
sometimes  lacking.  They  have  leaves  broader  and  less  serrate  than  in  the  type,  these  being  as  short 
and  broad  as  in  f .  contractum  J .  Ag.  with  their  margins  almost  as  little  serrate  as  in  var.  montagnei  Collins 
and  Hervey.  In  the  Beaufort  plants  the  leaves  are  lanceolate  1.5  to  3.5  cm.  long,  3  to  7  mm.  broad; 
the  vesicles  are  rounded,  tapering  slightly  at  the  base  and  sometimes  very  slightly  at  the  apex,  in  the 
latter  case  bearing  a  short  spinelike  tip,  their  petioles  are  1.5"  to  3  times  the  length  of  the  vesicle. 
The  plants  from  the  coral  reef  have  large  lanceolate  leaves  at  the  base,  8  to  8.5  cm.  long,  i  to  1.3  cm. 
broad,  long,  narrow  linear  leaves  at  the  apex,  3.5  to  5.5  cm.  long,  3  to  5  mm.  broad,  approaching  in 
appearance  the  leaves  of  var.  montagnei;  the  serrations  are  inconspicuous  on  both  kinds  of  leaves. 

Var.  montagnei  (Bailey)  Collins  and  Hervey. 

Sargassum  •montagnei.  Bailey,  in  Harvey,  1852,  p.  58,  pi.  i  A. 
Sargassum  vulgare  var.  montagnei,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  103. 
Sargassum  filipendula  1.  subedentatum,  J.  Agardh,  1889,  p.  120. 
Sargassum  filipendula  i.  subedentatum,  De  Toni,  1895,  P-  i°7- 
Sargassum  filipendula  var.  montagnei,  Collins  and  Hervey,  1917,  p.  83. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  2176. 

Leaves  long,  narrow,  linear,  2  to  7.5  cm.  long,  i  to  5  mm.  wide,  serrations  almost  or  entirely  lacking, 
the  margins  usually  being  smooth  and  wavy,  cryptostomata  often  abundant  and  conspicuous;  vesicles 
rounded  or  oblong  on  petioles  i  to  3  times  the  length  of  the  vesicle;  receptacles  cylindrical,  branched, 
cymose-racemose. 

Atlantic  shores  of  North  America. 

Abundant  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  summer  and  autumn;  abundant  in  trawl  offshore 
from  Brown's  Inlet,  south  of  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  July,  1915. 

The  specimens  belonging  to  this  form  often  differ  considerably  from  the  species  in  appearance, 
but  at  Beaufort  are  fairly  uniform  among  themselves.  It  is  not  known  from  what  locality  these 
plants  have  come. 

Besides  the  species  mentioned  above,  one  sterile  specimen  of  another  species  was 
found  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August  20,  1908.  This  has  rather  thick, 
leathery  leaves  borne  on  short  petioles,  usually  long,  oblong,  or  elliptical,  1.5*  to  2.7 
cm.  long  and  5  to  9  mm.  wide,  a  few  being  short  elliptical,  8  to  13  mm.  long  and  6  to  10 
mm.  wide,  cryptostomata  are  lacking,  the  margins  are  slightly  serrate;  the  vesicles  are 
obovate  or  rounded,  of  moderate  size,  and  borne  on  short  stalks.  The  specimen 
resembles  in  some  respects  herbarium  specimens  of  5.  marginatum  (Ag.)  J.  Ag.  or 
5.  ilicifolium  (Turn.)  Ag.,  but  can  not  be  definitely  referred  to  any  species. 

Order  3.     Dictyotales  Kjellman. 

Tetrasporinse.  De  Toni,  1895,  p.  325- 

Frond  of  medium  size,  attached  to  rocks,  etc.,  light  or  dark  brown,  of  various 
forms,  usually  membranaceous,  flat,  simple,  lobate,  or  branched,  nearly  always  erect, 
of  parenchymatous  structure;  asexual  propagation  by  relatively  large  nonmotile  aplano- 
spores,  usually  produced  four  (tetraspores) ,  sometimes  two  or  eight,  from  a  mother  cell 
(sporangium) ;  sexual  reproduction  by  relatively  large,  nonmotile  eggs  and  small,  motile, 
monociliate  sperms;  sporangia  and  gametangia  on  different  plants,  usually  on  unspecialized 
portions  of  the  thallus,  developed  from  superficial  cells,  occurring  singly  or  in  groups 
(sori),  sometimes  accompanied  by  paraphyses;  oogonia  and  antheridia  produced  on  the 
same  or  different  plants;  sexual  and  asexual  generations,  at  least  in  some  cases,  alter- 
nating with  each  other;  oogonia  producing  a  single  egg;  antheridia  producing  numerous 
sperms;  eggs  and  sperms  discharged  into  the  water  where  fertilization  occurs.  x 


454  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

Family  DICTYOTACEdE  (Lamouroux)  Zanardini. 

Characters  of  the  order. 

About  1 20  species,  all  marine,  mostly  in  warm  seas,  one  species  extending  to 
Scandinavia. 

KEY  TO  GENERA. 

a.  Frond  growing  by  means  of  single  initial  cells  situated  at  the  apices 5.  Dictyota  (p.  460). 

00.  Frond  growing  by  means  of  a  group  or  groups  of  marginal  cells  situated  at  the  apices b. 

b.  Frond  zonate  by  concentric  lines  of  growth,  in  the  neighborhood  of  which  the  spor- 
angia and  gametangia  are  developed ;  fan  shaped c. 

c.  Hairs  lacking  on  the  sterile  portions  of  the  frond i.  Zonaria  (p.  454). 

cc.  Hairs  present  on  the  sterile  portions  of  the  frond 2 .  Padina  (p.  455). 

bb.  Frond  uniform,  concentric  lines  of  growth  lacking;  repeatedly  dichotomous d. 

d.  Midrib  lacking - 3.  Spatoglossum  (p.  458). 

dd.  Midrib  present 4.  Dictyopteris  (p.  459). 

Genus  i.  Zonaria  Agardh. 

Zonaria,  Agardh,  i8I7,  ».  XX  (in  part). 

Frond  flat,  fan  shaped,  often  ascending  from  a  prostrate  lower  'part,  growing  by 
groups  of  cells  along  the  apical  margins,  forming  rather  vague,  scattered  zones,  divided 
into  more  or  less  narrow  segments,  often  narrowed  at  the  base  of  the  frond  and  of  the 
separate  segments  to  a  subcylindrical,  stemlike  portion  densely  covered  by  short,  brown, 
rhizoidal  filament?,  this  stemlike  structure  often  continued  as  midribs  for  short  distances 
on  the  flattened  segments  of  the  lamina;  cortex  composed  of  a  single  layer  of  cells 
arranged  in  pairs  forming  longitudinal  lines  radiating  like  a  fan,  each  row  of  paired 
cells  corresponding  to  a  single  row  of  interior  cells;  inner  stratum  consisting  of  several 
layers  of  cells;  sporangia  pear  shaped,  borne  in  more  or  less  prominent  sori,  forming 
scattered,  spotlike  patches  on  one  or  both  surfaces  of  the  thallus,  covered  by  the  cuticle 
as  an  indusium  which  is  burst  as  the  sorus  is  elevated  and  soon  disappears,  sporangia 
often  surrounded  by  numerous  club-shaped,  segmented  paraphyses,  bearing  8  spores; 
sexual  reproduction  unknown. 

About  15  species  in  warm  and  tropical  seas. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

Frond  entire  or  nearly  so,  stipe  usually  3  to  5  mm.  long i.«  Z.  -variegata  (p.  454). 

Frond  much  divided,  stipe  usually  i  to  5  cm.  long 2.  Z.  flaw  (p.  455). 

1.  Zonaria  variegata  (Lamouroux)  Mertens.    PI.  XCI,  fig.  2. 

Dictyota  variegata,  Lamouroux,  1813,  pi.  5.  f.  7. 

Zonaria  variegata,  Mertens,  in  Martins,  1828,  p.  6,  pi.  2,  f.  a. 

Gymnosorus  -oa.riega.lus,  De  Toni,  1895,  p.  227. 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  778  (Gymnosorus  variegatus.),  2028. 

Frond  flat,  fan  shaped,  rather  erect  on  a  short  stipe,  3  to  9  cm.  tall,  4.5  to  14  cm.  wide,  stipe  3  to  15 
mm.  (usually  3  to  5  mm.)  long,  thallus  entire  or  more  or  less  lobate,  marked  by  variegated  markings 
radiating  from  the  base  and  by  more  or  less  conspicuous,  distant,  concentric  zonations  parallel  with  the 
apical  margin;  sori  elliptical,  forming  broken  lines  or  scattered  spots  between  the  zonations;  texture 
thin  membranaceous  or  parchmentlike ;  color  olive  brown  to  dark  reddish  brown. 

Florida  and  West  Indies  to  Brazil;  Barbados;  Bermuda;  Canary  Islands;  Australian  region;  Red 
Sea;  Hawaii;  Philippines.  __ 

Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  one  specimen  April,  1908,  two  specimens  February,  1909,  all  sterile. 

In  this  species  the  concentric  zonations  are  sometimes  fairly  conspicuous,  sometimes  invisible  to 
the  naked  eye.  It  is  easily  distinguished  from  the  following  species  by  its  smaller  size,  shorter  stipe, 


_  I 

MARINE   AI<GM   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  455 

radiating  markings,  and  entire  or  almost  entire  laminae,  as  well  as  by  the  absence  of  continuations  of 
the  stipe  as  "midribs"  on  the  segments. 

While  the  specimens  found  at  Beaufort  may  have  grown  on  the  coral  reef  offshore,  they  may  equally 
well  have  been  brought  there  by  the  Gulf  Stream  from  Florida  or  the  West  Indies.     This  is  the  northern 
known  limit  of  the  species  and  the  genus. 
2.  Zonaria  flava  (Clemente)  Agardh.     PI.  XCI,  fig.  i. 

Fucus  flavus,  Clemente,  1807,  P-  310. 

Zonaria  flava,  Agardh,  1817,  p.  XX. 

Zonaria  flava,  Harvey,  1858,  p.  123. 

Zonaria  flava,  De  Toni,  1895,  p.  230. 

A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  91  (Zonaria  tourneforlii). 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  86,  1391  (Zonaria  tcrurnefortii). 

Frond  rather  erect,  3.5  to  17  cm.  tall,  stipitate,  attached  by  a  cushion  at  the  base,  parchmentlike, 
substance  almost  horny,  color  reddish  brown;  stipe  subcylindrical,  elongated,  branched,  densely 
covered  by  short,  brown,  rhizoidal  filaments;  branches  going  off  into  a  cuneate,  flattened  lamina, 
flabellately  incised,  marked  by  vague  lines  radiating  from  the  base  and  by  distant,  more  or  less  vague, 
concentric  zonations  parallel  with  the  apical  margins;  stipe  continued  as  midribs  for  short  distances 
on  the  flattened  segments  of  the  lamina;  lamina  without  midribs  for  some  distance  from  the  apical 
margins;  son  forming  irregular,  spotlike  patches  scattered  over  the  surface  of  the  lamina. 

California;  Brazil;  Canaries;  Azores;  North  Africa;  Spain;  Mediterranean. 

Beaufort,  N.  C. :  Very  abundant  after  hard  winds,  Bogue  Beach,  throughout  the  year;  very  abundant 
off  northwest  corner  of  coral  reef  at  depth  of  25.5  m.,  May,  1907,  not  found  on  reef.  Fruits  throughout 
the  year. 

Previously  known  with  certainty  from  North  America  only  from  California,  but  specimens  from 
Florida  in  the  herbarium  of  the  New  York  Botanical  Garden  marked  Z.  lobata  Ag.  (which  species  is 
now  referred  to  Stypopodium  lobatum  (Ag.)  Kuetz.)  seem  to  be  Zonaria.  and  may  belong  to  this  species. 
This  is  the  northern  known  limit  of  the  species  and  of  the  genus. 

The  Beaufort  specimens  resemble  the  photograph  of  the  type  (from  Italy)  and  specimens  from 
California,  but  many  Beaufort  plants  are  larger  than  any  specimens  in  Herbarium  New  York  Botanical 
Garden.  The  California  specimens  available  to  the  author  were  3.5  to  7  cm.  tall,  small,  and  narrow, 
while  the  Beaufort  plants  are  7  to  17  cm.  tall,  large,  broad,  and  much  branched. 

Genus  2.  Padina  Adanson. 
Padina,  Adanson,  1763,  Tome  2,  p.  13. 

Frond  flat,  rather  erect  from  a  creeping,  laterally  branched  rhizome,  growing  by 
groups  of  cells  along  the  apical  margins,  forming  conspicuous  zones  marked  by  con- 
centric bands  of  short  hairs,  margin  inrolled  ventrally,  subentire  and  kidney  shaped  or 
fan  shaped,  or  repeatedly  divided  into  spatulate  to  fan-shaped  segments;  narrowed  at 
the  base  to  a  short,  thickened  stipe  often  covered  with  short,  brown  rhizoids;  lamina 
sometimes  composed  of  only  two  layers  of  cells,  usually  composed  of  three  or  more  cell 
layers  differentiated  into  one-layered,  cortical  strata  and  a  one  or  more  layered  inner 
stratum;  spores  produced  four  in  a  sporangium;  sporangia  grouped  in  sori  forming 
conspicuous  scattered  patches  or  more  or  less  regular  bands  between  the  zones  of  hairs, 
usually  covered  by  a  more  or  less  persistent  indusium,  occurring  on  one  or  both  sides 
of  the  thallus;  oogonia  and  antheridia  grouped  in  sori,  occurring  on  the  same  or  different 
individuals;  in  the  former  case  oogonia  occurring  in  concentric  bands  broken  by  radial 
lines  of  antheridia,  in  the  latter  case  both  oogonia  and  antheridia  occurring  in  concentric 
bands  between  the  zones  of  hairs;  oogonia  and  antheridia  produced  on  one  or  both  sides 
of  the  thallus. 

About  10  species,  in  warm  and  tropical  seas. 

While  this  genus  is  easily  recognized,  distinctions  between  the  species  have  been 
the  source  of  much  confusion  in  the  past  and  are  still  made  with  great  difficulty  in  some 


456 


BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 


cases.  The  characters  which  are  most  useful  for  separating  the  species  and  have  been 
used  by  recent  authors  are  the  mutual  arrangement  of  the  son  and  the  lines  of  hairs, 
the  presence  or  absence  of  an  indusium  covering  the  son,  and  the  number  of  cell  layers 
in  the  thallus. 


Pig.  30. — Elachislea  slellulata,  internal  filaments  branched  Fig.  22. — Padina  vickersue,  cross  section  of  thallus,  X  273. 

and  anastomosed,  X  a?3-  Fig.  23.—Goniotrickum  alsidii,  X  300. 

Fig.  2i.—Elachistea  steUulata,  external  filaments  and  "plu-  Fig.  n—Erythrotrichia  cornea,  cells  forming  spores,  X  .<oo. 
rilocular  sporangia, "  arising  from  basal  disk  as  seen  in  optical 
section,  X  273. 

Padina  vickersise  Hoyt.     Fig.  22;  PI.  XCII,  figs,  i  and  2;  PI.  CXIV,  figs.  1-3. 

Zonaria  variegata,  Kuetzing,  1859,  Bd.  9,  p.  30,  pi.  73.  fig-  *• 

Padina  variegata,  Vickers,  1905,  No.  66. 

Padina  variegata,  Vickers,  1908,  pi.  8. 

Padina  mckerstai,  Hoyt,  in  Britton  and  Millspaugh,  1920,  p.  595. 

Thallus  erect,  flat,  expanded,  4  to  22  cm.  tall,  5  to  37  cm.  broad,  entire  when  young,  when  mature 
repeatedly  more  or  less  deeply  laciniate  from  the  margins  into  segments,  varying  from  cuneate  spatulate 
to  fan  shaped,  sometimes  incrusted  with  lime,  zonate  by  piliferous  lines  parallel  with  the  margins, 
often  becoming  inconspicuous  in  the  older  parts,  interpilar  zones  1.5  to  6  mm.  wide,  base  consisting 
of  a  thickened,  rounded  stipe  3  to  12  mm.  long,  densely  covered  with  brown  rhizoids,  attached  by  a 
basal  disk;  lamina  consisting  of  3-cell  layers  near  re  volute  apical  margins,  of  4-cell  layers  throughout 
most  of  thallus,  and  of  6  to  8  cell  layers  toward  the  base,  epidermal  cells  about  half  as  long  as  the  central 
cells;  tetrasporangia  covered  by  a  thin,  subpersistent  indusium,  borne  on  both  surfaces,  usually  pre- 
dominantly on  the  lower  surface,  occurring  in  i  to  2  lines  parallel  with  the  apical  margin  about  the 
middle  of  each  interpilar  zone,  these  lines  frequently  being  broken,  the  tetrasporangia  being  scattered 


MARINE  ALG.E   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  457 

throughout  the  zones  on  the  older  portions  of  the  thallus;  antheridia  and  oogonia  borne  on  separate 
plants  (dioecious),  occurring  in  sori  in  concentric  bands,  as  with  the  tetrasporangia,  borne  on  both  sur- 
faces, usually  predominantly  on  the  lower  surface,  oogonia  covered  by  a  thin,  subpersistent  indusium, 
antheridia  naked  (not  covered  by  indusium);  texture  membranaceous;  color  ^ight  brown,  sometimes 
olivaceous.  . 

Thallo  erecto,  piano,  expanso,  4-22  cm.  longo,  5-37  cm.  lato,  juvenescente  integro,  maturascente 
interum  atque  interum  plus  minus  alte  ex  marginibus  laciniato,  segmentacuneato-spatulataautflabellata 
formante,  aliquando  calce  incrustato,  zonato  ab  lineis  piliferis  cum  marginibus  parallelis,  in  regionibus 
vetustioribus  saepe  obscurescentibus,  zonis  interpilis  1.5-6  mm.  latis,  basi  stipe  densa  rotundata  3-12 
mm.  longa,  rhizoideis  fulvis  dense  tecta,  disco  basali  apta;  lamina  prope  revolutas  apicales  margines 
ex  tribus  stratis  cellularum,  per  maiorem  partem  thalli  ex  quattuor  stratis  cellularum,  ad  basim  ex  sex 
aut  octo  stratis  cellularum  constante,  cellulse  epidermis  circiter  dimidio  breviores  quam  cellulae  centrales; 
tetrasporangiis  ab  indusio  tenue  et  subpersistente  tectis,  in  utraque  superficie,  plerumque  pro  maiore 
parte  in  inferiore  superficie,  in  lineis  unis  aut  duobus  cum  margine  apicale  parallelis  circiter  in  una- 
quaque  media  zona  interpilula  productis,  his  lineis  hinc  inde  fractis,  tetrasporangiis  in  partibus  adul- 
tioribus  thalli  per  zonas  sparsis;  antheridiis  et  oogoniis  ab  plantis  diversis  in  lineis  concentricis  sororum 
similiter  tetrasporangiis,  in  utraque  superficie,  plerumque  pro  maiore  parte  in  inferiore  superficie  pro- 
ductis; oogoniis  ab  indusio  tenue  et  subpersistente  tectis,  antheridiis  nudis  (et  non  ab  indusio  tectis); 
substantia  membranacea;  colore  dilute  fulva,  aliquande  olivacea. 

North  Carolina  to  Florida;  West  Indies;  Barbados;  and  Bermuda. 

Beaufort,  N.  C.:  Very  abundant  on  Fort  Macon  jetties,  o  to  75  cm.  below  low  tide;  extremely 
abundant  on  Shackleford  jetties  and  breakwaters,  o  to  1.2  m.;  fairly  abundant  in  harbor,  June  to  October; 
one  battered  specimen  on  Fort  Macon  jetty,  December,  1908. 

The  species  here  described  has  often  been  wrongly  referred  to  P.  pavonia  J.  Ag.  or  to  P.  durvilkei 
Bory.  From  the  former  it  is  distinguished  by  the  arrangement  of  the  sori,  which  are  in  one  or  two 
rows  about  the  middle  of  each  interpilar  zone,  instead  of  in  single  lines  on  both  sides  of  each  alternate 
piliferous  line,  as  in  P.  pavonia.  From  P.  durvilkei  it  is  distinguished  by  the  epidermal  cells,  which 
are  usually  about  half  as  long  as  the  central  cells,  whereas  in  P.  durvillaei  they  are,  in  all  specimens 
observed  by  the  author,  about  one-fourth  as  long  as  the  central  cells.  Occasionally  those  of  P.  vickersi& 
are  as  long  as  the  central  cells,  the  two  surfaces  of  the  same  section  sometimes  varying  in  this  respect 
(fig.  22  and  PI.  CXIV,  figs.  1-3),  while  those  of  P.  durvilkei  are  said  to  be  half  as  long  as  the  central 
cells.  In  any  case,  however,  the  epidermal  cells  of  the  present  species  are  about  twice  as  long,  com- 
pared with  the  central  cells,  as  those  of  P.  durvilkei.  In  surface  view  the  epidermal  cells  of  P.  vickersioe 
are  rectangular,  having  a  length  of  two  or  more  times  their  width,  while  those  of  P.  durvilhzi  are  usually 
about  square.  The  latter  species  is  also  coarser  and  thicker  than  P.  -vickersice,  sections  showing  six 
cell  layers  throughout  most  of  the  lamina  and  ten  cell  layers  near  the  base. 

The  present  species  was  first  figured  by  Kuetzing  (1859,  Bd.  9,  p.  30,  pi.  73,  f.  2)  under  the  name 
Zonaria  variegata,  with  the  reference  "Ag-  spec.  I.  p.  127."  This,  however,  refers  to  the  true  Zonaria 
variegata  Mertens,  whereas  the  plant  figured  by  Kuetzing  is  a  Padina.  Miss  Vickers  (1905,  No.  66)  names 
this  species  P.  variegata  with  the  reference  "Zonaria  variegata  Kuetz."  Even  if  the  rules  of  nomen- 
clature allowed  the  recognition  of  a  Zonaria  variegata  of  Mertens  and  another  of  Kuetzing,  the  name  P. 
variegata  is  rendered  invalid  by  the  fact  that  neither  Kuetzing  nor  Miss  Vickers  published  a  description 
of  the  species.  The  citation  of  Borgesen  (1914,  p.  205  [49])  to  P.  variegata  (Lamouroux)  Hauck  seems 
even  less  warranted.  According  to  Howe  (1915,  pp.  49-50),  Dictyota  variegata  Lamouroux  seems,  from 
both  the  published  figures  and  the  extant  specimens  of  Lamouroux,  to  have  been  exclusively  Zonaria 
•variegata.  Hauck 's  use  of  the  name  Padina  variegata  is  merely  an  incidental  mention  and  is  founded 
only  on  a  reference  to  Kuetzing.  For  both  of  these  reasons  this  use  of  the  name  does  not  seem  to  con- 
stitute valid  publication.  In  view  of  these  facts,  it  has  seemed  necessary  to  give  a  new  name  to  the 
species. 

Our  species,  however,  approaches  very  near  to  P.  dubia  Hauck  (1887,  p.  45)  and  may  be  identical 
with  this.  In  Herb.  Hauck  there  are  four  good  unmounted  specimens  of  P.  dubia  with  a  loose  label 
written  by  Hauck.  In  habit,  size,  and  number  of  cell  layers  they  resemble  the  present  species;  the 
sori  are  often  irregularly  sdattered  over  almost  the  entire  surface  but  in  parts  are  in  regular  zones  just 
above  each  piliferous  line.0  The  available  material  has  not  been  sufficient  to  determine  whether  the 

o  The  author  is  gratefully  indebted  to  Dr.  Marshall  A.  Howe  for  permission  to  quote  from  his  notes  on  P.  dubia  as  found  in 
Herb.  Hauck,  as  well  as  for  the  opportunity  to  study  portions  of  two  of  the  original  specimens  of  this  species. 


458  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

distribution  of  the  son  is  the  same  as  that  of  P .  richer sice,  but  it  is  certainly  closely  similar  ( "  P.  variegata ' ' 
and  P.  dubia  being  placed  in  the  same  group  by  Hauck  on  the  basis  of  this  character),  and  in  other 
respects  the  two  species  seem  identical.  It  seems,  therefore,  very  probable  that  these  belong  to  a  single 
species.  But,  in  view'of  some  uncertainty  regarding  similarity  in  the  arrangement  of  the  son  and  in 
view  of  the  opinion  expressed  by  Hauck  that  his  material  of  P.  dubia  did  not  entirely  agree  with  the 
"Zonaria  variegata"  of  Kuetzing,  it  has  seemed  better  to  keep  the  species  separate  until  P.  dubia  can 
be  more  thoroughly  studied .  If  the  two  are  found  to  belong  to  a  single  species,  both  P .  variegata  ( Kuetz . ) 
Vickers  and  the  present  name  must  be  reduced  to  synonyms. 

The  type  of  the  species  here  described  is  a  tetrasporic  plant  from  Fort  Macon  jetty,  Beaufort,  N.  C., 
August  23,  1907.  This  and  several  cotypes  have  been  deposited  in  the  U.  S.  National  Herbarium. 

The  tetrasporangia,  oogonia,  and  antheridia  aretx>rne  on  separate  plants  (the  species  being  dioecious), 
and  the  sexual  and  asexual  generations  seem,  from  the  results  of  Wolfe  (1913,  1918),  to  alternate  with 
each  other  as  in  Dictyota.  There  is  evidence  (Wolfe,  1918),  for  believing  that  the  eggs  may  be  fertilized 
before  being  discharged  from  the  oogonium.  Unfertilized  eggs  may  commence  their  development 
parthenogenetically  as  in  Dictyota,  but  apparently  never  (Wolfe,  1914,  1918),  under  such  conditions, 
reach  maturity .x  According  to  observations  of  Howe,  «  the  tetrasporangia  also  may  commence  develop- 
ment without  undergoing  division,  forming  many-celled  brood  buds  or  propagula.  The  further  history 
of  these  bodies  is  unknown. 

The  portions  of  the  cuticle  covering  the  sori  are  raised  by  the  developing  tetrasporangia  and  oogonia 
as  distinct  indusia  covering  the  fruiting  areas  (PI.  CXIV,  figs.  1-3),  while  those  covering  the  antheridia 
are  not  raised  as  distinct  layers,  and  the  antheridia  accordingly  appear  naked.  Although  Borgesen 
(1914)  figures  an  indusium  covering  the  antheridial  sorus,  the  author,  after  careful  study  of  sections 
of  well-preserved  material,  has  been  unable  to  find  these  in  any  case.  In  spite  of  this  discrepancy, 
the  plants  of  Borgesen  and  those  referred  to  here  almost  certainly  belong  to  the  same  species.  The 
indusia,  when  present,  are  very  delicate  and  are  finally  ruptured  by  the  developing  sori;  they  are, 
consequently,  often  absent  from  mature  fruits  and  frequently  are  not  evident  on  dried  plants.  The 
tetrasporic  and  female  plants  closely  resemble  each  other  but  can  easily  be  distinguished  by  the  fact 
that  the  tetrasporangia  have  about  twice  the  diameter  of  the  oogonia,  mature  tetrasporangia  measuring 
41  to  90  by  47  to  108  mic.  and  the  oogonia  27  to  45  by  36  to  63  mic.  Frequently,  moreover,  all  the 
oogonia  on  a  single  plant  are  of  the  same  age,  while  the  tetrasporangia,  although  usually  of  the  same 
age  in  a  single  zone,  are  borne  in  successively  younger  zones  toward  the  apical  margins.  There  is  some 
evidence  that  the  sexual  cells  are  borne  in  periodic  crops  at  weekly  intervals,  but  in  other  cases  oogonia 
(or  antheridia)  of  several  different  ages  are  borne  on  the  same  individual.6 

Two  other  species  of  Padina  are  recorded  from  the  West  Indies.  These,  if  found, 
may  be  distinguished  from  the  present  species  by  the  following  characters : 

P.  sanctae  crucis  Borgesen. — Frond  consisting  of  two  cell  layers,  tetrasporangial  sori  in  concentric 
zones  above  each  alternate  line  of  hairs. 

P.  gymnospora  (Kuetzing)  Vickers. — Frond  consisting  of  three  cell  layers,  tetrasporangial  sori  in 
concentric  zones  in  middle  of  each  alternate  zone  between  the  lines  of  hairs,  sori  not  covered  by  indusia. 

Genus  3.  Spatoglossum  Kuetzing. 

Spatoglossum,  Kuetzing,  1843,  p.  339. 
Spathoglossum,  De  Toni,  1895,  p.  246. 

Frond  flat,  ribbonlike,  subpalmate-dichotomous,  growing  by  groups  of  cells  at  the 
apices,  surface  uniform,  zonations  lacking;  margin  smooth  or  dentate;  midrib  lacking; 
cortex  composed  of  a  single  layer  of  cells  arranged  in  straight  parallel  lines;  inner  stratum 
composed  of  several  layers  of  cells;  spores  produced  four  in  a  sporangium;  sporangia 
scattered  over  both  surfaces,  occurring  singly  or  several  together  in  small  groups; 
oogonia  and  antheridia  produced  on  different  plants;  oogonia  occurring  singly,  scattered 
over  the  surface;  antheridia  in  small,  scattered,  inconspicuous  sori. 

About  eight  species,  in  warm  and  tropical  seas. 

a  The  author  is  gratefully  indebted  to  Dr.  Marshall  A.  Howe  for  permission  to  refer  to  these  unpublished  results. 

'The  author  is  indebted  to  Prof.  J.  J.  Wolfe  for  considerable  information  regarding  the  life  habits  of  Padina  at  Beaufort. 


MARINE   ALGM  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  459 

Spatoglossum  schroederi  (Mertens)  J.  Agardh.     PI.  XCIII,  fig.  i;  PI.  XCIV,  fig.  2  a  and  b. 

Ulva  schraederi,  Mertens,  in  Martins,  1828,  pi.  2,  f .  3. 

Taonia  schraederi,  Harvey,  1852,  p.  107. 

Spatoglossum  schrcederi,  J.  Agardh,  i88oa,  p.  113  (in  part). 

Spathoglossum  schraederi,  De  Toni,  1895,  p.  249. 

A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  159  (Taonia  schraederi). 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  326,  2027. 

Frond  membranaceous,  thin,  dichotomous,  or  sometimes  subpalmate  with  approximate  segments 
and  irregularly  decompound  above  by  new  segments  sprouting  from  the  margins;  these  segments  some- 
what contracted  at  their  bases;  margin  entire  in  younger  portions,  later  distinctly  distantly  serrate; 
color  yellowish  brown. 

Florida  to  Brazil;  West  Indies;  Bermuda;  Guadeloupe. 

Beaufort,  N.  C.:  Three  plants  in  one  small  mass  on  Fort  Macon  jetty,  August,  1906;  few  fragments 
dredged  from  coral  reef  offshore  August,  1914  and  1915. 

This  species  often  closely  resembles  Dictyota  dichotoma,  from  which  it  is  easily  distinguished  by 
its  groups  of  initial  cells  at  the  apices  of  the  branches  and  by  its  serrate  margins.  All  three  of  the  plants 
from  Beaufort  Harbor  were  fruiting  abundantly,  bearing  numerous  tetrasporangia  scattered  thickly 
over  both  surfaces.  The  plants  from  the  coral  reef  have  decidedly  dentate  margins,  while  those  found 
growing  in  the  harbor  have  almost  smooth  margins  with  only  a  few  ciliate  projections. 

This  is  the  only  species  of  this  genus  known  from  North  America,  Spatoglossum  areschougii  J.  Ag. 
(which  has  been  listed  for  this  continent),  now  being  regarded  as  belonging  to  the  present  species. 

This  is  the  northern  known  limit  of  the  species  and  of  the  genus. 

Genus  4.  Dictyopteris  Lamouroux. 

Dictyopteris,  Lamouroux,  18093,  p.  129. 
Haliseris,  De  Toni,  1895,  p.  253. 

Frond  erect,  flat,  more  or  less  regularly  dichotomous,  growing  by  groups  of  cells  at 
the  apices,  surface  uniform,  zonations  lacking;  provided  with  a  conspicuous  midrib  and, 
in  some  species,  with  veins  running  from  the  midrib  to  the  margins;  lamina  transient 
in  the  basal  portion,  the  frond  finally  consisting  in  this  region  of  the  persistent  midrib 
forming  a  stemlike  structure;  cortex  composed  of  a  single  layer  of  cells;  inner  stratum 
composed  of  several  layers  of  cells;  spores  produced  four  in  a  sporangium;  sporangia 
occurring  in  sublinear  or  spotlike  son  on  both  sides  along  the  midrib  on  both  surfaces 
of  the  frond;  oogonia  and  antheridia  produced  on  the  same  plant;  oogonia  occurring 
singly,  scattered  over  both  surfaces;  antheridia  in  small  inconspicuous,  scattered,  slightly 
sunken  sori,  especially  in  the  region  of  the  midrib. 

About  14  species,  in  warm  and  tropical  seas. 

It  is  interesting  that  both  the  species  found  at  Beaufort  should  be  new  to  North 
America.  D.  serrata  has  an  especially  interesting  distribution,  being  previously  reported 
only  from  the  eastern  coast  of  Africa  and  from  the  present  locality. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

Margin  smooth  or  undulate,  often  lacerate,  not  serrate;  no  nerves  running  from  midrib. 

i .  D.  polypodioides  (p.  459). 

Margin  serrate;  nerves  running  from  midrib  to  margins 2.  D.  serrata  (p.  460). 

i.  Dictyopteris  polypodioides  (Desfontaine)  Lamouroux.     PI.  XCIII,  fig.  2. 

Fucus  polypodioides,  Desfontaine,  1798,  Tom.  2,  p.  421. 
Dictyopteris  polypodioides,  Lamouroux,  18093.  p.  131. 
Haliseris  polypodioides,  De  Toni,  1895.  P-  254- 

Frond  7.5  to  72  cm.  long,  0.4  to  1.2  cm.  wide,  on  a  more  or  less  elongated  subterete  stipe;  color 
olive  brown;  repeatedly  dichotomous,  with  occasional  branches  arising  laterally  and  from  the  midrib 
on  the  flat  surface  of  the  frond ;  numerous  groups  of  short  hairs  scattered  over  the  lamina;  sinuses  rather 


460  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

acute,  segments  patent,  attenuated  at  the  apices;  margins  entire  or  often  lacerate,  smooth,  often  undu- 
late; no  nerves  running  from  midrib;  tetrasporangia  in  small  or  large,  inconspicuous,  more  or  less  con- 
fluent sori  along  both  sides  of  the  midrib;  antheridial  sori  uniformly  scattered  over  the  frond. 

Brazil;  Europe;  Tasmania;  Red  Sea;  Arabian  Gulf. 

Beaufort,  N.  C.:  Occasional  on  rocks  of  Fort  Macon  jetties,  summer  and  autumn;  occasional  on 
Bogue  Beach,  spring,  summer,  and  autumn;  extremely  abundant  alongshore  for  distance  of  more  than 
22  km.  from  New  River  Inlet,  south  of  Beaufort,  and  extending  at  least  12  km.  offshore,  at  depth  of 
5.8  to  12  m.,  August,  1914;  very  abundant  in  trawl  offshore  from  Browns  Inlet,  south  of  Beaufort, 
July,  1915. 

This  species  has  not  previously  been  reported  from  North  America.  The  specimens  from  this 
region  closely  resemble  specimens  from  England  and  France.  Those  from  New  River  Inlet  are  the 
largest  which  have  been  observed  by  the  author. 

2.  Dictyopteris  serrate  (Areschoug)  comb.  nov.     PI.  XCIII,  fig.  3. 

Haliseris  serrata,  Areschoug,  1847,  p.  4,  pi.  7. 
Haliseris  serrata.  De  Toni,  1895,  p.  259. 

Frond  8  to  30  cm.  long,  1.4  to  3  cm.  wide,  on  an  elongated,  slightly  flattened  stipe;  color  yellow 
brown;  sparingly  dichotomous;  hairs  occurring  in  scattered  groups  over  the  lamina;  sinuses  subrotund, 
segments  patent,  attenuated  at  the  apices;  margins  usually  entire,  with  acute,  approximate,  or  more 
distant  serrations;  lamina  furnished  with  more  or  less  numerous,  fairly  conspicuous  nerves  running 
from  the  midrib  obliquely  towvd  the  margins;  sporangial  sori  small  and  inconspicuous,  in  more  or  less 
regular  lines  parallel  to  the  veins  in  the  intervenous  spaces;  oogonia  produced  on  both  surfaces,  scattered 
over  the  frond,  especially  along  midrib  and  margins. 

Port  Natal,  Africa;  Mauritius. 

Fairly  abundant  July  and  August,  1903,  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  occasional  in  spring, 
summer,  and  fall  of  other  years;  several  large  plants  dredged  from  the  coral  reef  offshore,  August,  1914, 
and  August,  1915. 

This  species  has  been  previously  reported  only  from  Port  Natal,  Africa,  but  a  specimen  in  the 
herbarium  of  the  New  York  Botanical  Garden  was  collected  in  Mauritius.  The  Beaufort  specimens 
differ  from  the  description  in  having  slightly  more  rounded  apices  and  slightly  less  rotund  sinuses. 
They  sometimes  differ  from  the  plate  in  Kuetzing  (Tab.  Phyc.  IX,  pi.  60)  and  from  the  specimen  in 
the  herbarium  of  the  New  York  Botanical  Garden  in  having  less  conspicuous  veins  and  smaller,  more 
numerous  serrations.  From  the  latter  specimen  they  sometimes  differ  also  in  having  a  lighter  color 
and  a  thinner  texture,  the  inner  stratum  consisting  of  one  to  two  layers  of  cells  instead  of  uniformly  two 
layers,  as  in  that  specimen.  In  spite  of  these  differences  there  seems  no  doubt  that  the  specimens  from 
Beaufort  are  correctly  referred  to  D.  serrata.  They  certainly  belong  to  Dictyopteris  and,  if  not  this 
species,  must  be  described  as  a  new  one.  The  differences  do  not  seem  sufficient  to  warrant  the  descrip- 
tion of  a  new  species. 

In  the  Beaufort  plants  the  apices  are  sometimes  sunken,  as  in  fern  prothalli.  In  one  specimen 
the  veins  occasionally,  instead  of  running  out  to  the  margins,  form  plexuses  of  small  veins  between 
the  midrib  and  the  margin  and  between  the  dichotomies  of  the  midrib.  Both  tetrasporangia  and  oogonia 
have  been  observed  on  the  Beaufort  specimens. 

Genus  5.  Dictyota  Lamouroux. 

Dktyota,  Lamouroux,  18090,  p.  331. 
Dictyota,  Lamouroux,  1809,  p.  38. 

Frond  erect,  flat,  ribbonlike,  sometimes  rising  from  a  rhizomelike,  rounded  portion, 
usually  regularly  dichotomous,  growing  by  a  single  initial  cell  at  the  apex  of  each  branch, 
surface  uniform,  zonations  lacking;  no  midrib  present;  cortex  composed  of  a  single  layer 
of  small  cells;  inner  stratum  composed  of  a  single  layer  of  rather  large  cells;  spores  pro- 
duced four  in  a  sporangium;  sporangia  occurring  singly  or  in  small  groups  scattered 
over  both  surfaces  of  the  frond;  oogonia  and  antheridia  produced  on  different  plants, 


MARINE  ALG^E  OF  BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  461 

in  conspicuous  roundish  or  ellipsoidal  son,  scattered  over  both  surfaces ;  oogonial  son 
black,  antheridial  sori  whitish. 

About  37  species  in  warm  and  temperate  seas,  one  extending  to  Scandinavia. 

Dictyota  dichotoma  (Hudson)  Lamouroux.     PI.  XCIV,  figs,  i,  2  c  and  d,  and  3. 

Uha  dichotoma,  Hudson,  1762,  p.  476. 
Dictyota  dichotoma,  Lamouroux,  1809,  p.  42. 
Dictyota  dichotoma,  Harvey,  1852,  p.  109. 
Dictyota  dichotoma,  De  Toni,  1895,  p.  263. 
P.  B-A.  Nos.  282,  1641,2175.  Fasc.  E.  No.  CXX. 

Frond  erect,  flat,  ribbonlike,  sometimes  narrowed  at  the  base  to  a  very  short  stipelike  portion, 
attached  by  a  small,  padlike  thickening;  regularly  dichotomous,  sometimes  with  irregular  branches 
given  off  from  the  apices  and  from  the  margins;  margins  smooth,  entire;  apices  usually  rounded,  obtuse, 
sometimes  rather  acute;  tetrasporangia,  andoogonial  and  antheridial  sori  scattered  all  over  both  surfaces 
except  base,  tips,  and  margins;  tetraspores  produced  continuously,  not  in  regular  crops;  oogonia  and 
antheridia  produced  in  crops  at  regular  intervals;  sexual  and  asexual  plants  showing  a  regular  alternation 
of  generations. 

Reported  from  warm  and  temperate  waters  generally,  extending  in  Europe  as  far  north  as  Norway 
and  Helgoland. 

Very  abundant  on  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford  jetties,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  and  in  harbor  from  low 
water  to  i  m.  below  low  water,  and  occasionally  abundant  on  Bogue  Beach,  June  to  October;  fairly 
abundant  in  Newport  River  near  "Green  Rock";  abundant  in  North  River  off  Lennoxville  and  Mar- 
shallburg;  one  small  mass  floating  in  Core  Sound  off  Davis  Island;  two  plants  2  cm.  long  on  coral  reef 
off  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  May,  1907,  and  fairly  abundant,  August,  1914  and  1915.  Abundant  in  sound  near 
Moores  Inlet,  Wrightsville  Beach,  N.  C.,  July  to  September,  1909. 

This  is  the  northern  known  limit  in  North  America  of  the  species  and  of  the  genus. 

The  species  varies  considerably  in  size,  width,  amount  of  branching,  and  acuteness  of  apices,  vary- 
ing from  plants  i  to  3  mm.  wide  and  6.5  cm.  long  to  plants  4  to  16  mm.  wide  and  29  cm.  long.  The 
average  of  six  well-developed  plants  from  Beaufort  was  4  to  12  mm.  wide,  18  cm.  long.  The.branching 
may  be  frequent,  forming  a  short,  dense  habit,  or  may  be  infrequent,  forming  a  long,  open  habit.  The 
apices,  while  usually  obtuse,  may  be  acute.  The  Beaufort  plants,  while  varying  in  these  respects, 
show  less  variation  than  English  specimens. 

All  the  specimens  of  this  species  dredged  from  the  coral  reef,  August,  1914,  were  very  narrow  and 
finely  divided,  with  numerous  almost  linear  proliferations  (Plate  XCIV,  fig.  2  c  and  d). 

Plants  from  unfavorable  situations  are  narrow,  often  spirally  twisted,  and  usually  small.  The 
apices  of  these  plants  are  often  acute.  Some  apices  of  larger  plants  may  be  acute  at  times,  since,  when 
conditions  are  changed  to  less  favorable  ones  or  sometimes  after  fruiting,  there  are  formed  narrow  pro- 
jections from  the  apices.  These  may  widen  out  later  or  may  grow  out  as  proliferations  from  the  apices, 
later  widening  out  and  branching  dichotomously.  Plants  collected  at  the  beginning  of  this  process, 
if  examined  by  themselves,  would  often  be  determined  as  D.  bartayresiana  Lamour.  Under  different 
conditions  of  growth  plants  may  resemble  D.  bartayresiana  Lamour.,  D.  divaricaia  Lamour.,  D.  dichotoma 
f.  latifolia  (Kuetz.)  Vinassa,  f.  attenuata  (Kuetz.)  Vinassa,  or  f.  implexa  (Lamour.)  Vinassa.  These 
three  last-named  forms  are  at  Beaufort  only  growth  forms  occurring  under  different  conditions  in  the 
environment.  D.  bartayresiana  can  itself  not  be  sharply  distinguished  from  D.  dichotoma,  since 
specimens  of  these  species  may  overlap.  Many  specimens  of  D.  dichotoma  from  England  are  narrower 
and  more  acute  at  the  apices  than  shown  in  photographs  of  the  type  of  D.  bartayresiana. 

D.  dichotoma,  wherever  carefully  observed,  has  been  found  to  produce  its  sexual  cells  in  regular 
periodic  crops.  In  the  three  European  stations  where  this  process  has  been  studied — Bangor,  Wales,  and 
Plymouth,  England  (Williams,  1905),  and  Naples,  Italy  (Lewis,  1910) — the  plants  produce  two 
crops  a  month  at  regular  intervals  related  to  the  tidal  seasons,  the  relations  of  the  crops  to  the  tides 
varying  in  the  different  localities.  At  Beaufort  (Hoyt,  1907),  only  one  crop  a  month  is  produced,  this 
being  initiated  from  three  days  before  up  to  the  day  of  the  greatest  springtide  at  the  time  of  the  full 
moon,  as  shown  by  the  tide  tables,  and  being  liberated  from  three  to  six  days  after  the  day  of  the  greatest 
springtide.  The  relation  between  the  greatest  springtide  and  the  times  of  initiation  and  liberation  of  the 


462  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

crop  varies  within  the  given  limits  in  different  summers  but  is  fairly  constant  in  any  one  summer.  At 
Beaufort  and  Naples,  and  probably  elsewhere,  the  sexual  cells  are  liberated  at  or  a  little  before  dawn. 

In  spite  of  this  great  difference  in  the  production  of  their  crops,  the  close  morphological  similarity 
of  the  Beaufort  plants  to  those  of  Europe  seems  to  preclude  the  placing  of  these  in  a  separate  species. 
The  facts  mentioned  above,  however,  show  that  the  characters  which  have  been  used  to  separate  certain 
species—the  size  and  width  of  plants  and  the  acuteness  of  the  apices— are  not  by  themselves  safe 
characters  for  specific  distinctions. 

The  studies  of  Williams  (1904,  19043)  and  the  cultures  of  Hoyt  (1910)  have  shown  that  in  this 
species  the  sexual  and  asexual  generations  alternate  with  each  other  in  regular  succession. 

Division  IV.  RHODOPHYCE^E  Ruprecht. 

Rodospenneze,  Harvey,  1852,  p.  i. 
Florideae,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  106. 
Florideae,  De  Toni,  1897,  p.  i. 

RED  ALG^. 

Algae  colored  rose,  crimson,  or  purple,  less  often  violet,  olivaceous,  green,  or  blackish, 
containing  in  their  cells  endochrome  composed  of  chlorophyll,  and  a  characteristic  red 
pigment  (phycoerythrin)  mixed  with  other  pigments;  endochrome  contained  in  definite 
chromatophores ;  thallus  varying  greatly  in  size  and  form,  composed  of  segmented, 
separate,  or  more  or  less  coalescent  filaments;  cells  containing  one  or  more  nuclei.  Mul- 
tiplication asexual  or  sexual.  Asexual  propagation  usuallyby  spores,  sometimes  by  brood 
cells  or  brood  buds;  spores  usually  produced  four  (tetraspores),  sometimes  one  (mono- 
spore),  two,  or  many  in  a  sporangium,  at  first  naked,  later  inclosed  by  a  membrane, 
usually  nonmotile,  in  some  cases  possessed  for  a  time  of  slight  amoeboid  movement,  but 
apparently  always  passively  distributed;  sporangia  external  or  immersed,  distributed  over 
the  thallus  or  borne  on  more  or  less  specialized  portions.  Sexual  reproduction  by  the 
fusion  of  dissimilar  male  and  female  gametes  borne  on  the  same  or  different  individuals. 
Male  gametes  (spermatia)  naked,  nonmotile,  produced  one  or  many  in  a  more  or  less 
specialized  antheridium,  discharged  into  the  water  and  passively  transported;  antheridia 
usually  external,  sometimes  immersed,  borne  on  specialized  or  unspecialized  portions  of 
the  thallus,  in  the  Bangiales  formed  by  the  transformation  and  division  of  ordinary 
vegetative  cells.  Female  gametes  occurring  singly  within  special  organs,  never  escaping 
free  into  the  water.  These  organs,  usually  immersed,  sometimes  external,  are,  in  the 
Bangiales,  formed  by  the  direct  transformation  of  swollen  vegetative  cells;  in  the  Florideae 
they  are  borne  at  the  ends  of  short,  usually  three  or  four  celled  filaments 
(carpogenic  branches)  each  organ  (carpogonium)  consisting  of  a  swollen  basal 
portion  and  a  hairlike,  apical  prolongation,  the  trichogyne.  Associated  with  these 
organs  in  reproduction  there  are,  in  most  orders  of  the  Florideae,  special  cells, 
auxiliary  cells,  which  are  either  joined  with  the  carpogonium  in  a  common  structure, 
the  procarp,  or  occur  separately  in  the  thallus  more  or  less  near  the  carpogonia.  In 
the  fusion  of  male  and  female  gametes  a  spermatium  is  floated  to  the  trichogyne  and 
fuses  with  this,  the  male  nucleus  passing  down  and  fusing  with  the  female  nucleus  in 
the  swollen  basal  portion  of  the  carpogonium.  This  fertilized  egg  cell  then  either 
directly  produces  tufts  of  spore-bearing  filaments  (gonimoblasts),  or,  in  most  orders, 
gives  off  longer  or  shorter  filaments  bearing  the  fertilized  egg  nucleus  or  some  of  its 
descendants,  these  filaments  fusing  with  the  auxiliary  cells,  and  the  auxiliary  cells  then 
giving  rise  to  spore-bearing  filaments.  The  fruits  thus  produced  (sporocarps)  are  often 
inclosed  by  a  more  or  less  specialized  sterile  jacket,  the  whole  structure  constituting  the 


MARINE   AIGM   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  463 

cystocarp.  The  nonmotile  spores  (carpospores)  borne  in  these  fruits  are  discharged 
into  the  water  and  germinate  immediately.  Carpogonia  and  sporocarps  are  borne 
externally  or  immersed  on  specialized  or  unspecialized  portions  of  the  thallus.  Sexual 
and  asexual  cells  are  nearly  always  produced  on  different  individuals,  the  sexual  and 
asexual  plants,  at  least  in  some  cases,  alternating  with  each  other  in  the  life  cycle; 
antheridia  and  carpogonia  are  borne  on  the  same  or  different  individuals.  Almost 
exclusively  marine,  a  few  in  fresh  water,  some  endophytic. 

About  3,000  species  throughout  the  world  but  most  abundant  in  warm  seas. 

KEY  TO  CLASSES. 

Thallus  filamentous  or  foliaceous,  usually  unbranched;  asexual  and  sexual  organs  formed 
from  ordinary  vegetative  cells i.  BANGIOIDE^E  (p.  463). 

Thallus  variously  formed,  usually  branched;  asexual  spores  (usually  four)  produced  in  special 
sporangia;  sexual  gametes  borne  in  antheridia  and  carpogonia 2.  FLORIDE.5J  (p.  467). 

Class  1.  Bangioideae  De  Toni. 

This  class  contains  only  one  order. 

Order  Bangiales.     Schmitz  and  Hauptfleisch. 

Thallus  filiform,  disk  shaped  or  foliaceous;  asexual  propagation  by  spores  produced 
from  ordinary  vegetative  cells  or  by  akinetes;  sexual  reproduction  by  apparently  non- 
motile  spermatia  and  eggs  produced  from  ordinary  vegetative  cells. 

Family  BANGIACE^E  (Zanardini)  Berthold. 

Thallus  small  or  of  medium  size,  attached  to  rocks,  etc.,  colored  various  shades  of 
red  or  purple,  sometimes  blue  or  greenish,  sheets  of  one  or  two  layers  of  cells,  or  of 
disks,  or  of  filaments  composed  of  one  or  more  cell  rows;  cells  having  a  single  nucleus 
and  a  single  star-shaped  chroma tophore;  asexual  propagation  by  spores  produced  one 
or  more  from  ordinary  vegetative  cells,  occasionally  by  akinetes;  sexual  reproduction 
by  minute,  apparently  nonmotile  spermatia,  which  are  discharged  into  the  water,  and 
large  eggs  which  are  retained  within  the  enveloping  organ;  numerous  spermatia  formed 
by  division  of  ordinary  vegetative  cells  which  function  as  antheridia;  eggs  usually  pro- 
duced singly,  formed  from  ordinary  vegetative  cells,  which  may  in  some  cases  be  regarded 
as  simple  carpogonia,  since  they  frequently  form  hairlike  protuberances  somewhat 
similar  to  the  trichogynes  of  Floridese,  the  spermatia  then  fuse  with  these  protuberances; 
the  fertilized  egg  divides  into  a  few  (usually  eight)  spores,  or,  rarely,  may  be  transformed 
directly  into  a  single  spore;  both  the  sexually  produced  and  the  asexual  spores  are 
naked  when  first  discharged  into  the  water,  and  frequently  are  possessed  of  slight 
amoeboid  movement,  but  are  soon  surrounded  by  walls  and  apparently  are  always 
passively  transported.  Asexual  and  sexual  organs  are,  in  different  species,  produced  on 
the  same  or  on  different  individuals,  as  is  also  the  case  with  male  and  female  organs. 

About  45  species,  nearly  all  marine,  a  few  in  fresh  water,  throughout  the  world, 
especially  in  temperate  seas. 
159321°— 20 1 


464  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

KEY  TO  GENERA. 

a.  Asexual  spore  formed  from  the  contents  of  a  vegetative  cell  without  division,  sexual 

reproduction  apparently  lacking 3-  Goniotrichum  (p.  465). 

oo.  Asexual  spore  formed  from  the  smaller  of  two  cells  arising  from  the  unequal  division  of  a 

vegetative  cell  by  an  oblique  wall,  sexual  reproduction  usually  present b. 

b.  Thallus  consisting  of  erect  filaments 4-  Erythrotrichia  (p.  466). 

bb.  Thallus  consisting  of  branched  filaments  creeping  on  or  in  the  surface  of  other  algae, 

and  more  or  less  fusing  to  form  a  single-layered  disk 5.  Erythrocladia  (p.  466). 

ooo.  Asexual  spores  formed  by  approximately  equal  division  of  a  vegetative  cell  (some- 
times without  division),  sexual  reproduction  present c. 

c.  Thallus  filiform x.  Bangia  (p.  464). 

cc.  Thallus  membranaceous,  flat 2.  Porphyra  (p.  464). 

Genus  i.  Bangia  Lyngbye. 

Bangia,  Lyngbye,  1819,  p.  82. 

Thallus  erect,  filiform,  unbranched,  attached  by  an  expanded  base,  more  or  less 
thickened  above,  terete,  commonly  irregularly  constricted,  sometimes  tubular  and  hollow 
above.  Asexual  spores,  formed  from  the  entire  contents  of  vegetative  cells  or  from 
cells  formed  by  one  (or  sometimes  two)  divisions  of  vegetative  cells,  are  discharged  into 
the  water  and  germinate  immediately.  Numerous  spermatia  formed  by  repeated 
division  of  vegetative  cells  which  function  as  antheridia.  Eggs  arising  singly  from  the 
entire  contents  of  enlarged  vegetative  cells.  Fertilized  eggs  divide  into  a  few  (usually 
eight)  spores,  which  are  discharged  into  the  water  and  apparently  germinate  imme- 
diately. Asexual  and  sexual  organs  borne  on  the  same  or  on  different  individuals,  male 
and  female  organs  produced  on  the  same  or  different  individuals. 

About  10  species  described,  but  not  sharply  separated,  mostly  marine,  occasionally 
in  fresh  water. 

Bangia  fusco-purpurea  (Dillwyn)  Lyngbye. 

Conferva  fusco-purpurea,  Dillwyn,  1809,  pi.  92.  % 

Bangia  fusco-purpurea,  Lyngbya,  1819,  P.  83,  pi.  24  C. 

Bangia  fusco-purpurea,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  112. 

Bangia  atro-purpurea,  var.  fusco-purpurea,  DeToni,  1897,  p.  112. 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  87.  2084. 

Thallus  filamentous,  erect,  0.5  to  15  cm.  long,  attached  to  rocks,  etc.,  variable  in  color  and  size, 
pink  to  purple,  younger  filaments  composed  of  one  or  two  rows  of  cells,  older  filaments  forming  a  hollow 
tube. 

Cold  and  temperate  North  Atlantic  and  Pacific;  Mediterranean. 

Abundant  between  tide  lines  on  rocks  of  Shackleford  jetty,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  May,  1007,  and  fairly 
abundant  on  Shackleford  and  Fort  Macon  jetties,  April,  1908;  probably  occurs  from  December  to  May. 

Specimens  vary  greatly  in  appearance  on  account  of  their  differences  in  size  and  color;  the  filaments 
vary  from  a  fineness  that  is  indistinguishable  to  the  naked  eye  to  the  thickness  of  a  coarse  hair;  the 
cells  vary  greatly  in  diameter. 

This  is  the  southern  limit  reported  for  the  species,  but  specimens  are  known  from  points  farther 
south,  and  the  species  will  probably  be  found  to  extend  along  our  entire  coast  during  the  winter. 

Genus  2.  Porphyra  Agardh. 

Porphyra,  Agardh,  1824,  p.  XXXII. 
Porphyra,  De  Toni,  1897,  p.  13. 
Wildemania,  De  Toni,  1897,  P-  20. 

Thallus  erect,  foliaceous,  flat  and  thin,  margin  entire,  lobate  or  laciniate,  often 
undulate,  attached  by  a  basal  disk,  base  substipitate;  at  first  consisting  of  a  simple 


MARINE   ALGM   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  465 

filament,  soon  developing  into  a  flat  membrane  consisting  of  one  or  two  cell  layers; 
propagation  and  reproduction  as  in  Bangia;  spore  fruit  consisting  of  eight  or  more  cells. 

About  20  species,  all  marine,  many  of  them  not  sharply  separated. 
Porphyra  leucosticta  Thuret. 

Porphyra  leucosticta,  Thuret,  in  Le  Jolis,  1863,  p.  100. 
Porphyra  atropurpurea,  De  Toni,  1897,  P.  17. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  376. 

Frond  shortly  stipitate,  attached  by  a  basal  disk,  consisting  of  a  single  layer  of  cells  (except  during 
reproduction),  variable  in  color  from  pink  or  red  to  purple  and  in  form  from  indefinite  sheets  to  narrow 
bands,  simple  or  variously  divided,  2  to  40  cm.  long,  0.5  to  14  cm.  wide;  monoecious,  antheridia  forming 
small,  elongated,  colorless  patches  among  the  darker  female  organs. 

Temperate  North  Atlantic  and  Pacific;  Mediterranean. 

Very  abundant  between  tide  lines  throughout  harbor  and  on  jetties,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  January  to 
May. 

At  Beaufort  the  plants  are  kidney  shaped  to  linear,  lanceolate  and  laciniate,  3  to  10  cm.  long,  of  a 
pinkish  or  brownish  purple  color. 

Another  species,  P.  laciniata  (Lightf.)  Ag.  has  not  been  observed  in  this  region,  but 
may  be  found  here  at  times,  although  it  is,  in  general,  a  more  northern  form  than 
P.  leucosticta.  These  species  can  not  be  separated  by  form  or  color,  but  are  distinguished 
as  follows:  P.  leucosticta,  monoecious,  antheridia  occurring  in  small,  elongated,  colorless 
patches;  P.  laciniata,  usually  dioecious,  antheridia  forming  a  colorless  marginal  zone. 

Genus  3.  Goniotrichum  Kuetzing. 

Goniotrichum,  Kuetzing,  1843,  p.  244  (in  part). 

Thallus  erect,  filamentous,  consisting  of  a  single  row  of  cells,  exhibiting  "false 
branching,"  or,  occasionally,  laterally  branched;  cells  rose  colored,  containing  single, 
star-shaped  chromatophores  and  single  nuclei;  cell  walls  soon  becoming  gelatinous; 
asexual  propagation  by  transformation  of  vegetative  cells  into  monosporangia,  their 
contents  soon  escaping  as  naked  monospores;  sexual  reproduction  unknown. 

Two  species  recognized. 

The  members  of  this  genus  are  peculiar  in  combining  characters  of  the  blue-green 
and  the  red  algae.  In  their  possession  of  "false  branching"  and  gelatinous  sheaths 
formed  by  the  swelling  of  the  cell  walls  inclosing  the  filaments,  they  resemble  the  Myxo- 
phyceae,  while  the  structure  of  their  cells,  and  especially  their  method  of  propagation, 
place  them  among  the  Bangiaceae  in  the  Rhodophyceae. 

Goniotrichum  alsidii  (Zanardini)  Howe.     Fig.  23. 

Bangia  alsidii,  Zanardini,  1839,  p.  136. 
Goniotrichum  elegant,  Zanardini,  1847,  p.  254  (69). 
Goniotrichum  elegans,  Forti,  in  De  Toni,  1907,  p.  687. 
Goniotrichum  elegans,  Tilden,  1910,  p.  295. 
Goniolrichum  alsidii,  Howe,  19143,  p.  75. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  781. 

Filaments  red,  i  to  5  mm.  long,  inclosed  in  gelatinous  sheaths;  cells  cylindrical  or  elliptical,  7  to 
10  mic.  wide,  n  to  20  mic.  long;  sheaths  2  to  6  mic.  wide  on  each  side  of  filament,  often  with  crenate 
edges. 

Warm  and  temperate  North  Atlantic. 

Occasional  on  other  algae  and  on  eel  grass  (Zoster a  marina),  usually  occurring  in  very  small  quan- 
tities, abundant  on  one  old  specimen  of  Padina  vickersia,  Fort  Macon  jetty,  December,  1908,  and  occa- 
sional on  various  algae  dredged  from  coral  reef  offshore,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1914  and  1915. 


466  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

Genus  4.  Erythrotrichia  Areschoug. 
Erythrotrichia,  Areschoug,  1850,  p.  209. 

Thallus  erect,  filiform,  attached  below  by  a  dilated  basal  cell  or  a  few-celled  disk, 
above  filamentous  or  more  or  less  thickened  and  terete  or  dilated  and  foliaceous;  cells  at 
first  arranged  in  a  single  row,  later  sometimes  divided  longitudinally,  or  occasionally 
even  forming  a  one-layered  disk;  asexual  propagation  by  naked  monospores  which  are 
passively  distributed;  monosporangium  formed  from  the  upper,  smaller,  denser  of  two 
cells  arising  from  the  unequal  division  of  a  vegetative  cell  by  an  oblique  wall;  sexual 
reproduction  by  apparently  nonmotile  spermatia  and  eggs;  antheridia  formed  from 
portions  of  vegetative  cells  in  a  way  analogous  to  the  monosporangia,  the  contents  being 
divided  into  numerous  minute  spermatia;  eggs  arising  singly  from  the  entire  contents 
of  vegetative  cells;  fertilized  egg  forming  a  one  or  few  celled  fruit. 

About  five  species,  all  marine. 
Erythrotrichia  carnea  (Dillwyn)  J.  Agardh.     Fig.  24. 

Conferva  carnea,  Dillwyn,  1809,  pi.  84. 
Conferva  ceramicola,  Lyngbye,  1819.  p.  144.  Pi-  48  D. 
Erythrotrichia  ceramicola,  Areschoug,  1850,  p.  aio. 
Erythrotrichia  carnea,  J.  Agardh,  1881,  p.  15,  pi.  19. 
Erythrotrichia  ceramicola,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  113. 
Erythrotrichia  ceramicola,  De  Toni,  1897,  p.  24. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  1642  (Erythrotrichia  ceramicola). 

Thallus  epiphytic,  consisting  of  erect,  flaccid  filaments  i  to  30  mm.  long,  composed  of  single, 
unbranched  rows  of  cells,  attached  by  the  expanded,  colorless  basal  cell  of  each  filament;  cells  12  to  20 
mic.  long,  12  to  18  mic.  wide,  rose  or  flesh  color;  monospores  spherical,  15  to  18  mic.  in  diameter. 

Warm  and  temperate  North  Atlantic;  Alaska;  Adriatic. 

Common  in  small  quantities  on  Dictyota  dichotoma  and  Padina  vickersice,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  June  to 
December,  and  on  Dictyota  dichotoma  at  Marshallburg,  N.  C.  On  old  specimens  of  these  species  it 
becomes  very  abundant,  either  mixed  with  other  filamentous  epiphytic  algae  or  covering  the  entire  host 
plant  with  a  pure  growth. 

Genus  5.  Erythrocladia  Rosenvinge. 

Erythrodadia,  Rosenvinge,  1909,  p.  71. 

Thallus  horizontally  expanded,  growing  on  or  in  other  algae,  composed  of  branched 
filaments  irregularly  or  more  or  less  regularly  radiating  from  a  common  center,  separate 
from  each  other  in  the  beginning,  later  fusing  more  or  less  to  form  a  thin  disk  consisting 
of  a  single  layer,  filaments  growing  at  the  apices;  asexual  propagation  by  naked  mono- 
spores  which  are  passively  distributed;  monosporangium  formed  from  the  denser  of  two 
cells  arising  from  the  unequal  division  of  a  vegetative  cell  by  an  oblique  wall;  sexual 
reproduction  by  apparently  nonmotile  spermatia  and  eggs;  spermatia  (at  least  in  some 
cases)  raised  slightly  above  the  surface;  carpogonium  furnished  with  a  short  beak  or 
trichogyne  projecting  slightly  beyond  the  surface;  fertilized  egg  forming  a  small  fruit 
(sporocarp)  bearing  one  or  more  carpospores. 

Four  species,  known  only  from  Denmark,  North  Carolina,  and,  with  some  doubt, 
from  St.  Thomas,  West  Indies. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

Mature  thallus  consisting  of  filaments  forming  an  irregular  suborbicular  structure,  the  fila- 
ments somewhat  compact  and  coalescent  at  the  center  and  radiating  from  this  toward 
the  edges,  cells  8  to  25  mic.  long  and  3  to  12  mic.  broad i.  E.  recondita  (p.  467). 

Mature  thallus  consisting  of  straggling  or  irregularly  radiating  filaments,  not  forming  a  com- 
pact structure  at  the  center,  cells  9  to  40  mic.  long  and  6.5  to  15  mic.  broad.  .2.  E.  vagabunda  (p.  467) 


.  MARINE  ALG^E  OF  BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  467 

i.  Erythrocladia  recondite  Howe  and  Hoyt.     PI.  CXVI,  fig.  i;  PI.  CXVII,  figs.  1-5. 

Erythrocladia  recondite,  Howe  and  Hoyt,  1916,  p.  112,  pi.  12,  figs.  1-5;  pi.  13,  fig.  i. 

Thallus  endophytic  or  pseudo-epiphytic,  creeping  in  the  superficial  cell  walls  of  other  algae,  con- 
sisting at  first  of  free ,  irregularly  radiating,  and  irregularly  branching  filaments,  soon  forming  a  more  or  less 
compact  central  region  by  the  coalescence  of  the  central  filaments,  the  entire  structure  reaching  a  diameter 
of  0.2  to  1.5  mm.  and  usually  remaining  single-layered ;  branching  lateral  or  somewhat  dichotomous,  the 
lateral  branches,  especially  in  the  younger  parts,  often  spreading;  cells  varied  and  irregular  in  form,  in 
surface  view  mostly  oblong,  quadrate,  ovate,  or  fiddle  shaped,  often  curved,  forked,  or  irregularly  one 
or  two  lobed,  8  to  25  mic.  long,  3  to  12  mic.  broad ;  male  and  female  organs  borne  on  the  same  individual ; 
spermatia  ovoid,  2  to  4  mic.  in  diameter,  more  or  less  exserted  by  slender  stalks  about  i  mic.  broad; 
carpogonium  furnished  with  a  beak  or  trichogyne  exserted  about  4  to  8  mic. ;  sporocarp  forming  a  single 
carpospore  (or,  rarely,  two),  these  ovoid,  oblong,  or  irregular,  mostly  8  to  19  mic.  in  maximum  diameter; 
nonsexual  spores  unknown. 

Endemic. 

Fairly  abundant  in  the  superficial  cell  walls  of  Dictyota  dichotoma  growing  in  the  harbor,  Beaufort, 
N.  C.,  especially  on  Fort  Macon  jetties,  summer  and  autumn;  on  Dictyota  and  other  algae  and  in  the 
stolons  of  hydroids  growing  on  these,  dredged  from  the  coral  reef  offshore,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1914. 

This  alga  is  entirely  invisible  to  the  naked  eye  and  will  not  be  seen  even  under  the  microscope 
unless  a  careful  search  is  made.  When  seen,  it  appears  as  a  more  or  less  definite  mass  of  clear,  minute 
filaments  closely  adherent  to  the  surface  of  the  host.  Its  color  is  scarcely  distinguishable,  it  apparently 
being  so  neutral  in  this  respect  as  to  show  the  color  of  the  host.  It  can  be  made  clearly  evident  by 
staining  with  iodine  dissolved  in  potassium  iodide.  It  will  not  be  confused  with  any  other  species 
found  in  the  harbor.  It  is  unknown  outside  of  this  region. 

3.  Erythrocladia  vagabonds  Howe  and  Hoyt.     PI.  CXVI,  fig.  2;  PL  CXVII,  figs.  6-n. 

Erythrocladia  Tiagabunda,  Howe  and  Hoyt,  1916,  p.  115,  pi.  12,  figs.  6-n,  pi.  13,  fig.  2. 

Thallus  endophytic  or  pseudo-epiphytic,  creeping  in  the  superficial  cell  walls  of  other  algae,  con- 
sisting chiefly  of  irregularly  branching,  uniaxially  elongate,  or  irregularly  radiating  filaments,  finally 
spreading  over  areas  0.75  to  2.25  mm.  long  or  broad,  often  anastomosing  or  appearing  to  anastomose,  and 
commonly  forming  here  and  there  small  irregular  compact  patches  2  to  6  cells  broad ;  branching  mostly 
lateral,  rarely  somewhat  dichotomous,  often  spreading  or  rectangular;  cells  for  the  most  part  irregularly 
oblong  in  surface  view,  often  curved  or  one  or  two  lobed,  9  to  40  mic.  long,  6.5  to  15  mic.  broad;  sporo- 
carps  forming  single  carpospores  (rarely  two?),  these  ovoid,  oblong,  or  irregular,  mostly  12  to  25  mic. 
in  maximum  diameter;  nonsexual  spores  unknown. 

Endemic. 

Fairly  abundant  in  the  superficial  cell  walls  of  Dictyota  dichotoma  dredged  from  the  coral  reef  off- 
shore, Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1914. 

This  species  is  not  visible  to  the  naked  eye  and  will  not  be  noticed,  even  under  the  microscope, 
unless  a  careful  search  is  made .  Staining  with  iodine  dissolved  in  potassium  iodide  will  help  to 
make  it  evident.  It  has  not  been  found  in  the  harbor.  If  it  should  be  found  there,  it  will  not  be 
mistaken  for  any  other  alga  except  E.  recondita.  From  this  it  is  distinguished  by  its  more  straggling 
habit,  its  larger  cells,  and  its  more  rectangular  branches.  It  is  not  known  from  any  other  region. 

Plants  apparently  belonging  to  this  species  were  found  on  Sargassum  fillpendula  dredged  from  the 
coral  reef  at  the  same  time  as  the  Dictyota. 

Class  2.  Floridese  Lamouroux. 

Eur  Floridece,  De  Toni,  1897,  p.  33. 

Thallus  multicellular,  exceedingly  various  in  size,  habit,  and  structure;  asexual 
propagation  by  nonmotile  spores  produced  (usually  four — tetraspores,  sometimes  one, 
two,  or  many)  in  special  sporangia;  tetrosporangia  divided  zonately,  cruciately,  or 
triangularly;  sexual  reproduction  by  nonmotile  spermatia  and  eggs  borne  in  special 
antheridia  and  carpogonia,  respectively;  antheridia  variously  formed,  producing  numer- 
ous minute  spermatia;  carpogonia  bearing  single  eggs  which,  when  fertilized,  give  rise 


468  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

to  spore-bearing  filaments  directly  or  in  conjunction  with  auxiliary  cells;  auxiliary  cells 
present,  except  among  Nemalionales,  associated  with  the  carpogonium  or  occurring 
separately  in  the  thallus,  sometimes  not  developed  until  after  fertilization;  tufts  of  spore- 
bearing  filaments  (gonimoblasts) ,  formed  as  result  of  fertilization,  entire  or  divided  into 
several  parts  (gonimolobes) ;  each  filament  giving  ris£  to  a  single  nonmotile  spore 
(carpospore)  from  each  of  one  or  more  of  its  apical  cells;  gonimoblasts  naked  or 
inclosed  by  sterile  jackets,  forming  cystocarps  opening  by  apical  pores. 

KEY  TO   ORDERS. 

a.  Gonimoblasts  formed  directly  from  the  fertilized  eggs i.  NEMALIONALES  (p.  468). 

co.  Gonimoblasts  formed  with  the  interposition  of  auxiliary  cells b. 

b.  Auxiliary  cells  usually  united  with  carpogenic  branches  into  definite  procarps,  cystocarps 
usually  immersed  in  the  frond,   gonimoblasts  not  attached  to  a  basal    placenta 

2.   GIGARTINALES  (p.  476). 

66.  Mother  cells  of  auxiliary  cells  united  with  carpogenic  branches  into  definite  procarps, 
the  auxiliary  cells  usually  formed  only  after  fertilization,  cystocarps  not  immersed 

in  the  frond,  gonimoblasts  attached  to  a  basal  placenta 3.  RHODYMENIALES  (p.  482). 

666.  Auxiliary  cells  occurring  separately  in  the  thallus,  not  united  with  carpogenic 
branches  into  procarps,  cystocarps  usually  immersed  in  the  frond,  gonimoblasts 
usually  attached  to  a  basal  placenta 4.  CRYPTONEMIALES  (p.  515). 

Order  i.  Nemalionales  Schmitz. 

Nemalioninae,  De  Toni,  1897,  p.  34. 

Gonimoblast  formed  directly  from  the  fertilized  egg  itself,"  consisting  of  an  upright, 
small,  or  more  or  less  expanded,  branching  tuft,  whose  branches  in  some  cases  fuse  with 
neighboring  cells  of  the  thallus  or  with  specially  formed  auxiliary  cells. 

KEY  TO  FAMILIES. 

Gonimoblast  a  compressed  tuft  of  segmented  branched  filaments,  whose  terminal  cells  form 

carpospores,  external  or  immersed,  not  inclosed  by  a  sterile  jacket.  .  i .  HELMINTHOCLADIACE^E  (p.  468). 

Gonimoblast  a  widely  expanded  tuft  of  segmented  branched  filaments,  some  segments  fusing 
with  neighboring  cells;  the  apices  of  these  fertile  filamentous  branches  confluent  into  an 
hymenium  from  which  the  carpospores  arise f 2 .  GELIDIACE^E  (p.  474). 

Family  HELMINTHOCLADIACE/E  (Harvey)  Schmitz. 

Nemalionaceae  Howe. 

Thallus  filamentous,  terete,  or  compressed,  variously  branched,  usually  gelatinous, 
sometimes  incrusted  with  lime;  structure  conspicuously  filamentous,  central  axis  usually 
present;  asexual  propagation  by  monospores,  dispores,  tetraspores,  or  polyspores;  anther- 
idia  scattered  or  clustered  on  the  apices  of  short,  filamentous  branches,  often  developing 
from  ordinary  vegetative  cells,  each  producing  one  or  a  few  spermatia;  carpogonia  borne 
at  the  apices \of  short  specialized  or  unspecialized,  filamentous  branches;  the  fertilized 
egg  gives  rise  directly  to  a  tuft  of  segmented,  branched  filaments  (gonimoblast)  whose 
terminal  cells  (and  sometimes  subterminal  ones  also)  form  carpospores;  sporocarp 
external  or  immersed,  usually  naked,  sometimes  surrounded  by  a  few  sterile  filaments; 

«  Doubt  may  be  thrown  on  this  point  by  the  work  of  Svedelius  (1915).  showing  the  presence  of  auxiliary  cells  in  Scinaia. 
The  retention  of  this  genus  in  the  Nemalionales  would,  however,  break  down  the  distinction  between  the  Nemalionales  and  the 
Gigartinales,  necessitating  their  combination  into  a  single  order  characterized  (?)  by  the  presence  or  absence  of  auxiliary  cells. 
It  seems,  as  far  as  our  present  knowledge  goes,  therefore,  that  Scinaia  and  other  genera  having  these  structures  should  be  trans- 
ferred to  the  Gigartinales,  and  that  the  Nemalionales  should  be  retained  as  now  understood,  including  the  genera  lacking 
auxiliary  cells. 


MARINE   ALGM.  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  469 

sporangia  and  sexual  organs  on  the  same  or  different  individuals;  antheridia  and 
carpogonia  ori  the  same  or  different  individuals. 

About  no  species,  fresh  water  and  marine,  in  temperate  and  tropical  regions. 

Genus  Acrochastium  Naegeli. 
Acrochaetium,  Naegeli,  1861,  p.  402. 
Trentepohlia,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  108. 
Chantransia,  De  Toni,  1897,  p.  67. 

Thallus  filamentous,  segmented,  monosiphonous,  irregularly  branched,  increasing 
in  length  by  transverse  division  of  the  apical  cell,  branches  often  terminating  in  hairs; 
asexual  propagation  by  monospores,  occasionally  by  dispores,  tetraspores,  or  polyspores, 
sporangia  occurring  singly  or  in  tufts,  lateral  and  sessile  on  the  branches  or  terminal  on 
short  ramuli ;  sexual  reproduction  by  eggs  borne  in  carpogonia,  and  spermatia ;  antheridia 
borne  in  tufts  at  the  apices  of  short  branches ;  carpogonia  borne  singly  at  the  apices  of 
one  to  three  celled  branches;  sporocarp  naked,  bearing  a  tuft  of  filaments  whose  ter- 
minal cells  form  carpospores;  sporangia  and  sexual  organs  borne  on  the  same  or 
different  individuals ;  monoecious  or  dioecious ;  sexual  reproduction  apparently  lacking 
in  some  species. 

About  60  species,  marine  and  fresh  water. 

This  genus  has  had  a  varied  nomenclature.  Originally  described  as  Acrochaetium, 
it  has  been  called  Chantransia  by  many  authors.  For  a  time  the  group,  as  now  reco- 
nized,  was  separated  into  two  genera — the  species  with  sexual  fruit  being  placed  under 
Chantransia  and  those  with  sexual  fruit  unknown  being  referred  to  Acrochaetium.  It 
is  now  generally  agreed  that  this  distinction  is  not  valid,  but  there  is  still  disagreement 
as  to  the  proper  name  for  the  genus.  As  was  pointed  out  by  Howe  (i9i4a,  p.  83),  the 
name  Chantransia  has  been  used  for  several  other  forms  and  is,  moreover,  a  violation 
of  all  the  codes  of  nomenclature.  The  name  Acrochaetium  is  therefore  to  be  preferred, 
both  because  of  its  priority  and  because  it  is  less  likely  to  cause  confusion. 

Some  of  the  species  are  distinguished  with  ease,  but  others  are  separated  by  incon- 
spicuous, apparently  intergrading,  characters,  and  are  determined  with  great  difficulty. 
It  is  often  impossible  to  decide  with  certainty  to  what  species  a  single  given  plant 
should  be  referred. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

a.  Plants  growing  in  hydroids 6.  A.  infestans  (p.  473). 

aa.  Plants  growing  on  or  in  other  algae b. 

b.  Upright  filaments  arising  from  an  external  basal  disk 7.  A .  virgatulum  (p.  473). 

bb.  Upright  filaments  arising  in  part  from  an  external  or  internal  basal  filament c. 

c.  Basal  filament  entirely  internal,  original  basal  cell  conspicuous,  sporangia,  antheridia 

and  carpogonia  borne  on  different  plants 5.  A .  corymbiferum  (p.  473). 

cc.  Basal  filament  mostly  external,  original-  basal  cell  inconspicuous,  sporangia,  antheridia 

and  carpogonia  borne  on  the  same  plants 4.  A .  affine  (p.  471). 

bbb.  Upright  filaments  arising  from  a  single  basal  cell  or  from  a  few  secondary  basal  cells d. 

d.  Plants  not  visible  to  naked  eye . : i.  A .  parvulum  (p.  470). 

dd.  Plants  visible  to  naked  eye  as  a  fine  velvety  fringe  or  mat e. 

e.  Basal  cell  pear  shaped,  penetrating  the  host  to  a  depth  of  12  to  20  mic.  . .  .4.  A.  affine  (p.  471). 
ee.  Basal  cell  spherical  or  nearly  so,  12  to  25  mic.  in  diameter,  not  conspicuously 
penetrating  the  host,  usually  bearing  several  upright  filaments,  branches  often 

elongated  and  tapering  toward  apices 3.  A .  hoytii  (p.  470). 

eee.  Basal  cell  spherical,  5  to  8  mic.  in  diameter,  superficial,  usually  bearing  a  single 
upright  filament,  branches  not  greatly  elongated,  not  tapering  toward  apices 

2 .  A .  dufourii  (p.  470). 


470  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

1.  Acrochaetium  parvulum  (Kylin)  comb.  nov.     Fig.  25. 

Chantransia  parvula.  Kylin.  1906.  p.  124.  f.  9. 

P.  B.-A.  No.  1999.    (Chantransia  hattandica  var.  parvula  (Kylin)  Rosenvinge.) 

Plants  70  to  185  mic.  tall,  usually  100  to  150  mic. ;  basal  cell  7  to  15  mic.  in  diameter,  usually  7  to 
10  mic.,  bearing  i  to  6  erect  filaments;  cells  4  to  10  mic.  in  diameter,  usually  6  to  7  mic.,  i  to  3.5  diame- 
ters long,  usually  1.5  to  2  diameters;  branching  frequent,  secund  or  opposite;  branches  short,  tapering, 
nearly  every  cell  bearing  a  short  apical  hair  which  is  frequently  pushed  to  one  side  and  may  be  shed; 
sporangia  6  to  9  by  8  to  14  mic. ,  usually  6  to  8  by  12  to  13  mic. ,  usually  sessile,  sometimes  on  a  one-celled 
pedicel,  frequently  opposite;  sexual  organs  borne  on  the  same  individuals  as  the  sporangia  or  lacking. 

Scandinavia. 

Abundant  on  Polysiphonia  harveyi,  sea  buoy,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  July  27,  1909. 

This  species  may  be  easily  distinguished  from  the  others  occurring  at  Beaufort  by  its  habit  and  its 
small  size.  Although  all  the  specimens  observed  were  sterile,  the  characters  of  the  plants  agree  so  closely 
with  the  published  descriptions  and  figure  of  Chantransia  parvula  Kylin  that  it  seems  better  to  refer  it 
to  this  species  than  to  describe  it  as  a  new  one.  In  the  Beaufort  specimens  there  is  usually  only  one 
erect  filament  arising  from  the  basal  cell,  although  occasionally  as  many  as  four  have  been  observed. 
It  has  not  previously  been  reported  from  any  region  outside  of  Scandinavia. 

2.  Acrochsetium  dufourii  Collins.     Fig.  26. 

Chantransia  du/ourii,  Collins,  1911.  p.  187. 
Acrochaetium  dufourii,  Collins,  P.  B.-A.  No.  1594. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  1594.  2087. 

Plants  200  to  600  mic.  tall,  usually  250  to  350  mic. ;  basal  cell  (original  spore)  5  to  8  mic.  in  diame- 
ter, bearing  i  to  3  erect  filaments;  cells  4  to  5  mic.  in  diameter,  2  to  5  diameters  long;  branching  rather 
sparse,  sometimes  opposite  or  alternate,  more  commonly  secund ;  branches  erect,  not  very  closely  set, 
not  tapering  at  their  apices;  sporangia  5  to  6  by  7  to  10  mic.,  sessile  or  on  a  one-celled  pedicel,  on  the 
main  filament,  or  on  a  branch,  usually  in  secund  series;  sexual  organs  unknown. 

North  Carolina;  Bermuda. 

Abundant  on  Sargassum  filipendula,  Fort  Macon  jetty,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  usually  in  company  with 
Erythrotrichia  cornea  and  often  with  Gomiotrichum  alsidii,  summer  and  autumn. 

This  species  most  nearly  resembles  A.  hoytii,  from  which  it  is  distinguished  by  its  smaller  size,  its 
smaller,  superficial  basal  cell,  its  less  frequent  branching  with  consequent  more  open  habit,  and  its 
usually  less  elongated  branches  not  tapering  toward  the  apices.  There  is  usually  only  one  upright 
filament  from  the  basal  cell,  but  sometimes  two  or  three  are  observed.  Two  or  three  plants  resembling 
A.  dufourii  in  other  respects  have  been  observed  on  Dictyota  dichotoma  arising  from  short,  horizontal, 
external  filaments  with  no  evident  basal  cell.  If  these  plants  should  be  referred  to  this  species  it  would 
show  a  behavior  here  similar  to  that  found  in  A.  affine,  where,  apparently,  the  basal  cell  may  form 
horizontal  filaments  and  may  itself  become  inconspicuous  or  disappear.  In  view  of  the  small  number 
of  plants  observed  in  this  condition,  however,  the  author  has  been  unwilling  to  change  the  limits  of  the 
species  to  include  these. 

This  species  is  not  known  outside  of  North  America,  although,  according  to  Collins  (1911),  it 
appears  to  be  the  plant  of  the  Mediterranean  distributed  by  Dufour  as  Callithamnion  lenormartdi  in 
ErbarioCrittogamicoItaliano,  No.  953,  but  not  C.  lenormandi  Suhr,  in  Kuetzing,  i84ga,  p.  640. 

3.  Acrochsetium  hoytii  Collins.     Figs.  27  and  28. 

Acrochaetium  hoytii,  Collins,  1908,  p.  134. 
Chantransia  hoytii,  Collins,  1911,  p.  186. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  1540. 

Plants  0.25  to  1.3  mm.  tall,  usually  0.5  to  0.65  mm. ;  basal  cell  (original  spore)  12  to  25  mic.  in  diam- 
eter, spherical  or  somewhat  elongate  vertically,  then  up  to  30  mic.  long,  superficial  or  slightly  embedded 
in  the  host,  bearing  i  to  4  erect  filaments,  very  rarely  forming  one  or  more  secondary  basal  cells;  cells 
of  main  filaments  5  to  7  mic.  in  diameter,  usually  2  to  4  diameters  long;  branching  rather  frequent 
below,  usually  rarer  above,  often  secund;  ultimate  branches  usually  elongated,  often  simple  or  nearly 
so,  usually  tapering  gradually  toward  the  apices;  sporangia  lateral  on  the  upper  part  of  the  filament  and 
branches,  usually  on  one-celled  pedicels,  sometimes  sessile,  usually  secund,  oblong,  about  5  to  6  by  n 
to  15  mic. ;  cystocarps  very  rare,  borne  on  short  pedicels  near  the  base  of  the  branches. 


MARINE   Al^GM  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  471 

Very  abundant  on  Dictyota  dichotoma  on  Fort  Macon  jetties,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  less  abundant  on 
Dictyota  in  harbor,  usually  unmixed  with  other  algae,  summer -and  autumn. 

Endemic. 

This  species  appears  to  be  related  to  A .  dufourii  on  the  one  side  and  to  A .  affine  on  the  other.  In 
fact,  these  three  species  seem  to  form  an  intergrading  group,  so  that  distinctions  are  frequently  very 
difficult.  From  A.  dufourii  it  is  distinguished  by  its  usually  larger  size,  larger,  sometimes  slightly 
embedded  basal  cell,  more  abundant  branching  with  consequent  denser  habit,  and  its  usually  more 
elongated  branches  tapering  toward  the  apices.  The  germinating  spore  seems  to  not  merely  remain 
distinct  throughout  the  life  of  the  plant,  but  to  increase  to  many  times  its  original  size,  and  may  send  up 
as  many  as  four  erect  filaments.  It  is  distinguished  from  A.  affine  by  its  smaller  size,  its  smaller  and 
shorter  cells,  its  more  nearly  spherical  and  more  superficial  basal  cell,  the  absence  of  horizontal  filaments, 
the  abundance  of  sporangia,  and  the  great  scarcity  of  cystocarps.  The  basal  cell  usually  remains 
unchanged  except  for  its  increase  in  size,  and  forms,  at  most,  a  few  secondary  basal  cells  which  do  not 
give  rise  to  upright  filaments.  The  general  habit  resembles  A.  corymbiferum  but  it  is  readily  distin- 
guished from  that  species  by  the  differences  in  the  basal  portions  of  the  plants  and  in  the  formation  of  the 
organs  of  reproduction.  Its  habit  is  sometimes  very  dense . 

Small  plants  of  A .  hoytii  are  especially  difficult  to  distinguish  from  A .  dufourii  since  they  are  often 
sparsely  branched  and  do  not  bear  elongated,  tapering  branches.  With'  such  plants  the  principal 
distinguishing  character  is  the  size  of  the  basal  cell,  but  even  with  this  it  is  not  always  easy  to  determine 
to  which  of  these  species  a  given  plant  should  be  referred. 

4.  Acrochaetium  affine  Howe  and  Hoyt.     PI.  CXIX. 

A cr ochtetium  affine,  Howe  and  Hoyt,  1916,  p.  118,  pi.  15. 

Plants  i  to  3.5  mm.  tall;  basal  cell  (original  spore)  subglobose  or  ellipsoid,  mostly  14  to  26  mic.  in 
diameter,  finally  becoming  subpyriform  and  20  to  33  mic.  high  through  the  development  of  a  subcylindric 
obtuse  or  truncate  foot  penetrating  the  host  for  about  10  to  24  mic.,  the  basal  cell  remaining  simple  or 
occasionally  developing  one  or  more  smaller  accessory  cells,  or  sometimes  sending  out  short,  creeping, 
often  more  or  less  immersed  filaments  2  to  5  cells  long,  these  very  rarely  forming  a  small  imperfect  basal 
disk,  the  secondary  basal  cells  often  sending  up  erect  filaments;  erect  primary  filaments  i  to  4  (usually 
2  to  3)  from  the  primary  basal  cell,  6  to  14  mic.  in  diameter,  often  subdichotomous  or  subtrichotomous at 
the  distal  end  of  the  first  cell,  erect  filaments  from  secondary  basal  cells  i  to  4  (when  present),  commonly 
more  slender,  4  to  8  mic.  in  diameter,  all  filaments  somewhat  rigid  below,  becoming  flexuous  above, 
rather  sparingly  and  irregularly  branched,  the  branching  subdichotomous  or  distinctly  lateral,  ultimate 
branches  3  to  5.5  mic.  in  diameter,  mostly  elongate-virgate,  terminal  hairs  often  present,  but  rather 
inconspicuous;  cells  of  filaments  cylindric,  firm-walled,  mostly  3  to  9  times  as  long  as  broad;  sporangia 
uncommon,  lateral  on  one-celled  pedicels,  lateral  and  sessile,  or  sometimes  terminal  on  main  branches, 
18  to  27  mic.  by  10  to  18  mic. ;  antheridia  usually  close  to  the  procarp,  lateral  or  somewhat  terminal, 
solitary  or  in  groups  of  2  to  3;  cystocarps  abundant,  mostly  3  to  8  spored,  carpospores  13  to  26  mic.  by 
8  to  18  mic. ;  antheridia,  cystocarps,  and  (sometimes  at  least)  sporangia  occurring  on  the  same  individual. 

Abundant  on  Dictyota  dichotoma  and  occasional  on  Spyridia  filamentosa  and  other  hosts  dredged 
from  the  coral  reef  offshore  from  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1914. 

Endemic. 

This  species  most  nearly  resembles  A.  hoytii,  which  is  borne  on  the  same  host  in  Beaufort  Harbor. 
From  this  it  differs  in  its  larger  size,  its  larger  and  longer  cells,  its  more  elongated  and  more  embedded 
basal  cell,  its  occasional  formation  of  horizontal  filaments,  the  infrequent  formation  of  sporangia,  and 
the  relatively  abundant  cystocarps  produced  on  the  same  plants.  Its  general  habit  resembles  A. 
coymbiferum,  from  which  it  is  distinguished  by  its  larger,  more  persistent,  partially  embedded  basal 
cell,  the  upright  filaments  often  arising  entirely  from  this,  by  the  less  abundant  cystocarps,  these,  the 
antheridia,  and  the  sporangia  being  borne  on  the  same  plants,  and  by  the  fact  that  the  horizontal  fila- 
ments, when  present,  are  mostly  external.  From  A.  dufourii  it  is  distinguished  by  its  larger  size,  its 
larger,  partially  embedded  basal  cell,  its  more  abundant  branching,  the  branches  tapering  toward  the 
apices,  and  by  its  fairly  abundant  production  of  cystocarps. 


472 


BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 


Fig.  25.— Acroch&tium  parvulum.  X  189. 

Fig.  26. — Acroch&lium  dufourii.  shoving  monosporangia  and 
spore,  drawn  from  cotype.  X  189. 
Fig.  27. — Acrochatium  hoytii,  drawn  from  cotype,  X  98. 


Fig.   28. — Acroch&tium  hoytii,  showing  monosporaagia.    X 


Fig.  29. — AcrocluetiuM  uirgatulum,  X  98. 

Fig.  30. — Acrochtetium  -virgatidum,  showing  monosporangia, 


MARINE   ALG^E   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  473 

5.  Acrochaetium  corymbiferum  (Thuret)  Collins  and  Hervey. 

Chantransia  corymbifera,  Thuret,  in  Le  Jolis,  1863.  p.  107. 
Chantransia  corymbifera,  De  Toni,  1897,  p.  69. 
Acrochcetium  corymbiferum,  Collins  and  Hervey,  1917,  p.  97. 
P.  B.-A.     Nos.  1040.  1880  (Chantransia  corymbifera):  not  No.  192. 

Plants  2  to  3  mm.  tall;  basal  cell  (original  spore)  12  to  15  mic.  in  diameter,  sending  down  into  the 
host  a  branching  filament  about  the  size  of  the  erect  filament  but  more  irregular  and  contorted;  erect 
filaments  arising  from  the  basal  cell  and  the  secondary  internal  filament;  cells  8  to  16  mic.  in  diameter, 
3  to  10  diameters  long;  branches  few  below,  more  abundant  above,  alternate  or  somewhat  secund, 
virgate,  sparingly  branched ;  sporangia  sessile  or  shortly  pedicellate  near  the  bases  of  the  branches;  cysto- 
carps  forming  dense,  hemispherical  clusters  of  naked  spores  near  the  bases  of  the  branches;  antheridia 
forming  small,  dense,  short-pedicellate  clusters  at  various  pointson  the  branches;  sporangia,  cystocarps, 
and  antheridia  produced  on  different  plants. 

California;  Bermuda;  England;  Atlantic  coast  of  France. 

Very  abundant  on  one  plant  of  Dasya  pedicellata  growing  in  harbor,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  May,  1907. 

This  species  has  not  previously  been  reported  from  our  coast.  While  found  on  only  one  plant,  it 
was  probably  more  abundant,  as  it  was  completely  hidden  by  the  hairs  of  its  host.  No  sporangia  have 
been  observed  here.  The  habit  of  this  species  resembles  that  of  A.  hoytii  (figs.  27  and  28),  but  it  is 
easily  distinguished  from  the  latter  by  its  internal  basal  filaments  and  its  abundant  cystocarps.  From 
A .  affine  it  is  distinguished  by  its  smaller,  more  superficial  basal  cell,  by  its  abundant  internal  horizontal 
filaments,  and  by  its  production  of  sporangia,  antheridia,  and  cystocarps  on  different  plants. 

6.  Acrochaetium  infestans  Howe  and  Hoyt.     PI.  CXVIII. 

Acrochcetium  infestans,  Howe  and  Hoyt,  fgid,  p.  116,  pi.  14. 

Plants  consisting  of  extensive  branched  basal  filaments  growing  in  hydroids  and  sending  out  more 
or  less  numerous  external  filaments;  interior  filaments  tortuous,  intricate,  serpentine,  or  labyrinthine, 
or  sometimes  straight  for  considerable  distances,  mostly  2  to  5.5  mic.  in  diameter,  the  branching  very 
irregular,  lateral,  subdichotomous,  or  very  rarely  opposite,  commonly  divaricate  from  near  the  middle 
of  a  cell,  the  branches  often  somewhat  curved,  the  interior  cells  mostly  12  to  60  mic.  long,  3  to  18  times 
as  long  as  broad,  commonly  curved  or  contorted  and  of  irregular  or  fluctuating  diameter,  sometimes 
expanded  to  form,  with  cells  of  adjacent  filaments,  a  subparenchymatous  layer  composed  of  irregularly 
shaped  cells  9  to  13  mic.  wide  and  7  to  14.5  mic.  long,  the  terminal  cells  of  branches  often  enlarged, 
somewhat  hooked  at  the  ends,  irregularly  club-shaped,  or  somewhat  forking,  sometimes  attaining  a 
diameter  of  7  to  8  mic.;  external  filaments  up  to  90  mic.  tall  (or  230  mic.,  including  hairs),  the  simpler 
ones  consisting  of  a  single  pedicel  cell  bearing  i  to  3  sporangia  (or,  very  rarely,  the  exserted  sporangium 
sessile  on  an  internal  filament),  the  larger  ones  showing  i  to  9  short,  i  to  3  celled,  rarely  secund  branches, 
the  cells  4.5  to  6.5  mic.  in  diameter,  i  to  2  diameters  long;  very  slender,  colorless  hairs  commonly  present 
on  the  larger  external  filaments,  flexuous  and  attaining  a  length  of  125  to  170  mic.;  sporangia  terminal 
or  lateral,  solitary  or  in  groups  of  two  or  three,  ovoid  or  ellipsoid,  6  to  8.5  by  10  to  14  mic. ;  sexual  repro- 
duction unknown. 

Abundant  on  Clytia  minuta  (and  other  hydroids?)  growing  on  Dictyota  dichotoma  and  Sargassum 
filipendula  dredged  from  coral  reef  offshore,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August  n,  1914. 

Endemic. 

The  hydroids  acting  as  hosts  for  this  alga  were  usually  not  obtained  in  sufficiently  good  condition 
to  warrant  determination.  Three  of  the  best  of  these,  kindly  examined  by  Prof.  C.  C.  Nutting,  were 
identified  as  (i)  Clytia  minuta,  (2)  probably  Plumularia  sp.,  (3)  Campanularian  hydroid.  The  internal 
filaments  grow  within  the  ectosarc  and  are  abundant  throughout  the  stalks  of  the  hydroids,  occurring 
to  a  less  extent  in  the  rhizomes  and  hydranths.  Various'  stages,  from  the  ungerminated  spore  to  extensive 
networks  of  filaments,  have  been  observed. 

7.  Acrochaetium  virgatulum  (Harvey)  Boraet.    Figs.  29  and  30. 

Callithamnion  virgatulum,  Harvey,  in  Hooker,  1833,  p.  349. 
CaUithamnion  virgatulum,  Harvey,  1833,  P-  243- 
Trentepohlia  virgatula,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  109,  pi.  10  ,f.  3. 
Chantransia  virgatula,  De  Toni,  1897,  p.  69. 
Acrochcetium  virgatulum,  Bornet,  1904,  p.  XXII. 
Acrochcetium  virgatulum,  Collins,  1906,  p.  193. 
A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  157  (Chantransia  virgalula  i.  luxuriant). 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  741  (Chantransia  virgatula  f .  tenuissima).     1594- 


474  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

Plants  0.8  to  2.6  mm.  tall,  usually  1.5  to  2  mm.;  one  to  many  filaments  arising  from  a  basal  disk; 
cells  7  to  14  mic.  in  diameter  below,  4  to  10  mic.  in  diameter  above,  3  to  5  diameters  long  below,  4  to  6 
diameters  long  above;  filaments  long  and  straight  with  rather  few  long,  straight,  erect  branches,  usually 
terminating  in  a  very  slender  hair;  short  ramuli,  mostly  i  to  3  celled,  abundant,  scattered,  opposite  or 
in  short  secund  series,  bearing  either  hairs  or  terminal  sporangia;  sporangia  also  sessile  on  the  branches, 
occupying  the  places  of  ramuli,  10  to  12  by  20  to  24  mic.;  sexual  organs  unknown. 

Temperate  North  Atlantic. 

Fairly  abundant  on  Gracilaria  multipartite,  G.  confervoides ,  Agardhiella  tenera,  Petalonia  fascia, 
and  Padina  vickersia  on  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford  jetties  and  in  harbor,  Beaufort,  N.  C.( 
throughout  the  year. 

This  species  may  be  distinguished  by  its  basal  disk  bearing  one  or  more  erect  filaments  and  its  long, 
straight  branches,  which  are  often  subsimple.  In  the  typical  form  the  branches  bear  short  ramuli  or 
spores  on  nearly  every  cell,  and  numerous  hairs,  the  hairs  not  being  formed  by  a  gradual  tapering  of  the 
branch  but  appearing  abruptly  at  the  apex  of  a  cell  of  about  the  same  size  as  the  preceding  ones.  But 
in  some  forms  the  branches  are  long  and  tapering,  without  hairs  and  with  infrequent  branching. 

In  the  Beaufort  specimens  hairs  are  lacking  and  short  ramuli  are  infrequent.  In  some  specimens 
the  branches  taper  gradually  to  the  apices,  in  some  they  taper  slightly,  while  in  some  specimens,  similar 
to  the  preceding  ones  in  other  respects,  they  are  nearly  of  uniform  diameter  throughout.  In  the  majority 
of  cases  the  filaments  are  long,  straight,  and  sparingly  branched,  sometimes  being  entirely  simple; 
sporangia  are  borne  in  short  secund  series  on  the  main  branches,  usually  being  lateral  and  sessile,  less 
often  terminating  longer  or  shorter  ramuli.  In  these  respects  the  Beaufort  specimens  resemble 
f.  tenuisnma  Collins  (1906,  p.  194).  From  this  they  differ,  however,  in  that  the  diameter  of  the 
filaments  is  greater  and  the  basal  disk  is  larger,  sometimes  almost  forming  a  continuous  layer  of  con- 
siderable extent  and  approaching  in  this  respect  f.  luxuriant  Collins. 

-This  is  the  southern  limit  reported  for  the  species  on  our  coast,  but  it  probably  extends  farther. 

Acrochaetium  sp. 

Plants  differing  from  all  the  above-mentioned  species  and  not  certainly  referable  to  any  described 
species  were  found  in  abundance  on  Sargassum  filipendula,  Agardhiella  tenera,  and,  in  less  amount,  on 
Gracilaria  confervoides  dredged  from  the  coral  reef  offshore,  July  and  August,  1915.  In  view,  however, 
of  our  ignorance  of  the  variation  of  plants  belonging  to  this  genus  when  growing  on  different  hosts  or 
under  different  conditions  it  has  not  seemed  wise  to  describe  these  as  a  new  species. 

Of  the  seven  identified  species  of  this  genus  found  at  Beaufort  five  have  been  observed 
on  only  one  host — A .  hoytii  and  A .  affine  on  Dictyota  dictotoma,  A .  parvulum  on  Polysi- 
phonia  harveyi,  A.  corymbiferum  on  Dasya  pedicellate,  and  A.  infestans  on  hydroids. 
A .  dufourii  has  been  observed  on  Sargassum  filipendula  and  apparently  also  on  Dictyota 
dichotoma,  while  A .  mrgatulum  has  been  found  on  five  species  of  algae,  but  not  on  the 
same  host  occupied  by  any  of  the  other  species  of  Acrochaetium. 

Family  2.  GELIDIACE^E  (Kuetzing)  Schmitz. 

Frond  terete  or  compressed,  usually  laterally  branched,  with  fairly  evident  fila- 
mentous structure  and  usually  thick  and  firm  texture,  traversed  by  a  segmented  axial 
tube  (often  indistinct  in  the  older  parts),  from  which  arise  branched  lateral  filaments 
composing  the  cortex.;  tetrasporangia  zonately,  cruciately,  or  triangularly  divided, 
grouped  in  special  portions  of  the  thallus  or  scattered  in  the  outer  rind ;  antheridia 
occurring  in  a  more  or  less  widely  expanded  layer  over  the  surface  of  special  portions  of 
the  thallus  or  forming  small,  scattered  tufts  arising  from  the  cortical  filaments ; 
carpogonia  borne  beneath  the  surface  on  the  cortical  filaments  or  laterally  on  the 
central  axis,  often  occurring  in  special  fertile  portions  of  the  thallus;  the  fertilized 
eggs  give  rise  directly  (often  after  fusion  with  one  or  more  neighboring — quasi  auxiliary 

;lls)  to  gonimoblasts  composed  of  much-branched,  expanded  filaments;   ends  of 


MARINE   ALGJE  OF  BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  475 

these  fertile  filamentous  branches  confluent  into  an  hymenium  on  the  apices  of  which 
the  carpospores  are  borne  singly  or,  rarely,  in  short  chains. 

About  90  species,  all  marine,  mostly  in  warm  and  temperate  seas. 

Genus  Gelid  him  Lamouroux. 
Gelidium,  Lamouroux,  1813,  p.  40. 

Frond  terete  or  flattened,  pinnately  decompound,  of  tough,  firm  texture,  with  thick 
dense  rind;  central  axis  composed  of  a  segmented,  longitudinal  filament,  from  which 
arise  numerous  obliquely  longitudinal  filaments  verticillately  arranged  and  densely 
coalescent  into  a  proper  cortex,  outer  rind  cellular,  with  larger  cells  toward  the  center, 
smaller  ones  toward  the  periphery ;  central  axis  with  distinct  apical  cell.  Tetrasporangia 
formed  in  sori  immersed  in  local  swellings  on  both  sides  of  the  thallus  below  the  apices 
of  ordinary  pinnae,  rotund,  cruciately  divided;  cystocarps  immersed  in  swollen  portions 
below  the  apices  of  ordinary  pinnae,  usually  divided  by  a  longitudinal  partition  into  two 
chambers,  one  on  each  side  of  the  flattened  thallus,  each  chamber  communicating  with 
the  exterior  by  a  separate  pore,  carpospores  obovate  arising  singly  from  the  hymenial  layer, 
pericarp  raised  up  from  the  hymenial  layer  but  joined  with  it  by  numerous  simple  fila- 
ments, antheridia  occurring  in  superficial  patches;  tetrasporangia  and  cystocarps  occur- 
ring on  separate  plants. 

About  25  species  recognized,  many  separated  by  inconspicuous,  probably  doubtful, 
characters;  in  warm  and  temperate  seas. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

Upright  branches  i  to  2  cm.  tall  or  less,  comparatively  thick,  flattened,  much  branched 

i.  G.  coerulescens  (p.  475). 

Upright  branches  2  to  3.5  cm.  tall,  slender,  subterete,  sparsely  branched 2.  G.  crinale  (p.  475). 

i.  Gelidium  coerulescens  Kuetzing.     PI.  XCV,  fig.  i. 

Gelidium  c&rulescens,  Kuetzing,  1868,  Bd.  18,  p.  19,  pi.  56,  f.  z. 

Thallus  erect,  flattened,  arising  from  a  fine,  filiform,  creeping  base,  i  to  a  cm.  tall,  0.3  to  0.5  mm. 
wide  in  widest  portion;  branching  decompound,  distichous  from  the  margins,  sparse  below,  more  or 
less  dense  above;  texture  fleshy  gelatinous;  color,  dark  purplish  brown. 

West  Indies;  New  Caledonia. 

Very  abundant,  forming  low,  dense  masses  on  jetties,  walls,  shells,  and  stones  at  Fort  Macon, 
Beaufort,  N.  C.,  and  along  town  front  from  about  10  to  70  cm.  above  low  tide  line,  April  to  October, 
probably  throughout  the  year. 

This  species  was  identified  by  Mr.  Collins  on  the  basis  of  a  Guadeloupe  specimen  determined  by 
Crouan,  and  it  may  perhaps  be  questioned  whether  it  is  really  the  species  described  by  Kuetzing.. 

a.  Gelidium  crinale  (Turner)  J.  Agardh.     PI.  XCV,  fig.  2. 

Fucus  crinalis.  Turner,  1808,  pi.  198. 
Gelidium  crinale,  J.  Agardh,  1876,  p.  546. 
Gelidium  crinale,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  158. 
Gelidium  crinale,  De  Toni,  1897.  P-  146. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  195,  2089. 

Primary  frond  decumbent,  about  0.5  mm.  in  diameter,  giving  off  erect  branches,  terete  or  some- 
times slightly  flattened,  slender,  2  to  7  cm.  tall,  sparingly  branched,  sometimes  almost  simple;  color 
purple  or  yellowish  brown. 

Warm  and  temperate  waters  generally,  occurring  on  our  coast  from  Maine  to  Florida. 

Fairly  abundant  between  tide  lines  on  Fort  Macon  jetties,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  April  to  August,  1908, 
probably  occurs  throughout  the  year,  abundant  on  submerged  shells  in  Newport  River  near  "Green 
Rock, "  August,  1906;  abundant  in  Core  Sound  near  Leckly 's  Island  July,  1908;  fairly  abundant  in  Pam- 
lico  Sound  on  shells  and  posts  between  tide  lines,  Ocracoke,  N.  C.,  August,  1907;  one  specimen  on 
submerged  shell,  Pawleys  Island,  near  Georgetown,  S.  C.,  August,  1909. 


476  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

This  species  varies  considerably  in  the  size  of  the  clusters,  the  height  of  the  upright  branches,  the 
amount  of  branching,  and  the  amount  of  flattening.  The  clusters  may  be  dense  or  loose,  the  upright 
branches  may  be  2  to  7  cm.  tall;  branching  is  usually  sparse  and  irregular,  but  may  be  fairly  regularly 
pinnate  at  the  apices,  or  the  fronds  may  be  entirely  unbranched;  they  are  usually  almost  terete,  but 
may  show  slight,  distinct  flattening. 

The  two  species  occurring  in  this  region  can  usually  be  easily  distinguished  as  follows:  G.  coerulescens 
forms  dense  mats,  has  a  dense,  compact  habit,  with  the  upright  branches  short  (8  to  15  mm.  tall),  flat- 
tened, comparatively  wide,  much  branched  in  a  fairly  regular,  decompound  manner;  G.  crinale  usually 
occurs  in  sparse  clusters,  has  a  slender,  open  habit,  with  the  upright  branches  comparatively  long  (2  to 
3  cm.),  rounded  or  very  slightly  flattened,  slender,  usually  sparsely  and  irregularly  branched,  some- 
times simple,  sometimes  fairly  regularly  pinnate. 

Gel  id  him  sp.  indet. 

A  single  indeterminable  fragment  from  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  September,  1905,  is  4  cm. 
long,  about  0.5  mm.  wide,  and  o.r  mm.  thick,  narrow,  flattened,  sparsely  pinnate,  pink.  This  may 
be  a  battered  specimen  of  G.  corneum  or  may  be  a  portion  of  one  of  the  larger,  more  tropical  species. 

Order  2.  Gigartinales  Schmitz. 

Gigartininae,  De  Toni,  1897,  p.  169. 

Carpogonial  filaments  and  auxiliary  cells  usually  occurring  together  in  pairs, 
forming  definite  procarps,  sometimes  occurring  singly  in  the  thallus.  Cystocarps  usually 
immersed  in  the  frond.  Gonimoblast  arising  from  an  auxiliary  cell  after  the  fertilized 
egg  has  fused  with  this  by  means  of  a  usually  short  carpogonial  process,  not  attached 

to  a  basal  placenta. 

KEY  TO  FAMILIES. 

Gonimoblast  consisting  of  a  richly  branched  tuft  whose  branches  are  distributed  without  order 

within  the  inclosing  structures;  tetrasporangia  usually  cruciately  divided  .  i .  GIGARTINACE^  (p.  476). 

Gonimoblast  divided  into  several  lobes  radiating  inwardly  in  all  directions;  tetrasporangia 

zonately  divided 2.  RHODOPHYLUDACE^  (p.  478). 

Family  1.  GIGARTINACE^E  Schmitz. 

Frond  terete,  flattened,  or  foliaceous;  dichotomously  or  pinnately  branched,  some- 
times simple  or  irregularly  lobate;  structure  cellular  or  filamentous,  usually  plainly  fan- 
like  at  apices;  tetrasporangia  scattered  over  the  frond  in  the  outer  cortex,  or  grouped 
in  sori  and  immersed  in  the  thallus,  or  borne  in  special  protuberances  (nemathecia), 
usually  cruciately,  sometimes  zonately,  divided;  antheridia  usually  in  patches  more  or 
less  widely  distributed  over  the  surface  of  the  thallus,  sometimes  in  flasklike  cavities 
sunk  in  the  outer  cortex  and  opening  to  the  exterior;  carpogonia  usually  numerous  on 
the  fertile  portions  of  the  thallus,  usually  produced  singly  on  a  three-celled  carpogenic 
branch  associated  with  an  auxiliary  cell  into  a  definite  procarp;  the  fertilized  egg  fuses 
with  the  auxiliary  cell  by  a  short  process;  the  latter  then  gives  rise  to  the  gonimoblast, 
consisting  of  a  tuft  of  filaments  richly  branched  in  all  directions;  the  branches  of  this  tuft 
are  themselves  richly  branched  and  interwoven  to  form  a  structure  of  fertile  and  sterile 
filaments  almost  without  order;  the  apical  cells  of  the  fertile  filaments  (and  sometimes 
subapical  ones  also)  form  carpospores  which  lie  in  groups  usually  without  order;  fruits 
often  inclosed  by  a  sterile  jacket;  these  cystocarps  usually  occur  scattered  over  the 
thallus,  immersed  or  more  or  less  prominent  on  one  or  both  sides,  and  communicate 
with  the  exterior  by  one  or  more  often  inconspicuous  pores. 

About  275  species,  all  marine,  especially  in  cold  and  temperate  seas. 


MARINE   Al^JB,  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  477 

KEY  TO  GENERA. 

Frond  terete,  dichotomous,  cartilaginous i .  Gymnogongrus  (p.  477). 

Frond  parasitic,  appearing  from  the  exterior  as  a  cushionlike  nemathecium  on  Gymnogongrus. 

2 .  Actinococcus  (p.  477). 

•  Genus  i.  Gymnogongrus  Martins. 

Gymnogongrus,  Martins,  18333,  p.  27. 

Frond  terete  or  flattened,  repeatedly  dichotomous,  often  also  with  more  or  less 
numerous  lateral  branches,  of  fleshy-leathery  or  horny  consistency;  tetrasporangia 
unknown;  procarps  borne  on  fertile  upper  segments  of  the  frond  in  flattened  promi- 
nences; cystocarps  immersed  in  the  frond,  more  or  less  prominent  on  one  or  both  sides; 
containing  a  compound  "nucleus"  bearing  numerous  rotinded  carpospores  without  order 
among  sterile  filaments;  fruit  entirely  inclosed;  at  length  freed  by  the  formation  of  one 
or  more  pores. 

About  35  species,  widely  distributed,  especially  in  warm  and  temperate  seas. 
Gymnogongrus  griffithsise  (Turner)  Martins.     PI.  XCV,  fig.  3. 

Fucus  griffithsice.  Turner,  1808,  pi.  37. 
Gymnogongrus  griffithsia,  Martins,  1833,  p.  27. 
Gymnogongrus  griffithsia,  De  Toni,  1897,  P-  242. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  239- 

Frond  terete  or  slightly  compressed,  i  to  5  cm.  tall,  slender,  about  i  mm.  in  diameter,  several  stems 
arising  from  a  rootlike  callus,  branching  dense  or  sparse,  usually  regularly  dichotomous,  often  poly- 
chotomous  and  with  irregular  pinnate  branches,  main  branches  unbranched  below,  richly  branched 
above,  forming  dense  tufts  at  the  apices;  substance  cartilaginous,  color  dark  purple,  becoming  blackish 
when  dry. 

North  Atlantic  and  Pacific  Oceans;  Mediterranean  Sea. 

Abundant  on  Fort  Macon  jetties,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  about  15  cm.  above  to  15  cm.  below  low  water, 
throughout  the  year;  occasional  on  Bogue  Beach  and  in  harbor. 

Specimens  from  different  localities  vary  in  height  and  diameter  of  fronds,  amount  of  branching, 
and  amount  of  flattening.  Those  from  this  region  are  fairly  uniform,  being  2.5  to  3.5  cm.  tall,  and 
comparatively  thick,  rigid,  and  terete. 

Genus  2.  Actinococcus  Kuetzing. 
Actinococcus,  Kuetzing,  1843,  p.  177. 

Thallus  parasitic,  minute,  living  within  the  tissues  of  other  Florideae,  and  forming 
fruiting  cushions  on  the  surface  of  the  host  plant ;  vegetative  portion  consisting  of  fila- 
ments penetrating  the  host  and  winding  about  among  the  cells  of  the  frond;  fruiting 
cushions  more  or  less  hemispherical  or  flattened-convex,  strongly  attached  to  the  host, 
composed  of  fanlike  radiating  filaments,  with  cells  gradually  decreasing  in  size  toward  the 
periphery ;  tetrasporangia  numerous  in  the  cortical  layer  of  the  nematheciform  cushion, 
moniliform  serrate,  cruciately  divided,  arising  from  the  transformation  of  the  cells 
(usually  with  the  exception  of  the  2  to  4  apical  ones)  of  the  radiating  filaments;  anthe- 
ridia  and  cystocarps  unknown. 

Four  to  five  species  recognized,  occurring  on  different  genera  of  algae,  mostly  on 
species  of  Gymnogongrus. 

The  members  of  this  genus  were  originally  taken  for  the  tetrasporic  fruits  of  their 
hosts.  "Several  genera  of  this  character  have  been  described.  It  is  a  curious  fact  that 
in  each  case  the  parasite  has  tetrasporic  fruit  of  the  character  appropriate  to  the  host, 
while  the  host  appears  to  have  lost  the  capacity  for  producing  tetraspores,  and  is  propa- 
gated either  by  cystocarps  or  only  vegetatively."  (Collins,  igoia,  p.  134.) 


478  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

Antheridia  and  cystocarps  have  been  described  for  one  species  of  Actinococcus,  but 
this  observation  seems  founded  on  insufficient  evidence. 

Actinococcus  aggregatus  Schmitz. 

Actinococcus  aggregatus,  Schmicz,  1893,  p.  385,  pi.  7,  f-  8. 
Actinococcus  aggregatus.  De  Toni,  1897.  P-  259- 
P.  B.-A.  No.  786. 

Parasitic  on  Gymnogongrus  griffithsiae,  the  vegetative  portion  occurring  as  fine  filaments  between 
the  cells  of  the  host ;  fruit  appearing  as  a  protuberant  pad  on  the  surface  of  the  host ,  minute ,  about  i  mm . 
wide,  rounded,  flattened  convex,  single  or  several  approximate;  tetrasporangia  cruciately  divided, 
often  imperfectly  septate. 

North  Atlantic  and  Pacific;  Mediterranean  Sea. 

On  about  one-fourth  of  the  specimens  of  Gymnogongrus  griffithsiae,  Fort  Macon  jetties,  Beaufort  N.  C. 

Family  2.  RHODOPHYLLIDACE^E  Schmitz. 

Frond  terte,  flattened,  or  foliaceous,  dichotomously  or  laterally  branched;  structure 
cellular  or  cellular-filamentous,  seldom  filamentous;  tetrasporangia  usually  scattered 
over  the  thallus  surface,  sometimes  collected  into  numerous  son,  sunk  in  the  outer 
cortex,  which  is  often  thickened  to  form  nematheciumlike  structures,  nearly  always 
zonately  divided ;  antheridia  usually  in  patches  more  or  less  widely  distributed  over  the 
surface;  carpogonia  numerous  on  the  fertile  portions  of  the  thallus,  sometimes  distant 
from  the  auxiliary  cells  and,  after  fertilization,  fusing  with  one  of  these  by  a  filament; 
auxiliary  cells  usually  less  numerous  than  the  carpogonia,  sometimes  not  formed  until  after 
fertilization;  cystocarps  scattered  over  the  thallus,  often  situated  at  the  edges,  immersed 
or  more  or  less  prominent,  usually  provided  with  a  conspicuous  pore;  gonimoblast 
suspended  from  an  upper  wall  of  the  cystocarpic  cavity,  divided  into  several  lobes 
radiating  in  all  directions,  forming  spores  in  the  apical  cells  of  the  filaments  and  some- 
times in  the  subapical  ones  also. 

About  no  species,  all  marine,  in  all  parts  of  the  world. 

KEY  TO  GENERA. 

a.  Auxiliary  cell  forms  on  a  protuberance  bearing  filamentous  tufts,  which  radiate  in  every 

direction  and  branch  outward  fasciculately b. 

b.  Frond  terete,  radially  branched,  subtubular  above,  of   cellular-filamentous  structure 

." i .  Agardhiella  (p.  478). 

bb.  Frond  foliaceous,  usually  pinnately  or  furcately  divided,  with  numerous  warts  or 

papillae  on  the  surface  and  margins 2.  Meristotheca  (p.  479). 

aa.  Auxiliary  cell  extends  a  thick  projection  into  the  cystocarpic  cavity  and  bears  at  its  apex 

numerous  tufts  of  filaments c. 

c.  Frond  terete  or  slightly  flattened,  laxly  tubular,  sometimes  caulescent  and  solid  below 

3.  Rhabdonia  (p.  480). 

cc.  Frond  terete  or  flattened,  structure  dense,  rigid,  furnished  with  short,  acute  or  obtuse, 

simple  or  branched  papillae 4.  Eucheuma  (p.  481). 

Genus  i.  Agardhiella  Schmitz. 

Agardhiella,  Schmitz,  1889,  p.  441  (7). 

Frond  terete,  branched  on  all  sides,  subtubular  and  rather  lax  above,  structure 
cellular-filamentous,  medullary  filaments  reticulately  anastomosing,  more  or  less  lax, 
cortex  large  celled  within,  very  small  celled  without;  tetrasporangia  scattered  over  the 
surface,  zonately  divided;  auxiliary  cells  not  united  with  the  carpogonia,  scattered 
throughout  the  frond;  cystocarps  scattered  through  the  frond,  entirely  immersed  or 


MARINE   AIvG^E   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  479 

slightly  prominent,  "nucleus"  transversely  oval  or  almost  spherical,  situated  in  the 
medullary  layer  or  in  the  inner  lax  part  of  the  cortex,  unilaterally  attached  to  the  outer 
cortex,  inclosed  by  a  dense,  subdiscrete  filamentous  pericarp  with  a  broad  cellular  center 
and  radiating,  tufted,  expanded  filaments,  on  which  the  carpospores  are  borne  singly 
at  the  apices,  the  center  of  the  "nucleus"  joined  to  the  pericarp  by  single  radial  strands 
of  sterile  filaments,  communicating  with  the  exterior  by  an  apical  pore. 

Four  to  five  species  on  Atlantic  and  Pacific  coasts  and  in  Australian  regions. 
Agardhiella  tenera  (J.  Agardh)  Schmitz.     PI.  XCVI. 

Gigartina  tenera,  J.  Agardh,  1841,  p.  18. 

Rhabdonia  tenera,  ].  Agardh,  1851,  p.  354. 

Solieria  ckordalis,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  121,  pi.  238. 

Rhabdonia  tenera,  Farlow,  i88a,  p.  159,  pi.  14,  f .  a. 

Agardhiella  tenera,  Schmitz,  1889,  p.  441  (7). 

Agardhiella  tenera,  De  Toni,  1897,  p.  322. 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  138  (Rhabdonia  tenera)  (?),  333  (Agardhiella  coulteri)  (?),  539.  1396  (?),  ai43. 

Frond  filiform,  4  to  45  cm.  tall,  0.5  to  4  mm.  in  diameter;  decompoundly  much  branched,  branches 
subalternately  virgate,  usually  going  out  from  all  sides,  sometimes  secund,  cylindrical,  constricted  at 
the  base,  gradually  tapering  toward  the  apex,  bearing  numerous  linear,  fusiform  branchlets;  tetraspo- 
rangia  scattered  through  the  cortex  of  unaltered  branches  zonately  divided ;  cystocarps  borne  on  sepa- 
rate plants  immersed  in  slightly  swollen  branches,  rather  prominent  on  one  side ;  substance  when  young 
is  very  delicate,  when  older  is  rather  firm;  color  red  to  piirple. 

Warm  and  temperate  Atlantic  and  Pacific  coasts  of  America. 

Abundant  in  winter  and  spring,  occasional  in  summer  and  autumn,  15  to  30  cm.  below  low  water, 
in  harbor  and  on  jetties,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  many  slender  plants  dredged  from  the  coral  reef,  August, 
1914  and  1915. 

The  species  varies  greatly  in  habit,  some  specimens  bearing  only  a  few  large  branches,  while  others 
bear  many  fine  small  ones.  It  is  not  likely  to  be  mistaken  for  any  other  species  occurring  in  this  region 
except  Eucheuma  gelidium;  from  the  latter  it  is  distinguished  by  its  more  open  habit,  with  longer,  more 
slender  branches,  and  by  its  more  delicate  texture.  It  here  reaches  its  greatest  luxuriance  from  Decem- 
ber to  June,  attaining  at  that  time  a  height  of  30  cm.  and  fruiting  abundantly.  Specimens  collected 
during  the  summer  and  autumn  are  often  much  battered,  although  an  occasional  vigorous  fruiting  plant 
may  be  found  during  this  period. 

Yendo  ( 1914)  has  suggested  that  many  American  specimens  which  have  been  referred  to  this  species 
should  be  placed  under  Rhabdonia  robusta  (Grev.)  J.  Ag.  As  the  determination  of  this  point  would 
require  more  study  than  it  has  been  possible  to  give  the  matter,  the  author  has  followed  current  usage 
in  referring  all  the  plants  to  A .  tenera.  This  has  seemed  more  proper  in  that,  while  some  of  the  plants 
[notably  those  dredged  from  the  coral  reef  in  1914  and  1915  (Plate  XCVI,  fig.  2),  in  which  the  internal 
filaments  were  lacking]  differed  from  others  in  appearance,  none  of  them  seemed  to  agree  entirely  with 
the  descriptions  of  R.  robutta. 

Borgesen  (1919,  pp.  361-365)  has  given  a  good  description,  with  figures,  of  the  development  of 
the  cystocarp  of  this  species. 

Genus  2.  Meristotheca  Agardh. 

Meristotheca,  Agardh,  in  J.  Agardh,  1871,  p.  36. 

Frond -flat,  more  or  less  richly  furcately  or  pinnately  (usually  irregularly)  divided 
sometimes  proliferous  from  the  margins,  usually  with  numerous  warts  or  papillae  arising 
from  the  margins  and  surface;  structure  cellular-filamentous,  hollow,  the  cavity  traversed 
by  numerous  filaments,  cortex  composed  of  large,  rounded  cells  within,  becoming  smaller 
toward  the  surface,  tetrasporangia  scattered  over  the  surface  among  the  superficial  cells 
of  the  cortex,  zonately  divided ;  cystocarps  situated  in  the  warts  and  papillae  or  embedded 
in  the  thallus,  more  or  less  prominent,  "nucleus"  with  a  filamentous-cellular  center  and 
159321°— 20 8 


480  BULLETIN  OF  THE  BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

peripheral,  radial  paniculate  tufts  of  filaments  bearing  carpospores  usually  singly  at  their 
apices,  pericarp  thick,  dense,  joined  to  the  center  of  the!  "nucleus"  by  numerous  sterile 
strands  of  filaments. 

About  six  species,  mostly  in  the  Indian  Ocean. 

Meristotheca  duchassaingii  Agardh.    Figs.  31  and  32;  PI.  XCVII. 

Meristotheca  duchassaingii,  Agardh,  in  J.  Agardh,  187.1,  p.  37- 
Meristotheca  f  duchassaingii,  De  Toni,  1897.  P-  330. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  884,  1596. 

Frond  flat,  expanded,  thick,  gelatinous,  usually  subpalmately  laciniate,  sometimes  simple,  some- 
times with  marginal  proliferations,  surface  and  margins  of  female  plants  beset  with  numerous  short, 
simple,  or  branched  papillae  in  which  the  cystocarps  are  borne,  surface  of  tetrasporic  plants  smooth  or 
slightly  roughened,  but  not  bearing  papillae;  tetrasporangia  zonately  divided;  color  deep  rose. 

Florida;  West  Indies.  , 

Occasionally  abundant  after  storms,  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  two  small  plants  dredged  from 
coral  reef  offshore,  August,  1915. 

This  species  has  been  observed  here  from  only  August  to  October,  but  has  been  collected  at  points 
farther  south  from  February  to  April  and  may  be  expected  here  during  any  month.  It  is  not  known 
where  the  plants  thrown  up  on  our  shores  have  grown.  No  specimens  were  found  on  the  coral  reef  off 
Beaufort  in  May,  1907,  or  in  August,  1914.  It  seems  probable  that  these  specimens  grew  on  sub- 
merged coral  reefs  offshore  from  Beaufort  or  south  of  this  region. 

This  is  the  northern  known  limit  of  the  species  and  of  the  genus. 

As  was  noted  by  Collins  (P.  B.-A.  No.  1596),  the  tetrasporangia  are  divided  zonately  as  in  other 
species  of  the  genus,  not  cruciately,  as  figured  by  Agardh. 

Genus  3.  Rhabdonia  Harvey. 

Rhabdonia.  Harvey,  in  Hooker  and  Harvey,  1847,  p.  408. 

Frond  rather  terete,  sometimes  slightly  flattened,  usually  branched  on  all  sides, 
more  or  less  laxly  tubular,  sometimes  caulescent  and  thick  below,  medullary  region 
traversed  by  longitudinal,  branched,  anastomosing  filaments,  cortex  composed  of 
rounded  angular  cells  becoming  smaller  toward  the  surface;  tetrasporangia  scattered 
over  the  frond  among  the  superficial  cells  of  the  cortex,  zonately  divided;  carpogonia 
occurring  singly,  immersed  in  the  cortical  layer,  usually  numerous  on  the  fruiting  por- 
tions of  the  thallus,  auxiliary  cells  less  numerous,  usually  not  conspicuous  before  fertili- 
zation, usually  situated  more  or  less  near  to  the  carpogonia  and,  after  union  with  a 
process  from  a  fertilized  carpogonium,  usually  fusing  with  neighboring  cells;  gonimoblast 
developed  toward  the  interior  of  the  thallus,  forming  tufts  of  filaments  radiating  in  all 
directions;  cystocarps  scattered  in  the  branches,  immersed,  rather  prominent,  with  tufts 
of  branched,  spore-bearing  filaments  radiating  from  a  large  central  cell  intermixed  with 
sterile  filaments,  inclosed  by  a  thick  filamentous  pericarp,  communicating  with  the 
exterior  by  a  pore ;  carpospores  single  or  in  pairs  in  the  terminal  segments  of  the  filaments, 
often  germinating  within  the  cystocarp. 

About  15  species,  principally  in  Australian  regions. 

Rhabdonia  ramosissima  (Harvey)  J.  Agardh.     PI.  XCVIII,  fig.  i. 

Chrysymenia  ramosissima,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  190,  pi.  30  B. 
Rhabdonia  ramosissima,  J.  Agardh,  1876,  p.  593. 
Rhabdonia  ramosissima.  Be  Toni,  1897,  p.  363. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  993- 

Frond  rather  compressed,  more  or  less  cylindrical  above,  decompound,  usually  much  branched, 
6  to  45  cm.  tall,  main  axis  2  to  15  mm.  wide,  medullary  layer  very  lax,  branches  alternate,  spreading, 


MARINE   AI^GJB,  OF  BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  481 

subdistichously  arranged,  tapering  toward  base  and  apex,  long  and  short  ones  intermixed,  branchlets 
very  slender,  somewhat  spiny;  cystocarps  immersed  in  the  frond,  inconspicuous;  color  light,  rosy  red; 
brownish  when  dry. 

Florida;  West  Indies. 

One  specimen  August,  1903,  one  specimen  September,  1904,  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C. 

Specimens  vary  greatly  in  the  width  of  the  main  axis,  the  amount  of  flattening,  and  the  amount  of 
branching,  the  habit  may  be  loose  or  very  dense.  The  Beaufort  specimens  are  narrower  and  less 
branched  than  the  majority  of  specimens  from  Florida,  but  seem  quite  surely  to  belong  to  this  species. 
They  are  readily  distinguished  from  other  species  occurring  here  by  their  slightly  flattened  main  axis 
bearing  long  and  short  branches  without  order  in  two  rows  from  the  lateral  margins. 

This  is  the  northern  known  limit  of  the  species  and  of  the  genus.  It  seems  probable  that  the  speci- 
mens found  here  were  brought  from  Florida  by  the  Gulf  Stream,  although  they  may  have  grown  on  the 
coral  reefs  offshore.  The  species  is  entirely  American,  the  type  being  from  Key  West,  Fla. 

Genus  4.  Eucheuma  J.  Agardh. 
Eucheuma,  J.  Agardh,  1847,  p.  16. 

Frond. terete  or  flattened,  radially  or  distichously  branched,  more  or  less  beset  with 
short,  simple  or  branched,  sharp  or  blunt  papillae;  medullary  region  composed  of  densely 
crowded  anastomosing  filaments,  cortex  dense,  composed  of  fairly  large  cells  within, 
becoming  smaller  toward  the  surface;  tetrasporangia  scattered  among  the  superficial 
cells  of  the  cortex,  zonately  divided;  cystocarps  immersed  in  the  cortex,  prominent, 
usually  in  papillae,  sometimes  on  the  thallus  itself,  having  a  large,  almost  spherical 
central  cell  from  whose  surface  arise  numerous  crowded  radiating  tufts  of  richly  branched 
spore-bearing  filaments  separated  by  strands  of  sterile  filaments  running  from  the 
central  cell  to  the  dense  inclosing  pericarp,  communicating  with  the  exterior  by  a  pore; 
carpospores  borne  singly  in  the  terminal  segments  of  the  fertile  filaments. 

About  15  species,  in  warm  seas,  especially  in  the  Indian  Ocean. 

Eucheuma  gelidium  J.  Agardh.     PI.  XCVIII,  fig.  2. 

Eucheuma  gelidium,  J.  Agardh,  1852,  p.  627. 
Eucheuma  gelidium,  De  Toni,  1897,  p.  372. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  541,  2184. 

Frond  ancipitate  compressed,  pinnately  decompound  from  the  margins,  5  to  13  cm.  tall,  3  to  5  mm. 
wide,  bearing  numerous  short,  simple  or  branched,  spinelike  papillae,  possessed  below  of  few  elongated 
pinnae,  with  smaller  tooth-shaped  ones  interspersed,  branched  above  into  a  dense  corymb;  pinnae 
distichous,  flattened,  emitting  below  abbreviated,  little-divided{  spine-shaped  pinnules,  in  the  upper 
part  longer  ones  divaricately  much  branched;  substance  fleshy-cartilaginous,  rather  rigid;  color  dirty 
reddish. 

Florida;  West  Indies;  Barbados. 

One  battered  specimen,  Bogue  Beacih,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1904;  several  specimens,  Fort 
Macon  jetty,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  July,  1907;  rather  abundant  on  jetties,  Ocracoke,  N.  C.,  August,  1907. 

This  species  can  be  distinguished  from  Agardhiella  tenera,  which  it  most  nearly  resembles,  by  its 
coarser,  firmer  texture,  its  denser  branching  with  development  of  numerous  irregular  spinelike 
branches.  In  section  E.  gelidium  has  a  denser  structure,  the  central  (medullary)  lay«r  of  anastomosing 
filaments  is  more  developed,  and  the  cortical  layer  is  thicker  and  is  more  distinctly  composed  of  short 
filaments  rather  than  single  cells.  The  specimens  from  Ocracoke  are  often  in  whole  or  in  part  rather 
fine  and  slender,  but  are  comparatively  rigid.  In  all  the  specimens  from  this  region  the  development 
of  spinelike  branches  is  less  marked  than  is  usual,  although  they  agree  with  this  species  in  other  respects. 

This  is  the  northern  limit  of  the  genus  on  our  coast. 


482  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

Order  3.  Rhodymeniales  Schmitz. 

Rhodymeninae.  De  Toni,  1900,  p.  387- 

Carpogonial  filaments  and  mother  cells  of  the  auxiliary  cells  occurring  together  in 
pairs,  nearly  always  united  into  definite  procarps,  the  auxiliary  cells  usually  cut  off  only 
after  fertilization.  Gonimoblast  arising  from  an  auxiliary  cell  after  the  fertilized  egg 
has  fused  with  this  by  means  of  a  short  carpogonial  process,  attached  to  a  basal  pla- 
centa, cystocarps  not  completely  immersed  in  the  frond. 

KEY  TO  FAMILIES. 

a.  Gonimoblast  somewhat  immersed  in  the  thallus,  filaments  radiating  from  their  point  of 
attachment  on  a  median,  thickened  placenta  within  the  fruit-bearing  cavity,  peri- 
carp thick,  perforated  at  the  apex .b. 

b.  Gonimoblast  much  branched,  densely  crowded  and  confluent,  usually  hemispherical- 

convex,  carpospores  borne  at  the  apices  of  the  branches  singly  or  in  chains;  tetra- 

sporangia  cruciately  or  zonately  divided r .  SPHAEROCOCC  ACE/B  (p .  482 ) . 

bb.  Gonimoblast  divided  into  several  lobes  successively  developed,  nearly  all  cells  of 
the  lobes  forming  spores;  tetrasporangia  nearly  always  cruciately  divided. 

2.   RHODYMENIACE^S  (p.  487). 

aa.  Gonimoblast  sessile  in  the  thallus,  formed  within  the  fruit-bearing  cavity,  covered  by 

the  cortex  of  the  thallus  with  a  perforation  at  the  apex c. 

c.  Procarp  situated  in  the  median  layer  of  the  thallus,  gonimoblast  attached  to  the  median 

thickened  placenta,  gonimolobes  usually  indistinctly  formed,  carpospores  borne  at 
the  apices  of  the  fertile  branches  singly  or  in  chains;  tetrasporangia  triangularly 

divided. 3.  DELESSERIACE^  (p.  493). 

aaa.  Gonimoblast  attached  to  the  thallus  by  means  of  a  pedicel  or  broad  base,  entirely 

external  or  somewhat  inclosed  by  the  cortex  in  various  ways d . 

d.  Cystocarps  attached  to  the  thallus  by  means  of  a  broad  base  or  a  short  pedicel,  gonimo- 

blast attached  by  a  large  fusion,  central  cell  within  a  pericarp  perforated  at  the 
apex,  carpospores  large,  single  in  the  apices  of  the  fertile  branches,  less  often  in 

chains;  tetrasporangia  triangularly  divided 4.  RHODOMELACE^  (p.  496). 

dd.  Cystocarps  entirely  external  or  inclosed  by  the  cortex,  naked  (without  pericarp)  or 
more  or  less  loosely  enwrapped  by  their  own  branches,  gonimoblasts  single  or 
more  often  in  pairs,  usually  divided  into  several  lobes,  carpospores  formed  from 
nearly  every  cell  of  the  fertile  branches;  tetrasporangia  triangularly  or  cruciately 
divided 5.  CERAMIACE/B  (p.  509). 

Family  1.  SPHyHROCOCCACEjE  (Dumort)  Schmitz. 

Thallus  terete  or  flattened,  dichotomously  or  laterally  branched,  structure  cellular 
or  cellular  filamentous;  tetrasporangia  situated  in  the  cortical  layer,  scattered  over  the 
surface  of  the  thallus  or  in  nematheciumlike  portions,  usually  zonately,  less  often  cruci- 
ately divided;  antheridia  variously  formed;  carpogonia  usually  numerous  on  the  fertile 
portions  of  the  thallus,  apparently  closely  associated  with  the  cells  which,  after  fertili- 
zation, give  rise  to  the  auxiliary  cells;  cystocarps  rather  prominent,  sometimes  formed 
in  special  branches  and  then  supported  by  a  quasi  short  stalk,  pericarp  often  thick, 
usually  provided  with  an  apical  pore,  often  joined  to  the  "nucleus"  by  sterile  strands, 
gonimoblast  arising  from  the  base  of  the  fruit,  richly  branched,  densely  crowded  and 
confluent,  usually  hemispherical-convex,  forming  spores  singly  or  in  chains  at  the  apices 
of  the  fertile  filaments. 

About  150  species  in  warm  and  temperate  seas,  especially  in  Australian  regions. 


MARINE   Al<GJE  OF  BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  483 

KEY  TO   GENERA. 

Cystocarps  not  formed  in  special  branches;  gonimob last  composed  of  several  coalescent  tufts 
of  branches,  rather  lax,  the  apices  of  the  branches  unequally  extended;  tetrasporangia 
cruciately  divided L  Gracilaria  (p.  483). 

Cystocarps  not  formed  in  special  branches;  cavity  of  the  sporocarp  traversed  by  a  lax  net 
from  the  threads  of  which  arise  numerous  glomeruli  of  spore-bearing  filaments;  tetra- 
sporangia zonately  divided 2.  Hypnea  (p.  485). 

Genus  i .  Gracilaria  Greville. 

Gracilaria,  Greville,  1830,  p.  121. 

Frond  terete  or  flattened,  dichotomously  or  laterally  branched,  structure  densely 
cellular,  inner  cells  large,  outer  ones  smaller,  cortical  ones  minute,  sometimes  developed 
into  vertical  filaments;  tetrasporangia  scattered  over  the  surface  among  the  cortical 
cells,  cruciately  divided;  antheridia  scattered  over  the  branches,  in  small,  flask-shaped 
cavities  opening  to  the  exterior  by  a  pore;  cystocarps  scattered  over  the  thallus,  promi- 
nent, hemispherical,  pericarp  thick,  usually  free  (not  joined  to  the  "nucleus"  by  sterile 
strands) ,  composed  of  outwardly  radiating  rows  of  cells,  finally  opening  by  an  apical  pore; 
"nucleus"  hemispherical-convex,  arising  from  the  base  of  the  fruit,  bearing  filaments 
of  unequal  length  from  its  convex  surface;  carpospores  obovate  or  oblong  produced  in 
longer  or  shorter  chains  from  the  apical  segments  of  the  filaments. 

About  50  species,  all  marine,  generally  distributed,  many  of  the  species  exceedingly 
varied  in  habit  and  distinguished  with  difficulty. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

Frond  terete,  slender,  light  to  dark  red,  branching  profuse,  fairly  regular,  lateral,  in  all 

planes , i.  G.  confervoides  (p.  483). 

Frond  from  flat  to  slightly  flattened  or  rather  terete,  coarse,  usually  purple  to  dark  green, 
branching  sparse,  irregular,  dichotomous  or  polychotomous^and  lateral,  more  or  less  in 
one  plane 2.  G.  multipartite  (p.  484). 

i.  Gracilaria  confervoides  (Linnaeus)  Greville.     PI.  XCIX,  fig.  i. 

F ucus  confervoides,  Linnaeus,  1753,  vol.  2,  p.  1629. 
Gracilaria  confemoi&es,  Greville,  1830,  p.  123. 
Gracilaria  confervoides.  Harvey,  1853,  p.  108. 
Gracilaria  confervoides,  De  Toni,  1900,  p.  431. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  384,  1041. 

Fronds  elongated,  terete,  vaguely  laterally  branched,  flagelliform,  0.5  to  3  mm.  diameter,  14  cm. 
to  i  m.  long,  branches  elongated,  subundivided,  branchlets  subsecund,  slightly  attenuated  at  both  ends, 
filiform,  more  or  less  numerous;  tetrasporangia  numerous,  immersed  among  the  cortical  cells  of  short 
filiform  branchlets;  cystocarps  prominent,  hemispherical,  numerous  on  all  sides  of  branches  and 
elongated  branchlets,  substance  fleshy-cartilaginous,  color  light  to  dark  red. 

Warm  and  temperate  seas. 

Very  abundant  throughout  harbor,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  attached  to  shells,  etc.,  April  to  November, 
less  abundant  on  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford  jetties,  abundant  on  Bogue  Beach,  abundant  in  North 
River,  few  specimens  on  coral  reef  offshore  May,  1907,  and  July  to  August,  1915,  fruiting  throughout 
season;  abundant  in  sound,  Wrightsville  Beach,  N.  C.,  attached  to  shells;  abundant  on  muddy  bottom 
of  tidal  marsh,  James  Island,  Charleston,  S.  C. ;  abundant  on  muddy  bottom  in  sound,  Port  Royal,  S.  C. 

The  species  varies  considerably  in  the  size  of  plants,  coarseness  of  fronds,  and  amount  of  branching, 
varying  from  coarse,  slightly  branched  forms  to  fine,  slender,  much-branched  ones.  The  habit  may  be 
dense  or  open,  according  as  the  branching  is  more  or  less  abundant,  but  in  all  the  typical  forms  the 
branching  is  fairly  regular  and  the  branches  are  long,  terete,  and  flexuous.  Although  some  of  the  speci- 
mens approach  G.  dura  (Ag.)  J.  Ag.  in  appearance  and  structure,  they  do  not  seem  separable  from  the 
other  specimens,  and  all  have  been  referred  to  G.  confervoides.  The  specimens  from  Charleston  and 


484  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

Port  Royal  formed  tangled,  irregularly  branched,  apparently  sterile  masses,  with  their  bases  embedded 
in  mud.  Their  appearance  was  quite  different  from  that  of  the  more  regular,  typical  forms  growing 
under  favorable  conditions  at  Beaufort. 

This  species,  after  being  thoroughly  washed  and  bleached,  has  been  successfully  used  at  Beaufort 
for  the  making  of  jellies  in  a  way  similar  to  the  use  of  the  "  Irish  moss, "  Chondrus  crispus,  of  our  northern 


a.  Gracilaria  multipartita  (Clemente)  J.  Agardh.     PI.  XCIX,  fig.  2. 

Fucus  multipartitus,  Clemente,  1807,  p.  3«- 
Gracilaria  multipartita.  J.  Agardh,  1842,  p.  151. 
Gracilaria  multipartita,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  107. 
Gracilaria  multipartita,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  164. 
Gracilaria  multipartita,  De  Toni,  1900,  p.  447. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  885. 

Fronds  from  flat  to  slightly  flattened  or  rather  terete ,  irregularly  dichotomously  or  polychotomously 
and  laterally  branched,  i  to  10  mm.  wide,  6  to  36  cm.  long,  branches  short  or  long,  sometimes  almost 
simple;  tetrasporangia  immersed  among  the  cortical  cells  of  the  upper  segments  or  over  the  greater 
part  of  the  frond ;  cystocarps  veiy  prominent,  scattered  over  the  greater  part  of  the  frond ;  texture  coarse, 
substance  cartilaginous,  color  rose  red  to  purple  to  olive  green  to  light  green. 

American  and  European  shores  of  temperate  North  Atlantic. 

Abundant  on  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford  jetties,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  throughout  the  year  from  low 
water  to  1.3  m.  below  low  water,  less  abundant  attached  to  shells  in  harbor,  abundant  on  Bogue  Beach, 
fairly  abundant  in  North  River;  abundant  in  Core  Sound  at  Lecklys  Island  and  Davis  Island,  fruiting 
throughout  year;  very  abundant,  Ocracoke,  N.  C.;  abundant  in  sound,  Wrightsville  Beach,  N.  C.; 
abundant  in  bay,  New  Inlet,  Southport,  N.  C. ;  fairly  abundant  on  jetty  exposed  to  sea,  Norris  Island, 
Charleston,  S.  C.,  from  top  of  rocks  washed  by  waves  to  depth  of  15  cm. 

Var.  angustissima  Harvey. 

Gracilaria  multipartita  var.  angustissima,  Harvey,  ,1853,  p.  107. 
Gracilaria  multipartita  var.  angustissima,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  164. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  240,  634. 

Fronds  rather  slender  and  terete,  slightly  flattened,  especially  at  the  axils,  0.5  to  3  mm.  wide,  8  to 
32  cm.  tall,  branching  more  or  less  regularly  dichotomous,  often  irregular,  usually  palmatifid  at  the  tips. 

Extremely  abundant  rooted  in  mud  in  mouth  of  one  creek  in  sound,  Port  Royal,  S.  C. 

This  species  is  exceedingly  various  in  habit,  size,  diameter,  amount  of  flattening,  and  manner  and 
amount  of  branching,  varying  from  plants  up  to  4  mm.  wide  and  12.5  cm.  tall,  greatly  flattened 
throughout,  to  plants  i  to  1.5  mm.  wide  and  36.5  cm.  tall,  nearly  terete  over  most  of  thallus.  Some  of 
the  specimens  closely  resemble  specimens  referred  to  G.  compressa  (Ag.)  Grev.  and  other  species,  but 
all  so  overlap  that  it  is  impossible  to  separate  them  into  more  than  one  species,  and  all  are  accordingly 
referred  to  G.  multipartita.  The  variety  is  not  separable  from  the  species  and  many  of  the  Beaufort 
specimens  might  properly  be  called  var.  angustissima.  The  specimens  from  Port  Royal  referred  to 
the  variety  are  slender,  i  mm.  in  diameter,  10  to  13  cm.  tall,  fairly  regularly  dichotomous. 

Three  specimens  (two  cystocarpic  and  one  antheridial)  collected  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C., 
August,  1908,  several  fragments  found  on  the  beach  at  different  times,  and  one  specimen  dredged  from 
the  coral  reef  offshore  May,  1907,  differ  decidedly  in  appearance  from  all  other  specimens  of  the  species 
from  this  region  being  thinner  and  more  delicate  and  membranaceous  when  dry  and  being  rosy  pink 
instead  of  green  or  purple,  as  are  the  other  specimens;  they  have  the  appearance  of  species  of  Haly- 
menia.  The  structure  of  the  antheridia  and  the  cystocarps,  however,  certainly  refers  them  to  this 
genus,  and  the  structure  of  the  frond  is  like  that  of  undoubted  specimens  of  G.  multipartita. 

Specimens  of  G.  confervoides  and  G.  multipartita  have  frequently  been  wrongly  determined  by  col- 
lectors and  are  confused  in  herbaria.  In  this  region,  however,  they  are  fairly  distinct,  although  G.  mul- 
tipartita var.  angustissima  approaches  some  of  the  coarser  forms  of  G.  confervoides.  They  may  be  dis- 
tinguished as  follows:  G.  confervoides  is  terete  throughout,  branching  fairly  regular,  branches  usually 
long  and  tapering  at  each  end,  substance  usually  less  cartilaginous  and  habit  finer  than  in  other  species, 
color  some  shade  of  red.  G.  multipartita  is  flattened  in  some  of  its  extent,  if  mostly  terete  is  flattened  in 
axils,  in  such  cases  is  often  palmately  divided  at.  flattened  apices  of  branches,  branching  irregular, 
substance  more  cartilaginous  and  habit  coarser  than  in  other  species,  color  from  light  green  to  dark  green 
to  dark  reddish  purple. 


MARINE   Al^GM  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  485 

On  our  coast  G.  confervoides  is  the  more  southern  form,  being  recorded  for  only  one  locality  north 
of  Long  Island  Sound.  At  Beaufort  G.  confer-voides  occurs  mainly  in  the  harbor  and  has  been  found 
only  from  April  to  November;  G.  multipartita  occurs  mainly  on  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford  jetties 
and  remains  throughout  the  year. 

Genus  2.  Hypnea  Lamouroux. 

Hypnea,  Lamouroux,  1813,  p.  131. 

Frond  filiform,  rather  terete,  virgately  or  divaricately,  more  or  less  richly  branched 
on  all  sides,  often  with  numerous  short,  spinelike  branchlets;  fertile  and  sterile  specimens 
often  very  different  in  appearance;  structure  cellular,  traversed  by  a  more  or  less  evi- 
dent segmented  central  axis,  inner  cortex  dense,  composed  of  larger  cells  within,  smaller 
ones  toward  the  surface,  outer  cortex  thin,  composed  of  small  vertical  cells  arranged  in 
subsingle  series;  tetrasporangia  scattered,  embedded  in  the  thickened  outer  cortex  of 
slightly  swollen  ultimate  branchlets,  zonately  divided;  cystocarps  almost  spherical, 
prominent  on  ultimate  branchlets,  pericarp  fairly  thick,  sometimes  perforated  by  an 
apical  pore,  sometimes  opening  only  by  the  separation  of  cells  at  the  apex,  attached  to 
the  base  of  the  cystocarpic  cavity  by  a  network  of  filaments,  gonimoblast  arising  from 
the  base  of  the  cystocarpic  cavity,  much  branched,  attached  here  and  there  to  the  net- 
work of  sterile  filaments  and  at  these  points  giving  off  radiating  tufts  of  short  filaments 
whose  end  cells  form  short  chains  of  carpospores;  antheridia  arising  on  the  surface, 
forming  a  row  of  four  spermatia  from  each  spermatangium ;  tetrasporangia,  cystocarps, 
and  antheridia  borne  on  different  plants. 

About  25  species  in  temperate  and  tropical  seas. 

Some  of  the  species  are  easily  distinguished,  but  some  are  separated  by  slight  (per- 
haps doubtful)  characters  and  are  very  difficult  to  determine.  Determination  is  made 
still  more  difficult  by  the  diversity  in  different  forms  of  the  same  species,  the  cystocarpic 
plants  of  different  species  being  said  in  some  cases  to  resemble  each  other  more  than  do 
the  cystocarpic  and  tetrasporic  plants  of  the  same  species.  A  revision  of  the  genus  is 
needed,  and  such  a  study  will  probably  separate  the  species  along  different  lines  from 
those  used  at  present. 
Hypnea  musciformis  (Wulfen)  Lamouroux.  PI.  C;  PI.  CI,  figs,  i  and  2. 

Fucus  musciformis,  Wulfen,  1789,  p.  154,  pi.  14,  f.  a. 
Hypnea  musciformis,  Lamouroux,  1813,  p.  131. 
Hypnea  musciformis,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  123. 
Hypnea  musciformis,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  156. 
Hypnea  musciformis,  De  Toni,  1900,  p.  472. 
P.  B.-A~.  Nos.  196,  2185. 

Fronds  filiform,  4  to  50  cm.  tall,  virgately  or  divaricately,  more  or  less  richly  branched,  branches 
long,  virgate,  and  rather  sparingly  clothed  with  small  subulate  branchlets,  or  short,  bearing  numerous 
short  branches  which  are  densely  covered  with  minute,  spinelike  branchlets;  apices  of  the  branches 
often  thickened  and  recurved  to  form  tendrils,  either  naked  or  bearing  short  branches  on  their  convex 
surfaces;  tetrasporangia  immersed  in  the  thickened  outer  cortex,  scattered  over  swollen  portions  at  or 
near  the  bases  of  small  subulate  ultimate  branchlets,  zonately  divided;  cystocarps  prominent,  usually 
on  small  spinelike  or  subulate  ultimate  branchlets;  cystocarpic  and  tetrasporic  plants  sometimes 
differing  in  habit;  color  dark  green  to  light  reddish  green. 

Warm  and  temperate  seas. 

Very  abundant  on  Fort  Macon  jetties  and  in  harbor,  Beaufort,  N.  C. ;  less  abundant  on  Shackleford 
jetties,  attached  to  rocks,  shells,  and  Zostera,  from  low  water  to  60  or  90  cm.  below  low  water,  fruiting, 
May  to  October,  less  abundant  and  usually  sterile,  November  to  April;  one  plant  dredged  from  coral 
reef  offshore,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1915;  abundant  in  Newport  River  near  Green  Rock,  in  North 


486  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 

River,  and  in  Core  Sound  at  Davis  Island  and  Lennoxville.  Very  abundant  at  Ocracoke,  N.  C. ,  on  rocks, 
shells,  and  Zostera  from  low  water  to  60  cm.  below  low  water.  Abundant  in  sound  near  inlet,  Wrights- 
ville  Beach,  N.  C.,  on  shells  15  to  45  cm.  below  low  water.  Few  plants  about  2  cm.  tall  in  sound  near 
inlet,  Pawleys  Island,  near  Georgetown,  S.  C. 

The  species  varies  greatly  in  appearance.  Three  types  connected  by  numerous  intermediate  forms 
may  be  distinguished.  The  first  (PI.  C,  fig.  i)  has  an  elongated,  slender,  open  habit;  the  principal 
branches  are  not  very  closely  set  and  are  long -and  virgate ;  the  subsidiary  branches  are  small  and  slender 
and  are  rather  scatteringly  arranged  on  the  main  axis  and  the  principal  branches;  the  ultimate  branchlets 
are  numerous  on  the  main  axis  and  the  branches,  being  short,  slender,  simple,  spinelike  processes  from 
a  narrow  base ;  the  apices  of  the  main  branches  and  of  some  of  the  subsidiary  branches  are  often  incurved 
and  thickened  to  form  tendrils.  The  second  type  (PI.  C,  fig.  2)  has  an  elongated,  more  or  less  slender 
habit,  varying  from  rather  open  to  rather  dense;  the  principal  branches  are  more  or  less  closely  set, 
more  or  less  elongated,  and  more  or  less  virgate;  the  subsidiary  branches  are  more  richly  branched, 
and  more  closely  set  on  the  main  axis  and  principal  branches  than  in  the  first  type,  and  are  often 
larger;  the  ultimate  branchlets  more  or  less  densely  clothe  the  main  axis  and  the  branches,  being 
shorter  or  longer,  slender  or  coarser,  simple  or  branched,  spinelike  processes  from  a  narrow  or  wider 
base;  the  apices  of  the  branches  are  usually  straight  and  tapering,  but  are  sometimes  slightly  incurved. 
The  third  type  (PI.  CI,  fig.  i)  has  a  shorter,  rigid,  dense  habit;  the  principal  branches  are  closely  set, 
short  or  slightly  elongated,  and  divaricate;  the  subsidiary  branches  are  short  and  coarse  and  are  closely 
set  on  the  main  axis  and  the  principal  branches;  the  ultimate  branchlets  densely  clothe  the  main  axis 
and  the  principal  branches,  being  short,  coarse,  branched,  staghornlike  processes  from  a  broad  base; 
the  apices  of  the  branches  are  straight  and  taper  only  at  the  very  ends. 

These  types  are  not  sharply  defined,  and  different  branches  of  the  same  frond  may  show  the  char- 
acters of  two  or  even  of  all  three  types.  The  statements  of  previous  authors  that  tetrasporic  and  cysto- 
carpic  plants  show  constant  differences  in  habit  do  not  hold  strictly  in  the  present  case.  Although  the 
majority  of  plants  of  the  first  type  are  tetrasporic,  and,  so  far  as  observed,  all  the  plants  of  the  third 
type  are  cystocarpic,  the  first  type  includes  cystocarpic  plants  also,  and  the  second  type  includes  both 
tetrasporic  and  cystocarpic  plants.  In  many  cases  the  tetrasporic  and  cystocarpic  plants  are  indis- 
tinguishable in  appearance. 

Although  some  of  the  Beaufort  plants  have  characters  that  are  given  for  H.  armata  (Mert.)  J.  Ag. 
and  H.  divaricate  Grev.,  others  closely  resemble  the  type  of  H.  musciformis  and  other  authentic  speci- 
mens of  this  species  and  are  so  connected  with  the  extreme  variants  by  intermediate  forms  that  it  seems 
impossible  to  place  the  specimens  in  more  than  one  species. 

Of  the  plants  observed  from  July  to  October,  about  80  per  cent  were  tetrasporic  and  20  per  cent 
cystocarpic.  Only  one  antheridial  plant  has  been  found.  In  unfavorable  situations  and  in  spring 
(April  21,  1908)  all  the  fruiting  plants  observed  were  tetrasporic.  The  species  winters  in  this  region 
by  means  of  small,  matted,  slender  specimens  i  to  6.5  cm.  tall,  with  short,  fine  branches  (PI.  CI,  fig. 
2).  All  such  specimens  observed,  with  the  exception  of  some  collected  April,  1908,  were  sterile.  During 
the  season  1908-9  all  specimens  observed  as  late  as  October  17  had  their  usual  summer  size  and  appear- 
ance; those  collected  November  18  were  all  in  the  winter  condition  as  described  above;  this  condition 
was  .maintained  through  the  collection  of  April  15;  but  on  May  14  the  species  was  abundant,  with  all 
the  plants  in  the  summer  condition,  many  being  as  tall  as  22  cm. 

The  incurved  tips  function  in  a  way  similar  to  the  tendrils  of  flowering  plants,  clasping  any  small 
support  which  they  may  find,  firmly  attaching  themselves  by  outgrowths  from  the  surface  of  contact, 
and  sometimes  penetrating  within  the  supporting  body.  In  one  case  a  plant  of  this  species  was  observed 
with  its  tendrils  so  closely  wrapped  about  a  stem  of  Leptogorgia  -virgulata  that  they  had  formed  con- 
strictions in  the  hydroid,  the  ends  of  many  tendrils  were  embedded  in  the  Leptogorgia,  and  some  of 
them  bore  branches  within  its  body.  Since  this  Leptogorgia  does  not  continue  to  increase  in  diameter, 
it  would  seem  that  this  was  due  to  the  active  constriction  and  penetration  of  the  algal  tendrils.  The 
rapidity  with  which  this  alga  may  make  active  attachments  is  indicated  by  the  fact  that  when  plants 
were  placed  in  a  jar  of  sea  water  with  oyster  shells  they  had  attached  themselves  to  the  shells  within 
24  hours  by  the  tips  of  several  branches.  Similar  cases  have  been  observed  under  natural  conditions, 
some  branches  bending  over  and  attaching  themselves  by  their  tips  to  the  substratum. 


MARINE   A^GJE   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  487 

Family  2.  RHODYMENIACEyE  (Nasgeli)  Harvey. 

Thallus  terete,  compressed  or  flat,  solid  or  hollow,  or  with  inflated  portions,  usually 
erect,  less  often  horizontally  expanded,  usually  furcately  or  laterally  branched,  some- 
times variously  proliferate  or  lobate,  structure  usually  cellular;  tetrasporangia  embedded 
in  the  outer  cortex,  scattered  over  the  surface  or  confined  to  nematheciumlike,  thickened 
portions,  usually  cruciately,  more  rarely  triangularly  or  zonately  divided;  antheridia 
variously  formed;  carpogonia  closely  associated  with  cells  which,  after  fertilization,  form 
the  auxiliary  cells;  cystocarps  rather  prominent,  pericarp  thick,  usually  opening  by  an 
apical  pore,  free  or  joined  to  the  basal  placenta  by  filamentous  strands,  gonimoblast 
more  or  less  compact,  divided  into  several  lobes  formed  simultaneously  or  successively 
and  arising  from  a  large  stalk  cell  situated  in  the  middle  of  the  placenta,  forming 
carpospores  from  nearly  all  the  cells. 

Nearly  200  species,  in  nearly  all  seas,  especially  in  warmer  regions,  but  some  in 
Arctic  waters. 

KEY  TO  GENERA 
a.  Frond  solid,  erect,  flattened b. 

b.  Tetrasporangia  situated  in  definite  swollen  regions  of  the  thallus i.  Rhodymenia  (p.  487). 

bb.  Tetrasporangia  borne  in  sori  scattered  over  the  surface 2.  Agardhinula  (p.  488). 

aa.  Frond  hollow,  tubular,  terete  or  slightly  flattened c. 

c.  Tetrasporangia    cruciately   divided;    frond    hollow  in    certain  regions  or  throughout 

3.  Chrysymenia  (p.  489). 

cc.  Tetrasporangia  triangularly  divided;  frond  hollow  throughout,  segmented  by  constric- 
tions here  and  there,  sometimes  with  transverse  diaphragms d. 

d.  Frond  hollow  throughout,  lacking  transverse  diaphragms 4.  Lomentaria  (p.  491). 

dd.  Frond  hollow,  but  segmented  by  transverse  diaphragm  at  the  constrictions;  pericarp 

with  apical  pore 5.  Champia  (p.  492). 

Genus  i.  Rhodymenia  Greville. 

Rhodymenia,  Greville,  1830,  pp.  XL VIII,  84. 

Frond  flat,  dichotomously  or  palmately  divided,  often  with  proliierations  from  the 
margins,  usually  stalked  below;  structure  cellular,  central  axis  lacking,  medullary  cells 
fairly  large,  oblong,  crowded,  cortical  cells  minute,  vertically  subradiate;  tetrasporangia 
usually  confined  to  definite  regions  of  the  thallus,  which  are  sometimes  swollen  like 
nemathecia,  embedded  among  the  cortical  cells,  cruciately  divided;  antheridia  forming 
superficial  sori  consisting  of  single  layers  of  minute,  hyaline,  vertical  cells;  cystocarps 
scattered  over  the  frond,  hemispherical,  opening  by  an  apical  pore,  fruiting  cavity  not 
filled  by  a  filamentous  network,  gonimoblast  inconspicuously  lobate,  arising  from  the 
base  of  the  cavity,  the  young  lobes  composed  of  segmented  filaments,  the  mature  ones 
having  many  rotund  carpospores  irregularly  grouped  in  masses,  somewhat  inclosed  by 
a  gelatinous  covering. 

About  20  species,  widely  distributed. 
Rhodymenia  palmetta  (Esper)  Greville.     PI.  CI,  figs.  3  and  4. 

Fucus  palmetta,  Esper,  1797,  p.  84,  pi.  40. 
Rhodymenia  palmetta,  Greville,  1830,  p.  88,  pi.  12. 
Rhodymenia  palmetta,  De  Toni,  1900,  p.  514. 

Frond  flat,  decompound-dichotomous,  i  to  20  mm.  wide,  2.5  to  18  cm.  tall,  cuneate  at  the  base, 
flabellately  expanded  above,  often  supported  by  a  cartilaginous  stipe  0.3  to  0.7  mm.  wide,  i  to  35  mm. 
long,  gradually  passing  into  the  widened  frond,  segments  linear,  margins  smooth,  apices  acuminate  or 
rotund;  tetrasporangia  forming  single,  rounded  sori  in  slightly  swollen  portions  of  the  frond  below  the 


488  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

apices  of  the  segments,  embedded  in  the  scarcely  altered  cortical  layer;  cystocarps  rather  prominent, 
hemispherical,  sessile,  on  the  margins  or  surface  of  the  terminal  segments;  texture  membranaceous  or 
slightly  fleshy;  color  light  to  dark  rose. 

Temperate  North  Atlantic;  Mediterranean. 

Occasional  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  April  to  September,  sometimes  fruiting,  occasional 
on  Fort  Macon  jetties  about  low  water  level,  May  to  August  since  1906,  few  plants  on  coral  reef  offshore, 
May,  1907,  and  August,  1915. 

The  habit  of  this  species  ranges  from  tall,  slender,  little-branched  forms  to  short,  wide,  compact, 
much-branched  ones;  the  texture  varies  from  thin,  membranaceous  to  rather  thick  fleshy;  the  widened 
frond  may  arise  almost  directly  from  the  base  or  may  be  borne  on  a  more  or  less  elongated  stipe.  Some- 
times the  older  portions  of  the  frond  are  membranaceous,  while  the  younger  apices  are  fleshy. 

At  Beaufort  the  plants  growing  on  the  jetties  were  compact,  fleshy,  and  much  branched,  while 
many  of  those  from  the  beach  were  membranaceous  and  sparingly  branched.  Plants  were  not  observed 
growing  in  the  harbor  before  -1906.  This  is  the  northern  known  limit  of  the  species  on  our  coast. 

Genus  2.  Agardhinula  De  Toni. 

Agardhinula,  De  Toni,  18973,  p.  64. 

Frond  flat,  dichotomously  branched,  structure  cellular,  the  medullary  portion  com- 
posed of  several  series  of  large,  rounded  cells,  with  smaller  cells  toward  the  periphery 
and  in  the  spaces  between  the  larger  ones,  the  cortical  portion  composed  of  i  to  3  layers  of 
small  cells,  sometimes  arranged  in  vertical  rows;  tetrasporangia  borne  in  sori  scattered 
over  the  surface,  immersed  in  the  thicker  portions  of  the  cortical  layer,  cruciately  divided ; 
cystocarps  prominent,  scattered  over  the  frond,  hemispherical,  opening  by  an  apical  pore, 
gonimoblast  attached  by  a  few  filaments  to  the  flat  base  of  the  fruiting  cavity,  forming 
a  compact,  rounded  mass  of  carpospores,  very  loosely  inclosed  by  branching  filaments 
running  from  the  wall  of  the  cystocarp. 

One  species. 

The  structure  of  the  frond  in  this  genus  is  between  that  of  Rhodymenia  and 
Chrysymenia,  more  nearly  resembling  the  latter. 

Agardhinula  browneae  (J.  Agardh)  De  Toni.     Fig.  33;  PI.  CII,  fig.  i. 

Callophyllis  browneae,  J.  Agardh,  1884,  p.  36. 
Diplocystis  brownece,  J.  Agardh,  1896,  p.  94- 
Agardhinula  brawnea,  De  Toni,  18973,  p.  64. 
Agardhinula  brawnece,  De  Toni,  1900,  p.  523. 

Frond  flat,  decompound-dichotomous  or  somewhat  palmate,  sometimes  proliferous  from  the  slightly 
thickened  margin,  10  to  30  cm.  or  more  tall,  i  to  5.5  cm.  wide,  rather  thick,  tapering  below  to  a  cuneate 
base,  segments  spreading  above  rounded  sinuses,  lower  ones  wide,  upper  ones  narrower,  linear  below, 
dilated  above,  apices  truncate  or  oblong-obtuse;  tetrasporangia  in  more  or  less  confluent  sori  covering 
most  of  the  surface  and  separated  by  sterile  areas;  cystocarps  very  prominent,  densely  scattered  over 
the  frond,  less  abundant  toward  apices;  texture  cartilaginous-gelatinous;  color  light  pink. 

Florida. 

One  cystocarpic  plant,  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1903;  several  plants  cystocarpic  and 
tetrasporic,  Bogue  Beach,  September  2,  1903. 

This  species  has  not  been  previously  recorded  since  its  original  discovery  on  the  shore  of  Florida. 
The  Beaufort  plants  have  been  carefully  compared  with  a  photograph  and  a  fragment  of  the  type;  with 
this  they  agree  in  all  respects,  notably  in  the  structure  of  the  frond  and  the  cystocarp,  so  that  the  deter- 
mination seems  reasonably  sure.  Since  this  species  has  been  found  at  Beaufort  only  on  the  two  days 
mentioned  above,  it  seems  probable  that  these  plants  did  not  grow  in  this  region,  but  were  brought  here 
by  the  Gulf  Stream  from  some  remote  southern  locality. 


MARINE   ALGJE   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  489 

Genus  3.  Chrysymenia  J.  Agardli. 
Chrysymenia,  J.  Agardh,  1842,  p.  105. 

Frond  terete  or  somewhat  flattened,  hollow  in  parts  or  throughout  the  entire  length, 
sometimes  segmented  by  constrictions,  .variously  branched,  sometimes  caulescent  and 
almost  solid  below  with  hollow,  vesicular,  bladderlike  lateral  branches  above;  filled  with 
loose  jelly;  structure  cellular,  central  axis  lacking,  inner  cells  large,  outer  ones  smaller, 
cortical  ones  minute,  scattered  filaments  sometimes  traversing  the  internal  tube;  tetra- 
sporangia  scattered  over  the  thallus  surface,  embedded  among  the  cortical  cells,  cru- 


Fig.  31. — Meristotheca  duchassain-yii,  showing  tetrasporangia 
and  internal  structure  (diagrammatic)  X  30. 

Fig.  32. — Meristotheca  duchassaingii,  showing  internal  struc- 
ture and  tetrasporangium,  X  183. 

Fig.  33. — Agardhinula  browneee,  structure  of  thallus  and 
cystocarp,  X  3°- 


Fig.  34.— Chrysymenia  agardhii,  cross  section  of  thallus. 
XiR3. 

Fig.  3$.—NitophyUum  medium  (type),  surface  view  show- 
ing veins  and  cells,  X  33. 


ciately  divided;  cystocarps  scattered  over  the  frond,  fairly  conspicuous,  hemispherical, 
opening  by  an  apical  pore,  fruiting  cavity  with  a  trace  of  a  filamentous  network  or 
entirely  lacking  this,  gonimoblast  arising  from  the  base  of  the  oavity,  composed  of  several 
coalescent  lobes,  bearing  many  rotund  carpospores  irregularly  grouped  in  masses, 
somewhat  inclosed  by  a  gelatinous  covering. 

Fifteen  to  twenty  species  in  warm  seas.  Some  of  the  species  of  this  genus  resemble 
in  external  appearance  species  of  Halymenia,  from  which  they  may  usually  be  distin- 
guished by  their  structure.  In  the  species  of  Chrysymenia  the  frond  is  hollow  or  nearly 
so,  the  wall  consisting  of  one  or  two  loose  layers  of  large  cells  surrounded  by  one  or  two 
layers  of  small  cortical  cells;  there  are  usually  no  filaments  traversing  the  cavity.  In 


490  BULLETIN    OF  THE  BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

Halymenia  the  thallus  wall  is  denser,  being  composed  of  smaller,  more  closely  crowded 
cells,  and  the  cavity  is  traversed  by  numerous  more  or  less  densely  crowded  filaments. 

KEY   TO   SPECIES. 

Frond  flat,  leaflike ; i.  C.  agardhii  (p.  490). 

Frond  hollow-tubular  and  gelatinous-membranaceous  throughout;  laterally  decompound 

2.  C.  enteromorpha  (p.  490). 

Frond  caulescent,  solid  and  rigid  below,  dichotomously  branched,  bearing  numerous  hollow, 
gelatinous-membranaceous,  obovate,  bladderlike  lateral  branches  below  the  apices 
3.  C.  uuaria  (p.  491). 

1.  Chrysymenia  agardhii  Harvey.     Fig.  34;  PI.  CII,  fig.  2. 

Chrysymenia  agardhii,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  i?p,  pi.  30  A. 
Chrysymenia  agardhii,  De  Toni,  1900,  p.  538. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  746- 

Frond  flat,  leaflike,  5  to  20  cm.  long,  about  2  to  5  cm.  wide,  broadly  cuneate  at  the  base  and  tapering 
gradually  into  a  rather  short  stipe,  dichotomous  or  subpalmately  laciniate,  sometimes  simple,  sometimes 
irregularly  pinnate  by  lobes  from  the  margins;  segments  rather  broad,  approximate  above  narrow  axils, 
marginal  ones  somewhat  attenuate  toward  the  base,  terminal  ones  attenuate,  obtuse;  margin  wavy, 
usually  eroso-denticulate ;  thallus  rather  thick,  bearing  a  more  or  less  conspicuous  cavity  traversed  by 
branched,  segmented  filaments,  which  are  fairly  numerous  in  some  places,  sometimes  joining  the  thallus 
walls,  wall  composed  of  one  or  two  layers  of  very  large  cells  bordered  by  i  to  3  layers  of  small  cortical 
cells;  cystocarps  rather  prominent,  bluntly  conical,  scattered  over  the  surface  of  the  segments;  color 
bright  rose,  becoming  pale  rose  or  brownish  when  dry;  texture  gelatinous-membranaceous. 

Florida. 

Four  sterile  plants  7  to  18  cm.  long,  dredged  on  coral  reef  offshore  from  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1914. 

This  species  resembles  Halymenia  floridana  and  H.  gelinaria.  From  the  former  it  is  distinguished 
by  its  more  gelatinous  texture  and  its  thicker  frond,  with  larger  cells  and  fewer  internal  filaments. 
From  the  latter  it  is  distinguished  by  its  less  gelatinous  texture,  its  thicker  frond  with  larger,  more 
numerous  cells,  and  the  absence  of  papillae  on  the  surface. 

In  none  of  the  specimens  has  there  been  observed  as  abundant  filaments  or  as  thick  a  cortex  as  is 
figured  by  Harvey,  and  the  cortical  cells  have  not  been  observed  in  vertically  seriate  rows.  Thick 
sections,  however,  especially  under  low  magnification ,,  may  give  an  appearance  similar  to  that  shown 
in  Harvey's  illustrations. 

This  is  the  northern,  known  limit  of  the  species  and  of  the  genus. 

2.  Chrysymenia  enteromorpha  Harvey.     PI.  CIII. 

Chrysymenia  enteromorpha,  Harvey,  1853,  p..  187. 
Chrysymenia  enteromorpha,  De  Toni,  1900,  p.  545. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  386. 

Frond  tubular-hollow,  terete  or  flattened,  about  5  to  30  cm.  tall,  4  to  8  mm.  in  diameter,  arising 
from,  a  slightly  tapering  base,  laterally  decompound  branches  elongated,  similar  to  the  main  axis,  con- 
stricted at  their  bases,  apices  obtuse,  often  narrowed  below  the  apex  and  terminated  by  an  obtuse 
apiculum;  main  branches  flattened  or  terete,  ultimate  branches  and  branchlets  terete;  thallus  wall 
consisting  of  one  or,  more  rarely,  two  loose  layers  of  large  cells  bounded  by  a  single  layer  of  minute 
cortical  cells;  cavity  of  frond  filled  with  soft  jelly;  tetrasporangia  inconspicuous,  scattered  over  the  sur- 
face without  order  among  the  cortical  cells,  cruciately  divided;  cystocarps  small,  not  very  prominent, 
scattered  over  the  branches;  texture  delicate  gelatinous-membranaceous;  color  light  yellowish  to  rosy 
pink. 

Florida  and  West  Indies. 

Two  specimens,  one  tetrasporic,  the  other  cystocarpic,  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1907, 
one  specimen  dredged  from  coral  reef  offshore,  August,  1914. 

The  specimens  from  Bogue  Beach  (PI.  CIII,  fig.  i)  and  the  one  from  the  coral  reef  (PI.  CIII,  fig. 
2)  differ  greatly  in  appearance,  although  both  seem  to  come  within  the  range  of  the  species. 


MARINE   ALGM   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  491 

The  doubt  expressed  by  De  Toni  (1.  c.)  concerning  the  placing  of  this  species  in  this  genus  appar- 
ently based  on  the  lack  of  knowledge  concerning  the  method  of  division  of  the  tetrasporangia,  seems 
removed  by  the  observation  of  the  author  that  these  divide  cruciately,  as  is  characteristic  for  the  genus. 

This  is  the  northern  known  limit  of  the  species  and  of  the  genus. 

3.  Chrysymenia  uvaria  (Linnaeus)  J.  Agardh.    PI.  CIV,  fig.  i. 

Fucus  crvarius,  Linnaeus,  1765,  Tom.  3,  p.  714. 
Chrysymenia  uvaria.  J.  Agardh,  1842,  p.  106. 
Chrysymenia  uvaria,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  191,  pi.  ao  B. 
Chrysymenia  uvaria,  De  Toni,  1900,  p.  543. 
A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  150. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  z8g.  1933. 

Frond  2.5  to  22  cm.  tall,  consisting  of  a  solid,  terete,  rigid,  dichotomous,  stemlike  portion  0.5  to 
i  mm.  in  diameter,  naked  below,  bearing  numerous  small,  hollow,  obovate,  bladderlike  lateral  branches 
on  short  stalks  above;  several  fronds  arising  from  a  common  disklike  attachment;  tetrasporangia  and 
cystocarps  borne  on  the  vesicular  lateral  branches;  tetrasporangia  immersed  in  the  cortical  layer,  tri- 
angularly divided;  cystocarps  not  abundant  in  any  branch,  not  very  prominent;  texture  of  stemlike 
portion  cartilaginous,  of  the  vesicular  lateral  branches  gelatinous-membranaceous;  color  rose. 

Florida;  West  Indies;  Bermuda;  Canary  Islands;  Mediterranean  and  adjoining  regions;  Hawaii. 

Occasional  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  summer  and  autumn,  fairly  abundant  on  coral  reef 
offshore  May,  1907,  August,  1914,  and  July  to  August,  1915. 

'Ehis  is  the  northern  known  limit  of  the  species  and  of  the  genus  on  our  coast. 


Genus  4.  Lomentaria  Lyngbye. 


Lomentaria,  Lyngbye,  1819,  p.  101 
Chylocladia,  De  Toni,  1900,  p.  572- 


Frond  terete  or  slightly  flattened,  hollow-tubular  throughout,  sometimes  segmented 
by  constrictions,  branching  various,  mostly  lateral ;  structure  cellular,  central  axis  lack- 
ing, thallus  wall  usually  rather  thin,  composed  of  three  layers,  a  loose  layer  of  elongated 
branched  filaments  bordering  the  internal  tube  and  sometimes  scatteringly  traversing 
this,  a  single  middle  layer  of  large  cells,  and  an  outer  layer  composed  of  more  or  less 
numerous  small  cortical  cells;  tetrasporangia  borne  on  slightly  dilated  branchlets,  in 
cavities  formed  by  the  depression  of  the  thallus  wall,  protruding  into  the  internal  cavity, 
scattered  or  sometimes  joined  into  groups,  triangularly  divided;  antheridia  borne  at  the 
ends  of  short,  cellular  filaments  arising  from  the  cortical  cells,  forming  superficial  sori; 
cystocarps  scattered  over  the  frond,  rather  prominent,  globose  or  subconical,  opening 
by  an  apical  pore,  fruiting  cavity  usually  lacking  a  filamentous  network  or  sometimes 
with  a  trace  of  this ;  gonimoblast  arising  from  the  base  of  the  cavity,  composed  of  several 
successively  formed  lobes,  bearing  numerous  oblong  or  obovate  carpospores  from  the 
outer  segments  of  branched  fruiting  filaments,  at  first  arranged  radiately,  at  length 
conglobate  without  conspicuous  order,,  usually  inclosed  by  a  gelatinous  covering,  pericarp 
connected  to  base  of  the  cystocarp  by  filamentous  strands  separating  the  groups  of  spores. 

About  15  species,  in  warm  and  temperate  seas. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

Frond  rather  terete ,  branching  irregular,  often  secund,  branches  slender,  often  recurved 

i .    L.  uncinata  (p.  492 ) . 

Frond  somewhat  flattened,  branching  regular,  distichous,  branches  compact,  not  recurved 

2.  L.  rosea  (p.  492). 


492  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

1.  Lomentaria  uncinata  Meneghini.     PI.  CIV,  fig.  2. 

Lomentaria  uncinata,  Meneghini,  in  Zanardini,  1840,  p.  215  (21). 
Chylodadia  baileyana,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  185,  pi.  20  C. 
Lomentaria  uncinata,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  154, 
Chylodadia  9  uncinata,  De  Toni,  1900,  p.  574. 
A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  75  (Lomentaria  baileyana). 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  886,  1399- 

Frond  rather  terete,  o.i  to  i  mm.  in  diameter,  r  to  12  cm.  tall,  hollow  throughout,  not  segmented 
by  constrictions,  branching  usually  fairly  profuse,  irregular,  often  secund,  branches  tapering,  often 
recurved,  sometimes  becoming  attached  by  their  apices,  branchlets  fusiform,  constricted  at  the  base, 
tapering  at  apex,  and  irregularly  borne;  tetrasporangia  in  slightly  thickened  branchlets;  antheridia 
usually  occurring  on  separate  plants,  usually  borne  at  the  apices  of  branches,  in  enlarged,  spherical 
heads  composed  of  short,  radiating,  club-shaped,  2  to  4  celled  filaments  arising  from  the  cortical  cells 
and  bearing  the  antheridia  at  their  apices;  cystocarps  ovoid,  sessile  on  the  branchlets;  texture  gelati- 
nous-membranaceous;  color  dull  rose,  sometimes  yellowish  or  greenish. 

New  England  to  Florida  and  West  Indies;  Mediterranean. 

Fairly  abundant  along  town  front  and  on  Fort  Macon  jetties,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  April,  1908,  occa- 
sional on  other  algae  and  on  Ascidian,  Styela  plicata,  in  harbor,  summer  and  autumn,  fairly  abundant 
on  sea  buoy,  September,  1905.  One  small  mass  on  buoy  in  sound,  Port  Royal,  S.  C.,  August,  1909. 

This  species  is  most  easily  recognized  by  its  recurved  branches,  which  may  bend  down  and  become 
attached  at  the  apices.  Stich  branches  may  give  off  other  branches  from  their  convex  sides,  some  of 
which  may  in  turn  bend  down  and  become  attached,  the  continuation  of  this  process  giving  rise  to  an 
appearance  like  a  series  of  arches.  The  plants  of  this  species  growing  in  the  harbor  at  Beaufort  in  April, 
1908,  were  well  developed,  being  2  to  4  cm.  tall ;  those  found  during  the  summer  and  autumn  are  minute, 
scarcely  recognizable  forms  i  cm.  or  less  in  height. 

2.  Lomentaria  roses  (Harvey)  Thuret.     PI.  CIV,  fig.  3. 

Chylodadia  rosea,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  186. 
Lomentaria  rosea,  Thuret  in  Le  Jolis,  1863,  p.  131. 
Lomenlaria  rosea,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  155. 
Chylodadia  rosea,  De  Toni,  1900,  p.  575. 
A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  17. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  1241. 

Frond  somewhat  flattened,  i  to  4.5  mm.  wide,  2  to  7.5  cm.  tall,  hollow  throughout,  not  segmented 
by  constrictions,  .branching  usually  profuse,  branches  straight,  tapering,  bearing  numerous  distichous, 
opposite  or  alternate  simple,  or  pinnate  branchlets,  which  are  lanceolate-oblong  above  a  markedly 
constricted  base;  tetrasporangia  in  the  branchlets;  cystocarps  unknown;  texture  gelatinous-membra- 
naceous;  color  bright  rose. 

North  Atlantic  shores  of  America  and  Europe. 

One  well-developed  specimen  on  coral  reef  offshore,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  May,  1907. 

This  species  is  readily  distinguished  from  the  preceding  one  by  its  flattened  frond,  with  denser 
habit,  the  branches  not  recurved  at  the  apices,  the  branchlets  being  numerous,  distichous,  regularly 
opposite  or  alternate,  and  greatly  contracted  at  the  bases.  It  is  distinguished  from  Champia  parvula, 
which  it  somewhat  resembles,  by  the  lack  of  constrictions  and  transverse  diaphragms  segmenting  the 
frond. 

This  is  the  southern  known  limit  of  the  species. 

Genus  5.  Champia  Desvaux. 

Champia,  Desvaux,  1808,  p.  245. 

Frond  terete  or  slightly  flattened,  hollow-tubular,  but  septate  by  thin,  cellular, 
transverse  diaphragms  occurring  at  more  or  less  conspicuously  constricted  nodes,  branch- 
ing various;  structure  cellular,  central  axis  lacking,  thallus  wall  thin,  composed  of  more 
or  less  of  three  layers  (a  loose  layer  of  elongated  filaments  bordering  the  internal  tube 
and  sometimes  scatteringly  traversing  this,  connecting  the  diaphragms,  a  middle  layer 
of  larger  cells,  and  an  outer  layer  of  more  or  less  numerous  smaller  cortical  cells) ,  often 


MARINE  ALGM  OF  BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  493 

composed  of  a  single  layer  of  large  cells;  tetrasporangia  scattered  over  the  surface  of 
branches  and  branchlets  among  the  cortical  cells,  triangularly  divided;  antheridia  usually 
on  separate  plants,  borne  singly  on  the  tips  of  short  filaments  which  arise  in  branching 
clusters  from  the  thallus  cells;  cystocarps  scattered  over  the  frond,  ovate,  opening  by 
a  conspicuous  apical  pore,  arising  from  the  base  ot  the  cavity,  surrounded  by  a  filamentous 
network,  composed  of  several  simultaneously  or  successively  formed  lobes,  bearing 
numerous  oblong  or  obovate  carpospores  from  the  outer  segments  of  branched  fruiting 
filaments,  conglobate  without  conspicuous  order,  inclosed  by  a  gelatinous  covering. 
About  12  species,  in  warm  and  temperate  seas. 

Champia  parvula  (Agardh)  Harvey.     PI.  CIV,  fig.  4. 

Chondria  parvula,  Agardh,  1824,  p.  207. 

Champia  parvula,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  76. 

Champia  parvula,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  156,  pi.  15,  f.  a,  5. 

Champia  parvula,  De  Toni,  1900,  p.  558. 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  290,  592,  1934. 

Frond  slightly  flattened,  0.5  to  1.5  mm.  wide,  2  to  10  cm.  high,  branching  profuse,  often  intricate 
with  coalescent  branches  below,  branchlets  arising  alternately,  oppositely,  or  verticillately,  patent, 
apices  tapering  slightly,  obtuse,  bases  sometimes  slightly  constricted,  segments  of  the  frond  barrel 
shaped,  once  or  twice  as  long  as  broad;  tetrasporangia  scattered  over  the  branches  and  branchlets; 
antheridia  forming  patches  indefinite  in  extent,  occurring  sometimes  as  caps  at  the  ends  of  branches, 
usually  as  bands  around  older  portions  of  the  thallus;  cystocarps  ovate,  scattered,  sessile  on  the 
branches;  texture  gelatinous-membranaceous;  color  light  to  dark  pink,  sometimes  purplish  or  greenish. 

Warm  and  temperate  North  Atlantic;  Mediterranean. 

Fairly  abundant  throughout  harbor,  on  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford  jetties,  and  on  Bogue  Beach, 
Beaufort,  N.  C.,  April,  1908,  fairly  abundant  on  coral  reef  offshore,  May,  1907,  and  July  to  August, 
1915,  occasional  in  harbor,  on  jetties,  and  on  buoys  during  summer  and  autumn.  Rather  scarce  in  sound 
near  inlet,  Wrightsville  Beach,  N.  C.,  July,  1909. 

This  species  may  be  distinguished  easily  by  its  hollow-tubular  structure  septate  by  transverse 
diaphragms  at  more  or  less  evidently  constricted  nodes. 

Family  3.  DELESSERIACEL/E  (Nasgeli)  Schmitz. 

Thallus  flat,  very  rarely  filiform,  sometimes  perforate  or  reticulately  fenestrate, 
simple  or  forked  or  lobed  or  proliferous  in  various  ways,  structure  cellular,  sometimes 
provided  with  midrib  and  veins;  tetrasporangia  triangularly  divided,  usually  occurring 
in  sori  embedded  in  the  locally  thickened  cortex,  scattered  over  the  thallus  or  occurring 
on  special  portions,  usually  regularly  arranged  and  occurring  on  both  sides  of  the  thallus; 
antheridia,  where  known,  occurring  in  small,  roundish  sori  scattered  over  the  surface, 
usually  on  both  sides  of  the  thallus,  the  antheridia  being  cut  off  directly  from  thallus 
cells  and  giving  rise,  by  successive  division,  to  several  spermatia;  carpogonia  closely 
associated  with  cells  which  function  as  auxiliary  cells;  cystocarps  rather  prominent, 
sessile,  scattered  over  the  frond  or  occurring  on  special  portions,  opening  by  an  apical 
pore,  pericarp  usually  free  from  the  small  basal  placenta,  sometimes  joined  to  this  here 
and  there  by  remnants  of  the  filamentous  network,  gonimoblast  more  or  less  compact, 
composed  of  tufts  of  branched  filaments,  which  arise  from  a  large,  basal  stalk  cell,  are 
developed  simultaneously  or  successively,  are  loose  or  compact,  sometimes  being  grouped 
into  lobes,  and  bear  carpospores  singly  or  in  short  chains  or  groups  from  their  apices. 

Nearly  200  species,  in  nearly  all  seas,  principally  in  warmer,  especially  Australian, 
regions. 


494  BULLETIN  OF  THE  BUREAU   OF  FISHERIES. 

KEY  TO  GENERA. 

Frond  usually  dichotomously  or  pinnately  branched,  midrib  inconspicuous  or  lacking, 
veins,  when  present,  usually  forming  a  network  over  the  thallus i.  Nitophyllum  (p.  494). 

Frond  usually  simple,  sometimes  irregularly  branched,  midrib  conspicuous  below,  veins 
usually  not  visible  to  naked  eye,  arising  pinnately  from  the  midrib 2.  Grinnellia  (p.  495). 

Genus  i.  Nitophyllum  Greville. 
Nitophyllum,  Greville,  1830,  p.  77- 

Thallus  flat,  thin-membranaceous,  sessile  or  borne  on  a  short  stalk,  simple  or 
dichotomously  branched  or  lobed  or  divided  in  various  ways,  veins  present  or  absent, 
if  present  more  or  less  prominent,  sometimes  elevated,  much  branched  and  usually 
anastomosing,  sometimes  more  prominent,  branched,  usually  anastomosing  nerves  and 
occasionally  a  slight  midrib  also  present;  composed  of  one  or  a  few  layers  of  cells,  outer 
cells  large  and  irregularly  angular  in  surface  view,  squarish  or  oblong  in  section,  cells  of 
inner  layers  sometimes  different  from  the  outer  ones,  veins  and  nerves  composed  of 
several  layers  of  narrow,  elongated  cells;  apical  cell  evident  in  the  young  frond,  some- 
times persistent  for  a  while,  but  sooner  or  later  disappearing,  the  growth  of  the  adult 
frond  being  intercalary;  tetrasporangia  triangularly  divided,  occurring  in  sori  forming 
rounded,  flattened  thickenings  prominent  on  both  surfaces  of  the  frond,  variously  situ- 
ated in  different  species;  cystocarps  scattered  over  the  frond,  variously  situ- 
ated, sessile,  prominent  on  both  surfaces  of  the  thallus,  rounded,  slightly  flattened, 
opening  by  an  apical  pore,  gonimoblast  arising  from  the  base  of  the  cavity,  composed  of 
radiating,  branching,  segmented  filaments  more  or  less  compacted  into  lobes  producing 
carpospores  singly  or  in  short  chains  from  their  terminal  segments. 

About  75  species,  in  warm  and  temperate  seas. 

Nitophyllum  medium  sp.  nov.    Fig.  35;  PI.  CV;  PI.  CXIV,  figs.  4  and  5. 

Thallus  erect,  flat,  ribbonlike,  borne  on  a  (usually  short)  more  or  less  definite  stipe,  5  to  22  cm.  tall, 
4  to  19  mm.  wide,  decompound-dichotomously  branched,  margins  usually  undulate,  often  bearing 
minute  proliferations;  veins  numerous,  sometimes  conspicuous,  sometimes  invisible  to  the  naked  eye, 
repeatedly  branched,  subsingle  toward  apices,  anastomosing  frequently  throughout  most  of  thallus, 
coalescent  below  into  stipe ;  thallus  composed  of  a  single  layer  of  cells  except  at  margins  and  in  regions 
of  sori  and  veins,  margins  irregularly  more  or  less  thickened,  sori  usually  surrounded  by  more  or  less 
extensive  regions  three  cells  thick,  veins  three  to  five  (rarely  six)  cells  thick,  usually  one  (rarely  two) 
cells  wide,  sometimes  bordered  by  a  narrow  region  of  thallus  three  cells  thick;  tetrasporangial  sori 
numerous,  small,  prominent  on  both  surfaces,  borne  throughout  thallus  except  toward  base,  forming  more 
or  less  irregular  (often  very  irregular)  parallel  or  radiating  lines,  usually  between  the  veins;  antheridia 
and  cystocarps  unknown;  texture  thin-membranaceous;  color  light  pink  to  rose. 

Thallo  erecto,  piano,  plus  minus  definite  (plerumque  breve)  stuposa,  5-22  cm.  longo,  4-19  mm. 
lato,  decomposito-dichotome  ramoso,  marginibus  plerumque  undulatis,  saepe  proliferationes  minutas 
ferentibus;  venis  numerosis,  nunc  manifestis,  nunc  oculo  nudo  invisibilibus,  iterum  atque  iterum 
ramosis,  ad  apices  subsimplicibus,  per  maximam  partem  thalli  frequenter  anastomosantibus,  in  in- 
feriore  fronde  in  stipitem  coalescentibus;  thallo,  praeter  margines  et  regiones  sororum  et  venarum,  una 
pagina  cellularum  composite,  marginibus  inaequaliter  plus  minus  densis,  sons  plerumque  ab  regionibus 
plus  minus  latis,  3  cellulis  crassis,  cinctis,  venis  3-5  (rarius  6)  cellulis  crassis,  plerumque  i  (rarius  2) 
cellulis  latis,  aliquando  ab  regione  thalli  angusta  3  cellulis  crassa  tactis;  soris  tetrasporangiorum  numer- 
osis, parvis,  in  superficiebus  ambis  prominent! bus,  per  thallum,  praeter  partem  inferiorem  positis, 
lineas  plus  minus  irregulares  (saepe  irregularissimas)  parallelas  aut  radiantes,  plerumque  inter  venas, 
formantibus;  antheridiis  et  cystocarpiis  ignotis;  substantia  tenue  membranacea;  colore  diluta  punicea 
aut  rosea. 


MARINE   AIXJ^E   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  495 

Beaufort,  N.  C.:  Occasional  on  Bogue  Beach,  February  to  September,  probably  throughout  the 
year,  often  fairly  abundant  after  storms,  especially  during  summer  and  autumn;  several  small  masses, 
Fort  Macon  jetty,  July  and  August,  1906,  and  one  plant  September,  1907,  5  to  30  cm.  below  low  tide; 
few  plants  on  coral  reef  offshore,  24  to  25.5  m.  below  surface,  May,  1907. 

This  species  seems  to  belong  to  the  subgenus  Cryptoneura  J.  Ag.  In  respects  other  than  the  arrange- 
ment of  the  sori  it  closely  resembles  N.  laceratum  Grev.  The  structure  of  these  species  is  so  similar  that 
it  would  seem  to  indicate  a  relationship,  but  the  sori  are  not  confined  to  the  margin  or  marginal  prolifera- 
tions as  in  AT.  laceratum  and  other  species  of  the  tribe  Botryoglossopsis  (J.  Ag.)  De  Toni.  In  many 
respects  A*,  medium  resembles  species  of  the  tribe  Dawsoniae  (Bory)  J.  Ag.  Although  the  sori  are  some- 
what irregularly  arranged  and  usually  are  not  conspicuously  radiating  toward  the  margins,  they  are  not 
more  irregular  than  in  some  species  of  that  tribe.  The  veins  are,  however,  narrower  and  the  margins 
thicker  than  in  the  species  under  Dawsoniae  which  have  been  available  to  the  author,  and  the  present 
species  does  not  seem  to  agree  closely  with  any  of  the  sections  under  that  tribe.  If  it  should  be  placed 
under  Dawsoniae,  it  perhaps  agrees  best  with  the  section  Supradecompositae  J.  Ag.,  although  the  frond  is 
usually  more  regularly  dichotomous  than  in  species  of  that  section  available  to  the  author.  Its  position 
in  the  subgenus  must,  therefore,  be  left  in  doubt  pending  more  expended  comparisons. 

No  specimens  have  been  found  by  the  author  except  at  Beaufort,  but  several  unnamed  specimens 
from  points  south  of  this  place  observed  in  American  herbaria  seem  to  belong  to  this  species.  One  of 
these  in  the  herbarium  of  the  New  York  Botanical  Garden  is  labeled  "Delesseria?  L.  I.  G.  Pawley's  I, 
July  or  Aug.  1875."  The  present  known  distribution  of  the  species  may,  therefore,  be  given  as  from 
Beaufort,  N.  C.,  to  Pawleys  Island,  near  Georgetown,  S.  C. 

The  type  (PI.  CV,  fig.  2)  is  a  tetrasporic  plant  collected  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  July  12, 
1907.  This  has  a  longer  stipe  than  is  usually  found,  but  in  other  respects  is  a  fair  average  of  the  species. 
In  other  specimens  the  veins  are  sometimes  more,  sometimes  less,  conspicuous,  the  sori  are  sometimes 
larger  and  more  clustered  toward  the  apices,  and  sometimes  (PI.  CV,  fig.  3)  more  nearly  in  regular  rows, 
while  sometimes  the  branching  is  a  little  more  irregular.  The  type,  with  several  cotypes  and  other 
specimens,  together  with  slides  used  in  the  study  of  the  species,  have  been  placed  in  the  U.  S.  National 
Herbarium. 

Genus  2.  Grinnellia  Harvey. 
Grinnellia,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  91. 

Frond  flat,  thin-membranaceous,  borne  on  a  short  stalk,  usually  simple,  sometimes 
irregularly  branched,  traversed  by  a  midrib  which  is  conspicuous  below,  becoming  less 
conspicuous  near  the  apex,  sometimes  with  lateral  nerves  arising  pinnately  from  the 
midrib  barely  visible  to  the  naked  eye ;  composed  of  a  single  layer  of  cells  over  most  of 
the  frond,  at  the  midrib  of  several  layers  of  cells,  cells  irregularly  angular  in  surface  view, 
squarish  or  oblong  in  section;  apical  cell  evident  in  the  young  frond,  soon  disappearing, 
the  growth  of  the  adult  frond  being  intercalary;  tetrasporangia  triangularly  divided 
occurring  in  sori  forming  small,  rather  indefinite  thickenings  scattered  over  the  frond; 
antheridia  borne  at  the  ends  of  short  filaments  arising  in  clusters  from  the  thallus  cells 
on  both  sides  of  the  frond;  cystocarps  scattered  over  the  frond,  sessile,  hemispherical, 
rather  prominent,  pericarp  thin,  opening  by  a  conspicuous  apical  pore,  joined  to  the  basal 
placenta  by  thin,  filamentous,  sterile  strands,  gonimoblast  composed  of  rather  loose, 
dichotomously  branched  filaments  which  form  carpospores  from  nearly  all  their  cells. 

One  species,  New  England  to  West  Indies. 
Grinnellia  americana  (Agardh)  Harvey.     PI.  CVI,  fig.  i. 

Delesseria  americana,  Agardh,  1820,  p.  173. 
Grinnellia  americana,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  92,  pi.  21  B.  \ 

Grinnellia  americana,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  161,  pi.  13,  f.  2-4.  , 

Grinnellia  americana,  De  Toni,  1900,  p.  723. 
A.  A.  B.  Ex.  Nos.  643,  64b. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  593,  Fasc.  A,  No.  XXII. 
159321°— 20 9 


496  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 

Froiid  flat,  thin-membranaceous,  i  to  n  cm.  wide,  6  to  45  cm.  long,  usually  unbranched,  supported 
on  a  short  stalk  continuous  with  the  midrib,  tapering  at  each  end;  tetrasporangial  sori  appearing  as 
minute  dots  scattered  over  the  surface,  antheridia  as  small,  whitish  spots  scattered  over  the  frond, 
cystocarps  as  evident  dots  larger  and  more  conspicuous  than  the  tetrasporangial  ones;  tetrasporangia, 
antheridia,  and  cystocarps  borne  on  different  plants;  color  light  to  dark  rosy  pink,  sometimes  purplish. 

New  England  to  West  Indies. 

Fairly  abundant  throughout  harbor  and  on  jetties,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  10  to  30  cm.  below  low  water, 
December  to  May,  small  specimens  occasional  on  Fort  Macon  jetties  during  summer  and  autumn,  small 
specimens  on  coral  reef  offshore,  May,  1907,  and  August,  1914;  few  specimens  i  cm.  tall  or  less,  in 
sound,  Pawleys  Island  near  Georgetown,  S.  C.,  August,  1909. 

Family  4.  RHODOMELACE/E  (Reichenbach)  Harvey. 

Frond  terete  or  flattened,  usually  richly  laterally  or  dichotomously  branched,  erect 
or  horizontal,  structure  usually  radial,  sometimes  dorsiventral,  cellular,  sometimes 
cellular-filamentous,  usually  with  a  conspicuously  polysiphonous  axis  composed  of  a 
segmented  central  axis  surrounded  by  one  or  more  circles  of  large  pericentral  cells  of 
equal  length,  sometimes  covered  by  one  or  more  layers  of  small  cortical  cells,  apical  cell 
segmented  transversely  or  obliquely  (in  one  subfamily,  Laurenciae,  approaching  the 
tetrahedral  type)  the  thallus  bearing  more  or  less  numerous,  persistent  or  evanescent, 
usually  much  branched,  monosiphonous  filamentous  lateral  outgrowths  (trichoblasts) ; 
tetrasporangia  numerous,  arising  from  pericentral  cells,  embedded  in  the  thallus,  covered 
by  special  cover  cells,  scattered  over  the  unaltered  smaller  branches  or  in  altered  branches 
(stichidia),  triangularly  divided;  antheridia  borne  on  trichoblasts,  sometimes  apparently 
on  a  polysiphonous  branch,  occurring  as  small  compact  bodies  of  various  forms,  oval  to 
long  cylindrical,  terete  or  flattened,  bearing  a  layer  of  spermatangia  over  all  or  nearly 
all  the  surface;  carpogonia  situated  on  trichoblasts,  sometimes  apparently  on  a  poly- 
siphonous branch,  closely  associated  with  cells  which,  after  fertilization,  produce  the 
auxiliary  cells,  forming  definite  procarps  sooner  or  later  inclosed  by  sterile  outgrowths 
from  the  thallus ;  cystocarps  external,  conspicuous,  secondarily  situated  on  polysiphonous 
branches,  sessile  or  borne  on  short  stalks,  oval  or  urceolate,  pericarp  thick,  opening  by 
an  apical  pore,  gonimoblast  arising  from  the  basal  placenta,  consisting  of  a  compressed, 
more  or  less  compact  tuft  of  richly  branched  filaments,  whose  apical  cells  usually  produce 
single,  large,  oval,  or  club-shaped  carpospores,  but  in  one  subfamily,  Dasyeae,  form  small 
cylindrical  carpospores  in  short  chains,  the  spores,  in  the  former  case,  having  the  appear- 
ance of  arising  singly  on  short  stalks  from  the  base. 

The  largest  family  of  the  Rhodophyceae,. containing  about  600  species,  occurring  in 
all  seas,  especially  in  the  temperate  regions  of  the  Southern  Hemisphere. 

KEY  TO   GENERA. 

o.  Growth  of  thallus  sympodial,  structure  radial,  with  five  pericentral  cells,  tetrasporangia 

not  completely  embedded  in  the  stichidia,  branching  radial * 7.  Dasya  (p.  508). 

oo.  Growth  of  thallus  monopodial b. 

6.  Thallus  with  dorsiventral  structure,  creeping,  bearing   elongated,  alternate,  lateral, 
creeping  branches  at  regular  intervals,  and  short,  erect  branches  between  these, 

tetrasporangia  occurring  singly 6.  Herposiphonia  (p.  507). 

66.  Thallus  usually  with  radial  structure,  erect  throughout   or  with  conspicuous  erect 

branches  from  an  inconspicuous  creeping  base c. 

c.  Polysiphonous  axis  not  evident,  thallus  composed  of  large  cells  not  arranged  in 
circles,  apical  cell  divided  somewhat  tetrahedrally,  tetrasporangia  situated  with- 
out apparent  relation  to  a  pericentral  cell i.  Laurencia  (p.  497). 


MARINE   AIvG^E   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  497 

cc.  Polysiphonous  axis  plainly  evident,  thallus  composed  of  one  or  more  circles  of  large 
cells  around  a  row  of  central  cells,  apical  cell  transversely  or  obliquely  divided, 

tetrasporangia  produced  from  pericentral  cells d. 

d.  Thallus    with    conspicuous  erect  branches  from    a  creeping   base,    distichously 

branched,  pericentral  cells  with  secondary  transverse  divisions 5.  Bostrychia  (p.  506). 

dd.  Thallus  erect  throughout,  radially  branched,  pericentral  cells  without  second- 
ary transverse  divisions e. 

«.  Trichoblasts  persistent,  covering  portions  of  the  frond  in  the  form  of  colored, 

branched,  monosiphonous  filaments 4.  Brongniartella  (p.  505). 

ee.  Trichoblasts  evanescent,  occurring  only  on   the  younger  portions  of  the  frond ./. 

/.  Thallus  with  dense  parenchymatous  structure,  polysiphonous  arrangement  not 
conspicuous,  covered  by  a  dense  cortex,  pericarp  thick,  tetrasporangia  occur- 
ring singly  without  conspicuous  order  in  spindle-shaped  branchlets  markedly 

constricted  at  their  bases 2.  Chondria(p.  498). 

Jf.  Thallus  with  rather  loose  structure,  polysiphonous  arrangement-conspicuous, 
naked  or  covered  by  a  thin  cortex,  pericarp  thin,  tetrasporangia  usually 
occurring  singly  in  straight  or  spiral  rows  in  scarcely  altered  branchlets. 

3.   Polysiphonia  (p.  502). 

Genus  i.  Laurencia  Lamouroux. 
I<aurencia,  Lamouroux,  1813,  p.  130. 

Frond  erect,  terete  or  flattened,  richly  radially  or  distichously  branched;  structure 
cellular,  dense,  cells  large  within,  becoming  smaller  toward  the  surface,  situated  without 
conspicuous  order,  central  row  of  cells  not  evident  except  toward  apices,  apical  cell 
surrounded  by  evanescent  trichoblasts,  sunk  in  a  depression,  somewhat  tetrahedrally 
divided,  pericentral  cells  not  formed;  tetrasporangia  scattered  over  the  ultimate,  fre- 
quently shortened  branchlets  among  the  outer  subcortical  cells,  with  no  apparent  rela- 
tion to  pericentral  cells,  triangularly  divided;  antheridia  oval  to  oblong,  borne  on  tufts 
of  branched  filaments  (trichoblasts)  arising  from  the  bases  of  open,  scutellate,  apical 
depressions;  procarps  borne  on  trichoblasts  within  the  apical  depressions,  coming  sec- 
ondarily to  lie  on  the  surface  as  a  result  of  later  growth,  cystocarps  scattered  over  the 
smaller  branches,  prominent,  ovate  to  spherical,  pericarp  thick,  opening  by  an  apical 
pore,  gonimoblast  composed  of  branched  filaments  radiating  from  a  basal  placenta, 
bearing  single  pear-shaped  carpospores  in  their  terminal  segments. 

About  50  species,  often  with  ill-defined  limits  and  exceedingly  difficult  to  determine, 
in  warm  seas. 
Laurencia  tuberculosa  J.  Agardh.  • 

Laurencia  tuberculosa,  J.  Agardh,  1852,  p.  760. 
Laurencia  tuberculosa,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  75. 
Laurencia  gemmifera  var.  0,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  73. 
Laurencia  tuberculosa,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  801. 
A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  62. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  439,  1937- 

Frond  subterete  or  slightly  flattened,  about  i  to  2  mm.  wide,  5  to  20  cm.  tall,  branching  alternate 
subdistichous,  pinnately  decompound,  branches  spreading,  bearing  numerous  short,  simple,  blunt,  wart- 
like  tubercular  branchlets  distichously  arranged  below,  naked  toward  the  apices;  tetrasporangia  in  the 
short,  tubercular  branchlets;  texture  rather  cartilaginous;  color  crimson  to  fleshy  purple. 

Florida  and  West  Indies. 


498  '          BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU  OF   FISHERIES. 

Var.  gemmifera  (Harvey)  J.  Agardh.     PI.  CVI,  fig.  2. 

Laurencia  gemmifera,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  73.  pi-  18  B. 
Laurencia  tuber culosa  var.  gemmtjera,  J.  Agardh,  1876,  p.  657. 
Laurencia  tuberculosa  var.  gemmifera,  De  Toni,  1903,  P-  802. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  141. 

Frond  terete,  branching  profuse,  alternate,  irregular,  decompound,  forming  more  or  less  intricate 
tufts,  branches  spreading,  bearing  numerous  short,  simple,  blunt,  tubercular  branchlets  on  all  sides,  longer 
and  shorter  branches  intermingled  without  order;  texture  cartilaginous  and  brittle;  color  light  red  or 
yellowish,  sometimes  greenish. 

Florida  and  West  Indies. 

Abundant  on  Bogue  Beach  and  floating  in  harbor,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August  to  October,  1905  (few 
plants  tetrasporic),  few  small  masses  unattached  on  bottom  near  "Green  Rock"  in  Newport  River, 
August,  1906,  occasional  on  Bogue  Beach,  September,  1906,  one  large  plant  (male)  on  Shackleford  jetty 
about  30  cm.  below  low  water,  August,  1907. 

The  specimens  from  this  locality  do  not  resemble  authentic  specimens  of  L.  tuberculosa,  but  closely 
resemble  a  specimen  from  Key  West  labeled  "  L.  gemmifera"  by  Harvey.  In  herbaria  the  variety 
passes  over  in  to  the  species,  but  in  this  region  the  plants  are  quite  uniform,  with  little  variation,  and 
are  always  light  to  dark  green.  They  will  not  be  mistaken  for  any  other  species  occurring  at  Beaufort, 
being  easily  distinguished  by  the  richly  and  irregularly  branched,  intricate  tufts  df  stiff,  brittle,  carti- 
laginous, dull  green  fronds  bearing  numerous  short,  blunt,  tubercular  branchlets  on  all  sides. 

This  is  the  northern  known  limit  of  the  species  and  of  the  genus. 

Besides  the  above  species,  there  were  collected  on  Bogue  Beach  in  August,  1906, 
several  battered  specimens  evidently  belonging  to  another  species  of  Laurencia.  These 
somewhat  resemble  a  battered  specimen  of  L.  pinnatifida  (Gmel.)  Lamour.,  but  are 
indeterminable. 

Genus  2.  Chondria  (Agardh)  Harvey. 

Chondria,  Agardh,  1817,  p.  XVIII. 
Chondria,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  19. 
Chondriopsis,  Farlow,  1883,  p.  165. 

Frond  erect,  terete  or  somewhat  flattened,  richly  branched,  branches  arising  radi- 
ally or  pinnately,  usually  alternately,  virgate,  bearing  branchlets  which  are  markedly 
constricted  at  their  bases;  structure  cellular,  with  a  single  circle  of  five  loose  pericentral 
cells  surrounded  by  several  layers  of  smaller  cells  within  the  surface  and  one  or  more 
layers  of  small  cortical  cells,  growing  points  prolonged  or  sunk  in  slight  apical  depres- 
sions, apical  cell  transversely  divided,  trichoblasts  somewhat  persistent,  but  finally 
evanescent;  tetrasporangia  usually  numerous,  occurring  without  conspicuous  order 
among  the  subcortical  cells  toward  the  middle  or  upper  parts  of  spindle-shaped  ultimate 
branchlets,  formed  from  segments  of  the  pericentral  cells,  triangularly  divided;  an- 
theridia  irregularly  oval,  sometimes  crumpled  plates  attached  by  short  stalks  to  tricho- 
blasts on  ultimate  branchlets,  bordered  by  one  or  more  rows  of  sterile  cells  (fig.  39) ; 
cystcarps  numerous,  sessile  on  the  ultimate  branchlets,  prominent,  ovate,  pericarp 
thick,  opening  by  an  apical  pore,  gonimoblast  composed  of  branched  filaments  radi- 
ating from  a  basal  placenta,  bearing  single  large,  elongated,  pear-shaped  carpospores 
in  their  terminal  segments;  tetrasporangia,  antheridia,  and  cystocarps  borne  on  separate 
plants 

About  25  species,  often  separated  by  variable  characters  and  exceedingly  difficult 
to  determine,  in  warm  and  temperate  seas. 


MARINE   ALG^E   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  499 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 
a.  Apices  of  branches  prolonged '  5. 

b.  Fronds  delicate,  slender 3.  c.  tenuissima  (p.  500). 

bb.  Fronds  coarse,  robust,  densely  branched i.  C.  atropurpurea  (p.  499). 

bbb.  Fronds  coarse,  robust,  loosely  branched 2.  C.  littoralis  (p.  499). 

aa.  Apices  of  branches  forming  crateriform  depressions c. 

c.  Fronds  coarse,  rigid,  brittle,  branching  sparse  below,  often  dense  above,  color  dark 

reddish  purple 4.  C.  dasyphylla  (p.  500). 

cc.  Fronds  of  moderate  coarseness,  flexuous,  branching  uniformly  profuse,  color  pinkish 

straw ; 5-  C.  sedifolia  (p.  501). 

1.  Chondria  atropurpurea  Harvey. 

Chondria  atropurpurea,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  22,  pi.  18  E. 
Chondria  atropurpurea,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  831. 

Fronds  robust,  rather  coarse,  5  to  26  cm.  tall,  0.7  to  2  mm.  in  diameter  in  main  stems,  rather  pyrami- 
dal in  outline,  densely,  irregularly,  alternately  branched,  main  branches  elongated,  spreading,  sometimes 
virgate,  sparingly  beset  with  secondary  branches  and  branchlets,  longer  and  shorter  branches  inter- 
spersed without  order,  the  ultimate  branchlets  and  usually  the  secondary  branches  tapering  at  each  end, 
having  the  apices  prolonged  and  being  markedly  constricted  at  the  base,  branchlets  arising  singly  or 
somewhat  fasciculately  from  superficial  depressions,  spindle-shaped;  tetrasporangia  in  the  ultimate 
branchlets;  cystocarps  broad-ovate,  sessile  on  the  ultimate  branchlets;  texture  cartilaginous,  firm; 
color  usually  dark  reddish  purple,  sometimes  lighter  and  yellowish. 

South  Carolina  to  Florida;  Brazil;  Japan. 

One  specimen  on  shell  between  jetties,  Fort  Macon,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1906? 

To  this  species  is  referred  with  considerable  doubt  one  specimen  from  Beaufort.  The  species  tias 
not  been  observed  elsewhere  by  the  author,  but  should  be  included  as  it  certainly  occurs  within  our 
range,  the  type  being  from  Charleston,  S.  C.  The  habit  is  similar  to  that  of  C.  dasyphylla,  from  which  it 
is  distinguished  by  its  prolonged  apices  and  sometimes  by  its  lighter  color.  The  Beaufort  specimen  does 
not  show  the  constrictions  at  the  bases  of  the  secondary  branches,  the  marked  constrictions  at  the  bases 
of  the  branchlets,  or  the  origin  of  the  latter  from  superficial  depressions,  as  is  characteristic  of  the  species; 
but  resembles  the  species  in  other  respects.  If  this  determination  is  correct,  this  is  the  northern  known 
limit  of  the  species. 

2.  Chondria  littoralis  Harvey.     Figs.  36  and  37;  PI.  CVII,  fig.  i. 

Chondria  littoralis,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  22. 
Chondria  littoralis,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  832. 
P.  B.-A.  Fasc.  D,  No.  XCVIII. 

Frond  robust,  rather  slender,  loto  35  cm.  tall,  0.8  to  2  mm.  in  diameter  in  main  stems,  often  pyram- 
idal in  outline,  irregularly  or  sometimes  somewhat  dichotomously  loosely  much  branched,  main  branches 
elongated,  flexuous,  tapering,  sometimes  almost  naked  and  virgate,  sometimes  more  or  less  densely  beset 
with  secondary  branches  and  branchlets,  apices  more  or  less  prolonged,  branchlets  about  3  to  25  mm.  long, 
more  or  less  numerous,  sometimes  crowded,  spindle-shaped,  constricted  at  the  bases  and  more  or  less 
prolonged  at  the  apices;  tetrasporangia  borne  below  the  apices  of  ultimate  branchlets;  cystocarps  ovate, 
sessile  on  the  ultimate  branchlets;  texture  fleshy  cartilaginous;  color  light  straw  red. 

Florida;  West  Indies;  Mexico;  Bermuda. 

Sometimes  fairly  abundant  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C. 

The  determination  of  the  specimens  referred  to  this  species  is  made  with  some  doubt,  but  the  plants 
resemble,  in  most  respects,  specimens  of  this  species  in  the  herbaria  visited,  and  seem  to  agree  with  the 
description  of  the  species.  Among  these  Beaufort  specimens  there  is  considerable  variation,  the  habit 
being  irregular  or  fairly  regular,  the  branching  being  more  or  less  profuse,  and  the  apices  being  conspicu- 
ously prolonged,  slightly  prolonged,  or  sunken;  the  habit  is  usually  open;  two  specimens  from  Bogue 
Beach,  August,  1907,  and  August,  1908,  respectively,  have  the  .habit  of  Gracilaria  conferuoides ,  bearing 
elongated  branches  arising  regularly,  and  rather  few,  inconspicuous  branchlets.  Only  tetrasporic  fruits 
have  been  observed.  Whether  this  determination  is  correct  or  not,  the  species  may  be  expected  within 


500  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

our  range.  If  our  plants  belong  to  this  species,  this  constitutes  their  northern  known  limit,  since  the 
specimens  referred  to  this  species  by  Farlow  (1882,  p.  167)  are  now  attributed,  with  considerable  doubt, 
to  C.  dasyphylla. 

This  species  is  distinguished  from  C.  atropurpurea  by  its  larger  size,  looser  habit,  longer  branchlets, 
less  acute  apices,  and  lighter  color.  It  is  distinguished  from  C.  tenuissima,  which  it  resembles  in  habit, 
by  its  usually  larger  size,  considerably  coarser  fronds,  and  less  regular  branching. 

3.  Chondria  tenuissima  (Goodenough  and  Woodward)  Agardh. 

Fucus  tenuissimus,  Goodenough  and  Woodward,  1797,  p.  215,  pi.  19. 
Chondria  tenuissima,  Agardh,  1822,  p.  352  (excluding  synonyms). 
Chondria  tenuissima,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  21,  pi.  18  F. 
Chondriopsis  tenuissima,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  166. 
-    Chondria  tenuissima,  De  Toni,  1903  p.  834. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  42. 

Fronds  slender,  6  to  24  cm.  tall,  about  0.5  to  1.5  mm.  in  diameter  in  main  stems,  pyramidal  in  out- 
line, irregularly,  alternately  branched,  main  branches  spreading,  bearing  more  or  less  numerous  secondary 
branches,  and  slender,  spindle-shaped,  spreading  branchlets  about  4  to  lomm.  long,  apices  conspicuously 
prolonged,  secondary  branches  and  branchlets  tapering  at  the  bases;  tetrasporangia  borne  below  the 
apices  of  ultimate  branchlets;  cystocarps  ovate,  sessile  on  the  ultimate  branchlets,  sometimes  occupy- 
ing almost  the  entire  branchlet. 

Warm  and  temperate  North  Atlantic;  Mediterranean. 

Var.  baileyana  (Montagne)  Farlow,  Anderson,  and  Eaton.     PI.  CVII,  fig.  3. 

Laurencia  baileyana,  Montagne,  1849,  p.  63. 
Chondria  baileyana,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  20,  pi.  18  A. 
Chondriopsis  tenuissima  var.  baileyana,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  166. 

,        Chondria  tenuissima  var.  baileyana,  Farlow,  Anderson,  and  Eaton,  1889,  A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  187. 
Chondria  tenuissima  var.  baileyana,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  836. 
A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  187. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  43- 

Frond  very  slender,  3.5  to  20  cm.  tall,  about  0.2  to  i  mm.  in  diameter  in  main  stems;  more  or  less 
loosely  branched,  branches  elongated,  erect,  rather  simple,  bearing  very  slender,  spindle-shaped  or  club- 
shaped  branchlets,  tapering  at  the  bases  but  obtuse  at  the  apices,  apices  slightly  or  not  at  all  prolonged. 
New  England  to  North  Carolina;  Europe. 

Fairly  abundant  in  harbor  north  of  laboratory,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  abundant  on  Fort  Macon  jetties, 
April,  1908,  10  cm.  above  to  10  cm.  below  low  water,  few  very  slender  specimens  on  shells  and  other 
algae  between  jetties,  Fort  Macon,  July,  1909,  only  tetrasporic  fruits  observed. 

This  species  is  usually  distinguished  without  difficulty  by  its  slender  habit  and  long,  slender 
branchlets,  although  some  specimens  bear  resemblances  to  C.  littoralis  and  C.  atropurpurea.  The  variety 
is  distinguished  from  the  species  by  its  more  slender  habit  and  the  shape  of  its  branchlets,  these  taper- 
ing at  the  bases  and  being  blunt,  obtuse,  and  slightly  or  not  at  all  prolonged  at  the  apices,  having  the 
shape  of  a  club  rather  than  that  of  a  spindle.  Neither  the  species  nor  the  variety  was  observed  here  in 
May,  1907.  This  is  the  southern  known  limit  of  the  variety. 

4.  Chondria  dasyphylla  (Woodward)  Agardh.     Figs.  38-40;  PI.  CVII,  figs.  2  and  4. 

Fucus  dasyphyllus,  Woodward  1794,  p.  239. 
Chrondria  dasyphylla,  Agardh,  1822,  p.  350. 


,  ,         ,    .       . 

Chondria  dasyphylla,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  20. 
Chondriopsis  dasyphila,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  166  (excluding  variety). 
Chondriopsis  littoralis,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  167.    (?) 
Chondria  dasyphylla,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  842. 


A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  142. 

Fronds  robust,  coarse,  7  to  20  cm.  tall,  about  0.5  to  2  mm.  in  diameter  in  main  stems,  often  pyramidal 
in  outline,  often  sparingly  branched  below,  usually  densely  branched  above,  branching  alternate,  fairly 
regular,  sometimes  opposite  or  fasciculate,  main  branches  elongated,  spreading,  more  or  less  decompound, 
tapering  gradually  toward  the  apices,  secondary  branches  more  or  less  elongated  and  tapering,  ultimate 
branchlets  usually  2  to  5  mm.,  sometimes  up  to  2  cm.,  long,  sometimes  borne  on  the  main  brandies, 


MARINE   AU^B   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  50 1 

usually  abundant  on  the  secondary  branches,  arising  singly  or  in  clusters,  markedly  constricted  at  the 
bases,  usually  more  or  less  truncate  at  the  apices,  cylindrical,  club-shaped  to  top-shaped,  apices  more 
or  less  markedly  sunken,  usually  truncate,  sometimes  obtuse  and  rounded,  sometimes  almost  oblong, 
often  with  a  short,  pointed  projection;  tetrasporangia  borne  below  the  apices  of  ultimate  branchlets; 
cystocarps  round-ovate,  sessile,  lateral  below  the  apices  of  ultimate  branchlets,  which  are  often  pointed 
at  the  apices,  these  points  later  being  pushed  to  one  side  by  the  growth  of  the  cystocarps;  texture  fleshy- 
cartilaginous,  rigid,  brittle;  color  usually  dark,  purplish  red,  sometimes  yellowish  pink. 

Warm  and  temperate  North  Atlantic;  Mediterranean. 

Beaufort,  N.  C.:  Abundant  on  Fort  Macon  jetties,  o  to  50  cm.  below  low  water,  June  to  October, 
fruiting  throughput  the  summer  and  autumn,  an  occasional  battered  specimen  found  during  the  winter; 
abundant  in  harbor  south  of  laboratory,  summers  1903  and  1904;  fairly  abundant  oh  coral  reef  offshore, 
May,  1907,  and  few  slender  specimens,  August,  1914 and  1915.  Ocracoke,  N.  C.:  One  faded  specimen 
on  jetty ,  August ,  1907. 

In  this  region  the  species  is  fairly  uniform,  usually  being  distinguished  by  its  coarse,  rigid,  brittle, 
dark,  purplish  red  fronds  densely  branched  in  the  upper  portions  and  by  the  ultimate  branchlets,  many 
of  which  are  extremely  short  and  shaped  like  a  top.  Tetrasporic  and  cystocarpic  specimens  are  abun- 
dant throughout  the  summer  and  autumn,  but  antheridial  plants  are  rare.  Specimens  which  seemed 
to  be  young  plants  of  this  species  were  observed,  in  fair  abundance,  on  Fort  Macon  jetties  in  April,  1908, 
but  the  determination  could  not  be  made  with  certainty,  and  no  plants  of  the  species  were  observed 
in  May,  1907.  The  species  had  almost  disappeared  on  October  17,  1908.  Specimens  have  been  col- 
lected on  Fort  Macon  jetties  twice  during  the  winter,  a  few  small,  matted  plants,  2  to  4.5  cm.  tall,  in 
December,  1908  (PI.  CVII,  fig.  2),  and  one  battered  fragment  in  February,  1909.  While  these  plants 
suggest  the  probability  that  the  species  may  winter  in  this  condition,  they  were  not  found  with 
sufficient  regularity  during  the  winter  to  establish  the  point.  Plants  collected  June  12,  1909,  were 
large  and  well  developed.  This  species  has  not  been  observed  on  Shackleford  jetties,  nor  in  the  harbor 
since  1904. 

Young  stages  of  this  species  are  frequently  observed  attached  to  mature  fronds  of  the  same  species 
or  to  other  algae,  especially  Padina  -vickersiae.  These  appear  at  first  as  small,  convex  disks  (fig.  4oA), 
from  the  middle  of  which  single  upright  shoots  arise,  and  later  give  off  downward-growing  filamentous 
attaching  organs  from  their  basal  cells  (fig.  406). 

From  the  bases  of  mature  fronds  many  short  branches  grow  down  and  branch  profusely,  sometimes 
finally  into  filamentous  branches  consisting  of  single  rows  of  large,  thick-walled  cells.  When  these 
branches  reach  the  substratum  'they  spread  out  into  irregular  disks,  forming  a  secure  attachment  for  the 
frond.  The  bases  of  the  mature  fronds  are  usually  covered  by  a  spongelike  animal  growth  and  by  small 
tubes  of  animals,  apparently  worms. 
5.  Chondria  sedifolia  Harvey.  PI.  CVIII,  figs,  i  and  2. 

Chondria  sedifolia,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  19,  pi.  18  G. 
Chondriopsis  dasyphila  var.  sedifolia,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  166. 
Chondria  sedifolia,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  845. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  594- 

Fronds  robust,  of  medium  coarseness,  2.5  to  27  cm.  tall,  about  0.4  to  i  mm.  in  diameter  in  main 
stems,  uniformly  branched  throughout,  branching  profuse,  usually  alternate,  sometimes  multifid,  main 
branches  more  or  less  elongated,  straight  or  curved,  spreading  in  all  directions,  ultimate  branchlets 
about  2  to  5  mm.  long,  sometimes  borne  on  the  main  branches,  usually  abundant  on  the  secondary 
branches,  usually  arising  singly,  obovate-oblong  or  somewhat  elliptic,  usually  markedly  contracted  at 
the  bases,  obtuse  or  acute,  usually  truncate,  at  the  apices,  apices  sunken;  tetrasporangia  borne  below 
the  apices  of  the  ultimate  branchlets;  cystocarps  ovate,  opening  by  a  conspicuous  apical  pore,  sessile 
below  the  apices  of  ultimate  branchlets,  the  apices  later  being  pushed  to  one  side  by  the  growth  of  the 
cystocarps;  texture  gelatinous-cartilaginous;  color  reddish  brown  to  pinkish  straw. 

New  England  to  Florida  and  West  Indies. 

Beaufort,  N.  C.:  Fairly  abundant  on  jetties,  and  attached  to  Zostera,  shells,  etc.,  between  jetties 
at  Fort  Macon,  15  to  45  cm.  below  low  water,  May  to  September  since  1906,  not  found  in  earlier  years, 
fruiting  throughout  the  season;  one  specimen  on  Fort  Macon  jetty,  December,  1908;  fairly  abundant 
cm  coral  reef  offshore,  July,  1915;  fairly  abundant  in  Core  Sound  on  one  jetty  at  Lecklys  Island,  July, 
1908. 


502  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 

This  species  is  distinguished  from  C.  dasyphylla  by  its  more  slender  form,  its  habit,  and  its  generally 
lighter  color.  The  branches  are  borne  fairly  uniformly  throughout  and  not  in  clusters  in  the  upper  part 
of  the  frond;  the  ultimate  branches  are  more  slender  and  often  shorter  than  in  C.  dasyphylla,  but  it  lacks 
the  short,  top-shaped  branchlets  frequently  found  in  the  latter  species,  and  the  apices,  so  far  as  has  been 
observed,  do  not  bear  short,  pointed  projections.  The  species  has  not  been  found  on  Shackleforfl  jetties 

or  in  the  harbor. 

Genus  3.  Polysiphonia  Greville. 

Polysiphonia,  Greville,  18243,  p.  308. 

Frond  erect  (or  creeping  at  first,  later  becoming  erect),  usually  terete,  sometimes 
slightly  flattened,  laterally  and  radially  or  dichotomously  branched,  usually  elongated 
and  delicate,  slender  and  flexible,  or  bristlelike  and  rigid ;  structure  cellular  or  filamentous- 
cellular,  consisting  of  a  central  row  of  cells  surrounded  by  a  circle  of  4  to  24  pericentral 
cells,  this  primary  structure  remaining  naked  or  being  clothed  in  the  elder  parts  by  a 
layer  of  small,  cortical  cells;  sometimes  small  secondary  cells  are  formed  outside  of  and 
alternating  with  the  pericentral  cells,  sometimes  the  central  axis  is  inclosed  by  a  later- 
developed  layer  of  rhizoidal  filaments;  the  central  cells  and  inclosing  pericentral  cells 
are  of  the  same  length,  so  that  the  frond  has  a  segmented  appearance  which  is  evident 
throughout  or,  in  the  corticated  species,  only  in  the  younger  portions;  growth  mono- 
podial,  apical  cell  transversely  or  obliquely  segmented,  trichoblasts  often  borne  in 
regular  order,  somewhat  persistent,  but  finally  evanescent,  secondary  shoots  often  borne 
in  regular  order;  tetrasporangia  arising  from  the  pericentral  cells  of  ultimate  branchlets, 
usually  singly  and  in  spiral  rows,  sometimes  in  straight  rows,  covered  by  special 
cover  cells,  triangularly  divided;  antheridia  lanceolate  or  long  elliptical,  attached  by 
short  stalks  to  trichoblasts  near  the  apices;  procarps  borne  on  trichoblasts  near  the 
apices;  cystocarps  becoming  secondarily  attached  to  branches,  borne  on  short  stalks  or 
sessile,  conspicuous,  oval  or  urn-shaped,  pericarp  thin,  opening  by  prominent  carpostome, 
gonimoblast  composed  of  branched  filaments  radiating  from  a  basal  placenta,  bearing 
single,  large,  elongated,  pear-shaped  carpospores  in  their  terminal  segments;  tetra- 
sporangia, antheridia,  and  cystocarps  borne  on  separate  plants;  sexual  and  asexual 
plants  alternating  with  each  other  in  the  life  cycle. 

About  130  species  of  varied  habit  and  size,  often  separated  by  variable  characters,  in 
all  seas.  The  genus  is  easily  recognized,  but  determinations  of  the  species  are  usually 
difficult.  This  is  the  central,  characteristic  genus  of  the  family  about  which  all  the 
others  are  grouped. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

a.  Frond  with  four  pericentral  cells,  no  cortex b. 

b.  Branching  somewhat  dichotomous,  segments  about  1.5  diameters  long  below,  2  to  5 

diameters  in  branches i.  P.  havanensis  (p.  502) 

bb.  Branching  pinnate,  segments  about  i  diameter  long  throughout,  sometimes  up  to  2.5 

diameters 2,.  P.  har-veyi  (p.  503). 

00.  Frond  with  more  than  four  pericentral  cells,  no  cortex  over  most  of  thallus c. 

c.  Frond  with  5   to  8  (usually  6)   pericentral    cells,    segments  i  to   3   diameters  long, 

dichotomous 3.  P.  denudata  (p.  503). 

cc.  Frond  with  8  to  20  (usually  16)  pericentral  cells,  segments  i  to  4  diameters  long, 

branching  pinnate 4.  P.  nigrescent  (p.  504). 

1.  Polysiphonia  havanensis  Montagne.     PI.  CVIII,  fig.  3. 

Polysiphonia  havanensis,  Montagne,  1837,  p.  352. 
Polysiphonia  havanensis,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  34. 
Polysiphonia  havanensis,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  894. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  1043. 


MARINE  ALGJE  OF  BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  503 

Fronds  forming  erect  tufts,  i  to  8  cm.  tall,  arising  from  creeping  filaments,  somewhat  setaceous 
below,  capillary  above,  soft  and  flaccid,  branching  somewhat  dichotomous,  irregular,  decompound,  with 
many  lateral  branches,  branches  distant,  divided  into  fine  branchlets  and  more  or  less  densely  tufted 
toward  apices,  sometimes  tufted  throughout,  secondary  branches  very  slender,  branchlets  usually 
elongated,  tapering;  pericentral  cells  4,  segments  1.5  diameters  long  below,  2  to  3  diameters  in  small 
branches,  3  to  5  diametenun  large  branches,  less  than  i  diameter  in  branchlets,  no  cortex;  tetrasporangia 
scattered,  usually  occurring  singly,  sometimes  in  pairs,  in  swollen  portions  of  branchlets;  cystocarps 
small,  ovate  on  upper  branches;  color  light  yellowish  red  to  dark  brownish  red. 

Florida;  West  Indies. 

About  10  specimens,  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  February,  1909. 

This  species  may  be^  distinguished  from  P.  harveyi,  the  only  other  species  with  four  pericentral  cells 
thus  far  found  at  Beaufort,  by  its  finer  habit,  somewhat  dichotomous  branching,  longer  segments,  and 
lighter  brownish  color.  Since,  however,  other  species  with  four  pericentral  cells  may  enter  this  region, 
no  determination  should  be  made  without  a  careful  study  of  all  the  characters. 

This  is  the  northern  known  limit  of  the  species.  It  seems  probable  that  the  specimens  found  here 
were  brought  by  the  Gulf  Stream  from  Florida  or  the  West  Indies,  since  it  is  not  likely  that  the  species 
could  grow  in  winter  at  a  more  northern  station. 

2.  Polysiphonia  harveyi  Bailey.     Fig.  4iA;  PI.  CVIII,  fig.  40. 

Polysiphonia  harveyi,  Bailey,  1848,  p.  38. 
Polysiphonia  harveyi.  Harvey,  1853,  p.  41,  pi.  17  A. 
Polysiphonia  harveyi,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  171,  pi.  15,  f.  3-4. 
Polysiphonia  harveyi,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  897. 
A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  1333,  b. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  888,  1400. 

Fronds  forming  globose,  bushy  tufts  2  to  15  cm.  tall,  setaceous,  rather  rigid, branching  abundant, 
decompound,  pinnate,  sometimes  irregular,  usually  alternate,  branches  more  or  less  elongated,  spreading, 
sometimes  angularly  bent,  tapering  and  sometimes  divided  into  numerous  fine  branchlets  toward  the 
apices,  secondary  branches  sometimes  almost  as  coarse  as  the  primary  ones,  branchlets  arising  irregularly, 
more  or  less  abundant  over  the  entire.frond,  about  i  to  2  mm.  long,  spinelike,  rigid,  spreading,  tapering 
toward  the  apices,  simple  or  forked,  often  shed  from  older  plants;  pericentral  cells  four,  segments  short 
throughout,  about  i  diameter  in  length,  sometimes  less,  sometimes  up  to  2.5  diameters,  no  cortex,  but 
in  the  older  portions  of  the  frond  four  small  secondary  cells  occur  outside  of  and  alternating  with  the 
pericentral  cells;  tetrasporangia  forming  wartlike  swellings  in  the  branchlets;  antheridia  ellipsoid' 
cystocarps  broad-ovate,  toward  the  apices  of  small  branches;  color  dark  purplish  red. 

Nova  Scotia  to  North  Carolina. 

Occasionally  fairly  abundant  on  buoys  and  on  algae  thrown  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  July 
to  October,  fruiting.  Fairly  abundant  on  buoy  in  sound,  Port  Royal,  S.  C.,  August,  1909  (?). 

This  species  may  be  distinguished  from  P.  havanensis,  the  only  other  species  with  four  pericentral 
cells  thus  far  found  at  Beaufort,  by  its  coarser  habit,  more  or  less  regular  pinnate  branching,  shorter 
segments,  and  darker  purplish-red  color.  It  is  the  only  identifiable  species  with  four  pericentral  cells 
that  has  been  found  growing  in  this  region.  Specimens  apparently  belonging  to  this  species  were  col- 
lected at  Port  Royal,  S.  C.,  but  unfortunately  were  lost  before  they  were  compared  with  authentic  speci- 
mens. It  remains  doubtful,  therefore,  whether  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  or  Port  Royal,  S.  C.,  is  the  southern 
known  limit  of  the  species.  Of  the  fruiting  plants  observed  about  90  per  cent  were  tetrasporic,  5  per  cent 
male  and  5  per  cent  female. 

3.  Polysiphonia  denudata  (Dillwyn)  Kuetzing.    Fig.  416;  PI.  CVIII,  fig.  4»,  b;  PI.  CIX,  figs,  i  and  2. 

Conferva  denudata,  Dillwyn,  1809,  p.  85,  pi.  G. 
Hutchinsia  -variegata,  Agardh,  1824,  p.  153. 
Polysiphonia  variegata,  Zanardini,  1841,  p.  60. 
Polysiphonia  denudata,  Kuetzing,  18493,  p.  824. 
Polysiphonia  variegata,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  45. 
Polysiphonia  variegata,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  173. 
Polysiphonia  variegata,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  922. 
A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  135. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  245,  639. 

Fronds  forming  dense,  globose  tufts,  2  to  25  cm.  tall,  setaceous  and  rather  rigid  below, 
capillary  and  flaccid  above,  branching  dichotomous,  decompound,  abundant,  axils  spreading  below,  acute 


504 


BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 


above,  branches  sometimes  elongated  and  somewhat  zigzag,  gradually  tapering,  and  divided  into  numer- 
ous fine  branchlets  toward  the  apices,  branchlets  arising  laterally,  often  forming  dense  fastigiate  tufts, 
especially  toward  tHe  apices;  pericentral  cells  six  to  eight,  usually  six,  rarely  five,  segments  i  diameter 
long  or  less  below,  2  to  3  diameters  above,  no  cortex;  tetrasporangia  in  somewhat  torulose  series  in  the 
branchlets;  antheridia  linear-oblong,  acute  at  apices;  cystocarps  broad-ovate,  toward  the  apices  of  small 
branches;  color  dark  brownish  or  blackish  purple. 

Warm  and  temperate  North  Atlantic. 

Occasionally  abundant  on  buoys,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  July  to  September,  sometimes  fruiting.  One  mass 
on  buoy  in  Sound,  Port  Royal,  S.  C.,  and  very  abundant  on  Gracilaria  multipartita  var.  angustissima 
at  mouth  of  one  creek,  August,  1909. 


39 


Fig.  36.— Chondria  litioralis,  apex  of  branch,  X  40. 
Fig.  37.— Chondria  littoralis  (?),  apex  of  branch,  X  40. 
Fig.  38.— Chondria  dasyphylla,  apex  of  branch,  X  40. 
Fig.  39.— Chondria  dasyphylla,  anthreidium.  X  157. 
Fig.  40. — Chondria  dasyphylla,  young  plants,  X  157. 


Fig.  41. — Polysiphonia  spp.,  cross  sections  of  stems.  A. 
P.  harveyii.  B.  P.  denudata.  C.  P.  nigrescens.  X  40. 

Fig.  42.—Spermothamnion  ini'estiens,  partly  divided  tctra- 
sporangium  producing  vegetative  filament,  X  263. 

Fig.  43.—Griffithsia  sp.  X  40. 


This  is  the  only  determinable  species  having  six  pericentral  cells  observed  in  this  region.  The 
habit,  while  more  or  less  dense,  is  characteristic,  and  the  determination  is  less  difficult  than  in  most 
species  of  the  genus.  The  plants  growing  on  the  buoys  are  small  (2  to  4  cm.),  while  those  from  the  creek 
at  Port  Royal  are  6  to  15  cm.  tall.  According  to  .Harvey,  this  species  is  very  abundant  in  the  harbor  of 
Charleston,  S.  C.,  during  January  and  February. 

4.  Polysiphonia  nigrescens  (Hudson)  Greville.     Fig.  4iC;  PI.  CIX,  fig.  3. 

Conferva  nigrescens,  Hudson,  1778,  p.  602. 
Polysiphonia  nigrescens,  Greville,  in  Hooker,  1833,  p.  322. 
Polysiphonia  nigrescens,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  49. 
Polysiphonia  nigrescens,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  174. 
Polysiphonia  nigrescens,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  940. 

Fronds  forming  erecf  tufts  4  to  30  cm.  tall,  setaceous  and  rather  rigid  below,  flaccid  and  much 
branched  above,  branching  pinnate,  alternate,  decompound,  rather  regular,  young  branches  usually 


MARINE   Al,GM   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  505 

pectinate,  older  ones  corymbose  above,  virgate  and  beset  with  short  thornlike  branchlets  below,  grad- 
ually tapering  and  more  or  less  divided  into  fine  branchlets  toward  the  apices,  branchlets  more  or  less 
subulate,  often  compound,  arising  in  clusters  over  a  considerable  portion  of  the  frond  or  especially 
toward  the  apices;  pericentral  cells  8  to  20,  usually  16,  segments  i  to  4  diameters  long,  usually  i  to  1.5 
diameters,  upper  and  lower  ones  shorter,  no  cortex  over  most  of  the  frond,  but  sometimes  with  a  thin 
cortex  over  the  older  portions;  tetrasporangia  forming  wartlike  swellings  in  the  distorted  branchlets; 
antheridia  very  long,  elliptical,  often  curved;  cystocarps  broad-ovate;  color  dark  brownish  purple. 

Warm  and  temperate  North  Atlantic. 

Beaufort,  N.  C. :  Fairly  abundant  on  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford  jetties,  May,  1907 ;  fairly  abundant 
all  over  harbor,  abundant  on  Fort  Macon  jetties,  very  abundant  on  Shackleford  jetties,  and  fairly  abund- 
ant on  Bogue  Beach,  April,  1908,  fruiting. 

This  is  an  exceedingly  variable  species,  many  forms  having  been  described.  The  habit  may  be 
robust  with  branchlets  borne  in  close  pectinate  series  throughout  the  frond,  or  more  slender,  with  the 
branches  more  elongated  and  the  branchlets  borne  in  close  tufts,  especially  toward  the  apices.  Usually 
the  branchlets  are  broken  off  from  the  lower  parts  of  the  frond,  and  the  remnants  of  these  remain  as 
short,  thornlike  processes.  Often  the  apices  are  very  finely  divided,  forming  dense,  wedge-shaped 
tufts.  Many  of  these  differences  seem  to  depend  on  the  size  and  age  of  the  plant. 

•    The  Beaufort  plants  have  a  loose  habit,  with  regular,  alternate,  pinnate  branches,  beset  below  with 
short  thornlike  processes,  and  bearing  branchlets  in  not  very  dense  tufts  toward  their  apices. 

This  is  the  only  species  observed  in  this  region  with  as  many  as  16  pericentral  cells.  In  spite  of 
the  variations,  the  determination  is  not  very  difficult.  It  is  the  only  species  of  the  genus  so  far  found 
at  Beaufort  during  the  spring. 

Since  the  identity  of  Conferva  nigrescent  Hudson  is  doubtful,  it  is  questionable  whether  this  species 
should  be  called  P.  nigrescens  or  P.fucoides,  a  specific  name  applied  by  Hudson  to  what  is  undoubtedly 
the  present  species.  It  has,  however,  seemed  proper  to  keep  the  current  name  until  it  can  be  clearly 
shown  that  this  should  be  changed. 

Besides  the  plants  mentioned  above,  numerous  indeterminable  small  specimens  and 
fragments  belonging  to  this  genus  have  been  found  at  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford,  on 
buoys,  on  Bogue  Beach,  in  a  tide  pool  at  Fort  Macon,  and  in  the  harbor,  growing 
on  jetties,  buoys,  shells,  other  algae,  or  animals,  or  floating  free.  Some  of  these  resem- 
bled P.  harueyi,  some  resembled  P.  denudata,  while  some  were  too  small  or  too  frag- 
mentary to  be  related  to  any  species.  During  July  and  August,  1904,  broken  fragments 
of  a  species  with  four  pericentral  cells  formed  large  masses  along  Bogue  Beach  and 
covering  the  bottom  within  the  inlet  at  Fort  Macon,  being  the  predominant  form  found 
there  at  that  time.  In  December,  1908,  tetrasporic  specimens  1.5  to  4  cm.  tall  were 
collected  on  Fort  Macon  jetty,  with  fine  capillary  filaments,  somewhat  dichotomously 
branched,  having  four  to  six  pericentral  cells.  Fruiting  specimens  about  2  cm.  tall, 
apparently  having  seven  pericentral  cells,  were  found  at  Pawleys  Island  near  George- 
town, S.  C.,  August,  1909. 

Genus  4.  Brongniartella  Bory. 
Brongniartella,  Bory,  in  Dictionnaire  classique  d'hjstoire  naturelle,  tome  2,  p.  516.  1822. 

Frond  erect,  terete,  radially  constructed,  usually  laterally,  sometimes  dichtomously, 
branched;  structure  cellular  or  filamentous-cellular,  with  a  single  circle  of  five  or  seven 
(rarely  four)  pericentral  cells,  naked  or  sooner  or  later  surrounded  by  a  dense  rhizoidal 
cortex,  apical  growth  monopodial,  apical  cell  transversely  divided,  the  entire  frond  or 
the  younger  parts  densely  covered  by  spirally  arranged,  usually  more  or  less  dichotomous, 
colored  trichoblasts,  lateral  branches  arising  from  the  basal  cells  of  trichoblasts,  forming 
elongated,  vegetative  branches  or  transformed  into  short,  fruiting  branches;  tetra- 
sporangia numerous,  occurring  singly  in  spiral  rows  in  more  or  less  transformed  branch- 
lets,  triangularly  divided;  antheridia,  procarps,  and  cystocarps  as  in  Polysiphonia. 

About  eight  species,  in  warm  seas. 


506  BULLETIN   OF  THE    BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 

The  genus  is  distinguished  from  Polysiphonia  by  the  persistent  trichoblasts  and  the 
consequent  characteristic  habit.     It  is  distinguished   from  Dasya  by  its  monopodial 
growth. 
Brongniartella  mucronata  (Harvey)  Schmitz.     PI.  CIX,  fig.  4. 

Dasya  mucronata,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  63. 
Brongniartella  mucronata,  Schmitz,  18933,  p.  218. 
Brongniartella  mucronata,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  1012. 
A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  2  (Dasya  mucronata). 
P.  B.-A.  No.  247  (Dasya  mucronata). 

Fronds  robust,  rather  terete,  3  to  20  cm.  tall,  about  0.5  to  i  mm.  in  diameter  in  main  stems,  one  or 
more  arising  from  a  basal,  disklike  expansion,  branching  usually  lateral  and  distant,  sometimes  dicho- 
tomous,  Igwer  portions  of  the  main  stem  and  larger  branches  naked,. smaller  branches  and  apical  por- 
tions of  larger  ones  densely  covered  by  monosiphonous,  dichotomous,  rather  rigid,  spreading  trichoblasts 
going  out  on  all  sides  from  the  cortical  layer  and  mucronate  at  the  apices;  peri  central  cells  five,  seg- 
ments not  conspicuous,  about  0.5  diameter  long  in  the  main  stem  and  larger  branches,  1.5  to  2  diam- 
eters in  smaller  branches,  covered  throughout  by  a  dense  cortex;  tetrasporangia  in  somewhat  spiral  row 
among  the  cortical  cells  of  scarcely  altered  branchlets;  antheridia  and  cystocarps  unknown;  texture 
firm,  cartilaginous;  color  of  the  stem  and  branches  dull,  brownish-red,  that  of  the  trichoblasts  usually 
brighter,  rosy  red. 

Florida  and  West  Indies. 

Occasional  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  summer  and  autumn,  usually  sterile,  rarely  tetra- 
sporic,  few  specimens,  3  to  6  cm.  tall,  dredged  on  coral  reef  offshore,  May,  1907,  and  July,  1915. 

This  species  is  easily  recognized.  Neither  the  species  nor  the  genus^  is  known  elsewhere  on  our 
coast  north  of  Florida. 

Genus  5.  Bostrychia  Montagne. 

Bostrychia,  Montagne,  1838,  p.  39. 

Frond  usually  creeping  with  erect  branches,  less  often  erect,  more  or  less  flattened, 
sometimes  apparently  terete,  branching  usually  distichous  and  alternate,  sometimes 
somewhat  dichotomous  or  radial,  longer  branches  bearing  two  lateral  rows  of  short 
branches,  usually  of  limited  growth,  ultimate  branchlets  simple  or  branched,  often 
monosiphonous;  structure  cellular,  with  a  circle  of  4  to  n  pericentral  cells,  the  number 
often  varying  from  base  to  apex,  naked  or  sooner  or  later  inclosed  by  one  or  more  layers 
of  cortical  cells,  the  segments  sometimes  becoming  indistinct  from  the  transverse  and 
longitudinal  division  of  the  pericentral  cells,  apical  growth  monopodial,  apices  often 
monosiphonous,  often  bent  or  inrolled,  apical  cell  alternately  transversely  and  obliquely 
divided;  tetrasporangia  occurring  in  ultimate,  more  or  less  transformed,  stichidiumlike , 
branchlets,  arising  in  whorls  of  4  to  6  from  the  pericentral  cells,  triangularly  divided, 
more  or  less  covered  by  a  layer  of  small  cover  cells ;  antheridia  composed  of  a  larger  or 
smaller  number  of  the  middle,  thickened  segments  of  simple,  cylindrical  branchlets,  the 
spermatangia  occurring  in  a  dense  layer  over  the  surface;  procarps  numerous  in  single 
or  double  rows,  embedded  in  the  cortex  of  slightly  thickened  branchlets;  cystocarps 
broad-ovate,  conspicuous,  usually  occurring  singly,  apparently  at  the  apices  of  branch- 
lets,  pericarp  fairly  thin,  opening  by  a  conspicuous  terminal  carpostome,  gonimoblast 
composed  of  compressed  or  more  elongated  dichotomous-fastigiate  filaments,  forming 
single  long  pear-shaped  or  club-shaped  carpospores  from  their  terminal  segments. 

About  30  species,  mostly  in  warm  regions,  usually  in  brackish  water  at  the  mouths 
of  rivers,  often  extending  into  fresh  water,  some  species  known  only  in  fresh  water. 


MARINE   ALGM  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  507 

Bostrychia  rivularis  Harvey. 

Bostrychia  rivularis,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  57,  pi.  14  D. 
Bostrychia  rivularis,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  176. 
Bostrychia  rivularis.  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  1157. 
A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  54. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  140. 

Fronds  forming  dense  tufts,  i  to  4  cm.  high,  arising  from  creeping  filaments  attached  to  the  sub- 
stratum at  intervals  by  basal  disks,  capillary,  slender,  rather  rigid,  branching  decompound,  pinnate, 
alternate,  usually  distichous,  lower  branches  spreading,  almost  horizontal,  upper  ones  rather  erect, 
somewhat  fastigiate,  apices  incurved,  branchlets  usually  slightly  curved,  more  or  less  acute  or  obtuse  at 
the  apices,  polysiphonous  almost  to  the  apex  or  terminating  in  a  more  or  less  prolonged  monosiphonous 
portion;  pericentral  cells  6  to  8  in  the  principal  branches,  divided  once  transversely,  thus  being  half  as 
long  as  the  central  cells,  segments  about  0.5  to  nearly  i  diameter  long,  no  cortex;  tetrasporangia  in 
stichidiumlike  branchlets;  cystocarps  ovate,  terminal  on  the  short,  naked,  lower  branchlets;  color  dull, 
brownish  purple. 

New  England  to  Florida  and  West  Indies. 

Very  abundant  in  harbor,  Southport,  N.  C.,  in  brackish  water,  forming  dense  covering  on  wall 
alongshore  from  high  tide  to  30  cm.  below  high-tide  line,  fairly  abundant  on  shells  alongshore,  August, 
1909. 

This  species  is  easily  recognized,  having  a  structure  superficially  resembling  that  of  Polysiphonia, 
with  regularly,  alternately,  distichously  branched  portions  arising  from  creeping  filaments,  and  tetra- 
sporangial  branches  somewhat  resembling  the  stichidia  of  Dasya.  Its  upright  branches  have  a  flattened 
habit,  and  the  main  stems  have  a  zigzag  appearance,  due  to  their  manner  of  branching.  It  has  not 
been  observed  at  Beaufort,  but  may  be  expected  there  in  brackish  water  and  in  similar  situations  else- 
where. 

Genus  6.  Herposiphonia  Naegeli. 

Herposiphonia,  Naegeli,  1844,  p.  238. 

Frond  creeping,  delicate,  small,  attached  at  intervals  by  short,  rootlike  filaments, 
rarely  entirely  erect,  terete  or  flattened,  branching  lateral,  alternate,  regular,  long  and 
short  branches  sharply  distinct,  single,  long,  creeping  branches' of  unlimited  growth 
arising  alternately  in  two  rows  from  the  flanks  of  the  creeping  filaments  at  each  fourth 
segment,  single  short  erect  branches  of  limited  growth  arising  alternately  in  one  or  two 
rows  from  the  dorsal  surface  of  the  creeping  filaments  at  all  the  other  segments,  creeping 
filaments  dorsiventrally  constructed,  revolute  at  the  apices,  erect  filaments  dorsiventrally 
or  radially  constructed,  at  first  revolute,  later  becoming  straight  at  the  apices  and 
bearing  more  or  less  evanescent  trichoblasts;  structure  consisting  of  a  central  row  of 
cells  surrounded  by  a  circle  of  numerous  (usually  12  to  18)  pericentral  cells,  of  the  same 
length,  so  that  the  frond  has  a  segmented  appearance,  no  cortex,  growth  monopodial, 
"  apical  cell  transversely  or  somewhat  obliquely  divided ;  tetrasporangia  occurring  in  more 
or  less  broken  single  rows  in  the  lower  or  middle  portions  of  erect,  short  branches,  covered 
by  special  cover  cells,  triangularly  divided;  antheridia  lanceolate  or  long  elliptical, 
attached  by  short,  monosiphonous  stalks  to  trichoblasts  toward  the  apices  of  erect, 
short  branches;  procarps  borne  on  the  trichoblasts  at  the  apices  of  erect  short  branches; 
cystocarps  as  in  Polysiphonia. 

About  15  species,  in  warm  seas. 
Herposiphonia  tenella  (Agardh)  Ambronn.     PI.  CX,  fig.  i. 

Hutchinsia  tenella,  Agardh,  1828,  p.  103. 

Polysiphonia  tenella,  J.  Agardh,  1842,  p.  123. 

Polysiphonia  pecten-Tienerisy&i.  ft,  Harvey,  1853.  p.  46,  pi.  16  D. 

Herposiphonia  tenella,  Ambronn,  1880,  p.  162.  ^  .      .' 

Herposiphonia  tenella,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  1051.  » 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  1044,  1943. 


508  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF   FISHERIES. 

Fronds  forming  a  very  fine  capillary  mat  or  fringe,  composed  of  creeping  filaments  with  short 
erect  branches,  primary  filaments  decompound,  erect,  short  branches,  slender,  curved,  tapering  slightly 
toward  the  apices,  borne  in  two  rows,  coming  to  lie  approximately  in  one  row;  pericentral  cells  8  to  10, 
segments  1.5  to  2  diameters  long  in  the  primary  filaments,  about  i  diameter  long  in  the  branchlets; 
tetrasporangia  occurring  singly  in  single,  straight,  unbroken  rows  of  20  to  30  in  erect,  short  branches; 
antheridia  often  borne  on  every  segment  for  about  one-third  the  length  of  the  branch,  beginning  about 
the  middle  and  extending  toward  the  apex;  cystocarps  usually  borne  singly  on  short  stalks;  texture 
velvety;  color  purplish  red. 

Florida  and  West  Indies;  Mediterranean. 

Abundant  on  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford  jetties,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  throughout  the  year,  on  other 
alga?,  especially  Padina  vickersice,  and  sometimes  on  the  Polyzoan  Bugula  turrita,  fruiting  August  and 
September,  probably  throughout  the  summer  and  autumn.  Fairly  abundant  on  Dictyota  dichotoma,  in 
sound  near  inlet,  Wrightsville  Beach,  N.  C.,  July,  1909.  Fairly  abundant  on  shells  -and  other  algae,  in 
sound  near  inlet,  Pawleys  Island,  near  Georgetown,  S.  C.,  August,  1909. 

This  species  will  not  be  mistaken  for  any  other  occurring  in  this  region,  being  easily  recognized  by 
its  appearance  of  a  creeping  Polysiphonia,  forming  purplish  red,  velvety  mats  or  fringes  composed  of 
horizontal  filaments  with  upright  branches.  The  species  is  dioecious.  Often  all  the  filaments  observed 
on  a  single  specimen  of  the  host  were  either  sexual  (both  male  and  female)  or  tetrasporic,  but  sometimes 
both  tetrasporic  and  sexual  plants  occurred  together. 

This  is  the  northern  known  limit  of  the  species  and  of  the  genus. 

Genus  7.  Dasya  Agardh. 

Dasya,  Agardh,  1824,  p.  XXXIV. 

Frond  erect,  terete,  radially  constructed,  laterally  and  radially  somewhat  irregu- 
larly branched,  long  and  short  branches  intermixed;  structure  cellular'  or  filamentous- 
cellular,  with  a  circle  of  five  (very  rarely  four)  pericentral  cells,  naked  or  inclosed  by  a 
more  or  less  dense  rhizoidal  cortex,  apical  growth  sympodial,  the  entire  frond  or  the 
younger  parts  densely  covered  by  spirally  arranged,  repeatedly  forked,  colored  tricho- 
blasts;  tetrasporangia  in  whorls  (usually  of  five  sporangia)  at  each  segment  of  special 
lanceolate  branchlets  (stichidia)  arising  as  young  branches  of  the  trichoblasts  and 
attached  to  these  by  monosiphonous  stalks,  covered  by  special  cover  cells  when  young, 
uncovered  when  mature,  triangularly  divided;  antheridia  arising  as  branches  of  the 
trichoblasts,  lanceolate-conical,  ending  in  a  sterile  apex,  borne  on  a  monosiphonous 
stalk;  procarps  numerous  near  the  growing  apices  of  more  or  less  developed  lateral 
branches;  cystocarps  ovate-globose  or  urn-shaped,  borne  laterally  on  smaller  branches, 
pericarp  rather  thin,  opening  by  a  conspicuous  terminal  carpostome,  gonimoblast  com- 
posed of  dichotomously  branched  filaments  radiating  from  a  basal  placenta,  forming 
oval  or  club-shaped  carpospores  singly  or,  rarely,  in  short  chains  of  two  to  three  spores 
from  their  terminal  segments. 

Thirty  to  forty  species,  in  warm  seas. 
Dasya  pedicellata  Agardh.    PI.  CX,  fig.  2. 

Dasya  pedicellata,  Agardh,  1824,  p.  an. 

Dasya  elegans,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  60. 

Dasya  elegans,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  177,  pi.  is,{  .  i. 

Dasya  elegans,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  1201. 

A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  51  (Dasya  elegans). 

P.  B.-A.  No.  545.  Pasc.  A,  No.  XXIII  (Dasya  elegans). 

Fronds  moderately  robust,  flexuous,  terete,  4  to  90  cm.  long,  about  0.6  to  6  mm.  in  diameter  in 
main  stems,  arising  singly  from  a  small  basal  disk,  branching  lateral,  decompound,  sparse  or  profuse, 
lower  portions  of  the  main  stem  and  larger  branches  naked,  smaller  branches,  and  sometimes  almost 
the  entire  plant,  very  densely  covered  by  conspicuous,  monosiphonous,  dichotomous,  flaccid  tricho- 
blasts going  out  on  all  sides  from  the  cortical  layer,  not  tapering  toward  the  apices;  pericentral  cells 


MARINE   ALGJE,  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  509 

five,  in  the  older  portions  surrounded  by  one  or  more  layers  of  smaller  secondary  cells  and  always  inclosed 
by  a  layer  of  small,  cortical  cells;  tetrasporangia  numerous,  borne  in  linear-lanceolate  stichidia  attenuate 
at  the  apices;  cystocarps  urn-shaped,  often  excentric,  usually  single,  rarely  2  to  3  together,  borne  near 
the  apices  of  short  lateral  branches;  texture  soft  gelatinous-cartilaginous,  flaccid;  color  light  to  dark 
purplish  red;  tetrasporangia,  antheridia,  and  cystocarps  borne  on  separate  plants;  sexual  and  asexual 
generations  alternating  regularly  in  the  life  cycle. 

New  England  to  West  Indies;  Canary  Islands;  Mediterranean. 

Throughout  harbor,  and  on  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford  jetties,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  15  to  45  cm.  below 
low-tide  level,  very  abundant  April,  1908,  abundant  May,  1907,  few  specimens  on  coral  reef  offshore, 
May,  1907.  Collected  during  the  winter  and  spring  1908-9,  as  follows:  Fort  Macon  jetty,  December, 
one  small  fragment;  April,  large,  fruiting;  May,  small,  battered;  Bogue  Beach,  February,  sterile; 
March,  fruiting;  April,  large,  fruiting.  Few  specimens  Bogue  Beach,  July,  1903,  and  September,  1904; 
few  small  specimens  attached  to  stem  of  Leptogorgia  virgulata  on  Fort  Macon  jetty,  August,  1904. 
One  specimen  about  i  cm.  tall  on  shell  in  sound  near  inlet,  Pawleys  Island,  near  Georgetown,  S.  C., 
August,  1909. 

This  species  will  not  be  mistaken  for  any  other,  being  easily  recognized  by  its  dense  covering  of 
capillary,  dichotomous  filaments.  In  this  region  the  species  seems  to  appear  in  occasional  specimens 
during  the  winter,  reaches  its  maximal  development  in  April,  and  almost  or  entirely  disappears  by 
June.  Further  study  is  needed  to  show  how  it  survives  from  one  spring  to  another,  since  the  occasional 
specimens  observed  at  other  seasons  have  not  been  found  with  sufficient  regularity  to  account  for  the 
maintenance  of  the  species. 

Family  5.   CERAMIACE/E   (Bonnemaison)  Naegeli. 

Frond  terete  or  flattened,  often  filamentous,  richly  laterally  or  dichotomously 
branched,  usually  erect,  sometimes  partially  or  almost  entirely  horizontal,  rarely  para- 
sitic, structure  various,  usually  composed  of  naked  or  more  or  less  corticated  filaments; 
tetrasporangia  occurring  singly  or  in  groups,  in  special  branches  or  scattered  over  the 
frond,  external  or  sunken  in  the  cortical  layer,  usually  triangularly,  sometimes  cruci- 
ately,  divided;  antheridia  scattered  over  the  thallus  in  various  positions,  bearing  numer- 
ous crowded  spermatangia ;  carpogonia  usually  closely  associated  with  cells  which, 
after  fertilization,  produce  the  auxiliary  cells,  forming  definite  procarps  of  various 
forms,  external,  scattered  over  the  thallus  or  occurring  in  definite  regions,  often  having 
two  auxiliary  cells  associated  with  one  carpogonium ;  cystocarps  external  or  more  or  less 
embedded  in  the  cortex,  conspicuous,  sometimes  occurring  in  pairs,  often  having  two 
gonimoblasts  associated  in  a  single  cystocarp,  naked  or  inclosed  by  special  filamentous 
branchlets  forming  a  more  or  less  lax  pericarp,  gonimoblast  arising  from  a  basal  pla- 
centa, sometimes  compact,  usually  divided  into  several  more  or  less  conspicuous,  usually 
rounded  lobes,  consisting  of  richly  branched  filaments  forming  carpospores  from  nearly 
every  cell. 

Nearly  400  species,  in  all  seas,  especially  in  warm  regions;  two  species  reported  as 
terrestrial. 

KEY  TO  GENERA. 

a.  Thallus  consisting  of  monosiphonous  filaments  entirely  or  almost  entirely  without  cortex b. 

b.  Thallus  consisting  of  erect,   laterally  branched,   filamentous  branches  arising  from 

horizontal  filaments;  cystocarps  terminal ,  bearing  two  gonimoblasts. .  i.  Spermothamnion  (p.  510). 
bb.  Thallus  erect,  consisting  in  part  of  long  barrel-shaped  or  obovoid  cells  in  moniliform 

filaments;  cystocarps  terminal,  sometimes  appearing  lateral  at  the  nodes. 2.  Griffithsia  (p.  511). 
bbb.  Thallus  erect,  main  filaments  often  corticated  be\ow  with  descending  rhizoidal  fila- 
ments; cystocarps  lateral,  sessile 3-  Callithamnion  (p.  511). 


510  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 

aa.  Thallus  consisting  of  a  monosiphonous  central  axis  partially  or  entirely  surrounded  by 

cortical  layers \  •  •  •  -c. 

c.  Thallus  laterally  branched,  cortex  continuous  throughout  or  lacking  only  on  the  finer 

divisions 4-  Spyridia  (p.  512). 

cc.  Thallus  dichotomously  branched,  forcipate  at  apices,  cortex  continuous  or  present 

only  at  the  nodes 5-  Ceramium  (p.  513). 

Genus  i.  Spermothamnion  Areschoug. 

Spermothamnion,  Areschoug,  1847,  p.  334. 

Thallus  composed  of  erect,  naked,  monosiphonous  filaments  arising  from  creeping 
filaments  attached  to  the  substratum  at  intervals,  erect  filaments  oppositely  or  alter- 
nately branched;  tetrasporangia  sessile,  occurring  singly  or  in  groups  on  short  lateral 
branchlets,  triangularly  divided;  antheridia  ovoid-oblong,  sessile  on  short  lateral  branch- 
lets,  sometimes  terminal,  composed  of  minute  hyaline  cells  grouped  around  a  central 
axis;  procarps  usually  terminal  on  lateral  branchlets,  always  with  two  auxiliary  cells; 
cystocarps  globose,  small,  terminal  on  lateral  branchlets,  sometimes  naked,  usually 
inclosed  by  short  upgrowing,  filamentous  branchlets,  pericarp  lacking,  containing  two 
gonimoblasts  which  are  small,  compressed,  and  bear  numerous  single,  rounded  carpo- 
spores  radiating  in  all  directions. 

About  15  species,  in  warm  and  temperate  seas. 

Spermothamnion  investiens  (Crouan)  Vickers.     PI.  XCI,  fig.  i. 

Cattithamnion  investiens,  Crouan,  in  Schramm  and  Maz£,  1865,  p.  7. 
Callitkamnion  investiens,  Crouan,  in  Maz£  and  Schramm,  1870,  p.  141. 
Spermothamnion  investiens,  Vickers,  1905,  p.  64. 

Thallus  forming  dense  woolly  tufts,  closely  enveloping  the  host  plant;  primary  filaments  creeping, 
attached  to  the  substratum  at  intervals  by  unicellular,  rhizoidal  structures  flattened  at  their  ends  to 
form  attaching  disks,  secondary  filaments  erect,  numerous,  i  to  3  mm.  tall,  14  to  16  mic.  wide,  sparingly 
alternately  branched,  sometimes  simple,  branches  usually  simple,  segments  30  to  100  mic.  long,  usually 
55  to  70  mic. ;  tetrasporangia  occurring  singly,  terminating  short  (usually  one-celled),  lateral  branchlets, 
borne  oppositely  or  secundly,  ellipsoid  or  slightly  obovate,  sometimes  almost  globose,  30  to  40  mic. 
wide,  37  to  45  mic.  long;  antheridia  oblong-ovate,  borne  singly  at  the  apices  of  more  or  less  prolonged 
lateral  branches  or  of  the  main  filaments;  cystocarps  situated  like  the  antheridia;  texture  velvetyj  color 
rose. 

West  Indies. 

Occasionally  very  abundant  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  on  about  half  of  the  specimens  of 
Zonaria  flava  found  on  the  beach  throughout  the  year,  fruiting  at  all  seasons,  very  abundant  on  about 
one-third  of  specimens  of  Zonaria  flava  dredged  off  coral  reef,  May,  1907. 

The  Beaufort  plants  are  closely  similar  to  Miss  Vickers 's  specimens  from  Barbados.  This  species 
here  forms  dense,  velvety  mats  covering  in  almost  pure  growths  the  main  stems,  branches,  and  larger 
ribs  of  the  Zonaria.  It  has  been  found  only  on  this  host  except  in  one  instance  when  a  battered  speci- 
men of  Brongniartella  mucronata  on  Bogue  Beach  had  the  lower  part  of  its  stem  densely  covered  with 
filaments  of  this  species.  It  seems  very  probable  that  all  the  plants  of  Zonaria  flava  found  here  have  come 
from  the  coral  reef  offshore. 

It  has  been  noted  by  Farlow  (1882,  p.  119)  and  Lewis  (1909,  pp.  683,  684)  that,  in  S.  turneri  (Mert.) 
Aresch,  apparent  tetraspores  may  occur  on  the  same  individual  with  procarps,  cystocarps,  or  antheridia. 
The  author  has,  in  the  present  species,  observed  cystocarps  on  the  same  filaments  with  what  appeared  to 
be  undivided  tetrasporangia,  but  has  not  found  cystocarps  and  mature  tetraspores  on  the  same  plant.  In 
one  instance  there  was  observed  a  structure  (fig.  42)  that  appeared  to  be  an  imperfectly  divided  tetra- 
sporangium  which  had  continued  its  growth  as  a  vegetative  filament.  At  Beaufort  the  masses  of  Sper- 
mothamnion on  some  specimens  of  Zonaria  seem  to  be  entirely  tetrasporic,  but  on  other  plants  of  the 
host  antheridia,  cystocarps,  and  tetraspores  occur  intermingled. 


MARINE   ALGJ3   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  511 

In  spite  of  its  small  size,  this  is  the  most  favorable  species  found  in  this  region  for  the  study  of  the 
structure  of  the  procarp,  the  process  of  fertilization,  and  the  development  of  the  cystocarp.  Since  all 
the  organs  are  entirely  external,  these  structures  appear  with  diagrammatic  clearness,  and  fruits  of  all 
ages  are  often  found  in  great  abundance. 

Genus  2.  Griffithsia  Agardh. 
Griffitsia,  Agardh,  1817,  p.  XXVIII. 

Frond  erect,  filamentous,  composed  of  simple  rows  of  large,  more  or  less  long,  cylin- 
drical, barrel-shaped  or  obovoid  cells,  naked  or  possessed  of  whorls  of  evanescent,  short, 
branched  filaments,  branching  lateral  or  dichotomous ;  tetrasporangia  occurring  in ' 
whorls  at  the  nodes,  or  on  the  inner  side  of  short,  fascicled  branches,  usually  surrounded 
by  sterile  filaments,  triangularly  divided;  antheridia  forming  compact  tufts  occupying 
positions  similar  to  those  of  the  tetrasporangia  or  densely  covering  the  apices  of  terminal 
segments;  cystocarps  terminal  on  greatly  shortened  branches,  sometimes  appearing 
lateral  at  the  nodes,  usually  several  occurring  together,  inclosed  by  a  tuft  of  sterile  fila- 
ments, having  one  or,  rarely,  two  gonimoblasts,  gonimoblast  usually  compact,  sometimes 
divided  into  several  lobes,  forming  carpospores  from  nearly  every  cell. 

About  25  species,  especially  in  warm  seas. 

One  small  fragment  found  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.;  August,  1904,  seems, 
from  its  structure,  to  belong  to  this  genus,  but  is  insufficient  for  specific  determination; 
several  fragments  showing  the  characteristic  structure  of  the  genus  (fig.  43)  were  dredged 
from  the  coral  reef  offshore,  August,  1914. 

Genus  3.  Callithamnion  Lyngbye. 

Callithamnion,  Lyngbye,  1819,  p.  123. 

Frond  erect,  filamentous,  composed  of  simple  rows  of  cells,  naked'  or,  in  many  species, 
the  main  filaments  corticated  below  by  rhizoidal,  descending  filaments,  branching 
abundant,  dichotomous  or  lateral,  in  the  latter  case  radial  throughout,  or  distichous 
above,  structure  monopodial  or  sympodial,  cells  multinucleate ;  tetrasporangia  occur- 
ring singly  or  in  groups  on  the  upper  side  of  segments  of  upper  branchlets,  triangu- 
larly divided,  sometimes  transversely  bipartite;  antheridia  forming  small  compact 
tufts  of  branched  filaments  of  various  forms  situated  on  the  upper  side  of  upper  branchlets; 
procarps  occurring  singly  or  in  rows,  intercalary  on  the  upper  branchlets,  usually  having 
two  opposite  auxiliary  cells;  cystocarps  borne  laterally  on  upper  branchlets,  some- 
times appearing  terminal,  usually  containing  two  gonimoblasts,  sometimes  only  one, 
gonimoblasts  divided  into  several  successively  formed,  rounded  lobes,  producing  numer- 
ous carpospores,  pericarp  and  encircling  branches  lacking,  but  cystocarp  inclosed 
by  thin,  gelatinous  covering. 

About  40  species,  all  marine,  very  difficult  of  determination,  widely  distributed, 
especially  in  warm  seas. 

This  genus,  which  is  abundantly  represented  in  some  other  regions,  has  few  species 
or  individuals  at  Beaufort  and  has  not  been  observed  by  the  author  elsewhere  within 
our  limits.  The  single  species  identified  at  Beaufort  (C.  polyspermum)  is,  however, 
reported  from  Charleston,  and  representatives  will  probably  be  found  in  other  localities 
along  our  coast.  In  determining  species,  the  habit  and  manner  of  branching  are 
important  characters,  and  as  these  distinctions  are  often  difficult  to  make  and  some 
species  are  variable  in  these  respects,  determinations  can  be  made  only  by  careful 
comparison  with  authentic  specimens. 
159321°— 20 10 


5i2  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

Callithamnion  polyspennum  Agardh. 

Callitkamnion  Polyspermum,  Agardh,  1828,  p.  169. 
Callithamnion  poiyspermum,  Harvey,  1853,  P-  234. 
Callithamnion  poiyspermum,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  126. 
Callithamnion  poiyspermum,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  1315 

Frond  capillary,  forming  more  or  less  dense  tufts  i  to  6  cm.  tall,  branching  profuse,  decompound, 
alternate,  radial  below,  distichously  pinnate  above,  pinnae  naked  at  the  base,  pinnulate  above  the 
middle;  slightly  corticated,  segments  of  the  main  filaments  2  diameters  long  below,  4  diameters  above, 
uppermost  ones  shorter;  tetrasporangia  numerous,  secund  on  the  inner  side  of  the  pinnules  or  scattered; 
cystocarps  large,  rotund-ovate,  occurring  singly  or  up  to  four  or  five  together;  texture  flaccid;  color 
bright,  purplish  rose. 

Warm  and  temperate  North  Atlantic;  Vancouver  Island. 

Several  small  tufts  on  Fort  Macon  jetty,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  June,  1907. 

Two  small  masses  of  Callithamnion  collected  on  Fort  Macon  jetty  at  the  same 
time  as  the  above  may  also  be  referred  to  this  species  or  may  be  specimens  of  C.  tetra- 
gonum  (Wither.)  Ag.  Two  other  specimens  from  Fort  Macon  jetty,  March,  1909, 
resemble  C.  affine  Harv.,  but  are  immature  and  can  not  be  determined  with  reasonable 
certainty.  In  addition  to  these,  many  small  masses  or  fragments  insufficient  for  deter- 
mination have  been  found  on  Bogue  Beach  at  different  times. 

Genus  4.  Spyridia  Harvey. 

Spyridia,  Harvey,  in  Hooker,  1833,  p.  336. 

Frond  erect,  usually  terete,  sometimes  somewhat  flattened,  branching  profuse, 
usually  radial,  sometimes  somewhat  distichous,  frond  beset  with  numerous  more  or 
less  fine,  hairlike,  persistent  or  somewhat  evanescent  branchlets  composed  of  single 
rows  of  cells,  sometimes  with  layers  of  cortical  cells  encircling  the  nodes  or  covering 
the  entire  branchlet;  structure  cellular,  with  a  central  axis  composed  of  a  row  of  large 
cells  and  surrounded,  for  the  most  part,  by  a  more  or  less  dense  cortex  whose  cells  become 
smaller  toward  the  surface;  tetrasporangia  occurring  singly  or  in  groups  externally 
at  the  nodes  of  hairlike  branchlets,  triangularly  divided;  antheridia  forming  more 
or  less  expanded  cylindrical  patches  inclosing  portions  of  the  hairlike  branchlets; 
procarps  terminal  on  short  branches,  bearing  two  opposite  auxiliary  cells;  cystocarps 
terminal  on  short  lateral  branches,  at  first  having  two  lobes,  later  forming  three  or 
more  irregular  lobes,  pericarp  rather  thick,  at  first  closed,  later  opening  irregularly, 
gonimoblast  divided  into  several  lobes  composed  of  dichotomous  fastigiate  filaments, 
forming  carpospores  from  their  upper  segments,  these  spores  appearing  in  tufts  ladiating 
from  a  placenta  that  is  continuous  with  the  stalk  of  the  cystocarp  and  is  prolonged 
almost  to  its  apex. 

About  17  species  in  warm  and  temperate  seas. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

Ultimate  branches  not  markedly  tapering  toward  the  bases,  not  club-shaped .  i.  S.  filamentosa  (p.  512). 
Ultimate  branches  markedly  tapering  toward  the  bases,  club-shaped 2.  5.  clavata  (p.  513). 

i.  Spyridia  filamentosa  (Wulfen)  Harvey.     PI.  CXI,  fig.  i 

Fucusfilamentosvs,  Wulfen,  1803,  p.  64. 

Spyridia  filamentosa,  Harvey,  in  Hooker,  1833,  P-  336. 

Spyridia  filamentosa,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  204. 

Spyridia  filamentosa,  Farlow,  1883,  p.  140,  pi.  10,  f.  i,  pi.  xa,  f.  a. 

Spyridia  filamentosa,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  1427. 

A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  151  a,  b. 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  393.  1746,  1897. 


MARINE   ALGJE,  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  513 

Fronds  moderately  robust,  terete,  4  to  25  cm.  tall,  about  i  mm.  in  diameter  below,  tapering  toward 
the  apices,  branching  radial,  cortex  continuous  almost  to  the  apices  of  the  branches;  branches  some- 
times recurved,  hairlike  branchlets  more  or  less  abundant,  especially  over  the  upper  parts  of  the 
branches,  about  0.5  to  1.5  mm.  long,  naked,  except  at  the  nodes,  where  they  are  surrounded  by  a 
ring  of  cortical  cells,  simple  and  acuminate  at  the  apices;  segments  of  the  branches  about  equal  to  the 
diameter  in  length  or  somewhat  longer,  those  of  the  hair  branchlets  2  to  4  diameters  long;  tetrasporangia 
borne  singly  or  two  to  three  together  at  the  nodes  of  the  hairlike  branchlets;  cystocarps  two  to  three 
lobed,  terminal  on  short,  lateral  branches;  texture  flaccid  or  slightly  rigid  and  brittle;  color  purplish 
pink. 

Warm  and  temperate  waters  generally. 

Small  fragments  in  tide  pool  on  "Town  Marsh,"  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  September,  1905,  two  large 
masses  on  Bogue  Beach,  October,  1905,  large,  battered  specimens  in  tide  pool  ("Mullet  Pond")  on 
Shackleford  Banks,  August,  1907,  few  plants  dredged  from  coral  reef  offshore,  August,  1914  and  1915.' 
Abundant  on  Zostera  marina  in  Pamlico  Sound,  o  to  30  cm.  below  low  water,  August,  1907,  Ocracoke, 
N.  C.  Few  specimens  on  beach,  August,  1909,  Georgetown,  S.  C. 

This  species  is  distinguished  from  the  following  one  by  absence  of  the  club-shaped  branches  and 
by  the  numerous  fine,  hairlike  branchlets  scattered  over  the  frond  and  usually  abundant  on  the  younger 
parts  of  the  branches.  It  is  variable  in  appearance,  but  good  specimens  are  usually  easily  recognized. 
It  is  not  likely  to  be  mistaken  for  any  other  species  in  this  region. 

2.  Spyridia  clavata  Kuetzing. 

Spyridia  clavata,  Kuetzing,  1841,  p.  744. 
Spyridia  clavata,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  1435. 

Fronds  slender  or  moderately  robust,  rather  terete  below,  flattened  above,  8  to  20  cm.  long,  about 
i  to  2  mm.  wide,  branching  distichous,  usually  alternate,  sometimes  opposite,  larger  and  smaller  branches 
intermixed,  cortex  continuous  to  the  apices  of  the  branches;  smaller  branches  tapering  toward  the 
bases,  larger  toward  the  apices,  markedly  club  shaped,  about  2  to  4.5  mm.  long,  apices  acuminate  or 
obtuse;  very  fine,  hairlike  branchlets  present,  but  not  very  conspicuous,  naked,  except  at  the  nodes, 
where  they  are  surrounded  by  a  ring  of  cortical  cells,  simple  and  acuminate  at  the  apices;  texture 
gelatinous-cartilaginous,  somewhat  rigid ;  color  light  pink  with  tinge  of  green  or  straw.  ^  . 

North  Carolina;  West  Indies;  Senegambia. 

Several  plants  dredged  from  coral  reef  offshore,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1914. 

This  species  is  distinguished  from  the  preceding  by  its  markedly  club-shaped,  small  branches 
and  by  the  flattening  present  in  the  upper  part  of  the  frond.  It  sometimes  resembles,  in  its  gross  appear- 
ance, Chondria  tenuissima,  but  is  easily  distinguished  from  this  by  its  evident  segments  showing  through 
the  cortex,  resembling  in  this  respect  Ceramium  rubrum. 

This  is  the  northern  known  limit  of  the  species. 

Genus  5.  Ceramium  Agardh. 
Ceramium,  Agardh,  1817,  p.  XXVI. 

Frond  erect,  terete,  slender,  of  moderate  size,  branching  profuse,  regularly  dichoto- 
mous  with  forcipate  apices,  and  bearing  in  addition  more  or  less  numerous  lateral 
branches;  structure  cellular,  with  a  central  axis  composed  of  a  row  of  large  cells  and 
surrounded  at  the  nodes  or  throughout  by  a  more  or  less  dense  cortex  whose  cells  become 
smaller  toward  the  surface,  sometimes  beset  with  spinelike  hairs;  tetrasporangia  formed 
from  cortical  cells  at  the  nodes,  naked  or  inclosed,  often  becoming  prominent  and  pro- 
truding, occurring  singly  or  several  together,  sometimes  forming  a  single  or  double  circle 
surrounding  the  node,  triangularly  divided;  antheridia  forming  more  or  less  expanded 
irregular  patches  over  the  surface  of  the  cortex  on  smaller  branches;  procarps  occurring 
in  small  numbers  on  the  outer  side  of  the  upper  dichotomies,  bearing  two  carpogonia; 
cystocarps  lateral,  sessile  at  the  nodes,  toward  the  apices  of  the  branches,  sometimes 
appearing  almost  terminal,  surrounded  by  several  short,  incurved  branchlets,  contain- 


514  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

ing  one  or  two  gonimoblasts  divided  into  several  rounded  lobes  successively  developed 
and  forming  numerous  angular  carpospores  inclosed  by  a  hyaline  sack,  pericarp  lacking. 

About  65  species,  all  marine,  generally  distributed. 

The  genus  is  easily  recognized  by  the  dichotomous  frond  consisting  of  a  central  row 
of  large  cells,  with  a  cortical  layer  inclosing  the  nodes  or  extending  over  the  entire  thallus 
and  usually  with  forcipate  tips,  but  the  species  are  often  difficult  of  determination.  Few 
species  have  been  found  in  this  region,  and  the  two  of  these  that  are  certainly  determin- 
able  are  usually  easily  recognized. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

a.  Cortex  covering  the  entire  frond 2.  C.  rubrum  (p.  514). 

aa.  Cortex  confined  to  band  surrounding  each  node,  internodes  naked b. 

b.  Tetrasporangia  occurring  singly  at  the  nodes  in  secund  series  or  two  to  four  together  in  a 

semicircle i.  C.  tenuissimum  (p.  5 14). 

bb.  Tetrasporangia  occurring  in  single  circles  surrounding  the  nodes 3.  C.  strictum  (p.  515). 

1.  Ceramium  tenuissimum  (Lyngbye)  J.  Agardh. 

Ceramium  diaphanum  var.  tenuissimum,  Lyngbye,  1819,  p.  120,  pi.  37,  B,  f.  4. 

Ceramium  tenuissimum,  J.  Agardh,  1851,  p.  120. 

Ceramium  tenuissimum,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  216. 

Ceramium  tenuissimum,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  138. 

Ceramium  tenuissimum,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  1450. 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  497,  798,  1298,  1898. 

Frond  capillary,  of  uniform  diameter,  forming  more  or  less  dense  tufts  usually  2  to  10  cm.  high, 
regularly  dichotomously  decompound  with  short,  lateral  branches  scattered  here  and  there,  branches 
erect,  spreading,  apices  forcipate",  lower  segments  3  to  6  diameters  long,  nodes  slightly  swollen,  cortex 
confined  to  a  band  surrounding  each  node  and  extending  for  a  short  distance  over  the  internodes,  remain- 
der of  internode  naked;  tetrasporangia  occurring  singly  on  the  outer  side  of  the  upper  nodes  in  secund 
series  or,  less  often,  two  to  four  together  forming  more  or  less  of  a  semicircle  at  the  nodes,  immersed  in  the 
cortical  layer,  often  protruding  and  prominent;  cystocarps  lateral  near  the  apices,  surrounded  by  a  few 
short,  simple,  incurved  branches;  texture  slightly  rigid;  color  purplish  or  reddish  pink. 

Temperate  waters  generally. 

Occasional  on  other  algae,  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  summer  and  autumn,  fruiting. 

Here  are  placed,  with  some  doubt,  several  small,  rather  uncharacteristic  specimens  whose  characters, 
as  far  as  they  are  shown,  seem  to  agree  with  this  species.  These  are  0.5  to  3  cm.  tall,  and  bear  tetraspor- 
angia usually  singly,  protruding,  inclosed  by  a  cellular  covering.  Both  tetrasporangia  and  cystocarps 
are  abundant,  even  on  plants  only  0.5  cm.  tall.  The  characters  of  these  specimens  would,  perhaps, 
agree  equally  well  with  those  of  C.  fastigiatum,  but  it  may  be  questioned  if  these  two  species  are  really 
distinct.  With  the  exception  of  a  single  plant,  all  the  specimens  of  Ceramium  which  have  been  found 
here  during  the  summer  and  autumn  may,  perhaps,  be  referred  to  this  species,  but  it  is  possible  that 
some  or  all  of  these  may  be  reduced  summer  forms  of  C.  strictum. 

2.  Ceramium  rubrum  (Hudson)  Agardh.     PL  CXI,  fig.  2. 

Conferva  rubra,  Hudson,  1762,  p.  XXVII. 
Ceramium  rubrum,  Agardh,  1817,  p.  60. 
Ceramium  rubrum,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  213. 
Ceramium  rubrum,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  135. 
Ceramium  rubrum,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  1476. 
P.  B.— A.  Nos.  345,  646. 

Frond  robust,  tapering  toward  the  apices,  5  to  40  cm.  tall,  dichotomously  decompound  with  short, 
sometimes  numerous,  lateral  branches;  branches  subfastigiate  or  spreading,  apices  usually  forcipate, 
nodes  often  contracted,  lower  segments  2  to  3  diameters  long,  cortex  covering  the  entire  frond,  moder- 
ately thick  below,  thinner  above,  more  or  less  obscuring  the  nodes;  tetrasporangia  immersed  among  the 
cortical  cells  at  the  nodes,  forming  one  or  two  circles  surrounding  the  nodes  or  occurring  without  order, 
rather  prominent;  cystocarps  occurring  singly  or  in  pairs  on  the  upper  branches,  surrounded  by  a  few 
short,  incurved  branches;  texture  rather  rigid;  color  dull  reddish. 


MARINE   ALG^E   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  515 

Cold  and  temperate  North  Atlantic  and  Pacific,  reported  on  our  coast  as  far  south  as  Charleston,  S.  C. 
One  specimen,  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  April,  1908. 

This  species  will  not  be  mistaken  for  any  other  in  our  region,  being  easily  recognized  by  the  com- 
pletely corticated  fronds.  Several  varieties  have  been  described. 

3.  Ceramium  strictum  Harvey.     PI.  CXI,  fig.  3. 

Ceramium  strictum,  Harvey,  18493,  p.  163  (in  part  and  excluding  synonyms,  not  Gongroceras  strictum  Kuetzing). 
Ceramium  strictum,   Farlow,  1882,  p.  136. 
Ceramium  strictum,  De  Toni,  1903,  p.  1484. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  347,  846. 

Frond  capillary,  tapering  toward  the  apices,  forming  more  or  less  dense  tufts,  usually  2  to  15  cm.  tall, 
regularly  dichotomously  decompound  with  short  lateral  dichotomous  branches  scattered  here  and  there; 
branches  fastigiate,  apices  forcipate,  lower  segments  4  to  6  diameters  long;  cortex  confined  to  a  narrow 
band  surrounding  each  node  and  extending  a  short  distance  over  the  internodes;  remainder  of  inter- 
node  naked;  tetrasporangia  occurring  in  single  circles  surrounding  the  nodes,  immersed  among  the 
cortical  cells;  cystocarps  lateral  near  the  apices  of  branches,  surrounded  by  a  few  rather  elongated, 
simple,  incurved  branches;  textuie  flaccid;  color  purplish  pink. 

Temperate  North  Atlantic;  Mediterranean. 

Beaufort,  N.  C.:  Few  specimens  on  Bogue  Beach,  February  and  March,  1909;  very  abundant 
throughout  harbor  and  on  Fort  Macon  and  Shackleford  jetties,  o  to  30  cm.  below  low  water,  April,  1908; 
fairly  abundant  throughout  harbor  and  on  jetties,  May,  1907;  on  few  specimens  of  Gracilaria  confervoides 
from  coral  reef  offshore,  May,  1907;  one  specimen  on  Fort  Macon  jetty,  July,  1908. 

This  species  varies  considerably  in  the  diameter  of  the  frond,  the  color,  and  the  amount  of  branch- 
ing, but  good  specimens  will  usually  be  easily  recognized  by  the  narrow  bands  of  cortical  cells  and  the 
single  whorls  of  tetrasporangia  around  the  nodes.  It  is  the  only  species  which  has  been  observed  grow- 
ing here  in  the  spring.  The  only  species  observed  in  this  region  with  which  it  is  likely  to  be  confused 
is  C.  tenuissimum  (?),  from  which  it  is  distinguished  by  its  whorls  of  tetrasporangia  and  often  by  its 
narrower  bands  of  cortical  cells.  Typical  specimens  of  these  species  will  not  be  mistaken  for  each 
other,  but  as  the  tetrasporangia  of  C.  tenuissimum  are  sometimes  borne  in  more  or  less  of  a  semicircle , 
and  those  of  C.  strictum  sometimes  form  incomplete  whorls,  some  specimens  will  give  considerable 
trouble  in  their  determination.  In  C.  strictum  the  naked  internodes  are  often  more  conspicuous  than  in 
C.  tenuissimum,  being  strikingly  evident  to  the  naked  eye. 

This  is  the  southern  limit  recorded  for  the  species  on  our  coast,  but  it  probably  extends  farther  south 
in  the  spring.  In  this  region  it  seems  to  appear  about  February,  reach  its  greatest  development  in  April, 
and  disappear  about  June,  unless  some  of  the  small  specimens  found  during  the  summer  are  stunted 
summer  forms  of  this  species. 

Besides  the  specimens  referred  to  above,  minute,  undeveloped  plants,  insufficient 
for  reference  to  any  species,  are  found  occasionally  on  other  algae  on  Fort  Macon  jetty 
and  on  Bogue  Beach. 

Order  4.  Cryptonemiales. 

Cryptoneminse,  De  Toni,  1905,  p.  1523. 

Carpogenic  branches  and  auxiliary  cells  occurring  separately  in  the  thallus.  The 
fertilized  egg  cell  sends  out  through  the  tissue  of  the  thallus  more  or  less  long,  often 
branched  filaments  whose  terminal  or  intercalary  cells  fuse  with  single  auxiliary  cells; 
thereupon  these  auxiliary  cells  develop  gonimoblasts  toward  the  surface  or.  interior  of 
the  thallus,  usually  attached  to  a  basal  placenta;  cystocarps  usually  immersed. 

KEY  TO  FAMILIES. 

Carpogonia  and  auxiliary  cells  formed  on  special  secondary  filaments,  which  develop 
branches  forming  upright,  oval,  or  flask-shaped  structures  inclosing  the  reproductive 
cells,  gonimoblast  embedded '  in  the  thallus,  forming  several  successive  lobes 

i.  GRATELOUPIACE^  (p.  516). 


516  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

Carpogonia  and  auxiliary  cells  numerous,  formed  at  the  base  of  special  flask -shaped  concep- 
tacles  in  the  thallus,  usually  closely  associated,  gonimoblasts  numerous,  usually 
arising  from  a  cell  formed  by  the  fusion,  after  fertilization,  of  all  the  auxiliary 
cells 2.  CORALUNACE^  (p-  522)- 

Family  1.  GRATELOUPIACELE  Schmitz. 

Frond  usually  terete,  sometimes  angular,  flattened  or  foliaceous,  usually  laterally, 
sometimes  dichotomously,  branched  in  various  ways,  nearly  always  showing  a  very 
evident  filamentous  structure;  tetrasporangia  scattered  over  the  thallus  or  confined  to 
special  fertile  portions,  embedded  in  the  cortex  or  in  swollen  nemathecia,  cruciately 
divided;  carpogonia  and  auxiliary  cells  formed  on  short,  special  branches  of  filaments 
in  the  inner  part  of  the  outer  cortex,  these  branches  giving  off  short  lateral  branches 
which  inclose  the  carpogonium  or  auxiliary  cell,  forming  upright  oval  or  flask-shaped 
structures,  auxiliary  cells  occurring  singly,  intercalary  in  the  filamentous  branches, 
branches  forming  auxiliary  cells  and,  to  a  less  extent,  those  forming  carpogonia,  devel- 
oped in  large  numbers,  intermingled;  cystocarps  usually  small,  scattered  over  the  thallus 
or  confined  to  special  portions,  usually  many  occurring  near  together,  embedded  in  the 
inner  cortex,. forming  very  slight  swellings  on  the  surface,  usually  surrounded  by  a  more 
or  less  developed  network  of  filaments,  communicating  with  the  exterior  by  a  pore, 
gonimoblast  arising  from  the  base  on  a  more  or  less  large  stalk  cell,  divided  into  more 
or  less  numerous,  compact,  successively  formed  lobes,  forming  numerous  carpospores 
in  compact  groups. 

About  1 50  species,  mostly  in  warm  seas. 

KEY  TO   GENERA. 

a.  Tetrasporangia   formed  in  nemathecia,  cortex  parenchymatous,  compact,  frond  foliose, 

borne  on  a  short  stalk 3.  Cryptonemia  (p.  521). 

aa.  Tetrasporangia  embedded  in  the  outer  cortex b. 

b.  Thallus  terete,  angular,  or  flattened,  cortex  rather  thin,  small  celled,  and  compact  with- 
out, large  celled  and  loose  within,  joining  medullary  portion  by  large,  scattered, 
reticulately  arranged  cells,  medullary  portion  consisting  of  a  -loose  network  of  fila- 
ments  i.  Halymenia  (p.  516). 

bb.  Thallus  flattened,  cortex  rather  thick,  consisting  of  compact  anticlinal  rows  of  small 
cells  without,  looser  within,  gradually  passing  over  into  the  medullary  portion, 
medullary  portion  consisting  of  a  rather  compact  network  of  filaments.  .2.  Grateloupia  (p.  520). 

Genus  i.  Halymenia  Agardh. 

Halymenia,  Agardh,  1817,  p.  XIX. 

Frond  terete,  angular,  or  flattened,  dichotomously  or  laterally  branched  in  various 
ways,  often  bearing  proliferations  from  the  margins;  structure  cellular  filamentous, 
medullary  portion  consisting  of  a  loose  network  of  thin,  segmented,  branched  filaments 
traversing  the  inner  tube,  cortex  usually  rather  thin,  small  celled  and  compact  without, 
large  celled  and  lax  within,  joined  to  the  medullary  portion  by  large,  scattered,  reticu- 
lately arranged  cells;  tetrasporangia  scattered  over  the  frond,  embedded  in  the  outer 
cortex,  cruciately  divided;  antheridia  forming  colorless  patches  over  the  surface  of  the 
thallus;  cystocarps  scattered  over  the  frond,  small,  inconspicuous,  embedded  in  the 
inner  cortex,  forming  little  or  no  swelling  on  the  surface,  inclosed  by  a  more  or  less 
developed  network  of  filaments,  communicating  with  *the  exterior  by  a  pore,  bearing 


MARINE   ALG^   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  517 

numerous  minute  carpospores  somewhat  fasciculately  radiating  from  a  central  point  and 
tightly  inclosed  by  gelatinous  material. 
About  25  species  in  warm  seas. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

a.  Frond  terete  or  slightly  flattened,  dichotomously  branched x.  H.  agardhii  (p.  517). 

aa.  Frond  with  broad,  flattened,  central  axis  and  main  branches  and  rather  terete  or  slightly 

flattened  secondary  branches,  laterally  branched 2.  H.  floresia  (p.  518). 

aaa.  Frond  flat,  expanded,  borne  on  a  short  stipe,  simple  or  giving  off  several  lobes  from 

near  the  base,  sometimes  proliferous  from  the  margins. . . .  .6. 

b.  Frond  gelatinous-fleshy,  moderately  thick,  surface  appearing  roughly  papillate  under 

microscope,   many  starlike  ganglia  plainly  visible  below  surface 3.  H.  gelinaria  (p.  518). 

66.  Frond  firm  membranaceous,  thin,  surface  smooth,  few  starlike  ganglia  visible  below 

surface,  color  purplish  pink 4.  //.  floridana  (p.  519). 

i.  Halymenia  agardhii  De  Toni.     PI.  CXII,  fig.  i. 

Isymenia  flabellata,  J.  Agardh,  1899,  p.  66. 
Halymenia  agardhii,  De  Toni,  1905,  p.  1542. 
A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  80  (Halymenia  decipiens). 
P.  B.-A.  No.  647  (Halymenia  dedpiens). 

Frond  terete  or  flattened,  5  to  20  cm.  tall,  2  to  10  mm.  in  diameter,  dichotomously  decompound, 
often  with  a  few  short  dichotomous  proliferations,  gradually  tapering  toward  the  apices,  branches  rather 
erect  and  spreading  above,  rounded  sinuses,  habit  usually  dense,  fan-shaped,  apices  obtuse,  inner  fila- 
ments more  or  less  abundant,  intermixed  with  jelly,  irregularly  branched,  anastomosing,  segmented, 
forming  more  or  less  long,  cylindrical,  or  short,  somewhat  rounded  cells;  tetrasporangia  scattered  over 
the  surface  among  the  cortical  cells,  inconspicuous;  cystocarps  immersed  in  the  inner  cortex,  forming 
no  swellings  on  the  surface,  appearing  as  small, 'inconspicuous  dots  scattered  over  the  frond;  texture 
rather  gelatinous;  color  yellowish  pink  to  dark,  purplish  pink. 

Florida;  West  Indies;  Bermuda. 

Two  fruiting  plants  dredged  from  coral  reef  offshore,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1915,  occasional  on 
Bogue  Beach,  summer  and  autumn,  sometimes  fruiting. 

In  typical  specimens  of  this  species  the  dichotomies  are  frequent,  becoming  more  numerous  toward 
the  tips,  forming  a  dense  habit  with  the  upper  branches  crowded,  the  apices  are  rounded,  and  the  internal 
filaments  are  fairly  numerous  and  usually  of  uniform  diameter.  But  apparently  there  is  considerable 
variation  among  authentic  specimens  in  the  size  of  the  plants,  the  acuteness  of  the  apices,  and  the 
amount  of  spreading  of  the  ultimate  branches. 

The  specimens  here  referred  to  this  species  vary  in  habit  and  somewhat  in  structure .  In  some  the 
branching  is  profuse,  forming  the  dense  habit  given  as  characteristic  of  the  species,  but  in  others  this 
is  distant,  forming  an  open  habit.  The  apices  are  sometimes  rounded,  but  are  more  often  acuminate, 
the  same  specimen  sometimes  having  some  branches  rounded  and  others  acuminate.  The  internal 
filaments  may  be  fairly  numerous,  but  are  often  sparse.  While,  therefore,  some  of  the  plants  do  not 
have  all  the  characters  given  as  typical  for  the  species,  authentic  specimens  themselves  vary  in  these 
respects.  It  may  be  that,  in  the  present  case,  two  species  are  confused,  but  it  has  seemed  impossible 
to  separate  the  specimens  into  two  groups.  It  has  been  mentioned  that  Dictyota  dichotoma,  growing  under 
different  conditions,  may  vary  in  the  acuteness  of  the  apices  and  may  assume  habits  described  for  different 
forms  and  even  different  species.  No  study  has  yet  been  made  of  H.  agarhdii  in  this  respect,  and  we  do 
not  know  enough  of  the  influence  of  the  environment  on  its  form  to  warrant  the  separation  of  species  on 
slight,  variable  differences  in  habit.  .  . 

This  species  may  easily  be  mistaken  for  members  of  other  genera  reported  from  Florida,  and  there- 
fore liable  to  be  cast  on  our  coast.  It  closely  resembles  Halarachnion  ligulatum  (Woodw.)  Kuetz.  The 
latter  species  has  a  more  generally  open  habit,  more  acute  apices  and  fewer  internal  filaments  than 
Halymenia  agardhii,  but,  as  has  been  mentioned,  the  latter  species  may  itself  vary  in  these  respects. 
The  essential  distinction  between  these  species  can  be  made  only  by  the  characters  of  the  genera,  in  that 
Halarachnion  forms  its  auxiliary  cells  and  cystocarps  on  the  primary  filaments,  while  Halymenia  forms 
these  on  special  secondary  branches. 


518  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 

H.  agardhii  also  bears  a  strong  superficial  resemblance  to  Chrysymenia  halymenioides  Harv.  Fruiting 
specimens  are  easily  distinguished,  since  in  the  latter  species  the  cystocarps  are  large  and  prominent, 
forming  conspicuous  excrescences  on  the  surface;  sterile  specimens  may  be  readily  distinguished  by  the 
structure,  the  frond  of  C.  halymeniodes  forming  a  delicate  tube  filled  only  with  jelly,  internal  filaments 
being  almost  or  entirely  lacking,  and  the  wall  composed  of  only  two  or  three  layers  of  cells. 

This  is  the  northern  limit  of  the  species  and  of  the  genus. 

a.  Halymenia  floresia  (Clemente)  Agardh.    PI.  CXII,  fig.  2. 

Fucus  floresius,  Clemente,  1807,  p.  312. 
Halymenia  floresia,  Agardh,  1812,  p.  209. 
Halymenia  floresia,  Harvey,  1833,  P.  193- 
Halymenia  floresia,  De  Toni,  1905,  p.  1545. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  298. 

Frond  flattened,  6  to  30  cm.  tall,  arising  from  a  basal  disk,  supported  on  a  stipe  tapering  into  the 
frond,  pinnately  decompound,  main  axis  flattened,  i  to  6  cm.jwide,  pinnae  flattened,  pinnules  somewhat 
flattened  or  rather  terete,  both  long,  linear,  acuminate,  spreading,  margins  of  pinnae  and  pinnules  entire 
or  beset  with  numerous  teeth  or  cilia,  inner  filaments  rather  sparse  and  lax,  intermixed  with  jelly,  cortex 
consisting  of  one  or  two  layers  of  cells;  tetrasporangia  occurring  among  the  cortical  cells,  inconspicuous; 
cystocarps  suspended  within  the  cortex,  inconspicuous,  forming  no  swellings  on  the  surface,  appearing 
as  minute  dots  scattered  over  the  frond;  texture  gelatinous,  delicate;  color  pinkish  straw  to  bright 
rosy  pink. 

Warm  North  Atlantic;  Mediterranean;  Red  Sea. 

One  fragment,  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  September,  1904. 

The  battered  fragment  found  at  Beaufort  is  12  cm.  long,  but  does  not  include  either  the  base  or  the 
apex.  It  resembles  specimens  of  the  species  from  other  regions,  except  that  it  is  less  frequently  branched. 
This  species  will  not  be  mistaken  for  any  other  within  our  range. 

This  is  the  northern  limit  of  the  species  and  of  the  genus. 

3.  Halymenia  gelinaria  Collins  and  Howe.     Fig.  44;  PI.  CXII,  figs.  3  and  43. 

Halymenia  gelinaria,  Collins  and  Howe,  1916,  p.  173. 

P.  B.-A.  Nos.  749  (Halymenia  floridana),  750  (Halymenia  floridana  forma  dentata),  2050. 

Frond  flat,  about  5  to  60  cm.  tall,  3  to  60  cm.  wide,  borne  on  a  short,  narrow,  filiform,  conspicuous 
stipe  a  few  mm.  long,  suborbicular,  oblong,  ovate,  or  cuneate-obovate,  subentire  or  rather  sparingly 
parted,  lobed,  or  proliferous,  the  margins  entire  or  very  irregularly  cut  in  various  ways;  medulla  tra- 
versed by  few  or  many  irregularly  branched,  conspicuously  segmented  filaments  of  different  sizes, 
frequently  anastomosing  and  occasionally  forming  structures  resembling  stellate  ganglia,  cortex  one  to 
four  cells  thick,  outermost  cells  more  or  less  vertically  elongate,  cuticle  frequently  dissolved,  so  that 
the  surf  ace  appears  papillate ;  tetrasporangia  scattered  among  the  superficial  cells;  cystocarps  numerous, 
scattered,  minute,  often  slightly  protuberant  on  one  surface;  texture  rather  gelatinous;  color  light 
purplish  pink  to  dark,  purplish  red,  often  with  a  tinge  of  greenish  yellow. 

Florida. 

Occasional  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  summer  and  autumn,  few  small  plants  dredged  from 
coral  reef  offshore,  May,  1907,  and  July,  1915. 

This  species,  placed  in  Herb.  Agardh  under  Halymenia  floridana  and  included  in  that  species  by 
previous  authors,  has  been  separated  by  Collins  and  Howe  (1916),  since  it  differs  decidedly  from  the  form 
that  is  generally  recognized  as  the  type  of  that  species.  It  has  a  rather  thick,  gelatinous  texture,  the 
structure  is  decidely  loose,  the  cortex  consisting  of  usually  one,  sometimes  two  or  more,  layers  of  large, 
loose  cells,  from  which  project  small,  vertical,  papillate  cells,  often  not  bounded  by  a  definite  cuticle ;  the 
medullary  portion  is  usually  not  densely  filled  with  jelly  and  is  traversed  by  very  scattered,  irregularly 
branched,  conspicuously  segmented  filaments  of  different  sizes;  anastomoses  are  often  abundant  and 
conspicuous  toward  the  surface;  in  surface  view  the  surface  appears  papillate;  a  subepidermal  view 
seen  from  the  surface  shows  numerous  filaments  of  various  sizes  radiating  from  common  centers  and 
anastomosing,  but  forming  a  homogeneous  part  of  the  structure,  heteromorphous  "stellate  ganglia" 
being  rare;  the  color  is  light,  purplish  pink,  to  dark,  purplish  red,  usually  with  a  decided  tint  of  greenish 
yellow. 


MARINE 


OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C. 


519 


This  species  is  distinguished  from  Halymenia  floridana  by  its  thicker,  more  gelatinous  texture,  its 
looser  structure  ,  its  papillate  surface  seen  in  surface  view,  its  scarcity  of  heteromorphous  "  stellate  ganglia" 
in  subepidermal  view,  and  its  less  rosy  color,  sometimes  with  a  greenish  or  yellowish  tinge.  Its  cysto- 
carps  also  appear  to  the  naked  eye  larger  and  less  dense  than  in  H.  floridana.  The  two  species  may 
usually  be  distinguished  with  certainty,  but  one  specimen  (No.  22),  having  the  structure  of  Halymenw 
gelinaria  and  accordingly  placed  in  that  species,  has  the  color  and  texture  of  Halymenia  floridana. 

It  is  distinguished  from  Chrysymenia  agardhii,  which  it  resembles,  by  its  more  gelatinous  texture,  its 
slightly  thinner  frond,  with  smaller,  less  numerous  cells,  and  by  its  conspicuously  papillate  surface. 

The  structure  of  the  present  species  closely  resembles  that  of  the  single  specimen  of  Halymenia 
latifolia  that  has  been  available  to  the  author. 

This  is  the  northern  known  limit  of  the  species  and  of  the  genus. 


FIG.  44. — Halymenia  gelinaria,  cross  section  of  thallus 
(microtome  section  from  preserved  material),  X  240. 

FIG.  45. — Halymenia  floridana,  cross  section  of  thallus 
(microtome  section  from  dried  material),  X  240. 


FIG.  46. — Halymenia  floridana,  cross  section  of  thallus 
(hand  section  from  dried  material),  X  240. 

FIG.  47. — Melobesia  farinosa  f .  caUithamnioides,  portion  of 
thallus  as  seen  in  surface  view,  X  44. 


4.  Halymenia  floridana  J.  Agardh.     Figs.  45  and  46;  PI.  CXII,  fig.  4b. 

Halymenia  ligulata,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  192  (not  H.  ligulata  of  other  authors). 
Halymenia  floridana,  J.  Agardh,  1894,  p.  59. 
Halarachnion  t  floridanum  De  Toni,  1905,  p.  1655. 
(Not  P.  B.-A.  Nos.  749,  750.) 

Frond  flat,  5  to  20  cm.  tall,  4  to  10  cm.  wide,  borne  on  a  short,  narrow,  filiform,  conspicuous  stipe 
a  few  mm.  long,  at  first  ovate,  entire,  later  forming  numerous  ovate  lobes  cuneate  at  the  bases,  tapering 
toward  the  obtuse  apices,  finally  laciniate,  somewhat  palmatifid;  medulla  traversed  by  many  irregu- 
larly branched  filaments  of  irregular  sizes,  segmented  occasionally,  but  not. conspicuously,  frequently 
anastomosing  and  forming  numerous  conspicuous  stellate  ganglia,  cortex  one  to  four  cells  thick,  the 
cells  usually  of  fairly  uniform  diameter,  cuticle  persistent  and  conspicuous,  surface  smooth;  cystocarps 
occurring  singly,  appearing  as  minute  dots  scattered  over  the  thallus,  forming  slight  swellings  on  both 
surfaces;  texture  thin,  membranaceous;  color  dark  rose  or  purplish  pink. 

Florida;  Bermuda. 


52O  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

Occasional  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  summer  and  autumn,  sometimes  fruiting. 

Two  distinct  forms,  a  thin,  membranaceous  one  and  a  thicker,  more  gelatinous  one,  have  previously 

been  included  under  this  species.     Although  both  these  forms  seem  to  be  represented  under  the  name 

" Halymenia  floridana "  in  Herb.  Agardh  a  the  concensus  of  opinion  seems  to  be  that  the  thin  form 

"should  be  considered  as  the  type,  and  the  thick  one  has  accordingly  been  separated  by  Collins  and 

Howe  (1916)  under  the  name  Halymenia  gelinaria. 

The  present  species  (figs.  45  and  46)  has  a  rather  thin,  membranaceous  texture;  the  structure  is 
fairly  dense,  the  cortex  consisting  of  one  or  usually  two  layers  of  medium-sized  cells  apparently  formed 
from  the  ends  of  filaments,  bounded  by  a  definite  cuticle ;  the  medullary  portion  is  densely  filled  with 
jelly  and  is  traversed  by  rather  scattered,  irregularly  branched  filaments,  segmented  occasionally,  but 
not  conspicuously,  the  majority  of  these  being  small  but  mixed  with  occasional  larger  filaments,  both 
kinds  being  irregular  in  size,  anastomoses  appear  infrequent  and  inconspicuous  in  section;  in  surface 
view  the  surface  appears  composed  of  small,  roundish-angular  cells  situated  close  together;  a  subepi- 
dennal  view  seen  from  the  surface  shows  conspicuous  anastomoses  of  filaments  and  numerous  hetero- 
morphous  "stellate  ganglia"  apparently  formed  from  the  enlarged  ends  of  the  larger  filaments,  from 
which  radiate  filaments  running  parallel  with  the  surface  and  frequently  fusing  with  similar  filaments 
from  other  similar  ganglia;  the  color  is  rather  dark,  rose  or  purplish  pink. 

This  species  is  distinguished  from  Halymenia  gelinaria  by  its  thinner,  more  membranaceous  texture, 
its  denser  structure,  its  small  cells  seen  in  surface  view,  its  heteromorphous  "stellate  ganglia"  seen  in 
subepidermal  view,  and  its  more  rosy  color.  Its  cystocarps  also  appear  to  the  naked  eye  smaller  and 
denser  than  in  H.  gelinaria. 

From  Chrysymenia  agardhii,  which  it  somewhat  resembles,  it  is  distinguished  by  its  more  mem- 
branaceous texture  and  its  thinner,  denser  frond,  with  smaller  cells  and  more  numerous  internal  fila- 
ments. It  is  distinguished  from  Callymenia  reniformis  (Turn.)  J.  Ag.,  with  which  it  has  often  been 
confused,  by  its  thinner,  more  membranaceous,  less  gelatinous  frond,  with  denser,  more  regular 
structure. 

This  is  the  northern  known  limit  of  the  species  and  of  the  genus. 

Genus  2.  Grateloupia  Agardh. 

Grateloupia,  Agardh,  1822,  p.  221. 

Frond  flattened,  dichotomously  or  laterally  branched  in  the  plane  of  the  flattening, 
primary  frond  sometimes  simple  or  irregularly  divided,  often  irregularly  proliferous 
from  the  margins  and  sometimes  from  the  flat  surfaces;  structure  filamentous,  inner 
(medullary)  layer  composed  of  thin,  segmented,  reticulately  anastomosing  filaments, 
sometimes  rather  lax,  inner  cortex  moderately  thick,  lax  within,  gradually  passing  over 
into  the  medullary  portion,  outer  cortex  rather  thick,  composed  of  vertical,  moniliform 
filaments;  tetrasporangia  scattered  over  the  frond,  embedded  in  the  outer  cortex, 
cruciately  divided;  antheridia  arising  from  the  outer  cortical  cells,  forming  patches  over 
the  surface  of  the  frond ;  cystocarps  scattered  over  the  frond  or  forming  irregular  groups, 
small,  inconspicuous,  entirely  sunken  within  cavities  in  the  cortical  layer,  communicating 
with  the  exterior  by  an  opening  formed  among  the  cortical  filaments,  bearing  numerous 
carpospores  in  irregular  groups  radiating  from  a  central  point. 

About  35  species,  mostly  in  warm  seas. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

Fronds  decompound-pinnate,  narrow  linear,  0.5  to  2.5  mm.  wide i.  G.  filicina  (p.  521). 

Fronds  rather  simple  or  irregularly  divided,  finally  pinnate  from  the  margins,  main  axis  0.5 
to  4  cm.  wide 2.  G.  gibbesii  (p.  521). 

a  The  author  is  indebted  to  Dr.  Marshall  A.  Howe  for  information  regarding  specimens  placed  under  this  species  in  Herb. 
Agardh. 


MARINE   ALGM   OF.  BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  521 

i.  Grateloupia  filicina  (Wulfen)  Agardh.     PI.  CXIII,  fig.  i. 

Fucusfilicinus,  Wulfen,  1789,  p.  157,  pi.  15,  f.  3. 
Grateloupia  filicina,  Agardh,  1822,  p.  223. 
Grateloupia  filicina,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  200. 
Graleloupia  filicina,  De  Toni,  1905,  p.  1563.  - 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  394,  1449- 

Frond  flattened,  4  to  45  cm.  tall,  0.5  to  2.5  mm.  wide,  branching  decompound-pinnate,  sometimes 
irregular,  sometimes  bearing  proliferations  from  the  flat  surfaces,  main  axes  and  pinnae  tapering  toward 
the  base  and  apices,  linear;  pinnae  about  0.3  to  2  mm.  wide,  lower  ones  usually  longer  and  pinnulate, 
upper  ones  shorter  and  rather  simple;  tetrasporangia  immersed  in  the  pinnules,  inconspicuous,  some- 
times clustered;  cystocarps  immersed  in  the  pinnae,  numerous,  clustered,  inconspicuous;  texture  tough- 
membranaceous;  color  straw  pink  to  reddish  or  greenish  purple. 

Warm  and  temperate  waters  generally. 

One  group  on  Fort  Macon  jetty,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1906,  and  July,  1908,  10  to  20  cm.  below 
low  water,  some  tetrasporic. 

This  species  varies  considerably  in  habit,  ranging  from  one  main  axis  with  regularly  distichous 
branches  from  the  margins  to  many  axes  about  equally  prominent  giving  off  branches  about  equal  to 
the  main  axes;  the  branching  is  frequent  or  infrequent  and  sometimes  is  very  irregular,  with  numerous 
small  branches;  the  main  axes  are  more  or  less  flattened,  sometimes  being  almost  terete.  In  spite  of 
its  variability,  it  is  not  apt  to  be  mistaken  for  any  other  species  occurring  within  our  range. 

This  is  the  northern  known  limit  of  the  species  and  of  the  genus  on  our  coast. 

a.  Grateloupia  gibbesii  Harvey.     PI.  CXIII,  fig.  2. 

Grateloupia  gibbesii,  Harvey,  ^53,  p.  199,  pi.  26. 
Grateloupia  gibbesii,  De  Toni,  1905,  p.  1566. 

Frond  flattened,  6  to  60  cm.  tall,  0.5  to  4  cm.  wide,  rather  simple  or  irregularly  divided,  finally 
pinnate  from  the  margins,  sometimes  bearing  numerous  proliferations  from  the  flat  surfaces,  main  axis 
and  pinnae  tapering  toward  each  end,  pinnae  more  or  less  elongated,  narrow,  linear-lanceolate,  often 
bearing  numerous  small,  narrow  pinnules;  cystocarps  minute,  densely  scattered  through  the  lobes, 
embedded  in  the  cortical  layer;  texture  flesh y-membranaceous;  color  blackish  purple,  changing  to 
greenish  purple. 

Abundant  on  jetty  directly  exposed  to  sea,  Charleston,  S.  C.,  from  tops  of  rocks  washed  by  waves 
to  15  cm.  below  low  water,  Morris  Island,  July,  1909. 

This  species  is  extremely  various  in  habit,  the  fronds  being  simple  or  much  divided  in  irregular 
ways;  the  margins  and  surfaces  may  be  smooth  or  densely  covered  with  proliferations.  In  spite  of  its 
variation,  the  species  is  easily  recognized.  It  is  not  known  beyond  Charleston  and  vicinity. 

Genus  3.  Cryptonemia  J.  Agardh. 

Cryptonemia,  J.  Agardh,  1842,  p.  100. 

Frond  flat,  stipitate,  usually  provided  with  a  midrib  often  becoming  less  conspicuous 
toward  the  apices,  simple  or  dichotomous  or  proliferous  from  the  midrib  or  margin; 
structure  fairly  dense,  medullary  portion  consisting  of  elongated,  segmented,  branched, 
densely  interwoven  filaments,  cortex  dense,  composed  of  one  or  a  few  layers  of  large, 
rounded  cells  within,  small  cells  without,  disposed  without  definite  order;  tetrasporangia 
embedded  among  the  cortical  cells,  occurring  in  locally  thickened  nemathecia  borne  on 
special,  smaller,  usually  terminal  shoots;  cystocarps  small,  inconspicuous,  usually  borne 
on  smaller,  terminal  portions  of  the  thallus,  either  on  special  segments  or  scattered  over 
the  surface,  communicating  with  the  exterior  by  a  pore,  bearing  numerous  minute  car- 
pospores  without  regular  order  in  a  rounded  mass  suspended  from  the  medullary  fuV 
ments. 

About  10  species,  in  warm  seas. 


522  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

Cryptonemia  crenulata  J.  Agardh.     PI.  CXIII,  fig.  3. 

Cryptonemia  crenulata.  J.  Agardh,  1847,  p.  u. 
Cryptonemia  crenulata,  Harvey.  1853,  p.  184. 
Acrodiscus  9  crenulatus,  De  Toni.  1905,  p.  1599. 
A.  A.  B.  Ex.  No.  23. 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  S49.  aioo. 

Frond  flattened,  mffled,  2  to  14  cm.  tall,  0.5  to  5  cm.  wide,  supported  on  a  short  stipe,  which  soon 
passes  over  into  the  expanded  portion  of  the  thallus,  branching  dichotomous  or  almost  palmatifid,  often 
with  similar  expanded,  dichotomous  proliferations  from  the  margins,  margin  sometimes  entire,  usually 
eroso-denticulate  and  slightly  curled,  segments  linear  or  wedge-shaped,  rounded,  obtuse,  or  truncate  at 
the  apices;  tetrasporangia  occurring  in  rounded  sori  near  the  margins  of  the  segments;  cystocarps 
appearing  as  minute  dots,  scarcely  visible  to  the  naked  eye,  clustered  here  and  there  on  the  surface  of 
the  frond;  texture  membranaceous,  rigid;  color  rosy  purple,  sometimes  slightly  greenish. 

North  Carolina  to  Brazil. 

Occasional  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August  to  October,  sometimes  bearing  cystocarps. 

This  species  was  removed  from  the  present  genus  by  De  Toni  and  doubtfully  placed  under  Acro- 
discus Zanard.  with  the  note  that,  according  to  the  suggestion  of  Schmitz,  the  latter  genus  should  be 
united  with  Polyopes  J.  Ag.  The  structure  of  the  cortex  of  this  species  is,  however,  parenchymatous, 
agreeing  with  that  of  Cryptonemia  lomation  (Bertol.)  J.  Ag.,  the  type  of  the  genus,  and  is  not  composed 
of  anticlinal  rows  of  cells,  as  in  Acrodiscus  and  Polyopes.  The  species  is  accordingly  retained  under 
Cryptonemia. 

This  species  is  easily  recognized  by  the  crisp,  ruffled  frond,  which  is  so  rigid  that  it  can  be  made 
to  lie  flat  only  by  considerable  pressure.  Dried  specimens,  when  moistened,  show  this  character  almost 
as  clearly  as  do  living  plants. 

This  is  the  northern  known  limit  of  the  species  and  of  the  genus. 

Family  2.  CORALLINACE/E  (Gray)  Harvey. 

Frond  extremely  various  inform,  filamentous,  foliaceous,  crustaceous,  flattened,  terete 
or  irregular,  simple  or  dichotomously,  laterally  or  irregularly  branched  in  various  ways, 
sometimes  endophytic,  nearly  always  more  or  less  strongly  incrusted  with  lime,  structure 
cellular-filamentous,  nearly  always  compact;  tetrasporangia  (or  sometimes  disporangia) 
occurring  in  more  or  less  well-defined  sori  embedded  in  the  thallus,  sometimes  in  definite, 
flask-shaped  conceptacles  scattered  over  the  frond  or  borne  in  special,  swollen  portions, 
often  mingled  with  sterile  paraph.yses,  usually  zonately  divided,  sometimes  forming  only 
two  spores,  communicating  with  the  exterior  by  one  or  more  pores;' an theridia  borne  in 
flask-shaped  conceptacles  formed  in  the  thallus  and  communicating  with  the  exterior 
by  a  pore,  scattered  over  the  frond  or  borne  in  special  swollen  portions,  forming  sper- 
matangia  singly  on  long  stalks  or  in  chains,  mingled  with  paraphyses;  carpogonia  and 
auxiliary  cells  numerous,  usually  borne  together  on  upright,  branched  filaments  arising^ 
from  the  base  of  flask -shaped  conceptacles  formed  in  the  thallus  and  communicating 
with  the  exterior  by  a  pore,  scattered  over  the  frond  or  borne  in  special  swollen  portions, 
gonimoblasts  numerous,  usually  arising  as  single  cells  from  the  periphery  of  a  large 
discoid  cell  in  the  base  of  the  conceptacle,  formed  by  the  fusion,  after  fertilization,  of  all 
the  auxiliary  cells,  cutting  off  chains  of  carpospores  in  basipetal  succession,  the  numerous 
carpospores  and  parphyses  finally  filling  the  conceptacle. 

Nearly  400  species,  widely  distributed,  mostly  in  warm  seas. 

KEY  TO  GENERA. 

a.  Thallus  consisting  of  a  flat  disk b. 

b.  Thallus,  thin,  composed  of  a  single  undifferentiated  layer i .  Melobesia  (p.  523). 

bb.  Thallus  thick,  composed  of  a   thin  lower  layer  and  a    thicker  upper  layer,  tetra- 
sporangia borne  on  the  sides  of  the  conceptacle 2.  Dermatolithon  (p.  524). 


MARINE   ALG^   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  .  523 

aa.  Thallus  consisting  of  an  irregularly  spreading,  calcareous  mass  incrusting  stones,  coral, 

or  other  algae c 

c.  Mature  tetrasporangial  conceptacle  having  a  separate  opening   for  each  sporangium 

• -•- 3.  Lithothamnium  (p.  524). 

cc.  Mature  tetrasporangial  conceptacle  having  a  single  opening  through  which  all  the 

sporangia  discharge,  vegetative  tissues  usually  in  fairly  regular  layers.  .4.  Lithophyllum  (p.  525). 
aaa.  Thallus  erect,  segmented,  branched j 

d.  Cystocarps  forming  wartlike   protuberances,    scattered  over  the  surface  of   the  seg- 

ments - 5.  Amphiroa  (p.  526): 

dd.  Cystocarps  immersed  in  the  swollen  apices  of  some  segments 6.  Corallina  (p.  527). 

Genus  i.  Melobesia  Lamouroux. 
Melobesia,  Lamouroux,  1816,  p.  313. 

Thallus  forming  a  small,  flattened  disk,  attached  to  the  substratum  by.  the  entire 
under  surface,  strongly  incrusted  with  lime,  composed  of  a  single,  undifferentiated 
stratum,  consisting  of  numerous  rows  of  cells  disposed  in  a  radiating,  fanlike  arrange- 
ment, with  larger,  more-elongated  cells  (so-called  "hair  cells"  or  "heterocysts")  present 
among  the  ordinary  cells;  tetrasporangia  zonately  divided,  borne  in  flask -shaped  con- 
ceptacles  formed  by  the  separation  of  thallus  cells,  these  conceptacles  borne  superficially 
or  somewhat  immersed  in  locally  thickened  portions,  opening  to  the  exterior  by  a  single 
central  pore,  or  by  a  separate  pore  situated  above  each  tetrasporangium ;  antheridial 
and  cystocarpic  conceptacles  flask-shaped,  superficial  or  somewhat  immersed,  opening 
by  single,  central  pores. 

About  ,20  species,  widely  distributed,  especially  in  warm  seas. 

The  group  of  algae  including  this  and  related  genera  has  been  differently  arranged 
by  different  authors  and  has  recently  been  extensively  divided.  There  is  at  present 
little  uniformity  in  the  treatment  of  the  forms  included  in  this  group,  and  it  seems  prob- 
able that  further  work  will  change  the  arrangement  proposed  by  present  authors. 

Melobesia  farinosa  Lamouroux. 

Melobesia  farinosa,  Lamouroux,  1816,  p.  315. 
Melobesia  farinosa,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  180. 
Melobesia  farinosa.  De  Toni.  1905.  P-  1764- 
P.  B.-A.  Nos.  200,  1549- 

Frond  forming  small,  thin,  flat,  more  or  less  rounded  disks,  i  to  5  mm.  in  diameter,  surface  fari- 
naceous, irregularly  rimose  from  the  center  to  the  periphery,  composed  of  a  single  stratum  except  in  the 
vicinity  of  conceptacles;  conceptacles  scattered  over  the  frond,  o.i  to  0.2  mm.  in  diameter,  rather 
inconspicuous,  opening  by  single  central  pores  surrounded  by  elongated  cells,  but  not  conspicuously 
bordered  by  cilia. 

Generally  distributed  in  all  seas. 

Abundant  on  other  algae  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  abundant  on  Sargassum  filipendula 
dredged  from  coral  reef  offshore,  July  to  August,  1915,  probably  at  other  times  also. 

Forma  callithamnioides  (Falkenberg)  Foslie.     Fig.  47. 

Melobesia  callithamnioides,  Falkenberg,  1879,  p.  265. 
Melobesia  callithamnioides,  De  Toni,  1905,  p.  1765. 
Melobesia  farinosa  i.  callithamnioides,  Foslie,  1905,  p.  96. 

Fronds  very  variable,  consisting  of  creeping,  closely  adherent,  dichotomously  branched  filaments 
which  are  sometimes  considerably  elongated,  often  spreading  out  toward  the  apices  and  coalescent  into 
more  or  less  dense  structures  broken  by  more  or  less  numerous  interspaces,  sometimes  forming  more  or 
less  complete  dichotomously  radiating  disks,  closely  adherent  by  the  entire  lower  surface;  conceptacles 
of  the  same  size  as  in  the  species,  but  rarer,  the  form  being  mostly  sterile. 

Naples;  Adriatic  Sea. 


524 


BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 


Fairly  abundant  on  various  algse  dredged  from  the  coral  reef  offshore,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1914. 
As  found  in  Europe,  the  form  grades  over  into  the  species,  but  in  this  region  it  seems,  while  approach- 
ing the  habit  of  the  species,  to  remain  distinct. 

This  form  has  not  previously  been  reported  from  North  America. 

Another  species,  M.  lejolisii  Rosanoff ,  a  more  northern  species  than  the  above,  may 
be  found  within  our  range,  but  has  not  been  observed  by  the  author.  This  is  distin- 
guished from  the  present  species  by  the  absence  of  "  heterocysts "  in  the  frond  and  the 
presence  of  conspicuous  cilia  bordering  the  openings  of  the  conceptacles. 

The  only  other  species  recorded  for  this  region  that  is  likely  to  be  mistaken  for  the 
above  is  Dermatolithon  pustulatum  (Lamour.)  Foslie.     The  latter  is  distinguished  by  its 
thicker  frond  and  larger,  more  conspicuous  conceptacles. 
f  Genus  2.  Dermatolithon  Foslie. 

.    Dermatolithon,  Foslie,  1900,  p.  21. 

Thallus  forming  a  small,  flattened  disk,  attached  to  the  substratum  by  the  entire 
under  surface,  strongly  incrusted  with  lime,  composed  of  two  distinct  strata,  the  lower,  a 
thin  hypothallium,  usually  consisting  of  a  single  layer  of  elongated  cells,  and  the  upper,  a 
thicker  perithallium,  consisting  of  several  layers  of  cells;  tetraspongia  borne  in  flask- 
shaped  conceptacles  somewhat  immersed  in  locally  thickened  portions,  each  concep- 
tacle  opening  to  the  exterior  by  an  apical  pore;  sporangia  borne  only  on  the  sides  of  the 
conceptacle,  the  middle  being  occupied  by  paraphyses;  cystocarps  borne  in  flask- 
shaped,  somewhat  immersed  conceptacles  opening  by  apical  pores,  carpospores  accom- 
panied by  paraphyses. 

About  10  species,  generally  distributed,  especially  in  warm  seas. 

Dermatolithon  pustulatum  (Lamouroux)  Foslie. 

Melobesia  pustulata,  Lamouroux,  1816,  p.  315,  pi.  12,  f.  c,  B. 
Melobesia  Pustulata,  Farlow,  1882,  p.  181. 
Dermatolithon  pustulatum,  Foslie,  1900.  p.  21. 
Dermatolithon  pustulatum,  De  Toni,  1905,  p.  1771- 
P.  B.-A.  No.  300  (Melobesia  farinosa). 

Frond  forming  rather  small,  rather  thick,  flat,  rather  rounded  more  or  less  confluent  disks,  2  to  10 
mm.  in  diameter,  surface  not  farinaceous,  composed  of  two  differentiated  strata,  hypothallium  consisting 
of  vertically  elongate  cells,  perithallium  consisting  of  rather  square  cells,  "heterocysts  "  lacking;  concep- 
tacles large,  conspicuous,  0.3  to  0.5  mm.  in  diameter,  scattered  over  the  thallus,  opening  by  single, 
central  pores,  not  bordered  by  cilia. 

Widely  distributed. 

Very  abundant  on  Zostera  marina  and  often  on  other  algae  throughout  the  harbor  and  on  Bogue 
Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C. 

This  species  often  occurs  in  pure  growths  almost  covering  the  leaves  of  Zostera.  It  is  distinguished 
from  Melobesia  farinosa,  the  only  other  species  observed  here  with  which  it  is  likely  to  be  confused,  by 
its  thicker  frond,  its  larger,  more  conspicuous  conceptacles,  and  the  absence  of  "heterocysts." 

Genus  3.  Lithothamnium  Philippi. 
Lithothamnium,  Philippi,  1837,  p.  387. 

Thallus  forming  a  more  or  less  irregular  incrusting  mass,  attached  to  the  substratum 
by  the  entire  under  surface,  frequently  giving  off  from  this  base  more  or  less  numerous 
wartlike,  stemlike,  or  corallike  outgrowths  of  various,  frequently  irregular,  shapes,  strongly 
incrusted  with  lime,  composed  of  two  strata,  cells  more  or  less  regularly  arranged ;  tetra- 
sporangia  borne  in  superficial  or  somewhat  sunken  conceptacles,  each  sporangium 
opening  to  the  exterior  by  a  separate  pore,  sporangia  zonately  divided;  antheridia  and 


MARINE   AI<GJE   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  525 

cystocarps  borne  in  more  or  less  conical,  superficial,  or  slightly  sunken  conceptacles, 
each  conceptacle  opening  by  a  single  apical  pore,  carpospores  arising  from  the  periphery 
of  the  fusion  cell,  the  central  part  of  the  fusion  cell  bearing  a  few  elongated,  evanescent 
paraphyses;  antheridia  and  cystocarps  apparently  borne  on  different  plants. 

About  80  species,  widely  distributed,  mostly  in  warm  seas. 

This  genus  has  been  variously  characterized  by  different  authors  and  is  still  not  well 
understood.  It  is  distinguished  from  Lithophyllum  chiefly  by  the  fact  that  each  spo- 
rangium communicates  with  the  exterior  by  a  separate  pore,  so  that  the  surface  of  a 
mature  tetrasporangial  conceptacle,  when  viewed  with  a  lens,  looks  like  a  miniature 
pepperbox.  The  species  are  exceedingly  difficult  and  can  be  determined  only  by  those 
who  are  familiar  with  them  or  by  comparison  with  authentic  specimens.  In  some  cases 
the  same  species  seems  to  show  different  forms  on  different  substrata. 

Lithothamnium  sejunctum  Foslie  (?). 

Lithothamnion  sejunctum,  Fosile,  1906,  p.  3. 

Thallus  disk  shaped,  almost  spherical,  later  confluent  and  irregular,  rather  thick,  forming  masses 
incrusting  stones,  etc.,  strongly  calcined  and  closely  attached  to  the  substratum,  showing  slight,  con- 
centric zonation;  composed  of  two  distinct  strata,  the  lower  (hypothallium)  composed  of  several  layers 
of  cells  about  n  to  18  by  5  to  9  mic.,  the  upper  (perithallium)  composed  of  several  layers  of  cells,  these 
cells  squarish,  5  to  7  mic.  in  diameter  or  slightly  vertically  elongated,  sometimes  slightly  horizontally 
elongated;  tetrasporangial  conceptacles  embedded,  hemispherical,  160  to  260  mic.  in  diameter,  bearing 
about  40  pores;  cystocarpic  conceptacles  hemisphericalconical,  200  to  300  mic.  in  diameter. 

West  Indies. 

Incrusting  coral  rock  dredged  from  coral  reef  offshore,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  May,  1907  (?). 

To  this  species  is  referred,  with  some  doubt,  an  antheridial  plant  incrusting  a  part  of  one  piece  of 
coral  rock,  but  the  determination  can  not  be  made  with  assurance,  since  no  authentic  specimen  has  been 
available  for  comparison.  It  does  not  seem  to  belong  to  any  other  described  species,  and  has  not  seemed 
to  deserve  description  as  a  new  species.  It  is  probable  that  much  of  the  coral  rock  dredged  from  the  reef 
bears  this  plant,  but  only  one  piece  has  been  available  for  examination.  On  this  piece  the  plant  here 
referred  to  occurs  alongside  Lithophyllum  intermedium.  From  the  latter  species  it  is  distinguished  with 
difficulty.  As  found  here,  it  has  a  slightly  rougher,  less  glistening  surface  than  the  Lithophyllum.  In 
section  the  two  strata  are  more  sharply  denned  than  in  the  latter  form.  This  species  has  not  been 
recorded  elsewhere  outside  of  the  West  Indies. 

Genus  4.  Lithophyllum  Philippi. 

Lithophyllum,  Philippi,  1837,  p.  387. 

Thallus  forming  a  more  or  less  irregular  incrusting  mass,  more  or  less  closely  attached 
to  the  substratum,  margin  free  or  loosely  attached,  undivided  or  variously  lobed,  some- 
times bearing  irregular  proliferations,  strongly  incrusted  with  lime,  composed  of  two 
strata,  cells  rather  regularly  arranged,  radiating  toward  the  periphery,  those  in  the  upper 
perithallium  smaller  than  in  the  lower  hypothallium;  tetrasporangia  borne  in  sunken 
or  somewhat  prominent  conceptacles,  these  conceptacles  hemispherical-conical,  at  first 
convex,  then  losing  more  or  less  of  the  cortex,  becoming  somewhat  depressed,  the  entire 
conceptacle  communicating  with  the  exterior  by  a  single  central  pore;  cystocarps  borne 
in  sunken  or  somewhat  prominent,  convex  conceptacles,  carpospores  accompanied  by  a 
central  mass  of  short  paraphyses. 

About  50  species,  mostly  in  warm  seas. 

This  genus  has  been  variously  characterized  by  different  authors  and  is  still  not 
well  understood.  It  is  distinguished  from  Lithothamnium  chiefly  by  the  fact  that  the 
entire  tetrasporangial  conceptacle  communicates  with  the  exterior  by  a  single  apical 


,526  BULLETIN  OP  THE   BUREAU  O'F  FISHERIES. 

pore;  in  most  cases,  at  least,  the  cells  also  are  arranged  in  more  regular  layers  than  in 
Lithothamnium.     The  species  are  exceedingly  difficult  and  can  be  determined  only 
by  those  who  are  familiar  with  them  or  by  comparison  with  authentic  specimens. 
Lithophyllum  intermedium  Foslie. 

Lithophyllum  intermedium,  Foslie,  1906,  p.  23. 

Thallus  disk  shaped,  almost  spherical,  later  irregular,  up  to  about  3  mm.  thick,  forming  masses 
incrusting  stones,  etc.,  more  or  less  closely  attached  by  the  under  surface,  bowl  shaped  or  irregular, 
edges  scalloped  or  irregular;  showing  two  distinct  strata,  the  lower  (hypothallium)  weakly  or  strongly 
developed,  composed  of  several  or  many  layers  of  cells  n  to  25  by  7  to  n  mic.,  the  upper  (perithallium) 
composed  of  several  layers  of  cells  almost  always  vertically  elongated,  9  to  22  (usually  9  to  18)  mic. 
long  and  7  to  n  mic.  broad;  tetrasporangiial  conceptacles  somewhat  convex,  not  sharply  defined,  150 
to  250  or  up  to  300  mic.  diameter. 

Florida;  West  Indies. 

Incrusting  coral  rock  dredged  from  coral  reef  offshore,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  May,  1907,  one  small  sterile 
plant  on  base  of  Sargassum  filipendula  dredged  from  coral  reef,  July,  1915. 

This  species  will  not  be  mistaken  for  any  other  found  in  this  region  except  Lithothamnium 
sejunctum  (?).  From  the  latter  it  is  distinguished  with  difficulty.  As  found  here  it  has  a  slightly 
smoother,  more  glistening  surface,  and  in  section  the  two  strata  are  less  sharply  defined  than  in  the 
Lithothamnium.  It  is  probable  that  much  of  the  coral  rock  dredge^  from  the  reef  bears  this  plant, 
but  only  one  piece  has  been  available  for  examination.  On  this  it  "occurs  alongside  Lithothamnium 
sejunctum  (?) ,  and  bears  numerous  tetrasporangial  conceptacles.  This  is  the  northern  known  limit  for 
the  species  and  the  genus. 

Genus  5.  Amphiroa  Lamouroux. 

Amphiroa,  Lamouroux,  1812,  p.A86. 

Thallus  erect,  usually  arising  from  a  small  basal  disk,  terete  or  more  or  less  flattened, 
segmented,  dichotomouslyj  trichotomously,  or  verticillately  branched,  strongly  calcified 
except  at  the  more  or  less  elongated  joints;  composed  of  elongated  cells  arranged  in 
superimposed  transverse  zones  surrounded,  except  at  the  joints,  by  a  layer  of  smaller 
cortical  cells;  conceptacles  small,  scattered  over  the  surface  of  the  segments,  immersed 
in  the  cortex  or  more  or  less  prominent,  opening  by  apical  pores;  tetrasporangia  zonately 
divided. 

About  30  species,  in  warm  seas. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES. 

Segments  of  thallus  terete  or  nearly  so,  frond  strongly  calcified  and  very  brittle .  i .  A .  fragilissima  (p.  526). 
Segments  of  thallus  decidedly  flattened,  often  two  or  three  times  as  broad  a*s  thick,  frond  less 
calcified  and   less    brittle 2.  A .  brasiliana  (p.  527). 

i.  Amphiroa  fragilissima  (Linnaeus)  Lamouroux.     PI.  CXII,  fig.  40. 

Corattina  fragilissima,  Linnaeus,  1758,  vol.  i,  p.  806. 
Amphiroa  fragilissima,  Lamouroux,  1816,  p.  298. 
Amphiroa  fragilissima,  De  Toni,  1905,  p.  1808. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  2198. 

Fronds  forming  tufts,  2  to  5  cm.  tall,  about  0.2  to  i  mm.  in  diameter,  usually  terete,  sometimes  flat- 
tened, especially  toward  the  apices,  branching  dichotomous,  sometimes  irregular,  segments  6  to  14 
diameters  long,  usually  8  to  10  diameters,  sometimes  locally  swollen;  conceptacles  scattered  over  the 
surface  of  the  segments,  inconspicuous;  color  pinkish  white,  becoming  white  when  dried;  texture 
very  fragile. 

West  Indies;  Peru. 

Occasional  on  Bogue  Beach,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  summer  and  autumn,  1903  to  1905 ;  one  plant  Shackle- 
ford  jetty,  August,  1905;  about  10  tufts,  coral  reef  offshore,  May,  1907. 

The  specimens  from  the  coral  reef  and  the  plant  from  Shackleford  jetty  seem  to  agree  with  this 
species  from  other  localities,  except  that  they  show  slightly  greater  flattening.  Some  of  the  specimens 


MARINE  AI&J&  OF  BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  527 

from  Bogue  Beach  are  decidedly  coarser  and  wider,  but  the  differences  do  not  seem  sufficiently  great 
to  warrant  placing  them  in  another  species. 

This  species  will  not  be  confused  with  any  other  found  in  this  region  except  A.  brasiliana.  From 
the  latter  it  is  distinguished  by  its  more  calcified,  more  brittle  frond,  with  the  segments  terete  or 
nearly  so. 

This  is  the  northern  known  limit  of  the  species  and  of  the  genus. 
2.  Amphiroa  brasiliana  Decaisne. 

Amphiroa  brasiliana,  Decaisne,  1842  a,  p.  125. 
Amphiroa  brasiliana,  De  Toni,  1905,  p.  1817. 

Frond  forming  tufts,  i  to  5  cm.  tall,  segments  decidedly  flattened,  about  0.5  to  1.2  mm.  wide,  often 
two  to  three  times  as  wide  as  thick,  lower  segments  cuneate  or  quadrate,  upper  ones  linear-obtuse;  branch- 
ing dichotomous;  color  dirty  white ;  texture  moderately  fragile. 

Brazil. 

One  fairly  large  tuft  dredged  from  coral  reef  offshore,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1915. 

The  plants  found  here  can  not  be  determined  with  certainty  because  of  the  lack  of  authentic 
material  for  comparison.  They  seem,  however,  to  belong  to  this  species,  judging  from  the  descriptions 
and  a  photograph  of  the  original  material.  This  species  is  distinguished  from  the  preceding  by  its 
less  calcined,  less  brittle  fronds,  with  decidedly  flattened  segments.  It  is  not  known  elsewhere  outside 
of  Brazilian  waters,  unless  this  species  is  identical  with  some  described  under  other  names. 

Genus  6.  Corallina  Linnaeus. 
Corallina,  Linnaeus,  1758,  torn,  i,  p.  AS  (in  part). 

Thallus  erect,  usually  arising  from  a  small  basal  disk,  terete  or  flattened,  segmented, 
branching  dichotomous  or  lateral,  more  or  less  abundant  and  usually  in  one  plane, 
strongly  calcined  except  at  the  more  or  less  elongated  joints;  medullary  portion  more' 
or  less  plainly  transversely  zonate,  composed  of  compact,  segmented,  branched  fila- 
ments, cortex  composed  of  a  few  layers  of  small  cells,  becoming  smaller  toward  the 
surface,  cortex  lacking  at  the  joints;  conceptacles  occurring  in  the  swollen  apices  of 
segments  or  filling  the  segments,  sunken  in  the  medullary  layer,  forming  more  or  less 
prominent  protuberances,  opening  by  single  apical  pores;  tet^asporangia  zonately 
divided. 

About  40  species,  mostly  in  warm  seas. 

KEY  TO  SPECIES.  .  « 

Frond  4  to  8  mm.  tall,  about  o.i  to  0.2  mm.  in  diameter,  branching  regularly  dichotomous 

i.  C.  capillacea  (p.  527). 

Frond  i  to  2.5  cm.  tall,  about  0.2  too.;  mm.  in  diameter,  branching  partly  pinnate,  of  ten  bear- 
ing numerous  opposite  distichous  branchlets a.  C.  cubensis  (p.  528). 

i.  Corallina  capillacea  (Harvey)  comb.  nov.     PI.  CXIV,  fig.  6. 

Jania  capillacea,  Harvey,  1853.  p.  84. 
P.  B.-A.  No.  150  (Jania  capillacea). 

Frond  erect,  capillary,  about  4  to  8  mm.  tall,  o.i  to  0.2  mm.  in  diameter,  branching  regularly  dicho- 
tomous; conceptacles  formed  as  flattened  swellings  at  or  near  the  ends  of  the  ultimate  branches, 
opening  by  a  distinct  apical  pore;  from  the  upper  edges  of  these  conceptacles  there  arise  branches 
(usually  two)  as  continuations  of  the  frond;  carpospores  club  shaped,  arising  in  a  compact  group  from 
base  of  conceptacle ;  tetrasporangia  zonately  divided,  arising  in  a  compact  group  from  base  of  conceptacle. 
Florida;  West  Indies;  Bermuda. 

One  small  mass  on  Sargassum  sp.,  Bogue    Beach,  Beaufor£  N.  C.,  August,  1903,  two  to  three 
plants  on  coral  reef  offshore,  May,  1907. 
159321°— 20 11 


528  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU   OF   FISHERIES. 

This  species  is  easily  distinguished  from  the  following  one  by  its  smaller  size,  its  more  regularly 
dichotomous  branching,  and  its  production  of  hornlike  branches  from  thje  upper  edges  of  the  conceptacles. 
It  will  not  be  mistaken  for  any  other  occurring  in  this  region. 

This  is  the  northern  known  limit  of  the  species. 
2.  Corallina  cubensis  (Montagne)  Kuetzing.     PI.  CXIII,  figs.  4  and  5. 

Jania  cubensis,  Montagne,  in  Kuetzing,  18493,  p.  709. 

Jania  cubensis,  Harvey,  1853,  p.  84. 

CoraUma  cubensis,  Kuetzing,  1858,  Bd.  8,  p.  37.  Pi-  77.  f-  II. 

Jania  cubensis,  De  Toni,  1905,  p.  1857. 

P.  B.-A.  No.  1500. 

Frond  erect,  forming  dense,  intricate  tufts,  i  to  2.5  cm.  tall,  about  0.2  to  0.7  mm.  in  diameter, 
branching  dichotomous  or  subpinnate,  branches  spreading,  sometimes  naked,  usually  clothed  with 
short,  fine,  simple,  or  sometimes  forked  branchlets  arising  oppositely  in  two  rows,  branchlets  sometimes 
prolonged,  segments  of  the  frond  subcylindrical  below,  more  cuneate  above;  texture  fragile;  color  dirty, 
whitish  pink. 

Florida;  West  Indies. 

Few  fairly  large  tufts  dredged  from  the  coral  reef  offshore,  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  August,  1914,  and  July 
to  August,  1915. 

This  species  is  easily  distinguished  from  the  preceding  by  its  larger  size,  its  more  pinnate  branching, 
and  its  opposite  branchlets  in  two  rows. 

This  is  the  northern  known  limit  of  the  species. 

Undetermined  species.  I 

A  few  species  have  been  found  in  quantities  or  condition  insufficient  for  determination.  One  of 
these  (No.  i,  PI.  CXII,  fig.  5)  seems  deserving  of  comment.  This  is  a  red  alga  with  an  upright  thallus, 
6.5  cm.  tall,  shortly  stipitate  and  attached  by  a  small  disk;  it  is  flat  and  thin,  being  4  to  13  mm.  wide, 
irregularly  branched  and  bearing  minute  proliferations  from  the  margins  and  from  the  wider  apices ; 
the  structure  closely  resembles  that  of  Halymeniafloridana,  having  the  "stellate  ganglia ' '  in  subepidermal 
view  as  found  in  that  species;  the  texture  is  thin  membranaceous,  the  color  brownish  red;  no  fruit  is 
present.  This  specimen  seems  to  be  closely  related  to  Halymenia  floridana,  but  because  of  the  differ- 
ence in  form  and  color  and  the  absence  of  fruit,  it  has  seemed  best  to  keep  it  separate  from  that  species. 

*  SUMMARY  OK  ALGAL  FLORA. 


Identi- 

fied 

Families. 

Genera. 

Species. 

Varieties. 

Per  cent. 

species 
and  varie- 

Per cent. 

ties. 

Myxophycese  
Chlorophyceae  > 
Phaeophyceae  
Rhodophyceae  

5 

12 

10 

13 
18 
43 

12 

»3 
37 
74 

2 
3 

a 

20.4 

53-5 

10 

25 
27 
71 

7-5 
18.8 

53-4 

Total  

33 

84 

136 

6 

133 

TABLES. 

TABLE  i. — SPECIES  FOUND  IN  BEAUFORT  HARBOR. 


Summer  Flora: 

M  YXOPHY  CE-E  — 

Chroococcus  turgidus? 
Hydrocoleum  lyngbyaceum. 
Lyngbya  lutea. 
Oscillatoria  nigro-viridis. 
ClttOROPHYCE^E— 

Ulva  fasciata. 
Chsetomorpha  linum. 
Chaetomorpha  linum  f.  aerea. 
Chaetomorpha  brachygona. 
Cladophora  crystallina. 
Codium  decorticatum. 
Codium  tomentosum. 


Ectocarpus  duchassaingianus. 
Ectocarpus  mitchdlae. 
Rosenvingea  orien  tails. 
Dictyopteris  polypodioides. 
Dictyota  dichotoma. 
Padina  vickersiae. 
Spatoglossum  schroederi. 
RHODOPHYCE..E  — 

Erythrotrichia  carnea. 
Erythrocladia  recondita. 
Goniotrichum  alsidii. 
Acrochaetium  dufourii. 
Achrochaetium  hoytii. 
Acrochaetium  parvulum. 
Gelidium  coerulescens.0 
Actinococcus  aggregatus. 
Eucheuma  gelidium. 
Gracilaria  confervoides. 
Champia  parvula." 
Lomentaria  undnata.0 
Rhodymenia  palmetta. 
Nitophyllum  medium. 
Chondria  dasyphylla. 
Chondria  sedifolia.o 
Chondria  atropurpurea? 
Herposiphonia  tenella. 
Laurencia  tuberculosa  var.  gexnmifera. 
Polysiphonia  harveyi. 
Polysiphonia  denudata. 
Callithamnion  polyspermum. 
Ceramium  tenuissimum? 
Grateloupia  filicina. 
Amphiroa  fragilissima. 
Dermatolithon  pustulatum. 


Spring  Flora: 

CHLOROPHYCE^E— 

Enteromorpha  prolifera. 
Enteromorpha  flexuosa. 
Enteromorpha  intestinalis. 
Enteromorpha  linza. 
Chaetomorpha  melagonium  f.  rupincola. 
Cladophora  flexuosa. 
Rhizoclonium  riparium. 
Bryopsis  plumosa. 


Ectocarpus  confervoides. 
Ectocarpus  siliculosus. 
Petalonia  fascia. 
Leathesia  difformis. 
Myrionema  strangulans. 
Stilophora  rhizodes. 
RHODOPHYCE.E— 

Bangia  fusco-purpurea. 
Porphyra  leucosticta. 
Acrochaetium  corymbiferum. 
Gelidium  coerulescens. & 
Champia  parvula.b 
Lomentaria  uncinata.* 
Grinnellia  americana. 
Chondria  sedifolia.6 
Chondria  tenuissima  var.  baileyana. 
Dasya  pedicellata. 
Polysiphonia  nigrescens. 
Ceramium  strictum. 
Perennial  Species: 
MYXOPHYCE^E — 

Lyngybya  confervoides? 

CmX>ROPHYCE.E— 

Enteromorpha  prolifera. 
Ulva  lactuca  (both  varieties?). 


Fucus  vesiculosus. 
Sargassum  filipendula. 
RHODOPHYCE^E — 

'Acrochaetium  virgatulum. 
Gelidium  crinale? 
Gymnogongrus  griffithsise 
Agardhiella  tenera. 
Gracilaria  multipartita. 
Hypnea  musciformis. 


TABLE  2. — SPECIES  FOUND  ON  CORAL  KEEP. 


MYXOPHYCE.B: 

Microchaete  nana.e 
_  Phormidium  sp.c 
CHLOROPHYCE^E  : 
Cladophora  sp. 
Derbesia  turbinata.e 
Codium  tomentosum. 
Udotea  cyathiformis.c 

»  Occurs  in  the  spring  also. 


6  Occurs  in  summer  also. 


Ectocarpus  sp. 
Phaeostroma  pusillum.c 
Streblonema  solitarium.* 
Elachistea  stellulata.c 
Sporochnus  pedunculatus.* 
Sargassum  filipendula. 
Dictyopteris  polypodioides. 

c  Found  growing  in  this  region  only  on  coral  re 
529 


530 


BULLETIN    OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 


TABLE  2. — SPECIES  FOUND  ON  CORAL  REEF — Continued. 


PH^EOPHYCB-B — Continued. 

Dictyopteris  serrata.0 

Dictyota  dichotoma. 

Spatoglossum  schroederi. 

Zonaria  flava." 
RHODOPHYCE.S  : 

Erythrocladia  recondita. 

Erythrocladia  vagabunda." 

Goniotrichum  alsidii. 

Acrochaetium  affine.0 

Acrochaetium  infestans." 

Agardhiella  tenera. 

Meristotheca  duchassaingii." 

Gracilaria  confervoides. 

Hypnea  muciformis. 

Cham  pi  a  parvula. 

Chrysymenia  agardhii.0 

Chrysymenia  enteromorpha.0 

Chrysymenia  uvaria.0 

Lomentaria  rosea.0 

Rhodymenia  palmetta. 

Grinnellia  americana. 

Nitophyllum  medium. 


RHODOPHYCE^E— Continued . 
Brongniartella  mucronata." 
Chondria  dasyphylla. 
Chondria  sedifolia. 
Dasya  pedicellata. 
Polysiphonia  sp. 
Ceramium  strictum. 
Callithamnion  sp. 
Spermothamnion  investiens." 
Spyridia  clavata." 
Spyridia  filamentosa." 
Griffithsia  sp.« 
Halymenia  gelinaria.<* 
Halymenia  agardhii. ° 
Amphiroa  fragilissima. 
Amphiroa  brasiliana.0 
Corallina  capillacea.0 
Corallina  cubensis.0 
Melobesia  farinosa.o 
Melobesia  farinosa  f.  callithamnioides.1 
Lithothamnium  sejunctum  (?).<» 
Lithophyllum  intermedium.0 


TABLE  3. — SPECIES  FOUND  AT  BEAUFORT  ONLY  ON  BOGUE  BEACH. 


M  YxopHYCE.fi: 

Dichothrix  penicillata. 
CHLOROPHYCE^E: 

Cladophora  prolifera. 

Endoderma  viride. 

Caulerpa  prolifera. 


RHODOPHYCE^E  : 

Rhabdonia  ramosissima. 
Agardhinula  browneae. 
Chondria  littoralis. 
Chondria  sp. 
Laurencia  sp. 
Polysiphonia  havanensis. 
Ceramium  rubrum. 
Cryptonemia  crenulata. 
Halymenia  floresia. 
Halymenia  floridana. 
Undetermined  species  No.  i. 


Zonaria  variegata. 

TABLE  4.— SPECIES  FOUND  ONLY  AT  PLACES  OTHER  THAN  BEAUFORT. 


Streblonema  invisibile. 
Castagnea  zosterae. 
Sargassum  natans. 
Sargassum  natans  f.  angustum. 
Sargassum  filipendula  var.  montagnei. 


OCRACOKE,  N.  C.: 

Lyngbya  semiplena. 
Microcoleus  chthonoplastes. 
Plectonema  battersii. 
Spirulina  sp. 
Ulvella  lens.     " 
Gomontia  polyrhiza. 


SOUTHPORT,  N.  C.: 

Cladophora  fascicularis. 

Bostrychia  rivularis. 
CHARLESTON,  S.  C.: 

Grateloupia  gibbesii. 
PORT  ROYAL,  S.  C.: 

Gracilaria  multipartita  var.  angustissima. 


TABLE  5. — SPECIES  REACHING  IN  THIS  REGION  THEIR  NORTHERN  KNOWN  LIMIT  ON  OUR  COAST. 


Beaufort,  N.  C.: 

HARBOR;  SUMMER  FLORA— 
Ulva  fasciata. 

Chaetomorpha  brachygona. 
Codium  decorticatum.6 
Codium  tomentosum.f> 
Ectocarpus  duchassaingianus. 
Rosenvingea  orientah's.f> 
Dictyota  dichotoma.<> 
Padina  vickersiae.& 
Spatoglossum  schro;deri.6 
Gelidium  cosrulescens. 
Rhodymenia  pahnetta. 
Chondria  atropurpurea. 
<»  Found  growing  in  this  region  only  on  coral  reef. 


Beaufort,  N.  C.— Continued. 

HARBOR:  SUMMER  FLORA — Continued. 

Herposiphonia  tenella.6 

Laurencia  tuberculosa  var.  gemmifera.6 

Grateloupia  filicina.6 

Amphiroa  fragilissuna.& 
CORAL  REEF — 

Udotea  cyathiformis.6 

Zonaria  flava.6 

Meristotheca  duchassaingii.b 

Chrysymenia  agardhii. 6 

Chrysymenia  enteromorpha.* 

Chrysymenia  uvaria. t> 

Brongniartella  mucronata.b 
b  Northern  known  limit  of  genus  on  our  coast. 


MARINE   ALG^E   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C. 


531 


TABLE  5. — SPECIES  REACHING  IN  THIS  REGION  THEIR  NORTHERN  KNOWN  LIMIT  ON  OUR  COAST— Con. 


Beaufort,  N.  C.— Continued. 
CORAL  REEF— Continued. 
Spyridia  clavata. 
Spermothamnion  investiens. 
Halymenia  gelinaria." 
Halymenia  agardhii."     • 
Amphiroa  brasiliana.o 
Lithothamnium  sejunctum  (?).' 
Lithophyllum  intermedium." 
Corallina  capillacea. 
Corallina  cubensis. 
BOGUE  BEACH — 

Dichothrix  penicillata. 
Caulerpa  prolifera." 
.  Castagnea  zosterae. 
Zonaria  variegata.<* 


Beaufort,  N.  C.— Continued. 
BOGUE  BEACH— Continued. 
Rhabdonia  ramosissima." 
Agardhinulabrowneae.  ° 
Chondria  littoralis. 
Polysiphonia  havanensis. 
Cryptonemia  crenulata." 
Halymenia  floresia.0 
Halymenia  floridana." 

Other  localities: 

SOUTHPORT,  N.  C. — 

Cladophora  fascicularis. 
OCRACOKE,  N.  C. — 

Jjucheuma  gelidium." 
CHARLESTON,  S.  C. — 

Grateloupia  gibbesii. 


TABLE  6.— SPECIES  REACHING  IN  THIS  REGION  THEIR  SOUTHERN  KNOWN  LIMIT  ON  OUR  COAST. 


Beaufort,  N.C.s 

HARBOR— 

Spring  flora— 

Chsetomorpha  melagonium  f.  rupincola. 
Leathesia  difformis.6 
Stilophora  rhizodes.* 
Chondria  tenuissima  var.  baileyana. 
Ceramium  strictum. 
Summer  flora — 

Polysiphonia  harveyi.c 


Beaufort,  N.  C.-Continued. 
HARBOR— Continued . 
Perennial  species — 

Fucus  vesiculosus.6 
CORAL  REEF — 

Lomen taria  rosea. 
Ocracoke,  N.  C.: 

Plectonema  battersii. 


TABLE  7. — SPECIES  NEW  TO  NORTH  AMERICA. 


aufort,  N.C.s 

HARBOR — 

Dictyopteris  polypodioides.o 

Erythrocladia  recondita.<* 

Acrochaetium  dufourii.d 

Acrochsetium  hoytii.d 

Acrochastium  parvulum. 

Nitophyllum  medium.",  d 
CORAL  REEF — 

Microchaste  nana.d 

Derbesia  turbinata.<* 

Phaeostroma  pusillum.d 

Streblonema  solitarium. 

Elachistea  steUulata.*> 

Sporochnus  pedunculatus.0 

«  Northern  known  limit  of  genus  on  our  coast. 
6  Southern  known  limit  of  genus  on  our  coast. 


Beaufort,  N.  C.— Continued. 
CORAL  REEF — Continued. 

Dictyopteris  polypodioides." 

Dictyopteris  serrata.0 

Erythrocladia  recondita.<* 

Erythrocladia  vagabunda.d 

Acrochaetium  affine.d 

Acrochaetium  infestans.d 

Nitophyllum  medium.",'* 

Melobesia  farinosa  f .  callithamnioides. 

Amphiroa  brasiliana(?). 
BOGUE  BEACH— 

Streblonema  invisibile.<* 
Ocracoke,  N.C.: 

Ulvella  lens. 

c  Possibly  at  Port  Royal,  S.  C. 

d  Species  first  described  from  this  region. 


532 


BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OP  FISHERIES. 
TABLE  8. — DISTRIBUTION  OP  BEAUFORT  AND  ADJACENT  SPECIES  IN  VARIOUS  REGIONS. 

[Occurrence  indicated  by  cross  (X).] 


Northern  New 
England. 

Southern  New 
England. 

Florida-W  e  s  t 
Indies  region. 

w 

Pacific  coast  of 
North  America. 

Northern  New 
England. 

Southern  New 
England. 

Florida-W  e  s  t 
Indies  region. 

jl 

o 

p 

w 

-0=5 

11 

11 

MYXOPHYCE^B. 

Chroococcus  turgidus  
Lyngbya  confervoides  

X 

X 
X 

X 
X 

X 
X 

X 
X 

RHODOPHYCB^—  continued. 
Porphyra  leucosticta  

X 

X 

X 

X 

Lyngbya  semiplena  

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 
X 

"x" 

Acrochaetium  parvulum  

x 

Oscillatoria  nigro-viridis  
Hydrocoleum  lyngbyaceum.  . 

X 
X 

X 

"x" 

"x" 

X 
X 

Acrochaetium  hoytii  

Microcoleus  chthonoplastes.  .  . 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Acrochaetium  virgatulum.  .  .  . 

X 

X 

x 



Plectonema  battersii  



x 
x 

x 
x 

Gelidium  coerulescens  

"x" 

X 

X 

CHLOKOPHYCE^. 

x 

x 

x 

Gymnogongrus  griffithsise  

X 

X 
X 

x 

X 

X 

x 

X 

Ulva  lactuca  var.  rigida  ..:... 

X 

x 

X 

x 

x 

x 

x 
x 

x 
x 

Agardhiella  tenera  
Rhabdonia  ramosissima  

X 

X 

x 
x 

X 

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

Meristothecaduchassaingii.  .  . 

x 

Enteromorpha  in  testinalis.  .  .  . 

X 

X 

X 

x 

X 

x 

x 
x 

Gracilaria  confervoides  

x 
x 

x 
x 

X 

x 

X 

x 

x 

Ulvella  lens 

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

Chaetomorpha  brachygona.  .  .  . 
Chaetomorpha  linum  
Chaetomorpha  linum  f  .  aerea  . 

"x" 

X 

"x" 

X 

X 

x 

X 

"x" 

X 

"x?' 

X 

Hypnea  musciformis  
Rhodymenia  pahnetta  
Agardhinula  browneae  

X 

X 
X 

x 
x 

X 
X 

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

Cladophora  flexuosa  
Cladophora  crystallina  

X 

X 

"x" 
x 

X 

x 
x 

X? 

Champia  parvula  
Lomentaria  uncinata  

x 

X 

x 

x 

X 

x 

X 
X 

x 

X 

x 

x 

x 

Nitophyllum  medium  

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

Bryopsis  plumosa  

X 

X 

X 

X 

X? 

Laurencia    tuberculosa    var. 
gemmifera  

x 

Codium  tomentosum  

X 

x 

X 

x 

Chondria  dasyphylla  

X 

X 

x 

x 



X 

Chondria  atropurpurea  ?  

x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

PH^EOPHYCEwE. 
Ectocarpus  mitchellae  
Ectocarpus  duchassaingianus 
Ectocarpus  siliculosus  

"x" 

X 

"x" 

X 
X 

X 

"x" 

X 

"x" 

Chondria     tenuissima     var. 
baileyana  
Polysiphonia  harveyi  
Polysiphonia  denudata  
Polysiphonia  havanensis  

XXX 

X 

x 

X 

"x" 

X 

"x" 

Streblonema  invisibile    .... 

Polysiphonia  nigrescens  

x 

X 

X 

x 

X 

X 



Phaeostroma  pusillum  

X 

X 

X 

X 

Petalonia  fascia  
Rosenvingea  orientalis  

X 

X 

"x" 

X 

x 

-  X 
X 

Bostrychia  rivularis  

"x" 

X 

x 

Castagnea  zosterae  
Myrionema  strangulans  

"x" 

"x" 

X 

X 
X 
X 

X 

Callithamnion  polyspermum  . 
Spyridia  filamentosa  
Spyridia  clavata  

"x" 

"x" 

x 

X 

x 

X 

x 

X 

x 

Stilophora  rhizodes  

X 

X 

x 

Ceramium  rubrum  
Ceramium  strictum  

X 

x 

X 

x 

"x" 

X 
X 

X? 

Fucus  vesiculosus  
Sargassum  natans  
Sargassum  natans  f  .  angustum 
Sargassum  filipendula 

x 

X 
X 
X 

x 

"x' 
x 
x 

X 

Halymenia  floresia  
Halymenia  agardhii  
Halymenia  gelinaria  

X 

X 

X 
X 

x 

X 

X 

X? 

Sargassum   filipendula   var. 
montagnei  

X 

X 

Grateloupia  filicina  .•  .*. 

X 

x 

X 

Cryptonemia  crenulata  

X 

Padina  vickersias  
Spatoglossum  schroederi  
Dictyopteris  polypodioides.  .  . 

X 
X 

X 

"x" 

Amphiroa  fragilissima  
Amphiroa  brasiliana  
Lithothamnium  sejunctum  ?. 

X 

"x" 

Dictyopteris  serrata  
Dictyota  dichotoma  

RHODOPHYCE^B. 

Erythrocladia  recondita 

X 

"x" 

Corallina  capillacea  
Corallina  cubensis  
Melobesia  farinosa  
Melobesia    farinosa    f     calli- 

X 

"x" 

X 

x 

X 

X 

Erythrocladia  vagabunda  
Bangia  fusco-purpurea  

X 

X 

X 

X 

thamnioides  
Dermatolithon  pustulatum.  .  . 

X 

X 

X 

X 
X 

'x" 

Erythrotrichia  carnea  

X 

x 

X 

X 

x 

Total  

45 

61 

93 

78 

41 

o  The  data  for  this  table  were  obtained  from  the  distribution  of  the  various  species  given  by  De  Toni  (1889-1907);  from  the 
lists  of  Collins  for  New  England  (1900).  Jamaica  (1901).  and  Vancouver  Island  (1913).  of  Hauck  for  Porto  Rico  (1888  a),  of  Bor- 
gesenforthe  Virgin  Islands  (Danish  West  Indies)  (1913-1919).  of  Setchelland  Gardnerfor  northwestern  America  (1903).  and  of 
Saunders  for  Alaska  ( 190 1 ) ;  and  from  information  kindly  f  i 


ly  furnished  by  Mr.  Frank  S.  Collins  and  Dr.  Marshall  A.  Howe. 


MARINE  A.I&M  OF  BEAUFORT,  N.  C. 


533 


TABLE  9.— SURFACE  TEMPERATURE  OP  WATER  AT  5  p.  M.  OFF  LABORATORY  WHARF,  BEAUFORT,  N.  C. 

[Expressed  in  degrees  centigrade.] 


1907 

1908 

1909 

Month. 

Maxi- 
mum. 

Mini- 

Aver- 
age. 

Maxi- 
m  urn. 

Mini- 
mum. 

Aver- 
age. 

Maxi- 
mum. 

Mini- 
mum. 

Aver- 
age. 

7  8 

February.  ."  
March  

13.8 

3-9- 

8. 

16.7 

5-5 

^  II.  0 

April  
May  

ai.-j 
36.7 
38.3 

16.  o 
18.9 

19- 
% 

32.8 

25-5 

13.9 
18.3 

16.7 

33.0 
36.7 

July 

3"       Q 

38.  s 

71    O 

2C     C 

38.9 

23.0 

37-5 

30.0 

35-5 

37-8 

October  "  

18.3 

16.  o 

14-4 
10.  5 

016.5 

18.9 

14.5 

18.9 

33-9 

17-8 

IS-S 

34.  7 
"20.S 

6.0 

1912 

1913 

1914 

Month. 

Maxi- 
mum. 

Mini- 

Aver- 
age. 

Maxi- 

Tniim 

Mini- 

Aver- 
age. 

Maxi- 

Mini- 

Aver- 
age. 

. 

J?  H 

rLe     ,    ^  

16.0 

9.8 

April 

16.8 

36.0 

18. 

28.0 

17.0 

31.  O 

30.  o 

26.1 

July  

30.0 
28.  9 

36.0 

28.0 

30.0 

36.0 

26.0 

37.8 
37.8 

30.0 

as- 

28.0 

36.  3 

38.  o 

34.6 

14.  o 

19.  9 

November  

20.  0 

7-8 

13-6 

16.0 

13-6 

5 

' 

"  Record  available  for  only  part  of  month. 

ARTIFICIAL  KEY  TO  GENERA. 

A.  Color  bluish  green  or  blackish,  sometimes  grayish  green  or  tinted  with  other  colors;  single 
celled  or  composed  of  rather  short  filaments;  attached  or  floating;  forming  small  tufts 
or  rather  gelatinous,  feltlike  masses  over  considerable  areas  of  the  substratum.  .1.  MYXOPHYCE^E. 
o.  Plants  unicellular,  cells  living  singly  or  a  few  associated  in  small  ill-defined  families 

..CHROOCOCCUS  (p.  408). 

oo.  Plants  multicellular,  filamentous 6- 

b.  Filaments  tapering  at  apices  into  multicellular  hairs DICHOTHRIX  (p.  416). 

66.  Filaments  not  tapering  to  Jiairs  at  apices c- 

c.  Filaments  unbranched <^- 

d.  Filaments  lacking  sheath e- 

e.  Filaments,    multicellular,   elongated,    straight   or    curved  at  the  apices,  not 

spirally  twisted OSCHLATORIA  (p.  410). 

ee.  Filaments  unicellular,  short,  twisted  into  a  regular,  more  or  less  lax  spiral 

SPIRULINA  (p.  411). 

dd.  Filaments  with  sheath /• 

/.  Filaments  possessing  heterocysts MICROCH^TE  (p.  414). 

ff.  Filaments  lacking  heterocysts 9- 

g.  Filaments  composed  of  several  trichomes  in  each  sheath MICROCOLEUS  (p.  413) • 

gg.  Filaments  composed  of  single  trichomes  in  separate  sheaths A- 

h.  Filaments  about  i  mic.  diameter PHORMIDIUM  (p.  411). 

hh.  Filaments  more  than  i  mic.  in  diameter •  •  •  LYNGBYA  (p.  4")- 


534 


BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 


cc.  Filaments  branched t. 

».  Filaments  lacking  heterocysts HYDROCOLEUM  (p.  413). 

ii.  Filaments  possessing  heterocysts PLECTONEMA  (p.  415). 

A  A.  Color  green;  filamentous  or  forming  tubes  or  sheets  or  complex  structures  of  various 
shapes  composed  of  closely  interwoven  filaments;  usually  attached,  sometimes  float- 
ing; some  forms  minute,  living  on  or  in  shells  or  other  algae;  some  forms  incrusted 

with  lime II.  CHLOROPHYCE^E- 

a.  Frond  fiat,  expanded 6. 

b.  Outline  irregular,  indefinite,  usually  floating,  attached  when  young ULVA  (p.  420). 

bb.  Outline  regular,  definite;  usually  attached Enteromorpha  linza  (p.  420). 

aa.  Frond  forming  a  hollow  tube c. 

c.  Wall  of  tube  composed  of  cells ENTEROMORPHA  (p.  418). 

cc.  Wall  of  tube   not   cellular,  tube  consisting  of  single  unsegmented  cavity  of  various 

complicated  forms .d. 

d.  Frond   consisting  of    an   upright    stalk  arising  directly  from  the  base,  pinnately 

branched  above BRYOPSIS  (p.  431). 

dd.  Frond  consisting  of  a  creeping  stem  attached  at  intervals,  from  which  arise  erect 

branches  of  various  forms CAUI,ERPA  (p.  434). 

aaa.  Frond  filamentous «. 

e.  Frond  microscopic,  invisible  to  naked  eye  or  visible  only  as  a  green  stain  on  the  sub- 
stratum   ./. 

/.  Frond  living  in  walls  of  other  algae ENDODERMA  (p.  423). 

ff.  Frond  living  on  surface  of  shells ULVELLA  (p.  423). 

fff.  Frond  living  within  surface  of  shells GOMONTIA  (p.  429). 

ee.  Frond  easily  visible  to  naked  eye ^ g. 

g.  Filaments  unsegmented,  loosely  interwoven  to  form  an  irregular  mat DERBESIA  (p.  430). 

gg.  Filaments  segmented  at  regular  intervals h. 

h.  Filaments  unbranched CH^ETOMORPHA  (p.  424). 

hh.  Filaments  regularly  branched ;  attached  or  floating CLADOPHOR A  (p .  42  7 ) . 

hhh.  Filaments  usually  with  few  irregular,  rhizoidlike   branches,  sometimes  un- 
branched, usually  not  attached RHIZOCLONIUM  (p.  427). 

aaaa.  Frond  composed  of  branched  filaments  closely  interwoven  to  form  a  complex  structure, i. 

»'.  Frond  fan  shaped  on  an  evident  stalk,  incrusted  with  lime UDOTEA  (p.  433 ). 

ii.  Frond  terete  or  somewhat  flattened,  dichotomously  branched,  spongy,  not  incrusted 

with  lime CODIUM  (p.  432). 

AAA .  Color  brown,  sometimes  with  greenish  tinge ;  filamentous  or  forming  complex  structures 
of  various  shapes;  usually  attached;  some  forms  minute,  living  on  or  in  other  algae 

III.  PH^SOPHYCE^. 

a.  Frond  filamentous. 6. 

b.  Frond  easily  visible  to  naked  eye ECTOCARPUS  (p.  437). 

bb.  Frond  microscopic,  almost  or  quite  invisible  to  naked  eye c. 

c.  Frond  growing  on  the  surface  of  other  algae d. 

d.  Frond   more  or  less  spherical   in   outline,  composed  of  decumbent  radiating 

filaments  united  to  form  a  basal  layer  from  which  arise  erect  filaments .  MYRIONEMA  (p.  445). 
dd.  Frond  having  no  regular  outline,  composed  of  decumbent,  irregularly  dichto- 

mous  filaments PH,BOSTROMA  (p.  442). 

cc.  Frond  growing  within  the  surface  of  other  algae e. 

e.  Frond  forming  its  fruits  above  the  surface  in  more  or  less  spherical,  dense 

clusters ELACHISTEA  (p.  444). 

et.  Frond  forming  its  fruits  above  the  surface  singly  or  in  irregular,  loose  groups 

STREBLONEMA  (p.  440). 

aa.  Frond,  small  globose,  hollow LEATHESIA  (p.  447). 

aaa.  Frond  mostly  terete,  with  distinct  central  axis  and  lateral  branches ./. 

/.  Frond  with  many  lateral  branches  leaflike,  giving   the   appearance    of   stem    and 

leaves,  usually  with  berrylike  floats SARGASSUM  (p.  451). 


MARINE   AI<GM  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  535 

ff.  Frond  with  ultimate  branchlets  club  shaped  and  terminated  by  brushlike  tufts  of 

hairs,  no  floats  present SPOROCHNUS  (p.  448). 

aaaa.  Frond  terete  throughout,  variously  branched g. 

g.  Frond  forming  a  hollow  tube,  constricted  and  twisted  at  irregular  intervals,  about 

2  mm.  in  diameter,  dichotomously  branched ROSENVINGEA  (p.  443). 

gg.  Frond  not  conspicuously  tubular,  about  i  mm.  in  diameter,  irregularly  branched, 

spongy  texture CASTAGNEA  (p.  446). 

ggg.  Frond  solid  or    nearly    so,    less    than    i    mm.     in     diameter,     dichotomously  -, 

branched '. STILOPHORA  (p.  448)? 

aaaaa.  Frond  more  or  less  flattened,  simple  or  branched h. 

h.  Frond  consisting  of  one  or  more  elongated,  leaflike  lobes PETALONIA  (p.  443). 

hh.  Frond  fan  shaped  throughout  or  at  least  in  the  terminal  segments ». 

*.  Frond  or  segments  bearing  concentric  zones  parallel  with  the  apical  margins,  apical 

margins  inrolled PADINA  (p.  455). 

it.  Frond  or  segments  bearing  radial  markings  running  from  the  base  to  the  apical 

margins,  apical  margins  not  inrolled ZONARIA  (p.  454). 

hhh.  Frond  dichotomously  branched j. 

j.  Frond  tough,  leathery,   usually    with    bladderlike  floats  at  intervals  in    frond 

Fucus  (p.  450). 

jj.  Frond  membranaceous,  no  floats  present k. 

k.  Distinct  midrib  present DICTYOPTERIS  (p.  459). 

kk.  No  midrib  present /. 

/.  Frond  growing  in  length  by  group  of  initial  cells,  edges  more  or  less  serrate  or 

dentate SPATOGLOSSUM  (p.  458). 

//.  Frond  growing  in  length  by  single  apical  cell,  edges  with  occasional  prolifer- 
ations but  not  serrate  or  dentate DICTYOTA  (p.  460). 

AAAA.  Color  various  shades  of  red,  pink,  purple,  sometimes  blackish,  yellowish,  or  green 
(if  green,  structure  apparently  cellular,  not  entirely  composed  of  interwoven 
filaments),  sometimes  white  from  incrustations  of  lime;  filamentous  or  forming 
sheets  or  complex  structures  of  various  shapes;  some  forms  epiphytic,  some  minute, 

parasitic  on  other  algae;  usually  attached IV.  RHODOPHYCE^. 

o.  Frond  not  incrusted  with  lime 6. 

6.  Frondminute,  parasitic,  formingswollenknotson6:pw«o9on9r«^9nJ^^t«.AcTiNOCOCCUS(p.  477). 

66.  Frond  filamentous c. 

c.  Filaments  creeping,  closely  adherent,  forming  irregular  patches .  ERYTHROCLADIA  (p.  466). 

cc.  Filaments  more  or  less  erect d. 

d.  Filaments  regularly  dichotomous,  tips  usually  incurved CERAMIUM  (p.  513). 

dd.  Filaments  not  regularly  dichotomous e. 

e.  Filaments  consisting  throughout,  or  for  the  most  part,  of  a  single  rt>w  of  cells; 

simple  or  branched •/. 

Y.  Filaments  sparse,  scattered  or  few  occurring  in  small  tufts  on  other  algse; 
almost  microscopic  in  size;  slight  branching  by  method  known  as  "false 

branching" GONIOTRICHUM  (p.  465). 

ff.  Filaments  composed  of  obovate  or  barrel-shaped  cells GRIFFITHSIA  (p.  511). 

fff.  Filaments  densely  branched,  forming  erect,  fairly  conspicuous  tufts  on  rocks 

or  plants CAUJTHAMNION  (p.  511). 

ffff.  Filaments  growing  in  hydroids Acrochcetium  infestans  (p.  473). 

fffff.  Filaments  forming  more  or  less  dense  mats  over  other  algae g. 

g.  Mat  very  fine,  velvety,  often  inconspicuous  except  for  the  reddish  tinge 

given  the  host;  filaments  minute ACROCILETIUM  (p.  469). 

gg.  Mat  coarser,  conspicuous *• 

h.  Individual  filaments  easily   discembile,  rather  coarse;   mat  dark  red, 

rather  loose ERYTHROTRICHIA  (p.  466). 

hh.  Individual  filaments  scarcely  discernible,  rather  fine,   velvety;  mat 

bright  red,  dense SPERMOTHAMNION  (p.  510). 


536  BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

ee.  Filaments  at  first  consisting  of  single  rows  of  cells,  the  upper  cells  of  the 

filaments  soon  divided  longitudinally,  forming  tubes;  unbranched..  .BANGIA  (p. 464). 

eee.  Filaments  consisting  throughout  of  several  rows  of  cells i. 

i.  Frond  erect  throughout,  branching  in  all  directions POLYSIPHONIA  (p.  502). 

t*.  Frond  erect,  arising  from  a  creeping  filament,  branching  alternately  pinnate, 

distichous,  giving  a  zigzag  appearance BOSTRYCHIA  (p.  506). 

Hi.  Fryid  creeping,  forming  a  velvety  mat  with  erect  branches HERPOSIPHONIA  (p.  507).    ' 

bbb.  Frond  terete,  at  least  for  the  most  part j. 

j.  Frond  regularly  dichotomous k. 

h.  Frond  small,  about  3  cm.  long  and  less  than  i  mm.  in  diameter;  horny,  tough; 

dark  greenish  purple GYMNOGONGRUS  (p.  477). 

kk.  Frond  large,  10  to  20  cm.  long,  3  to  8  mm.   in  diameter;  fleshy,   soft;   pink 

Halymenia  agardhii  (p.  517). 

kkk.  Frond  large,  9  to  34  cm.  long,  i  to  4  mm.  wide,  sometimes  flattened,  sometimes 
with  pinnate  branches  in  addition  to  dichotomies;  cartilaginous,  tough,  coarse; 

red  to  purple  and  dark  green Gracilaria  multipartia  (p.  484). 

kkkk.  Frond  large,   8  to  18  cm.   long,   0.5  to  i  mm.  in  diameter;    many  pinnate 
branches  in  addition  to  dichotomies;  ultimate  branches  beset  with  numerous 

fine  hairs  along  their  sides;  red /. 

/.  Hairs  simple SPYRIDIA  (p.  512). 

//.  Hairs  branched BRONGNIARTELLA  (p.  505). 

jj.  Frond  not  regularly  dichotomous m. 

m.  Frond   consisting  of  a  solid  stem  and  ultimate  hollow,  bladderlike  branches 

Chrysymenia  uvaria  (p.  491). 

mm.  Frond  hollow,  tubular n. 

n.  Frond  large,  up  to  30  cm.  long  and  4  to  5  mm.  in  diameter;  branches  constricted 

at  the  bases Chrysymenia  enteromorpha  (p.  490). 

nn.  Frond  1.5  to  6  cm.  long,  about  i  mm.  in  diameter;  constricted  at  intervals, 

the  tube  containing  transverse  diaphragms  at  these  constrictions.  .CHAMPIA  (p.  492). 
nnn.  Frond  i  to  3  cm.  long,  less  than  i  mm.  diameter;  no  transverse  diaphragms; 
branches  frequently  arched  and  bearing  branchlets  principally  along  con- 
vex side;  arched  branches  sometimes  attached  at  their  tips.  . .  .  LOMENTARIA  (p.  491). 

mmm.  Frond  solid  or  nearly  so o. 

o.  Frond  small,  i  to  5  cm.  long,  0.5  mm.  or  less  diameter;  upright  branches  arising 

from  a  creeping  stem GELIDIUM  (p.  475). 

oo.  Frond  larger  than  above p. 

p.  Branches  beset  with  numerous  hairs  along  their  sides;  red DASYA  (p.  508). 

pp.  Ultimate  branchlets  constricted  at  the  bases;  red  or  reddish CHONDRIA  (p.  498). 

ppp.  Branches  recurved   at  the  apices  or  bearing  short,  pointed,  spinelike 

branchlets;  green HYPNEA  (p.  485). 

pppp.  Frond  not  distinguished  by  any  of  above  characters q. 

q.  Branches  arising  on  stem  in  two  rows,  main  axis  somewhat  flattened r . 

r.  Texture  somewhat  gelatinous;  branching  pinnate  throughout;  cystocarps 

internal RHABDONIA  (p.  480). 

rr.  Texture  somewhat  cartilaginous;  branching  partly  dichotomous;  cysto- 

carpe  external,  conspicuous Gracilaria  multipartita  (p.  484). 

qq.  Branches  arising  on  all  sides  or  at  least  not  in  two  rows,  main  axis  not 

flattened s. 

*.  Cystocarps  internal t. 

t.  Texture  rather  gelatinous,  soft AGARDHIELLA  (p.  478). 

U.  Texture  rather  cartilaginous,  rigid EUCHEUMA  (p.  481). 

ss.  Cystocarps  external u. 

u.  Texture  fleshy-cartilaginous;  frond  slender,  usually  mot  more  than  i 
mm.  in  diameter,  beset  with  many  short  fine  branch  lets,  smaller 
branches  long,  slender Gracilaria  confervoides  (p.  483). 


MARINE   ALG^   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  537 

uu.  Texture  rather  cartilaginous;  frond  coarse,  i  to  1.5  mm.  in  diameter, 
sparingly  branched,  small  branches  few,  usually  coarse 

Gracilaria  multipartite  (p.  484). 

uuu.  Texture  cartilaginous,  wiry ;  frond  coarse,  densely  branched,  branches 
interwoven,  beset  with  many  short,  coarse,  blunt  branchlets 

LAURENCIA  (p.  497). 

bbbb.  Frond  flattened v. 

v.  Frond  i  to  25  mm.  wide  in  widest  part w. 

w.  Frond  regularly  dichotomous x. 

x.  Frond  4  to  12  mm.  wide  in  widest  part,  2  to  8  cm.  long,  membranaceous,  fleshy, 

rather  thick,  edges  smooth ;  red  or  pink ' RHODYMENIA  (p.  487). 

xx.  Frond  12  to  25  mm.  wide  in  widest  part,  3  to  10  cm.  long,  fleshy,  rather  coarse, 

edges  ruffled;  purple CRYPTONEMIA  (p.  521). 

xxx.  Frond  10  to  25  mm.  wide  in  widest  part,  6  to  20  cm.  long,  thin  membranaceous, 

veined,  edges  wavy,  slightly  proliferous;  bright  pink NITOPHYLLUM  (p.  494). 

ivw.  Frond  pinnately  or  irregularly  branched y. 

y.  Frond  not  more  than  i  mm.  wide,  fleshy,  rather  densely  pinnately  or  irregu- 
larly branched;  dark  purple Grateloupia  filicina  (p.  521). 

yy.  Frond  6  to  18  mm.  wide  in  widest  part,  fleshy,  main  axis  conspicuously  larger 
than  branches,  densely  decompound  distichously  branched,  branches 
sometimes  dichotomous,  all  branches  flat,  numerous  branchlets  frequently 

arising  from  the  flat  surfaces;  purplish  green. Grateloupia  gibbesii (p.  521). 

yyy.  Frond  9  to  15  mm.  wide  in  widest  part,  gelatinous,  main  axis  conspicuously 
larger  than  branches,  sparingly  distichously  branched,  ultimate  branches 

rounded;  pink Halymenia  floresia  (p.  518). 

w.  Frond  40  to  130  mm.  wide  in  widest  part z. 

2.  Frond  very  thin  membranaceous,  delicate of. 

a'.  Frond  pink,  simple  or  sparingly  branched,  bearing  a  conspicuous  midrib  and 
sometimes  fine  pinnate  veins;  fruit  appearing  as  conspicuous  dots  on 

surface GRINNELLIA  (p.  495). 

oaf.  Frond  purple,  simple  or  irregularly  divided  into  lobes,  structure  uniform; 

fruit  not  visible  to  naked  eye PORPHYRA  (p.  464). 

zz.  Frond  firm,  membranaceous  or  fleshy b'. 

b'.  Frond  dichotomously  branched AGARDHINULA  (p.  488). 

bb'.  Frond  simple  or  lobate,  not  dichotomous </. 

cf .  Frond  fleshy-cartilaginous,  coarse,  simple,  or  irregularly  divided  into  lobes 
not  reaching  to  the  base,  sometimes  proliferous  from  the  margins,  stem 
inconspicuous;  cystocarpic fruit  borne  in  conspicuous,  short  protuberances 
arising  from  edges  and  surface;  usually  dark  red,  sometimes  yellowish 

MERISTOTHECA  (p.  479). 

cd ' .  Frond  firm  membranaceous,  thin,  usually  divided  into  several  more  or  less 
regular  ovate  or  elliptical  lobes  arising  from  the  base  on  distinct  stalks; 
fruit  in  inconspicuous  dots  on  surface;  purplish  pink. ..  .Halymenia  floridana  (p.  519). 

ccd ' .  Frond  gelatinous-fleshy,  light  pink,  sometimes  with  yellowish  tinge df. 

d'.  Frond  simple  or  divided  into  several  lobes  borne  on  distinct  stalks;  frond 

or  lobes  ovate Halymenia  gelinaria  (p.  518). 

dd' '.  Frond  simple  or  irregularly  divided  into  lobes;  frond  or  lobes  lanceolate 

Chrysymenia  agardhii  (p.  490). 

aa.  Frond  incrusted  with  lime e'. 

ef .  Frond  erect,  filiform,  jointed ./'. 

/'.  Conceptacles  immersed,  scattered  over  the  segments AMPHIROA  (p.  526). 

ff' '.  Conceptacles  immersed  in  the  apices  of  terminal  segments,  opening  by  terminal 

pores,  the  fertile  segments  sometimes  bearing  hornlike  lateral  branches.  CORALUN A  (p.  527). 


538  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

eef .  Frond  horizontally  expanded  forming  small,  more  or  less  definite,  disk-shaped  spots 

on  the  substratum qf. 

gf.  Frond  thin,  consisting  of  a  single  uniform  layer;  larger  cells  present  among  ordi- 
nary cells;  conceptacles  small MELOBESIA  (p.  523). 

ggf .  Frond  fairly  thick,  differentiated  into  a  thin  basal  layer  and  a  thicker  upper 

one ;  cells  of  fairly  uniform  size ;  conceptacles  large DERMATOLITHON  (p.  524). 

eetf .  Frond  forming  indefinite  expansions  over  the  substratum h'. 

h'.  Tetrasporangial  conceptacles  opening  by  a  separate  pore  for  each  sporangium 

LlTHOTHAMNIUM  (p.  524). 

hh'.  Tetrasporangial  conceptacle  opening  by  a  single  apical  pore LITHOPHYU.UM  (p.  525). 


BIBLIOGRAPHY. 

ADANSON,  M. 

1763.  Familledes  Plantes.     Paris. 
AGARDH,  C.  A. 

1817.  Synopsis  Algarum  Scandinaviae.     Lund. 

1820-1822.  Species  Algarum  rite  cognitae.     Vol.  i.     Lund. 

1824.  Systema  Algarum.     Lund. 

1827.  Aufzahlung  einiger  in  den  osterreichischen  Landern  gefundenen  neuen  Gattungen  und  Arten 

von  Algen,  nebst  ihrer  Diagnostik  und  beigefugten  Bemerkungen.     Flora,  Jahrg.  10,  Bd.  2, 
pp.  625-640,  641-646.     Regensburg. 

1828.  Species  Algarum  rite  cognitae.     Vol.2.     Greifswald. 
AGARDH,  J.  G. 

1836.  Novitiae  Florae  Sueciae  ex  Algarum  familia.     Lund. 

1841.  In  Historian!'  Algarum  Symbolae.     Linnaea,  vol.  15,  pp.  1-50,  443-457.     Berlin  und  Halle. 

1842.  Algae  maris  Mediterranei  et  Adriatic! .     Paris. 

1847.  NYa  Alger  fran   Mexico.     Ofversigt  af   Kongliga  Vetenskaps-Akademiens  Forhandlingar, 

Arg.  4,  pp.  5-17.     Stockholm. 

1848-1901.  Species,  genera  et  ordines  algarum.     Lund. 
1848.  Vol.  i.     Fucoideae. 
1851, 1852, 1863.  Vol.  2.     Florideae. 
1876-1901.  Vol.  3.     De  FIorHeis  Curae  Posteriores. 
1876.  Pars  i.  Epicrisis  Systematis  Floridearum. 
1880.  Pars  2.  Morphologia  Floridearum. 
1898.  Pars  3.  De  Dispositione  Delesseriearum. 
1901.  Pars  4.  Supplementa  ulteriora. 
1849.  Algoliska  bidrag.     Ofversigt  af  Kongliga  Vetenskaps-Akademiens  Forhandlingar,  Arg.  6,  pp. 

79-89.     Stockholm. 
1871.  Bidrag  till  Florideernes  systematik.     Ltmds  Universitets  Arsskrift.     Mathematik  och  Natur- 

vetenskap,  torn.  8,  pp.  1-60.     Lund. 
1872-1890.  Till  algernes  systematik.  -  Ibid. 

1872.  I.  Caulerpa,  II.  Zonaria,  III.  Sargassum.     Tom.  9,  pp.  1-71. 
i88oa.  IV.  Chordarieae,  V.  Dictyoteae.     Tom.  17,  pp.  1-134,  pis.  1-3. 
1882.  VI.  Ulvaceae.     Tom.  19,  pp.  1-177,  P^s-  I~4- 
1884.  VII.  Florideae.     Tom.  21,  pp.  1-117,  pi-  *• 
1887.  VIII.  Siphoneae.     Tom.  23,  pp.  1-174,  pis.  1-5. 

1890.  IX.  Sporochnoideae,  X.  Fucaceae,  XI.  Florideae.     Tom.  26,  pp.  1-125,  pis.  1-3. 
1889.  Species  Sargassorum  Australieae.     Kongliga  Svenska   Vetenskaps-Akademiens  Handlingar. 

Band.  23,  No.  3,  pp.  133,  pis.  31.     Stockholm. 

1894-1899.  Analecta  Algologica.  Observationes  de  speciebus  algarum  minus  cognitis  earumque 
dispositione.  Acta  Regiae  Societatis  Physiographicae  Lundensis,  in  Lunds  Univer- 
sitets Arsskrift.  Lund. 

1894.  Continuatio  I.     Tom.  29  (Ny  Foljd,  .Bd.  4  of  Acta),  No.  IX,  144  pp.,  2  pis. 
18943.  Continuatio  II.     Tom.  30  (Ny  Foljd,  Bd.  5  of  Acta),  No.  VII,  99  pp.,  i  pi. 
1896.  Continuatio  III.     Tom.  32  (Ny  Foljd,  Bd.  7  of  Acta),  No.  II,  140  pp.,  i  pi. 
1899.  Continuatio  V.     Tom.  35  (Ny  F6ljd,>Bd.  zoof  Acta),  No.  IV,  160  pp.,  3  pis. 
AMBRONN,  H. 

1880.  tiber  einige  Falle  von  Bilateralitat  bei  den  Florideen.     Botanische  Zeitung,    Bd.  38,  pp. 
161-174,  177-185,  193-200,  209-216,  225-229,  pis.  3-4.     Berlin. 

539 


540  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

ARDISSONE,  F. 

1883-1886.  Phycologia  Mediterranea.    Metnorie  della  Societa  Crittogamologica  Italiana. 
1883.  Floridee.    Vol.  i,  pp.  1-516. 

1886.  Oosporee,  Zoosporee,  Schizosporee.    Vol.  2,  pp.  1-325,  1887. 
ARESCHOUG,  J.  E. 

1843.  Algarum  (Phycearum)  minus  rite  cognitarum  pugillus  secundus.     Linnaea.     Bd.   17,  pp. 

257-269.     Berlin  und  Halle. 
1847-1850.  Phycearum,  quae  in  Maribus  Scandinaviae  crescunt,  enumeratio.     Nova  Acta  Regiae 

Societatis  Scientiarum  Upsaliensis.     Upsala. 
1847.  Fuceae.    Ser.  II,  vol.  13,  pp.  223-382,  pis.  1-9. 
1850.  Ulvaceae.  Ser.  II,  vol.  14,  pp.  385-454,  pis.  1-3. 
18473.  Iconographia  phycologica.     Gothenburg. 

BAItEY,  J.  W. 

1848.  Continuation  of  the  list  of  localities  of  algae  in  the  United  States.     American  Journal  of  Science 

and  Arts.     Ser.  2,  vol.  VI>  pp.  37-42.     New  Haven. 
BERTHOLD,  G. 

1882.  Uber  die  Vertheilung  der  Algen  im  Golf  von  Neapel  nebst  einem  Verzeichnis  der  bisher 
daselbst  beobachteten  Arten.     Mittheilungen  ams  der  Zoologischen  Station  zu  Neapel, 
Bd.  3,  pp.  393-536.     Leipzig. 
B6RGESEN,  'F. 

1910.  Some  new  or  little  known  West  Indian  Florideae.  II.  Botanisk  Tidsskrift,  Bd.  30,  pp. 
177-207.  Copenhagen. 

1913.  The  marine  algae  of  the  Danish  West  Indies.     Part  I.  Chlorophyceae.     Dansk  Botanisk 

Arkiv,  Bd.  i,  Nr.  4.     Copenhagen. 

1914.  The  marine  algae  of  the  Danish  West  Indies.     Part  II.  Phaeophyceae.     Ibid.,  Bd.  2,  Nr.  2. 
I9i4a.  The  species  of  Sargassum  found  along  the  coasts  of  the  Danish  West  Indies,  With  remarks 

upon  the  floating  forms  of  the  Sargasso  Sea.    "Mindeskrift  for  Japetus  Steenstrup,  XXXII. 
Copenhagen. 
1915-1919.  The  marine  algae  of  the  Danish  West  Indies.     Vol.  2.     Rhodophyceae  (in  part).     Dansk 

Botanisk  Arkiv,  Bd.  3,  Nr.  i-Nr.  ic.     Copenhagen. 
BORNET,  ED. 

1892.  Les  Algues  de  P.-K.-A.  Schotisboe.     Memoires  de  la  Societ6  Nationale  des  Sciences  naturelles 

et  Mathematiques  de  Cherbourg,  tome  28,  pp.  165-376,  pis.  1-3.     Cherbourg. 
1904.  Deux  Chantransia  corymbifera  Thuret.     Acrochaetium  et  Chantransia.     Bulletin  de  la  Societ6 

Botanique  de  France,  tome  51,  pt.  2,  pp.  XIV-XXIII,  i  pi. 
BORNET,  ED.,  and  FLAHAULT,  CH. 

1886.  Revision  des  Nostocacees  H6terocyst6es  contenues  dans  les  principaux  herbiers  de  France. 
Annales  des  Sciences  naturelles.     Botanique,  ser.  7,  tome  3,  pp.  323-381 ;  tome  4,  pp.  343-373. 

Paris. 

1887.  Idem.     Ibid.,  tome  5,  pp.  51-129. 

1888.  Idem.     Ibid.,  tome  7,  pp.  177-262. 

i888a.  Note  sur  deux  nouveaux  genres  d'algues  perforantes.     Journal  de  Botanique,  tome  2,  pp. 
161-165.     Paris. 

1889.  Sur  quelques  plantes  vivant  dans  le  test  calcaire  des  mollusques.     Bulletin  de  la  Societ6 

Botanique  de  France,  tome  36,  pp.  CXLVII-CLXXVII,  pis.  6-12. 
BRITTON,  N.  L.,  AND  MILLSPAUGH,  C.  F. 

1920.    The  Bahama  flora.     New  York. 
CASTAGNE,  L. 

1845.  Catalogue  des  plantes  qui  croissent  naturellement  aux  environs  de  Marseilles.    Aix. 

1851.  Suppl6ment  au  catalogue  des  plantes  qui  croissent  naturellement  aux  environs  de  Marseille. 

Aix. 
CLEMENTE  Y  RUBIO,  SIMON  DE  ROJAS. 

1807.  Ensayo  sobre  las  variedades  de  la  vid  comun  que  vegetan  en  Andalucia  con  un  Indice  eti- 
mologico  y  tres  listas  de  plantas  en  que  se  caracterizan  varias  especies  nuevas.  Lista 
tercera  y  ultima,  pp.  308-322.  Madrid. 


MARINE   AI^GM   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  54! 

COHN,  F. 

1879.  tiber  Thallophytensystem.     Jahresbericht  der  schlesischen  Gesellschaft  fur  vaterlandische 

Cultur.     1879,  pp.  279-289. 
COLLINS,  FRANK  S. 

1900.  Preliminary  lists  of  New  England  plants,  V.  Marine  algse.     Rhodora,  vol.  2,  pp.  41-52.  Boston. 

1901.  The  algae  of  Jamaica.     Proceedings  of  the  American  Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  vol.  37, 

pp.  231-270.     Boston. 

igofa.  Notes  on  algae,  III.     Rhodora,  vol.  3,  pp.  132-137.     Boston. 
1906.  Acrochaetium  and  Chantransia  in  North  America.     Ibid.,  vol.  8,  pp.  189-196. 

1908.  Two  new  speciesiof  Acrochaetium.     Ibid.,  vol.  10,  pp.  133-135. 

1909.  The  green  algae  of  North  America.     Tufts  College  Studies.     (Scientific  Series.)    Vol.  2 ,  No.  3. 

Tufts  College,  Mass." 

1911.  Notes  on  algae,  X.     Rhodora,  vol.  13,  pp.  184-187.     Boston. 

1912.  The  green  algae  of  North  America.     (Supplementary  paper.)    Tufts  College  Studies.     (Scien- 

tific Series.)     Vol.  3,  No.  2.     Tufts  College,  Mass. 

1913.  The  marine  algae  of  Vancouver  Island.     Bulletin  No.  i,  Victoria  Memorial  Museum,  Canada 

Geological  Survey,  pp.  90-137. 

1918.  The  green  algae  of  North  America.      (Second  supplement.)    Tufts  College  Studies.     (Scien- 
tific Series.)    Vol.  4,  No.  7.     Tufts  College,  Mass. 

I9i8a.  A  working  key  to  the  genera  of  North  American  alga?.     Ibid.,  vol.  4,  No.  8. 
COLLINS,  F.  S.,  and  HERVEY,  A.  P. 

1917.     The  algae  of  Bermuda.     Proceedings  of  the  American  Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  vol.  53,  « 

No.  i,  pp.  1-195,  pis.  1-6.     Cambridge. 
COLLINS,  F.  S.,  and  HOWE,  M.  A. 

1916.  Notes  on  species  of  Halymenia.     Bulletin  of  the  Torrey  Botanical  Club,  vol.  43,  pp.  169-182. 

'New  York. 
CROUAN,  P.  L.  and'H.  M. 

1859.  Notice  sur  quelques  especes  et  genres  nouveaux  d'Algues  marines  de  la  Rade  de  Brest. 

Annales  des  Sciences  Naturelles.     Botanique,  ser.  4,  tome  12,  pp.  288-292,  pi.  22.     Paris. 
DECAISNE,  J. 

1842.  Essais  sur  une  classification  des  Algues  et  des  Polypiers  calciferes  de  Lamouroux.     Ibid.,  ser.  2, 

tome  17,  pp.  297-380,  pis.  14-17. 

i842a.  Memoire  sur  les  Corallines  ou  Polypiers  calciferes.     Ibid.,  ser.  2,  tome  18,  pp.  96-128. 
DELILE.'A.  R. 

i8i3.*Flore  d'Egypte.     Paris. 
DERBES,  A.  and  SOLIER,  A. 

1850.  Sur  les  organes  reproducteurs  des  Algues.     Annales  des  Sciences  Naturelles.     Botanique, 

ser.  3,  tome  14,  pp.  261-282.     Paris. 
1856.  Memoire  sur  quelques  points  de  la  physiologic  des  Algues.     Supplement  aux  Comptes  rendus 

des  seances  de  1 'Academic  des  Sciences,  tome  i,  pp.  1-120,  pis.  1-23.     Paris. 
DESFONTAINE,  R. 

1798.  Flora  atlantica,  2  vols.     Paris. 
DESMAZIERES,  J.  B.  H.  J. 

1823.  Catalogue  des  plantes  omises  dans  la  botanographie  belgique. 
DESVAUX,  N.  A. 

1808.  Neues  Journal  fur  die  Botanik,  herausgegeben  vom  Professor  Schrader:  avec  des  observa- 
tions sur  le  genre  Fluggea  Rich.     (Slateria  Desv.).     Journal  de  Botanique  (Desvaux), 
tome  i,  pp.  240-246.     Paris. 
DE  TONI,  J.  B. 

1889-1907.  Sylloge  Algarum  omnium  hucusque  cognitarum.     Padua. 
1889.  Vol.  i.  Chlorophyceae. 
1895.  Vol.  3.  Fucoideae. 
1897-1905.  Vol.  4.  Florideae. 
1907.  Vol.  5.  Myxophyceae. 
18973.  The  Botanical  Gazette.    Vol.  23,  pp.  63,  64.    Chicago. 


542  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

DICTIONNAIRE  classique  d'Histoire  Naturelle. 

1822-1831.  Bory  de  Saint- Vincent,  J.  B.  G.  M.,  editor,  17  vols.     Paris. 
DILLWYN,  L.  W. 

1809.  British  confervae.     London. 
DRAPARNAUD,  J.  P.  R. 

1801.  Discours  relatifs  a  1'Histoire  naturelle.     Discours  sur  les  moeurs  et  la  maniere  de  vivre  des 

plantes,  pp.  30-41.     Montpellier. 
DUBY,  J.  E. 

1832.  Essai  d 'application  a  une  tribu  d'Algues  de  quelques  principes  de  taxonomie;  ou — Memoire 
sur  le  groupe  des  Ceramiees.     Memoires  de  la  Soci6te  de  Physique  et  d'Histoire  naturelle 
de  Geneve,  tome  5,  pp.  321-346. 
DUNN,  GRACE  A. 

1917.  Development  of  Dumontia  filiformis.     II.  Development  of  sexual  plants  and  general  dis- 
cussion of  results.    The  Botanical  Gazette,  vol.  63,  pp.  425-467,  pis.  19-22.     Chicago. 
ENGLER,  A.,  and  PRANTL,  K. 

1897-1911.  Die  natiirlichen  Pflanzenfamilien.     Leipzig. 

1897.  Teil  i,  abt.  2.     Chlorophyceae,  Phseophycese,  Rhodophyceae. 
1900.  Teil  i,  abt.  i,  a.  Schizophycese,  etc. 
1911.  Nachtrage  zum  Teil  i,  abt.  2. 
ESPER,  E.  J.  C. 

1797-1808.  Icones  Fucorum.     Nuremberg. 
•FALKENBERG,  P. 

1879.  Die  Meeres-algen  des  Golfes  von  Neapel.     Mittheilungen  aus  der  Zoologischen  Station  zu 

.  Neapel,  Bd.  i,  pp.  218-277.     Leipzig. 
FARLOW,  W.  G. 

1882.  The  marine  algae  of  New  England.     Appendix  A.  i.     Report,  U.  S.  Commissioner  of  Fish 

and  Fisheries  for  1879,  pp.  1-210,  15  pis.     Washington. 
FLORA  Danica. 

1766-1883.     17  volumes.     Copenhagen. 
FORSKAAL,  P. 

1775.  Flora  ^Sgyptiaco-arabica. 
FosuE,  M. 

1900.  Revised  systematical  survey  of  the  Melobesiae.     Det  Kongelige  Norske  Videnskabers  Sels- 
kabs  Skrifter,  1900,  No.  5. 

1905.  Remarks  on  Northern  Lithothamnia.     Ibid.,  1905,  No.  3. 

1906.  Algologiske  Notiser.     II.     Ibid.,  1906,  No.  2. 

GOMONT,    M. 

1890.  Essai  de  classification  des  Nostocac6es  Homocystees.     Journal  de  Botanique,  tome  4,  pp. 

349-357- 
1892.  Monographic  des  Oscilariees.     Annales  des  Sciences  Naturelles.     Botanique,  ser.  7,  tome 

15,  pp.  263-368,  pis.  6-14;  tome  16,  pp.  91-264,  pis.  1-7.     Paris. 
1899.  Sur  quelques  Oscillariees  nouvelles.     Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Botanique  de  France,  tome  46, 

pp.  25-41,  pi.  i.     Paris. 
GOODE,  G.  BROWN,  and  associates. 

1887.  The'  fisheries  and  fishery  industries  of  the  United  States.     III.  The  fishing  grounds  of  North 

America.     U.  S.  Commission  of  Fish  and  Fisheries.     Washington. 
GOODENOUGH,  S.,  and  WOODWARD,  T.  J. 

1797.  Observations  on  the  British  Fuci.     Transactions  of  the  Linnaean  Society  of  London,  vol.  3, 

pp.  84-235,  pis.  16-19.    London. 
GRAY,  S.  F. 

1821.  A  natural  arrangement  of  British  plants.     London. 
GREVILLE,  R.  K. 

1823-1828.  .Scottish  cryptogamic  flora.     Edinburgh. 
18243.  Flora  Edinensis.     Edinburgh. 
1830.  Algae  Brittanicae.     Edinburgh. 


MARINE   ALG^   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  543 

GRUNOW,  A. 

1867.  Reise  seiner  Majestat  Fregatte  Novara  urn  die  Erde.     Botanischer  Theil,  Bd.   i,  Algen. 

Vienna. 
HARVEY,  W.  H. 

1841.  A  manual  of  the  British  algae.     London. 
1846-1851.  Phycologia  Britannica.     London. 
1846.  Vol.  i. 
1849.  Vol.  2. 

1851.  Vol.  3. 

18493.  A  manual  of  the  British  marine  algae.     London. 

1852-1858.  Nereis  Boreali-Americana.     Smithsonian  Contributions  to  Knowledge.     Washington. 

1852.  Part  i,  Melanospermeae.     Vol.  3. 

1853.  Part  2,  Rhodospermeae.     Vol.  5. 

1858.  Part  3,  Chlorospermeae  and  supplement.     Vol.  10. 
HAUCK,  F. 

1886-1889.  Ueber  einige  von  J.  M.  Hildebrandt  im  Rothen  Meere  und  Indischen  Ocean  gesam- 
melte  Algen.     Hedwigia. 

1886.  Bd.  25,  pp.  166-168,  217-221. 

1887.  Bd.  26,  pp.  18-21,  41-45. 

1888.  Bd.  27,  pp.  86-93. 

1889.  Bd.  29,  pp.  188-190. 

i888a.  Meeresalgen  von  Puerto- Rico.     Botanische  Jahrbiicher  fur  Systematik,  Pflanzengeschichte 

und  Pflanzengeographie  (Engler),  Bd.  9,  pp.  457-470.     Leipzig. 
HOOKER,  J.  D.,  and  HARVEY,  W.  H. 

1847.  Algae  Tasmanicae.     London  Journal  of  Botany,  vol.  6,  pp.  397-417. 
HOOKER,  W.  J. 

1833.  British  Flora.     Ed.  3,  part  2,  vol.  i.    London. 
HOWE,  MARSHALL  A. 

1909.  Phycological  Studies — IV.    The  genus  Neomeris  and  notes  on  other  Siphonales.     Bulletin 

of  the  Torrey  Botanical  Club,  vol.  36,  pp.  75-104,  pis.  1-8.     New  York. 

1911.  Phycological  Studies — V.     Some  marine  algae  of  Lower  California,  Mexico.     Ibid.,  vol.38, 
pp.  489-514,  pis.  27-34. 

1914.  Some  midwinter  algae  of  Long  Island  Sound.     Torreya,  vol.  14,  pp.  97-101.     New  York. 
19143.  The  marine  algae  of  Peru.     Memoirs  of  the  Torrey  Botanical  Club,  vol.  15.    New  York. 

1915.  The  marine  algae  of  the  Danish  West  Indies.     Torreya,  vol.  15,  pp.  46-50.    New  York. 
1917.     Some  economic  uses  and  possibilities  of  the  seaweeds.    Journal  of  the  Nbw  York  Botanical 

Gardens,  vol.  18,  pp.  1-15,  pis.  189-190.     New  York. 
HOWE,  M.  A.,  and  HOYT,  W.  D. 

1916.  Notes  on  some  marine  algae  from  the  vicinity  of  Beaufort,  N.  C.    Memoirs  of  the  New  York 

Botanical  Garden,  vol.  6,  pp.  105-123,  pis.  11-15.     New  York. 
HOYT,  W.  D.  - 

1907.  Periodicity  in  the  production  of  the  sexual  cells  of  Dictyota  dichotoma.     Botanical  Gazette, 
vol.  43,  pp.  383-392.     Chicago. 

1910.  Alternation  of  generations  and  sexuality  in  Dictyota  dichotoma.     Ibid.,  vo».  49,  pp.  55-57. 
HUDSON,  G. 

1762.  Flora  Anglica.     Ed.  i.     London. 
1778.  Flora  Anglica.     Ed.  2.     London. 
JOHNSON,  D.  S. 

1900.  Notes  on  the  flora  of  the  banks  and  sounds  at  Beaufort,  N.  C.     Botanical  Gazette,  vol.  30, 

pp.  405-409.     Chicago. 
KJELLMAN,  F.  R. 

1890.  Handbok  i  Skandinaviens  Hafsalgflora.     I.  Fucoideae.     Stockholm. 
159321°— 20 12 


544  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

KUETZING,  F.  T. 

1841.  tiber  Ceramium  Ag.     Linnaea,  Bd.  15,  pp.  727-746.     Berlin  und  Halle. 

1843.  Phycologia  generalis.     Leipzig. 

i843a.  tiber  die  systematische  Eintheilung  der  Algen.     Linnaea,  Bd.  17,  pp.  75-107.     Berlin  und 

Halle. 

1845-1869.  Tabulae  Phycologicae.     Nordhausen. 
18453.  Phycologia  germanica.     Nordhausen. 
i849a.  Species  algarum.     Leipzig. 
KUNTZE,  OTTO. 

1898.  Revisio  Generum  Plantarum  Vascularum  Omnium  atque  Cellularium  Multarum  secundum, 

Leges  Nomenclaturae  Internationales.     Pars  IIIn. 
KYUN,  H. 

1906.  Zur  Kenntnis  einiger  schwedischer  Chantransia-arten.     Botaniska  Studier,  tillagnade  F.  R. 

Kjellman,  pp.  124,  figs.  9.     Upsala. 
LAGERHEIM,  G.  > 

1883.  Bidrag  till  Sveriges  Algflora.     Ofversigt  af  Kongliga  Vetenskaps-Akademiens  Forhandlingar, 

Arg.  40,  No.  2,  pp.  37-78,  pi.  i.     Stockholm. 
1885.  Codiolum  polyrhizum  ett  bidrag  till  kannedomen  om  slagtet  Codiolum  A.  Br.     Ibid,   Arg. 

42,  No.  8,  pp.  21-31,  pi.  28. 
LAMARCK,  J.  B.  A.  P.,  and  DE-CANDOLLE,  A.  P. 

1805-1815.  Flore  Francaise.     Ed.  3.     Paris. 
LAMOUROUX,  J.  V.  F. 

1809.  Exposition  des  caracteres  du  genre  Dictyota  et  tableau  des  especes  qu'il  renferme.     Journal 

de  Botanique,  redige  par  une  societe  de  botanistes  (Desvaux),  tome  2,  pp.  38-44.     Paris. 

18093.  Memoire  sur  trois  nouveaux  genres  de  la  famille  des  Algues  marines.     Ibid,  tome  2,  pp. 

129-135,  pi.  5. 
i8o9b.  Memoire  sur  les  Caulerpes,  nouveau  genre  de  la  famille  des  Algues  marines.     Ibid,  tome  2, 

pp.  136-146,  pis.  6-7. 

18090.  Observations  sur  la  physiologic  des  Algues  marines  et  descriptions  de  cinq  nouveaux  genres  de 
cette  famille.  Nouvelle  Bulletin  Scientifique  de  la  Societe  Philomatique,  tome  i,  pp. 
330-333.  pl-  6,  fig.  2. 

1812.  Extrait  d'un  memoire  sur  la  classification  des  Polypiers  coralligenes,  non  entierement  pier- 

reux.     Ibid,  tome  3,  pp.  182-188. 

1813.  Essai  sur  les  genres  de  la  famille  des  Thalassiophytes  non  articulees.     Annales  du  Museum 

national  d'Histoire  Naturelle  de  Paris,  tome  20,  pp.  21-47,  II5~I39»  267-293,  pis.  7-13. 
Paris. 

1816.  Histoire  des  polypiers  coralligenes  flexibles.     Caen. 
LB  Jous,  A. 

1863.  Liste  des  algues  marines  de  Cherbourg.     Paris. 
LEWIS,  I.  F. 

1909.  The  life  history  of  Griffithsia  Bornetiana.     Annals  of  Botany,  vol.  23,  pp.  639-690,  pis.  49-53. 

1910.  Periodicity  in  Dictyota  at  Naples.     Botanical  Gazette,  vol.  50,  pp.  59-64.     Chicago. 

1912.  Alternation  of  generations  in  certain  Florideae.     Botanical  Gazette,  vol.  53,  pp.  236-242. 

Chicago. 
1914.  The  seasonal  life  cycle  of  some  red  algae  at  Woods  Hole.     Plant  World,  vol.  17,  pp.  31-35. 

Baltimore. 
LINK,  H.  F. 

1820.  Epistola  de  Algis aquaticis  in  genera  disponendis,  in  Nees  von  Esenbeck,  C.  G.    Horae  physicae 

Berolinenses  collects  ex  symbolis  virorum,  pp.  3-8,  pl.  i.     Bonn. 
LINNAEUS,  C. 

1737.  Genera  Plantarum.     Ed.  i.    Leyden. 

1753.  Species  Plantarum.     Ed.  i.     2  vols.     Stockholm. 

1755.  Flora  Suecia.     Ed.  2.     Stockholm. 

1758.  Systema  Naturae.    «Ed.  10.     Stockholm. 

1765.  Systema  Naturae.     Ed.  12.     Stockholm. 


MARINE  ALGJQ  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  545 

LYNGBYE,  H.  C. 

1819.  Tentamen  Hydrophytologiae  Danicae.     Copenhagen. 
MARTIUS,  K.  F.  P.  von. 

1828-1834.  Icones  plantarum  cryptogamicarum,  quas  in  itinere  annis  1817-1820  per  Brasiliam  in- 

stituto  collegit  et  descripsit.     Mtinich. 
18333.  Flora  Brasiliensis.     Vol.  i.     Stuttgart. 
MAZ£,  H.,  and  SCHRAMM,  A. 

1870-1877.  Essai  de  classification  des  algues  de  la  Guadeloupe.     Basse-Terre. 
MENEGHINI,  G. 

1838.  Cenni  sulla  organografia  e  fisiologia  delle  Alghe.     Nuovi  saggi  della  accademeia  di  scienze, 

lettre  ed  arti,  torn.  4,  pp.  324-388.     Padua. 
MEYEN,  F.  J.  F. 

1838.  Jahresbericht  iiber  die  Resultate  der  Arbeiten  im  Gebiete  der  physiologishen  Botanik  wahr- 
end  des  Jahres  1836.     Archiv  fur  Naturgeschichte  (Wiegmann),  Jahrg.  4,  Bd.  2,  pp.  1-186. 
Berlin. 
MOHR,  D.  M.  H. 

1810.  Bemerkungen  iiber  die  Rothischen  Rivularien,  in  Weber,  Beitrage  zur  Naturkunde,  Bd.  2, 

P-  343.  ff. 
MONTAGNE,  C. 

1837.  Centurie  des  plantes  cellulaires  exotiques  nouvelles.     Annales  des  Sciences  Naturelles. 

Botanique,  ser.  2,  tome  8,  pp.  345-370.     Paris. 
1838-1842.  Plantes  cellulaires,  in  Sagra,  Ramon  de  la,  Histoire  physique,  politique  et  naturelle  de 

1'ile  de  Cuba:  botanique.     Paris. 
1849.  Sixieme  Centurie  de  plantes  cellulaires  nouvelles,  Decades  III  d  VI.     Annales  des  Sciences 

Naturelles.     Botanique,  ser.  3,  tome  n,  p.  32,  ft".     Paris. 
MOORE,  GEORGE  T. 

1918.     Algological  notes.     III.  A  wood-penetrating  alga,   Gomontia  lignicola,  n.  sp.     Annals  of 

the  Missouri  Botanical  Garden,  vol.  5,  pp.  211-224,  pis.  13-15.     St.  Louis. 
NAGELI,  C. 

1844.  Herposiphonia.     Zeitschrift  fur  wissenschaftliche  Botanik,  Bd.  i,  pp.  238-256,  pi.  8.     Zurich. 
1849.  Gattungen  einzelliger  Algen  physiologisch  und  systematise!!  bearbeitet.     Neue  Denckschriften 
der  allgemeinen  schweizerischen  Gesellschaft  fur  die  gesammten  Naturwissenschaften, 
(Nouveaux  memoires  de  la  Societe  Helvetique  des  sciences  naturelles.),  Bd.  X. 
1861.  Beitrage  zur  Morphologic  und   Systematik  der  Ceratniaceae.     Sitzungsberichte  der  konig- 
lichen  bayerischen  Akademie  der  Wissenschaften  zu  Miinchen,  Jahrg.  1861,  Bd.  2,  pp. 
297-415,  i  pi. 
OLTMANNS,  F. 

1904—1905.  Morphologic  und  Biologic  der  Algen.     2  vols.     Jena. 
PHILIPPI,  PH. 

1837.  Beweiss  dass  die  Nulliporen  Pflanzen  sind.     Archiv  fur  Naturgeschichte  (Wiegmann),  Jahrg. 

3,  Bd.  i,  pp.  387-393.  pl-  9.  figs.  2-6.     Berlin. 
RABENHORST,  L. 

1860.  Die  Algen  Sachsens.     Dec.  5.     Dresden. 
RADCLIFFE,  LEWIS. 

1914.  The  offshore  fishing  grounds  of  North  Carolina.     Economic  Circular  No.  8,  U.  S.  Bureau  of 

Fisheries,  6  pp.     Washington. 
REED,  MINNIE. 

1907.  The  economic  seaweeds  of  Hawaii  and  their  food  value.     Annual  report  of  the  Hawaii  Agri- 
cultural Experiment  Station  for  1906,  pp.  61-88,  pis.  4-7. 
REINBOLD,  TH. 

1893.  Die  Phaeophyceae  (Brauntange)  der  Kieler  Fohrde.     Schriften  des  naturwissenschaftliche 

Vereins  fur  Schleswig-Holstein,  Bd.  10,  pp.  21-59. 
REINKE,  J. 

1879.  Zwei  parasitische  Algen.     Botanische  Zeitung,  Jahrg.  37,  pp.  473~478,  pl.  6.     Berlin. 
ROSENVINGE,  L.  KOLDERUP. 

1909.  The  marine  alga  of  Denmark,  Part  i.     Det  Kongelige  Danske  Videnskabernes  Selskabs 
Skrifter,  ?te  Raekke,  Naturvidenskabelig  og  mathematisk  Afdeling,  VII.  i.    Copenhagen. 


546  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

ROTH,  A.  W. 

1797-1806.  Catalecta  Botanica.     Leipzig. 

1797.  Fasc.  i. 

1800.  Fasc.  2. 

1806.  Fasc.  3. 
SACHS,  J. 

1874.  Lehrbuch  der  Botanik.     Ed.  4. 
SAUNDERS,  DE  A. 

1901.  The  algae,  in  Papers  from  the  Harriman  Alaska  Expedition.     Proceedings  of  the  Washington 

Academy  of  Sciences,  vol.  3,  pp.  391-486,  pis.  43-62.     Washington. 
SAUVAGEAU,  C. 

1892.  Sur  quelques  algues  pheosporees  parasites.     Journal  de  Botanique,  tome  6,  pp.  i-io,  36-44, 

55-59,  7,6-80,  90-96,  97-106,  124-131,  pis.  1-4.     Paris. 
SCHMITZ,  FR. 

1889.  Systematische  Ubersicht  der  bisher  bekannten  Gattungen  der  Florideen.     Flora.     Jahrg,  72 
(Neue  Reihe,  Jahrg.  47),  pp.  435~456. 

1893.  Die  Gattung  Actinococcus  Kuetz.     Flora,  Bd.  77,  pp.  367-418,  pi.  7. 

i893a.  Die  Gattung  Lophothalia  J.  Ag.  Berichte  der  Deutschen  botanischen  Gesellschaft,  Bd.  n, 

pp.  212-232. 
SCHRAMM,  A.,  and  MAZE,  H. 

1865.  Essai  de  classification  des  algues  de  la  Guadeloupe.     Basse-Terre. 
SETCHELL,  W.  A. 

1915.  The  law  of  temperature  connected  with  the  distribution  of  the  marine  algae.     Annals  of  the 

Missouri  Botanical  Garden,  vol.  2,  pp.  287-305.     St.  Louis. 
SETCHELL,  W.  A.,  and  GARDNER,  N.  L. 

1903.  Algse  of  Northwestern  America.     University  of  California  Publications,  Botany,  vol.  i,  pp. 

165-418,  pis.  17-27.     Berkeley. 
SMITH,  HUGH  M. 

1905.  The  seaweed  industries  of  Japan.     The  utilization  of  seaweeds  in  the  United  States.    Bulletin, 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  Fisheries  for  1904,  vol.  XXIV,  pp.  133-181,  pis.  1-5.     Washington. 
SouER,  A.  J.  J. 

1847.  Memoire  sur  deux  Algues  Zoosporees  devant  former  un  genre  distinct,  le  genre  Derbesia. 

Annales  des  Sciences  Naturelles.     Botanique,  ser.  3,  tome  7,  pp.  157-166,  pi.  9.     Paris. 
STACKHOUSE,  J. 

1795-1801.  Nereis  Brittanica.     Bath. 
SUMNER,  F.  B.,  OSBURN,  R.  C.,  COLE,  L.  J.,  and  DAVIS,  B.  M. 

1913.  A  Biological  survey  of  the  waters  of  Woods  Hole  and  vicinity.     Bulletin,  U.  S.  Bureau  of 

Fisheries  for  1911,  vol.  XXXI,  2  parts.     Washington. 
SVEDELIUS,  N. 

1908.  tiber  den  Bau  und  die  Entwicklung  der  Florideengattung  Martensia.     Kongliga  Svenska 

Vetenskapsakademiens  Handlingar,  Bd.  43,  pp.  i-ioi,  pis.  1-4.     Stockholm. 
1912.  tiber  die  Spermatienbildung  bei  Delesseria  sanguinea.     Svensk  Botanisk  Tidskrift,  Bd.  6, 

pp.  239-265,  pis.  5-6.     Stockholm. 

1915.  Zytologisch-entwicklungsgeschichtliche  Studien  iiber  Scinaia  furcellata.     Ein  Beitrag  zur 
Frage  der  Reduktionsteilung  der  nicht  tetrasporenbildenden  Florideen.     Nova  Acta  Regiae 
Societatis  Scientiarum  Upsaliensis,  ser.  4,  vol.  4,  No.  4,  pp.  1-55.     Upsala. 
THURET,  G. 

1850.  Recherches  sur  les  Zoospores  des  Algues  et  les  Antheridies  des  Cryptogames.     Annales  des 
Sciences  Naturelles.     Botanique,  ser.  3,  tome  14,  pp.  214-260,  pis.  16-31.     Paris. 

1875.  Essai  de  classification  des  Nostochinees.     Ibid,  ser.  6,  tome  i,  pp.  372-382. 
TILDEN,  JOSEPHINE. 

1910.  The  Myxophycese  of  North  America  and  adjacent  regions.     Minnesota  algae,  vol.  i,  Report  of 

the  Survey.     Botanical  Series.     VIII.     Minneapolis. 
TURNER,  D. 

1802.  A  synopsis  of  the  British  Fuci.     Yarmouth. 

1808-1819.  Fuci,  sive  Plantarum  Fucorum  Generi  a  Botanicis  ascriptarum  Icones  Descriptiones  et 

Historia.    4  vols.    London. 


MARINE   ALGJS  OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C.  547 

TURPIN,  P.  J.  F. 

1827.  In  Dictionnaire  des  Sciences  Naturelles  (Levrault).     Tome  50. 
VAUCHER,  J.  P. 

1803.  Histoire  des  Conferves  d'eau  douce.     Geneva. 
VlCKERS,  A. 

1905.  Liste  des  algues  marines  de  la  Barbade.     Annales  des  Sciences  Naturelles.     Botanique,  ser.  9, 
tome  i,  pp.  45-66.     Paris. 

1908.  Phycologia  Barbadensis.     Paris. 
WALLROTH,  F.  G. 

1833.  Flora  cryptogamica  Germanise.     Pars  2.     Nuremberg. 
WEBER,  F.,  and  MOHR,  E.  M.  H. 

1804.  Naturhistorische  Reise  durch  einen  Theil  Schwedens.    Gottingen. 
WHEELER,  ALVIN.S. 

1910.  Composition  of  sea  waters  near  Beaufort,  N.  C.     Journal  of  the  American  Chemical  Society, 

vol.  32,  pp.  646-649.     Easton,  Pa. 
WILLIAMS,  J.  LLOYD. 

1904.  Studies  in  the  Dictyotaceae.     I.  The  cytology  of  the  tetrasporangium  and  the  germinating 

tetraspore.     Annals  of  Botany,  vol.  18,  pp.  141-160,  pis.  9-10. 

19043.  Studies  in  the  Dictyotaceae.     II.  The  cytology  of  the  gametophyte  generation.     Ibid,  pp. 
183-204,  pis.  12-14. 

1905.  Studies  in  the  Dictyotaceae.     III.  The  periodicity  of  the  sexual  cells  in  Dictyota  dichotoma. 

Ibid,  vol.  19,  pp.  531-560. 
WOLFE,  J.  J. 

1913.  Alternation  of  generations  in  Padina.     Science,  N.  S.,  vol.  37,  p.  993.     New  York. 

1914.  Ibid,  vol.  40,  p.  417. 

1918.     Alternation  and  parthenogenesis  in  Padina.     Journal  of  the  Elisha  Mitchell  Scientific 

Society,  vol.  34,  pp.  78-109. 
WOLLE,  F. 

1887.  Fresh- water  algae  of  the  United  States.     Bethlehem,  Pa. 
WOODWARD,  T.  J. 

1794.  Description  of  Fucus  dasyphyllus.     Transactions  of  the  Linnaean  Society  of  London,  pp. 

239-241,  pi.  23,  f.  1-3.     London. 
1797.  Observations  upon  the  generic  character  of  Ulva,  with  descriptions  of  some  new  species. 

Transactions  of  the  Linnaean  Society  of  London,  vol.  3,  pp.  46-58.     London. 
WULFEN,  F.  X. 

1789.  Plantae  rariores  Carinthiacae,  part  2,  in  Jacquin,  N.  J.,  Collectanea  ad  Botanicam,  Chemiam 

et  Historiam  naturalem  spectantia,  vol.  3,  p.  146  ff. 

1803.  Cryptogamica  aquatica.     Roemer's  Archiv  fur  Botanik,  Bd.  3,  pp.  1-64,  pi.  i. 
YENDO,  K. 

1902.  Uses  of  marine  algae  in  Japan.     Postelsia.     1901,  pp.  1-18,  pis.  1-3.     St.  Paul,  Minn. 
1914.  Notes  on  algae  new  to  Japan.     The  Botanical  Magazine,  vol.  28,  pp.  263-281.    Tokyo. 
ZANARDINI,  G. 

1839.  Sulle  Alghe.     Biblioteca  Italiana,  torn.  96,  pp.  131-137.     Milano. 

1840.  Sopra  le  Alghe  del  Mare  Adriatico,  lettera  secunda.     Ibid,  torn.  99,  pp.  195-229. 

1841.  Synopsis  Algarum  in  Mari  Adriatico,  hucusque  collectarum  cui  accedunt  Monographia 

Siphonearum  nee  non  generates  de  Algarum  vita  et  structura  disquisitiones.     Memorie 

della  Reale  Accademia  delle  Scienze  di  Torino,  ser.  2,  torn.  4,  pp.  105-256. 
1847.  Notizie  intorno  alle  Cellulari  marine-della  lagune  e  de'litorali  di  Venezia.     Atti  dell'Imperiale 

Reale  Institute  Venetodi  Scienze,  Lettere  ed  Arti,  ser.  i,  vol.  6,  pp.  185-262. 
1858.  Plantarum  in  Mari  Rubro  hucusque  collectarum  Enumeratio.     Memorie  dell 'Imperiale  Reale 

Institute  Veneto  di  Scienze,  Lettre  ed  Arti,  torn.  7,  pp.  209-309,  pis.  3-14. 

EXSICCAT*. 

FARLOW,  W.  G.,  ANDERSON,  C.  L.,  and  EATON,  D.  C. 

1877-1889.  Algae  Americanae  Boreales  Exsiccatae  (A.  A.  B.  Ex.).     Cambridge,  Mass. 
COLLINS,  F.  S.,  HOLDEN,  I.,  and  SETCHELL,  W.  A. 

1895-1919.  Phycotheca  Boreali-Americana  (P.  B.-A.).     Maiden,  Mass. 


GLOSSARY. 


Acuminate,  tapering  gradually  to  a  point. 

Acute,  having  a  distinct  point,  but  not  greatly 
elongated. 

Adherent,  attached  more  or  less  closely. 

Adnate,  attached  by  growth,  grown  together. 

JEruginous,  the  blue-green  color  of  verdigris. 

Aggregated,  massed  together. 

Akinete,-  a  nonsexual  reproductive  cell  formed  by 
the  massing  of  the  contents  of  a  vegetative  cell, 
the  wall  of  the  mother  cell  thickening  and  func- 
tioning as  the  wall  of  the  akinete. 

Alternate,  placed  on  opposite  sides  of  a  stem  at  dif- 
ferent levels. 

Anastomose,  to  run  together  and  fuse  into  more  or 
less  of  a  network. 

Anastomosis,  the  union  of  filaments  or  tubes  with 
each  other. 

Ancipitate,  two  edged,  flattened  or  compressed. 

Antheri<Uum(pl.  antheridia} ,  the  organ  forming  male 
cells. 

Anticlinal,  perpendicular  to  the  surface. 

Apical,  at  or  near  the  apex  or  tip. 

Apiculum,  a  short,  sharp  point. 

Aplanospore,  a  nonsexual  reproductive  cell  formed 
by  the  massing  of  the  contents  of  a  vegetative  cell 
and  the  formation  about  this  of  a  new  cell  wall. 

Approximate,  situated  close  together,  but  not 
united. 

Arcuate,  curved  like  a  bow. 

Articulation,  the  joint  of  a  more  or  less  segmented 
structure . 

Assimilating  filaments,  filaments  borne  on  the  sur- 
face, containing  chlorophyll  (and,  usually,  other 
pigments) ,  and  carrying  on  the  process  of  photo- 
synthesis, used  especially  in  the  Phaeophycese  to 
distinguish  from  superficial,  colorless  filaments. 

Attenuate,  attenuated,  narrow  and  tapering. 

Austral,  southern,  usually  referring  to  the  Southern 
Hemisphere. 

Auxiliary  cell,  a  cell  in  the  Florideae  receiving  a 
nucleus  from  the  fertilized  egg  and,  as  a  result  of 
this,  forming  reproductive  spores. 

Axial,  relating  to  the  axis. 

Axil,  the  distal  (more  apical)  angle  between  the 
axis  and  an  organ  arising  from  it. 

Axillary,  growing  in  an  axil. 

Axis,  t»e  line  running  the  length  of  a  plant  around 
which  the  branches  are  borne. 
548 


Biciliate,  possessing  two  cilia. 

Bipartite,  divided  into  two  parts. 

Boreal,  northern,  usually  referring  to  the  Northern 

Hemisphere. 
Brood  bud,  a  specialized    multicellular  structure 

formed  from  a  vegetative  portion  of  a  plant  and 

serving  for  propagation. 

Caspitose,  growing  in  tufts. 

Calcified,  containing  a  deposit  of  lime. 

Callus,  an  abnormally  thickened  part,  usually  as  a 
result  of  a  wound. 

Calyptra,  a  cap,  used  for  the  thickening  of  the  outer 
wall  of  the  apical  cell  of  some  Myxophyceae. 

Calyptrate,  bearing  a  calyptra. 

Capillary,  slender,  like  a  hair. 

Capitate,  used  in  the  Myxophyceae  for  the  termina- 
tion of  a  filament  in  a  more  or  less  globose  head. 

Carpogenic  branch,  a  short,  specialized,  usually  3 
or  4  celled,  filamentous  branch,  occurring  in  the 
Florideae,  often  immersed  in  the  thallus,  and 
bearing  at  its  apex  the  female  organ,  carpogo- 
nium. 

Carpogonium,  the  female  organ  of  the  Rhodophy- 
ceae,  consisting,  in  the  Florideae,  of  a  swollen 
basal  portion  within  which  the  egg  is  borne,  and 
ahairlike,  apical  prolongation,  the  trichogyne. 

Carpospore,  a  spore  formed  in  the  Rhodophycese 
as  a  result  of  the  fertilization  of  the  carpogonium. 

Carpostome,  the  opening  in  the  sterile  jacket  in- 
closing the  carpospores  of  many  Florideae, 
through  which  the  carpospores  are  shed. 

Cartilaginous,  hard  and  tough,  having  the  texture 
of  cartilage. 

Caulescent,  possessing  a  stalk. 

Cellulose,  a  carbohydrate  forming  the  principal 
constituent  of  young  and  unaltered  cell  walls; 
e.  g.,  in  the  cotton  of  commerce. 

Chlorophyll,  the  green  coloring  matter  of  'plants. 

Chromatophore,  a  body  within  a  plant  cell  special, 
ized  to  contain  pigment. 

Cilium  (pi.,  cilia),  a  short,  whiplike  projection  of 
a  motile  cell  by'  means  of  which  the  cell  propels 
itself;  a  minute  outgrowth  from  a  plant. 

Clavate,  club  shaped,  thickened  toward  the  apex. 

Cla-viform,  club  shaped. 

cm.,  abbreviation  for  centimeter,  about  two-fifths 
of  an  inch. 


MARINE   ALGJE   OF   BEAUFORT,  N.  C. 


549 


Coalescent,  becoming  united  by  growth. 

Compacted,  closely  packed  or  pressed  together. 

Conceptacle,  a  superficial  cavity  opening  to  the 
surface,  within  which  reproductive  organs  are 
developed. 

Confervoid,  composed  of  unbranched  filaments, 
threadlike. 

Confluent,  blended  into  one. 

Conglobate,  collected  into  a  ball. 

Conic,  conical,  cone  shaped. 

Constricted,  narrowed,  contracted. 

Copulation,  the  union  of  sexual  cells  or  organs. 

Coriaceous,  leathery. 

Cortex,  the  tissue  of  a  more  or  less  solid  alga  lying 
beneath  the  epidermis,  between  this  and  the 
central  region,  medulla;  when  no  epidermis  is 
present,  the  outer  region  of  the  thallus  surround- 
ing the  medulla. 

Cortical,  belonging  to  or  occurring  in  the  cortex. 

Corticated,  provided  with  a  cortex. 

Corymb,  a  flat-topped  or  convex  cluster  with  the 
younger  parts  toward  the  middle. 

Corymbose,  occurring  in  corymbs. 

Crateriform,  cup  shaped. 

Crenate,  scalloped,  provided  with  rounded,  wavy 
teeth  or  notches. 

Cruciate,  a  method  of  division  of  a  tetrasporangium 
by  walls  at  right  angles  to  each  other,  all  of  the 
four  resulting  tetraspores  being  visible  in  one 
plane,  grouped  around  a  common  center. 

Crustaceans,  the  thallus  consisting  of  a  relatively 
thin  layer  closely  adherent  to  the  substratum 
and  of  brittle  texture. 

Cryptostoma  (pi.,  crypstostomata),  a  small  cavity 
sunk  in  the  thallus  and  bearing  only  hairs 
(paraphyses),  found  in  the  Fucaceae. 

Cuneate,  wedge  shaped. 

Cuticle,  the  structureless  layer  bounding  the  outer 
surface  of  many  plants. 

Cyathiform,  shaped  like  a  wineglass. 

Cylindric,  elongated  with  a  circular  cross  section. 

Cymose,  occurring  in  a  more  or  less  broad,  flat- 
topped  cluster,  with  the  younger  parts  toward 
the  periphery. 

Cystocarp,  a  fruit  produced  as  a  result  of  the  fer- 
tilization of  the  egg  in  the  carpogonium,  includ- 
ing the  mass  of  carpospores,  the  accessory  struc- 
tures, and  the  inclosing,  cellular,  protective 
structures,  found  in  many  of  the  Florideae. 

Cystocarpic,  bearing  cystocarps,  used  to  designate 
the  female  plant. 

Decompound,  divided  several  times. 

Decumbent,  reclining,  but  with  the  apex  ascending. 

Dentate,  provided  with  sharp,  toothlike  structures. 


Dichotomous,  a  method  of  branching  by  forking 
into  two  parts  of  approximately  equal  size. 

Dichotomy,  a  forking  into  two  parts. 

Diffluent,  becoming  separate. 

Dioecious,  bearing  male  and  female  organs  on  sep- 
arate plants. 

Discoid,  disklike,  having  a  flat,  rounded  shape. 

Discrete,  separate,  not  coalescent. 

Disporangium  (pi.,  disporangia],  a  sporangium 
whose  contents  are  divided  into  two  spores. 

Dissepiment,  a  partition. 

Distichous,  having  the  parts  borne  in  two  vertical 
rows,  usually  from  the  edges  of  a  more  or  less 
flattened  structure. 

Divaricate,  extremely  spreading. 

dm.,  abbreviation  for  decimeter,  about  4  inche3. 

Dorsal,  referring  to  the  upper,  or  back,  surface  of  a 
dorsi ventral  structure. 

Dorsi-ventral,  having  unlike  surfaces  corresponding 
to  back  and  front  or  upper  and  lower.  • 

Ectosarc,  the  homy  outer  covering  of  hydroids. 
Ellipsoid,  having  an  elliptical  shape. 
Elliptical,  oblong  with  regularly  rounded  ends. 
Endochrome,  the  coloring  matter  contained  within 

cells. 
Endophytic,  growing  within  the  tissue  of  another 

plant. 

Epidermal,  belonging  to  the  epidermis. 
Epidermis,  a  definite,  differentiated  layer  of  cells 

bounding  the  outer  surface  of  a  plant. 
Epiphytic,  growing  on  another  plant,  using  the  host 

only  for  attachment,  and  not  obtaining  material 

from  it. 

Eroso-denticulate,  having  minute,  irregular,  mar- 
ginal teeth,  the  margin  being  so  irregular  as  to 

appear  gnawed  or  bitten. 
Excenlric,  out  of  the  center,  one-sided. 
Exserted,  protruding  beyond  the  surface. 

False  branching,  a  type-of  branching  in  which  a 
cell  in  the  midst  of  a  filament  elongates  and, 
pushing  to  one  side,  continues  the  growth  in  a 
new  direction,  found  principally  in  the  Myxo- 
phyceae. 

Farinaceous,  rough  and  scaly  in  appearance. 

Fascicle,  a  close  cluster  of  stems  or  branches. 

Fascicled,  fasciculate,  borne  in  a  f asciclelike  manner- 

Fastigiate,  the  occurrence  of  stems  or  branches  in 
erect,  parallel  clusters. 

Fenestrate,  pierced  with  holes. 

Filamentous,  threadlike. 

Filiform,  long,  with  a  circular  cross  section. 

Fistulose,  hollow  throughout  its  length. 

Flabellate,  fan  shaped. 

Flabellum,  a  fan-shaped  structure. 

Flaccid,  limp,  not  rigid. 


550 


BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF   FISHERIES. 


Flagelliform,  like  the  lash  of  a  whip. 

Flexuous,  flexible,  easily  bent;  bent  alternately  in 

different  directions. 

Floccose,  occurring  in  small,  soft  tufts  or  masses. 
Foliaceous,  flat  and  expanded  like  a  leaf. 
Forcipate,  forked,   with  the  apices  approaching 

each  other,  like  a  pair  of  forceps. 
Fragmentation,  a  breaking  into  pieces. 
Fructification,  fruiting,  the  bearing  of  organs  of 

propagation  or  reproduction. 
Fucoxanthin,  a  brown  pigment  found  in  some  of 

the  Phaeophyceae. 

Furcate,  forked,  with  terminal  lobes  like  prongs. 
Fusiform,  spindle  shaped,  thick  in  the  middle  and 

tapering  toward  each  end. 
Fusoid,  somewhat  fusiform. 

Gametangium  (pi.,  gametangia),  an  organ  bearing 

gametes. 

Gamete,  a  sexual  cell. 
Ganglion  (pi.,  ganglia),  an  enlargement  caused  by 

the  fusion  of  separate  filaments,  or  an  enlarged 

portion  of  a  filamentous  structure  from  which 

smaller  filaments  radiate. 
Glaucous,  covered  with  a  bloom,  as  on  the  fruit  of 

the  plum. 

Globose,  nearly  spherical. 
Glomerulus  (pi.,  glomeruli),  a  roundish  cluster  of 

organs  closely  grouped  into  a  common  structure. 
Gonidangium  (pi.,  gonidangia),  a  specialized  cell 

bearing  gonidia. 
Gonidium  (pi.,  gonidia),  a  cell  formed  nonsexually 

and  slightly  specialized  for  propagation. 
Gonimoblast,  a  cluster  of  filaments  formed  as  a 

result  of  the  fertilization  of  the  egg  in  a  carpo- 

gonium,  some  of  whose  cells  become  changed 

into  carpospores,  found  in  the  Florideae. 
Gonimolobe,  one  of  the  lobes  into  which  the  goni- 

moblast  may  be  divided. 

Hermaphroditic,  bearing  male  and  female  organs  on 
the  same  individual. 

Heterocyst,  a  more  or  less  specialized  cell  which 
differs  in  appearance  from  the  other  cells,  used 
in  the  Myxophyceae  for  large  cells  occurring 
within  the  filaments  and  serving  to  break  these 
apart;  used  in  Melobesia  for  isolated  large  cells 
of  unknown  function. 

Heterogametes,  sexual  cells  in  which  the  members 
of  the  fusing  pairs  differ  from  each  other. 

Heter amorphous,  having  a  different  shape. 

Hormogonium  (pi.,  hormogonia),  a  multicellular 
portion  of  a  filament,  becoming  separate  and 
serving  for  propagation,  found  in  the  Myxo- 
phyceae. 

Hyaline,  colorless  or  translucent. 


Hydranth,   one  of  the   individuals  in   a  hydroid 

colony. 
Hymenium,  a  network  of  more  or  less  coalescent 

filaments  forming  a  surface  on  which  fruits  are 

borne,  a  fruiting  surface. 
Hypothallium,  the  ventral  (lower)  portion  of  a  flat 

thallus  that  is  differentiated  into  two  regions. 

Incised,  cut  sharply  into  the  margin. 

Indusium,  a  sterile  outgrowth  of  a  thallus  or  struc- 
ture covering  fruiting  organs. 

Integument,  the  outer  covering  of  an  organ  or  body. 

Intercalary,  situated  at  some  place  between  the 
apex  and  the  base. 

Intercellular,  between  the  cells. 

Internode,  the  space  between  two  nodes. 

Interpilar,  between  the  rows  of  hairs. 

Intricate,  entangled. 

Isogametes,  sexual  cells  in  which  the  members  of 
the  fusing  pairs  are  similar. 

Lacerate,  appearing  torn,  or  irregularly  cleft. 

Laciniate,  cut  into  narrow  lobes. 

Lamellose,  made  up  of  thin  plates  joined  into  a 

common  structure. 

Lamina,  the  flattened  portion  of  a  leaflike  structure. 
Lanceolate,  narrow,  and  tapering  toward  each  end. 
Linear,  narrow,  several  times  longer  than  wide. 
Lobate,  divided  into  or  bearing  lobes. 
Lobe,  a  division  of  an  organ  or  thallus. 

Medulla,  the  central  tissue  of  a  more  or  less  solid 
alga. 

Medullary,  situated  in  or  belonging  to  the  medulla. 

Mic.,  abbreviation  for  micron,  the  unit  of  micro- 
scopic measure,  the  one-thousandth  part  of  a 
millimeter. 

Midrib,  a  thickened  portion  running  midway  along 
a  flattened  thallus. 

mm.,  abbreviation  for  millimeter,  about  one 
twenty-fifth  of  an  inch. 

Moniliform,  like  a  string  of  beads. 

Monociliate,  having  a  single  cilium. 

Monoecious,  bearing  male  and  female  organs  on  the 
same  plant. 

Monopodial,  a  method  of  branching  in  which  there 
is  a  distinct  main  stem  running  to  the  tip  and 
lateral  branches  of  smaller  size  than  the  central 
axis. 

Monosiphonous ,  consisting  of  a  single  row  of  cells. 

Monosporangium,  a  sporangium  whose  entire  con- 
tents are  formed  into  a  single  spore. 

Monospore,  a  spore  formed  in  a  monosporangium. 

Monostromatic,  consisting  of  a  single  layer  of  cells. 

Moriform,  shaped  like  a  mulberry. 

Mucronate,  possessing  a  short,  straight  point. 


MARINE 


OF  BEAUFORT,  N.  C. 


551 


Multicellular ,  consisting  of  more  than  one  cell. 
Multifid,  divided  many  times  into  lobes  or  seg- 
ments. 
Multinucleate,  containing  more  than  one  nucleus. 

Nematheciform,  shaped  like  a  nemathecium. 

Nemathecium  (pi.  nemathecia)  a  wartlike  elevation 
of  the  surface  containing  organs  of  reproduction. 

Node,  a  joint  in  a  distinctly  segmented  stem. 

Nodule,  a  small  knot,  or  thickened,  dense  struc- 
ture. 

Nucleus,  a  differentiated  portion  of  the  living 
material  contained,  usually,  near  the  center  of 
each  cell;  the  central  mass  in  the  sexually 
formed  fruit  of  some  Florideae. 

Obconi-obovoid,  obovate,  but  more  narrowed  at  the 

narrower  (basal)  end. 
Obdeltoid,   shaped  like  the  Greek  capital  letter 

delta,   but  reversed,    with   the    narrower  part 

toward  the  base. 
Oblong,  longer  than  broad,  with  nearly  parallel 

sides. 
Obo-vaie,  reversed  ovate,  with  narrower  end  toward 

the  base. 

Obtuse,  blunt  or  rounded  at  the«end. 
Oogonium   (pi.    oogonia),   a    single-celled   female 

organ  bearing  one  or  more  eggs. 
Orbicular,  flat  with  a  circular  outline. 
Ovate,  ovoid,  egg  shaped. 

Palmate,  divided  into  lobes  arising  from  a  common 
base,  like  the  fingers  from  a  hand. 

Palmatifid,  divided  in  a  palmate  manner  almost  to 
the  base. 

Paniculate,  having  the  branches  or  parts  arranged 
in  a  loose  cluster. 

Papilla,  a  small,  short,  superficial  outgrowth. 

Papillate,  bearing  papillae. 

Paraphysis  (pi.  paraphyses),  a  sterile  filament  pro- 
jecting, usually,  from  the  surface  of  many  algae, 
usually  borne  in  clusters,  frequently  with  the 
fruiting  organs. 

Parasitic,  living  on  or  in  another  plant  or  animal 
and  obtaining  nourishment  from  it. 

Parenchymatous ,  consisting  of  loose  tissue,  comr 
posed  of  thin- walled  cells  of  fairly  uniform  di- 
ameter in  every  direction,  and  often  with  con- 
spicuous intercellular  spaces. 

Parietal,  situated  toward  the  wall,  away  from  the 
center. 

Partheno genetically,  applied  to  a  method  of  develop- 
ment in  which  an  egg  develops  without  fertiliza- 
tion. 

Patent,  spreading. 

Pectinate,  pinnately  divided  into  narrow  segments 
or  branches  set  close  together  like  the  teeth  of  a 
comb. 


Pedicel,  a  short  stalk  bearing  a  specialized  organ. 

Pedicellate,  borne  on  a  pedicel. 

Peduncle,  a  stalk  bearing  an  organ  or  a  group  of 
organs,  larger  than  a  pedicel. 

Penicillate,  shaped  like  a  pencil. 

Perforate,  pierced  through,  forming  a  hole. 

Pericarp,  the  differentiated,  sterile,  cellular,  pro- 
tective structure  inclosing  the  carpospores  and 
accessory  structures  in  many  Florideae. 

Pericentral,  applied  to  structures  grouped  around  a 
common  center  or  axis. 

Peripheral,  toward  the  circumference. 

Perithallium,  the  dorsal  (upper)  portion  of  a  flat 
thallus  which  is  differentiated  into  two  regions. 

Petiole,  the  stem  of  a  leaflike  structure. 

Phycoerythrin,  a  red  pigment  occurring  in  the 
Rhodophyceae. 

Piliferous,  bearing  hairs. 

Pinna  (pi.  pinnae),  one  of  the  divisions  of  a  pin- 
nately divided  structure. 

Pinnate,  having  branches  or  parts  on  opposite  sides 
of  a  common  stem  or  axis,  as  in  a  feather. 

Pinnulate,  applied  to  a  structure  which  has  pinnae 
pinnately  divided,  twice  pinnate. 

Pinnule,  one  of  the  secondary  divisions  of  a  pin- 
nulately  divided  structure. 

Placenta,  a  more  or  less  conspicuous  structure 
serving  as  the  place  of  origin  and  attachment  for 
the  gonimoblasts  in  the  sporocarp  of  many 
Florideae. 

Plumose,  featherlike  or  plumelike. 

Plurilocular,  a  term  used  for  the  reproductive 
organs  of  many  Phaeophyceae  which  are  divided 
by  walls  into  numerous  compartments,  produc- 
ing a  single  motile  reproductive  cell  in  each 
compartment. 

Polychotomous,  a  method  of  branching  in  which  the 
thallus  is  divided  into  many  parts  of  more  or  less 
equal  size. 

Polygonal,  having  many  angles  and  many  sides. 

Polysiphonous,  consisting  of  several  coherent  lon- 
gitudinal rows  of  cells. 

Polyspores,  many  spores  borne  in  one  sporangium. 

Procarp,  the  complex  female  organ  of  many  Flori- 
deae, consisting  of  the  carpogonium,  one  or  more 
auxiliary  cells,  and  other  accessory  cells. 

Proliferation,  an  outgrowth. 

Proliferous,  bearing  outgrowths. 

Propagulum  (pi.  propagula),  a  many-celled  body, 
formed  from  a  vegetative  portion  of  a  plant,  and 
specialized  for  propagation. 

Pseudo-,  used  as  a  prefix  to  denote  having  the  ap- 
pearance of  possessing  a  quality  but  not  pos- 
sessing it. 

Puliiinate,  cushion  shaped. 

Pyramidal,  pyramid  shaped. 


552 


BULLETIN   OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 


Pyrenoid,  a  small,  definite,  rounded,  colorless  body 
occurring  in  a  chloroplast  and  serving  as  a  center 
of  starch  accumulation. 

Pyriform,  pear  shaped. 

Quadrate,  four  sided,  square. 

Racemose,  arranged  in  a  cluster  of  branches  along  a 
central  axis,  the  branches  becoming  of  approxi- 
mately equal  lengths  and  having  the  older  ones 
below. 

Radial,  radiating,  as  from  a  center. 

Ramulus  (pi.,  ramuli),  a  small  branch. 

Receptacle,  the  enlarged  fruiting  portion  of  the 
plant,  bearing  the  sunken  cavities  (concep- 
tacles),  in  the  Fucaceae. 

Reticulate,  forming  a  network. 

Rhizoid,  a  cellular  filamentous  outgrowth  serving 
as  an  organ  of  attachment. 

Rhizoidal,  pertaining  to  rhizoids. 

Rhizome,  a  creeping  portion  of  a  thallus  resembling 
a  horizontal  stem  and  giving  off  upright  stem- 
like  or  leaflike  branches. 

Rimose,  having  cracks  in  the  surface,  as  in  the  old 
bark  of  trees. 

Rotund,  rounded  in  outline,  but  a  little  inclined 
toward  oblong. 

Scutellate,  shaped  like  a  small  platter. 

Secund,  bearing  branches  or  organs  on  only  one 
side  of  an  axis. 

Septate,  bearing  septa. 

Septum  (pi.,  septa),  a  partition. 

Seriate,  arranged  in  series  or  rows. 

Serrate,  bearing  numerous  short,  sharp,  marginal 
teeth,  like  those  of  a  saw. 

Serration,  the  bearing  of  serrate  teeth. 

Sessile,  borne  directly  on  the  axis,  not  on  a  stalk. 

Setaceous,  very  slender  and  rigid,  bristlelike. 

Silique,  the  peculiar  pod  of  the  mustard  family. 

Sinus,  the  more  or  less  acute  angle  formed  by  the 
division  of  a  thallus  into  approximately  equal 
parts. 

Sorus  (pi.,  sori),  a  definite  cluster  of  reproductive 
organs. 

Spatulate,  oblong,  with  the  basal  end  attenuated, 
like  a  spatula. 

Spermatangium  (pi.,  spermatangia) ,  a  more  or  less 
specialized  organ  bearing  male  cells. 

Spermatium  (pi.,  spermatia),  a  nonmotile  male  cell, 
occurring  in  the  Rhodophyceae. 

Sporangiferous,  bearing  sporangia. 

Sporangium  (pi.,  sporangia),  a  specialized  organ 
bearing  spores  formed  nonsexually. 

Spore,  a  cell  specialized  for  propagation  and  cap- 
able, without  fusion  with  any  other  cell,  of  grow- 
ing into  a  new  plant. 


Sporocarp,  a  fruit  produced  as  a  result  of  the  fer- 
tilization of  the  egg  in  the  carpogonium,  includ- 
ing the  carpospores  and  the  accessory  structures, 
occurring  in  the  Florideae. 

Stellate,  star  shaped. 

Stichidium  (pi.,  stichidia),  a  specialized  branch 
bearing  tetrasporangia,  occurring  in  a  few  Flor- 
ideae. 

Stipe,  the  narrow,  stemlike  stalk  by  which  a  flat- 
tened thallus  is  attached. 

Stipitate,  possessing  a  stipe. 

Stolon,  a  horizontal,  stemlike  portion  which,  at- 
taching itself  and  becoming  separate  from  the 
parent,  forms  a  new  plant. 

Sub-,  used  as  a  prefix  to  denote  somewhat,  to  a 
limited  degree,  as  subacute;  used  as  a  prefix  to 
denote  under,  as  subcortex. 

Substratum,  the  underlying  substance  on  which  a 
plant  is  growing. 

Subulate,  subuliform,  awl  shaped,  long,  slender, 
and  pointed. 

Sympodial,  having  an  arrangement  where  each 
branch  forms  a  part  of  the  main  axis,  the  result- 
ing axis  thus  being  formed  partly  from  the 
branches,  but  resembling  a  simple  axis. 

Synonym,  an  incorrect  name  used  for  a  species 
which  has  a  correct  name. 

Taxonomic,  referring  to  the  classification  of  plants 
according  to  their  relationships. 

Terete,  cylindrical  and  usually  tapering,  circular 
in  cross  section. 

Tetrahedral,  four  sided,  used  especially  with  refer- 
ence to  apical  cells,  and  sometimes  to  tetra- 
sporangia which  are  triangularly  divided. 

Tetrasproangium  (pi.,  tetrasporangia),  a  sporan- 
gium whose  contents  are  divided  into  four  spores, 
occurring  in  the  Floridese  and  the  Dictyotaceae. 

Tetraspore,  one  of  the  four  spores  formed  in  a  tetra- 
sporangium. 

Tetrasporic,  bearing  tetraspores,  frequently  used 
with  the  same  meaning  as  asexual. 

Thallus,  a  plant  body  not  distinctly  differentiated 
into  stem  and  leaf. 

Tortuous,  bent  or  twisted  in  different  directions. 

Torulose,  cylindrical,  with  swollen  portions  at  in- 
tervals, somewhat  moniliform. 

Triangular,  a  method  of  division  of  a  tetrasporan- 
gium  by  four  walls  formed  in  different  planes  and 
meeting  at  the  center,  three  of  the  resulting 
tetraspores  usually  being  visible  on  a  single 
surface,  each  appearing  triangular  in  shape. 

Trichoblast,  a  filamentous,  lateral  outgrowth  con- 
sisting of  a  single  row  of  cells,  usually  much 
branched,  borne  on  the  surface  of  a  thallus. 


MARINE  ALG^E  OF  BEAUFORT,  N.  C. 


553 


Trichogyne,  the  slender  prolongation  of  the  female 
organ  (carpogonium)  of  the  Florideae  with  which 
the  male  cell  fuses  as  the  beginning  of  fertilization. 

Trichome,  any  hairlike  outgrowth  from  the  surface- 

Trichothallic ,  a  method  of  growth  in  a  thallus  bear- 
ing apical  hairs  by  cell  divisions  at  the  bases  of 
the  hairs  between  these  and  the  wider  part  of 
the  thallus. 

Trichotomous,  a  method  of  branching  by  forking 
into  three  approximately  equal  parts. 

Truncate,  appearing  as  if  cut  off  at  the  end. 

Turgid,  distended  by  the  pressure  due  to  the  cell 
contents. 

Undulate,  wavy. 

Uniaxial,  having  a  single  primary  axis. 

Unilateral,  one  sided ,  borne  on  or  turned  to  one  side . 

Unilocular,  a  term  used  for  the  sporangia  of  many 
Phaeophycese  which  are  not  divided  into  sep- 
arate compartments,  but  produce  numerous  mo- 
tile spores  in  the  single  cavity  of  the  sporangium. 

Unisexual,  bearing  the  organs  of  only  one  sex  on  a 
single  individual. 

Urceolate,  pitcherlike. 


Vacuole,  a  cavity  in  the  living  material  of  cells, 

containing  a  clear,   watery  solution,   the  cell 

sap. 
Ventral,  referring  to  the  lower,  or  front,  surface  of 

a  dol-si ventral  structure. 

Verrucose,  appearing  as  if  having  warts,  warty. 
Verticillate,  arranged  in  a  whorl  of  similar  parts 

around  an  axis. 

Vesicle,  a  small,  bladderlike  structure  or  cavity. 
Vesicular,  possessing  vesicles. 
Virgate,   long,    slender,    and   unbranched,    wand 

shaped. 

Zonate,  a  method  of  division  of  a  tetrasporangium 
by  three  walls  in  the  same  plane,  all  four  result- 
ing tetraspores  being  visible  from  the  surface, 
lying  in  a  single  row. 

Zonation,  the  superficial  marking  of  a  thallus  by 
concentric  lines. 

Zoo  spore,  a  motile  spore. 

Zygote,  the  cell  formed  by  the  fusion  of  two  sexual 
cells. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES. 

PLATE  LXXXIV:  i.    Cladophora  crystatttnaXlli.      2.   Udotea  cyathiformisXi  i/io.      3.    Udotea  cyathi- 

formisX4/S  circ.     4.  Bryopsis  plumosaX6o[6j. 

PLATE  LXXXV:  i.  Codium  tomentosumXiJ6.     2.  Codium  decorticatumX8l2'j  circ. 
PLATE  LXXXVI:  i.  PetaloniafasciaXzilsocirc.     2-  Rosenvingea  orientalisX 3/8  circ. 
PLATE  LXXXVII:  i.  Castagnea  zosterceXjilioo.     2.  Stilophora  rhizodesXisIsS  circ. 
PLATE  LXXXVIII:  i  and  2.  Leathesia  difformisX^li  circ.     3.  Sporochnus  pedunculatusX*li. 
PLATE  LXXXIX:  FucusvesiculosusX.2l$. 

PLATE  XC:  i.  Sargassum  natansX  1/4  circ.     2.  SargassumfilipendulaXi/3  circ. 
PLATE  XCI:  i.  Zonaria  fla-va,  bearing  Spermothamnion  investiensX2[3  circ.     2.    Zonaria   variegataX 

S/8circ. 

PLATE  XCI  I:  i.  Padina -vickersice  (type)  X 1/4  circ.     2.  PadinamckersiceXi/2. 
PLATE  XCIII:  i.  Spatoglossum  schraederiXifo  circ.     2.  Dictyopteris  polypodiodesXi/3  circ.   ^.Dictyop- 

teris  serrataX2/5  circ. 
PLATE  XCIV:  i.  Dictyota  dichotoma,  usual  form  from  Fort  Macon  jetty,  o,  male;  b,  femaleX2/5.     2.  a 

and  b,    Spatoglossum    schrcederiX 38/87;   c  and   <f,    Dictyota  dichotoma,   narrow  form  from  coral 

reefX38/87.    3.  Dictyota  dichotoma,  male,  bearing  proliferations  from  apicesXi/3- 
PLATE  XCV:  i.  Gelidium  coerulescensXs/S  circ.     2.  Gelidium  crinaleXi  3/5-     3-  Gymnogongrus  griffith- 

siaXi/z  circ. 
PLATE  XCVI:  i.  Agardhiella  tenera,  usual  formXiS/29.     2.  Agardhiella  ienera,  slender  form  from  coral 

reef  X 1/3  circ. 
PLATE  XCVII:  i.  Meristotheca duchassaingii;  a,  cystocarpic;  b,  tetrasporic,  bearing  Streblonema  in-vis- 

i&tfeX  11/28  circ.     2.  Meristotheca  duchassingiiXiil 36  circ. 

PLATE  XCVIII:  i.  Rhabdonia  ramosissimaXg/^6  circ.     2.  Eucheuma  gelidiumX 2/7  circ. 
PLATE  XCIX:  i.  Gracilaria  confervoides ,  cystocarpic X 2/5  circ.     2.  Gracilaria  multipartita,  from  harbor; 

a  and  6,  sterile;  c,  cystocarpic X 16/3 5  circ. 
PLATE  C:  i.  Hypnea  musciformis ,  type  i,  tetrasporic X 2/5  circ.     2.  Hypnea  musciformis,  type  2,  cysto- 

carpicX2/5  circ. 
PLATE  CI:  i.  Hypnea  musciformis,  type  3,  cystocarpic X 9/26.     2.  Hypnea  musciformis,  winter  condition 

X4/S-     3-  Rhodymenia  palmettaX2$[3g.     4.  Rhodymenia  palmettaXgl2&  circ. 
PLATE  CII:  i.  Agardhinula  brownea,  cystocarpicXy/12.     2.  Chrysymenia  agardhiiXi[2. 
PLATE  CIII:  i.  Chrysymenia  enteromorpha,  from  Bogue  Beach X 1/2  circ.     2.  Chrysymenia  enteromorpha 

from  coral  reef  X  2/5  circ. 
PLATE  CIV:  i.  Chrysymenia  uvariaX 7/12  circ.     2.  Lomen taria  uncinataX 3/4.     3.  Lomentaria  roseaXi/3 

circ.     4.  ChampiaparvulaXblj. 
PLATE  CV:  Nitophyllum  medium;  i.  Sterile,  densely  branched X 3/7  circ.     2.  Type,   veins  evident, 

tetrasporangial  sori  in  rather  irregular  linesXi/3  circ.     3.  Veins  conspicuous,  tetrasporangial  son 

in  unusually  regular  lines  or  very  irregularX3/7  circ. 
PLATE  CVI:  i.  Grinnellia  americana,  tetrasporic X 3/7  circ.     2.  Laurencia  tuberculosa  var.  gemmiferaXsfs 

circ. 
PLATE  CVII:  i.  ChondrialittoralisXilzcirc.     2.  Chondria  dasyphylla,  winter  condition Xi/i.     3.  Chon- 

dria  tenuissima  var.  baileyanaXsl&.     4.  Chondria  dasyphyllaXsIS  circ. 
PLATE  CVIII:  i.  Chondria sedifolia,  cystocarpic X 3/5  circ.     2.  Chondria  sedifolia,  tetrasporicX 9/20  circ. 

3.  PolysiphoniahavanensisXjIiS-     4.  aandb,Polysiphoniadenudata;  c,  PolysiphoniaharveyiXio/ii. 
PLATE  CIX:   i.   PolysiphoniadenudataX4[n  circ.     2.  Polysiphonia  denudataX  14/17.      3.  Polysiphonia 

nigrescensX*$li6.     4.  Brongniartella  mucronataX  19/30. 

PLATE  CX:  i.  Herposiphonia  tenellaon  Gracilaria  multipartitaX  1 1 2  •     2.  Dasya  pedicellataX  29/56. 
PLATE  CXI:  i.  SpyridiajHamentosaXiolzi.    2.  Cerawittw  rubrumXilz  circ.     3.  Ceramium  strictumX 

7/iS- 

554 


MARINE  ALG^E  OF  BEAUFORT,  N.  c.  555 

PLATE  CXII:  i.  Halymenia decipiensXi/3  circ.  2.  Halymenia floresiaXi/2  circ.  3.  Halymenia  gelinaria 
X3/S-  4-  a,  Halymenia  gelinariaX 3! 7  circ.;  b,  Halymenia  fioridanaX  3!  7  circ.;  c,  Amphiroafragilis- 
simaXslj  circ.  5.  Undetermined  species,  No.  1X9/16. 

PLATE  CXIII:  i.  Grateloupia  filicinaXSli*  circ.  2.  Grateloupia  gibbesiiXi/3  circ.  3.  Cryptonemia 
crenulataX6/ii.  4  and  5.  Corallina  cubensis.  4.  Xi/i.  5.  X1  1/3. 

PLATE  CXIV:  i,  2,  and  3.  Padina  -vickersice;  i,  cross  section  of  thallus  and  oogonial  sorus,  oogonia 
almost  mature;  2,  cross  section  of  thallus  and  tetrasporangial  sorus,  showing  undivided  tetraspo- 
rangia;  3,  cross  section  of  thallus  and  antheridial  sorus,  antheridia  almost  matureXaya.  4.  Nito- 
phyllum  medium,  type,  cross  section  of  thallus  showing,  below,  edge  of  soral  thickening  composed 
of  three  cell  layers,  three  veins  shown  cut  across;  the  central  one  has  adjoining  portion  of  thallus 
three  cells  deep  with  irregular  thickenings  on  wallsX272.  5.  Nitophyllum  medium,  cross  section 
of  tetrasporangial  sorus,  showing  soral  thickening,  undivided  tetrasporangia,  and  veinsXsyz. 
6.  Corallina  capillaceaX 50, 

PLATE  CXV:  i  to  9.  Pfuzostroma  pusillum;  i,  margin  of  thallus,  showing  separate  creeping  filaments, 
plurilocular  sporangia,  hair,  etc.  X245;  2,  enlarged  detail,  showing  immature  plurilocular sporangium, 
chromatophores,  etc.  X 1040;  3,  mature  plurilocular  sporangium  in  obliquely  longitudinal  viewX67o; 
4,  mature  plurilocular  sporangium  viewed  from  above  (end  view)  X  670;  5,  margin  of  thallus  (more 
compact  than  that  shown  in  fig.  i),  with  unilocular  sporangia,  a  sorus  at  a  and  the  beginning  of  a 
sorus  at  6X245;  6,  enlarged  detail  of  thallus,  showing  chromatophores  and  unilocular  sporangia 
as  seen  from  aboveXio4o;  7,  young  unilocular  sporangium  viewed  from  aboveXio4o;  8,  the  begin- 
ning of  a  sorus  viewed  from  above X 1040;  9,  a  mature  sorus  of  unilocular  sporangia  viewed  from 
above X 1040.  10  to  16.  Derbesia  turbinata;  10,  apex  of  thallus  showing  a  young  lateral  branch X8i; 
n,  lateral  or  unequal  dichotomous  branchingXSi;  12,  dichotomous  branchingXSi;  13  to  16,  usual 
forms  of  sporangia X 1 62,  13  and  15  showing  pedicel  cells.  Drawings  by  M.  A.  Howe,  from  Howe 
and  Hoyt,  1916. 

PLATE  CXVI:  i.  Erythrocladia  recondita  on  Dictyota  dichotoma,  photograph  made  after  staining  with 
iodine,  showing  habit  of  plant  and  sporocarps  (the  larger  darker  cells) Xi6o.  2.  Erythrocladia 
•vagabunda  on  Dictyota  dichotoma,  photograph  made  after  staining  with  iodine,  showing  habit  of 
plant  and  sporocarps  (some  of  the  larger  cells)  Xi6o,  a  small  colony  of  E.  recondita  with  smaller 
darker  cells  shown  near  B  at  the  lower  right-hand  corner.  From  Howe  and  Hoyt,  1916. 

PLATE  CXVI  I:  i  to  5.  Erythrocladia  recondita;  i,  portion  of  thallus  near  margin  viewed  from  above, 
showing  outlines  of  protoplasts  and  of  pyrenoids  with  outlines  of  the  cortical  cells  of  its  host  X  670; 
2  and  3,  portions  of  cross  sections  of  endophyte  and  its  host,  showing  the  immersed  vegetative  cells 
and  the  more  or  less  exserted  spermatia  (spm.)X67o;  4,  portion  of  a  cross  section  showing  a  carpo- 
gonium  with  exserted  trichogyneX67o;  5,  portion  of  pseudoparenchymatous  thallus  viewed  from 
above,  showing  protoplasts  of  vegetative  cells,  spermatia  (spm),  carpogonium  (cpg),  and  sporocarps 
(spcp)X67o.  6  to  n.  Erythrocladia  vagabunda;  6,  portion  of  thallus  viewed  from  above,  showing 
outlines  of  protoplasts  and  of  pyrenoids  with  outlines  of  the  cortical  cells  of  its  hostX4i5 ;  7,  portion 
of  thallus  showing  three  vegetative  cells,  six  sporocarps  (spcp),  and  five  cavities  from  which  carpo- 
spores  have  been  discharged  X 670;  8  to  9,  portions  of  thalli  showing  vegetative  cells  and  sporocarps 
(spcp)X4is;  10,  a  single  carpospore  lying  on  the  surface  of  its  host,  in  the  outer  walls  of  which  it  is 
already  partially  immersedX67o;  n,  a  young  filament  (four-celled  stage)  viewed  from  aboveX4i5. 
12  to  17.  Microchcete  nana;  12,  a  young  filament,  prostrate,  but  beginning  to  turn  upward  at  apex, 
thickness  of  sheath  slightly  exaggerated  X  670;  13,  older  and  normally  curved  filament  showing 
two  basal  heterocysts  (not  common),  thickness  of  sheath  slightly  exaggeratedX67o;  14,  an  unusually 
straight,  apparently  mature  filamentX245;  15,  filament  showing  curve  of  a  frequent  formX24S; 
16  and  17,  apex  and  base  of  filament  shown  in  fig.  15  X67O.  Drawings  by  M.  A.  Howe,  from  Howe 
and  Hoyt,  1916. 

PLATE  CXVIII:  Acrochcetium  infestans;  i.  Filaments  of  the  usual  form  in  the  wall  of  a  hydroid,  with 
two  exserted  filaments,  only  the  protoplasts  being  shown  in  the  immersed  portions,  since  the  cell 
walls  are  almost  invisible  X  670.  2.  An  exserted  sporangium  sessile  on  an  interior  filament X 670. 
3.  An  exserted  filament  of  three  cells,  one  being  a  sporangium  and  another  probably  an  immature 
sporangium  X  670.  4.  An  exterior  filament  with  short  branches,  short  hairs,  and  a  single  lateral 
sporangium  X 670.  5.  A  single  typical  cell  of  an  interior  filament  showing  chromatophore,  pyre- 
noid,  etc.  X 1040.  6.  Exterior  filaments  showing  sporangia  in  terminal  clusters  and  a  single  lateral 


556  BULLETIN  OF  THE   BUREAU  OF  FISHERIES. 

sporangium  X670.  7.  Short  exterior  filamentsX67o.  8.  A  branched  exterior  filament  showing  lateral 
and  terminal  sporangia  (one  of  the  emptied  lateral  sporangia  is  apparently  being  refilled  or  regene- 
rated from  the  supporting  vegetative  cell)X67o.  9.  A  short  exterior  filament  showing  regeneration 
of  a  terminal  sporangium  X 670.  10.  Part  of  a  plant  showing  mode  of  branching  and  tortuous  course 
of  a  part  of  an  interior  filament,  etc.X67o.  n.  A  short  exterior  filament  bearing  immature  and 
emptied  sporangia X  670.  12 .  An  unusually  long  exterior  filament  showing  long  hairs  and  short  secund 
branchlets  (solitary  or  in  pairs) X67<x  Drawings  by  M.  A.  Howe,  from  Howe  and  Hoyt,  1916. 
PLATE  CXIX:  Acrochatium  affine;  i.  Spore  attached  to  margin  of  the  Dictyota  thallusX4i5-  2 .  A  spore 
that  has  developed  a  small  accessory  prostrate  basal  cell  and  is  also  beginning  to  send  up  an  erect 
filamentX4i5-  3-  Base  of  .a  mature  plant  showing  simple  basal  cell  and  two  erect  filaments,  each  of 
which  branches  from  its  lowest  cell  X4i  5.  4-  Base  of  a  similar,  though  larger,  plant  with  four  primary 
erect  filaments,  each  branched  at  its  base,  a  small  cystocarp  shown  at  a  X4I5-  5.  Base  of  a  plant 
showing  a  scarcely  enlarged  basal  cell,  short  creeping  basal  filaments,  and  a  single  erect  filament 
which  has  two  branches  from  its  lowest  cell  X4i5-  6.  A  vertical  section  through  the  base  of  a  plant, 
showing  a  few  small  accessory  cells  that  partly  cover  the  primary  basal  cellX4i5.  7.  Base  of  a 
plant  showing  accessory  basal  cells  and  three  coarse  and  three  slender  erect  filaments,  none  of  which 
branches  from  its  lowest  cellX4i5.  8.  Base  of  a  plant  with  accessory  basal  cells  and  erect  filaments 
of  various  sizesX4i5-  9-  Base  of  a  plant  that  has  developed  a  small  imperfect  basal  disk,  with  the 
original  spore  still  evidentX4i5-  10.  Optical  section  of  the  margin  of  the  Dictyota  thallus  showing 
base  of  a  young  plant  with  a  single  immersed  basal  cell  and  a  single  erect  filament  X4i  5.  1 1 .  Optical 
section  of  the  base  of  a  plant  showing  subpyriform  semi-immersed  primary  basal  cell  and  several 
superficial  smaller  secondary  cells,  some  of  which  send  up  erect  filamentsX4i5.  12.  Section 
through  the  margin  of  the  Dictyota  thallus  showing  single  subpyriform  basal  cell  with  penetrating 
foot X 41 5.  13.  Base  of  a  detached  plant  showing  primary  basal  cell,  its  penetrating  foot,  three 
erect  filaments,  and  two  small  accessory  basal  cellsX4is.  14.  Section  of  margin  of  the  Dictyota 
thallus  showing  four  basal  cells  of  approximately  equal  size  that  are  more  or  less  immersedX4i5. 
15.  A  sporangium  terminal  on  a  main  branch X 41 5.  16.  Sessile  lateral  sporangia X 41 5.  17.  A  spo- 
rangium on  a  one-celled  pedicelX4i5-  18.  Procarp  and  antheridiaX67o.  19.  An  older  procarp 
with  no  antheridia  apparent  in  its  vicinityX67o.  20.  A  cystocarp X 670.  21.  A  typical  cell  from 
one  of  the  coarser  filamentsX67o.  22.  A  typical  cell  from  one  of  the  more  slender  filaments X 670. 
Drawings  by  M.  A.  Howe,  from  Howe  and  Hoyt,  1916. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  LXXXIV 


T  I 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  LXXXV. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F1.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  LXXXVI. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  LXXXVII. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18 


PLATE  LXXXVIII. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATS  LXXXIX. 


Buu,.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  XC. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  XCI. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  XCII. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATS  XCIII. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  XCIV. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  XCV. 


Buu,.  U.  S.  B.  P.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  XCVI. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  XCVII. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  XCVIII. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  XCIX. 


\    \ 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  C. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  CI. 


v 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  CII. 


/<  /"  I .' 

/ 

*     v 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  CIII. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  CIV. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  CV. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  CVI. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  CVII. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  CVIII. 


• 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATS  CIX. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  CX. 


l>r 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  CXI. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  CXII. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  CXIII. 


V 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  CXV. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  CXVI. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


PLATE  CXVIII. 


PLATE  CXIX. 


BULL.  U.  S.  B.  F.,  1917-18. 


INDEX. 


[The  number  of  the  page  on  which  a  group  is  described  is  printed  in  heavy  type.    Names  used 

italics.] 


synonyms  are  printed  in 


Page. 

Ceramium  —  Continued.                                                        Page. 

affine  469.  470,  471,473,  474,  530,  531,  532 

fastigiatum  5  J4 

dufourii  392.400,469,470,471,472,474,529,^31,532 

strictum  393,  398,400,  514,515,  529,  53°,  53',  532 

infestans  411,469,473,474,530,531,532,535 

Chaetomorpha  397,398,412,424,427,534 

virgatulum  392,393.400,401,469,472,473,474,529,532 

virgatulum  f  .  luxurians  474 
virgatulum  f.  tenuissima  474 

brachygona  399,424,426,529,530,532 
linum  396,399,400,403,424,425,426,529,532 

C  crenulatus                                                                                 S" 

Actinococcus  .  .".  397,398,477,  535 
aggregatus  392,478,  529,  532 
A  egira  zosUra  44<> 
Agardhiella  39»,  393,  405,  478,  536 
coulteri  479 
tenera  392,393,396,398,400,401,403,474,479,481,529,530,532 
Agardhinula  487,488,  537 
brownese  488,  489,  530,  531,  532 
Amphiroa                                      523,  526,  537 

melagonium  424,  425,  426 
melagonium  f  .  rupincola.  393.398,400,424,425,426,529,531,532 
melagonium  f  .  typica  424 
olneyi  425 
sutoria  425 
Chaetophoraceae  418,  422 
Champia  392,  393,  396,  487,  492,  536 
parvula  392,393,396,398,400,403,492,493,529,530,532 

brasiliana  526,  527,  530,  531,  532 

corymbifera  473 

Bangia  393,  464,  536 

alsidii  465 

atropurpurea  var.  fuscopurpurea  4*4 

"...         . 

fuscopurpurea  393,398,464,  529,532 

'  "alula  f  tenuissima                                                           473 

T»                  •                                                                                                                                                                                                                         463,465 

V 

Bangiales                                              462,463 

Bostrychia            497,  506,  536 

Chlorospermea  407,  4 

rivularis  403,507,  530,  532 
Botryoglossopsis  495 

atropurpurea  499,  500,  529,  530,  532 

Brongniartella  397,497,505,  536 

mucronata               506,  510,  530,  532 

Bryopsidaceae  430,  431 
Bryopsis  431,  534 

littoralis  416,499,500,504,530,531,532 

plumosa  393,  398,  399,  400,  431,  529,  532 
Callithamnion  509,511,  530,  535 

sedifolia  392,394,399,401,499,501,529,530,532 
tenuissima  396,398,400,499,500,  513 

affine  
investiens  510 
lenormandi  47o 

Ckondriopsis  498 
dasyphila  5°° 
dasvphila  var.  sedifolia  soi 

tetragonum  5" 
riryatulum  473 
CaUtipkyllis  brcntmecB  488 
Callymenia  reniformis  520 

littoralis  
tenuissima  
tenuissima  var.  baileyana  
Chondrus  crispus  405,484 
Chordariaceae  436,445 

mediierranea  446 

Chroococcus  408,416,533 
turgidus  399,400,409,414,416,529,53* 

Caulerpa                             *34«  534 

Chrysymenia  395,487,489 

prolifera                                  434,530,531,532 

agardhii  489,490,519,520,530,532,537 

enteromorpha  490,530,532,536 

halymenioides  

ramosissima  

conferooides  .  .  .  .                   439 

uvaria                490,491,530,532,536 

INDEX. 


Chylodadia 

Page. 

Page. 
522  524,  538 

pustulatum  

392,  396,  399,  400,  401,  524,  529,  532 
416  S33 

V 

undnata  
Cladophora  
catenata  
crystallina  
fascicularis  
flexuosa  
prolif  era  
Cladophoraceae  

penicillata  
Dictyopteris  
polypodioides  
serrata  

Dictyota  389)392)394)395 
bartayresiana  
dichotoma  391,392, 
459,461,  466,467,470 
dichotoma  f  .  attenuata.  .  . 
dichotoma  f.  implexa  
dichotoma  f.  latifolia  
divaricata  
rariegata  

416,530,531,532 
454)  459,535 
378,400,459,529,531,532 
459,460,530,531,532 
>  397)  399,  402,  405,  454,  458,  460,  535 
461 
400,401,403,411,415,441,442,444, 
,  471,  473,  474,  508,  517,  529,  530,  532 
461 
461 
461 
461 
454 
435,454 

...   397,398.  4i2,424,427,429,43i)529»S34 
423)429 
400,428,  529,  531 
4°3>  428,  530,  531,  532 
393>  398,  428,  529,  532 
429,  530,  532 
423,«4 
408 

Codiaceas  
Codiolum  polyrhizum  .  . 
Codium  
decorticatum  
clongatum  
tomentosum.  .  391, 
Conferva  dCrea  

430,431 
43o 
393)394)  399)405)  431)  432,  534 
...    392,  393,  400,  403,  432,  433,  529,  530,  532 
433 
392,  393)395)  400,  403>  432,  433,  529,  330,  532 
42? 
466 

435,453 

488 

466 

Ectocarpaceae  
Ectocarpus  
confervoides  392 
confervoides  var.  siliculosit 
duchassaingianus  
mitchellae  
siliculosus  
solitarius  
•viridis  
Elackista  
sleilvlata 

436,442,  446 

—  402,403,437,438,439,529,534 

393,  398)  400,437,  438,  439,  529,532 
*  438 
399,  401,  437,  438,  439,  529,  530,  532 
392,  400,  401  ,  437,  438,  439,529,  532 
393)  398,  400,  437)  438,  439,  529,  532 
441 
438 
444 

chtlionoplastes  
crystallina  
denudata  
fascicularis  
flexuosa  Mueller  .  . 
ftexuosaWulien... 
f  us  co  pur  pur  ea  
linum  
melagonium  
niyrescens  
Prolifera  

428 
5°3 
428 

6 
4  4 

424 
504,  505 
429 
448 

444,  534 

rubra 

438 

Elachisteaceae  
Encceliaceae  
Endoderma  
viride  
Enteromorpha  
flexuosa  
intestinalis  

436,444 
436,442 
422,423,534 
423,  530,  532 
397)398,402,405,412,418,534 
393,398,400,419,421,529,533 
393-400,419,420,529,538 

slellulala  

Confervoidex  
Conjugatae  
Corallina  
capillacea  

418 
417 
523)527,  537 
527,  530,  531,  532 

516  522 

prolifera  392,  393 
Entodadia  viridis  
Entoderma  
Erythrocladia  
recondita  
vagabunda  
Erythrotrichia  
carnea  
ceramicola  
Eucheuma  
gelidium  
Eudexme  virescens  
Eu~Floride<z 

,  398,  400,  401,  403,  419,  424,  529,  532 
423 
423 
464,466,535 
....  392,466,467,529,530,531,532 
466,467,530,531,532 
392,464,466,535 
392,  400,  401  ,  456,  466,  470,  529,  532 
466 
478,481,536 
329,400,  401,  479,481,  529,  531,  532 

..  :  446 
467 

Cryptonernia  
crenulata  
lomation  
Cryptonemiales  
Cryptoneminae  
Cryptoneura  
Crypiophycea  
Cyanophycece  

516,521,537 
522,  530,  531,  532 
522 
468,515 
515 
495 
407 
407 
435)449 

C  dosporinae 

Dasya  
elegant  
mucr  onata  
pedicellata..  .  393, 
Dasyeae  
Dawsoniae  
Delesseria  
americana  
sanguinea  
Delesseriacese  
Derbesia  
turbinata  
Derbesiaceae  .... 

392)  393,  394,  395,  397,  496,  506,  507,  508,  536 
508 
506 
396,  398,  400,  403,  473,  474,  508,  529,  530,  532 
496 
495 
495 
495 

462,463,457 

Fucaceae  .-  

449 

Fucus  393 
bacciferus  
confervoides  
crinalis  
dasyphyllus  
fascia  
fUamentosits  
filicinus.... 

,  395,  397,  398)  399)  4O4)  4O5,  450,  535 
452 
483 
475 

482,493 
430  era 

430,  529,  531,  532 
430 

512 

521 

INDEX. 


Ill 


Fucus—  Continued.    • 
flavus  
floresius  
gnffithsicE  
multipartite*  
musciformis  
natans  
ovarius  
palmetto  
pedunculatus  
polypodioides  
prolifer  
rhizodes  
tenuissimus  
tomentosus  
vesiculosus  
Gelidiaceae  
Gelidium  
coerulescens  

comeum  
crinale  
Gigarttna  ienera  
Gigartinaceae  
Gigartinales  

Page. 

455 

Helminthocladiaceae  
Herposiphonia  
tenella... 

Page. 
468 
••••  394,397,399,496,507,536 
392,  400,  403  ,  507,  529,  530,  532 

477 

485 
452 

Heterokontse  
Hormogoneae  
Hulchinsia  tenella  
•vanegata  

40g  409 

507 
503 
397,398,410,413,534 
399,400,413,529,532 
413 

487 

Hydrocoleum  
lyngbyaceum  
Hydrocoleus 

449 

434 

••••    391,392,393.398,400,450,529,531,533 
468,  474 
397,  398,  402,405,  475,  476,  536 
392,393,398, 
399,  400,  403,  409,  413,  475,  476,  529,  530,  532 
476 
...  392,393,398,401,403,475,476,529,532 
479 
476 
468  476 

lyngbyaceus  .... 

Hypnea  374,392,393,394,395,397,399,402,405,483,485,536 
annata 
divaricata  ^ 
musciformis..  392,393,398,400,401,403,485,486,529,530,532 

Jsymeniafldbellata  

lania  capillacea  
cubensis  

Laminaria  fascia  
Laurencia  
baileyana  
gemmifero  
pinnatifida  
tuberculosa  
tuberculosa  var.  gemmifera.  .  . 
Laurentiae  
Leathesia  

443 

Gloeocapsa  
Gomontia  
polyrhiza  
Gomontiaceae  
Gongroceras  strictum  .  . 
Goniotrichum  
alsidii  

408 
429,534 
401,426,430,530,532 
423,429 

497,  498 
....   399,401,498,529,530,532 
496 

difformis  
tuberiformis  
Linckia  zostfra  

393,398,400,447,529,531,532 

392,464,465,  535 
392,  456,  465,  470,  529,  530,  532 

446 

523,525,538 
525,526,530,531,532 
525 

Gracilaria 

intermedium  
Litholhamnion  sejunclum  

compressa  484 
confervoides  374,  392,  399 
400,  401,  403,  40S»474>  483,  484,  485,  499,  SIS,  5*9,  53°,  533,  536 
dura  483 
multipartite  374,392,393, 
398,399,400,401,403,405,474,483,484,485,529,532,536,537 
multipartita  var.  angustissimi  403,484,504,530,532 
Grateloupia  516,  520 
filicina  400,  520,  521,  529,  530,  532,  537 

sejunctum  

525,526,530,531,532 

393,4  7,        .53 

uncinata  392,393,398,400,403,491,492,529,532 
Lyngbya  398,402,403,410,411,533 

confervoides  380,392,393,397,398,399,400,412,529,532 
Juliana  ..r-. 

Griffithsia  
Griffitsia  
Grinnellia  
americana  
Gymnogongrus  
griffithsiae  
Gymnosorus  variegatus 

Halarachnion  
floridanum  
ligulatum  

504,  509,  511,  530,  535 

...   399,400,412,413,529,532 
4" 

luteo-fusca  

392,393,  394,  395,  397,  494,  495,  537 
393,  398,  400,  403,  495,  529,  530,  532 

semiplena  

401,412,530,532 

392,  393,  398,  400,  477,  478,  529,  532 
454 

517 

Melobesia    . 

403,522,523,538 

caUithamnioidei  
farinosa  
farinosa  forma  callithamnioides 
lejolisii  
pustulata  

523 
523,524,530,532 
519,523,530,531,532 
524 

517 

381 

Haliseris  

460 

Meristotheca  
duchassaingii  
Mesogloia  zoslera;  
Microchaete  

478,479,537 
...   440,441,480,489,530,532 
446 
414,$33 
414,529,531,532 
410,413,533 

Ha/C  enia 

489,490,516,517 

agardhii  
decioiens 

517,5i8,  530,  531,  532,  536 

floresia  517,  518,530,  531,  532,  537 
floridana  490,  5i7,  5*8,  519,  520,  528,  530,  531,  532,  537 
floridana  forma  dentata  518 
gelinaria  490,517,518,  519,520,530,  531,532,537 
latifolia  519 
liyutaia  Si9 
159321°—  20  13 

M    "  clad           ter 

446 

IV 


INDEX. 


Myrionema  
leclancherii 

Page. 

445,  534 

Page. 

44* 

riparium  
riparium  var.  implexum.  . 
riparium  var.  validum.  .  .  . 
Rhodomelaceae  
Rhodophyceae  
382,384,406,407, 
Rhodophyllidaceas  
Rhodospermece  
Rhodymenia..  
palmetta  
Rhodymeniaceae  

393,400,426,427,529,535 
4-27 
427 
482,496 
374,379, 
462,  465,  496,  528,  529,  530,  532,  535 
476,478 
462 
394,487,537 
394,400,487,529,530,532 
482,487 
468,  482 

strangulans  393,  400,  445,  529;  532 
•vulgare  445 
Myxophyceae  373,374,379. 
380,  382,  384,397,  4°3,  406,  407,  412,  417,  465,  528,  529,  530,  532,  533 
Myxophykea  4°7 
NemalionacecB                  468 

468 

tftmal'     ' 

468 

Nitophyllum  
laceratum  
medium  395,400, 
NostocacetB  
Noitochacea  
Noitochineae  

Oosporea:  
Oscillaria  

395,  397,  494,  537 
495 
441,  446,  489,  494,  495,  529,  530,  531,  532 
414 
414 

482 

Rivulariacese  

409,416 

.-  417,435 

orientalis  381,  392,  400,  403,  443,  529,  530,  532 

Sargassum  389,397,399,405,450,451,527,530,534 
bacciferum  .'  452 
bacciferum  1.  angustum  452 

410 

Oscillatoria  
lutea  
nigro-viridis  
Oscillatoriaceae  

Padina  
dubia  
durvillaei 

410,533 

413 
399,410,529,532 
409,410 

389,392,394,395,397,399,454,455,535 
457,458 

396,  398,  400,  45  1,  452,  467,  470,  473,  474,  523,  526,  529,  532 
filipendula  f  .  contractum  453 
filipendula  var.  montagnei  451,  453,  530,  532 
filipendula  f  .  subedentatum  453 
ilicifolium  453 
marginatum  453 

gymnospora  

4S8 

sanctae  crucis  

458 

natans  

natans  f  .  angustum  
vulgare  
vulgare  var.  montagnei  
Schizomycetes  
SchizopkycecE  
Schizophyta  

452,530,532 
452 
453 
407 
407 
407 
468 
409,410,415 

ickersiae 

400,  456,  457,  458,  465,  466,  474,  501  ,  5  j8,  529,  530,  532 
Petalonia  '  392,  393,  399,  442,  443,  535 
fascia  392,393,398,400,443,446,474,329,532 
zosterifolia  443 
Phaeophyceae  .  374,379,382,384,406,407,435,528,529,530,532,534 
Phaeosporese  435,436 
Phaeostroma  437,  442,  534 

Scytonemaceae  

Siphonales  

4I8,430 

Ph&ozoosporiruz  
Phormidium  
PhyUitis  
fascia  
Plectonema  
battersii  
Polyopes  
Polysiphonia  394 
denudata  392 
fucoides  

400,403 
havanensis  
nigrescens  
pecten-veneris  
Undla  
•variegata  
Porphyra  
atropuTpurea  
laciniata  
leucosticta  
Protococcus  turgutus  

Rhabdonia  
ramosissima  
robusta  

Siphonocladiales  
Solieria  chordalis  
Spathoglossum  
schraederi  
Spatoglossum  
areschougii  
schroederi  
Spermothamnion  
investiens  
turneri  
Sphaerococcaceae  
Spirulina  
Spongodiacece  

4i8,423 
479 

4S9 
454,438,535 

*oo,  459,  529,  530,;;i3 
509,510,535 
395,  504,  510,  530,  531,  sn.-, 
TO 
482 
408,  409,  410,  411,  5  '0,  533 

4  6,44f 

4io,  411,  529,  533 
443 
443 
»  415,534 
409,410,414,415,530,531,532 
522 
,396,401,  497,  502,  506,  507,  508,  530,  536 
,  396,  400,  403  ,  502,  503,  504,  505  ,  529,  532 
505 
391,392, 
,470,474,  502,  503,  504,  505,  529,  531,  532 
395,502,503,530,531,532 
393  ,  396,  398,  400,  502  ,  504,  505,  529,  532 

Sporochnus  
bolleanus  
pedunculatus  
Spyridia  
clavata  
filamentosa  
Stephanokontae  
Stilophora  
rhizodes 

448,535 
J49 
449.529,  53-,  532 
442.510,572,536 
512,513,530,531.531 
401,  47i,  512,  53^r  532 
41? 
393,448,535 
393,  398,399,  400,  448,  529,  531  ,  53-f 
436,  447 

507 
-•  503 
392,393,402,405,464,537 
465 
465 
393,398,400,465,529,532 
409 

478,480,536 
480,  530,  531,  532 
479 

479 

Streblonema  
investiens  
invisible  
solitarium  

44i 
440,  441,  530,  531,  532 
440,441,529,531,532 

INDEX. 


Stypopodium  lobatun 

Page. 

Ulva—  Continued, 
lactuca  forma  genauin.  .  .  . 
lactuca  var.  lactuca  
lactuca  var.  latissima  
lactuca  var.  rigida  

Page. 
421 
421 
399,400,401,421,532 
400,421,532 

4" 
420 

Telrasporinae  

453 

TremeUa  difformis.  .  .  . 

447 

TrentepoUia  

468 

plumosa  
prolifera  
rigida  
schrcederi  
Ulvaceae  
Ulvella  

431 

Udotea  
conglutinata  
cyathiformis  

395,431.433,  534 

419 
4»I 
459 
418 
422,423,534 
401,423,426,530,531,532 

464 

426,  434,  529,  530,  532 

431 

Ulotrichales  
Ulotrichiaceas  
Ulva  
decorticaia  
dichotoma  
enteromorpha  
enteromorpha  var 
enteromorpha  var 

418 

422 
393.  397.  398,  4°5>  4i8,  420,  534 

Wildemania 

Zonaria  
flava  
lobata  

395.405.454,535 
•  •  •   377,  395.  454.  455,  510,  530,  53* 
455 

461 

18 

jntesltnalts  20 
lanceolata  20 

tourneforlii  

455 
'.  395.454,530,531,53" 
456,457.458 
4J7.43S 

fasciata  392,399.400.421.  422,  529.  53°.   32 
intestinalis  2° 
lactUCa  392,393,396,398,40I,403»4I9»421,432,424,    29 

varieyata  Kuetzing  
Zoosporece  

